009-3240-008_(39xx_51xx_saos_6.12_configuration)reva

  • Uploaded by: Reno Tk
  • 0
  • 0
  • March 2021
  • PDF

This document was uploaded by user and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this DMCA report form. Report DMCA


Overview

Download & View 009-3240-008_(39xx_51xx_saos_6.12_configuration)reva as PDF for free.

More details

  • Words: 160,306
  • Pages: 798
Loading documents preview...
39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches

Configuration SAOS 6.12 What’s inside... New in this release Configuration fundamentals Configuration management Port management Hardware resource management System timing configuration Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration VLAN management IP management MEF L2 VPN configuration Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration L2 control frame tunneling configuration Quality of Service configuration Multicast services configuration PWE services configuration Error codes

009-3240-008 - Standard Revision A May 2014 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation. All rights reserved.

LEGAL NOTICES THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND TRADE SECRET INFORMATION OF CIENA CORPORATION AND ITS RECEIPT OR POSSESSION DOES NOT CONVEY ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE OR DISCLOSE ITS CONTENTS, OR TO MANUFACTURE, USE, OR SELL ANYTHING THAT IT MAY DESCRIBE. REPRODUCTION, DISCLOSURE, OR USE IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF CIENA CORPORATION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN. EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE THAT THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS COMPLETE AND ACCURATE AT THE TIME OF PUBLISHING; HOWEVER, THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE. While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing CIENA PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice. Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation. All Rights Reserved The material contained in this document is also protected by copyright laws of the United States of America and other countries. It may not be reproduced or distributed in any form by any means, altered in any fashion, or stored in a data base or retrieval system, without express written permission of the Ciena Corporation. Security Ciena® cannot be responsible for unauthorized use of equipment and will not make allowance or credit for unauthorized use or access. Contacting Ciena

Corporate Headquarters

410-694-5700 or 800-921-1144

www.ciena.com

Customer Technical Support/Warranty In North America

1-800-CIENA24 (243-6224) 410-865-4961

In Europe, Middle East, and Africa

800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)

In Asia-Pacific

800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247) +81-3-6367-3989

+44-207-012-5508

+91-124-4340-600 In Caribbean and Latin America Sales and General Information

800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247) 410-865-4944 (USA) 410-694-5700

E-mail: [email protected]

In North America

410-694-5700 or 800-207-3714

E-mail: [email protected]

In Europe

+44-207-012-5500 (UK)

E-mail: [email protected]

In Asia

+81-3-3248-4680 (Japan)

E-mail: [email protected]

In India

+91-124-434-0500

E-mail: [email protected]

In Latin America

011-5255-1719-0220 (Mexico City) E-mail: [email protected]

Training

877-CIENA-TD (243-6283) or 410-865-8996

E-mail: [email protected]

For additional office locations and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena web site at www.ciena.com.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLING OR USING CIENA CORPORATION (“Ciena”) SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR DOCUMENTATION (COLLECTIVELY, THE “EQUIPMENT”). BY INSTALLING OR USING THE EQUIPMENT, YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. 1. Right to Use License; Restrictions. Subject to these terms, and the payment of all applicable license fees, Ciena grants to you, as end user, a non-exclusive license to use the Ciena software (the “Software”) in object code form solely in connection with, and as embedded within, the Equipment,. You shall have the right to use the Software solely for your own internal use and benefit. You may make one copy of the Software and documentation solely for backup and archival purpose, however you must reproduce and affix all copyright and other proprietary rights notices that appear in or on the original. You may not, without Ciena's prior written consent, (i) sublicense, assign, sell, rent, lend, lease, transfer or otherwise distribute the Software; (ii) grant any rights in the Software or documentation not expressly authorized herein; (iii) modify the Software nor provide any third person the means to do the same; (iv) create derivative works, translate, disassemble, recompile, reverse engineer or attempt to obtain the source code of the Software in any way; or (v) alter, destroy, or otherwise remove any proprietary notices or labels on or embedded within the Software or documentation. You acknowledge that this license is subject to Section 365 of the U.S. Bankruptcy Code and requires Ciena's consent to any assignment related to a bankruptcy proceeding. Sole title to the Software and documentation, to any derivative works, and to any associated patents and copyrights, remains with Ciena or its licensors. Ciena reserves to itself and its licensors all rights in the Software and documentation not expressly granted to you. You shall preserve intact any notice of copyright, trademark, logo, legend or other notice of ownership from any original or copies of the Software or documentation. 2. Audit: Upon Ciena's reasonable request, but not more frequently than annually without reasonable cause, you shall permit Ciena to audit the use of the Software at such times as may be mutually agreed upon to ensure compliance with this Agreement. 3. Confidentiality. You agree that you will receive confidential or proprietary information (“Confidential Information”) in connection with the purchase, deployment and use of the Equipment. You will not disclose Confidential Information to any third party without prior written consent of Ciena, will use it only for purposes for which it was disclosed, use your best efforts to prevent and protect the contents of the Software from unauthorized disclosure or use, and must treat it with the same degree of care as you do your own similar information, but with no less than reasonable care. You acknowledge that the design and structure of the Software constitute trade secrets and/or copyrighted materials of Ciena and agree that the Equipment is Confidential Information for purposes of this Agreement. 4. U.S. Government Use. The Software is provided to the Government only with restricted rights and limited rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in FAR Sections 52-227-14 and 52-227-19 or DFARS Section 52.227-7013(C)(1)(ii), as applicable. The Equipment and any accompanying technical data (collectively “Materials”) are commercial within the meaning of applicable Federal acquisition regulations. These Materials were developed fully at private expense. U.S. Government use of the Materials is restricted by this Agreement, and all other U.S. Government use is prohibited. In accordance with FAR 12.212 and DFAR Supplement 227.7202, software delivered to you is commercial computer software and the use of that software is further restricted by this Agreement. 5. Term of License. This license is effective until terminated. Customer may terminate this license at any time by giving written notice to Ciena [or] and destroying or erasing all copies of Software including any documentation. Ciena may terminate this Agreement and your license to the Software immediately by giving you written notice of termination in the event that either (i) you breach any term or condition of this Agreement or (ii) you are wound up other than voluntarily for the purposes of amalgamation or reorganization, have a receiver appointed or enter into liquidation or bankruptcy or analogous process in your home country. Termination shall be without prejudice to any other rights or remedies Ciena may have. In the event of any termination you will have no right to keep or use the Software or any copy of the Software for any purpose and you shall destroy and erase all copies of such Software in its possession or control, and forward written certification to Ciena that all such copies of Software have been destroyed or erased. 6. Compliance with laws. You agree to comply with all applicable laws, including all import regulations, and to obtain all required licenses and permits related to installation and use of Equipment. Software, including technical data, is subject to U.S. export control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries. Customer agrees to comply strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, reexport, or import Software.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

7. Limitation of Liability. ANY LIABILITY OF Ciena SHALL BE LIMITED IN THE AGGREGATE TO THE AMOUNTS PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTATION AND OTHER TORTS. THE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION ALSO APPLY TO ANY THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER OF Ciena. NEITHER Ciena NOR ANY OF ITS THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY INJURY, LOSS OR DAMAGE, WHETHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY LOST PROFITS, CONTRACTS, DATA OR PROGRAMS, AND THE COST OF RECOVERING SUCH DATA OR PROGRAMS, EVEN IF INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN ADVANCE 8. General. Ciena may assign this Agreement to any Ciena affiliate or to a purchaser of the intellectual property rights in the Software, but otherwise neither this Agreement nor any rights hereunder may be assigned nor duties delegated by either party, and any attempt to do so will be void. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Maryland (without regard to the conflict of laws provisions) and shall be enforceable in the courts of Maryland. The U.N. Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply hereto. This Agreement constitutes the complete and exclusive statement of agreement between the parties relating to the license for the Software and supersedes all proposals, communications, purchase orders, and prior agreements, verbal or written, between the parties. If any portion hereof is found to be void or unenforceable, the remaining provisions shall remain in full force and effect.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

v

Publication history

0

May 2014 Revision A Standard First Standard release of this document for SAOS 6.12.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

vi Publication history

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

vii

Contents

0

About this document

xix

New in this release

1-1

Configuration fundamentals

2-1

Ports 2-1 Hardware resources 2-1 System timing 2-2 Link Layer Discovery Protocol 2-2 Virtual Local Area Networks 2-2 IP management 2-3 Metro Ethernet Forum Layer 2 Virtual Private Networks 2-3 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering 2-4 Multiprotocol Label Switching 2-4 Layer 2 control frame tunneling 2-4 Quality of Service 2-6 Multicast services 2-7

Configuration management

3-1

Accessing the CLI 3-1 Configuration files 3-1

List of procedures 3-1 Saving configuration changes 3-3 3-2 Displaying configuration files 3-4 3-3 Augmenting the current configuration 3-5 3-4 Restoring default configurations 3-7 3-5 Setting the default configuration files 3-8 3-6 Displaying the default configuration files 3-9 3-7 Resetting default configuration files to factory default files 3-10

Port management

4-1

Port attributes 4-1 Port loopback 4-5 Port statistics 4-6 Transceivers 4-9 Identification 4-9 Diagnostics 4-10 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

viii Contents

List of procedures 4-1 Setting port attributes 4-13 4-2 Resetting port attributes to default 4-14 4-3 Disabling a port 4-15 4-4 Enabling a port 4-16 4-5 Displaying port attributes 4-17 4-6 Displaying port statistics 4-18 4-7 Monitoring port statistics 4-23 4-8 Clearing current statistics 4-28 4-9 Displaying blade information 4-29 4-10 Displaying port capabilities 4-33 4-11 Displaying port Ethernet configuration 4-35 4-12 Displaying port status 4-36 4-13 Displaying a list of supported optics 4-37 4-14 Displaying transceiver information 4-38 4-15 Determining transceiver speed 4-41 4-16 Tuning XFP transceivers 4-43 4-17 Setting the port connector mode 4-45

Hardware resource management

5-1

List of procedures 5-1 Configuring resources 5-7 5-2 Freeing all accelerated CFM over PBB-TE resources 5-9 5-3 Restoring accelerated CFM over PBB-TE resources to default values 5-11 5-4 Freeing all broadcast containment resources 5-13 5-5 Restoring broadcast containment resources to default values 5-14 5-6 Freeing CFM resources 5-16 5-7 Restoring CFM resources to default values 5-17 5-8 Freeing DHCP relay resources 5-19 5-9 Restoring DHCP relay resources to default values 5-20 5-10 Configuring loss measurement resources 5-22 5-11 Freeing all loss measurement resources 5-24 5-12 Freeing traffic profiling resources 5-25 5-13 Setting traffic profiling resources 5-27 5-14 Restoring traffic profiling resources to default values 5-30 5-15 Freeing virtual circuit statistics resources 5-32 5-16 Restoring virtual circuit statistics resources to default values 5-33 5-17 Configuring virtual switch L2 enhanced transform resources 5-35 5-18 Freeing all virtual switch L2 enhanced transform resources 5-37 5-19 Configuring transport OAM resources 5-38 5-20 Freeing all transport OAM resources 5-40 5-21 Displaying resource configuration information 5-41 5-22 Resolving resource configuration validation errors 5-42 5-23 Addressing classifier resource allocation too small for current configuration error 5-43 5-24 Displaying resource configuration in the configuration file 5-45

System timing configuration

6-1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Contents ix Synchronous Ethernet 6-2 IEEE 1588 version 2 Precision Time Protocol 6-4 External timing interfaces 6-4 BITS 6-4 GPS 6-5 Clock selection algorithm 6-5 Quality level value definition 6-7 Frequency, phase and time-of-day configuration rules 6-11 Holdover interval 6-12 PTP clock type 6-12 Network configuration examples 6-13 Procedures 6-17

List of procedures 6-1 Enabling and disabling synchronization 6-19 6-2 Configuring synchronization 6-20 6-3 Configuring the PTP timing global attributes 6-23 6-4 Configuring global attributes for PTP input timing 6-25 6-5 Configuring global attributes for PTP output timing 6-26 6-6 Configuring global attributes for GPS output timing 6-27 6-7 Configuring SyncE input references 6-28 6-8 Configuring BITS input references 6-30 6-9 Configuring PTP input references 6-33 6-10 Configuring GPS input references 6-35 6-11 Configuring TDM input references 6-37 6-12 Configuring SyncE output references 6-39 6-13 Configuring BITS output reference 6-40 6-14 Configuring PTP output timing references 6-42 6-15 Configuring GPS output references 6-43 6-16 Configuring protection-groups 6-44 6-17 Clearing timing statistics 6-52 6-18 Displaying information for synchronization 6-53 6-19 Displaying SyncE information 6-57 6-20 Displaying BITS information 6-60 6-21 Displaying PTP information 6-63 6-22 Displaying GPS information 6-69 6-23 Displaying TDM information 6-72 6-24 Displaying frequency information 6-74 6-25 Displaying phase information 6-76 6-26 Displaying time-of-day information 6-78 6-27 Displaying protection-group information 6-80 6-28 Sample configuration: system timing by means of SyncE and PTP 6-83 6-29 Sample configuration: system timing by means of PTP Boundary Clock 6-85

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration

7-1

LLDP TLVs 7-3 Feature Benefits 7-6

List of procedures 7-1 Configuring LLDP 7-8 7-2 Configuring TLV transmission 7-10 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

x Contents 7-3 7-4

Displaying LLDP neighbors 7-12 Enabling and disabling SNMP notifications 7-13

VLAN management

8-1

VLANs and traffic flow 8-1 Acceptable Frame Types 8-1 Port VLAN ID 8-2 VLAN Ingress Filter 8-2 Egress Untagged VLAN 8-3 Behavior summary 8-4 VLAN/port configuration 8-4 VLAN translation 8-5

List of procedures 8-1 Changing the TPID stamp for a VLAN 8-7 8-2 Configuring a VLAN/port pair to ingress tagged traffic and egress tagged traffic 8-8 8-3 Configuring a VLAN/port pair to ingress untagged traffic and egress untagged traffic 8-10 8-4 Changing tag status 8-11 8-5 Configuring hybrid traffic 8-13 8-6 Emulating a tagged Ethernet port 8-14 8-7 Translating a single NNI VLAN 8-15 8-8 Translating a dual NNI VLAN 8-17

IP management

9-1

IPv6 9-1 IPv6 address format 9-1 IP address usage 9-2 EVC ping 9-5 Local EVC ping 9-7

List of procedures 9-1 Creating interfaces 9-11 9-2 Deleting an IP or loopback interface 9-14 9-3 Modifying an IP or loopback interface 9-15 9-4 Disabling an IP interface 9-16 9-5 Enabling an IP interface 9-17 9-6 Configuring IPv6 interfaces manually 9-18 9-7 Displaying an IP interface 9-20 9-8 Adding an IP route 9-24 9-9 Removing an IP route 9-25 9-10 Displaying the routing table 9-26 9-11 Displaying FIB entries 9-27 9-12 Enabling Layer 3 switching 9-29 9-13 Disabling Layer 3 switching 9-30 9-14 Displaying the status of Layer 3 switching 9-31 9-15 Clearing all FIB or AIB entries 9-32 9-16 Enabling logging of FIB or AIB events 9-33 9-17 Displaying FIB information 9-34

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Contents xi 9-18 9-19 9-20 9-21 9-22 9-23 9-24 9-25 9-26

Adding a static ARP entry 9-35 Removing static ARP entries 9-36 Configuring EVC ping for use case A Configuring EVC ping for use case B Configuring EVC ping for use case C Configuring EVC ping for use case D Configuring EVC ping for use case E Displaying static ARP entries 9-60 Displaying the AIB table 9-61

9-37 9-42 9-46 9-50 9-55

MEF L2 VPN configuration

10-1

Overview 10-1 Ethernet Service Types 10-2 E-Line Service Type 10-2 E-LAN Service Type 10-3 E-Tree Service Type 10-4 E-Access Service Type 10-5 Q-in-Q encapsulation 10-6 EPL and EVPL Provider Bridge configuration 10-6 Provider VLAN 10-7 Reserved VLAN 10-8 Virtual switch 10-8 Virtual circuits 10-9 Frame flooding behavior 10-10 Q-in-Q Ethertype 10-11 EVPL CoS 10-11 Virtual Switch CoS Policies 10-12 Virtual switch Member CoS Policy Override 10-12 EVPL Bundling 10-13 VLAN translation 10-14 Ingress push; egress pop (i-push,e-pop) 10-14 Ingress push; egress pop and stamp (i-push,e-pop:stamp) 10-15 Ingress stamp; egress match, pop, and stamp (i-stamp:push,e-matchpop:stamp) 10-15 Private forwarding groups 10-17 L2-based PFG Forwarding policy sets 10-20 Port-based PFG egress profile 10-22 Port membership 10-24 Upgrading and downgrading a device 10-25 External Network-to-Network Interface Hairpin 10-26 Sub-port interfaces 10-26

List of procedures 10-1 Creating an EPL provider bridge 10-30 10-2 Creating an EVPL provider bridge 10-32 10-3 Configuring the fixed encapsulation priority value 10-34 10-4 Setting the CoS policy when adding VS members 10-35 10-5 Handling ingress untagged frames 10-36 10-6 Setting the L2 transform action on a port 10-38 10-7 Creating an i-push, e-pop Q-in-Q VS configuration 10-39 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

xii Contents 10-8 Creating a VS configuration with UNI only with bundled CVIDs 10-41 10-9 Creating an i-push, e-pop: stamp configuration 10-43 10-10 Creating an i-stamp:push,e-match-pop:stamp configuration 10-46 10-11 Configuring L2 PFGs 10-49 10-12 Configuring port-based PFGs 10-53 10-13 Configuring egress profile with traffic types 10-57 10-14 Disabling the PFG feature 10-60 10-15 Displaying the configuration of EVPL VS members 10-61 10-16 Displaying virtual switches 10-62 10-17 Displaying PFG information 10-63 10-18 Configuring EPL and EVPL for E-Access service types 10-65 10-19 Configuring CFM for E-Access service types 10-68 10-20 Configuring HIM for E-Access service types 10-71 10-21 Configuring L2 Control Frame Tunneling for E-Access service types 10-73 10-22 Configuring RFC 2544 Benchmarking for E-Access 10-74 Example 10-77 10-23 Configuring ENNI hairpin switching using sub-ports 10-79 10-24 Displaying statistics for sub-port interfaces 10-82 10-25 Clearing statistics for sub-port interfaces 10-84

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation

11-1

VLAN Tagging 11-2 Q-in-Q 11-2 MAC Header Encapsulation 11-3 PBB-TE Tunnels 11-4 Connectivity Fault Management 11-7 PBB-TE Dual Homing 11-9 Tunnel Pairing and Synchronization 11-9 Benefits 11-10

List of procedures 11-1 Verifying that a port can participate in PBB-TE 11-12 11-2 Switching from non-native to native PBB-TE support 11-13 11-3 Enabling tunnel synchronization 11-14 11-4 Disabling tunnel synchronization 11-15 11-5 Configuring PBB-TE 11-16 11-6 Releasing reserved BVIDs 11-33 11-7 Displaying PBB-TE information 11-34

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

12-1

Overview 12-3 MPLS label operations 12-4 Implicit NULL label 12-5 Explicit NULL label 12-5 Router alert label 12-5 MPLS label format 12-5 MPLS-Traffic Engineering 12-6 MPLS-Transport Profile 12-6

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Contents xiii Interfaces 12-6 Tunnels 12-7 Next-hop diversity 12-10 Tunnel FEC for static LSP 12-11 Tunnel profiles 12-12 CoS profiles 12-12 Fast ReRoute profiles 12-12 MPLS L2 VPN services 12-13 VPWS 12-15 VPLS 12-16 H-VPLS 12-17 VPLS membership and MAC learning 12-18 Virtual circuits 12-19 Comparing raw and tagged PW type for virtual circuits 12-19 Virtual circuit connectivity verification profile configuration 12-22 Routing protocols 12-23 OSPF 12-23 IS-IS 12-24 Signaling protocols 12-25 RSVP-TE 12-25 LDP 12-28 Fault Management 12-28 Connectivity Fault Management over MPLS 12-28 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) 12-29 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and Link Down Indication (LDI) 12-29 Complementary protocols 12-29 LSP ping 12-29 LSP traceroute 12-29 Benefits 12-29 Vendor interoperability 12-29 Platform requirements and capabilities 12-30 Remote Management for MPLS 12-33 Task flow 12-34

List of procedures 12-1 Installing the MPLS license on 39XX/51XX 12-40 12-2 Configuring IP interfaces on 39XX/51XX 12-42 12-3 Disabling RSTP and MSTP 12-43 12-4 Configuring OSPF routing protocol 12-44 12-5 Configuring IS-IS routing protocol 12-47 12-6 Configuring RSVP-TE 12-52 12-7 Configuring label ranges 12-56 12-8 Displaying label ranges 12-58 12-9 Configuring dynamic ingress TE tunnels 12-60 12-10 Configuring dynamic ingress uni-directional TP tunnels 12-61 12-11 Configuring static transit uni-directional TP tunnels 12-63 12-12 Configuring static uni-directional ingress TP tunnels 12-64 12-13 Configuring static uni-directional egress TP tunnels 12-66 12-14 Configuring static TE tunnels 12-67 12-15 Configuring co-routed TP tunnels 12-69 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

xiv Contents 12-16 12-17 12-18 12-19 12-20 12-21 12-22 12-23 12-24 12-25 12-26 12-27 12-28 12-29 12-30 12-31 12-32 12-33 12-34 12-35 12-36 12-37 12-38 12-39 12-40 12-41 12-42 12-43 12-44 12-45 12-46 12-47 12-48

Configuring static bi-directional ingress-associated TE tunnels 12-73 Configuring CoS profiles for MPLS tunnels 12-74 Configuring CoS profiles for MPLS tunnels 12-75 Configuring a dynamic ingress TE tunnel with FRR 12-76 Switching over to the backup GMPLS TP tunnel 12-78 Switching over to the backup TE tunnel 12-79 Switching over to protection pseudowire 12-80 Displaying MPLS TE-tunnel information 12-81 Displaying GMPLS TP tunnel information 12-85 Configuring LDP 12-89 Configuring dynamic virtual circuits 12-91 Configuring static virtual circuits 12-94 Displaying virtual circuits 12-98 Configuring virtual circuit connectivity verification profiles 12-101 Displaying a VCCV profile 12-102 Deleting a VCCV profile 12-103 Allocating resources for an MPLS management virtual switch (3916, 3930 and 3931 platforms) 12-104 Creating an MPLS management virtual switch 12-105 Displaying remote interface configuration 12-107 Changing the management virtual switch 12-108 Running ping for RSVP-TE tunnels 12-110 Running traceroute for RSVP-TE tunnels 12-111 Running ping for MPLS tunnels 12-112 Running ping for virtual circuits 12-114 Running a traceroute 12-115 Configuring a 39XX/51XX LSR 12-117 Configuring a 39XX/51XX VPWS 12-120 Configuring a 39XX/51XX VPLS 12-124 Configuring a 39XX/51XX H-VPLS 12-128 H-VPLS configuration example mixed platform 12-132 VPLS with CFM configuration example 3916 and 3960 12-140 G.8032 and VPLS interoperability example 12-144 MPLS-TP configuration example 12-149

L2 control frame tunneling configuration

13-1

Overview 13-1 Tunnel method 13-6 Configuration 13-8

List of procedures 13-1 Adding and removing untagged L2 control frame classification 13-9 13-2 Enabling and disabling L2 control frame tunneling 13-10 13-3 Adding and removing control protocols 13-11 13-4 Setting the disposition of control protocols 13-13 13-5 Setting L2 control frame tunneling attributes 13-14 13-6 Displaying enabled L2 control frame tunneling instances 13-15 13-7 Displaying the L2 control frame classification for a port 13-17 13-8 Displaying L2 control frame tunneling configuration in the configuration file 13-18 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Contents xv 13-9 Configuring L2 control frame tunneling 13-19 13-10 Configuring L2 control frame tunneling mode for MEF CE 2.0 compliance 13-25

Quality of Service configuration

14-1

Class of Services (CoS) policies and mapping 14-2 Traffic profiling 14-4 Determining classification attributes 14-4 Determining Metering Attributes 14-6 Traffic profiling with hierarchical ingress metering 14-7 Advanced classification mode 14-8 Congestion management 14-10 Creating and modifying sRED profiles 14-10 Creating and modifying sWRED profiles on the 3960 14-11 Creating and modifying sWRED profiles on the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 5142, 5150, and 5160 14-13 Egress scheduling 14-14 Egress shaping 14-15

List of procedures 14-1 Configuring Class of Services (CoS) policies on a port 14-17 14-2 Displaying the CoS policy and mapping on a port 14-19 14-3 Creating a resolved CoS map 14-20 14-4 Modifying a resolved CoS map 14-22 14-5 Setting the resolved CoS map for a port 14-23 14-6 Deleting a custom R-CoS map 14-24 14-7 Displaying resolved CoS maps 14-25 14-8 Creating a frame CoS map 14-27 14-9 Modifying a frame CoS map 14-29 14-10 Deleting a frame CoS map 14-30 14-11 Setting the frame CoS map for a port 14-31 14-12 Displaying frame CoS maps 14-32 14-13 Configuring ingress R-CoS to egress queue mapping 14-33 14-14 Displaying an R-CoS map 14-34 14-15 Applying R-CoS policies and mapping in a VLAN 14-35 14-16 Applying R-CoS policies and mapping in a virtual switch 14-37 14-17 Enabling traffic profiling 14-40 14-18 Setting the traffic profiling provisioning mode 14-41 14-19 Displaying traffic profiling information 14-42 14-20 Setting traffic profiling port attributes 14-44 14-21 Configuring a traffic profiling standard profile 14-47 14-22 Configuring per-port standard traffic profiling 14-53 14-23 Configuring per-port and per-VLAN standard traffic profiling 14-54 14-24 Configuring hierarchical VLAN traffic profiles 14-56 14-25 Configuring hierarchical port traffic profiles 14-61 14-26 Configuring VS classification for standard traffic profiles 14-63 14-27 Configuring VS classification for HIM traffic profiles 14-64 14-28 Displaying standard traffic profiles 14-65 14-29 Clearing statistics for all standard profiles 14-67 14-30 Displaying statistics for all standard profiles 14-68 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

xvi Contents 14-31 14-32 14-33 14-34 14-35 14-36 14-37 14-38 14-39 14-40 14-41 14-42 14-43 14-44 14-45 14-46 14-47 14-48 14-49 14-50 14-51 14-52

Displaying throughput statistics for a traffic profile 14-69 Setting the per-port hierarchical traffic-profiling mode 14-70 Setting the child mode 14-71 Creating an sRED profile 14-72 Modifying an sRED profile 14-73 Creating an sWRED profile 14-74 Modifying an sWRED profile 14-75 Creating an sWRED profile 14-76 Modifying an sWRED profile 14-77 Displaying custom congestion avoidance profiles 14-78 Updating the congestion avoidance profile for an egress port queue 14-80 Clearing the congestion avoidance profile to the default for an egress port queue 14-81 Displaying the congestion avoidance profile for an egress port queue 14-82 Deleting a custom congestion avoidance profile 14-84 Renaming custom congestion avoidance profile 14-85 Changing the algorithm of an egress port scheduler 14-86 Changing the weight of the scheduler for a queue 14-87 Displaying queue weight and scheduler algorithms 14-88 Configuring egress port and queue shaping 14-89 Displaying egress port queue configuration 14-92 Displaying egress port queue statistics 14-94 Configuring frame bandwidth calculation 14-95

Multicast services configuration

15-1

IGMP snooping 15-3 Enhanced features 15-4 Multicast operations 15-5 Multicast forwarding domains 15-5 Multicast interface 15-6 Multicast traffic filters 15-6 Multicast servers and routers 15-7 Server topology 15-7 IGMP query engine 15-8 Router IP address range 15-9 Channel stream 15-9 Statistics 15-11 Multicast-services attributes 15-13

List of procedures 15-1 Configuring a VLAN as a multicast L2 forwarding domain 15-15 15-2 Configuring channel streams 15-16 15-3 Configuring IGMP forking with VLAN translation 15-18 15-4 Configuring a multicast router topology 15-20 15-5 Configuring a multicast server topology 15-23 15-6 Configuring multicast servers with redundant routers 15-27 15-7 Configuring redundant query engines 15-32 15-8 Clearing multicast service statistics 15-36 15-9 Displaying multicast services information 15-37

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Contents xvii

PWE services configuration

16-1

List of procedures 16-1 Configuring PWE services 16-6 16-2 Configuring TDM ports 16-7 16-3 Configuring TDM profiles 16-11 16-4 Configuring attachment circuits 16-13 16-5 Configuring virtual circuits 16-17 16-6 Configuring MPLS 16-25 16-7 Configuring Layer 2 virtual circuits 16-26 16-8 Configuring virtual switch cross-connections 16-27 16-9 Displaying TDM port information 16-28 16-10 Displaying attachment circuit information 16-30 16-11 Displaying virtual circuit information 16-31 16-12 Displaying virtual switch information 16-32 16-13 Displaying virtual switch cross-connection information 16-33 16-14 Configuring SAToP services over 802.1Q Metro Ethernet 16-34 16-15 Configuring SAToP services over QinQ Metro Ethernet 16-37 16-16 Configuring SAToP pseudowire over MPLS network 16-40

Error codes

17-1

Traffic profiling error codes 17-1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

xviii Contents

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

xix

About this document

0

This manual describes how to configure system software on 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation switches. This system software is based on a common Service Aware Operating System (SAOS) code base designed to deliver consistent benefits across all Ethernet delivery, aggregation, and distribution configurations. Note: This system software cannot be installed on any other Service Delivery Switches, Service Concentration Switches or Service Aggregation Switches. This manual provides information and examples for use in configuring system software on any platform on which it is installed. It includes an explanation of the key features supported by the devices and provides example configurations for these features. Although these examples are useful in configuration, they are not meant to be used as a configuration template.

Conventions used in this document Hyperlinks are indicated by blue text in this document. In procedures, the following text conventions are used: •

courier text, for system responses



italic text, for expected results



bold text, for user input

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

xx About this document

Command syntax A variety of symbols are used to indicate CLI command syntax. These symbols describe how to enter a command. They are not entered as part of the command itself. The following table summarizes command syntax symbols. Symbol

Description

<>

Encloses a variable or literal value that must be specified. Some examples include: server priority dns description <String[31]> For server , the attribute could be entered as server 10.10.11.100 or server www.ciena.com. With priority the text within <> indicates that 1 - 7 are valid values. In the example of dns , either the literal value of on or off is valid, such as dns on. For description <String[31]>, any string of up to 31 characters is entered.

{}

Encloses a required value or list of required arguments. One or more values or arguments can be specified. For example, in the syntax: cfm mip create {vlan } {port } [level ] The vlan and port arguments are required. The level argument is optional.

|

Separates mutually exclusive items in a list, only one of which can be entered. For example, in the syntax: dhcp client options set subnet Either on or off must be specified, for example: dhcp client options set subnet on

[]

Encloses an optional value or a list of optional arguments. One or more values or arguments can be specified. For example, in the syntax: arp show [interface ] You can enter a value for interface or not. For example: arp show

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

About this document xxi Symbol

Description

{ [ ], [ ], [ ] }

Specifies a list of optional items where at least one must be specified.



Indicates the example has been abbreviated and that the actual display contains more information.

*

Indicates zero or more occurrences of what is preceding.

Documents in the 39XX/51XX documentation suite For descriptions of documents in the 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches documentation suite, see 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals (009-3220-006).

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

xxii About this document

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

1-1

New in this release

1-

The following sections summarize documentation changes in Configuration (009-3220-008) for new software features introduced with SAOS 6.12.

1588v2 Boundary Clock The following sections were updated: •

“System timing configuration” on page 6-1



“IEEE 1588 version 2 Precision Time Protocol” on page 6-4



“Clock selection algorithm” on page 6-5



“Quality level value definition” on page 6-7



“Frequency, phase and time-of-day configuration rules” on page 6-11



“Procedures” on page 6-17

The following sections were added: •

“Holdover interval” on page 6-12



“PTP clock type” on page 6-12

The following procedures were updated: •

“Configuring synchronization” on page 6-20



“Configuring the PTP timing global attributes” on page 6-23



“Configuring global attributes for PTP input timing” on page 6-25



“Configuring global attributes for PTP output timing” on page 6-26



“Configuring global attributes for GPS output timing” on page 6-27



“Configuring PTP input references” on page 6-33



“Configuring GPS input references” on page 6-35



“Configuring PTP output timing references” on page 6-42



“Configuring GPS output references” on page 6-43



“Configuring protection-groups” on page 6-44



“Clearing timing statistics” on page 6-52



“Displaying information for synchronization” on page 6-53

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

1-2 New in this release



“Displaying PTP information” on page 6-63



“Displaying GPS information” on page 6-69



“Displaying TDM information” on page 6-72



“Displaying frequency information” on page 6-74



“Displaying phase information” on page 6-76



“Displaying protection-group information” on page 6-80

The following procedure was added: •

“Displaying time-of-day information” on page 6-78

Support MEF 26.1 ENNI Hairpin The following section was added: •

“External Network-to-Network Interface Hairpin” on page 10-26

The following procedures were added: •

“Configuring ENNI hairpin switching using sub-ports” on page 10-79



“Displaying statistics for sub-port interfaces” on page 10-82



“Clearing statistics for sub-port interfaces” on page 10-84

Static PW status signaling The following section was updated: •

“Primary virtual circuit attributes” on page 12-21

The following procedure was updated: •

“Configuring static virtual circuits” on page 12-94

MAC Withdraw signaling over static PW The following section was updated: •

“VPLS membership and MAC learning” on page 12-18

EVC Ping/IP interface The following section was updated: •

“IP management” on page 2-3

Documentation enhancement The following sections were added: •

“Ethernet Service Types” on page 10-2

The following procedures were added: •

“Configuring EPL and EVPL for E-Access service types” on page 10-65



“Configuring CFM for E-Access service types” on page 10-68



“Configuring HIM for E-Access service types” on page 10-71

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

New in this release 1-3



“Configuring L2 Control Frame Tunneling for E-Access service types” on page 10-73



“Configuring RFC 2544 Benchmarking for E-Access” on page 10-74

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

1-4 New in this release

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

2-1

Configuration fundamentals

2-

This chapter provides an overview of the following components for building networks and accounting: •

“Ports”



“Hardware resources”



“System timing”



“Link Layer Discovery Protocol”



“Virtual Local Area Networks”



“IP management”



“Metro Ethernet Forum Layer 2 Virtual Private Networks”



“Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering”



“Multiprotocol Label Switching”



“Layer 2 control frame tunneling”



“Quality of Service”



“Multicast services”

Ports Physical ports provide connectivity to other devices. Logical ports are created when multiple physical ports are joined in a Link Aggregation Group (LAG). Physical ports provide connectivity to other devices, which is essential for any switching device. To aggregate bandwidth and provide link redundancy between two devices, physical ports are added to a Link Aggregation Group (LAG). The port management commands provide the ability to configure ports and troubleshoot connectivity.

Hardware resources The system assigns hardware resources (classifier, meter, and counter resource types) for various software features. Depending upon the feature, you can reassign these resources to provide additional resources for other features.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

2-2 Configuration fundamentals

This customized resource management is supported for the following features: •

Broadcast containment



CFM



DHCP relay



Traffic profiling



Virtual circuit statistics



Virtual switch Layer 2 enhanced transforms



Transport OAM

System timing System timing recovers and distributes frequency, phase and time-of-day (ToD) information in order to maintain synchronization between network elements. System timing comprises: •

Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE)



IEEE version 2 Precision Time Protocol (PTP)



external interfaces, which comprise: — Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS) — Global Positioning System (GPS)



Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) line timing



Pseduowire emulation (PWE)

Link Layer Discovery Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) allows network equipment, for example, stations, switches, bridges, routers, to advertise their parameters for network topology discovery and management. Traditional network management protocols, such as SNMP, running at key locations, use layer 3 protocols to identify the devices connected to the network. The Link Layer Discovery Protocol is a layer 2 protocol, allowing precise discovery of the physical-link topology of the network. Devices act as LLDP agents, which drastically increases the network discovery performance of SNMP applications, as well as any system capable of accessing standard LLDP MIBs.

Virtual Local Area Networks Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) are used to group resources that have a common set of requirements, regardless of where they are located physically. They also allow ports on a device to be grouped in order to limit the distribution of unicast, multicast, and broadcast traffic. For example, flooded 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Configuration fundamentals 2-3

traffic originating from a particular VLAN can be limited to only other ports belonging to that VLAN. VLANs allow traffic on the same physical connection to be divided into separate services. These services can then be further divided into groups within each service. Note: VLAN configuration is supported for compatibility with Enterprise VLAN applications. For Carrier Ethernet applications, use virtual switch configuration as described in “MEF L2 VPN configuration” on page 10-1.

IP management IP management allows you to manage the switch using IPv4 and/or IPv6. IP management applications are: •

file transfer (xftp)



software upgrade



SNMP



syslog



RADIUS



TACACS+



NTP



SSH



Telnet



Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol (TWAMP)



RFC 2544

You can configure an IP interface with one IPv4 address and up to two IPv6 global or link local addresses. An IP interface, including local and remote interfaces, can be created or configured with one IPv4 address and up to two IPv6 addresses. A link-local addresses is allowed. Link-local addresses can be duplicated if they are not configured on the same IP interface. An IP interface can be created with an IPv4 address or an IPv6 address specified, or with the auto-ipv6 option. Auto-generated SLAAC addresses and link-local addresses are available for use when the auto-ipv6 option is chosen. Up to 16 auto-generated SLAAC addresses can be instantiated when connected to a remote router. A default link-local address is also always available for use.

Metro Ethernet Forum Layer 2 Virtual Private Networks Layer 2 (L2) Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) support the three Ethernet Service Types defined by the Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF) as: •

E-Line: point-to-point service among the same service provider

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

2-4 Configuration fundamentals



E-LAN: multiple point service



E-Tree: point-to-multipoint service



E-Access: point-to-point service among different service providers

These services are defined by the configuration of port and VLAN based Ethernet Private Line/LAN (EPL) or Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL). The customer perspective is that their connection to the service provider is a direct connection to a private line or LAN between their sites. L2 VPNs transport Ethernet/802.3 and VLAN tagged traffic between multiple sites that belong to the same L2 broadcast domain. These services are deployed over Ethernet using an extension of 802.1Q, called Q-in-Q.

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) allows providers to create point-to-point, primary and backup Ethernet tunnels and specify the path that traffic will take across their Ethernet metro networks. These paths reserve appropriate bandwidth and support the provisioned QoS metrics. However, PBB-TE is unique in that it actually disables some Ethernet features in order to accomplish its goal of delivering traffic.

Multiprotocol Label Switching Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) is a protocol that allows different networks to converge and appear to be a single autonomous network. MPLS can be used to build seamless and consistent Layer 2 (L2) Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) between two or more remote sites traversing many different physical networks. The customer perspective is that their connection to the service provider is a direct connection using a private Local Area Network (LAN) between geographically separated sites.

Layer 2 control frame tunneling A device identifies the associated protocol of L2 control frame based upon the Media Access Control Destination Address (MAC DA) and other information within the frame. Depending upon the state of processing, L2 control frames can be in three forms: •

untagged: standards-based definition of the protocol’s control frame. In this form, the frame does not have a VLAN tag, but does have the protocol specific MAC DA. Depending upon the protocol, it can have a specific Ethertype value and other information. Typically, control frames in this format are received from the subscriber facing interface.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Configuration fundamentals 2-5



transparent (tagged): one or more 802.1 VLAN tags have been added to transform the frame, and the protocol specific MAC DA is left intact. This form occurs when a control frame is received from a subscriber facing interface, encapsulated as a data frame, and then forwarded from a network facing interface for transport through the provider network.



L2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT): standard MAC DA has been transformed to the L2PT special MAC DA. The frame’s original Mac DA is replaced with a configurable L2PT MAC address. The L2PT DA MAC can be configured with a valid Multicast MAC address. The default system L2PT MAC is the Generic Bridging PDU Tunneling (GBPT) MAC of 01:00:0C:CD:CD:CD:D0. It is not recommended to use L2PT MAC belonging to the following MAC address blocks: — L2 Slow Protocol Block: 01:80:C2:XX:XX:XX — ISO 9542 Address: 09:00:2B:00:00:04/05 — IEEE802.5 Block: 03:00:00:XX:XX:XX — IPv4 Multicast Block: 01:00:5E:XX:XX:XX — IPv6 Multicast Block: 33:33:XX:XX:XX:XX

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

2-6 Configuration fundamentals

Quality of Service Quality of Service (QoS) refers to the management of bandwidth to ensure that network traffic is allocated the desired amount of network resources. Table 2-1 lists mechanisms for managing bandwidth. Table 2-1 Mechanisms for managing bandwidth Mechanism

Description

Class of Services (CoS) policies and mapping

CoS policies and mapping comprise the following: • Resolved CoS: applies a Resolved CoS Policy and Resolved CoS Map on ingress. Optionally, remarks the frame’s Layer 2 priority and color based upon the mapping. Assigns traffic to egress CoS queues based upon Resolved CoS values. Ingress coloring influences both traffic profiling and congestion avoidance processing. Traffic profiling meters are now "color-aware" as of release 6.8.0. These meters respond to ingress R-Color, but do not respond to ingress R-CoS mappings. In release 6.9.1 and later, you can configure whether a meter is color blind or color aware per traffic profile. • Egress Frame CoS Policy: enables an egress frame CoS policy. Note: This setting is not available on 3940, and 5140 devices. • Frame CoS Mapping - applies a R-CoS and R-Color to frame Priority Code Point (PCP)/Layer 2 (L2) CoS 802.1D priority and Discard Eligibility Indicator (DEI)/Canonical Format Indicator (CFI) mapping that remarks egressing L2 frames.

Traffic profiling and Traffic profiling with hierarchical ingress metering

Provides ingress traffic classification and metering.

Congestion management

Method for managing CoS queue traffic when congestion occurs on egress.

Note: To configure traffic profiling, you need to install the Advanced Ethernet license key. To obtain the Advanced Ethernet license key, contact Ciena Sales.

Note: To enable configurable congestion avoidance, you need to install the Advanced Ethernet license key. To obtain the Advanced Ethernet license key, contact Ciena Sales. Egress scheduling

Determines the order in which the physical queues are processed.

Egress shaping

Controls bandwidth for taking frames out of queues at egress

Configurable frame bandwidth calculation

Configure whether to use the inter-frame-gap (IFG) in the calculations for broadcast containment, ingress metering and egress shaping.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Configuration fundamentals 2-7

Multicast services Traditional Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) was designed for environments that have a low volume of multicast packets and no real-time traffic requirements for processing IGMP messages. Ciena’s IGMP implementation was designed for networks where multicast services are critical, such as networks delivering IP broadcast video. Devices employ enhanced IGMP snooping and various filters to limit multicast streams and assure their timely delivery. The following network elements support 1023 multicast groups: •

3916



3930



3931



3932



3940



3960



5140



5142



5150



5160

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

2-8 Configuration fundamentals

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

3-1

Configuration management

3-

This chapter provides explanations for implementing the basic set up of a device and describes the various options available to configure it, including: •

“Accessing the CLI” on page 3-1



“Configuration files” on page 3-1

This chapter provides the procedures for configuration management.

Accessing the CLI To access CLI commands, connect to the device by establishing a Telnet session or through direct connection to the serial console port located on the front of the control module. For related procedures, see 39xx/51xx R6.11 Administration and Security (009-3220-007).

Configuration files A device can store multiple device configuration files. However, only one configuration file can be active at a time. By default, configuration information is saved to a file called startup-config. The startup-config file is also the default load file. The parameters defined in the startup-config file are applied when the device reboots (unless an alternate file is specified). The current running configurations on a device are not saved to a configuration file unless specifically saved. This includes configuration changes made using the CLI or SNMP. If a device is rebooted without saving the configuration, all changes are lost. This chapter provides the following procedures: •

“Saving configuration changes” on page 3-3



“Displaying configuration files” on page 3-4



“Augmenting the current configuration” on page 3-5



“Restoring default configurations” on page 3-7



“Setting the default configuration files” on page 3-8

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

3-2 Configuration management



“Displaying the default configuration files” on page 3-9



“Resetting default configuration files to factory default files” on page 3-10

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Configuration management 3-3

Procedure 3-1 Saving configuration changes In order to permanently save configuration changes, you must save the running configuration to a configuration file. To save the running configuration, use the configuration save command. By default, the command saves the current configuration to the default configuration file, startup-config. By saving alternate versions of command files, you can store multiple configuration files for running different configurations of the system. For example, you can save configuration to an alternate file as a backup to restore to a previous configuration or you can store a configuration file for configuring another device of the same family. Note: If the running configuration has not been saved, an asterisk is displayed in the CLI prompt, such as: *>. When you save the configuration, the asterisk is removed. Step

Action

To save the running configuration 1

Save the running configuration: configuration save

To save to an alternate filename 2

Save the configuration to an alternate filename: configuration save filename where filename

is the configuration file name. —end—

Example The following example saves the default configuration file. configuration save

The following example saves to an alternate filename. configuration save filename myConfig

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

3-4 Configuration management

Procedure 3-2 Displaying configuration files Display configuration files. Step

Action

1

Display the configuration: configuration show [line-numbered] [differences-fromsaved] where line-numbered

displays with line numbers.

differences-from- displays changes since last saved. saved 2

Search the configuration file: configuration search file <String>] [lines ] {string <String>} where file <String>]

is the filename (no path).

lines string <String>

is the search string. —end—

Example The following example displays the differences between the running configuration and the saved configuration file. > configuration show differences-from-saved diff /flash0/config/Mcast_Aggs_DG /ram/65700.out 4,6c4,6 < ! Created: Mon May 5 14:04:02 2008 --> ! Created: Mon May 5 14:09:04 2008

The following example displays sections of a configuration file containing a specific string. > configuration search string dhcp dhcp client disable dhcp client set interface local

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Configuration management 3-5

Procedure 3-3 Augmenting the current configuration You can add configuration commands from a file to the current configuration with the configuration augment command. By default, the commands are added from a specified file stored on the file system at /flash0/config. Note: If you want to apply the added commands to the default startup command file, you need to save the configuration with the configuration save command. Step

Action

1

Augment the current configuration with a file: configuration augment {filename <String>} [server ] {default-tftp-server} {defaultftp-server} {default-server} {default-sftp-server} [sftp-server ] [tftp-server ] [ftp-server ] [login-id <String[32]>] [password <Password String>] [secret <String[256]>] where filename <String> is the configuration file name. server

is the FTP server.

default-tftpserver

indicates that the default TFTP server is used.

default-ftp-server indicates that the default FTP server is used. default-server

indicates that the default xFTP server is used.

default-sftpserver

indicates that the default SFTP server is used.

sftp-server

is the SFTP.

tftp-server

is the TFTP server.

ftp-server

is the FTP server.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

3-6 Configuration management where login-id <String[32]>

is the FTP/SFTP username.

password <Password String>

enter the password in clear text.

secret <String[256]>

sets the password using a pre-encrypted string. —end—

Example The following example adds configuration commands to the configuration. configuration augment filename /users/testuser/ myConfigAdd.txt default-server WORKING: TFTP file transfer in progress /users/testuser/myConfigA 100% |******************************************************| 70 0:00:00 ETA

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Configuration management 3-7

Procedure 3-4 Restoring default configurations You can •

reset configuration to user defaults



reset the device to factory defaults

After running any of the commands to activate an alternative configuration, you have 10 seconds to cancel. To cancel, press Ctrl+C.

CAUTION Loss of Configuration Information

When you reset a device to its factory default settings, all configuration and file system changes are lost, including saved configuration files and log files. Software License Keys that were previously installed are not removed from the device.

Step

Action

To reset configuration to user defaults 1

Reset configuration to user defaults: configuration reset-to-user-config [filename ] where filename

is the configuration file name.

To restore the device to factory defaults 2

Restore the device to factory defaults: configuration reset-to-factory-defaults —end—

Example The following example resets the configuration to user defaults. configuration reset-to-user-config filename myConfig

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

3-8 Configuration management

Procedure 3-5 Setting the default configuration files You can set alternate configuration files as the default save file so that when a configuration save is performed, the changes will be saved to the alternate configuration file. When the device is rebooted, it will load the default-load file, which may or may not be the same file as the default-save file. However, when the device is rebooted it will load the startup-config file. You can •

set the default file for saving configuration



set the default file for loading configuration

Step

Action

To set the default file for saving configuration 1

Set the default file for saving configuration: configuration set default-save-filename

To set the default file for loading configuration 2

Set the default file for loading configuration: configuration set default-load-filename —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Configuration management 3-9

Procedure 3-6 Displaying the default configuration files The default configuration files are •

save



load

Step

Action

1

Display the default save, load, and backup load files: configuration list

Example The following example shows sample output for the configuration list command. > configuration list +--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Configuration Files | +--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | startup-config | | test | +--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Default Save File: test | | Default Load File: test | +--------------------------------------------------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

3-10 Configuration management

Procedure 3-7 Resetting default configuration files to factory default files You can •

reset the default file for saving configuration



reset the default file for loading configuration

Step

Action

To reset the default file for saving configuration 1

Reset the default file for saving configuration: configuration unset default-save-filename

To reset the default file for loading configuration 2

Reset the default file for loading configuration: configuration unset default-load-filename —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-1

Port management

4-

This chapter explains how to configure physical and logical port attributes. Physical ports provide connectivity to other devices, which is essential for any switching device. To aggregate bandwidth and provide link redundancy between two devices, physical ports are added to a Link Aggregation Group (LAG). The port management commands provide the ability to configure ports and troubleshoot connectivity. Port management addresses: •

“Port attributes”



“Port statistics”



“Transceivers”

This chapter provides the procedures for port management.

Port attributes Table 4-1 describes administrative and operational attributes for ports. Table 4-1 Administrative and operational attributes for ports Attribute

Description

General Port Name

A 32 character string representing the name of the physical port or LAG. For physical ports, the name represents the port’s physical location identifying the chassis module and port in the format: <ModuleNumber>. Whenever a platform has a single module, the component number will be left out of the name. For example, the 3960 platform is single module, so each physical port is named only with the port number (1 through 12). The 5150 platform supports multiple modules, so each port on the second and third module is named with the module and port numbers (2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2).

Type

Gigabit (GIG), 10 Gigabit (10GIG), or LAG.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-2 Port management Table 4-1 Administrative and operational attributes for ports Attribute

Description

Service Port Type

Indicates whether the port is a Subscriber, User to Network Interface (UNI), or Network to Network Interface (NNI) port.

Spanning Tree State

Indicates the state of Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), including: Disabled, Forwarding, Learning, or Discarding. For additional information regarding STP, refer to “Configuring RSTP” on page 19-1 and “Configuring MSTP” on page 20-1.

MAC Address

Media Access Control (MAC) address. By default, the MAC address is uniquely assigned during manufacturing.

Link Flap Detection

configuration for monitoring link state transitions.

Link State

Indicates whether the port is enabled or disabled. By default the Admin link state is disabled.

State Group Link State

Indicates whether the port state mirror group link is enabled or disabled. Blank indicates the port is not a member of a port state mirror group.

Acceptable frame type (acceptable-frame-type)

Designates the treatment of received frames to allow all, tagged-only, or untagged-only.

Flow Control (flow-ctrl)

Prevents one port from sending data faster than the receiving port can handle it. When the receiving port has all the data it can handle, it sends a “pause” frame to the sender. The sender stops sending data until the pause frame expires. Received (asym-rx), transmitted only (asym-tx), or Off modes are supported; the default mode is off.

Auto-negotiation (auto- Determines whether ports negotiate with their link partner to operate with parameters common to both links. This method of auto negotiation follows neg) the IEEE 802.3z standard and provides a way to automatically connect multiple types of devices. By default, auto negotiation is enabled. Flow Control Advertised (advertised-flow-control)

Determines whether flow control setting is advertised. Default is off.

Duplex (duplex)

Half or full. When the port is set to full duplex, it can transmit and receive data simultaneously. With half duplex the port can transmit or receive data, but not both simultaneously. Default duplex is set to full.

Inter-packet gap (IPG) size

Sets the inter-packet gap size. This attribute sets the IPG to 12 or 8 bytes. Note: The user will be prevented from configuring a port, previously configured as a Benchmark port-under-test, to function with an IPG of 8 bytes. Similarly, the user will be prevented from configuring a port, previously configured to function with an IPG of 8 bytes, as a Benchmark port-under-test.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-3 Table 4-1 Administrative and operational attributes for ports Attribute

Description

Description (description)

Configurable 128 character description of the port. By default, the description is blank.

Speed

Physical port speed, such as 1 Gbps or 10 Gbps. Not applicable for LAG ports. The default value is auto, which matches the speed to the transceiver speed. Any configured auto negotiation settings are ignored for transceivers that do not support auto negotiation, that is, 100M- and 10G-based transceivers. Note: If you set a value for the speed attribute, the port stays in that speed and a transceiver mismatch error is displayed if there is a mismatch. This functionality is only supported on Ciena-supported transceivers.

Maximum frame size (max-frame-size)

Maximum frame size in bytes allowed to ingress/egress the port. The default value is 1526. Jumbo frames are supported with configurable range from 1522-9216. Maximum frame size is also referred to as Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size. Note: MPLS traffic will not obey the port MTU on the egress side for all platforms, with the exception of the 5160 and the 5142.

Aggregation Membership Displays the link aggregation group of which the port is a member. Port traffic mirroring Mirror port

Turns port mirroring on or off. Default is off.

Ingress-mirror

Sets the mirror port for ingress traffic.

Egress-mirror

Sets the mirror port for egress traffic.

Optic transceiver Mode

Shows the port connector mode, Copper RJ45, Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP), or SFP+.

XCVR Capabilities Mismatch

Indicates whether or not the capabilities of the port and the installed transceiver match.

Phy loopback

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-4 Port management Table 4-1 Administrative and operational attributes for ports Attribute

Description

Loopback

Indicates whether internal physical loopback is enabled. By default, internal loopback is off. Internal loopback is supported where data that is destined to egress the port in internal loopback mode will be looped back through the switch fabric and out the port on which it came in. The loopback occurs in the PHY. Internal loopback can be enabled on any physical port independently, regardless of VLAN membership. For more information, refer to “Port loopback” on page 4-5. Setting the internal loopback attribute automatically sets the port’s learn limit to 0, with an action of 'forward'. When the internal loopback setting is 'off', the configured learn limit is then re-applied. If more than two ports within the same VLAN are configured to participate in an internal loopback test, there is a danger of creating a broadcast storm.

Class of Service (CoS) Fixed Resolved CoS (fixed-rcos)

Sets the fixed resolved CoS value.

Fixed Resolved Color (fixed-rcolor)

Sets the fixed resolved color, which is green or yellow.

Resolved CoS (R-CoS) to Sets the R-CoS to F-CoS map. Frame CoS (F-CoS) map (frame-cos-map) Resolved CoS Policy (resolved-cos-policy)

Sets Resolved CoS Policy.

Ingress to Egress Qmap Sets the R-CoS queue map to use in mapping internal CoS (R-CoS) at the (ingress-to-egress-qmap) ingress port to a CoS queue at an egress port. FCOS to RCOS Map (resolved-cos-map)

Sets the frame CoS to R-CoS map.

Remark L2 (resolved-cos- Enables or disables frame layer 2 remarking. remark-l2) VLAN specific Egress Untag VLAN (egress-untag-vlan)

Sets the VLAN for egressing untagged data frames.

PVID (PVID)

Port VLAN ID. Default is 1.

Ingress VLAN Filter (vlan- Filters frames that are not members of a configured VLAN. Default is ingress-filter) enabled.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-5 Table 4-1 Administrative and operational attributes for ports Attribute

Description

VLAN Membership

Displays the VLANs of which the port is a member.

Virtual switch and virtual circuit specific Untagged Ctrl VS (untagged-ctrl-vs)

Untagged control frame virtual switch.

Untagged Data VS (untagged-data-vs)

Untagged data frame virtual switch.

Untagged Ingress Data Vid (untagged-data-vid)

Pushes and pops the specified VID as a Customer VID for frames forwarded to a virtual switch. Applicable only to ports associated with virtual switches. Note: On the 3940 and 5140 platforms, the untagged-data-vid attribute pushes the specified VID as a Customer VID on ingress but does not pop the VID on egress.

Virtual switch ingress filter Filters frames that are not a member of a configured virtual switch. (vs-ingress-filter) Eth VC EtherType

Displays the EtherType for Ethernet virtual circuits.

Eth VC EtherType Policy

Displays the configured EtherType policy for the Ethernet virtual circuits.

VS L2 Transform (vs-l2transform)

Enables VLAN translation for Q-in-Q with virtual switch L2 transform actions.

Port loopback Figure 4-1 shows internal loopback on Port1. Traffic ingresses Port2 and is intended to egress Port1. The traffic ingresses the switch fabric, is learned, ingresses Port1 and is looped back and sent into the switch fabric. Figure 4-1 Internal loopback

PORT2

PORT1

Switch fabric

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-6 Port management

This chapter provides the following procedures for configuring ports: •

“Setting port attributes” on page 4-13



“Resetting port attributes to default” on page 4-14



“Disabling a port” on page 4-15



“Enabling a port” on page 4-16



“Displaying port attributes” on page 4-17



“Displaying blade information” on page 4-29



“Displaying port capabilities” on page 4-33



“Displaying port Ethernet configuration” on page 4-35



“Displaying port status” on page 4-36

Port statistics Table 4-2 describes port statistics. Table 4-2 Port statistics Port statistic

Description

RxBytes

Number of bytes received including those in bad packets.

RxPkts

Number of packets received including all unicast, multicast, broadcast, MAC control and bad packets.

RxCrcErrorPkts

Number of packets received which contained an FCS error and were between 64 and 1518* bytes in length.

RxMcastPkts

Number of good multicast packets received that were between 64 and 1518* bytes in length. Excludes MAC control frames.

RxBcastPkts

Number of good broadcast packets received that were between 64 and 1518* bytes in length. Excludes MAC control frames.

RxUcastPkts

Number of good unicast packets received that were between 64 and Max Frame Size bytes in length. Excludes MAC control frames.

UndersizePkts

Number of packets received that were less than 64 bytes long and contained a valid FCS and were otherwise well-formed.

OversizePkts

Number of packets received that were longer than 1518* bytes to Max Frame Size and contained a valid FCS and were otherwise well formed. Includes unicast, multicast and broadcast packets.

FragmentsPkts

Number of packets received that were between 10 and 63 bytes in length and had either an FCS error or an alignment error.

JabbersPkts

Number of packets received that were longer than 1518* bytes to Max Frame Size and had an FCS error or an alignment error.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-7 Table 4-2 Port statistics Port statistic

Description

RxPausePkts

Number of received valid pause packets that were between 64 and 1518 bytes in length.

RxDropPkts

The total number of valid packets received which were discarded due to lack of resources, that is, rx buffer hits the discard limit, buffer pool full or back pressure discard. RFC 2819 specifies that this number is not necessarily the number of packets dropped; it is just the number of times this condition has been detected.

RxDiscardPkts

The Count of valid frames received which were discarded (filtered) by the Forwarding Process. This includes packets dropped due to lack of resources (RxDropPkts).

RxLOutRangePkts

Number of packets received which exceeded Max Frame Size in length and contained a valid or invalid FCS.

RxInErrorPkts

Number of packets received which have FCS errors, or are either Undersize or Out of Range.

64OctsPkts

Number of packets received that were 64 bytes in length.

65To127OctsPkts

Number of packets received that were between 65 and 127 bytes in length.

128To255OctsPkts

Number of packets received that were between 128 and 255 bytes in length.

256To511OctsPkts

Number of packets received that were between 256 and 511 bytes in length.

512To1023OctsPkts

Number of packets received that were between 512 and 1023 bytes in length.

1024To1518OctsPkts

Number of packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 bytes in length.

1519To2047OctsPkts

Number of packets received that were between 1519 and 2047 bytes in length.

2048To4095OctsPkts

Number of packets received that were between 2048 and 4095 bytes in length.

4096To9216OctsPkts

Number of packets received that were between 4096 and 9216 bytes in length.

TxBytes

Number of bytes transmitted including those in bad packets.

TxPkts

Number of packets transmitted including all unicast, multicast, broadcast, MAC control and bad packets.

TxExDeferPkts

Number of transmitted packets which experienced multiple deferrals (2 or more deferrals.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-8 Port management Table 4-2 Port statistics Port statistic

Description

TxDeferPkts10

Number of transmitted packets which were deferred on the first transmission but did not experience any subsequent collisions during transmission.

TxGiantPkts

Number of packets transmitted that were longer than 1518* bytes and were otherwise well formed (valid FCS)

TxUnderRunPkts

Number of transmitted underrun packets.

TxCrcErrorPkts

Number of transmitted packets which contained an FCS error.

TxLCheckErrorPkts

Number of transmitted length check packets

TxLOutRangePkts

Number of transmitted length out of range packets

TxLateCollPkts

Number of transmitted packets which experienced a late collision more than 512 bit times during a transmission attempt

TxExCollPkts

Number of transmitted packets which experienced 16 collisions during transmission and was aborted.

TxSingleCollPkts

Number of transmitted packets which experienced a single collision.

TxCollPkts

Number of transmitted packets which experienced 2-15 collisions (including any late collisions) during transmission.

TxPausePkts

Number of valid pause control packets transmitted that were between 64 and 1518* bytes in length.

TxUcastPkts

Number of good unicast packets transmitted that were between 64 and 1518* bytes in length.

TxMcastPkts

Number of good multicast packets transmitted that were between 64 and 1518* bytes in length.

TxBcastPkts

Number of good broadcast packets transmitted that were between 64 and 1518* bytes in length.

Tx64OcPkts

Number of packets transmitted that were 64 bytes in length.

Tx65To127OcPkts

Number of packets transmitted that were between 65 and 127 bytes in length.

Tx128To255OcPkts

Number of packets transmitted that were between 128 and 255 bytes in length.

Tx256To511OcPkts

Number of packets.transmitted that were between 256 and 511 bytes in length.

Tx512To1023OcPkts

Number of packets transmitted that were between 512 and 1023 bytes in length.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-9 Table 4-2 Port statistics Port statistic

Description

Tx1024To1518OcPkts

Number of packets transmitted that were between 1024 and 1518 bytes in length.

Tx1519To2047OcPkts

Number of packets transmitted that were between 1519 and 2047 bytes in length.

Tx2048To4095OcPkts

Number of packets transmitted that were between 2048 and 4095 bytes in length.

Tx4096To9216OcPkts

Number of packets transmitted that were between 4096 and 9216 bytes in length.

Note: * 1522 bytes if VLAN tagged.

This chapter provides the following procedures for statistics: •

“Displaying port statistics” on page 4-18



“Monitoring port statistics” on page 4-23



“Clearing current statistics” on page 4-28

Transceivers This section describes •

“Identification”



“Diagnostics”

Identification Ciena devices support transceivers that contain a standard serial erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM) that provides information on the type of SFP used. The following information is read from the EPROM: •

Identifier Type (GBIC, SFP...)



Extended Identifier Type



Connector Type (SC, LC, MU, SG...)



Vendor Name



Vendor Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI)



Vendor Part Number



Vendor Serial Number



Vendor Revision Number



Encoding Algorithm (NRZ, Manchester...)



Manufacturing Date Code

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-10 Port management



Transceiver Code



Transceiver SFF-8472 Compliance Version

Diagnostics Ciena devices support advanced transceivers that have an additional diagnostic serial EPROM. The system software determines if the transceiver has the diagnostic EPROM and will provide the following information to the user: •

Wavelength/Frequency



Temperature



Rx Power



Tx Power



Tx Disable State



Tx Fault State



Rx Rate Select State

The information is stored in a table on a per port basis. The standard EPROM information is updated during initialization or when a new transceiver has been inserted. The diagnostic information is updated at a rate of 1 port per 5 seconds. However, this process has a low priority, and in times of a heavy CPU load, the information may be refreshed slowly or not at all. Transceivers that support diagnostics can trigger events and SNMP traps. Diagnostics on SFPs are the following: •

BiasHigh



BiasLow



RxPowerHigh



RxPowerLow



TempHigh



TempLow



TxPowerHigh



TxPowerLow



VccHigh



VccLow

Diagnostics on XFPs are the following: •

BiasHigh



BiasLow

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-11



RxPowerHigh



RxPowerLow



TempHigh



TempLow



TxPowerHigh



TxPowerLow

Each of these events and traps include a warning and alarm version of each, for example, BiasHighAlarm and BiasHighWarning). Thresholds are set by the SFP vendors, and are not programmable. Both event classes (alarm, warning) are logged under the xcvr-mgr. The warnings are logged using the debug category and warning severity. The alarms are logged using the debug category and minor severity. These alarms and warnings are based on flags that are set or cleared inside the SFP. These flags are polled at a low priority and slow rate, so flags may be set and then cleared without generating a trap or event. For example, if the TempHigh alarm threshold is exceeded for a few seconds, and then cleared before the flag is polled, it will not trigger a TempHigh alarm. You can forcibly clear alarms and warnings by removing and then reinserting the transceiver or disabling and then enabling the port. Table 4-3 lists transceiver states and provides a description of each state. Table 4-3 Transceiver states State

Description

INV!

Invalid. The transceiver port state could not be determined due to a system error.

UCTF

Uncertified. The transceiver is not in the officially supported set of transceivers on that device, for that software version. The transceiver may or may not function properly.

WARN

There are one or more warnings associated with the transceiver, such as the port configuration settings (e.g. speed, autonegotiation, etc) do not match the capabilities of the transceiver. For example, the port is configured for Gig speed, but the transceiver is 100m. Information about which settings are incompatible are available in the output of the port show port command.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-12 Port management Table 4-3 Transceiver states State

Description

FLT!

Fault. The transceiver has been faulted for some reason; typically this will be due to EEPROM checksum and/or read failures.

Ena

Enabled

Dis

Disabled

This chapter provides the following procedures for configuring transceivers: •

“Displaying a list of supported optics” on page 4-37



“Displaying transceiver information” on page 4-38



“Determining transceiver speed” on page 4-41



“Tuning XFP transceivers” on page 4-43



“Setting the port connector mode” on page 4-45

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-13

Procedure 4-1 Setting port attributes Set port attributes. For information about port attributes, see “Administrative and operational attributes for ports”. Step

Action

1

Set port attributes: port set port {[acceptable-frame-type ], [advertised-flow-control ],[auto-neg ], [duplex ], [description <String[31]>], [egress-frame-cos-policy ] [egress-untag-vlan ], [egress-mirror ], [fixed-rcos ], [flow-ctrl ], [ipg-decrease <0 | 4> [ingress-mirror ], [link-flap-detect ], [link-flap-count <#>], [link-flap-detect-time <#>], [link-flap-hold-time <#>], [ingress-to-egress-qmap ] [max-frame-size ], [mirror-port ], [mode <default|rj45|sfp>], [loopback ],[pvid ], [resolved-cos-policy <dot1d-tag1-cos|fixed-cos|l3-dscp-cos>], [resolved-cos-map ], resolved-cos-remark-l2 <true|false>], [speed ], [untagged-ctrl-vs ], [untagged-data-vs ], [untagged-data-vid ], [vlan-ingress-filter ], [vs-ingress-filter ], [vs-l2-transform ]} —end—

Example The following example sets the following port attributes on port 2.1: •

disables auto-negotiation



sets the description to 1234_West_Street

port set port 2.1 auto-neg off description 1234_West_Street

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-14 Port management

Procedure 4-2 Resetting port attributes to default Reset port attributes to default values. Step

Action

1

Reset port attributes to default values: port unset port <port> {description} {egress-mirror} {ingress-mirror} {mirror-encap} {mirror-encap-vid} {mirror-encap-tpid} {untagged-ctrl-vs} {untagged-datavs} {untagged-data-vid} {mac-swap-vlan} {advertisedspeed} {advertised-duplex} where port <port>

is the port.

description

is the port description.

egress-mirror

is egress port mirroring.

ingress-mirror

is ingress port mirroring.

mirror-encap

is port mirroring encapsulation.

mirror-encap-vid

is the port mirroring encapsulation VID.

mirror-encap-tpid is the port mirroring encapsulation TPID. untagged-ctrl-vs

is the virtual switch for untagged control frames.

untagged-data-vs is the virtual switch for untagged data frames. untagged-datavid

is the push/pop of VLAN ID for untagged data frames.

{mac-swap-vlan}

is the MAC SA/DA swap VLAN ID.

{advertisedspeed}

is the advertised value for speed.

{advertisedduplex}

is the advertised value for duplex.

Note: On the 3940 and 5140 platforms, the untagged-datavid attribute pushes the VLAN ID on ingress but does not pop the VLAN ID on egress.

Example The following example clears the description associated with port 1. port unset port 1 description

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-15

Procedure 4-3 Disabling a port When you disable a port, the Link State administrative status is changed to disabled and the operational status shows disabled when the link is down. When you disable a port directly, the transceiver is disabled. Step

Action

1

Enter the following command: port disable port where port

is the port to be disabled. —end—

Example The following example disables port 1. port disable port 1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-16 Port management

Procedure 4-4 Enabling a port When you enable a port, the Link State administrative status is changed to enabled and the operational status shows enabled when the link is up. When you enable a port directly, the transceiver is enabled. Step

Action

1

Enter the following command: port enable port <port> where port <port>

is the port to be enabled. —end—

Example The following example enables port 1. port enable port 1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-17

Procedure 4-5 Displaying port attributes Display port attributes to •

verify configuration



check link status



troubleshoot issues related to the port

Step

Action

1

Display port attributes by entering the following command: port show [port <port>] where port <port>

is a 32-character string representing the name of the physical port or LAG. —end—

Example The following example shows sample output of the port show command. > port show +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Port Table | Operational Status | Admin Config | |--------+--------+----+--------------+----+---+-------+----+----+-------+----| | Port | Port | | Link State | | | |Auto| | |Auto| | Name | Type |Link| Duration |XCVR|STP| Mode |Neg |Link| Mode |Neg | |--------+--------+----+--------------+----+---+-------+----+----+-------+----| | 1 |10/100/G|Down| 0d 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| | |Ena |1000/FD| On | | 2 | Gig | Up | 0d 3h56m14s|Ena |FWD|1000/FD| On |Ena |1000/FD| On | ... +--------+--------+----+--------------+----+---+-------+----+----+-------+----+

The following example shows sample output of the port show command for a specific port. > port show port 1 +-------------------------------- PORT 1 INFO ---------------------------------+ | Field | Admin | Oper | +--------------------------+-------------------------+-------------------------+ | Type | 10/100/G | ... | Aggregation Membership | | | | VLAN Membership | 1,10,100,1000 | 1,10,100,1000 | +--------------------------+-------------------------+-------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-18 Port management

Procedure 4-6 Displaying port statistics Two sets of statistics are stored: •

Current statistics, which are the values since the last statistics clear operation.



Total statistics, which are the values since the last boot-up

The system also calculates throughput values to show current statistics in terms of rate. You can display •

current statistics



total statistics



current throughput statistics



statistics for specific ports Note: The port throughput rate measurement is a very rough approximation that should not be expected to match actual rates.

Step

Action

To display current statistics 1

Display current statistics: port show statistics <statistics> [active] [delay ] [count ] [scale ] where statistics <statistics>

is statistics collected since the last statistics clear operation.

active

displays active statistics.

delay

is the number of times to repeat the display.

scale

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-19 To display total statistics 2

Display total statistics: port show total-statistics [active] [delay ] [count ] [scale ] where total-statistics

is all statistics collected since the last boot-up.

active

displays active statistics.

delay

is the number of times to repeat the display.

scale To display current throughput statistics 3

Display current throughput statistics: port show throughput [active] [delay ] [count ] [scale ] where throughput

is the port or ports to show.

active

displays active statistics.

delay

is the number of times to repeat the display.

scale

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-20 Port management To display statistics for specific ports 4

Display statistics for specific ports: port show port <port> [active] [count ] [capabilities] [delay ] [statistics] [total-statistics] [throughput] [scale ] [vlan] [type ] where <port>

is the port or ports that you want to display port statistics for

active

displays active statistics.

count

is the number of repetitions for throughput.

capabilities

displays port capabilities

delay statistics

displays port statistics.

total-statistics

displays total port statistics.

throughput

displays port throughput.

scale vlan

displays port VLAN membership.

type —end—

Examples The following example shows sample output for all active port statistics summary. > port show statistics active +---------------------------- PORT STATISTICS SUMMARY --------------------+ | Port | Byte | Pkt | | | Tx | Rx | Tx | Rx | +---------+----------------+----------------+--------------+--------------+ | 1 | 8326248088 | 0 | 67147162 | 0 | | 2 | 8326247964 | 0 | 67147161 | 0 | | 12 | 0 | 28879569152 | 0 | 225621634 | +---------+----------------+----------------+--------------+--------------+

The following example shows sample output for all active port total statistics summary. > port show total-statistics active +----------------------- PORT TOTAL STATISTICS SUMMARY --------------------

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-21 | Port | Byte | Pkt | | | Tx | Rx | Tx | Rx | +---------+----------------+----------------+--------------+--------------+ | 1 | 169713065596 | 1053155263708 | 325536280 | 1372943892 | | 2 | 21452132866 | 19878912 | 77950273 | 310608 | | 12 | 885114437038 | 193572376072 | 1147664620 | 490131140 | +---------+----------------+----------------+--------------+--------------+

The following example shows sample output for all active port throughput statistics. > port show throughput active +--------------- PORT THROUGHPUT SUMMARY 5 SECOND SAMPLE -----------------+ | Port | Bit Rate (Mbps) | Pkt Rate (Mpps) | | | Tx | Rx | Tx | Rx | +---------+----------------+-------------+----------------+---------------+ | 1 | 0.867 | | 0.001 | | | 2 | 0.867 | | 0.001 | | | 12 | | 2.008 | | 0.003 | +---------+----------------+-------------+----------------+---------------+

The following example shows sample output for port 1 active statistics. > port show port 1 statistics active +--------------- PORT 1 STATISTICS -----+ | Statistic | Value | +--------------------+------------------+ | RxBytes | 9659942 | | RxPkts | 132603 | | RxCrcErrorPkts | 1 | | RxUcastPkts | 8499 | | RxMcastPkts | 81206 | | RxBcastPkts | 42897 | | 64OctsPkts | 127628 | | 65To127OctsPkts | 2345 | | 256To511OctsPkts | 2629 | | 512To1023OctsPkts | 1 | | TxBytes | 1485924 | | TxPkts | 12559 | | TxUcastPkts | 8233 | | TxMcastPkts | 4321 | | TxBcastPkts | 5 | | Tx64OcPkts | 4648 | | Tx65To127OcPkts | 3293 | | Tx128To255OcPkts | 4453 | | Tx256To511OcPkts | 51 | | Tx512To1023OcPkts | 56 | | Tx1024To1518OcPkts | 58 | +--------------------+------------------+

The following example shows sample output for port 1 total active statistics. > port show port 1 total-statistics active +-------------------- PORT 1 STATISTICS -------------------+ | Statistic | Total Value | Value | +--------------------+------------------+------------------+ | RxBytes | 9677152 | 9677152 | | RxPkts | 132855 | 132855 | | RxCrcErrorPkts | 1 | 1 | | RxUcastPkts | 8635 | 8635 |

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-22 Port management | RxMcastPkts | 81281 | 81281 | | RxBcastPkts | 42938 | 42938 | | 64OctsPkts | 127873 | 127873 | | 65To127OctsPkts | 2350 | 2350 | | 256To511OctsPkts | 2631 | 2631 | | 512To1023OctsPkts | 1 | 1 | | TxBytes | 1493626 | 1493626 | | TxPkts | 12654 | 12654 | | TxUcastPkts | 8328 | 8328 | | TxMcastPkts | 4321 | 4321 | | TxBcastPkts | 5 | 5 | | Tx64OcPkts | 4731 | 4731 | | Tx65To127OcPkts | 3300 | 3300 | | Tx128To255OcPkts | 4456 | 4456 | | Tx256To511OcPkts | 52 | 52 | | Tx512To1023OcPkts | 57 | 57 | | Tx1024To1518OcPkts | 58 | 58 | +--------------------+------------------+------------------+

The following example shows sample output for port 1 active throughput statistics. > port show port 1 throughput active +---------------------- PORT 1 THROUGHPUT --------------------------------+ | Statistic | Current Value Delta Value Rate Mpps & Mbps | +--------------------+----------------+----------------+------------------+ | Time | 1:19:56:19 | 0:00:14:20.0 | | | RxBytes | 9.702 | 0.072 | 0.000 | | RxPkts | 0.133 | 0.001 | 0.000 | | RxUcastPkts | 0.009 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | RxMcastPkts | 0.081 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | RxBcastPkts | 0.043 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | 64OctsPkts | 0.128 | 0.001 | 0.000 | | 65To127OctsPkts | 0.002 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | 256To511OctsPkts | 0.003 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | TxBytes | 1.500 | 0.027 | 0.000 | | TxPkts | 0.013 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | TxUcastPkts | 0.008 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | Tx64OcPkts | 0.005 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | Tx65To127OcPkts | 0.003 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | Tx128To255OcPkts | 0.004 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | Tx256To511OcPkts | 0.000 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | Tx512To1023OcPkts | 0.000 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | Tx1024To1518OcPkts | 0.000 | 0.000 | 0.000 | +--------------------+----------------+----------------+------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-23

Procedure 4-7 Monitoring port statistics Use this procedure to continuously monitor port statistics for all ports or for specific ports. The system displays the statistics and automatically clears the screen before displaying the updated values. To stop monitoring, press Ctrl+C. Step

Action

To monitor all ports for current statistics 1

Monitor all ports for current statistics: port monitor statistics <statistics> [active] [delay ] [count ] [scale ] where statistics <statistics>

displays all statistics collected from the last statistics clear operation.

active

displays active statistics.

delay

is the number of times to repeat the display.

scale To monitor all ports for total statistics 2

Monitor all ports for total statistics: port monitor total-statistics [active] [delay ] [count ] [scale ] where total-statistics

displays all statistics collected since the last boot-up.

active

displays active statistics.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-24 Port management where delay

is the number of times to repeat the display.

scale To monitor all ports for throughput statistics 3

Monitor all ports for throughput statistics: port monitor throughput [active] [delay ] [count ] [scale ] where throughput

displays current throughput statistics.

active

displays active statistics.

delay

is the number of times to repeat the display.

scale To monitor specific ports 4

Monitor specific ports: port monitor port <port> [active] [delay ] [scale ] {statistics] [total-statistics] [throughput] [type ] where port <port>

is the port or ports that you want to monitor

active

displays active statistics.

delay statistics

displays port statistics.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-25 where total-statistics

displays total port statistics.

throughput

displays port throughput.

type —end—

Examples The following example shows sample output of monitoring total statistics for all active ports. > port monitor total-statistics active delay 10 <Screen clears> +---------------------- PORT TOTAL STATISTICS SUMMARY --------------------+ | Port | Byte | Pkt | | | Tx | Rx | Tx | Rx | +---------+----------------+----------------+--------------+--------------+ | 1 | 170475797780 | 1053155263708 | 331687346 | 1372943892 | | 2 | 22214864802 | 19878912 | 84101337 | 310608 | | 12 | 885114437038 | 196217923208 | 1147664620 | 510799477 | +---------+----------------+----------------+--------------+--------------+

The following example shows sample output of monitoring statistics for all ports. > port monitor statistics active delay 10 <Screen clears> +-------------------------- PORT STATISTICS SUMMARY ----------------------+ | Port | Byte | Pkt | | | Tx | Rx | Tx | Rx | +---------+----------------+----------------+--------------+--------------+ | 2 | 36938335 | 67861410 | 224689 | 1023888 | | 3 | 3522850 | 21965574 | 22329 | 228469 | +---------+----------------+----------------+--------------+--------------+

The following example shows sample output of monitoring throughput statistics for all ports. > port monitor throughput active Info: This CLI output may take a while to display press CTRL-C to abort <Screen clears> +------------- PORT THROUGHPUT SUMMARY 5 SECOND SAMPLE -----------------+ | Port | Bit Rate (Mbps) | Pkt Rate (Mpps) | | | Tx | Rx | Tx | Rx | +---------+----------------+----------------+--------------+--------------+ | 1 | 0.860 | | 0.001 | | | 2 | 0.860 | | 0.001 | | | 12 | | 2.984 | | 0.003 | +---------+----------------+----------------+--------------+--------------+

The following example shows sample output of monitoring total statistics for a specific port. > port monitor port 1 total-statistics active delay 10

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-26 Port management <Screen clears> INFO: Waiting 10 seconds for display. Abort with CTRL-c +-------------------- PORT 1 STATISTICS -------------------+ | Statistic | Total Value | Value | +--------------------+------------------+------------------+ | RxBytes | 9844868 | 9844868 | | RxPkts | 135233 | 135233 | | RxCrcErrorPkts | 1 | 1 | | RxUcastPkts | 9572 | 9572 | | RxMcastPkts | 82222 | 82222 | | RxBcastPkts | 43438 | 43438 | | 64OctsPkts | 130164 | 130164 | | 65To127OctsPkts | 2406 | 2406 | | 256To511OctsPkts | 2662 | 2662 | | 512To1023OctsPkts | 1 | 1 | | TxBytes | 1580957 | 1580957 | | TxPkts | 13396 | 13396 | | TxUcastPkts | 9070 | 9070 | | TxMcastPkts | 4321 | 4321 | | TxBcastPkts | 5 | 5 | | Tx64OcPkts | 5195 | 5195 | | Tx65To127OcPkts | 3519 | 3519 | | Tx128To255OcPkts | 4480 | 4480 | | Tx256To511OcPkts | 65 | 65 | | Tx512To1023OcPkts | 60 | 60 | | Tx1024To1518OcPkts | 77 | 77 | +--------------------+------------------+------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-27

The following example shows sample output for monitoring statistics for a specific port. > port monitor port 1 statistics active delay 10 <Screen clears> INFO: Waiting 10 seconds for display. Abort with CTRL-c +--------------- PORT 1 STATISTICS -----+ | Statistic | Value | +--------------------+------------------+ | RxBytes | 9866442 | | RxPkts | 135531 | | RxCrcErrorPkts | 1 | | RxUcastPkts | 9648 | | RxMcastPkts | 82368 | | RxBcastPkts | 43514 | | 64OctsPkts | 130448 | | 65To127OctsPkts | 2415 | | 256To511OctsPkts | 2667 | | 512To1023OctsPkts | 1 | | TxBytes | 1586934 | | TxPkts | 13454 | | TxUcastPkts | 9128 | | TxMcastPkts | 4321 | | TxBcastPkts | 5 | | Tx64OcPkts | 5238 | | Tx65To127OcPkts | 3530 | | Tx128To255OcPkts | 4482 | | Tx256To511OcPkts | 66 | | Tx512To1023OcPkts | 60 | | Tx1024To1518OcPkts | 78 | +--------------------+------------------+

The following example shows sample output for monitoring throughput statistics for a specific port. > port monitor port 1 throughput active <Screen clears> INFO: Waiting 5 seconds for display. Abort with CTRL-c +---------------------- PORT 1 THROUGHPUT --------------------------------+ | Statistic | Current Value | Delta Value | Rate Mpps & Mbps | +------------------+----------------+------------------+------------------+ | Time | 1:20:30:17 | 0:00:00:05.0 | | | RxBytes | 9.887 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | RxPkts | 0.136 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | RxUcastPkts | 0.010 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | RxMcastPkts | 0.083 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | RxBcastPkts | 0.044 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | 64OctsPkts | 0.131 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | TxBytes | 1.593 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | TxPkts | 0.014 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | TxUcastPkts | 0.009 | 0.000 | 0.000 | | Tx65To127OcPkts | 0.004 | 0.000 | 0.000 | +------------------+----------------+------------------+------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-28 Port management

Procedure 4-8 Clearing current statistics Clear current statistics when you no longer want to view them. Clearing current statistics does not clear total statistics. You can clear current statistics for •

all ports



specific ports Note: The port clear command does not clear TDM port statistics. For more information about monitoring TDM statistics, refer to “Performance monitoring,” in 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Fault and Performance Management (009-3220-009).

Step

Action

To clear current statistics for all ports 1

Clear current statistics for all ports: port clear statistics

To clear current statistics for specific ports 2

Clear current statistics for specific ports: port clear port <port> statistics where port <port>

is the port or ports that you want to clear statistics for. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-29

Procedure 4-9 Displaying blade information Display blade information. Step

Action

1

Display blade information: blade show [attributes] [capabilities] [information] [state] where attributes

displays hardware device identification information. Hardware device identification information is device type, hardware version, serial number, MAC address, manufactured date, and E-PROM (param) version. The blade show attributes output varies depending on the hardware platform. The CLEI Code is only displayed for 3916, 3930, 3931, and 5150 devices

capabilities

displays the capabilities of the board and ports, including blade type, RAM and flash file sizes, port types supported, and enhanced ports.

information

displays general blade information, including blade type, number of ports, MAC address, administrative and operational states, and date of last reboot.

state

displays administrative and operational states. —end—

Examples The following example shows sample output for a single blade device. > blade show +----------------------- BLADE SUMMARY ----------------------+ | Slot | Ports | PortBaseMac | BladeType | OperState | |------+-------+-------------------+-----------+-------------| | 1 | 12 | 00:03:18:55:71:d2 | Single | Enabled | +------+-------+-------------------+-----------+-------------+

The following example shows all extended blade details in one command (on a 5150). > blade show attributes capabilities information state //The blade attributes: +----------------- BLADE DEVICE ID -----------------+ | Parameter | Value |

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-30 Port management +---------------------------+-----------------------+ | Board Device Type | 091 | | Board Hardware Version | 1705150830/004 | | Board Serial Number | B6054200 | | Board MAC Address | 00:03:18:ac:e9:40 | | Manufactured Date | 11-11-2010 | | CLEI Code | COMP100BRA | | Location of Manufacture | 1 | | Module Part Num | 1705150900/009 | | Module Serial Num | M6145938 | | Param Version | 007 | +---------------------------+-----------------------+ +--------------- MODULE 2 DEVICE ID ----------------+ | Parameter | Value | +---------------------------+-----------------------+ | Board Device Type | 092 | | Board Hardware Version | 1705100810/006 | | Board Serial Number | B6061295 | | Manufactured Date | 22-10-2010 | | CLEI Code | COUIA3CPAA | | Location of Manufacture | 1 | | Module Part Num | 1705100900/004 | | Module Serial Num | M6154551 | | Param Version | 007 | +---------------------------+-----------------------+ +--------------- MODULE 3 DEVICE ID ----------------+ | Parameter | Value | +---------------------------+-----------------------+ | Board Device Type | 093 | | Board Hardware Version | 1705101810/003 | | Board Serial Number | B6004593 | | Manufactured Date | 04-07-2010 | | CLEI Code | COUIA7APAA | | Location of Manufacture | 1 | | Module Part Num | 1705101900/002 | | Module Serial Num | M6043072 | | Param Version | 007 | +---------------------------+-----------------------+ //The blade capabilities: +---------------------------- BOARD CAPABILITIES ----------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +--------------------+-------------------------------------------------------+ | Capability Class | 0 | | Board Type | 091 | | Board Name | CN 5150 | | Board Description | CN 5150 Service Aggregation Switch | | Blade Type | Single | | No. Ports | 52 | | Has Dcard | No | | Address Ram Size | 0x0 | | Boot Flash Size | 0x200000 | | Packet Ram Size | 0x0 | | Program Ram Size | 0x2000000 | +--------------------+---------------------------------------------------------+ | No. 10 Gig Ports | 4 | | No. Gig Ports | 48 | | No. Fe Ports | 0 | | No. 100Fx Ports | 0 | | No. Eth Ports | 0 | | Total Ports | 52 | | Enhanced Ports List| 2.1 2.2 | +--------------------+---------------------------------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-31 +-------------------------- SUMMARY PORT CAPABILITIES -----------------------------------+ | Port| Type | Speed | Duplex | Aneg | Pause | Enh | +-----+--------------+-------------------------+----------+-------+---------------------+ | 1.1 | 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.2 | 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.3 | 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.4 | 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.5 | 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.6 | 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.7 | 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.8 | 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.9 | 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.10| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.11| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.12| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.13| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.14| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.15| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.16| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.17| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.18| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.19| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.20| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.21| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.22| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.23| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.24| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.25| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.26| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.27| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.28| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.29| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.30| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.31| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.32| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.33| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.34| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.35| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.36| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.37| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.38| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.39| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.40| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.41| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.42| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.43| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.44| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.45| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.46| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.47| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 1.48| 100/G | 100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx |No | | 2.1 | 10GigEthernet| 10Gig | full | N/A | off |Yes | | 2.2 | 10GigEthernet| 10Gig | full | N/A | off |Yes | | 3.1 | 10GigEthernet| 10Gig | full | N/A | off |No | | 3.2 | 10GigEthernet| 10Gig | full | N/A | off |No | +-----+--------------+-------------------------+----------+-------+------------------+--+

//The blade information: +------------------ BLADE INFO --------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+--------------------------+ | Slot | 1 | | Blade Type | Single | | Number of Ports | 52 | | Port Base MAC Address | 00:03:18:ac:e9:42 | | Admin State | Enabled | | Oper State | Enabled |

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-32 Port management | Last Reboot | Thu Jan 1 00:00:00 1970 | +-----------------------+--------------------------+ //The blade state: +----- BLADE STATE ------+ | AdminState | OperState | +------------+-----------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-33

Procedure 4-10 Displaying port capabilities You can display: •

port capabilities for the chassis and a summary of port capabilities



capabilities for a specified port

Step

Action

To display port capabilities for the chassis and a summary of port capabilities 1

Display chassis port capabilities and a summary of all port capabilities: port show capabilities

To display capabilities for a specific port 2

Display capabilities for a specific port: port show port <port> capabilities where port <port>

is a 32-character string representing the name of the physical port or LAG. —end—

Examples The following example shows sample output for the port show capabilities command. > port show capabilities +--------------------+----------------------------------------------------+ | No. 10 Gig Ports | 4 | | No. Gig Ports | 8 | | No. Fe Ports | 0 | | No. 100Fx Ports | 0 | | No. Eth Ports | 0 | | Total Ports | 12 | +--------------------+----------------------------------------------------+ +-------------------------- SUMMARY PORT CAPABILITIES -------------------------+ | Port| Type | Speed | Duplex | Aneg | Pause | +-----+--------------+---------------------+----------+-------+----------------+ | 1 | 10/100/G | 10Mbps,100Mbps,1Gig,Auto| half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx | 2 | 10/100/G | 10Mbps,100Mbps,1Gig,Auto| half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx | 3 | 10/100/G | 10Mbps,100Mbps,1Gig,Auto| half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx | 4 | 10/100/G | 10Mbps,100Mbps,1Gig,Auto| half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx | 5 | 10/100/G | 10Mbps,100Mbps,1Gig,Auto| half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx | 6 | 10/100/G | 10Mbps,100Mbps,1Gig,Auto| half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx | 7 | 10/100/G | 10Mbps,100Mbps,1Gig,Auto| half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx | 8 | 10/100/G | 10Mbps,100Mbps,1Gig,Auto| half,full| on,off| off,sym,a-rx | 9 | 10GigEthernet| 10Gig | full | N/A | off | | 10 | 10GigEthernet| 10Gig | full | N/A | off | | 11 | 10GigEthernet| 10Gig | full | N/A | off |

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

| | | | | | | |

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-34 Port management | 12 | 10GigEthernet| 10Gig | full | N/A | off | +-----+--------------+---------------------+----------+-------+----------------+

The following example shows sample output for the port show capabilities command applied to a specified port. > port show port 1 capabilities +------------------------ PORT 1 CAPABILITIES --------------------+ | Field | Value | +------------------------------+----------------------------------+ | Port Number | 1 | | Port Type | 10/100/G | | Port Speed | 10Mbps,100Mbps,1Gig,Auto | | Port Duplex | half,full | | Port Auto Negotiation | on,off | | Port Pause Advertisement | off,sym,a-tx,s-a-rx | | Port Pause | off,sym,a-rx | | Port Feature Capabilities | Normal | +------------------------------+----------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-35

Procedure 4-11 Displaying port Ethernet configuration You can display port attributes for Ethernet configuration for all or for a specific line module, including name, type, admin status, speed, duplex, flow control, flow control advertised, auto negotiation, and MTU size. Step

Action

1

Display port attributes for Ethernet configuration: port show ethernet-config —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the port show ethernet-config command. > port show ethernet-config +------------------------ PORT ETHERNET CONFIGURATION -------------------------+ | | | | | | | | | | Mirror | | Port | Port | Admin | | | | FC |Auto | MTU | Status | | Name | Type | Status | Speed | Dplx | FC | Adv |Neg | Size |State|Eg|Ig| +--------+--------+--------+-------+------+-----+-----+-----+------+-----+--+--+ | 1 | Gig | Ena | 1000 | ?? | off | off | On | 1526 | Off | 0| 0| | 2 | Gig | Ena | 1000 | Full | off | off | On | 1526 | Off | 0| 0| | 3 | Gig | Ena | 1000 | Full | off | off | On | 1526 | Off | 0| 0| | 4 |10/100/G| Ena | 1000 | ?? | off | off | On | 1526 | Off | 0| 0| | 5 |10/100/G| Ena | 1000 | ?? | off | off | On | 1526 | Off | 0| 0| | 6 |10/100/G| Ena | 1000 | ?? | off | off | On | 1526 | Off | 0| 0| | 7 |10/100/G| Ena | 1000 | ?? | off | off | On | 1526 | Off | 0| 0| | 8 |10/100/G| Ena | 1000 | ?? | off | off | On | 1526 | Off | 0| 0| | 9 | 10Gig | Ena | 10G | ?? | off | off | Off | 1526 | Off | 0| 0| | 10 | 10Gig | Ena | 10G | ?? | off | off | Off | 1526 | Off | 0| 0| | 11 | 10Gig | Ena | 10G | ?? | off | off | Off | 1526 | Off | 0| 0| | 12 | 10Gig | Ena | 10G | ?? | off | off | Off | 1526 | Off | 0| 0| +--------+--------+--------+-------+------+-----+-----+-----+------+-----+--+--+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-36 Port management

Procedure 4-12 Displaying port status Port status included the operational information, such as the link state, link state duration, whether transceivers are enabled or disabled, speed, duplex, maximum frame size, and flow control. You can display the status for all ports or ports on a specific line module. Step

Action

1

Display port status: port show status —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the port show status command. > port show status +------------------------ PORT OPERATIONAL STATUS ------------------------+ | | | |Link State| | |Speed/ |MTU |Flow | |##| Description |Link|Duration |XCVR|STP|Duplex |Size|Ctrl | +--+--------------------------+----+----------+----+---+-------+----+-----+ |1 | |Down| 1d21h35m| |Dis| |1526| | |2 | | Up | 1d22h37m|Ena |FWD|1000/FD|1526|off | |3 | | Up | 1d21h33m|Ena |FWD|1000/FD|1526|off | |4 | |Down| 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| |1526| | |5 | |Down| 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| |1526| | |6 | |Down| 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| |1526| | |7 | |Down| 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| |1526| | |8 | |Down| 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| |1526| | |9 | |Down| 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| |1526| | |10| |Down| 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| |1526| | |11| |Down| 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| |1526| | |12| |Down| 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| |1526| | +--+--------------------------+----+----------+----+---+-------+----+-----+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-37

Procedure 4-13 Displaying a list of supported optics Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) and 10 Gigabit SFPs (XFP) devices are hot-swappable compact optical transceivers. Port transceiver information, including status and type, is available via CLI or SNMP. The system software supports transceivers that are compliant with the following documents: •

XFP Xcvr spec SFF INF 8077i Rev 4.5, Tunable Xcvr spec SFF-8477 Rev 1.3 Draft.



Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP) Transceiver Multi Source Agreement, September 14, 2000



Digital Diagnostic Monitoring Interface for Optical transceivers SFF-8473, Draft Revision 9.0, April 4, 2002.

Step

Action

1

Display a list of supported optics: port xcvr show supported Note: The output of "port xcvr show supported" is a generic table showing the speed capabilities of each transceiver. However, the actual operational speed depends upon the capabilities that are supported on the specific platform and port. —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the port xcvr show supported command. > port xcvr show supported +----All Supported Transceivers----+ | | | | Part Number | XCVR Speed | +--------------------+-------------+ | XCVR-010X31 | 100M | | XCVR-040X31 | 100M | | XCVR-040R55 | 100M | | XCVR-040R31 | 100M | | XCVR-010S55 | 100M | | XCVR-010S31 | 100M | | XCVR-010L31 | 100M | | XCVR-040L31 | 100M | | XCVR-100D43 | 100M / 1G | | XCVR-100D45 | 100M / 1G | | XCVR-100D47 | 100M / 1G | ... | +--------------------+-------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-38 Port management

Procedure 4-14 Displaying transceiver information Diagnostics can be displayed for transceivers that support diagnostics. If the transceiver does not have internal diagnostics capabilities, an error is returned. You can display •

diagnostic information for a specified port



a summary of transceiver status



a summary of transceiver status for a specific port



vendor EPROM data for a specific port

Step

Action

To display diagnostic information for a specified port 1

Display diagnostic information for a specified port: port show port <port> diagnostics where port <port>

is the port or ports to show.

To display a summary of transceiver status 2

Display a summary of transceiver status: port xcvr show

To display a summary of transceiver status for a specific port 3

Display a summary of transceiver status for a specific port: port xcvr show port <port> state where port <port>

is the port or ports to show.

To display vendor EPROM data for a specific port 4

Display vendor EPROM data for a specific port: port show port <port> vendor where port <port>

is the port or ports to show. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-39

Example The following example shows sample output for a transceiver that supports diagnostics. > port xcvr show port 3 diagnostics +--------------------- XCVR DIAGNOSTICS - Port 3 -----------------+ | | | Alarm | Warning | | Output | Value | Threshold | Flag | Threshold | Flag | +---------------+----------+---------------+------+---------------+------+ | Temp (degC)| 42.031 | HIGH 105.000 | 0 | HIGH 100.000 | 0 | | | | LOW -45.000 | 0 | LOW -40.000 | 0 | +---------------+----------+---------------+------+---------------+------+ | Vcc (volts)| 3.299 | HIGH 3.630 | 0 | HIGH 3.460 | 0 | | | | LOW 2.970 | 0 | LOW 3.130 | 0 | +---------------+----------+---------------+------+---------------+------+ | Bias (mA)| 4.112 | HIGH 12.000 | 0 | HIGH 10.000 | 0 | | | | LOW 1.000 | 0 | LOW 2.000 | 0 | +---------------+----------+---------------+------+---------------+------+ | Tx Power (mW)| 0.257 | HIGH 1.412 | 0 | HIGH 0.707 | 0 | | | | LOW 0.056 | 0 | LOW 0.112 | 0 | +---------------+----------+---------------+------+---------------+------+ | Tx Power (dBm)| -5.8905 | HIGH +1.4999 | 0 | HIGH -1.5003 | 0 | | | | LOW -12.5026 | 0 | LOW -9.5001 | 0 | +---------------+----------+---------------+------+---------------+------+ | Rx Power (mW)| 0.0574 | HIGH 1.9954 | 0 | HIGH 1.0000 | 0 | | | | LOW 0.0100 | 0 | LOW 0.0200 | 0 | +---------------+----------+---------------+------+---------------+------+ | Rx Power (dBm)| -12.4109 | HIGH +3.0001 | 0 | HIGH +0.0000 | 0 | | | | LOW -20.0000 | 0 | LOW -16.9897 | 0 | +---------------+----------+---------------+------+---------------+------+

The following example shows sample output for a summary of transceiver status. > port xcvr show +----+-----+-----+---------Transceiver-Status------------+----------------+----+ | |Admin| Oper| |Ether Medium & |Diag| |Port|State|State| Vendor Name & Part Number |Connector Type |Data| +----+-----+-----+---------------------------------------+----------------+----+ |1 |Empty| | | | | |2 |Empty| | | | | |3 |Ena |Ena |CIENA-FBX XCVR-A00G85 Rev10 |1000BASE-SX/LC |Yes | |4 |Ena |Ena |CIENA-FBX XCVR-A00G85 Rev10 |1000BASE-SX/LC |Yes | |5 |Ena |Ena |CIENA-FBX XCVR-A00G85 Rev10 |1000BASE-SX/LC |Yes | |6 |Ena |Ena |CIENA-LMT XCVR-A80D43 RevA |1000BASE-LX/LC |Yes | +----+-----+-----+---------------------------------------+----------------+----+

The following example shows sample output for a summary of transceiver status for a specific port. > port xcvr show port 12 state +----+-----+-----+---------Transceiver-Status--------+---------------+----+ | |Admin| Oper| |Ether Medium & |Diag| |Port|State|State| Vendor Name & Part Number |Connector Type |Data| +----+-----+-----+-----------------------------------+---------------+----+ |12 |Ena |Ena |CIENA XCVR-010Y31 Rev10 |1000BASE-LX/LC | | +----+-----+-----+-----------------------------------+---------------+----+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-40 Port management

The following example shows sample output for vendor EPROM data for a specific port. > port xcvr show port 7 vendor +------------------------ XCVR VENDOR DATA - Port 7 ------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | Decoded String Equivalent | +--------------------------+--------------------+------------------------------+ | Identifier | 0x3 | SFP transceiver | | Ext. Identifier | 0x4 | SFP/GBIC | | Connector | 0x7 | LC | +--------------------------+--------------------+------------------------------+ | Transceiver Codes | 0x010d001202000000 | | | - 10 GbE Compliance | 0x00 | | | - SONET Compliance | 0x0000 | | | - Ethernet Compliance | 0x02 | 1000BASE-LX | | - Link Length | 0x12 | Long distance (L) | | - Transmitter Technology| 0x0012 | Longwave laser (LL) | | - Transmission Media | 0x0d | Single Mode (SM) | | - Channel speed | 0x01 | 100 MBytes/Sec | +--------------------------+--------------------+------------------------------+ | Encoding | 0x01 | 8B10B | | BR, Nominal | 13 | Gigabit | |--------------------------+--------------------+------------------------------| | Length(9um fiber) 1km | 10 | 10km | | Length(9um fiber) 100m | 100 | 10000m | | Length(50um) 10m | 55 | 550m | | Length(62.5um) 10m | 55 | 550m | | Length(copper) 1m | 0 | 0m | |--------------------------+--------------------+------------------------------| | Vendor Name | CIENA | | | Vendor OUI | 0x000000 | | | Vendor PN | XCVR-010M31-03 | | | Vendor Revision | 10 | | | Wavelength | 0 | | |--------------------------+--------------------+------------------------------| | Options | 0x1a | | | - RATE_SELECT | Bit 5 | No | | - TX_DISABLE | Bit 4 | Yes | | - TX_FAULT | Bit 3 | Yes | | - Loss of Signal Invert | Bit 2 | No | | - Loss of Signal | Bit 1 | Yes | |--------------------------+--------------------+------------------------------| | BR, max | 0 | | | BR, min | 0 | | | Vendor Serial Number | A9640060800547 | | | Date (mm/dd/yy) | 03/15/06 | | |--------------------------+--------------------+------------------------------| | Diag Monitor Type | 0x0 | | | - Legacy diagnostics | Bit 7 | No | | - Diagnostics monitoring| Bit 6 | No | | - Internally calibrated | Bit 5 | No | | - Externally calibrated | Bit 4 | No | | - Rx power measurement | Bit 3 | OAM | |--------------------------+--------------------+------------------------------| | Enhanced Options | 0x0 | | | - Alarm/Warning Flags | Bit 7 | No | | - Soft TX_DISABLE | Bit 6 | No | | - Soft TX_FAULT | Bit 5 | No | | - Soft RX_LOS | Bit 4 | No | | - Soft RATE_SELECT | Bit 3 | No | |--------------------------+--------------------+------------------------------| | SFF-8472 Compliance | 0x0 | None | +--------------------------+--------------------+------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-41

Procedure 4-15 Determining transceiver speed When a transceiver is plugged in, the port speed is blank until a link is established, and then it is set to match the transceiver speed. The Encoding “Value” column displays the actual value read from the optic, while the “Decoded String Equivalent” column indicates the supported port speed. Step

Action

1

Display transceiver information: port xcvr show

2

Display transceiver vendor data: port xcvr show port <port> vendor where port <port>

is the port.

vendor

displays transceiver vendor data. —end—

Examples The following example shows sample output for the port show command. > port show +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Port Table | Operational Status | Admin Config | |--------+--------+----+--------------+----+---+-------+----+----+-------+----| | Port | Port | | Link State | | | |Auto| | |Auto| | Name | Type |Link| Duration |XCVR|STP| Mode |Neg |Link| Mode |Neg | |--------+--------+----+--------------+----+---+-------+----+----+-------+----| | 1 |10/100/G| Up | 0d 5h 4m27s| |FWD| 100/FD| On |Ena |1000/FD| On | | 2 |10/100/G| Up | 0d 5h 4m27s| |FWD| 100/FD| On |Ena |1000/FD| On | | 3 |10/100/G|Down| 0d 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| | On |Ena |1000/FD| On | | 4 |10/100/G|Down| 0d 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| | On |Ena |1000/FD| On | | 5 |10/100/G|Down| 0d 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| | On |Ena |1000/FD| On | | 6 |10/100/G|Down| 0d 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| | On |Ena |1000/FD| On | | 7 |10/100/G|Down| 0d 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| | On |Ena |1000/FD| On | | 8 |10/100/G|Down| 0d 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| | On |Ena |1000/FD| On | | 9 |10/100/G|Down| 0d 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| | On |Ena |Auto/FD| On | | 10 |10/100/G|Down| 0d 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| | On |Ena |Auto/FD| On | | 11 |10/100/G|Down| 0d 0h 0m 0s| |Dis| | On |Ena |Auto/FD| On | | 12 | Gig | Up | 4d 2h48m52s|Ena |FWD|1000/FD| On |Ena |Auto/FD| On | +--------+--------+----+--------------+----+---+-------+----+----+-------+----+

The following example shows sample output for the port xcvr show port vendor command.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-42 Port management > port xcvr show port 1 vendor +------------------------ XCVR VENDOR DATA - Port 1 ------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | Decoded String Equivalent | +--------------------------+--------------------+------------------------------+ | Identifier | 0x3 | SFP transciever | | Ext. Identifier | 0x4 | SFP/GBIC | | Connector | 0x7 | LC | +--------------------------+--------------------+------------------------------+ | Transceiver Codes | 0x0000000002000000 | | | - SONET Compliance | 0x0000 | | | - Ethernet Compliance | 0x02 | 1000BASE-LX | | - Link Length | 0x00 | unknown | | - Transmitter Technology| 0x0000 | unknown | | - Transmission Media | 0x00 | unknown | | - Channel speed | 0x00 | unknown | +--------------------------+--------------------+------------------------------+ | Encoding | 0x01 | 8B10B | | BR, Nominal | 13 | Gigabit | |--------------------------+--------------------+------------------------------| ... +--------------------------+--------------------+------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-43

Procedure 4-16 Tuning XFP transceivers Tunable XFPs provide the ability to set the laser frequency in gigahertz (GHz), wavelength in nanometers with decimals, or set the channel. When you set the value for the frequency, wavelength, or channel, the other parameters are automatically populated. If the range is set out of the supported range for the XFP, an error message is returned with the correct range. Attempting to set the tuning parameters for an SFP that does not support tunability generates an error. Note: Tuning an XCVR will cause a traffic outage lasting no more than a few seconds. Step

Action

To tune XFP transceivers 1

View the current values for frequency, wavelength or channel: port xcvr show port <port> tunability where

2

port <port>

is the port.

tunability

displays transceiver tunable data.

Set the frequency, wavelength, or channel: port xcvr set port <port> {[frequency ] | [wavelength <String>] | [channel ]} where port <port>

is the port or ports to set.

frequency

is the transceiver frequency in GHz.

wavelength <String>

is the transceiver wavelength in nanometers.

channel

is the transceiver channel number.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-44 Port management To unset transceiver values 3

Unset transceiver values: port xcvr unset port <port> {frequency} {wavelength} {channel} where port <port>

is the port or ports to unset.

frequency

is the transceiver frequency.

wavelength <String>

is the transceiver wavelength.

channel

is the transceiver channel number. —end—

Examples The following example shows sample output for a port with a tunable XFP. > port xcvr show port 2.1 tunability +-------------------- XCVR Tunability - Port 2.1 -----------------+ | Field | Value | +----------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Frequency Tunable | Yes | +-----------------------+-----------------+-----------------+----------+ | | GHz | nm | ch# | | +-----------------+-----------------+----------+ | Admin | 191100 | 1568.8 | 1 | | Oper Min | 191100 | 1568.8 | 1 | | Oper Max | 196150 | 1528.4 | 102 | | Oper Value | 191100 | 1568.8 | 1 | | Oper Error | 0 | 0.0 | 0 | +-----------------------+-----------------+-----------------+----------+ | Oper Grid Spacing | 50 | +-----------------------+----------------------------------------------+

The following example shows sample output for a port without support for tunability. > port xcvr show port 48 tunability Not Supported for port 48 The following example sets the frequency to 196150 on port 9. > port xcvr set port 9 frequency 196150

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Port management 4-45

Procedure 4-17 Setting the port connector mode Some ports (called dual mode or combination ports) support both RJ45 and SFP (including smaller size SFP+) connectors. Only one of these connectors can be active at a given time. Some ports support a default connector mode, where the mode operates as SFP if a transceiver is installed, or an RJ45 if not. You can set the connector mode manually for the port. Table 4-4 shows the dual mode ports and default mode for each platform that supports them. Table 4-4 Factory default general port settings by platform Platform

Ports

Default Connector Mode

3930

1-4

Default

3932

1-4

Default

3940

1-24

RJ45

5140

1-24

SFP

Note: The port connector mode is applicable only to combination ports that support RJ45 or SFP connectors. It does not apply to XFP ports. In addition, speed is set to “Auto” with auto-negotiation enabled. So, you can install 1G or 100M transceivers, and the system will automatically set the speed accordingly. If these settings or other port attributes are set explicitly and do not match the capabilities of the active connector, a mismatch warning is generated. The warning is cleared when the attributes match the capabilities of the active connector. Note: If you attempt to set the mode to a connector that is not supported for the specified port, the system generates a “Capability not supported” error message. Step

Action

1

Set the mode for a specific port: port set port <port> mode <default|rj45|sfp> where port <port>

is the port.

mode is the physical interface connector mode. <default|rj45|sfp> 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

4-46 Port management

Example The following example sets the mode for port 9 to RJ45. port set port 9 mode rj45

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-1

Hardware resource management

5-

This chapter describes how to configure resource management for customized assignment of hardware resources.

CAUTION Service disruption

Configuration of resource management requires a reboot to implement changes. The system assigns hardware resources (classifier, meter, and counter resource types) for various software features. Depending upon the feature, you can reassign these resources to provide additional resources for other features. This customized resource management is supported for the following features: •

Accelerated CFM over PBB-TE



Broadcast containment



CFM



DHCP relay



Loss measurement



Traffic profiling



Virtual circuit statistics



Virtual switch Layer 2 enhanced transforms



Transport OAM

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-2 Hardware resource management

Each resource type is mapped into a number of pools, where each pool contains a number of resources. The number of pools and resources per pool depends upon the platform as shown in Table 5-1. Table 5-1 Resource pools Platform

Resource type

Number of pools Pool boundary

3940, 5140

Classifiers

16

128

Meters

16

128

Counters

16

128

8

256

8

512 (256 meter pairs)

8

256

16

512

16

1024 (512 meter pairs)

16

512

3916, 3930, 3931, Classifiers 3932 Meters Counters 3960, 5142, 5150, Classifiers 5160 Meters Counters

Meter resources are allocated differently depending upon the platform. On the 3940 and 5140 platforms, the reserved resources limit prevents meters from being consumed by other features. On the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160, the meter resources are global, and availability is not restricted, but is only configurable for certain features. The 3916, 3930, 3931, and 3932 platforms have an actual system wide limit of 2048. The 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms have an actual system wide limit of 8192 meters, though the sum of all assigned meter counts can exceed 8192 up to 16,384. The reserved resource value represents a limit to the number of resources for a feature, but does not guarantee availability.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-3

Each feature consumes hardware resources at a different rate depending upon the configuration as shown in Table 5-2. Table 5-2 Resources consumed per feature and type Feature

Resource type

Resources consumed

Accelerated CFM over PBT (configurable on 5150 only)

Classifiers

1

Meters

0

Counters

0

Broadcast containment Classifiers

CFM (not configurable on 3916, 3930, 3931, and 3932)

DHCP relay (not configurable on 3916, 3930, 3931, and 3932)

Loss Measurement (3916, 3930, 3931,

3932, 5142, 5160 only)

3 maximum per filter

Meters

2

Counters

2

Classifiers

On 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms, CFM consumes 39 static entries by default. On 3940 and 5140 platforms, CFM consumes classifiers depending upon the configuration and classification type in use. For details, refer to 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Fault and Performance Management (009-3220-009).

Meters

0

Counters

0

Classifiers

On 3960, 5142, 5150 and 5160 platforms, DHCP relay consumes 2 static entries by default. On 3940 and 5140 platforms, DHCP relay consumes 2 classifiers for each VLAN with DHCP relay enabled.

Meters

0

Counters

0

Classifiers

2

Meters

0

Counters

0

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-4 Hardware resource management Table 5-2 Resources consumed per feature and type (continued) Feature

Resource type

Resources consumed

Traffic profiling

Classifiers

Varies. By default, each port is set to the standarddot1dpri mode, which consumes 2 classifiers per port. Additional standard traffic profile entries consume classifiers based on the highest number of configured classifiers per type. • standard-dot1dpri - up to 8 • standard-ip-prec - up to 8 • standard-dscp - up to 64 • standard-vlan - 1 • standard-vlan-dot1dpri - up to 9 • standard-vlan-ipp - up to 9 • standard-vlan-dscp - up to 65 • hierarchical-port (3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160) - Consumes classifiers based upon the sum of the parent and child mode classifiers. • hierarchical-vlan (3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160) - Consumes classifiers based upon the sum of the parent and child mode classifiers. For example, if you created a traffic profile entry with 2.1D, 2 IP Prec, and 12 DSCP classifiers, the total classifiers consumed would be 12.

Meters

2

Counters

2

Classifiers Transport OAM (configurable on 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960 Meters 5142, 5150, and 5160 Counters platforms)

250 static entries by default 0 0

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-5 Table 5-2 Resources consumed per feature and type (continued) Feature

Resource type

Resources consumed

Virtual circuit statistics

Classifiers

Varies. When statistics are enabled for a virtual circuit, classifiers are consumed depending upon the number of ports in the provider VLAN associated with the virtual circuit and the platform. • On the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms, a virtual circuit consumes one classifier for received traffic, and each port in the provider VLAN consumes one classifier for transmitted traffic. • On the 3940 and 5140 platforms, a virtual circuit consumes two classifiers for received traffic, and each port in the provider VLAN consumes two classifiers for transmitted traffic.

Meters

0

Counters

Varies. When statistics are enabled for a virtual circuit, counters are consumed depending upon the number of ports in the provider VLAN associated with the virtual circuit. • On the 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms, a virtual circuit consumes one counter for received traffic, and each port in the provider VLAN consumes one counter for transmitted traffic. • On the 3940 and 5140 platforms, a virtual circuit consumes two counters for received traffic, and each port in the provider VLAN consumes two counters for transmitted traffic

Virtual switch enhanced Classifiers L2 transform (configurable on 3916, Meters 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960 Counters 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms)

8 static entries by default 0 0

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-6 Hardware resource management

This chapter provides the following procedures for hardware resources: •

“Configuring resources” on page 5-7



“Freeing all accelerated CFM over PBB-TE resources” on page 5-9



“Restoring accelerated CFM over PBB-TE resources to default values” on page 5-11



“Freeing all broadcast containment resources” on page 5-13



“Restoring broadcast containment resources to default values” on page 5-14



“Freeing CFM resources” on page 5-16



“Restoring CFM resources to default values” on page 5-17



“Freeing DHCP relay resources” on page 5-19



“Restoring DHCP relay resources to default values” on page 5-20



“Freeing traffic profiling resources” on page 5-25



“Setting traffic profiling resources” on page 5-27



“Restoring traffic profiling resources to default values” on page 5-30



“Freeing virtual circuit statistics resources” on page 5-32



“Restoring virtual circuit statistics resources to default values” on page 5-33



“Configuring virtual switch L2 enhanced transform resources” on page 5-35



“Freeing all virtual switch L2 enhanced transform resources” on page 5-37



“Configuring transport OAM resources” on page 5-38



“Freeing all transport OAM resources” on page 5-40



“Displaying resource configuration information” on page 5-41



“Resolving resource configuration validation errors” on page 5-42



“Addressing classifier resource allocation too small for current configuration error” on page 5-43



“Displaying resource configuration in the configuration file” on page 5-45

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-7

Procedure 5-1 Configuring resources When setting the pool count, enter the value of the number of resources. The system rounds the number of resources up to the nearest pool boundary listed in Table 5-1 and allocates the specified number of resources by pool. For example, if 750 traffic profile classifier resources are specified to be reallocated on the 3960 platform, 750 is rounded up to the nearest pool boundary, 1024, so 2 pools are reallocated. On every platform, the number of allocated pools for each resource type must match. On the 3940 and 5140 platforms, the configured pool count for each resource type must be equal. On the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms, for features that use meters, that is, traffic-profiling and broadcast-containment, the configured count for meters must be equal to twice the configured count of the classifier type. For features that do not use meters the value should be 0 for meters. The configured count for the classifier and counter must match, otherwise, the validation will fail. Note: For 3940 and 5140 platforms, the system software requires the reservation of each resource type, regardless of whether the feature uses the resource. For example, traffic profiling and broadcast containment are the only two features that actually consume meter resources. If you are configuring classifiers or counters to reassign them to a feature that doesn’t actually consume meters, you still have to configure the assignment of meter resources. After reassigning resources, you can manually run the command to validate resource configuration. In addition, the system software performs resource validation automatically when you save the configuration. When the validation is successful, the CLI returns to the prompt. If resource validation fails, an error message is generated. For error examples and resolutions, see “Resolving resource configuration validation errors” on page 5-42. Note: If resource validation fails while attempting to save the configuration, the configuration is not saved.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-8 Hardware resource management

Once the validation is successful, you need to reboot in order for the resource allocation to take effect. Step

Action

1

Set the pool counts for each resource type per feature you want to reassign from. resource-manager pool set resource feature count

2

Set the pool counts for each resource type per feature you want to reassign to. resource-manager pool set resource feature count

3

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

4

Save the configuration. configuration save

5

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-9

Procedure 5-2 Freeing all accelerated CFM over PBB-TE resources If accelerated CFM over PBB-TE is not used, you can free up the classifier, meter, and counter resources allocated to accelerated CFM over PBB-TE in order to use them for other features, for example, traffic profiling. Free up classifier, meter, and counter resources by setting them to 0. CFM over PBB-TE resources are only configurable on the 5150 platform. Step

Action

1

Disable accelerated CFM over PBB-TE: cfm service disable service <service> where service <service> is accelerated CFM over PBB-TE.

2

Unset the accelerate attribute: cfm service unset service <service> accelerate where service <service> is accelerated CFM over PBB-TE.

3

Enable accelerated CFM over PBB-TE: cfm service enable service <service> where service <service> is accelerated CFM over PBB-TE.

4

Set the pool count for classifier resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature accelerated-pbt-over-cfm count 0

5

Set the pool count for meter resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource meter feature accelerated-pbt-over-cfm count 0

6

Set the pool count for counter resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature accelerated-pbt-over-cfm count 0

7

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-10 Hardware resource management 8

Save the configuration. configuration save

9

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-11

Procedure 5-3 Restoring accelerated CFM over PBB-TE resources to default values Restore accelerated CFM over PBB-TE resources to default values if you allocated the resources to different features, and then choose to use accelerated CFM over PBB-TE. Table 5-4 shows the default and maximum number of resources that can be reserved for accelerated CFM over PBB-TE. Table 5-3 Accelerated CFM over PBB-TE default and maximum resources reservation Platform

Resource type

Default

Maximum resources

5150

Classifiers

512

512

Meters

0

512

Counters

512

512

Step

Action

1

Set the pool count for classifier resources to the default for the platform: resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature accelerated-pbt-over-cfm count where is the default pool count for classifier resources for the platform.

2

Set the pool count for meter resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource meter feature accelerated-pbt-over-cfm count <MeterResources> where <MeterResources> is the default pool count for meter resources for the platform.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-12 Hardware resource management 3

Set the pool count for counter resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature accelerated-pbt-over-cfm count where is the default pool count for counter resources for the platform.

4

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

5

Save the configuration. configuration save

6

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-13

Procedure 5-4 Freeing all broadcast containment resources If broadcast containment is not used, you can free up the classifier, meter, and counter resources allocated to broadcast containment in order to use them for other features, for example, traffic profiling. Free up classifier, meter, and counter resources by setting them to 0. Resources are not required if the broadcast containment resource mode is set to off. You can set the broadcast containment resource mode by means of the broadcast containment set resource mode off command. Step

Action

1

Delete any existing broadcast containment filters. broadcast-containment delete filter where is the name of the broadcast containment filter to delete

2

Set the pool count for classifier resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature broadcast-containment count 0

3

Set the pool count for meter resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource meter feature broadcast-containment count 0

4

Set the pool count for counter resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature broadcast-containment count 0

5

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

6

Save the configuration. configuration save

7

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-14 Hardware resource management

Procedure 5-5 Restoring broadcast containment resources to default values Restore broadcast containment resources to default values if you allocated the resources to different features, and then choose to use broadcast containment. Table 5-4 shows the default and maximum number of resources that can be reserved for broadcast containment. Table 5-4 Broadcast containment default and maximum resources reservation per platform Platform

Resource type

Default

Maximum resources

3940, 5140

Classifiers

128

128

Meters

128

128

Counters

128

128

Classifiers

256

256

Meters

512

512

Counters

256

256

Classifiers

512

512

Meters

1024

1024

Counters

512

512

3916, 3930, 3931, 3932

3960, 5142, 5150, 5160

Step

Action

1

Set the pool count for classifier resources to the default for the platform: resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature broadcast-containment count where is the default pool count for classifier resources for the platform.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-15 2

Set the pool count for meter resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource meter feature broadcast-containment count <MeterResources> where <MeterResources> is the default pool count for meter resources for the platform.

3

Set the pool count for counter resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature broadcast-containment count where is the default pool count for counter resources for the platform.

4

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

5

Save the configuration. configuration save

6

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-16 Hardware resource management

Procedure 5-6 Freeing CFM resources If for any reason, the number of consumed classifiers exceeds the configured reservation, then CFM will switch from service network mode to global mode. In global mode, classifiers are based on the EtherType and MD level only, rather than service network, EtherType, and MD level, so any frame with a CFM or Y.1731 EtherType will be delivered to the CPU. If CFM is not used, you can reallocate the resources reserved for classifier, meter, and counter resources to 0 and use them for another feature. CFM resources are only configurable on the 3940, 3960, 5140, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms. Step

Action

1

Delete any existing CFM services. cfm service delete service where

2

is the CFM service to delete

Set the pool count for classifier resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature cfm count 0

3

Set the pool count for meter resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource meter feature cfm count 0

4

Set the pool count for counter resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature cfm count 0

5

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

6

Save the configuration. configuration save

7

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-17

Procedure 5-7 Restoring CFM resources to default values Restore CFM resources to default values if you allocated the resources to different features, and then choose to use CFM. Table 5-5 shows the default and maximum number of resources that can be reserved for CFM. Table 5-5 CFM default and maximum resource reservation per platform Platform

Resource type

Default

Maximum resources

3940, 5140

Classifiers

128

1792

Meters

128

1792

Counters

128

1792

Classifiers

Not applicable

Not applicable

Meters

Not applicable

Not applicable

Counters

Not applicable

Not applicable

Classifiers

512

512

Meters

0

0

Counters

512

512

3916, 3930, 3931, 3932

3960, 5142, 5150, 5160

Step

Action

1

Set the pool count for classifier resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature cfm count where is the default pool count for classifier resources for the platform.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-18 Hardware resource management 2

Set the pool count for meter resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource meter feature cfm count <MeterResources> where <MeterResources> is the default pool count for meter resources for the platform.

3

Set the pool count for counter resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature cfm count where is the default pool count for counter resources for the platform.

4

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

5

Save the configuration. configuration save

6

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-19

Procedure 5-8 Freeing DHCP relay resources DHCP relay resources are only configurable on the 3940, 3960, 5140, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms. If DHCP relay is not used, you can reallocate the resources reserved for classifier, meter, and counter resources to 0 and use them for another feature. Step

Action

1

Delete any existing DHCP relay entries. dhcp l2-relay-agent delete vlan where

2

is the VLAN ID of the relay agent

Set the pool count for classifier resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature dhcp-relay count 0

3

Set the pool count for meter resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource meter feature dhcprelay count 0

4

Set the pool count for counter resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature dhcp-relay count 0

5

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

6

Save the configuration. configuration save

7

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-20 Hardware resource management

Procedure 5-9 Restoring DHCP relay resources to default values Restore DHCP relay resources to default values if you allocated the resources to different features, and then choose to use DHCP relay. Table 5-6 shows the default and maximum number of resources that can be reserved for DHCP relay. Table 5-6 DHCP relay default and maximum resource reservation per platform Platform

Resource type

Default

Maximum resources

3940, 5140

Classifiers

128

256

Meters

128

256

Counters

128

256

Classifiers

Not configurable

Not configurable

Meters

Not configurable

Not configurable

Counters

Not configurable

Not configurable

Classifiers

512

512

Meters

0

0

Counters

512

512

3916, 3930, 3931, 3932

3960, 5142, 5150, 5160

Step

Action

1

Set the pool count for classifier resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature dhcp-relay count where is the default pool count for classifier resources for the platform.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-21 2

Set the pool count for meter resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource meter feature dhcprelay count <MeterResources> where <MeterResources>

3

is the default pool count for meter resources for the platform.

Set the pool count for counter resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature dhcp-relay count where

4

is the default pool count for counter resources for the platform.

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

5

Save the configuration. configuration save

6

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-22 Hardware resource management

Procedure 5-10 Configuring loss measurement resources Configure loss measurement resources so that hardware-assisted Y.1731 loss measurement session storage and counter management is performed by means of the Broadcom processor instead of the FPGA. Loss management resources are only configurable on the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 5142, and 5160 platforms. By default, loss measurement does not have any assigned resources. To use this feature, you need to assign available classifier and counter resources to it. On 3916, 3930, 3931, and 3932 platforms, allocation of one resource block (of 256 classifiers) supports up to 42 loss measurement sessions. A maximum of 120 loss measurement sessions can be configured for the platform. On 5142 and 5160 platforms, allocation of one resource block (of 512 classifiers) supports up to 85 loss measurement sessions. A maximum of 255 loss measurement sessions can be configured for the platform. The default and maximum number of resources that can be reserved for loss measurement are shown in Table 5-11. Table 5-7 Loss measurement default and maximum resource reservations per platform Platform

Resource type

Default

Maximum resources

3940, 3960, 5140, 5150

Classifiers

Not applicable

Not applicable

Meters

Not applicable

Not applicable

Counters

Not applicable

Not applicable

Classifiers

0

768

Meters

0

768

Counters

0

768

Classifiers

0

1536

Meters

0

1536

Counters

0

1536

3916, 3930, 3931, 3932

5142, 5160

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-23

Step

Action

1

Set the pool count for classifier resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature loss-measurement count where is the desired pool count for classifier resources for the platform.

2

Set the pool count for meter resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource meter feature dhcprelay count <MeterResources> where <MeterResources>

3

is the default pool count for meter resources for the platform.

Set the pool count for counter resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature dhcp-relay count where

4

is the default pool count for counter resources for the platform.

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

5

Save the configuration. configuration save

6

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-24 Hardware resource management

Procedure 5-11 Freeing all loss measurement resources To configure loss measurement resources so that hardware-assisted Y.1731 loss measurement session storage and counter management is performed by means of the FPGA instead of the Broadcom processor, you can reallocate the resources back to 0 and use them for another feature. Note that 0 is the default value for resources. Loss management resources are only configurable on the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 5142, and 5160 platforms. Step

Action

1

Set the pool count for classifier resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature loss-measurement count 0

2

Set the pool count for meter resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource meter feature loss-measurement count 0

3

Set the pool count for counter resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature loss-measurement count 0

4

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

5

Save the configuration. configuration save

6

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-25

Procedure 5-12 Freeing traffic profiling resources If traffic profiling is not used, you can reallocate the resources reserved for classifier, meter, and counter resources to 0 and use them for another feature. Note: On 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms, which use the global meter pool, the maximum resources shows a configurable maximum and an actual maximum. — The configurable maximum is twice the number of classifiers and counters and the value can be greater than the global meter pool. — The actual maximum is equal to the size of the global meter pool. Before reassigning traffic profiling resources for other features on 3940 and 5140 platforms, you may need to adjust the port to traffic profiling meter pool assignments to make sure there are enough traffic profiling meter pools that are empty. When ports are associated with a traffic profiling meter pool as described in “Setting traffic profiling port attributes” on page 14-44, hardware resources are allocated for classifiers, meters, and counters (statistics). Also, for each associated port, 2 classifier resources, 1 for ARP and 1 for nonconforming standard profiles, are automatically consumed. Step

Action

1

Delete any existing traffic profiles. traffic-profiling delete port profile where

2



is the list of ports that you want to delete existing traffic profiles from.



sets the parent profile.

Set the traffic profiling mode to none for each port. traffic-profiling set mode none where

3

is the name of the port.

Set the pool count for classifier resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature traffic-profiling count 0

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-26 Hardware resource management 4

Set the pool count for meter resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource meter feature trafficprofiling count 0

5

Set the pool count for counter resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature traffic-profiling count 0

6

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

7

Save the configuration. configuration save

8

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-27

Procedure 5-13 Setting traffic profiling resources The default and maximum number of resources that can be reserved for traffic profiling per resource type are shown in Table 5-8. Table 5-8 Traffic profiling default and maximum resource reservation Platform

Resource type

Default

Maximum resources

3940, 5140

Classifiers

1024

1792

Meters

1024

1792

Counters

1024

1792

Classifiers

1024

1536

Meters

2048

3072 (configurable) 2048 (actual)

Counters

1024

1536

Classifiers

4096

7168

Meters

8192

14336 (configurable) 8192 (actual)

Counters

4096

7168

3916, 3930, 3931, 3932

3960, 5142, 5150, 5160

Note: Traffic profiling meter pools are only applicable on 3940 and 5140 platforms.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-28 Hardware resource management

Step

Action

1

Determine available non-empty meter pools: traffic-profiling show meter-pool

2

Reassign the ports in one of the meter pools to a different non-empty meter pool: traffic-profiling set port meter-pool <MeterPool> where port is the port to be reassigned. meter-pool <MeterPool>

3

is the non-empty meter pool that the ports are to be reassigned to.

Set classifier resources to lower the pool count by three resource pools: resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature traffic-profiling count where count

4

is the resource count.

Set meter resources to lower the pool count by three resource pools: resource-manager pool set resource meter feature traffic-profiling count where count

5

is the resource count.

Set counter resources to lower the pool count by three resource pools: resource-manager pool set resource counter feature traffic-profiling count where count

6

is the resource count.

Validate the configuration: resource-manager validate

7

Save the configuration: configuration save

8

Reboot the system to implement the changes: chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-29

Example The following example shows sample output for the traffic-profiling show meter-pool command, which is used to determine available non-empty meter pools in step 1. traffic-profiling show meter-pool +--------------------- TRAFFIC-PROFILING METER-POOL MAP -----------------------+ | Meter-Pool | Ports |Class | Used |Meters| Used |Stats | Used | +------------+-----------------------+------+------+------+------+------+------+ | TP-POOL1 | | 128 | 2 | 64 | 0 | 64 | 0 | +------------+-----------------------+------+------+------+------+------+------+ | TP-POOL2 | | 128 | 0 | 64 | 0 | 64 | 0 | +------------+-----------------------+------+------+------+------+------+------+ | TP-POOL3 | 1 2 | 128 | 4 | 64 | 0 | 64 | 0 | +------------+-----------------------+------+------+------+------+------+------+ | TP-POOL4 | 3 4 | 128 | 4 | 64 | 0 | 64 | 0 | +------------+-----------------------+------+------+------+------+------+------+ | TP-POOL5 | 5 6 | 128 | 4 | 64 | 0 | 64 | 0 | +------------+-----------------------+------+------+------+------+------+------+ | TP-POOL6 | 7 8 | 128 | 3 | 64 | 1 | 64 | 1 | +------------+-----------------------+------+------+------+------+------+------+ | TP-POOL7 | 9 10 | 128 | 4 | 64 | 0 | 64 | 0 | +------------+-----------------------+------+------+------+------+------+------+ | TP-POOL8 | 11 12 | 128 | 4 | 64 | 0 | 64 | 0 | +------------+-----------------------+------+------+------+------+------+------+

In this example, ports 3 and 4 from TP-POOL4 are re-assigned to TP-POOL3 and TP-POOL5 respectively. traffic-profiling set port 3 meter-pool TP-POOL3 traffic-profiling set port 4 meter-pool TP-POOL5

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-30 Hardware resource management

Procedure 5-14 Restoring traffic profiling resources to default values Restore traffic profiling resources to default values if you allocated the resources to different features, and then choose to use traffic profiling. The default and maximum number of resources that can be reserved for traffic profiling per resource type are shown in Table 5-9. Table 5-9 Traffic profiling default and maximum resource reservation Platform

Resource type

Default

Maximum resources

3940, 5140

Classifiers

1024

1792

Meters

1024

1792

Counters

1024

1792

Classifiers

1024

1536

Meters

2048

3072 (configurable) 2048 (actual)

Counters

1024

1536

Classifiers

4096

7168

Meters

8192

14336 (configurable) 8192 (actual)

Counters

4096

7168

3916, 3930, 3931, 3932

3960, 5142, 5150, 5160

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-31

Step

Action

1

Set the pool count for classifier resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature traffic-profiling count where is the default pool count for classifier resources for the platform.

2

Set the pool count for meter resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource meter feature traffic-profiling count <MeterResources> where <MeterResources> is the default pool count for meter resources for the platform.

3

Set the pool count for counter resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature traffic-profiling count where is the default pool count for counter resources for the platform.

4

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

5

Save the configuration. configuration save

6

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-32 Hardware resource management

Procedure 5-15 Freeing virtual circuit statistics resources If virtual circuit statistics are not used, you can reallocate the resources reserved for classifier, meter, and counter resources to 0 and use them for another feature. Note: On 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms, which use the global meter pool, the maximum resources shows a configurable maximum and an actual maximum. — The configurable maximum is twice the number of classifiers and counters and the value can be greater than the global meter pool. — The actual maximum is equal to the size of the global meter pool. Step

Action

1

Disable statistics for each virtual circuit with statistics collection turned on. virtual-circuit ethernet set vc statistics off where

2

is the virtual circuit.

Set the pool count for classifier resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature vc-statistics count 0

3

Set the pool count for meter resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource meter feature vc-statistics count 0

4

Set the pool count for counter resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature vc-statistics count 0

5

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

6

Save the configuration. configuration save

7

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-33

Procedure 5-16 Restoring virtual circuit statistics resources to default values Restore virtual circuit statistics resources to default values if you allocated the resources to different features, and then choose to use virtual statistics resources. The default and maximum number of resources that can be reserved for virtual circuit statistics are shown in Table 5-10. Table 5-10 Virtual circuit statistics default and maximum resource reservation per platform Platform

Resource type

Default

Maximum resources

3940, 5140

Classifiers

128

1792

Meters

128

1792

Counters

128

1792

Classifiers

128

1536

Meters

0

0

Counters

128

1536

Classifiers

512

7168

Meters

0

0

Counters

512

7168

3916, 3930, 3931, 3932

3960, 5142, 5150, 5160

Step

Action

1

Set the pool count for classifier resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature vc-statistics count where is the default pool count for classifier resources for the platform.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-34 Hardware resource management 2

Set the pool count for meter resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource meter feature vc-statistics count <MeterResources> where <MeterResources>

3

is the default pool count for meter resources for the platform.

Set the pool count for counter resources to the default for the platform. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature vc-statistics count where

4

is the default pool count for meter resources for the platform.

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

5

Save the configuration. configuration save

6

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-35

Procedure 5-17 Configuring virtual switch L2 enhanced transform resources Virtual switch L2 enhanced transform resources are only applicable to the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, and 5150 platforms. Configuring virtual switch L2 enhanced transform resources on the 3940 and 5140 platforms is not supported. On the 5142 and 5160 platforms, it is not required. By default, virtual switch L2 enhanced transform does not have any assigned resources. To use this feature, you need to assign available classifier and counter resources to it. The default and maximum number of resources that can be reserved for virtual switch L2 enhanced transform are shown in Table 5-11. Table 5-11 Virtual switch L2 enhanced transform default and maximum resource reservations per platform Platform

Resource type

Default

Maximum resources

3940, 5140

Classifiers

Not applicable

Not applicable

Meters

Not applicable

Not applicable

Counters

Not applicable

Not applicable

Classifiers

Not required

Not required

Meters

Not required

Not required

Counters

Not required

Not required

Classifiers

0

256

Meters

0

0

Counters

0

256

Classifiers

0

512

Meters

0

0

Counters

0

512

5142, 5160

3916, 3930, 3931, 3932

3960, 5142, 5150, 5160

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-36 Hardware resource management

Step

Action

1

Set the pool count for classifier resources. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature vs-enhanced-l2-transform count where count

2

is the number of resources to assign.

Set the pool count for counter resources. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature vs-enhanced-l2-transform count where

3

is the pool count for counter resources for the platform.

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

4

Save the configuration. configuration save

5

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-37

Procedure 5-18 Freeing all virtual switch L2 enhanced transform resources If virtual switch L2 enhanced transform is no longer used, you can reallocate the resources reserved for classifier and counter resources back to 0 and use them for another feature. Note that 0 is the default value for classifier and counter resources. Step

Action

1

Remove the ports with virtual switch L2 enhanced transform configuration from their associated virtual switch. virtual-switch ethernet delete port vlan where

2

is the virtual switch.

Set the virtual switch L2 transform mode to the default for all ports. port set port 1-12 vs-l2-transform i-push,e-pop

3

Set the pool count for classifier resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature vs-enhanced-l2-transform count 0

4

Set the pool count for counter resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature vs-enhanced-l2-transform count 0

5

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

6

Save the configuration. configuration save

7

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-38 Hardware resource management

Procedure 5-19 Configuring transport OAM resources Configure transport OAM resources as required for use with OAM features such as CFM over MPLS, CFM over PBB-TE, VCCV, LSP BFD, AIS/LDI, and VS-based remote management. Transport OAM resources are only applicable to the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms. On the 3916, 3930, 3931, and 3932 platforms, transport OAM does not have any assigned resources by default. To use this feature, you need to assign available classifier and counter resources to it. The default and maximum number of resources that can be reserved for transport OAM are shown in Table 5-12. Table 5-12 Transport OAM default and maximum resource reservations per platform Platform

Resource type

Default

Maximum resources

3940, 5140

Classifiers

Not applicable

Not applicable

Meters

Not applicable

Not applicable

Counters

Not applicable

Not applicable

Classifiers

0

256

Meters

0

0

Counters

0

256

Classifiers

512

512

Meters

0

0

Counters

512

512

3916, 3930, 3931, 3932

3960, 5142, 5150, 5160

Step

Action

1

Set the pool count for classifier resources. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature transport-oam count where count

is the number of resources to assign.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-39 2

Set the pool count for counter resources. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature transport-oam count where

3

is the pool count for counter resources for the platform.

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

4

Save the configuration. configuration save

5

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-40 Hardware resource management

Procedure 5-20 Freeing all transport OAM resources If transport OAM is no longer used, you can reallocate the resources reserved for classifier and counter resources back to 0 and use them for another feature. Note that 0 is the default value for classifier and counter resources on the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932 platforms. The default value for classifier, meter, and counter resources on the 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms is 512. Step

Action

1

Set the pool count for classifier resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature transport-oam count 0

2

Set the pool count for counter resources to 0. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature transport-oam count 0

3

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

4

Save the configuration. configuration save

5

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-41

Procedure 5-21 Displaying resource configuration information The system software provides a way to display the active configuration (what is currently running) and the candidate configuration (what it will be upon successful configuration save and reboot).You can also display detailed resource information for the CFM feature on 3940 and 5140 platforms and for the traffic profiling feature on all platforms. Step

Action

1

Determine the resource configuration information that you want to display. If you want to display

Then

active and candidate information

Perform step 2.

active configuration only

Perform step 3.

candidate configuration only Perform step 4.

2

detailed resource information for the CFM feature on the 3940 and 5140 platforms

Perform step 5.

detailed resource information for the traffic profiling feature

Perform step 6.

Display both active and candidate configuration: resource-manager show

3

Display active configuration only: resource-manager show active

4

Display candidate configuration only: resource-manager show candidate

5

Display detailed resource information for the CFM feature on the 3940 and 5140 platforms: resource-manager show feature cfm

6

Display detailed resource information for the traffic profiling feature: resource-manager show feature traffic-profiling —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-42 Hardware resource management

Procedure 5-22 Resolving resource configuration validation errors This section provides examples of some common validation error messages and the method to resolve them. Example - ERROR: : classifier, meter, and counter pool counts must match: resource-manager validate ERROR: traffic-profiling: classifier, meter, and counter pool counts must match ERROR: : classifier pools=14 meter pools=13 counter pools=14 ERROR: Resource validation failed: Resource allocation invalid

Step

1

Action

Display the candidate configuration.

resource-manager show candidate +--------------------------+------------+------------+------------+------------+----------+ | CANDIDATE RESOURCE CONFIGURATION | +--------------------------+------------+------------+------------+------------+----------+ | feature | resource | reserved | used | increment |pltfm max | +--------------------------+------------+------------+------------+------------+----------+ ...

2 ... | traffic-profiling | | ...

3

Scroll to the section for the feature listed in the error message to find the candidate configuration for the resource type. | classifier | | meter | | counter |

1792 | 512 | 1792 |

20 | 0 | 0 |

128 | 128 | 128 |

1792 | 1792 | 1792 |

Set the pool count for the resource types to match. Note: On the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3960 and 5150 platforms, in order for the pool counts to match, the reserved meter resources must be twice that of the reserved classifier resources. Also, the classifier and counter reserved resources must be equal. resource-manager pool set resource meter feature traffic-profiling count 1792

4

Re-validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

5

Save the configuration. configuration save

6

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-43

Procedure 5-23 Addressing classifier resource allocation too small for current configuration error If there are not enough resources to support the configuration of a feature, the following error is displayed when the resource-manager validate command is executed: ERROR: Resource validation failed: Resource allocation invalid

This error condition is addressed by performing one of the following: •

increasing the pool count so that the number of resources matches the active configuration



modifying the configuration of the feature

Step

Action

To increase the pool count so that the number of resources matches the active configuration 1

Set the pool count for classifier, meter, and counter resources to the match the active value shown in the error message. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature vc-statistics count resource-manager pool set resource meter feature vc-statistics count resource-manager pool set resource counter feature vc-statistics count where

2

is the active value displayed in the error message

Re-validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

3

Save the configuration. configuration save

4

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot

To modify the configuration of the feature 1

Display the configuration of the feature. In this case, check for virtual circuits with statistics collection turned on. virtual-circuit show

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-44 Hardware resource management +------ ETHERNET VIRTUAL CIRCUIT TABLE -----+ | Name | VLAN | Stats | +-----------------+-------------------------+ | 101 | 101 | On | +-----------------+-------------------------+ 2

Modify the configuration of the feature. virtual-circuit ethernet set vc 101 statistics off

3

Re-validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

4

Save the configuration. configuration save

5

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the resource-manager validate command for a configuration where there are not enough resources to support the configuration of the virtual circuit statistics feature. resource-manager validate ERROR: vc-statistics: classifier resource allocation too small for current configuration ERROR: : candidate=0 active=128 used=2 ERROR: vc-statistics: counter resource allocation too small for current configuration ERROR: : candidate=0 active=128 used=2 ERROR: Resource validation failed: Resource allocation invalid

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Hardware resource management 5-45

Procedure 5-24 Displaying resource configuration in the configuration file Once resource validation passes and the configuration file is saved, resource configuration is saved in the RESOURCE CONFIG section in the configuration file. Step

Action

1

View resource configuration in the configuration file: configuration show —end—

Example The following example shows sample output from the configuration show command. configuration show ! CN 3911 Configuration File ! Chassis MAC: 00:02:a1:22:bd:40 ! Created: Thu Oct 22 21:38:31 2009 ! Created by: CLI ! SW Package: Slot 1 - saos-06-06-00-0103 ! Build Number: 4708 ! MIB Number: 02-03-11-0027 ! ! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! ! RESOURCE CONFIG ! resource-manager pool set feature traffic-profiling resource classifier count 1792 resource-manager pool set feature traffic-profiling resource meter count 1792 resource-manager pool set feature traffic-profiling resource counter count 1792 resource-manager pool set feature broadcast-containment resource classifier count 0 resource-manager pool set feature broadcast-containment resource meter count 0 resource-manager pool set feature broadcast-containment resource counter count 0 resource-manager pool set feature cfm resource classifier count 0 resource-manager pool set feature cfm resource meter count 0 resource-manager pool set feature cfm resource counter count 0 resource-manager pool set feature vc-statistics resource classifier count 0 resource-manager pool set feature vc-statistics resource meter count 0 resource-manager pool set feature vc-statistics resource counter count 0 resource-manager pool set feature dhcp-relay resource classifier count 0 resource-manager pool set feature dhcp-relay resource meter count 0 resource-manager pool set feature dhcp-relay resource counter count 0 ! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! [more 9%] (q,g,space,enter)

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

5-46 Hardware resource management

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-1

System timing configuration

6-

System timing is the recovery and distribution of frequency, phase and timeof-day information to maintain synchronization between network elements. System timing is performed by means of: •

“Synchronous Ethernet”



“External timing interfaces”, which are — BITS — GPS



TDM line timing



“IEEE 1588 version 2 Precision Time Protocol” Note: To configure Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE), external timing interfaces or TDM line timing, you need to install the Advanced Ethernet license key. To configure IEEE 1588 v2 Precision Time Protocol, you need to install the Advanced Synchronization license key. To obtain the Advanced Ethernet license key or the Advanced Synchronization license key, contact Ciena Sales.

System timing is supported on the following platforms: •

3930 Sync



3930 Sync + External Timing



3931 Sync



3932



5142



5150 Packet Timing



5160 Note: The 3930 Sync, 3931 Sync, and 5150 platforms do not support external timing interfaces. The optional 10G module with BITS interface is required for BITS support on 5150.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-2 System timing configuration

System timing recovers timing from external sources, that is, timing inputs, and distributes timing to external destinations, that is, timing outputs, where timing could comprise of frequency, phase and time-of-day. A system can have multiple timing inputs: each timing input can have different characteristics that give it preference over other timing inputs. Different types of timing inputs can provide different components of frequency, phase and time-of-day to which the local clock is synchronized. In turn, the frequency, phase and time-of-day of the local clock can be distributed to other network elements through different types of timing outputs. Table 6-1 summarizes system timing inputs and outputs. Table 6-1 System timing inputs and outputs Frequency Inputs

Phase

Time of Day

• SyncE on any Ethernet • IEEE 1588v2 on any Ethernet port port • IEEE 1588v2 on any Ethernet port

• IEEE 1588v2 on any Ethernet port

• 1 PPS interface

• 1 PPS interface

• SYNC interface

• SYNC interface

• SYNC interface (BITS)

• NTP

• 10MHz interface

• Set time

• TDM port (3932 PWE) • Local oscillator Outputs

• SyncE on any Ethernet • 1 PPS interface port • SYNC interface • IEEE 1588v2 on any Ethernet port

IEEE 1588v2 on any Ethernet port 1 PPS interface SYNC interface

• SYNC interface (BITS) • 10 MHz interface

Synchronous Ethernet SyncE support provides a migration path from existing frequency synchronization distribution architectures based on SONET/SDH or GPS to a next generation packet network-based frequency synchronization architecture based on Carrier Ethernet with SyncE. SyncE assures that frequency is distributed at the physical layer where it is not subject to load impairments such as packet congestion and loss.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-3

There can be a number of Ethernet switches involved in the distribution of the reference timing signal. In such cases, the synchronization function within these Ethernet switches must be able to recover synchronization line timing from the incoming bit stream and propagate synchronization line timing to outgoing Ethernet ports. Figure 6-1 shows a reference timing signal, traceable to a Primary Reference Clock (PRC), which is injected into the Ethernet switch using an external clock port. This signal is extracted and processed by means of a synchronization function before injecting timing onto the Ethernet bit stream leaving the Ethernet switch. The clock supporting synchronous Ethernet networks is called the Ethernet Equipment Clock (EEC). Figure 6-1 Example of a synchronization network over synchronous Ethernet

Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM) is used to convey priority and clock traceability. SSM messages indicate the quality level of the system clocks located in the various network elements. Quality level is the holdover performance of a clock. SyncE port status is signaled by means of the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP). For more information, refer to “Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration” on page 7-1.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-4 System timing configuration

IEEE 1588 version 2 Precision Time Protocol IEEE 1588v2 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) synchronizes real-time clocks over a network with sub-microsecond accuracy, very low network bandwidth, and minimal CPU usage. PTP supports synchronization over various types of network encapsulations, for example, UDP/IP and Ethernet. PTP supports multicast and unicast messaging. Clocks are organized in a hierarchy: master clocks supply timing information to slave clocks. At the top of the hierarchy is the grandmaster clock. Typically, the grandmaster clock has a high-quality time source connected to it, for example, a GPS receiver or atomic clock. 39XX/51XX platforms can function as an ordinary clock (OC) slave as well as boundary clock (BC). On an OC, a single port participates in the clock hierarchy as a slave or master clock. On a BC, ports participate in the clock hierarchy as slave and master clocks. In BC mode, on the master side of some 39XX/51XX platforms (currently 5142 and 5160 only), one-step timestamping is supported. One-step timestamping means that the outgoing PTP “sync” messages are timestamped by the hardware as the packet is being transmitted onto the wire. For two-step timestaming, the “sync” packet contains an estimate that is typically generated in the software.

External timing interfaces External timing interfaces are: •

“BITS”



“GPS”

The BITS interface resides in the SYNC port.

BITS BITS is a timing signal that is used to distribute frequency synchronization in a telecom environment, typically in a central office. It is usually carried over T1/E1 lines. Timing is encoded within the transmitted data signal to synchronize the whole network. The 3930 Sync + External Timing, 3932, 5142, the optional 10G module with BITS interface for BITS support on 5150, and 5160 platforms input and output standard electrical specifications for a BITS frequency as follows: •

2.048 Mbps E1 compliant to ITU-T G.703-9



1.544 Mbps T1 compliant to GR-499 and ITU-T G.703-5



2048 KHz

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-5

Note: The SYNC port can be configured to be either BITS-IN or BITSOUT. It cannot be both BITS-IN and BITS-OUT simultaneously.

GPS The 3930 Sync + External Timing, 3932, 5142, and 5160 platforms can synchronize to a GPS receiver by means of: •

10 MHz mini-coax connector, which allows a frequency reference signal to be used as an input or generated as an output. The frequency of the signal can be configured as 10 MHz, 2.048 MHz, or 1.544 MHz.



1 PPS mini-coax connector, which allows a 1 PPS signal to be used as an input or generated as an output for phase synchronization. This interface is also capable of recovering and generating embedded ToD messages. The 1 PPS interface is unidirectional: it can be configured either as input or output but not both simultaneously.



SYNC port, which allows a 1 PPS signal to be used as an input or generated as an output for phase synchronization. This interface is also capable of recovering and generating ToD messages. The SYNC port is unidirectional: it can be configured either as input or output but not both simultaneously.

For more information, refer to “External timing,” in 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Product Fundamentals (009-3220-006).

Clock selection algorithm The clock selection algorithm selects the best available synchronization source from the nominated clock references added to a protection-group. When configured as an Option 1 (E1) clock it operates in revertive mode by default. When configured as an Option 2 (T1) clock it operates in non-revertive mode by default. In revertive mode, the best reference is selected after a wait-to-restore period has elapsed when a better reference is introduced. The wait-to-restore timer only applies to revertive-mode. In non-revertive mode, once a reference has been selected, the clock selection algorithm does not select a new reference even if the new reference is better. A new reference is selected only when the currently-selected reference fails. The clock selection algorithm uses the following criteria to select the clock source from a set of configured clock references: •

operator commands, that is, force switch and clear



loss-of-service, loss-of-frame, alarm indication signal, hardware not set up, or clock out-of-frame

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-6 System timing configuration



optional provisioned clock reference override-priority



optional provisioned clock reference forced quality level, which overrides received quality level



received quality level (SSM/clockclass)



optional provisioned clock reference priority

The events that could trigger the algorithm are: •

CLI commands: — add references to or remove references from a protection-group — Input reference override-priority, priority, forced-ql, or ql-receive configuration changes — forced reference configuration changes — threshold-ql configuration changes — reversion-mode configuration changes



Physical characteristics: — received quality level value changes or timeout — loss-of-service, loss-of-frame, alarm indication signal, hardware not set up, or clock out-of-frame by means of QL-FAILED changes

When no priority is configured among the references, for a tie-breaker case, for example, no override-priorities/priorities are configured and all references have the same quality level, the following order of protocol preference is used to determine the preferred reference: •

GPS



BITS



SyncE



PTP



TDM

In the case of a tie between references of the same protocol, the interface identifier breaks the tie, for example, for SyncE port 1 is preferred over port 10 (the lower port is preferred) and for PTP master-ip-address 1.1.1.1 is preferred over 2.2.2.2 (the lower address is preferred). The clock selection algorithm applies to three separate protections groups: •

frequency



phase



time-of-day

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-7

Quality level value definition In SyncE, quality level is encoded in SSMs and is used to determine the validity of the signal. If the received quality level of a clock source is below the user-configured minimum quality level threshold, the clock source is deemed invalid and does not participate in the clock selection algorithm. However, you can configure a forced-ql attribute that can override the received quality level. The BITS interface carries an SSM value defined by ITU-T G.781. Depending on the configuration of the BITS interface type, that is, T1 or E1, the value of SSM and the acceptable received quality levels for Sync-E and BITS are defined in Table 6-2 through Table 6-5. All other received SSM values are considered invalid on input. For PTP, quality level is extracted from clockclass. For more information, refer to Table 6-2 to Table 6-5. To be selectable, references that do not carry a quality level must be configured with a forced-ql to meet clock selection algorithm criteria. Different types of inputs can have different scales, for example, SSM/ clockclass, to measure quality level. These quality levels are mapped to a common scale with a preference score, where a lower number determines higher preference, based on which an input is preferred over another. It is important to note that there are separate quality level mappings for input and output. Once all inputs are mapped to the common scale and the best input is selected using clock selection algorithm criteria, the preference score of the selected reference is then mapped back to SSM/clockclass on output depending on the protocol of the output references. Table 6-2 shows the input quality level mapping for Option I. Table 6-2 Option I input quality level mapping From BITS E1 SSM

0x2

0x4

From SyncE SSM From PTP clockclass (G.8265.1)

0x2

0x4

QL name

From QL preference

80

1

82

2

84

QL-PRC

3

86

4

88

5

90 92

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

QL-SSU-A

6 7

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-8 System timing configuration Table 6-2 Option I input quality level mapping From BITS E1 SSM

From SyncE SSM From PTP clockclass (G.8265.1)

QL name

94 0x8

0xB

0xF or QL-INVx

0x8

0xB

0xF or QL-INVx

96

From QL preference 8

QL-SSU-B

9

98

10

100

11

102

12

104

QL-SEC/EEC1

13

106

14

108

15

110

QL-DNU

16

Table 6-3 shows the output quality level mapping for Option I. Table 6-3 Option I output quality level mapping From QL preference

QL name

To BITS T1 SSM

To SyncE SSM

To PTP clockclass (G.8265.1)

1

QL-PRC

0x2

0x2

80

2

82

3

84

4

QL-SSU-A

0x4

0x4

86

5

88

6

90

7

QL-SSU-B

0x8

0x8

92

8

94

9

96

10

98

11

100

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-9 Table 6-3 Option I output quality level mapping From QL preference

QL name

To BITS T1 SSM

To SyncE SSM

To PTP clockclass (G.8265.1)

12

QL-SEC/EEC1

0xB

0xB

102

13

104

14

106

15

QL-DNU

0xF

0xF

16

108 110

Table 6-4 shows the input quality level mapping for Option II. Table 6-4 Option II input quality level mapping From BITS E1 SSM

From SyncE SSM From PTP clockclass (G.8265.1)

QL name

To QL preference

0x04FF

0x1

80

QL-PRS

1

0x08FF

0x0

82

QL-STU

2

84 0x0CFF

0x7

86

3 QL-ST2

88 0x78FF

0x4

90

4 5

QL-TNC

6

92

7

94

8

96

9

98

10

0x7CFF

0xD

100

QL-ST3E

11

0x10FF

0xA

102

QL-ST3/EEC2

12

104

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

13

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-10 System timing configuration Table 6-4 Option II input quality level mapping From BITS E1 SSM

From SyncE SSM From PTP clockclass (G.8265.1)

QL name

To QL preference

0x22FF

0xC

106

QL-SMC

14

0x40FF

0xE

108

QL-PROV

15

0x30FF or QLINVx

0xF or QL-INVx

110

QL-DUS

16

Table 6-5 shows the output quality level mapping for Option II. Table 6-5 Option II output quality level mapping From QL preference

QL name

To BITS T1 SSM

To SyncE SSM

To PTP clockclass (G.8265.1)

1

QL-PRS

0x04FF

0x1

80

2

QL-STU

0x08FF

0x0

82

3

QL-PRS

0x04FF

0x1

84

4

QL-ST2

0x0CFF

0x7

86

5

QL-TNC

0x78FF

0x4

88

6 7

90 QL-ST3E

0x7CFF

0xD

92

8

94

9

96

10

98

11

100

12

QL-ST3/EEC2

0x10FF

0xA

102

13

QL-SMC

0x22FF

0xC

104

14

106

15

QL-PROV

0x40FF

0xE

108

16

QL-DUS

0xF

0xF

110

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-11

Frequency, phase and time-of-day configuration rules In synchronization, frequency, phase and time-of-day are dependent upon each other. Time-of-day reference depends on phase reference. Phase reference depends on frequency reference. To prevent unwanted configurations, the following rules must be followed: 1

References cannot be added to the time-of-day protection-group if the phase protection-group is empty. 2 References cannot be added to the phase protection-group if the frequency protection-group is empty 3 References can be added at any time to the frequency protection-group. 4 References can be removed at any time from the time-of-day protectiongroup. 5 The last reference can only be removed from the phase protection-group if the time-of-day protection-group is empty. 6 The last reference can only be removed from the frequency protectiongroup if the phase protection-group is empty. The time-of day protection-group depends on the phase protection-group. The phase protection-group depends on the frequency protection-group. The following table shows the four valid combinations at any time. Anything else will be blocked by the CLI. Table 6-6 Configuration rules Frequency

Phase

1

X

2

X

X

3

X

X

4

Time-of-day

Description Frequency references are added while time-of-day and phase protection-groups are empty. Phase references are added while the time-of-day protection-group is empty and the frequency protection-group is not empty.

X

Time-of-day references are added while frequency and phase protection-groups are not empty. All protection-groups are empty.

Note: The selected phase reference should be traceable to the same primary reference clock as the selected frequency reference. The selected time-of-day reference should also be traceable to the same primary reference clock as the selected phase reference. If the currently selected frequency reference goes down, but is still added to the frequency protection-group, the phase and time-of-day protection-groups will disregard the selection and go into freerun/holdover. Similarly, when the

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-12 System timing configuration

currently selected phase reference goes down, but is still added to the phase protection-group, the time-of-day protection-group disregards the selection and goes into freerun/holdover.

Holdover interval The holdover interval gives you the option of selecting how you want to control the protection-group operational quality level during holdover. This is configured using the sync set holdover-interval command. The holdover and free-run quality levels are now the oscillator quality level of the device. Use this command to have the protectiongroup operational quality level transition to DNU/DUS (do not use) after 24 hours of being in holdover. To be consistent with G.781, the default holdover interval is indefinite.

PTP clock type The PTP clock type can be configured as ordinary clock slave or boundary clock. You can set the PTP clock type from ordinary clock slave to boundary clock or vice versa. When the PTP clock-type is set from ordinary clock slave to boundary clock, the CLI prints a message informing you to remove all GPS references that were added to the protection-groups. When the PTP clock-type is set to boundary clock, you can then create PTP output references, and you cannot add any GPS references to protection-groups. PTP outputs can only be derived from non-GPS inputs when PTP clock type is set to boundary clock. In boundary clock mode, GPS input references are disregarded for selection. Only non-GPS inputs qualify for selection while timing distribution can occur via both GPS and non-GPS outputs. If you set PTP clock-type from boundary clock to ordinary clock slave, the CLI prints a message informing you to delete all PTP output references. When the PTP clock is set to ordinary clock slave, you are not able to create PTP output references, and you can add any GPS references to protection-groups. Reversion-mode configuration is ignored while switching the PTP clock-type.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-13

Network configuration examples Figure 6-2 shows a linear topology example for system timing. In this example, input references are configured on the ports with arrows. The input references lock to the BITS signal and distribute the timing to the SyncE portion of the network. Figure 6-2 Linear topology

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-14 System timing configuration

Figure 6-3 shows a ring topology example for system timing. In this example, ports can be configured for input or output. BITS feeds timing to the network. Note that the timing signal does not flow all the way around the ring. SyncE alone cannot detect or prevent timing loops. Timing loops can only be prevented with careful network planning, that is, proper configuration of preferred inputs and the way the nodes are interconnected. Having a break in the flow avoids timing loops. Figure 6-3 Ring topology

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-15

Figure 6-4 shows an example of system timing using SyncE and PTP. In this example, SyncE is used to recover frequency and PTP is used to recover phase. Figure 6-4 System timing using SyncE and PTP

“Sample configuration: system timing by means of SyncE and PTP” on page 6-83 provides the commands to configure this example.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-16 System timing configuration

Figure 6-5 shows an example of recovering PTP timing on an Ordinary Clock Slave from a GrandMaster Clock via a Boundary Clock (priority 1) while keeping the GrandMaster Clock as a backup timing reference (priority 2). Figure 6-5 System timing using PTP timing

“GrandMaster” e.g. Symmetricom TP 5000 2.2.2.1 VLAN 200

1 “BoundaryClock” e.g. 5160 2.2.2.10

2

VLAN 200

3

“OCSlave” e.g. 3930 2.2.2.20

“Sample configuration: system timing by means of PTP Boundary Clock” on page 6-85 provides the commands to configure this example.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-17

Procedures Figure 6-6 shows the flow of system timing procedures. Figure 6-6 System timing configuration System timing configuration

Initial configuration

Configure global attributes

Configure input references

Configure output references

Configure protection-groups

Display system timing information

End

Procedures for initial configuration are: •

“Enabling and disabling synchronization” on page 6-19



“Configuring synchronization” on page 6-20

Procedures for configuring the global attributes for GPS output timing •

“Configuring the PTP timing global attributes” on page 6-23



“Configuring global attributes for PTP input timing” on page 6-25



“Configuring global attributes for PTP output timing” on page 6-26



“Configuring global attributes for GPS output timing” on page 6-27

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-18 System timing configuration

Procedure for configuring input references are: •

“Configuring SyncE input references” on page 6-28



“Configuring BITS input references” on page 6-30



“Configuring PTP input references” on page 6-33



“Configuring GPS input references” on page 6-35



“Configuring TDM input references” on page 6-37

Procedures for configuring output references are: •

“Configuring SyncE output references” on page 6-39



“Configuring BITS output reference” on page 6-40



“Configuring PTP output timing references” on page 6-42



“Configuring GPS output references” on page 6-43

Procedure for configuring protection-groups are: •

“Configuring protection-groups” on page 6-44

Procedures for displaying system timing information are: •

“Displaying information for synchronization” on page 6-53



“Displaying SyncE information” on page 6-57



“Displaying BITS information” on page 6-60



“Displaying PTP information” on page 6-63



“Displaying GPS information” on page 6-69



“Displaying TDM information” on page 6-72



“Displaying frequency information” on page 6-74



“Displaying phase information” on page 6-76



“Displaying time-of-day information” on page 6-78



“Displaying protection-group information” on page 6-80

For information about commands used to unset system timing configurations, refer to 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Command Reference (009-3220-010).

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-19

Procedure 6-1 Enabling and disabling synchronization You can enable and disable synchronization. Synchronization is enabled by default. Disabling synchronization results in the following: •

the clock selection algorithm is frozen, that is, the system no longer responds to events that trigger the clock selection algorithm



output references are shut down so that downstream nodes no longer receive synchronization. Prior to shutting down the output references, the output references that are capable of transmitting quality level transmit QL-DNU/QL-DUS (do-not-use) messages to notify downstream nodes to gracefully switch over to another reference.

Disable the synchronization feature for maintenance purposes. Step

Action

To enable synchronization 1

Enable synchronization: sync enable

To disable synchronization 2

Disable synchronization: sync disable —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-20 System timing configuration

Procedure 6-2 Configuring synchronization You can configure •

hold-over interval period, which can be configured to be 24-hrs or indefinite.



option type, which is a one-time mandatory configuration before all other sync inputs, outputs, or protection-groups can be configured



reversion mode, which affects the behavior of clock selection algorithm



global wait-to-restore timer, which is related to reversion mode. The wait to restore timer applies when the reversion mode is set to revertive.

Step

Action

To set the holdover interval 1

Set the holdover interval: sync set holdover-interval where holdover-interval

• is the holdover interval. The default value is indefinite. • If configured to be 24-hrs, the operational QL of the protection-group will change from local oscillator QL to QLDUS/QL-DNU after being in holdover for 24 hours. • If the hold-over interval is configured to be indefinite, the operational QL of the protection-group will not change during holdover.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-21 To set the option type 2

Set the option type: sync set option-type where option-type

is the option type. The default value is none. • option1 applies to SDH networks optimized for the 2048 kbit/s hierarchy • option2 applies to SDH networks optimized for the 1544 kbit/s hierarchy that includes the rates 1544 kbit/s, 6312 kbit/s and 44736 kbit/s Note 1: When option-type is set to option1, reversion-mode defaults to revertive. When option-type is set to option2, reversion-mode defaults to non-revertive. You can explicitly configure reversion-mode. Note 2: Selection of the type determines the quality level definition. For option1 quality level definitions, refer to Table 6-2 for “Option I input quality level mapping” and Table 6-3 for “Option I output quality level mapping”. For option2 quality level definitions, refer to Table 6-4 for “Option II input quality level mapping” and Table 6-5 for “Option II output quality level mapping”. To change the option-type, ensure there are no existing configurations.

To set the reversion-mode 3

Set the global reversion-mode: sync set reversion-mode <non-revertive|revertive> where reversion-mode <non-revertive| revertive>

is the global reversion mode.

To set the global wait-to-restore timer 4

Set the global wait-to-restore timer: sync set wait-to-restore <MINUTES: 0-12> where wait-to-restore <MINUTES: 0-12>

is the time assigned to the wait-to-restore timer. The wait-torestore timer is used when the reversion mode is set to revertive. —end—

Example The following example sets the holdover-interval to 24-hrs.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-22 System timing configuration

sync set holdover-interval 24-hrs The following example sets the option type to option 1, for an SDH network optimized for the 2048 kbit/s hierarchy. Note that the reversion mode defaults to revertive. sync set option-type option1 The following example sets the global reversion mode to non-revertive. sync set reversion-mode non-revertive

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-23

Procedure 6-3 Configuring the PTP timing global attributes You can configure the following PTP timing attributes: •

address mode



domain number



profile identifier



profile version



tag priority



clock type



dscp value

Step

Action

1

Globally set PTP timing attributes for the network element: sync ptp set {address-mode } {domain-number } {profile-identifier <00-19-A7-00-01-00>} {profile-version <1.0>} {protocol-version <2>} {tagpriority } clock-type dscp <0...63> where address-mode

is the PTP address mode. The default value is unicast.

domain-number

is the PTP domain number.

profile-identifier <00-19-A7-0001-00>

is the profile identifier for the network element.

profile-version <1.0>

is the profile version supported by the network element.

protocol-version <2>

is the PTP version supported by the network element.

tag-priority is the VLAN p-bits for outgoing PTP packets. The default value is 0. clock-type

is the PTP clock type. The default is oc-slave.

dscp <0..63>

sets the dscp value for PTP traffic. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-24 System timing configuration

Example The following example sets global PTP timing attributes for the network element. sync ptp set address-mode unicast domain number 4 profileidentifier 00-10-A7-00-01-00 profile-version 1.0 protocol-version 2 tag-priority 0 clock-type bc dscp 56

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-25

Procedure 6-4 Configuring global attributes for PTP input timing Configure global attributes for PTP input timing.

Step

Action

1

Set global attributes for PTP input timing: sync ptp input set {announce-rx-loss-num } {announce-tx-rate-request <1|1-2nd|1-4th|1-8th>} {delayrequest-tx-rate <64|32|16|8|4|2|1|1-2nd>} {sync-tx-raterequest <64|32|16|8|4|2|1|1-2nd>} {unicast-requestduration <SECONDS: 60-1000>} where announce-rxloss-num

is the PTP input announce receive loss number (announce intervals). The default value is 3.

announce-txrate-request <1|2nd|1-4th|1-8th>

is the PTP input announce transmit rate request, in packets per second. The default value is 1-2nd.

delay-request-tx- is the PTP input delay request transmit rate, in packets per second. The default value is 64. rate <64|32|16|8|4|2|1 |1-2nd> is the PTP input sync transmit rate request, in packets per sync-tx-ratesecond. The default value is 64. request <64|32|16|8|4|2|1 |1-2nd> unicast-request- is the PTP input unicast request duration, in seconds. The default value is 300. duration <SECONDS: 601000> —end—

Example The following example sets global attributes. sync ptp input set unicast-request-duration 300 announcerx-loss-num 3 announce-tx-rate-request 1-2nd sync-txrate-request 64 delay-request-tx-rate 64

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-26 System timing configuration

Procedure 6-5 Configuring global attributes for PTP output timing The maximum number of clients (slave sessions) is configurable from 0 to 16. The default value is 16. Each platform has its limitation as shown in Table 6-7: Table 6-7 Platform

Recommended Max-SlaveSessions

3930 Sync

10

3930 Sync + External Timing

10

3931 Sync

5

3932

10

5142

16

5150 Packet Timing

10

5160

16

Configure global attributes for PTP output timing based on the platform’s recommended max-slave-session values. Step

Action

1

Set global attributes for PTP output timing: sync ptp output set {max-slave-sessions } {timestamp-mode } where max-slaveis the maximum number of slave sessions sessions timestamp-mode sets the timestamp mode to be either one-step or two-step 5160 only.

Example The following example sets global attributes for PTP output timing. sync ptp output set max-slave sessions 15 timestamp-mode one-step

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-27

Procedure 6-6 Configuring global attributes for GPS output timing Configure global attributes for GPS output timing.

Step

Action

1

Set the 1 PPS pulse width: sync gps output set {1pps-pulse-width <MICROSECONDS>} where 1pps-pulse-width is the GPS output 1 PPS pulse width in microseconds. <MICROSECONDS>

Example The following example sets 1 PPS pulse width. sync gps output set 1 pps-pulse-width 1000

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-28 System timing configuration

Procedure 6-7 Configuring SyncE input references Configure SyncE input references to recover frequency timing from Ethernet ports. You can: •

create a SyncE input reference



set attributes for a SyncE input reference

Step

Action

To create a SyncE input reference 1

Create a SyncE input reference: sync synce input create ref {forced-ql } {override-priority } {port } {priority } {qlreceive } where ref

is the identifier for the SyncE input reference.

forced-ql

sets the quality level at which the received quality level is overridden.

override-priority

is the override-priority, with 1 being the highest override priority.

port

is the physical port.

priority

is the priority, with 1 being the highest priority.

ql-receive disable|enable

enables or disables received quality level.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-29 To set attributes for a SyncE input reference 2

Set attributes for a SyncE input reference: sync synce input set ref {forced-ql } {priority } {override-priority } {ql-receive } where ref

is the identifier for the SyncE input reference.

forced-ql

sets the quality level at which the received quality level is overridden.

priority

is the priority, with 1 being the highest priority.

override-priority

is the override-priority, with 1 being the highest override priority.

ql-receive enables or disables received quality level. —end—

Example The following example creates a SyncE input reference named mySyncEinput5 on port 5 with a priority of 1. sync synce input create ref SyncE_Port5_In port 5 priority 1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-30 System timing configuration

Procedure 6-8 Configuring BITS input references Configure BITS input references to recover frequency timing from the SYNC interface. You can: •

create a BITS input reference



set attributes for a BITS input reference

Step

Action

To create a BITS input reference 1

Create a BITS input reference: sync bits input create ref {bits-interface } {bits-mode <e1|t1|2048k>} {encoding } {e1-ssm-location <sa4|sa5|sa6|sa7>} {forced-ql } {format <esf|e1-crc|e1-nocrc|sf>} {override-priority } {priority } {ql-receive } where ref

is the BITS input reference.

bits-interface bits-mode <e1|t1|2048k>

is the mode.

encoding

is the encoding type. For T1 mode, the default value is ami. For E1 mode, the default value is hdb3.

e1-ssm-location <sa4|sa5|sa6|sa7>

is the location for SSM messaging. This attribute applies only for E1 mode. The default value is sa4.

forced-ql

is the quality level at which the received quality level is overridden.

format <esf |e1-crc| is the format. e1-no-crc|sf>

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-31 where override-priority

is the override-priority, with 1 being the highest override priority.

priority

is the priority, with 1 being the highest priority.

ql-receive

enables or disables received quality level. For E1 mode and format e1-crc, the default value is enable. For T1 mode and format esf, the default value is enable.

To set attributes for a BITS input reference 2

Set attributes for a BITS input reference: sync bits input set ref {encoding } {e1-ssm-location <sa4|sa5|sa6|sa7>} {forced-ql } {override-priority } {priority } {ql-receive } where ref

is the BITS input reference.

encoding

is the encoding type. For T1 mode, the default value is ami. For E1 mode, the default value is hdb3.

e1-ssm-location <sa4|sa5|sa6|sa7>

is the location for SSM messaging. This attribute applies only for E1 mode. The default value is sa4.

forced-ql

is the quality level at which the received quality level is overridden.

override-priority

is the override-priority, with 1 being the highest override priority.

priority

is the priority, with 1 being the highest priority.

ql-receive

enables or disables received quality level. For E1 mode and format e1-crc, the default value is enable. For T1 mode and format t1-esf, the default value is enable. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-32 System timing configuration

Example The following example creates a BITS input reference named myBITSinput1 with a BITS interface of sync-rj-45-1 and a mode of T1. sync bits input create ref myBITSinput1 bits-interface sync-rj45-1 bits-mode t1 format esf

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-33

Procedure 6-9 Configuring PTP input references Configure PTP input references to synchronize timing, that is, frequency, phase, and time-of-day, from a grandmaster or boundary clock over a packet network. You can •

create a PTP input timing reference



set attributes for a PTP input timing reference

Step

Action

To create a PTP input timing reference 1

Create a PTP input timing reference: sync ptp input create ref {encap-type }{forced-ql } {ip-interface } {master-ip-address } {override-priority } {priority } {forced-clock-class } {qlreceive } where ref

is the PTP input timing reference.

encap-type forced-ql

is the forced quality level.

ip-interface

is the IP interface name.

master-ipaddress

is the master IP address.

override-priority

is the override priority, with 1 being the highest override priority.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-34 System timing configuration where priority

is the priority, with 1 being the highest priority.

forced-clockclass

is the forced clock class from 80-110.

ql-receive

is the quality level receiving configuration.

To set attributes for a PTP input timing reference 2

Set attributes for a PTP input timing reference: sync ptp input set ref {forced-ql } {override-priority } {priority } {forced-clock-class <80-110>} {ql-receive } where ref

is the PTP input timing reference.

forced-ql

is the forced quality level.

override-priority

is the override priority, with 1 being the highest override priority.

priority

is the priority, with 1 being the highest priority.

forced-clockclass

Is the forced clock class from 80-110

ql-receive

is the quality level receiving configuration.

—end—

Example The following example creates a PTP input timing reference named PTP_In. sync ptp input create ref PTP_In master-ip-address 2.2.2.1 ip-interface PTP_Interface encap-type udp-over-ip priority 2 The following example sets attributes for a PTP input timing reference named PTP_In. sync ptp input set ref PTP_In priority 2 forced-clock-class 80 ql-receive enable 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-35

Procedure 6-10 Configuring GPS input references Configure GPS input references to recover timing from a GPS signal. GPS input references can be configured by means of •

10MHz coax connection (frequency only)



1PPS coax connection (phase and time-of-day)



SYNC interface (phase and time-of-day)

You can •

create a GPS input reference



set attributes of a GPS input reference

Step

Action

To create a GPS input reference 1

Create a GPS input reference: sync gps input create ref {clock-mode } {forced-ql } {frequency-clock <10mhz|1544khz|2048khz>} {gps-interface } {override-priority } {priority } frequency-clock <10mhz|2048 khz|1544khz> where ref

is the GPS timing interface.

clock-mode

is the GPS clock mode.

forced-ql

is the forced quality level.

frequency-clock <10mhz| 1544khz| 2048khz>

is the GPS frequency clock.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-36 System timing configuration where gps-interface

is the GPS interface.

override-priority

is the override priority, with 1 being the highest override priority.

priority

is the priority, with 1 being the highest priority.

To set attributes of a GPS input reference 2

Set attributes of a GPS input reference: sync gps input set ref {forced-ql } {override-priority } {priority } where ref

is the GPS input timing reference.

forced-ql

is the forced quality level.

{override-priority

is the override priority, with 1 being the highest override priority.

priority

is the priority, with 1 being the highest priority.

—end—

Example The following example creates a GPS input reference named myGPS10MHzInput1. sync gps input create ref myGPS10MHzInput1 clock-mode frequency forced-ql prs frequency-clock 10mhz gpsinterface 10mhz-smb-1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-37

Procedure 6-11 Configuring TDM input references Configure TDM input references to extract line timing from TDM ports in the PWE module. Note: TDM references can be configured on the 3932 platform only. You can •

create a TDM input reference



set attributes of a TDM input reference

Step

Action

To create a TDM input reference 1

Create a TDM input reference: sync tdm input create ref {forced-ql } {override-priority } {port } {priority } where ref

is a TDM input timing reference.

forced-ql

is the forced quality level.

override-priority

is the override priority, with 1 being highest override priority.

port

is the TDM port.

priority

is the priority, with 1 being the highest priority.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-38 System timing configuration To set attributes of a TDM input reference 2

Set attributes of a TDM input reference: sync tdm input set ref {forced-ql } {override-priority } {priority } where ref

is a TDM input timing reference.

forced-ql

is the forced quality level.

override-priority

is the override priority, with 1 being highest override priority.

priority

is the priority, with 1 being the highest priority.

—end—

Example The following example creates a TDM input reference named myTDMinput5 on port tdm05. sync tdm input create ref myTDMinput5 forced-ql st2 port tdm05

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-39

Procedure 6-12 Configuring SyncE output references Configure SyncE output references to distribute frequency timing by means of Ethernet ports. Step

Action

To create a SyncE output reference 1

Create a SyncE output reference: sync synce output create ref port where ref

is the SyncE output timing reference.

port

is the physical port. —end—

Example The following example creates a SyncE output reference named mySyncEoutput1 on port 1. sync synce output create ref mySyncEoutput1 port 1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-40 System timing configuration

Procedure 6-13 Configuring BITS output reference Configure BITS output references to distribute frequency timing by means of the SYNC interface. You can •

create a BITS output reference



set attributes for a BITS output reference

Step

Action

To create a BITS output reference 1

Create a BITS output reference: sync bits output create ref {bits-interface } {bits-mode <e1|t1|2048k>} {encoding } {e1-ssm-location <sa4|sa5|sa6|sa7>} {format <e1-crc|e1-no-crc|esf|sf>} {t1-line-build-out <133|266|399|533|655>} where ref

is the BITS output reference.

bits-interface bits-mode <e1|t1|2048k>

is the mode.

encoding

is the encoding type. For T1 mode, the default value is ami. For E1 mode, the default value is hdb3.

e1-ssm-location <sa4|sa5|sa6|sa7>

is the location for SSM messaging. This attribute applies only for E1 mode. The default value is sa4.

format <e1-crc|e1no-crc|t1-esf|t1-sf>

is the format.

t1-line-build-out is the BITS line build-out. <133|266|399|533|6 For line-build-out of 0 to 133 feet, select 133. 55> For line-build-out of 133 to 266 feet, select 266. For line-build-out of 266 to 399 feet, select 399. For line-build-out of 399 to 533 feet, select 533. For line-build-out of 533 to 655 feet, select 655. The default value is 133. 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-41 To set attributes for a BITS output reference 2

Set attributes for a BITS output reference: sync bits output set ref {encoding } {t1-line-build-out <133|266|399|533|655>} {e1-ssmlocation <sa4|sa5|sa6|sa7>} where ref

is the BITS input reference.

encoding

is the encoding type. For T1 mode, the default value is ami. For E1 mode, the default value is hdb3.

t1-line-build-out is the BITS line build-out. <133|266|399|533|6 For line-build-out of 0 to 133 feet, select 133. 55> For line-build-out of 133 to 266 feet, select 266. For line-build-out of 266 to 399 feet, select 399. For line-build-out of 399 to 533 feet, select 533. For line-build-out of 533 to 655 feet, select 655. The default value is 133. e1-ssm-location <sa4|sa5|sa6|sa7>

is the location for SSM messaging. This attribute applies only for E1 mode. The default value is sa4. —end—

Example The following example creates a BITS output reference named E1_BITS_Out. sync bits output create ref E1_BITS_Out bits-interface sync-rj45-1 bits-mode e1 format e1-crc

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-42 System timing configuration

Procedure 6-14 Configuring PTP output timing references Configure PTP output references to distribute frequency, phase and time-ofday information to connected PTP clients. You need to set the PTP clock-type to “bc” (boundary clock) to configure PTP output references. Step

Action

To create a PTP output timing reference 1

Create a PTP output reference: sync ptp output create ref ip-interface encap-type where

is the PTP output reference being created.

ip-interface

is the IP interface.

encap-type (udp- is the encapsulation type. over-ip>

Example The following example creates a PTP output reference. sync ptp output create ref PTPOut2 ip-interface PTP_Interface encap-type udp-over-ip

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-43

Procedure 6-15 Configuring GPS output references Configure GPS output references to distribute timing to a neighboring device that accepts a GPS signal. GPS output references can be configured by means of •

10MHz coax connection (frequency only)



1PPS coax connection (phase and time-of-day)



SYNC interface (phase and time-of-day)

You can •

create a GPS output reference

Step

Action

To create a GPS output reference 1

Create a GPS output reference: sync gps output create ref {clock-mode } {frequency-clock <10mhz|2048khz|1544khz>} {gps-interface } where ref

is the GPS output timing reference.

clock-mode

is the GPS clock mode.

frequency-clock <10mhz| 1544khz| 2048khz>

is the GPS frequency clock.

gps-interface

is the GPS interface. —end—

Example The following example creates a GPS output reference named SMB_2048_Out. sync gps output create ref SMB_2048_Out gps-interface 10mhz-smb-1 clock-mode frequency frequency-clock 2048khz

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-44 System timing configuration

Procedure 6-16 Configuring protection-groups Create protection-groups to initiate a clock selection algorithm session for the type of timing, that is, frequency or phase. Only input references that are added to a protection-group can take part in the clock selection process. For Release 6.12, time-of-day extracted from PTP is only displayed. Full timeof-day functionality will be supported in a future release. In Release 6.12, PTP outputs can only be derived from non-GPS inputs when PTP clock-type is set to “boundary clock”. In boundary clock mode, GPS input references are disregarded for selection and only non-GPS inputs are qualified for selection while timing distribution can take place via GPS and non-GPS outputs. Table 6-8 list the maximum number of input references for each protectiongroup by platform. Table 6-8 Maximum input references for each protection-group Platform

Frequency

Phase

Time-of-Day

SyncE

PTP

BITS

GPS

TDM

PTP

GPS

PTP

3930 Sync

6

2

0

0

0

2

0

2

3930 Sync + External Timing

10

2

1

1

0

2

2

2

3931 Sync

6

2

0

0

0

2

0

2

3932

10

2

1

1

2

2

2

2

5142

24

2

1

1

0

2

2

2

5150 SyncE

52

0

1**

0

0

0

0

0

5150 Packet Timing

52

2

1**

0

0

2

0

2

5160

24

2

1

1

0

2

2

2

Note 1: ** requires the optional 10G module with BITS interface for BITS support on the 5150. Note 2: It is important to ensure that the selected time-of-day reference is traceable to the same selected phase reference and that the selected phase reference is traceable to the same selected frequency reference.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-45

The color of the SYNC interface LED depends on the state of all configured protection-groups. Table 6-9 lists protection-group states and describes the SYNC interface LED associated with each protection-group state. Table 6-9 Protection-group states Protection-group states

SYNC interface LED

There are no protection-groups configured for frequency, phase, and time-of-day.

Off

One or more configured frequency, phase, or time-of-day protection-groups is in Free Run state.

Off

Solid yellow One or more configured frequency, phase, or time-of-day protection-groups is in Holdover state, and all other configured protection-groups are in Holdover, Acquiring Lock, or Locked state. Blinking green One or more configured frequency, phase, and time-of-day protection-groups is in Acquiring Lock state, and all other configured protection-groups are in Acquiring Lock or Locked state. All configured frequency, phase, and time-of-day protectiongroups are in Locked state.

Solid green

You can •

create a frequency protection-group



create a phase protection-group



create a time-of-day protection-group



set attributes for a frequency protection-group



set attributes for a phase protection-group



set attributes for a time-of-day protection-group



add an input reference to a frequency protection-group



add an input reference to a phase protection-group



add an input reference to a time-of-day protection-group



remove an input reference from a frequency protection-group



remove an input reference from a phase protection-group



remove an input reference from a time-of-day protection-group



clear a frequency protection-group’s reference switch count



clear a phase protection-group’s reference switch count

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-46 System timing configuration



clear a time-of-day protection-group’s reference switch count

Step

Action

To create frequency protection-groups 1

Create a frequency protection-group: sync frequency protection-group create group {threshold-ql } where group

is the frequency protection-group.

threshold-ql

is the threshold quality level.

To create phase protection-groups 2

Create a phase protection-group: sync phase protection-group create group {threshold-ql } where group

is the phase protection-group.

threshold-ql

is the threshold quality level.

To create time-of-day protection-groups 3

Create a time-of-day protection-group: sync time-of-day protection-group create group {threshold-ql } where group

is the time-of-day protection-group.

threshold-ql

is the threshold quality level.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-47 To set attributes for a frequency protection-group’ 4

Set attributes for a frequency protection-group: sync frequency protection-group set group {forced-ref } {threshold-ql } where group

is the frequency protection-group.

force switches to an input reference. forced-ref threshold-ql

is the threshold quality level.

To set attributes for a phase protection-group 5

Set attributes for a phase protection-group: sync phase protection-group set group {forced-ref } {threshold-ql } where group

is the phase protection-group.

force switches to an input reference. forced-ref threshold-ql

is the threshold quality level.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-48 System timing configuration To set attributes for a time-of-day protection-group 6

Set attributes for a time-of-day protection-group: sync time-of-day protection-group set group {forced-ref } {threshold-ql } where group

is the time-of-day protection-group

force switches to an input reference forced-ref threshold-ql

is the threshold quality level

To add an input reference to a frequency protection-group 7

Add an input reference to a frequency protection-group: sync frequency protection-group add group {inputref <list of configured frequency input timing references>} where group

is the frequency protection-group

input-ref <list of configured frequency input timing references>

is the list of input references to add to the frequency protection-group

To add an input reference to phase protection-group 8

Add an input reference to a phase protection-group: sync phase protection-group add group input-ref <list of configured phase input timing references>} where group

is the phase protection-group

is the list of input references to add to the phase protectioninput-ref <list of configured phase group input timing references>

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-49 To add an input reference to time-of-day protection-group 9

Add an input reference to a time-of-day protection-group: sync time-of-day protection-group add group input-ref <list of configured time-of-day input timing references>} where group

is the time-of-day protection-group

input-ref <list of configured timeof-day input timing references>

is the list of input references to add to the time-of-day protection-group

To remove an input reference from frequency protection-group 10

Remove an input reference from a protection-group: sync frequency protection-group remove group {input-ref <list of configured frequency input timing references>} where group

is the frequency protection-group

input-ref <list of configured frequency input timing references>

is the list of input references to remove from the frequency protection-group

To remove an input reference from a phase protection-group 11

Remove an input reference from a protection-group: sync phase protection-group remove group {inputref <list of configured phase input timing references>} where group

is the phase protection-group

is the list of input references to remove from the phase input-ref <list of configured phase protection-group input timing references>

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-50 System timing configuration To remove an input reference from a time-of-day protection-group 12

Remove an input reference from a time-of-day protection-group: sync time-of-day protection-group remove group {input-ref <list of configured time-of-day input timing references>} where group

is the time-of-day protection-group

input-ref <list of configured timeof-day input timing references>

is the list of input references to remove from the time-of-day protection-group

To clear a frequency protection-group’s reference switch count 13

Clear a frequency protection-group’s switch count: sync frequency protection-group clear group ref-switch-count where group

is the frequency protection-group

To clear a phase protection-group’s reference switch count 14

Clear a phase protection-group’s switch count: sync phase protection-group clear group refswitch-count where group

is the phase protection-group

To clear a time-of-day protection-group’s reference switch count 15

Clear a time-of-day protection-group’s switch count: sync time-of-day protection-group clear group ref-switch-count where group

is the time-of-day protection-group —end—

Example The following example creates a frequency protection-group named FreqProtGroup. sync frequency protection-group create group FreqProtGroup threshold-ql sec

The following example creates a time-of-day protection-group named TODGroup. 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-51 sync time-of-day protection-group create group TODGroup threshold-ql sec

The following example adds input references to the frequency protectiongroup named FreqProtGroup. sync frequency protection-group add group FreqProtGroup inputref PTP_In,SyncE_Port5_In

The following example adds input references to the time-of-day protectiongroup named TODGroup. sync time-of-day protection-group add group TODGroup input-ref myPTPinput5

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-52 System timing configuration

Procedure 6-17 Clearing timing statistics You can clear •

SyncE timing statistics



PTP master statistics



PTP client statistics

Step

Action

To clear SyncE timing statistics 1

Clear SyncE timing statistics: sync synce clear {statistics} where statistics

clears SyncE timing statistics.

To clear PTP master statistics 2

Clear PTP master statistics: sync ptp input clear master {pdu-statistics} where master

is the clock ID for the PTP master.

pdu-statistics

clears PTP PDU statistics.

To clear PTP client statistics 3

Clear PTP client statistics: sync ptp output clear client {pdu-statistics} where client

is the clock ID for the PTP client.

pdu-statistics

clears PTP PDU statistics. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-53

Procedure 6-18 Displaying information for synchronization You can display •

global synchronization information



quality level hierarchy table, as defined in G.781



all configured references

Step

Action

To display global synchronization information 1

Display global synchronization information: sync show

To display the quality level hierarchy table 2

Display the quality level hierarchy table: sync show ql-hierarchy-table

To display all configured references 3

Display all configured references: sync show all —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the sync show command. sync show +-------------------------- SYNC CONFIGURATION ---------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ | Admin State | Enabled | | Option Type | Option II | | Reversion Mode | Non-Revertive (default) | | Wait-to-restore timer | 5 minutes | | Holdover Interval | Indefinite | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ +--------------------- FREQUENCY OPERATIONAL STATE -----------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ | Operational Status | Locked | | Duration | 1:01:10:10 | | Operational QL | ST3E (last: ST2) | | Selected Reference | myBITSinput1 | | Timing Interface | sync-rj45-1 | | Protocol | BITS | | Ref Switch Count | 2 | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-54 System timing configuration +------------------------- PHASE OPERATIONAL STATE -----------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ | Operational Status | Locked | | Duration | 0:02:12:40 | | Operational QL | ST3E (last: DNU) | | Selected Reference | myPTPinput5 | | Timing Interface | IP Interface : PTP_Interface | | | Master IP Address: 10.10.10.1 | | Protocol | PTP | | Ref Switch Count | 1 | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ +-------------------------TIME-OF-DAY-OPERATIONAL STATE ------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ | Operational Status | Locked | | Duration | 0:02:12:40 | | Operational QL | ST3E (last: DNU) | | Selected Reference | myPTPinput5 | | Timing Interface | IP Interface : PTP_Interface | | | Master IP Address: 10.10.10.1 | | Protocol | PTP | | Ref Switch Count | 1 | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ | Time-of-day | Wed Dec 04 23:11:01 UTC 2013 | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync show ql-hierarchytable command. sync show ql-hierarchy-table +--- HIERARCHY OF QUALITY LEVELS ---+ | Option I | Option II | Order | +-----------+-----------+-----------+ | PRC | PRS | Highest | | SSU-A | STU | | | | SSU-B | ST2 | | | | SEC/EEC1 *| TNC | | | | DNU | ST3E *| | | | | ST3/EEC2 | | | | | SMC | | | | | PROV | | | | | DUS | Lowest | +-----------+-----------+-----------+ * Local OCXO QL

The following example shows sample output for the sync show all command. sync show all +------------------------ FREQUENCY OPERATIONAL STATE -------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Operational Status | Locked | | Duration | 1:01:10:10 | | Operational QL | ST3E (last: ST2) | | Selected Reference | myBITSinput1 | | Timing Interface | sync-rj45-1 | | Protocol | BITS | | Ref Switch Count | 2 | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-55

+---------------------------------- FREQUENCY INPUT REFERENCES ----------------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | F-- |myBITSinput1 |sync-rj45-1 |BITS | 1 |ST3E | - |Active | | FPT |myPTPinput5 |PTP_Interface |PTP | - |ST3E | 3 |Active | | F-- |mySyncEinput5 |port 5 |SyncE| - |ST2 | 1 |Active | | F-- |mySyncEinput6 |port 6 |SyncE| - |ST2 | 2 |Active | | --- |myGPS10MHzInput1 |10mhz-smb-1 |GPS | - |PRS | - |Active | | --- |mySyncEinput8 |port 8 |SyncE| - | - | 4 |Not Authenticated | | --- |myTDMinput5 |port tdm05 |TDM | - | - | - |Loss of Signal | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

+-------------------------- FREQUENCY OUTPUT REFERENCES -------------------------+ | | Timing | |Oper | | | Reference Name | Interface |Proto| QL | Operational Status | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ |myGPS10MHzOutput2 |10mhz-smb-1 |GPS | - |Active | |myBITSoutput2 |sync-rj45-1 |BITS |ST3E |Active | |myPTPoutput9 |PTP_Interfac...|PTP |ST3E |Active | |mySyncEoutput1 |port 1 |SyncE| - |Loss of Signal | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ +--------------------------- PHASE OPERATIONAL STATE --------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Operational Status | Locked | | Duration | 0:02:12:40 | | Operational QL | ST3E (last: DNU) | | Selected Reference | myPTPinput5 | | Timing Interface | IP Interface : PTP_Interface | | | Master IP Address : 10.10.10.1 | | Protocol | PTP | | Ref Switch Count | 1 | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ +------------------------------------- PHASE INPUT REFERENCES -----------------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | FPT |myPTPinput5 |PTP_Interface |PTP | - |ST3E | 3 |Active | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

+---------------------------- PHASE OUTPUT REFERENCES ---------------------------+ | | Timing | |Oper | | | Reference Name | Interface |Proto| QL | Operational Status | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ |myPTPoutput9 |PTP_Interfac...|PTP |ST3E |Active | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ +------------------------ TIME-OF-DAY OPERATIONAL STATE -----------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Operational Status | Locked | | Duration | 0:02:12:40 | | Operational QL | ST3E (last: DNU) | | Selected Reference | myPTPinput5 | | Timing Interface | IP Interface : PTP_Interface | | | Master IP Address : 10.10.10.1 | | Protocol | PTP | | Ref Switch Count | 1 | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Time-of-day | Wed Dec 04 23:11:01 UTC 2013 | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-56 System timing configuration +---------------------------------- TIME-OF-DAY INPUT REFERENCES --------------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | FPT |myPTPinput5 |PTP_Interface |PTP | - |ST3E | 3 |Active | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

+------------------------- TIME-OF-DAY OUTPUT REFERENCES ------------------------+ | | Timing | |Oper | | | Reference Name | Interface |Proto| QL | Operational Status | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ |myPTPoutput9 |PTP_Interfac...|PTP |ST3E |Active | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-57

Procedure 6-19 Displaying SyncE information You can display: •

summary information for SyncE



statistics information for SyncE



information for SyncE input references



detailed information for a SyncE input reference



information for SyncE output references



detailed information for a SyncE output reference

Step

Action

To display summary information for SyncE 1

Display summary information for synchronous Ethernet: sync synce show

To display statistics information for SyncE 2

Display statistics information for synchronous Ethernet: sync synce show statistics

To display information for SyncE input references 3

Display information for synchronous Ethernet input references: sync synce input show

To display detailed information for a SyncE input reference 4

Display detailed information for a SyncE input reference: sync synce input show ref where ref

is the SyncE input reference to display detailed information for.

To display information for SyncE output references 5

Display information for SyncE output references: sync synce output show

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-58 System timing configuration To display detailed information for a SyncE output reference 6

Display detailed information for a SyncE output reference: sync synce output show ref where ref

is the SyncE output reference to display detailed information for. —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the sync synce show command. sync synce show +--------------------------- SYNCE INPUT REFERENCES -------------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+---------------------+-----------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | F-- |mySyncEinput5 |port 5 |SyncE| - |ST2 | 1 |Active | | F-- |mySyncEinput6 |port 6 |SyncE| - |ST2 | 2 |Active | | --- |mySyncEinput8 |port 8 |SyncE| - | - | 4 |Not Authenticated | +-----+---------------------+-----------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ +---------------------------- SYNCE OUTPUT REFERENCES ---------------------------+ | | Timing | |Oper | | | Reference Name | Interface |Proto| QL | Operational Status | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ |mySyncEoutput1 |port 1 |SyncE| - |Loss of Signal | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync synce show statistics command. sync synce show statistics +-------+------------ SYNCE STATISTICS ---------------------+ | | Rx | Tx | | QL +------------+------------+------------+------------+ | | Info Msg | Event Msg | Info Msg | Event Msg | +-------+------------+------------+------------+------------+ | PRS | 0| 0| 0| 0| | STU | 0| 0| 0| 0| | ST2 | 0| 0| 0| 0| | TNC | 0| 0| 0| 0| | ST3E | 0| 0| 0| 0| | ST3 | 0| 0| 0| 0| | SMC | 0| 0| 0| 0| | PROV | 0| 0| 0| 0| | DUS | 0| 0| 0| 0| +-------+------------+------------+------------+------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync synce input show command. sync synce input show

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-59 +------------------------------ SYNCE INPUT REFERENCES ----------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+---------------------+-----------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | F-- |mySyncEinput5 |port 5 |SyncE| - |ST2 | 1 |Active | | F-- |mySyncEinput6 |port 6 |SyncE| - |ST2 | 2 |Active | | --- |mySyncEinput8 |port 8 |SyncE| - | - | 4 |Not Authenticated | +-----+---------------------+-----------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync synce input show ref command for the input reference mySyncEinput5. sync synce input show ref mySyncEinput5 +------------------------- SYNCE INPUT REFERENCE ------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------+ | Reference Name | mySyncEinput5 | | Timing Interface | port 5 | | Protection Group | myFreqGroup | | Operational Status | Active | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------+ | Override-priority | | | Operational QL | ST2 | | Forced QL | | | RX QL | ST2 | | QL Receive | Enabled | | Priority | 1 | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync synce output show command. sync synce output show +------------------------ SYNCE OUTPUT REFERENCES -----------------------+ | | Timing | |Oper | | | Reference Name | Interface |Proto| QL | Operational Status | +-----------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ |mySyncEoutput1 |port 1 |SyncE| - |Loss of Signal | +-----------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync synce output show ref command for the output reference mySyncEinput1. sync synce output show ref mySyncEoutput1 +--------------------------- SYNCE OUTPUT REFERENCE ----------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ | Reference Name | mySyncEoutput1 | | Timing Interface | port 1 | | Operational Status | Loss of Signal | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ | TX QL | | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-60 System timing configuration

Procedure 6-20 Displaying BITS information You can display: •

summary information for BITS timing



information for BITS input references



detailed information for a BITS input reference



information for BITS output references



detailed information for a BITS output reference

Step

Action

To display summary information for BITS timing 1

Display summary information for BITS timing: sync bits show

To display information for BITS input references 2

Display information for BITS input references: sync bits input show

To display detailed information for a BITS input reference 3

Display detailed information for a BITS input reference: sync bits input show ref

To display information for BITS output references 4

Display information for BITS output references: sync bits output show

To display detailed information for a BITS output reference 5

Display detailed information for a BITS output reference: sync bits output show ref —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the sync bits show command. sync bits show +-------------------------- BITS INPUT REFERENCES ---------------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-----------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | F-- |myBITSinput1 |sync-rj45-1 |BITS | 1 |ST3E | - |Active | +-----+-----------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-61 +-------------------------- BITS OUTPUT REFERENCES ------------------------+ | | Timing | |Oper | | | Reference Name | Interface |Proto| QL | Operational Status | +-------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ |myBITSoutput2 |sync-rj45-2 |BITS |ST3E |Active | +-------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync bits input show command. sync bits input show +---------------------------- BITS INPUT REFERENCES -------------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-----------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | F-- |myBITSinput1 |sync-rj45-1 |BITS | 1 |ST3E | - |Active | +-----+-----------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync bits input show ref command for the input reference myBITSinput1. sync bits input show ref myBITSinput1 +------------------------ BITS INPUT REFERENCE ------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+----------------------------------------------+ | Reference Name | myBITSinput1 | | Timing Interface | sync-rj45-1 | | Protection Group | myFreqGroup | | Operational Status | Active | +-----------------------+----------------------------------------------+ | BITS Mode | E1 | | Format | ESF | | Encoding | AMI | | E1 SSM Location | SA4 | +-----------------------+----------------------------------------------+ | Override Priority | 1 | | Operational QL | ST3E | | Forced QL | ST3E | | RX QL | | | QL Receive | Disabled | | Priority | | +-----------------------+----------------------------------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync bits output show command. sync bits output show +-------------------------- BITS OUTPUT REFERENCES ------------------------+ | | Timing | |Oper | | | Reference Name | Interface |Proto| QL | Operational Status | +-------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ |myBITSoutput2 |sync-rj45-2 |BITS |ST3E |Active | +-------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync bits output show ref command for the output reference myBITSinput2. sync bits output show ref myBITSinput2 +--------------------------- BITS OUTPUT REFERENCE -----------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ | Reference Name | myBITSinput2 |

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-62 System timing configuration | Timing Interface | sync-rj45-2 | | Operational Status | Active | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ | BITS Mode | E1 | | Format | ESF | | Encoding | AMI | | E1 SSM Location | SA4 | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ | TX QL | ST3E | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-63

Procedure 6-21 Displaying PTP information You can display: •

summary information for PTP timing



performance statistics information for PTP timing



information for PTP input references



information for PTP output references



detailed information for a PTP input reference



detailed information for a PTP output reference



information for PTP masters



information for PTP clients



PDU statistics for a PTP master



PDU statistics for a PTP client

Step

Action

To display summary information for PTP timing 1

Display summary information for PTP timing: sync ptp show

To display performance statistics information for PTP timing 2

Display performance statistics information for PTP timing: sync ptp show performance-statistics

To display information for PTP input references 3

Display information for PTP input references: sync ptp input show

To display detailed information for a PTP input reference 4

Display detailed information for a PTP input reference: sync ptp input show ref

To display the list of connected PTP masters 5

Display the list of connected PTP masters: sync ptp input show master-list

To display the PDU statistics for a PTP master 6

Display the PDU statistics for a PTP master: sync ptp input show master pdu-statistics

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-64 System timing configuration To display information for PTP output references 7

Display information for PTP output references: sync ptp output show

To display detailed information for a PTP output reference 8

Display detailed information for a PTP output reference: sync ptp output show ref

To display the connected PTP client list 9

Display the connected PTP client list: sync ptp output show client-list

To display the PDU statistics for a PTP client 10

Display the PDU statistics for a PTP client: sync ptp output show client pdu-statistics —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the sync ptp show command. sync ptp show +----------------------------- PTP CONFIGURATION -------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ | Clock Type | Boundary Clock | | Clock Identity | AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF:00:11 | | Address Mode | Unicast | | Tag Priority | 0 | | Protocol Version | 2 | | Profile Version | 1.0 | | Profile Identifier | 00:10:A7:00:01:00 | | Domain Number | 4 | | DSCP | 56 | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ +--------------------------- PTP INPUT CONFIGURATION ---------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ | Unicast Req Duration | 300 | | Announce Rx Timeout | 3 | | Announce Tx Rate Req | 1-2nd | | Sync Tx Rate Req | 64 pps | | Delay Req Tx Rate | 64 pps | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ +--------------------------------- PTP INPUT REFERENCES ----------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+----------------+-----------------+-----+----+-----+----+-------------------+ |FPT- |myPTPinput5 |PTP_Interface |PTP | - |ST3E | 3 |Active | +-----+----------------+-----------------+-----+----+-----+----+-------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-65 +--------------------------- PTP OUTPUT CONFIGURATION --------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ | Max Slave Sessions | 16 | | Timestamp Mode | Two-step | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+

+---------------------------- PTP OUTPUT REFERENCES --------------+ | | Timing | |Over | | | Reference Name | Interface |Proto| QL | Operational Status | +----------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ | myPTPinput9 |PTP Interfac...|PTP |ST3E | Active | +----------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+

The following command shows sample output for the sync ptp show performance-statistics command. sync ptp show performance-statistics +------------------ PTP PERFORMANCE STATISTICS -------------------+ | Statistic | Value | +------------------------------------------+----------------------+ | Frequency correction (ppb) | 20.471508 | | Phase correction (ns) | 0.000000 | | Minimal round trip delay (ns) | 0.000000 | | Fwd Flow operational min TDEV (ns) | 3725.350342 | | Rev flow operational min TDEV (ns) | 2298.259033 | +------------------------------------------+----------------------+

The following command shows sample output for the sync ptp input show command. sync ptp input show +--------------------------- PTP INPUT CONFIGURATION --------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Unicast Req Duration | 300 | | Announce Rx Timeout | 3 sec | | Announce Rx Rate Req | 1-2nd | | Sync Tx Rate Req | 64 pps | | Delay Req Tx Rate | 64 pps | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ +-------------------------------------- PTP INPUT REFERENCES ------------------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | FPT |myPTPinput5 |PTP_Interface |PTP | - |ST3E | 3 |Active | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

The following command shows sample output for the sync ptp input show ref myPTPinput5 command. sync ptp input show ref myPTPinput5 +----------------------------- PTP INPUT REFERENCE ----------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Reference Name | myPTPinput5 | | Timing Interface | IP Interface : PTP_Interface | | | Master IP Address : 10.10.10.1 | | Protection Group | myFreqGroup, myPhaseGroup, myTodGroup |

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-66 System timing configuration | Operational Status | Active | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Encapsulation Type | UDP-over-IP | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Override Priority | | | Oper Clock Class/QL | 100/ST3E | | Forced Clock Class/QL | | | RX Clock Class/QL | 100/ST3E | | QL Receive | Enabled | | Priority | 3 | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+

The following command shows the sample output for the sync ptp input show master-list command. sync ptp input show master-list +--------------------------------- PTP MASTER LIST ---------------------------------+ | | Announce| Announce| Sync | Sync |Delay Res|Delay Res| | Clock Identity |Rate(pps)|Dur (sec)|Rate(pps)|Dur (sec)|Rate(pps)|Dur (sec)| +-----------------------+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------+--------+ |00:11:22:33:44:55:66:77| 64| 300| 64| 300| 64| 300| +-----------------------+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------+--------+

The following command shows sample output for the sync ptp input show master 00.11.22.33.44.55.66.77 pdu-statistics command. sync ptp input show master 00:11:22:33:44:55:66:77 pdu-statistics +------------------------------ PTP MASTER ENTRY ------------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Clock Identity | 00:11:22:33:44:55:66:77 | | IP Address | 10.10.10.1 | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ +--------------- PTP MASTER PDU STATISTICS ---------------+ | Statistic | Value | +----------------------------------+----------------------+ | Rx Announce | 0 | | Rx Sync | 0 | | Rx Follow-up | 0 | | Rx Delay Request | 0 | | Rx Delay Response | 0 | | Rx Signalling | 0 | | Rx Management | 0 | | Tx Announce | 0 | | Tx Sync | 0 | | Tx Follow-up | 0 | | Tx Delay Request | 0 | | Tx Delay Response | 0 | | Tx Signalling | 0 | | Tx Management | 0 | +----------------------------------+----------------------+

The following command shows sample output for the sync ptp output show command. sync ptp output show +-------------------------- PTP OUTPUT CONFIGURATION -------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+-----------------------------------------------+ | Max Slave Sessions | 16 | +-----------------------+-----------------------------------------------+ +----------------------------- PTP OUTPUT REFERENCES ----------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-67 | | Timing | |Oper | | | Reference Name | Interface |Proto| QL | Operational Status | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ |myPTPoutput9 |PTP_Interfac...|PTP |ST3E |Active | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+

The following command shows sample output for the sync ptp output show ref myPTPoutput5 command. sync ptp output show ref myPTPoutput5 +--------------------------- PTP OUTPUT REFERENCE -------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+--------------------------------------------------+ | Reference Name | myPTPoutput5 | | Timing Interface | IP Interface : PTP_InterfaceOut | | Operational Status | Active | +-----------------------+--------------------------------------------------+ | Encapsulation Type | UDP-over-IP | +-----------------------+--------------------------------------------------+ | TX Clock Class/QL | 100/ST3E | +-----------------------+--------------------------------------------------+

The following command shows sample output for the sync ptp-output show client-list command: sync ptp output show client-list +--------------------------------- PTP CLIENT LIST ---------------------------------+ | | Announce| Announce| Sync | Sync |Delay Res|Delay Res| | Clock Identity |Rate(pps)|Dur (sec)|Rate(pps)|Dur (sec)|Rate(pps)|Dur (sec)| +-----------------------+--------+----------+---------+---------+---------+--------+ |11:22:33:44:55:66:77:88| 64| 300| 64| 300| 64| 300| |22:33:44:55:66:77:88:99| 64| 300| 64| 300| 64| 300| |33:44:55:66:77:88:99:AA| 64| 300| 64| 300| 64| 300| +-----------------------+---------+---------+---------+---------+---------+--------+

The following command shows a sample output for the sync ptp output show client 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:88 pdu-statistics command: sync ptp output show client 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:88 pdu-statistics +------------------------------ PTP CLIENT ENTRY ------------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Clock Identity | 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:88 | | IP Address | 10.10.10.5 | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ +--------------- PTP CLIENT PDU STATISTICS ---------------+ | Statistic | Value | +----------------------------------+----------------------+ | Rx Announce | 0 | | Rx Sync | 0 | | Rx Follow-up | 0 | | Rx Delay Request | 0 | | Rx Delay Response | 0 | | Rx Signalling | 0 | | Rx Management | 0 | | Tx Announce | 0 | | Tx Sync | 0 | | Tx Follow-up | 0 | | Tx Delay Request | 0 | | Tx Delay Response | 0 |

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-68 System timing configuration | Tx Signalling | 0 | | Tx Management | 0 | +----------------------------------+----------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-69

Procedure 6-22 Displaying GPS information You can display: •

summary information for GPS timing



information for GPS input references



detailed information for a GPS input reference



information for GPS output references



detailed information for a GPS output reference

Step

Action

To display summary information for GPS timing 1

Display summary information for GPS timing: sync gps show

To display information for GPS input references 2

Display information for GPS input references: sync gps input show

To display detailed information for a GPS input reference 3

Display detailed information for a GPS input reference: sync gps input show ref

To display information for GPS output references 4

Display information for GPS output references: sync gps output show

To display detailed information for a GPS output reference 5

Display detailed information for a GPS output reference: sync gps output show ref —end—

Example The following command shows sample output for the sync gps show command. sync gps show +------------------------------------- GPS INPUT REFERENCES -------------------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | --- |myGPS10MHzInput1 |10mhz-smb-1 |GPS | - |PRS | - |Active | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-70 System timing configuration +--------------------------- GPS OUTPUT CONFIGURATION -------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | 1pps Pulse Width | 1000 usec | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ +----------------------------- GPS OUTPUT REFERENCES ----------------------------+ | | Timing | |Oper | | | Reference Name | Interface |Proto| QL | Operational Status | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ |myGPS10MHzOutput2 |10mhz-smb-1 |GPS | - |Active | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+

The following command shows sample output for the sync gps input show command. sync gps input show +------------------------------------- GPS INPUT REFERENCES -------------------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | --- |myGPS10MHzInput1 |10mhz-smb-1 |GPS | - |PRS | - |Active | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

The following command shows sample output for the sync gps input show ref myGPS10MHzInput1 command. sync gps input show ref myGPS10MHzInput1 +--------------------------- GPS INPUT REFERENCE --------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+--------------------------------------------------+ | Reference Name | myGPS10MHzInput1 | | Timing Interface | 10mhz-smb-1 | | Protection Group | | | Operational Status | Active | +-----------------------+--------------------------------------------------+ | Clock Mode | Frequency | | Frequency Clock | 10 MHz | +-----------------------+--------------------------------------------------+ | Override Priority | | | Operational QL | PRS | | Forced QL | PRS | | Priority | | +-----------------------+--------------------------------------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync gps output show command. sync gps output show +--------------------------- GPS OUTPUT CONFIGURATION -------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | 1pps Pulse Width | 1000 usec | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ +----------------------------- GPS OUTPUT REFERENCES ----------------------------+ | | Timing | |Oper | | | Reference Name | Interface |Proto| QL | Operational Status | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ |myGPS10MHzOutput2 |10mhz-smb-1 |GPS | - |Active | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-71

The following example shows sample output for the sync gps output show ref myGPS10MHzOutput2 command. sync gps output show ref myGPS10MHzOutput2 +--------------------------- GPS OUTPUT REFERENCE -------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+--------------------------------------------------+ | Reference Name | myGPS10MHzOutput2 | | Timing Interface | 10mhz-smb-1 | | Operational Status | Active | +-----------------------+--------------------------------------------------+ | Clock Mode | Frequency | | Frequency Clock | 10 MHz | +-----------------------+--------------------------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-72 System timing configuration

Procedure 6-23 Displaying TDM information You can display: •

summary information for TDM timing



summary information for TDM input references



detailed information for a TDM input reference

Step

Action

To display summary information for TDM timing 1

Display TDM information: sync tdm show

To display summary information for TDM input references 2

Display summary information for TDM input references: sync tdm input show

To display detailed information for a TDM input reference 3

Display detailed information for a TDM input reference: sync tdm input show ref —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the sync tdm show command. sync tdm show +------------------------------- TDM INPUT REFERENCES -----------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-----------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | --- |myTDMinput5 |port tdm05 |TDM | - | - | - |Loss of Signal | +-----+-----------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync tdm input show command. sync tdm input show +------------------------------- TDM INPUT REFERENCES -----------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-----------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | --- |myTDMinput5 |port tdm05 |TDM | - | - | - |Loss of Signal | +-----+-----------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-73

The following example shows sample output for the sync tdm input show ref myTDMinput5 command. sync tdm input show ref myTDMinput5 +-------------------------- TDM INPUT REFERENCE --------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ | Reference Name | myTDMinput5 | | Timing Interface | port 5 | | Protection Group | | | Operational Status | Loss of Signal | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+ | Override-priority | | | Operational QL | | | Forced QL | ST2 | | Priority | | +-----------------------+-------------------------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-74 System timing configuration

Procedure 6-24 Displaying frequency information You can display •

frequency information



summary information for frequency input references



summary information for frequency output references

Step

Action

To display detailed information for frequency 1

Display detailed information for frequency: sync frequency show

To display summary information for frequency input references 2

Display summary information for frequency input references: sync frequency input show

To display summary information for frequency output references 3

Display summary information for output references for frequency: sync frequency output show —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the sync frequency show command. sync frequency show +------------------------ FREQUENCY OPERATIONAL STATE -------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Operational Status | Locked | | Duration | 1:01:10:10 | | Operational QL | ST3E (last: ST2) | | Selected Reference | myBITSinput1 | | Timing Interface | sync-rj45-1 | | Protocol | BITS | | Ref Switch Count | 2 | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ +---------------------------------- FREQUENCY INPUT REFERENCES ----------------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | F-- |myBITSinput1 |sync-rj45-1 |BITS | 1 |ST3E | - |Active | | FPT |myPTPinput5 |PTP_Interface |PTP | - |ST3E | 3 |Active | | F-- |mySyncEinput5 |port 5 |SyncE| - |ST2 | 1 |Active | | F-- |mySyncEinput6 |port 6 |SyncE| - |ST2 | 2 |Active | | --- |myGPS10MHzInput1 |10mhz-smb-1 |GPS | - |PRS | - |Active | | --- |mySyncEinput8 |port 8 |SyncE| - | - | 4 |Not Authenticated | | --- |myTDMinput5 |port tdm05 |TDM | - | - | - |Loss of Signal | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-75 +-------------------------- FREQUENCY OUTPUT REFERENCES -------------------------+ | | Timing | |Oper | | | Reference Name | Interface |Proto| QL | Operational Status | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ |myGPS10MHzOutput2 |10mhz-smb-1 |GPS | - |Active | |myBITSoutput2 |sync-rj45-1 |BITS |ST3E |Active | |myPTPoutput9 |PTP_Interfac...|PTP |ST3E |Active | |mySyncEoutput1 |port 1 |SyncE| - |Loss of Signal | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync frequency input show command. sync frequency input show +---------------------------------- FREQUENCY INPUT REFERENCES ----------------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | F-- |myBITSinput1 |sync-rj45-1 |BITS | 1 |ST3E | - |Active | | FPT |myPTPinput5 |PTP_Interface |PTP | - |ST3E | 3 |Active | | F-- |mySyncEinput5 |port 5 |SyncE| - |ST2 | 1 |Active | | F-- |mySyncEinput6 |port 6 |SyncE| - |ST2 | 2 |Active | | --- |myGPS10MHzInput1 |10mhz-smb-1 |GPS | - |PRS | - |Active | | --- |mySyncEinput8 |port 8 |SyncE| - | - | 4 |Not Authenticated | | --- |myTDMinput5 |port tdm05 |TDM | - | - | - |Loss of Signal | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync frequency output show command. sync frequency output show +-------------------------- FREQUENCY OUTPUT REFERENCES -------------------------+ | | Timing | |Oper | | | Reference Name | Interface |Proto| QL | Operational Status | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ |myGPS10MHzOutput2 |10mhz-smb-1 |GPS | - |Active | |myBITSoutput2 |sync-rj45-1 |BITS |ST3E |Active | |myPTPoutput9 |PTP_Interfac...|PTP |ST3E |Active | |mySyncEoutput1 |port 1 |SyncE| - |Loss of Signal | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-76 System timing configuration

Procedure 6-25 Displaying phase information You can display: •

phase information



summary information for phase input references



summary information for phase output references

Step

Action

To display detailed phase information 1

Display detailed information for phase: sync phase show

To display summary information for phase input references 2

Display summary information for input references for phase: sync phase input show

To display summary information for phase output references 3

Display summary information for output references for phase: sync phase output show —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the sync phase show command. sync phase show +--------------------------- PHASE OPERATIONAL STATE --------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Operational Status | Locked | | Duration | 0:02:12:40 | | Operational QL | ST3E (last: DNU) | | Selected Reference | myPTPinput5 | | Timing Interface | IP Interface : PTP_Interface | | | Master IP Address : 10.10.10.1 | | Protocol | PTP | | Ref Switch Count | 1 | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ +------------------------------------- PHASE INPUT REFERENCES -----------------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | FPT |myPTPinput5 |PTP_Interface |PTP | - |ST3E | 3 |Active | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-77 +---------------------------- PHASE OUTPUT REFERENCES ---------------------------+ | | Timing | |Oper | | | Reference Name | Interface |Proto| QL | Operational Status | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ |myPTPoutput9 |PTP_Interfac...|PTP |ST3E |Active | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync phase input show command. sync phase input show +------------------------------------- PHASE INPUT REFERENCES -----------------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | FPT |myPTPinput5 |PTP_Interface |PTP | - |ST3E | 3 |Active | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync phase output show command. sync phase output show +---------------------------- PHASE OUTPUT REFERENCES ---------------------------+ | | Timing | |Oper | | | Reference Name | Interface |Proto| QL | Operational Status | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ |myPTPoutput9 |PTP_Interfac...|PTP |ST3E |Active | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-78 System timing configuration

Procedure 6-26 Displaying time-of-day information You can display detailed information for time-of-day: Step

Action

To display detailed information for time-of-day 1

Display detailed information for time of day: sync time-of-day show

To display summary information for input references for time-of-day 2

Display summary information for input references for time of day: sync time-of-day input show

To display summary information for output references for time-of-day 3

Display summary information for output references for time of day: sync time-of-day output show —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the sync time-of-day show command. sync time-of-day show +------------------------ TIME-OF-DAY OPERATIONAL STATE -----------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Operational Status | Locked | | Duration | 0:02:12:40 | | Operational QL | ST3E (last: DNU) | | Selected Reference | myPTPinput5 | | Timing Interface | IP Interface : PTP_Interface | | | Master IP Address : 10.10.10.1 | | Protocol | PTP | | Ref Switch Count | 1 | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Time-of-day | Wed Dec 04 23:11:01 UTC 2013 | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ +---------------------------------- TIME-OF-DAY INPUT REFERENCES --------------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | FPT |myPTPinput5 |PTP_Interface |PTP | - |ST3E | 3 |Active | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

+------------------------- TIME-OF-DAY OUTPUT REFERENCES ------------------------+ | | Timing | |Oper | | | Reference Name | Interface |Proto| QL | Operational Status | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ |myPTPoutput9 |PTP_Interfac...|PTP |ST3E |Active | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-79

The following example shows sample output for the sync time-of-day input show command. sync time-of-day input show +---------------------------------- TIME-OF-DAY INPUT REFERENCES --------------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | FPT |myPTPinput5 |PTP_Interface |PTP | - |ST3E | 3 |Active | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync time-of-day output show command. sync time-of-day output show +------------------------- TIME-OF-DAY OUTPUT REFERENCES ------------------------+ | | Timing | |Oper | | | Reference Name | Interface |Proto| QL | Operational Status | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+ |myPTPoutput9 |PTP_Interfac...|PTP |ST3E |Active | +-------------------------------+---------------+-----+-----+--------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-80 System timing configuration

Procedure 6-27 Displaying protection-group information You can display detailed information for a: •

frequency protection-group



phase protection-group



time-of-day protection-group

Step

Action

To display detailed information for a given frequency protection-group 1

Display detailed information for a given frequency protection-group: sync frequency protection-group show group

To display detailed information for a given phase protection-group 2

Display detailed information for a given phase protection-group: sync phase protection-group show group

To display detailed information for a given time-of-day protection-group 3

Display detailed information for a given time-of-day protection-group: sync time-of-day protection-group show group —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the sync frequency protection-group show group command, where the group name is myFreqGroup. sync frequency protection-group show group myFreqGroup +------------------------- FREQUENCY PROTECTION-GROUP -------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Group Name | myFreqGroup | | Threshold QL | PROV | | Forced Reference | | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Operational Status | Locked | | Duration | 1:01:10:10 | | Operational QL | ST3E (last: ST2) | | Selected Reference | myBITSinput1 | | Timing Interface | sync-rj45-1 | | Protocol | BITS | | Ref Switch Count | 2 | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-81 +-------------------------- FREQUENCY PROTECTION-GROUP INPUT REFERENCES -------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | F-- |myBITSinput1 |sync-rj45-1 |BITS | 1 |ST3E | - |Active | | FPT |myPTPinput5 |PTP_Interface |PTP | - |ST3E | 3 |Active | | F-- |mySyncEinput5 |port 5 |SyncE| - |ST2 | 1 |Active | | F-- |mySyncEinput6 |port 6 |SyncE| - |ST2 | 2 |Active | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync phase protectiongroup show group myPhaseGroup command. sync phase protection-group show group myPhaseGroup +--------------------------- PHASE PROTECTION-GROUP ---------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Group Name | myPhaseGroup | | Threshold QL | PROV | | Forced Reference | | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Operational Status | Locked | | Duration | 0:02:12:40 | | Operational QL | ST3E (last: DNU) | | Selected Reference | myPTPinput5 | | Timing Interface | IP Interface : PTP_Interface | | | Master IP Address: 10.10.10.1 | | Protocol | PTP | | Ref Switch Count | 1 | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ +-------------------- PHASE PROTECTION-GROUP INPUT REFERENCES ---------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper| | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio|Operational Status| +-----+---------------------+--------------+-----+----+----+----+------------------+ | FPT |myPTPinput5 |PTP Interface |PTP | - |ST3E| 3 |Active | +-----+---------------------+--------------+-----+----+----+----+------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the sync phase protectiongroup show group myToDGroup command. sync time-of-day protection-group show group MyToDGroup +------------------------ TIME-OF-DAY PROTECTION-GROUP ------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Group Name | myToDGroup | | Threshold QL | PROV | | Forced Reference | | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Operational Status | Locked | | Duration | 0:02:12:40 | | Operational QL | ST3E (last: DNU) | | Selected Reference | myPTPinput5 | | Timing Interface | IP Interface : PTP_Interface | | | Master IP Address : 10.10.10.1 | | Protocol | PTP | | Ref Switch Count | 1 | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+ | Time-of-day | Wed Dec 04 23:11:01 UTC 2013 | +-----------------------+------------------------------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-82 System timing configuration +------------------------- TIME-OF-DAY PROTECTION-GROUP INPUT REFERENCES ------------------------+ |Prot | | Timing | |Over|Oper | | | |Group| Reference Name | Interface |Proto|Prio| QL |Prio| Operational Status | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+ | FPT |myPTPinput5 |PTP_Interface |PTP | - |ST3E | 3 |Active | +-----+-------------------------------+---------------+-----+----+-----+----+--------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-83

Procedure 6-28 Sample configuration: system timing by means of SyncE and PTP The following sample configuration sets up system timing to: •

recover frequency by means of SyncE (port 5) with PTP (master IP address 2.2.2.1, vlan 200) as backup



recover phase by means of PTP (master IP address 2.2.2.1, vlan 200)



distribute frequency by means of BITS (SYNC RJ45 interface) and GPS (10 MHz SMB interface)



distribute phase by means of GPS (1PPS SMB interface)

The network topology diagram for this configuration is shown in Figure 6-4 on page 6-15. Step

Action

1

Set the option-type: sync set option-type option1 Note: This is a mandatory one-time configuration that must be entered first.

2

Configure the VLAN and IP interface for the PTP session: vlan create vlan 200 vlan add vlan 200 port 2 interface create ip-interface PTP_Interface ip 2.2.2.133/ 24 vlan 200

3

Create the PTP input reference object: sync ptp input create ref PTP_In master-ip-address 2.2.2.1 ip-interface PTP_Interface encap-type udp-over-ip priority 2

4

Create the SyncE input reference object: sync synce input create ref SyncE_Port5_In port 5 priority 1

5

Create the GPS output reference objects: sync gps output create ref SMB_2048_Out gps-interface 10mhz-smb-1 clock-mode frequency frequency-clock 2048khz sync gps output create ref 1PPS_SMB_Out gps-interface 1pps-smb-1 clock-mode phase

6

Create the BITS output reference object: sync bits output create ref E1_BITS_Out bits-interface sync-rj45-1 bits-mode e1 format e1-crc

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-84 System timing configuration 7

Create the frequency protection-group object and add input references with frequency components to it: sync frequency protection-group create group FreqProtGroup threshold-ql sec sync frequency protection-group add group FreqProtGroup input-ref PTP_In,SyncE_Port5_In

8

Create the phase protection-group object and add input references with phase components to it: sync phase protection-group create group PhaseProtGroup threshold-ql sec sync phase protection-group add group PhaseProtGroup input-ref PTP_In —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-85

Procedure 6-29 Sample configuration: system timing by means of PTP Boundary Clock The following sample configuration sets up system timing to: •

recover PTP timing on an Ordinary Clock Slave from a GrandMaster Clock via a Boundary Clock while keeping the GrandMaster Clock as a backup timing reference.

The network topology diagram for this configuration is shown in “System timing using PTP timing” on page 6-16.

Step

Action

To recover PTP timing on the Boundary Clock from the GrandMaster 1

Configure the VLAN and IP interface for the PTP session: vlan create vlan 200 vlan add vlan 200 port 1, 2 interface create ip-interface ptp200 ip 2.2.2.10/24 vlan 200

2

Disable synchronization: sync disable

3

Set the synchronization option type to option 2: sync set option-type option 2

4

Set the reversion-mode to revertive: sync set reversion-mode revertive

5

Set the wait-to-restore value: sync set wait-to-restore 10

6

Set the clock type to boundary clock: sync ptp set clock-type bc

7

Create the PTP input reference object for the GrandMaster Clock: sync ptp input create ref GrandMaster encap-type udpover-ip ip-interface ptp200 master-ip-address 2.2.2.1

8

Create the frequency protection-group object and add input references with frequency components to it: sync frequency protection-group create group FreqProtGroup threshold-ql tnc sync frequency protection-group add group FreqProtGroup input-ref GrandMaster

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-86 System timing configuration 9

Create the phase protection-group object and add input references with phase components to it: sync phase protection-group create group PhaseProtGroup threshold-ql tnc sync phase protection-group add group PhaseProtGroup input-ref GrandMaster

10

Create the time-of-day protection-group object and add input references with time-of-day components to it: sync time-of-day protection-group create group TodProtGroup theshold-q1 tnc sync time-of-day protection-group add group TodProtGroup input-ref GrandMaster

11

Create the PTP output reference object: sync ptp output create ref BoundaryClockOutput encap-type udp-over-ip ip-interface ptp200

12

Enable synchronization: sync enable

To recover PTP timing on the Ordinary Clock Slave from the Boundary Clock while keeping the GrandMaster as a backup timing reference 13

Configure the VLAN and IP interface for the PTP session: vlan create vlan 200 vlan add vlan 200 port 3 interface create ip-interface ptp200 ip 2.2.2.10/24 vlan 200

14

Disable synchronization: sync disable

15

Set the synchronization option type to option 2: sync set option-type option 2

16

Set the reversion-mode to revertive: sync set reversion-mode revertive

17

Set the wait-to-restore value: sync set wait-to-restore 10

18

Set the clock type to ordinary clock slave: sync ptp set clock-type oc-slave

19

Create PTP input reference object for the Boundary Clock: sync ptp input create ref BoundaryClock encap-type udpover-ip ip-interface ptp200 master-ip-address 2.2.2.10 priority 1

20

Create PTP input reference object for the GrandMaster clock: sync ptp input create ref GrandMaster encap-type udpover-ip ip-interface ptp200 master-ip-address 2.2.2.1 priority 2

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

System timing configuration 6-87 21

Create the frequency protection-group object and add input references with frequency components to it: sync frequency protection-group create group FreqProtGroup threshold-ql tnc sync frequency protection-group add group FreqProtGroup input-ref BoundaryClock,GrandMaster

22

Create the phase protection-group object and add input references with phase components to it: sync phase protection-group create group PhaseProtGroup threshold-ql tnc sync phase protection-group add group PhaseProtGroup input-ref BoundaryClock,GrandMaster

23

Create the time-of-day protection-group object and add input references with time-of-day components to it: sync time-of-day protection-group create group TodProtGroup theshold-q1 tnc sync time-of-day protection-group add group TodProtGroup input-ref BoundaryClock,GrandMaster

24

Enable synchronization: sync enable —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

6-88 System timing configuration

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

7-1

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration

7-

The system software supports Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) as specified in the IEEE 802.1AB-2005 standard. Like Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), LLDP is a link-constrained, layer 2 protocol. This means that the exchange of LLDP messages only takes place between adjacent LLDP agents (devices) on the network, unless control frame tunneling is used to tunnel the Link Layer Discovery Protocol Data Units (LLDPDUs) through another device. LLDP agents communicate basic management information with each other by exchanging LLDPDUs. The information about a device, and its immediate neighbors is then retrievable through the standard LLDP MIBs using SNMP. It is important to note that LLDP operates only on physical ports.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

7-2 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration

As illustrated in Figure 7-1, LLDP Agent A exchanges LLDPDUs with LLDP Agent B and Agent C, but not with Agent D since it is not directly connected to Agent A. Figure 7-1 Example of Architectural Relationship Between LLDP Agents LLDP Agent B

LLDP Agent A

LLDP Agent C

LLDP Agent D

Note: Link Layer Discovery Protocol does not configure or control any traffic or devices on the network. Its primary role is to report discovered information to higher-layer management tools. It is not intended to act as a configuration protocol for remote systems nor as a mechanism to signal control information between ports.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration 7-3

LLDP TLVs The LLDPDU is a layer 2 packet that consists of an L2 source, destination, and an Ethertype field, and 4 or more Type Length and Value fields (TLVs). The LLDP standard specifies 9 common TLV fields, 4 of which are mandatory TLVs and the remaining 5 are optional TLVs to carry information for broadcasting sender information. Figure 7-2 LLDPDU Packet Layer 2 DA, 01-80-C2-00-00-0E Layer 2 SA, Port-MAC of the transmitting device Layer 2 etherType field, 88-CC Chassis ID TLV Port ID TLV TTL TLV Optional TLVs End of LLDPDU TLV

Periodic LLDPDUs are sent out at a user-defined interval; however, LLDPDUs are also sent whenever LLDP TLV data has changed. An SNMP notification is then generated after changed data is received from a neighboring device. Upon receipt of this notification the SNMP management application polls the LLDP MIB objects to determine what information has changed.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

7-4 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration Common TLVs

Table 7-1 lists LLDP TLVs and provides a description for each TLV. The system software supports the nine common TLVs specified by IEEE 802.1AB2005. Table 7-1 Common TLVs TLV

Description

Common Chassis ID TLV

Identifies the chassis. This TLV contains the 802 LAN station associated with the transmitting LLDP agent and supports the “MAC Address” chassis ID subtype. This TLV is mandatory.

Port ID TLV

Identifies the port component that transmits the TLV. It supports the “Interface Alias” port ID subtype. This TLV is mandatory.

Time To Live (TTL) TLV

Indicates the number of seconds that the recipient LLDP agent is to regard the information associated with this LLDPDU to be valid. This TLV is mandatory.

Port Description TLV

Specifies the description for the port as an alphanumeric string. This TLV is optional.

System Name TLV

Specifies the assigned name as an alphanumeric string. This TLV is optional.

System Description TLV

Indicates the system description as an alphanumeric string. This TLV is optional.

System Capabilities TLV

Identifies the primary functions of the system and whether these primary functions are enabled. It supports the bridge capability. This TLV is optional.

Management Address TLV(s)

Identifies the IPv4 and IPv6 address associated with the local LLDP agent that can be used to reach higher layer entities to assist discovery by network management. This TLV is optional.

End of LLDPDU TLV

Defines the end of LLDPDU with all 0 values in two octets. This TLV is mandatory.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration 7-5 Table 7-1 Common TLVs TLV

Description

802.1 Organizationally Specific TLVs Port VLAN ID TLV

Allows a port to advertise its VLAN ID (PVID) that is associated with untagged or priority tagged frames.

Port and Protocol VLAN ID TLV

The system software stores values received from the remote partner for this TLV but does not transmit this TLV.

VLAN Name TLV

The system software stores values received from the remote partner for this TLV but does not transmit this TLV.

Protocol ID TLV

Allows an 802 LAN station to advertise particular protocols that are accessible through the port. Currently, the system software advertises the following protocols: RSTP and 802.3ah OAM.

802.3 Organizationally Specific TLVs MAC/PHY Configuration/ Advertises auto negotiation support and status, PMD Status TLV auto negotiation capability, and operational MAU type. Power via MDI TLV

The system software stores values received from the remote partner for this TLV but does not transmit this TLV.

Link Aggregation TLV

Advertises whether the link is capable of being aggregated, whether the link is currently in an aggregation, and the port ID of the aggregation if it is in an aggregation. LLDP advertises Link Agg TLV in the PDU but Link Aggregation is not currently supported and is disabled.

Maximum Frame Size TLV

Advertises the maximum frame size capability.

Ciena Organizationally Specific TLVs

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

7-6 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration Table 7-1 Common TLVs TLV

Description

Unknown TLVs

The system software stores all unknown TLVs for all valid LLDP PDUs for retrieval.

LLDP Graceful Shut Down

When an LLDP agent is administratively disabled, it executes a graceful shutdown handshake. It sends out the last LLDP PDU that specifies the TTL as zero in TTL TLV. When its counterpart receives this LLDPDU, it cleans up all the LLDP information received.

Encoding of SyncE Info

This TLV conveys the following information: • SyncE capability of the port, which is one of — input only — output only — both — not supported • current SyncE configuration of the port, which is one of — input reference — output reference — both — not configured

Feature Benefits Using LLDP for network topology discovery offers the following benefits to the network provider: •

Accurate network topology discovery and management



Support of standard tools using SNMP



Multi-vendor interoperability.

Accurate Network Topology Discovery and Management

Many network management tools use layer 3 protocols to automate the discovery process and track topology configurations and changes. The use of layer 2 LLDP allows network management tools to quickly and accurately discover current network topologies and to track both intentional and unintentional topology changes. Network administrators and technicians can use the accurate and up-to-date topology information to more quickly diagnose network problems in the field.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration 7-7 Support of Standard Tools

Each LLDP agent maintains its own per-port table of information in a standard SNMP MIB. Updates are sent as needed to the closest connected device on the network. Users access the device and manage LLDP information through the command line interface (CLI). Users can display general information, for example, Chassis ID and port configuration. Users with superuser security privileges can configure LLDP options and manipulate TLVs. For example, a specific port could be configured to only transmit or receive LLDPDUs. LLDPDUs are used to update standard LLDP Management information Databases (MIBs) allowing any standard SNMP application to monitor the information as it changes. Multi-vendor Interoperability

LLDP is a standards-based protocol. Using LLDP rather than a proprietary topology discovery protocol allows the network provider to interoperate with non-Ciena devices that also support LLDP. This chapter provides the following procedures for LLDP: •

“Configuring LLDP” on page 7-8



“Configuring TLV transmission” on page 7-10



“Displaying LLDP neighbors” on page 7-12



“Enabling and disabling SNMP notifications” on page 7-13

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

7-8 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration

Procedure 7-1 Configuring LLDP LLDP is enabled by default on all ports, but can be enabled or disabled on a per-port basis.

CAUTION Performance During Topology Discovery

The default settings for LLDP should be sufficient to ensure proper topology discovery in most networks. Since Ethernet Services Manager (ESM) topology discovery relies on LLDP for higher performance topology discovery, care should be taken when modifying the LLDP configuration. In certain topologies, LLDP does not need to be forwarded, for example, when using non-LLDP devices such as hubs.

Step

Action

1

Display the current state of the port. lldp show port <port> where <port>

2

is the port to be disabled.

Disable the port. lldp set port <port> disable where <port>

3

is the port to be disabled.

To verify the configuration of the port, execute the following command: lldp show port <port> configuration where <port>

is the port to be disabled. —end—

Example In the following configuration example, the user displays the state of port 10, then disables LLDP on this port. It should be noted as well that by using the lldp show port command, information about the remote port (neighbor) can be seen in the LLDP Remote Port TLV section of the output. This displays the MAC address, port number, and other information of the connected remote port.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration 7-9

Display the current state of port 10. lldp show port 10 +----------- LLDP Port Configuration -----------+ | | | Basic | Org Specific | | | | Admin |TLV Type| Dot1 |Dot3| | | | Port | State |123456789|1234567|1234| |Notif| +------+-------+---------+-------+----+---+-----+ |10 | Tx-Rx |111111111|1 1111|1111| | Off | +------+-------+---------+-------+----+---+-----+

Set port 10 to disable. lldp set port 10 disable Verify the configuration of the port. lldp show port 10 configuration +----------- LLDP Port Configuration -----------+ | | | Basic | Org Specific | | | | Admin |TLV Type| Dot1 |Dot3| | | | Port | State |123456789|1234567|1234| |Notif| +------+-------+---------+-------+----+---+-----+ |10 |Disable|111111111|1 1111|1111| | Off | +------+-------+---------+-------+----+---+-----+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

7-10 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration

Procedure 7-2 Configuring TLV transmission Some optional TLVs can be excluded from transmission in the LLDP PDU on a per-port basis. Step

Action

1

Set TLV transmission parameters: lldp tlvtx set port <port> mgmt-addr-local mgmtaddr-remote port-descr system-cap system-descr system-name where

2

port <port>

is the port list.

mgmt-addr-local

indicates whether to transmit the Local Management Address. The default value is on.

mgmt-addrremote

indicates whether to transmit the Remote Management Address. The default value is on.

port-descr

indicates whether to transmit the port description. The default value is on.

system-cap

indicates whether to transmit the system capabilities. The default value is on.

system-descr

indicates whether to transmit the system description. The default value is on.

system-name

indicates whether to transmit the system name. The default value is on.

Set TLV transmission dot1 parameters: lldp tlvtx-dot1 set port <port> port-vlan-id protocol-id-dot1x protocol-id-lacp protocol-id-oam protocol-id-stp where port <port>

is the port list.

port-vlan-id

indicates whether to transmit the port VLAN ID. The default value is on.

protocol-id-dot1x indicates whether to transmit the protocol ID xdot1x. The default value is on.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration 7-11 where

3

protocol-id-lacp

indicates whether to transmit the protocol ID LACP. The default value is on.

protocol-id-oam

indicates whether to transmit the protocol ID OAM. The default value is on.

protocol-id-stp

indicates whether to transmit the protocol ID STP. The default value is on.

Set TLV transmission dot3 parameters: lldp tlvtx-dot3 set port <port> link-agg macphy-config max-frame-size power-via-mdi where port <port>

is the port list.

link-agg indicates whether to transmit the link aggregation status. The default value is on. mac-phy-config

indicates whether to transmit the MAC Phy configuration. The default value is on.

max-frame-size

indicates whether to transmit the maximum frame size. The default value is on.

power-via-mdi

indicates whether to transmit the power via MDI status. The default value is on. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

7-12 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration

Procedure 7-3 Displaying LLDP neighbors Display LLDP neighbors when you want to view the following information about neighboring devices: •

local port



remote port



remote management address



chassis identification



system name

Use the information to troubleshoot connectivity issues to other network elements. Step

Action

1

Display neighboring devices: lldp show neighbors —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the lldp show neighbors command. lldp show neighbors +--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | LLDP Neighbors | +--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Remote Addr: 192.0.2.1 | | Local Addr: 10.5.5.164 | | Local Addr: 2001:0db8:f018:1:202:5aff:fe01:b43a | | Remote Addr: 2001:db8:: | | System Name: 3930ET-2 | | System Desc: 3930 Service Delivery Switch | +------------+-------------------------------------------------------------+ | Local | Remote | +------------+----------+--------------------------------------------------+ | Port | Port | Info | +------------+----------+--------------------------------------------------+ | 5 | 5 | Chassis Id: 00025A01D309 | | | | Mgmt Addr: 10.5.5.164 | | | | 2001:0db8:f018:1:202:5aff:fe01:b43a | | | | 2001:db8:: | | | | System Name: 3930ET-2 | | | | System Desc: 3930 Service Delivery Switch | | | | SyncE Suppt: Input and Output | | | | SyncE Confg: Input | +------------+----------+--------------------------------------------------+ 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration 7-13

Procedure 7-4 Enabling and disabling SNMP notifications LLDP supports the standard lldpRemTablesChange SNMP notification per port. This notification is disabled by default. When enabled, an SNMP notification is generated upon LLDP activity for the port when the value of the lldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime changes. You can •

enable SNMP notifications



disable SNMP notifications

Step

Action

1

Enable notification of LLDP activity per port: lldp set port <port> notification on where

2

port <port>

is the physical port to enable notification of LLDP activity for.

notification on

enables notification.

Disable notification of LLDP activity per port: lldp set port <port> notification off where port <port>

is the physical port to disable notification of LLDP activity for.

notification off

disables notification. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

7-14 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) configuration

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

8-1

VLAN management

8-

This chapter details the function of VLANs. It also details how to configure port settings to switch traffic properly through the network. The following sections are in this chapter: •

“VLANs and traffic flow” on page 8-1



“Behavior summary” on page 8-4



“VLAN/port configuration” on page 8-4



“VLAN translation” on page 8-5 Note: VLAN configuration requires installation of the Advanced Ethernet (AE) license. If you do not have an AE license, contact Ciena Sales.

VLANs and traffic flow VLANs determine how traffic is forwarded within a device. The ingress and egress behavior of each port must be taken into account. The basic rules to govern traffic forwarded through the device are as follows: •

Port VLAN Membership



Acceptable Frame Types (ingress rule)



Port VLAN ID (PVID) (ingress rule)



Ingress Filtering (ingress rule)



Ingress Untagged Frames (ingress rule)



Egress Untagged VLAN (egress rule)

Acceptable Frame Types When a frame arrives at a port on a device, it is first examined to determine whether it is a tagged (contains a VLAN ID) or untagged frame. This is referred to as the frame type. Each port of the device has an associated Acceptable Frame Types (AFT) parameter that controls whether or not the port will accept untagged frames. A port can be configured to admit ONLY tagged frames or to admit ALL Frames.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

8-2 VLAN management

When the value of the Acceptable Frame Types parameter is set to “VLAN tagged-only,” tagged frames are allowed to ingress while untagged or prioritytagged frames (i.e., a frame with no tag header, or a frame with a tag header that carries the null VLAN ID) received on the port are discarded. Tagged frames are then further processed according to the additional ingress rules set on the port. In contrast, if the Acceptable Frame Types parameter is set to “all”, all frames are allowed to ingress, regardless of their tag status.

Port VLAN ID The full VLAN address range from 1 to 4094 can be supported per port. For untagged or priority-tagged frames, the next ingress rule applied is the Port VLAN ID (PVID). Each port on the device has an associated PVID. By default, the PVID value is the default VLAN ID (VLAN 1). When an untagged frame arrives at an ingress port (assuming that the port is set to accept all frame types) it may be forwarded to all ports that are members of the configured PVID (depending on additional ingress parameters set on the device). If an ingress frame is not tagged with the VLAN specified by the port’s PVID, then the setting on the port's Ingress Filter will apply. Similarly, if a port is removed from a VLAN that is also its PVID, the PVID value remains the same and the port's Ingress Filter setting is therefore applied (refer to the VLAN Ingress Filter section). The PVID assignment for aggregated ports is slightly different. When a physical port is added to an aggregation, it inherits the PVID setting of the aggregation group. However, when the port is removed from the aggregation, its own PVID setting becomes valid again. Note: PVIDs can only be set to the VLAN ID of configured VLANs, therefore the VLAN must exist before the corresponding PVID can be assigned. The port does not however, have to be a member of the VLAN in order to assign the PVID.

VLAN Ingress Filter The last parameter applied to ingressing frames is the VLAN Ingress Filter. The VLAN Ingress Filter forwards or discards a frame based on the VLAN tag. When VLAN Ingress Filtering is enabled on a port (VLAN Ingress Filtering is enabled by default), an ingressing frame that is tagged with a VLAN to which the ingress port does not belong, will be discarded. For example, assuming that VLAN 200 is configured on the device, if the ingressing frame is tagged with VLAN 200, but the port is not a member of VLAN 200, the frame is discarded. If VLAN Ingress Filtering is disabled, ports do not consider the VLAN membership of ingressing frames. In the above example, with VLAN Ingress Filtering disabled, the frame tagged with VLAN 200 may be forwarded to all 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

VLAN management 8-3

port members of VLAN 200, regardless of whether the ingress port belongs to VLAN 200. However, if VLAN 200 has not been configured on the device, the frame is then dropped.

Egress Untagged VLAN Once a frame reaches its egress port on the device, one final VLAN operation is performed. The Egress Untagged VLAN (EUV) parameter determines whether the egressing frame will be forwarded tagged or untagged. As a frame egresses the device, its VLAN ID is compared to the EUV. If the VLAN ID is the same as the EUV, then the VLAN tag is stripped from the egressing frame and it is sent untagged. If the VLAN ID is not the same as the port’s EUV, then the frame is sent out with its tag intact. By default, the EUV is VLAN 1, as is the PVID. When the PVID is changed, the EUV value automatically updates to match the PVID, until it is explicitly set. For example, the default PVID and EUV are set to 1. If you set port’s PVID to VLAN 200, and the EUV is automatically set to VLAN 200. A frame that is tagged with VLAN 200 would have its tag stripped as it egresses. In contrast a frame with a VLAN tag of 300 will egress with its tag intact. However, if you set the EUV to 300, the PVID remains at 200. Now, the frame tagged with VLAN 200 retains its tag on egress, and the frame with a VLAN tag of 300 has its tag removed.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

8-4 VLAN management

Behavior summary The following tables summarize packet behavior. Table 8-1 Ingress Behavior Ingress Frame

AFT

PVID

Ingress Filter

Behavior

Tagged

Tagged-only

N/A

Disabled

The frame is forwarded if the VLAN exists on the device.

Tagged

Tagged-only

N/A

Enabled

The frame is forwarded if the ingress port is a member of the ingressing frame’s VLAN.

Tagged

All

N/A

Disabled

The frame is forwarded if the VLAN exists on the device.

Tagged

All

N/A

Enabled

The frame is forwarded if the ingress port is a member of the ingressing frame’s VLAN.

Untagged

Tagged-only

N/A

N/A

The frame is dropped.

Untagged

All

Any

Disabled

The frame is forwarded to all ports that are members of the ingressing port’s PVID.

Untagged

All

Any

Enabled

The frame is forwarded to PVID members only if the ingress port is a member of the PVID.

Table 8-2 Egress Behavior Frame State

EUV State

Egress Behavior

Tagged

VLAN ID = EUV

Frame sent untagged.

Tagged

VLAN ID ≠ EUV

Frame sent tagged.

VLAN/port configuration All of the frame forwarding behaviors discussed in this chapter are port-based features, but require VLANs to tie them together. The VLAN can be thought of as an imaginary wire that connects the ingress port to the egress port(s). VLANs must be created using the CLI, MIB, or the Device Manager, prior to configuring other features on the device. A VLAN is identified by two basic parameters: •

VLAN ID, which is the value used to identify the VLAN



VLAN Name, which is defined by the network operator. VLAN names may not begin with a number. This is an optional parameter.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

VLAN management 8-5

VLAN translation VLAN tags in a LAN often identify separate logical broadcast domains, for example, a workgroup. However, carriers are expected to support multiple enterprise networks on the same infrastructure and yet still preserve each LAN’s VLAN schema. Manipulation of VLAN tags is therefore very useful. For example, in a Multi-Tenant unit (MTU) environment, such as an office building with different subscribers, one switch may connect several subscriber networks in the building. Although each group is associated with a different physical port, care must be taken so that broadcast traffic is not exchanged between subscribers. In an MTU environment, subscribers define their own VLAN schema, which may or may not be different from the carrier network or even other subscribers. VLAN translation can be used to remap or swap one VLAN ID with another VLAN ID. VLAN translation is configured with port, VID, and VLAN entry which must exist as port members of the local VLAN. On ingress, VLAN translation looks up the frame’s outer VID and maps the VID to the local VLAN. This local VLAN becomes the switching domain. On egress, VLAN translation looks up the local VLAN and marks the associated VID in the frame. Note: MAC learning is performed on the local VLAN. VLAN translation can not be configured for: •

A remote management VLAN



A VLAN in use by an Ethernet Virtual Circuit



A VLAN that is a member of a multicast service



A reserved VLAN



Ports that are virtual switch members

Table 8-3 shows the number of VLAN translation entries supported per platform. Table 8-3 Supported VLAN Translation Entries Platform

Entries Supported

3940

1000

3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, 5160

4096

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

8-6 VLAN management

Table 8-4 lists several features related to VLAN functionality and the support provided for VLAN translation. Table 8-4 Feature Support in VLAN Translation Feature

Support

Remote Management VLAN

Not supported.

PVID

Not supported.

Port untagged

Not supported.

Egress untagged VLAN

Not supported.

Broadcast Containment

Supported. However, classification is based on the raw frame VID, not the translated VID.

IGMP/Multicast services

Supported.

CFM/Y.1731

Not supported.

Link aggregation

Supported on 3960 and 5150. Supported with a separate entry per physical port in the link aggregation group on 3940 and 5140 platforms.

DHCP Relay

Supported. DHCP relay can be enabled on the local VLAN with VLAN translation entries. DHCP frames are edited according to the correct VIDs.

This chapter provides the following procedures for VLAN management: •

“Changing the TPID stamp for a VLAN” on page 8-7



“Configuring a VLAN/port pair to ingress tagged traffic and egress tagged traffic” on page 8-8



“Configuring a VLAN/port pair to ingress untagged traffic and egress untagged traffic” on page 8-10



“Changing tag status” on page 8-11



“Configuring hybrid traffic” on page 8-13



“Emulating a tagged Ethernet port” on page 8-14



“Translating a single NNI VLAN” on page 8-15



“Translating a dual NNI VLAN” on page 8-17

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

VLAN management 8-7

Procedure 8-1 Changing the TPID stamp for a VLAN By default, the outer Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) of frames egressing a member port is stamped with a value of 8100. This setting can be changed per VLAN to 88a8 or 9100 or back to the default of 8100. Step

Action

1

Change the TPID stamp for a VLAN: vlan set vlan egress-tpid <8100|9100|88A8> where vlan

2

is the VLAN.

Set the VLAN Ethernet policy to vlan-tpid for the port on the VLAN where the packets egress: virtual-circuit ethernet set port vlanethertype-policy vlan-tpid where port

is the port on the VLAN where the packages egress. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

8-8 VLAN management

Procedure 8-2 Configuring a VLAN/port pair to ingress tagged traffic and egress tagged traffic This scenario is the default behavior for the device. The only requirement is to add the ingress and egress ports to the same VLAN. Since the EUV and the PVID are set to VLAN 1 by default, tagged frames enter the switch and egress the switch with their original tag intact for the VLAN configured. Note: By default, all ports are members of VLAN 1. Frames tagged with VLAN 1 are also forwarded since the PVID is set to VLAN 1 by default and is not changed in this example. Step

Action

1

Create the VLAN. vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>] where

2

vlan

is the numeric VLAN ID or IDs to create. You can specify one, a list, or a range.

name <String[31]>

is an optional name. This parameter applies if you are creating one VLAN.

Add the ingress and egress ports to the VLAN. vlan add vlan port } [tag { | none}]

3

To verify the creation of the VLAN, enter the following command: vlan show [port | vlan ] —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

VLAN management 8-9

Example The following example configures a port pair that receives frames tagged with VLAN 300 and egresses them with the original tag intact. vlan create vlan 300 vlan add vlan 300 port 1,5 vlan show vlan 300 +---------------------- VLAN INFO -----------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +----------------------+---------------------------------+ | VLAN ID | 300 | | Name | VLAN#300 | | Features | | |--------------------------------------------------------+ | VLAN Members | | Port | VTag | VS-Sub | |----------+-----------+---------------------------------+ | 1 | 300 | False | | 5 | 300 | False | |----------+-----------+---------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

8-10 VLAN management

Procedure 8-3 Configuring a VLAN/port pair to ingress untagged traffic and egress untagged traffic This scenario configures a port pair on a VLAN that receives untagged frames and egress them untagged: Step

Action

1

Create the VLAN. vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>] where vlan

is the numeric VLAN ID or IDs to create. You can specify one, a list, or a range.

name <String[31]>

is an optional name. This parameter applies if you are creating one VLAN.

2

Add the ingress and egress ports to the VLAN. vlan add vlan port

3

Set the AFT on all ports to All. port set port [acceptable-frame-type <'all' | 'tagged-only'>]

4

Set the PVID on all ports to the VLAN used in Step 2. This command is used with ports not associated with a virtual switch. When the PVID is set, the egress untagged VLAN is automatically set to the same value as the PVID. port set port [pvid ] —end—

Example The following example configures a VLAN port pair. vlan vlan port port

create vlan 300 add vlan 300 port 1,5 set port 1,5 acceptable-frame-type all set port 1,5 pvid 300

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

VLAN management 8-11

Procedure 8-4 Changing tag status In this port pair scenario, traffic for the specified VLAN enters one port untagged and egresses its partner port tagged with a specified VLAN ID and 802.1.1d priority. When traffic flows in the opposite direction, frames tagged with the specified VLAN and 802.1d priority will egress untagged. Step

Action

1

Create a VLAN. vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>] where vlan

is the numeric VLAN ID or IDs to create. You can specify one, a list, or a range.

name <String[31]>

is an optional name. This parameter applies if you are creating one VLAN.

Add the ingress and egress ports to the VLAN. vlan add vlan port 2

Set the PVID on the ingress ports to the VLAN used in Step 2. port set port [pvid ]

3

To set the ingress fixed .1d priority on the port, enter the following command: port set port port [fixed-rcos ]

4

Set the AFT on all ports to All. port set port [acceptable-frame-type <'all' | 'tagged-only'>]

5

Set the EUV on the egress port (provider port) to a VLAN that is different than the VLAN used in Step 2. port set port [egress-untag-vlan ] —end—

Example In our example, untagged frames ingressing on port 1 will egress port 5 tagged with a VLAN ID of 300 and 802.1d priority of 5. Frames that ingress on port 5 with a VLAN tag of 300 and 802.1d priority of 5 will egress port 1 untagged.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

8-12 VLAN management

Assume now that port 1 is connected to the subscriber while port 5 connects to the provider network, the frame will pass between the subscriber and the provider networks, but the VLAN tag of 300 and 802.1d priority of 5, which may only have meaning in the provider network, will never be seen in the customer’s network. vlan vlan vlan vlan port port port port

create vlan 300 add vlan 300 port 1,5 create vlan 4094 add vlan 4094 port 1,5 set port 1,5 acceptable-frame-type all set port 1 pvid 300 set port 1 fixed-rcos 5 set port 5 egress-untag-vlan 4094

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

VLAN management 8-13

Procedure 8-5 Configuring hybrid traffic This scenario configures a port pair that will receive either tagged or untagged frames. Tagged frames will egress with their original tag intact and untagged frames will egress untagged. Step

Action

1

Create a VLAN. vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>] where vlan

is the numeric VLAN ID or IDs to create. You can specify one, a list, or a range.

name <String[31]>

is an optional name. This parameter applies if you are creating one VLAN.

2

Add the ingress and egress ports to the VLAN. vlan add vlan port [tag { | none}]

3

Set the AFT on the ingress ports to All. port set port [acceptable-frame-type <'all' | 'tagged-only'>]

4

Set the PVID on the ingress ports to VLAN 1 (this is the default setting). port set port [pvid ]

5

Set the EUV on the egress ports to VLAN 1 (this is the default setting). port set port [egress-untag-vlan ] —end—

Example In this example, any traffic tagged with VLAN 300 enters the switch tagged and leaves the switch still tagged with VLAN 300, while untagged traffic enters untagged and leave untagged. vlan vlan port port port

create vlan 300 add vlan 300 port 1,5 set port 1,5 acceptable-frame-type all set port 1 pvid 1 set port 5 egress-untag-vlan 1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

8-14 VLAN management

Procedure 8-6 Emulating a tagged Ethernet port Emulate the standard behavior of a tagged Ethernet port. Standard tagged Ethernet ports accept tagged frames and drop all untagged frames. To drop frames that are tagged with a VLAN to which the ingress port does not belong, do not disable VLAN Ingress Filtering. Step

Action

1

Create a VLAN. vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>] where vlan

is the numeric VLAN ID or IDs to create. You can specify one, a list, or a range.

name <String[31]>

is an optional name. This parameter applies if you are creating one VLAN.

2

Add the ingress and egress ports to the VLAN. vlan add vlan port [tag { | none}]

3

Set the AFT on the ports to Tagged-Only. port set port [acceptable-frame-type <'all' | 'tagged-only'>]

4

Disable Ingress VLAN Filtering on the ports. Disable VLAN Ingress Filtering only if the ingress port is not a member of the tagged frame’s VLAN. port set [vlan-ingress-filter <'on' | 'off'>]

5

Set the EUV on the ports to the VLAN used in Step 2 port set port [egress-untag-vlan ] —end—

Example In the following example, VLAN filtering is disabled, allowing all tagged frames to ingress if the VLAN they are tagged with has been configured on the device. Frames that are tagged with a VLAN ID of 300 egress untagged. vlan vlan port port port

create vlan 300 add vlan 300 port 1,5 set port 1,5 acceptable-frame-type tagged-only set port 1,5 vlan-ingress-filter off set port 1,5 egress-untag-vlan 300

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

VLAN management 8-15

Procedure 8-7 Translating a single NNI VLAN Translate a single NNI VLAN. Step

Action

1

Create a VLAN. vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>]] where

2

vlan

is the numeric VLAN ID or IDs to create. You can specify one, a list, or a range.

name <String[31]>

is an optional name. This parameter applies if you are creating one VLAN.

Add the ingress and egress ports to the VLAN. vlan add vlan port [tag { | none}]

3

Add the translation entry to map the local VLAN to the VID on egress. vlan translate add port vid vlan where

4

port

is the egress port

vid

is the VID to map to on egress

vlan

is the local VLAN

Verify the configuration. vlan translate show —end—

Example In the configuration shown in Figure 8-1, Port 9 and Port 12 are members of local VLAN 1000. A VLAN translation entry maps Port 12 and VLAN 1000 to VID 555. When a packet arrives at Port 9 with VID 1000 it is mapped directly to local VLAN 1000, and then to VID 555. When a packet arrives at Port 12 with VID 555, it is mapped to local VLAN 1000.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

8-16 VLAN management Figure 8-1 Single NNI VLAN Translation

VLAN 1000

Port 12 VID 555

Port 9 VID 1000

The following example creates the configuration. vlan vlan vlan vlan

create vlan 1000 add vlan 1000 port 9.12 translate add port 12 vid 555 vlan 1000 translate show

+-------------------------- VLAN TRANSLATE TABLE -------------------------+ | | Ingress | Egress | | | | Frame | Swap-Internal | Internal | Swap-Frame | | | Port | VID | VLAN | VLAN | VID | | +-------------+--------+---------------+----------+------------+----------+ | 12 | 555 | 1000 | 1000 | 555 | | +-------------+--------+---------------+----------+------------+----------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

VLAN management 8-17

Procedure 8-8 Translating a dual NNI VLAN Translate a dual NNI VLAN. Step

Action

1

Create a VLAN. vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>]] where

2

vlan

is the numeric VLAN ID or IDs to create. You can specify one, a list, or a range.

name <String[31]>

is an optional name. This parameter applies if you are creating one VLAN.

Add the ingress and egress ports to the VLAN. vlan add vlan port [tag { | none}]

3

Add the translation entry to map the local VLAN to the first VID on egress. vlan translate add port vid vlan where

4

port

is the egress port

vid

is the VID to map to on egress

vlan

is the local VLAN

Add the translation entry to map the local VLAN to the second VID on egress. vlan translate add port vid vlan where

5

port

is the egress port

vid

is the VID to map to on egress

vlan

is the local VLAN

Verify the configuration. vlan translate show —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

8-18 VLAN management

Example In the configuration shown in Figure 8-2, Port 9 and Port 12 are members of local VLAN 1000. A VLAN translation entry maps Port 12 and VLAN 1000 to VID 555. Another maps Port 9 and VLAN 1000 to VID 888. When a packet arrives at Port 9 with VID 888 it is mapped to local VLAN 1000 and then to VID 555. Likewise, when a packet arrives at Port 12 with VID 555, it is mapped to local VLAN 1000 and then to VID 555. Figure 8-2 Dual NNI VLAN Translation

VLAN 1000

Port 9 VID 888

Port 12 VID 555

The following example creates the configuration. vlan vlan vlan vlan vlan

create vlan 1000 add vlan 1000 port 9,12 translate add port 9 vid 888 vlan 1000 translate add port 12 vid 555 vlan 1000 translate show

+------------------------- VLAN TRANSLATE TABLE --------------------------+ | | Ingress | Egress | | | | Frame | Swap-Internal | Internal | Swap-Frame | | | Port | VID | VLAN | VLAN | VID | | +-------------+--------+---------------+----------+------------+----------+ | 9 | 888 | 1000 | 1000 | 888 | | | 12 | 555 | 1000 | 1000 | 555 | | +-------------+--------+---------------+----------+------------+----------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-1

IP management

9-

This chapter shows the commands for configuring static IP routing. 39xx/51xx switches support IPv4 and IPv6. Note 1: To configure and run IP static routing, you need to install the Advanced-OAM license key. To obtain the Advanced-OAM license key, contact Ciena Sales. Note 2: For an example of configuring Static IP routing to support RFC 2544 benchmark testing refer to 009-3220-009, SAOS 6.11 Fault and Performance Management. Static IP routing comprises the following components: •

IP Interfaces, which enables IP packet sending and receiving.



IP Loopback, which enables IP packets to ingress and egress over the same interface.



Static IP routes, which defines static IP routes.



Forward Information Base (FIB), which stores static route and forwarding information.



Static Address Resolution Protocol routes, which defines ARP static routes.



Adjacency Information Base (AIB), which stores ARP static route and adjacency information.

IPv6 IPv6 is the successor to IPv4. IPv6 provides a larger address space and greater flexibility when assigning addresses.

IPv6 address format IPv6 addresses have the following characteristics: •

Addresses are 128-bits in length and are written as eight groups of 4 hexadecimal digits. For example: 0001:0002:0003:0004:0005:0006:0007:0008



Fields are separated by colons (:)

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-2 IP management



Numeric field values are 0-FFFF



Two colons together (::) can be used as a shorthand to represent some number of all-zeros hexadecimal fields. The doubled colon can appear at the beginning, the middle, or at the end of the address. Only one pair of doubled colons can be used in an address. For example: ::1 or f:: are both valid addresses.



Port numbers are added to IPv6 addresses by enclosing the IP address in square brackets and then a colon followed by the port number. Because square brackets can be interpreted as regular expressions, the IP address and port number are enclosed in double quotes.

Ciena platforms accept most address forms called out in RFC4291, and emit only address forms called out in RFC5952, but (per this RFC section 4.2.2) Ciena platforms do not accept a double-colon that does not compress away more than 16 bits of address, that is, 1:2:3:4:5:6::8 is not legal.

IP address usage On an IPv6-enabled network, each network element can have multiple multicast, anycast, and unicast addresses. IPv6 is most secure when used in a unicast deployment, that is, one host to another host. Multicast and anycast use one-to-many connections and are not recommended in a secure environment.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-3

Table 9-1 summarizes IPv6 address types. Table 9-1 IPv6 address types and IPv4 equivalent IPv6 name

Description

IPv4 equivalent

Anycast

One-to-nearest. Uses Global Unique protocols in Unicast Addresses. Routers IPv4, for example, only. Discovery uses. IGMP.

Addresses are indistinguishable from a normal unicast address. Anycast (router-to-router) is also used with IPv4 addresses, specifically with DNS root servers, though there may be other instances.

Global Unicast

Global IP address Globally unique. Fully routable. Assigned by IANA/ Regional Internet Registries (RIRs).

IPv6 and IPv4 similar but IPv6 can have other scoped addresses.

Link-Local

Local LAN only. Automatically assigned based on MAC. Cannot be routed outside local LAN. Scoped address concept new to IPv6. Multicast can also be scoped to link.

No real equivalent. Assigned IPv4 over ARP'd MAC.

Loopback

Local interface scope.

Same as IPv4 127.0.0.1 Same function

Multicast

One-to-many. Hierarchy of multicasting.

Similar to IPv4 Class D

Significantly more powerful than IPv4 version. No broadcast in IPv6, replaced by multicast. Multicast may also be scoped to link-local (RFC 4489).

Site-Local

Optional. Local Site only. Cannot be routed over Internet. Assigned by user.

Private network address with multi-homed interface is closest equivalent.

Scoped address concept new to IPv6. Unlike the IPv4 private network address the IPv6 device can have, LinkLocal, Site-Local and a Global Unicast address. Site-Local while continuing to exist in the IPv6 specification is currently not supported.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Description

Scoped address concept new to IPv6. Multicast may also be scoped to link-local (RFC 4489).

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-4 IP management

IPv6 architecture allows an interface to have multiple addresses, for example, link-local or global. 39xx/51xx switches also support IPv6 and IPv4 addresses. The rules for selecting the address to use in a particular situation are the following: •

Address pairs of the same scope or type (link-local, global) are preferred.



A smaller scope for the Destination address is preferred, that is, use the smallest scope possible.



A non-deprecated address is preferred.



Transitional addresses, that is, IPv6 to IPv4 addresses, are not used if native IPv6 addresses are available.



If all criteria are similar, address pairs with the longest common prefix are preferred.



For source addresses, global addresses are preferred over temporary addresses.



The attribute “interface” when adding a gateway is only required if the gateway address is an IPv6 link-local address.

Each interface can have multiple IPv6 addresses in addition to the IPv4 addresses. 39xx/51xx switches support the use of up to 16 IPv6 addresses per interface. This chapter provides the following procedures for IP management: •

“Creating interfaces” on page 9-11



“Deleting an IP or loopback interface” on page 9-14



“Modifying an IP or loopback interface” on page 9-15



“Disabling an IP interface” on page 9-16



“Enabling an IP interface” on page 9-17



“Configuring IPv6 interfaces manually” on page 9-18



“Displaying an IP interface” on page 9-20



“Adding an IP route” on page 9-24



“Removing an IP route” on page 9-25



“Displaying the routing table” on page 9-26



“Displaying FIB entries” on page 9-27



“Enabling Layer 3 switching” on page 9-29



“Disabling Layer 3 switching” on page 9-30



“Adding a static ARP entry” on page 9-35



“Removing static ARP entries” on page 9-36

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-5



“Displaying static ARP entries” on page 9-60



“Displaying the AIB table” on page 9-61

EVC ping EVC ping is used by network operators to test connectivity through end-to-end networks through an Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC). Network operators can initiate a ping of the remote EVC endpoint (NTE-2) before scheduling deployment and testing of new equipment. EVC ping is configured using IP interface and virtual switch members. EVC ping can be used for EVPL and EPL services in IPv4-based and IPv6based networks. When EVC ping is enabled, the NTE must be configured with an IP interface whose IP address is coordinated with the network operator. Each IP interface must be in its own subnet, and must not already be configured on the NTE. Frames with any DSCP priority are accepted: frame treatment is subject to the provisioned SLAs in the network. No special priority is given to this ping traffic. Figure 9-1 and Figure 9-2 show EVC ping in the end-to-end network. Figure 9-1 EVC ping in the end-to-end IPv4 network (configured IP i/f) IP: 192.0.2.4 (configured IP i/f) IP: 192.0.2.1

(configured IP i/f) IP: 10.10.10.3

IP: 10.10.10.1 UNI

CPE-1 (hub)

NNI

NNI

NTE-1 P1

P2

P E 1

MPLS/ VPLS

P E 2

NTE-2 P3

IP: 10.10.10.2

UNI

P4

CPE-2 (spoke)

Service #1 Service #2

Scenario 1

Ping 10.10.10.3 Ping 10.10.10.3

Scenario 2 Scenario 3

Ping 10.10.10.2

Scenario 4

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Ping 10.10.10.1

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-6 IP management Figure 9-2 EVC ping in the end-to-end IPv6 network

Table 9-2 lists EVC ping use cases. Port-based service can have tagged or untagged traffic sent from the network operator. VLAN-based service must have tagged traffic, coordinated with the network operator. Table 9-2 EVC ping use cases Use case

Service on NTE- Ping/ARP Service on NTE- VLAN tag stack 1 (hub) packet on NTE-1 2 (spoke) depth at NTE-2 UNI NNI

Ping/ARP packet on NTE-2 UNI

A

port-based

tagged

port-based

2

tagged

B

port-based

untagged

port-based

1

untagged

C

VLAN-based

tagged

port-based

1

untagged

D

port-based

untagged

VLAN-based

2

tagged

E

VLAN-based

tagged

VLAN-based

2

tagged

EVC ping can be configured for •

Use case A: virtual switch with EPL to IP interface with virtual switch member



Use case B: virtual switch with EPL and untagged data virtual switch to IP interface with VLAN



Use case C: virtual switch with EVPL to IP interface with VLAN

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-7



Use case D: virtual switch with EPL and untagged data virtual switch to IP interface with virtual switch member



Use case E: virtual switch with EVPL to IP interface with virtual switch member

Figure 9-3 shows EVC ping use cases. Figure 9-3 EVC ping use cases

This chapter provides the following procedures for EVC ping: •

“Configuring EVC ping for use case A” on page 9-37



“Configuring EVC ping for use case B” on page 9-42



“Configuring EVC ping for use case C” on page 9-46



“Configuring EVC ping for use case D” on page 9-50



“Configuring EVC ping for use case E” on page 9-55

Local EVC ping A local EVC interface ping is an ICMP request and reply stream between an external device connected by means of membership in an EPL or EVPL virtual switch. The ip-interface that responds is located at the nearest EPL or EVPL member access to the virtual switch. For a remote EVC interface ping request, the ip-interface that responds is located at the far-end EPL or EVPL member access to the virtual switch. Figure 9-4 and Figure 9-5 show local and remote EVC ping in IPv4 and IPv6 networks.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-8 IP management Figure 9-4 Local and remote EVC ping in an IPv4 network (configured IP i/f) IP: 192.0.2.1

(configured IP i/f) IP: 192.0.2.4

(configured IP i/f) IP: 10.10.10.1

(configured IP i/f) IP: 10.10.10.4

IP: 10.10.10.1 UNI

CPE-1 (hub)

NNI

NNI

NTE-1 P2

P1

P E 1

MPLS/ VPLS

P E 2

NTE-2 P3

IP: 10.10.10.2

UNI

P4

CPE-2 (spoke)

Service #1 Service #2 S-Tag

C-Tag Case A

EPL

EPL

Remote NTE-2 Ping 10.10.10.3 Ping 10.10.10.3

Local NTE-2 Local NTE-1

Ping 10.10.10.1

Remote NTE-1

Ping 10.10.10.3

Figure 9-5 Local and remote EVC ping in an IPv6 network

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-9

Local EVC interface ping and remote interface EVC ping are handled differently when the IP interface pinged is configured as an SVLAN interface or a virtual switch member interface, that is, double-tagged. When the virtual switch member is used as EPL, the virtual switch member can require the following configuration on the UNI port to ensure proper datapath and VLAN flooding domain: •

untagged-data-vs, which is used when untagged traffic is used into a virtual switch.



untagged-data-vid, which is used when untagged traffic is used in to a virtual switch and a specific ip-interface can be requested to be the recipient of the ICMP traffic.

Table 9-3 summarizes EVC ping from a local virtual switch member with SVLAN ip-interface. Table 9-3 EVC ping from local virtual switch member with SVLAN ip-interface Use case

Default port configuration

untagged-data-vs configured

Explanation

Untagged traffic

No replies to ARP and ICMP traffic

ARP and ICMP traffic are replied to normally

When untagged-data-vs is set, the traffic is accepted and replied by the SVLAN ip-interface.

Normal tagged traffic any CVID

No replies to ARP and ICMP traffic

No replies to ARP and ICMP traffic

The CVID traffic is not matched to the ipinterface.

Single tagged traffic with No replies to ARP and CVID equal to SVLAN of ICMP traffic ip-interface

No replies to ARP and ICMP traffic

On 3960, ARP and ICMP traffic are replied untagged. Note: Do not use matching CVID and SVID on 3960.

Double tagged traffic with CVID equal to SVLAN of ip-interface

No replies to ARP and ICMP traffic

No replies to ARP and ICMP traffic

On 3960, traffic is replied with the CVID of the packet equal to the SVLAN of the ipinterface. Note: Do not use matching CVID SVID on 3960.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-10 IP management

Table 9-4 summarizes EVC ping from local virtual switch member with virtual switch member ip-interface. Table 9-4 EVC ping from local virtual switch member with virtual switch member ip-interface Use case

Default port configuration

untagged-data-vs configured

Explanation

Untagged traffic

ARP and ICMP traffic are replied to normally

ARP and ICMP traffic are replied to normally

When untagged-data-vs and untagged-data-vid are set, the traffic is accepted and replied by the virtual switch member ip-interface.

Normal tagged traffic any CVID

No replies to ARP and ICMP traffic

No replies to ARP and ICMP traffic

The CVID traffic is not matched to the ipinterface.

Single tagged traffic with No replies to ARP and CVID equal to SVLAN of ICMP traffic ip-interface

No replies to ARP and ICMP traffic

On 3960, ARP and ICMP traffic are replied untagged. Note: Do not use matching CVID and SVID on 3960.

Note: Inserting Static ARP Entries can lead to undesired behavior of ICMP traffic. Do not use static ARP entries in an EVC ping testing environment.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-11

Procedure 9-1 Creating interfaces You can create an: •

IP interface



loopback interface

Create an IP interface to enable the sending and receiving of Layer 3 traffic. Create a loopback interface when you need the Layer 3 traffic to ingress and egress from the same interface. Note 1: The IP address and subnet mask for an IP interface cannot define a subnet that is already in use by a local or remote interface. Note 2: In SAOS 6.10.2 the ip-forwarding setting is truncated and is not saved in the configuration file. Any SAOS 6.10.2 interfaces with ipforwarding set to on will have ip-forwarding set to off in the configuration file.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-12 IP management

Step

Action

To create an IP interface 1

Create an IP interface. interface create ip-interface {ip } [vlan ] [mtu ] [mac <MAC address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX>] [ip-forwarding ] [service-mac ] where ip-interface

is a 15-character string to identify the interface. The following characters cannot be used: •! •“ •% •, •/ •? •:

ip

is the IP address with mask.

vlan

is the VLAN ID for this interface (port service). The VLAN is optional. When this occurs the ip-interface will obtain its L2 mapping through the use of virtual-switch member configuration.

[mtu ] is the MAC address. [mac <MAC address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX :XX>] ip-forwarding

determines whether IP forwarding is on or off. The default value is off.

service-mac ]

is the service name associated with the MAC address. Alternate way of specifying the MAC address.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-13 To create a loopback interface 2

Create a loopback interface: interface create loopback {ip } where loopback

is the loopback interface name.

ip

is the interface IP address. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-14 IP management

Procedure 9-2 Deleting an IP or loopback interface Delete an IP or loopback interface when it is no longer required. Step

Action

1

Delete an IP or loopback interface: interface delete ip-interface where ip-interface

is the name of the interface to be deleted. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-15

Procedure 9-3 Modifying an IP or loopback interface Modify an IP or loopback interface to change the setting, for example, to increase the maximum frame size to allow bigger frames. Step

Action

1

Modify an IP or loopback interface: interface set ip-interface {[ip ], [ip-forwarding ], [mtu <1500-9216>]} where ip-interface

is the IP or loopback interface to be modified.

ip

is the IP address.

ip forwarding

determines whether IP forwarding is on or off. The default value is off.

mtu <15009216>

is the maximum transmission unit in bytes (maximum frame size). The default value is 1500. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-16 IP management

Procedure 9-4 Disabling an IP interface Disable an IP interface. Step

Action

1

Disable an IP interface: interface disable ip-interface where

is the IP interface to be disabled. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-17

Procedure 9-5 Enabling an IP interface Enable an IP Interface. Step

Action

1

Enable an IP interface: interface enable ip-interface where

is the IP interface to be enabled. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-18 IP management

Procedure 9-6 Configuring IPv6 interfaces manually Manually configure IPv6 interfaces. Step

Action

To add the local interface IPv6 address and subnet mask 1

Add the local interface IPv6 address and subnet mask: interface local add ip where ip

is the IPv6 address of interface.

To remove the local interface IPv6 address and subnet mask 2

Remove the local interface IPv6 address and subnet mask: interface local remove ip where ip

is the IPv6 address of interface.

To add the remote interface IPv6 address and subnet mask 3

Add the remote interface IPv6 address and subnet mask: interface remote add ip where ip

is the IPv6 address of interface.

To remove the remote interface IPv6 address and subnet mask 4

Remove the remote interface IPv6 address and subnet mask: interface remote remove ip where ip

is the IPv6 address of interface.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-19 To add an IPv6 gateway address 5

Add an IPv6 gateway address: interface add { [gateway ] [interface ] } where gateway

is the IPv6 gateway to be added.

interface

is the management interface.

It is best practice to use the link-local address of the router (starting with FE80::) as a gateway rather than the global address of the router, as this allows ICMPv6 type 137 redirect messages to work correctly, thus enhancing network reachability.

To remove an IPv6 gateway address 6

Remove an IPv6 gateway address: interface remove { [gateway ] [interface ] } where gateway

is the IPv6 gateway to be added.

interface

is the management interface. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-20 IP management

Procedure 9-7 Displaying an IP interface Display an IP interface to verify the configuration. The Interface show command shows only operational addresses. The Interface Management Table includes local, remote and IP interfaces. IP interfaces are only IPv4 supported. Local and remote interfaces support both IPv4 and IPv6. The interface show command for local and remote interfaces displays the source of configuration of the specified IP address, as shown in Table 9-5. Table 9-5 Source of configuration of the specified IP address Source

Description

Manual

Specifies configuration by user

SLAAC

Configured with Stateless Auto configuration through Router Advertisement messages

DHCP

Configured through DHCP Server

Local

Local Addresses including Link Local Addresses

Step

Action

To display IP interfaces 1

Display IP interfaces: interface show

To display local IP interfaces 2

Display local IP interfaces: interface local show

To display remote IP interfaces 3

Display remote IP interfaces: interface remote show

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-21 To display an IP interface 4

Display an IP interface: interface show [ip-interface ] where

is the IP interface to be displayed. —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the interface show command. interface show +----------------------------------- INTERFACE MANAGEMENT ------------------------------+ | Name | Management | IP Address/Prefix | | | Domain | | +---------------------+--------------------+--------------------------------------------+ | local | VLAN 0 | 10.1.29.255/21 | | local | VLAN 0 | fdbf:bc21:b16a:1123:2021:5aff:fe01:b910/64 | | local | VLAN 0 | fe80::202:5aff:fe01:b910/64 | | remote | VLAN 123 | 10.2.29.253/21 | | remote | VLAN 123 | fe80::202:5aff:fe01:b91f/64 | | fred | VS Abcde67890abcde | 5.5.5.1/24 | +---------------------+--------------------+--------------------------------------------+ +-------------- TCP/IP/STACK OPERATIONAL STATE ---------------+ | Parameter | Value | +---------------------+---------------------------------------+ | IPv4 Gateway | 10.1.24.1 | | IPv6 Gateway | fe80::214:22ff:fe73:3987 | | IPv4 Forwarding | Off | | Default DSCP | 0 | +---------------------+---------------------------------------+

Note that fe80::202:5aff:fe01:b910/64 and fe80::202:5aff:fe01:b91f/64 are link-local addresses. Link-local addresses are partially derived from the chassis MAC address of the switch and are not routable outside of the local network. The following example shows sample output for the interface local show command. interface local show +-------- INTERFACE OPERATIONAL STATE --------+ | Parameter | Value | +---------------------+-----------------------+ | Name | local | | Index | 2 | | Admin State | Enabled | | Oper State | Enabled |

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-22 IP management | MAC Address | 00:02:5a:01:b9:10 | | Management Domain | VLAN 0 | | Priority | 0 | | MTU | 1500 | +---------------------+-----------------------+ +------------------------- ADMIN INTERFACE ADDRESSES --------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +---------------------+--------------------------------------------------------+ | IPv4 Addr/Mask | 10.1.30.254/21 | | IPv6 Addr/Mask | 2001:1234:f00d:cafe:1111:1202:1001:1111/64 | +---------------------+--------------------------------------------------------+ +---------------------- OPERATIONAL INTERFACE ADDRESSES -----------------------+ | Parameter | Value | Source | +---------------------+---------------------------------------------+----------+ | IPv4 Addr/Mask | 10.1.30.7/21 | DHCP | | IPv4 Broadcast Addr | 10.1.31.255 | | | IPv6 Addr/Mask | 2001:1234:f00d:cafe:1111:1202:1001:1111/64 | Manual | | | fe80::202:5aff:fe01:b990/64 | Local | +---------------------+---------------------------------------------+----------+

The following example shows sample output for the interface remote show command. interface remote show +-------- INTERFACE OPERATIONAL STATE --------+ | Parameter | Value | +---------------------+-----------------------+ | Name | remote | | Index | 15 | | Admin State | Enabled | | Oper State | Enabled | | MAC Address | 00:02:5a:01:b9:1f | | Management Domain | VLAN 123 | | Priority | 7 | | MTU | 1500 | +---------------------+-----------------------+ +------------------------- ADMIN INTERFACE ADDRESSES --------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | +---------------------+--------------------------------------------------------+ | IPv4 Addr/Mask | Not configured | | IPv6 Addr/Mask | Not configured | +---------------------+--------------------------------------------------------+ +---------------------- OPERATIONAL INTERFACE ADDRESSES -----------------------+ | Parameter | Value | Source | +---------------------+---------------------------------------------+----------+ | IPv6 Addr/Mask | fe80::202:5aff:fe01:b91f/64 | Local | +---------------------+---------------------------------------------+----------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-23

The following example shows sample output for the show ip-interface command. interface show ip-interface +------------------------------- IP INTERFACE TABLE -----------------------------+ | Name | State | Management | MTU | IP Address/Prefix | | |Adm |Oper| Domain | | | +---------------------+----+----+--------------------+------+--------------------+ | joe |Ena |Dis | VLAN 100 | 1500 | 19.34.34.1/21 | | fred |Ena |Ena | VS Abcde67890abcde | 1500 | 5.5.5.1/24 | +---------------------+----+----+--------------------+------+--------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-24 IP management

Procedure 9-8 Adding an IP route Add an IP route. Step

Action

1

Add an IP route: ip route add {destination } {gateway } [metric <#>] [domain-name ] where destination

is the destination route IP address in CIDR notation.

gateway

is the gateway IP address for the associated IP or loopback interface.

metric <#>

is the interface route cost metric. The default value is 0.

[domain-name is the routing domain. ] —end—

Example The following example adds an IP route with a destination IP address of 5.5.5.0/24, a gateway address of 6.6.6.6, and an interface route cost metric of 10. ip route add destination 5.5.5.0/24 gateway 6.6.6.6 metric 10

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-25

Procedure 9-9 Removing an IP route Remove an IP route when the IP route is no longer needed. Step

Action

1

Remove an IP route: ip route remove [destination ], [gateway ], |[metric <#>] [domain-name ] where destination

is the destination route IP address in CIDR notation.

gateway

is the gateway IP address for the associated IP or loopback interface.

metric <#>

is the interface route cost metric. The default value is 0.

[domain-name is the routing domain. ] —end—

Example The following example removes a static IP route with a destination IP address of 5.5.5.0/24, a gateway address of 6.6.6.6, and an interface route cost metric of 10. ip route remove destination 5.5.5.0/24 gateway 6.6.6.6 metric 10

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-26 IP management

Procedure 9-10 Displaying the routing table Display the routing table to verify configuration. Step

Action

1

Display the routing table: ip route show [domain-name ] where [domain-name is the routing domain. ] —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the ip route show command. > ip route show +-------------------------------- ROUTING TABLE -------------------------------+ |Act| Destination | Gateway | Genmask |Metric |Intf|Prot| +---+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+----------+----+----+ | | 10.0.0.0 | 1.1.1.1 | 255.0.0.0 | 0 | 5 | Inv| +---+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+----------+----+----+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-27

Procedure 9-11 Displaying FIB entries After creating a static IP route, the forwarding information is stored in the FIB. The summary view is displayed by default. You can display: •

the FIB entry for the default route



a summary of FIB entries



details for each FIB entry —end—

Step

Action

To display the FIB entry for the default route 1

Display the FIB entry for the default route: ip fib show [destination ] [default] where destination is the destination route IP address/mask. [default]

displays the default route, if any configured.

To display a summary of FIB entries 2

Display a summary of FIB entries: ip fib show [destination ][summary] where destination is the destination route IP address/mask. [summary]

displays summary.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-28 IP management To display details for each FIB entry 3

Display details for each FIB entry: ip fib show [destination ][details] [summary] where destination is the destination route IP address. [details]

displays details. —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the ip fib show command. The summary view is displayed by default. > ip fib show +------------------+----------------+---+---+----+------+-----------+ | Destination/ | NexthopIp |oif|Act|Path|Entry |Path Cost | | NetMaskLen | |Idx|ion|Type|Id | | +------------------+----------------+---+---+----+------+-----------+ |1.1.1.0/24 ||- |loc|IF |0 |0 | |1.1.1.0/32 ||- |loc|IF |0 |0 | |1.1.1.1/32 ||- |loc|IF |0 |0 | |1.1.1.2/32 |1.1.1.2 |5 |loc|ADJ |0 |0 | |1.1.1.255/32 ||- |loc|IF |0 |0 | +------------------+----------------+---+---+----+------+-----------+ | oif: Outgoing Interface | | entryId: Internal Id from Route Module (=0 local) | | Action: fwd: Forward, loc: Local, rej: Reject, bck: BlackHole | | C: Conn, LC: LocalConn, DC: DirectlyConn, Sta: Static | | PathType: I1I: Isis L1 Int, I2I: Isis L2 Int | | I1E: Isis L1 Ext, I2E: Isis L2 Ext, OIA: Ospf IntraArea | | OA: Ospf InterArea, O1E: Ospf Type1 Ext, O2E: Ospf Type2 Ext | | IC: Icmp, Oth: Other, IF: Local Interface, ADJ: Adjacency | | unk: Unknown | +-------------------------------------------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-29

Procedure 9-12 Enabling Layer 3 switching FIB Layer 3 switching is enabled by default. In order for static IP routing to support layer 3 traffic, such as for RFC 2544 and MPLS, FIB Layer 3 switching must be enabled. Step

Action

1

Enable Layer 3 switching: ip fib l3-switching enable —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-30 IP management

Procedure 9-13 Disabling Layer 3 switching Disable Layer 3 switching when MPLS and benchmarking are no longer required. Step

Action

1

Disable Layer 3 switching: ip fib l3-switching disable —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-31

Procedure 9-14 Displaying the status of Layer 3 switching Display the status of Layer 3 switching to learn whether Layer 3 switching is enabled or disabled. Step

Action

1

Display the status of Layer 3 switching: ip fib l3-switching show —end—

Example The following example shows sample output of the ip fib l3-switching show command. > ip fib l3-switching show L3-Switching Enabled

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-32 IP management

Procedure 9-15 Clearing all FIB or AIB entries Clear all FIB or AIB entries as part of a clean up operation, or when troubleshooting. Step

Action

To clear all FIB entries 1

Clear all FIB entries: ip fib flush

To clear all AIB entries 2

Clear all AIB entries ip aib flush —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-33

Procedure 9-16 Enabling logging of FIB or AIB events Enable logging of FIB or AIB events for troubleshooting. Step

Action

To enable logging of FIB events 1

Enable logging of FIB events: ip fib debug events on

To enable logging of AIB events 2

Enable logging of AIB events: ip aib debug events on —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-34 IP management

Procedure 9-17 Displaying FIB information Display FIB information for troubleshooting purposes. You can display the following information for the FIB: •

log



interfaces



interface IP addresses



static resolutions

Step

Action

To display the FIB log 1

Display the FIB log: ip fib log show

To display the FIB interfaces 2

Display the FIB interfaces: ip fib interfaces show [summary] [details] where summary

displays a summary of FIB information for interfaces.

details

displays detailed FIB information for interfaces.

To display the FIB interface IP addresses 3

Display the FIB interface IP addresses: ip fib interfaceIpAddresses show [summary] | [details] where summary

displays a summary of FIB information for interface IP addresses.

details

displays detailed FIB information for interface IP addresses.

To display the FIB static resolutions 4

Display the FIB static resolutions: ip fib staticResolutions show [summary] | [details] where summary

displays a summary of FIB information for static resolutions.

details

displays detailed FIB information for static resolutions. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-35

Procedure 9-18 Adding a static ARP entry ARP maps an IP address to a physical MAC address. Entries can be learned dynamically, such as when a device sends an ARP request or ping, but for the entries to be permanent, as in the case of using a device as a static reflector for RFC 2544, you can add a static entry. Step

Action

1

Add a static ARP entry: arp static add {destination } {mac <MacAddress>} {ip-interface } where destination

is the destination host IP address.

mac <MacAddress>

is the destination MAC address.

ip-interface

is the IP interface routed to the destination. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-36 IP management

Procedure 9-19 Removing static ARP entries Remove static ARP entries when they are no longer needed. You can remove •

one static ARP entry



all static ARP entries

Step

Action

To remove a static ARP entry 1

Remove a static ARP entry. arp static remove {destination } {ip-interface } where destination

is the destination host IP address.

ip-interface

is the IP interface routed to the destination.

To remove all static ARP entries 2

Remove all static ARP entries. arp static remove-all —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-37

Procedure 9-20 Configuring EVC ping for use case A Configure EVC ping for a virtual switch with EPL to IP interface with virtual switch member configuration. Step

Action

1

Create the VLAN:

Configure NTE-1 vlan create vlan 2

Add a port to the VLAN: vlan add vlan port <port>

3

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit: virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vlan

4

Add a reserved VLAN: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

5

Create an Ethernet virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet create vs vc

6

Add subscriber members to the virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>}

7

Create the IP interface for the virtual switch: interface create ip-interface ip /<subnet-mask> vlan

Configure NTE-2 8

Create the VLAN: vlan create vlan

9

Add a port to the VLAN: vlan add vlan port <port>

10

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit: virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vlan

11

Add a reserved VLAN: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-38 IP management 12

Create an Ethernet virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet create vs vc

13

Add subscriber members to the virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>}

14

Create the IP interface for the virtual switch: interface create ip-interface ip /<subnet-mask> vlan

15

Create the IP interface: interface create ip-interface ip /<subnet-mask>

16

Add subscriber members to the virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>} The ip-interface is operational. —end—

Example Figure 9-6 and Figure 9-7 show a sample virtual switch with EPL to IP interface with virtual switch member configuration in an IPv4 and IPv6 network.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-39 Figure 9-6 Use case A IPv4 configuration example (configured IP i/f) IP: 192.0.2.4 (configured IP i/f) IP: 192.0.2.1

(configured IP i/f) IP: 10.10.10.3

IP: 10.10.10.1 UNI

CPE-1 (hub)

NNI

NNI

NTE-1 P2

P1

P E 1

MPLS/ VPLS

P E 2

IP: 10.10.10.2

UNI

CPE-2 (spoke)

NTE-2 P3

P4

Service #1 Service #2 S-Tag

C-Tag Case A Scenario 1

EPL

EPL

Ping 10.10.10.3 Ping 10.10.10.3

Scenario 2 Scenario 3

Ping 10.10.10.2

Scenario 4

Ping 10.10.10.1

To configure the example shown in Figure 9-6: Configure NTE-1. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 2 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 1 interface create ip-interface ipvs8 ip 192.0.2.1/24 vlan 8 Configure NTE-2. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 3 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 4

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-40 IP management

interface create ip-interface ipvs8 ip 20.20.20.4/24 vlan 8 interface create ip-interface ip24 ip 10.10.10.3/24 virtual-switch ethernet add vs 8 ip-interface ip24 vlan 24 Figure 9-7 Use case A IPv6 configuration example

To configure the example shown in Figure 9-7: Configure NTE-1. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 2 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 1 interface create ip-interface ipvs8 ip 2001::1/64 vlan 8 Configure NTE-2. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 3 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 4 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-41

interface create ip-interface ipvs8 ip 2001::4/64 vlan 8 interface create ip-interface ip24 ip 1001::3/64 virtual-switch ethernet add vs 8 ip-interface ip24 vlan 24

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-42 IP management

Procedure 9-21 Configuring EVC ping for use case B Configure EVC ping for a virtual switch with EPL and untagged data virtual switch to IP interface with VLAN configuration. Step

Action

1

Create the VLAN:

Configure NTE-1 vlan create vlan 2

Add a port to the VLAN: vlan add vlan port <port>

3

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit: virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vlan

4

Add a reserved VLAN: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

5

Create an Ethernet virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet create vs vc

6

Add subscriber members to the virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>}

7

Set the virtual switch for untagged data frames: port set port <port> untagged-data-vs

Configure NTE-2 8

Create the VLAN: vlan create vlan

9

Add a port to the VLAN: vlan add vlan port <port>

10

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit: virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vlan

11

Add a reserved VLAN: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-43 12

Create an Ethernet virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet create vs vc

13

Add subscriber members to the virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>}

14

Create the IP interface for the virtual switch and EPL: interface create ip-interface ip /<subnet-mask> vlan —end—

Example Figure 9-8 and Figure 9-9 show a sample virtual switch with EPL and untagged data virtual switch to IP interface with VLAN configuration in an IPv4 and IPv6 network. Figure 9-8 Use case B IPv4 configuration example (configured IP i/f) IP: 10.10.10.3

IP: 10.10.10.1 UNI

CPE-1 (hub)

NNI

NNI

NTE-1 P2

P1

P E 1

MPLS/ VPLS

P E 2

IP: 10.10.10.2

UNI

NTE-2 P3

P4

CPE-2 (spoke)

Service #1 Service #2

EPL

Case B Scenario 1

EPL

Ping 10.10.10.3 Ping 10.10.10.3

Scenario 2 Scenario 3

Ping 10.10.10.2

Scenario 4

Ping 10.10.10.1

To configure the example shown in Figure 9-8: Configure NTE-1.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-44 IP management

vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 2 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 1 port set port 1 untagged-data-vs vs8 Configure NTE-2. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 3 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 4 interface create ip-interface ipvs8 ip 10.10.10.3/24 vlan 8 Figure 9-9 Use case B IPv6 configuration example

To configure the example shown in Figure 9-8: Configure NTE-1.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-45

vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 2 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 1 port set port 1 untagged-data-vs vs8 Configure NTE-2. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 3 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 4 interface create ip-interface ipvs8 ip 1001::3/64 vlan 8

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-46 IP management

Procedure 9-22 Configuring EVC ping for use case C Configure EVC ping for a virtual switch with EVPL to IP interface with VLAN configuration. Step

Action

1

Create the VLAN:

Configure NTE-1 vlan create vlan 2

Add a port to the VLAN: vlan add vlan port <port>

3

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit: virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vlan

4

Add a reserved VLAN: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

5

Create an Ethernet virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet create vs vc

6

Add subscriber members to the virtual switch (EVPL): virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>}

Configure NTE-2 7

Create the VLAN: vlan create vlan

8

Add a port to the VLAN: vlan add vlan port <port>

9

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit: virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vlan

10

Add a reserved VLAN: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

11

Create an Ethernet virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet create vs vc

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-47 12

Add subscriber members to the virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>}

13

Create the IP interface for the virtual switch and EPL: interface create ip-interface ip /<subnet-mask> vlan —end—

Example Figure 9-10 and Figure 9-11 show a sample virtual switch with EVPL to IP interface with VLAN configuration in an IPv4 and IPv6 network. Figure 9-10 Use case C IPv4 configuration example (configured IP i/f) IP: 10.10.10.3

IP: 10.10.10.1 UNI

CPE-1 (hub)

NNI

NNI

NTE-1 P2

P1

P E 1

MPLS/ VPLS

P E 2

IP: 10.10.10.2

UNI

CPE-2 (spoke)

NTE-2 P3

P4

Service #1 Service #2

Case C Scenario 1

EVPL

EPL

Ping 10.10.10.3 Ping 10.10.10.3

Scenario 2 Scenario 3

Ping 10.10.10.2

Scenario 4

Ping 10.10.10.1

To configure the example shown in Figure 9-10: Configure NTE-1. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 2 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-48 IP management

virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 1 vlan 24 translate-tag 0 port set port 1 vs-l2-transform i-stamp:push,e-matchpop:stamp Configure NTE-2. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 3 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 4 interface create ip-interface ipvs8 ip 10.10.10.3/24 vlan 8 Figure 9-11 Use case C IPv6 configuration example

To configure the example shown in Figure 9-11: Configure NTE-1. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 2 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-49

virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 1 vlan 24 translate-tag 0 set port 1 vs-l2-transform i-stamp:push,e-match-pop:stamp Configure NTE-2. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 3 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 4 interface create ip-interface ipvs8 ip 1001::3/64 vlan 8

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-50 IP management

Procedure 9-23 Configuring EVC ping for use case D Configure EVC ping for virtual switch with EPL and untagged data virtual switch to IP interface with virtual switch member configuration. Step

Action

1

Create the VLAN:

Configure NTE-1 vlan create vlan 2

Add a port to the VLAN: vlan add vlan port <port>

3

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit: virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vlan

4

Add a reserved VLAN: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

5

Create an Ethernet virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet create vs vc

6

Set the virtual switch for untagged data frames and set push/pop for the specified VLAN ID for untagged data frames: port set port <port> untagged-data-vs untagged-datavid

7

Create the ip-interface for the virtual switch: interface ip create ip-interface ip /<subnet-mask> vlan

Configure NTE-2 8

Create the VLAN: vlan create vlan

9

Add a port to the VLAN: vlan add vlan port <port>

10

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit: virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vlan

11

Add a reserved VLAN: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

12

Create an Ethernet virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet create vs vc

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-51 13

Add subscriber members to the virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>}

14

Create the IP interface for the virtual switch: interface create ip-interface ip /<subnet-mask> vlan

15

Create the IP interface for the virtual switch: interface create ip-interface ip /<subnet-mask> vlan

16

Create the IP interface: interface create ip-interface ip /<subnet-mask>

17

Add subscriber members to the virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>} The ip-interface is operational. —end—

Example Figure 9-12 shows a sample virtual switch with EPL and untagged data virtual switch to IP interface with virtual switch member configuration in an IPv4 and IPv6 network.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-52 IP management Figure 9-12 Use case D IPv4 configuration example (configured IP i/f) IP: 192.0.2.4 (configured IP i/f) IP: 192.0.2.1

(configured IP i/f) IP: 10.10.10.3

IP: 10.10.10.1 UNI

CPE-1 (hub)

NNI

NNI

NTE-1 P2

P1

P E 1

MPLS/ VPLS

P E 2

IP: 10.10.10.2

UNI

CPE-2 (spoke)

NTE-2 P3

P4

Service #1 Service #2

Scenario 1

EVPL

EPL

Case B Ping 10.10.10.3

Ping 10.10.10.3

Scenario 2 Scenario 3

Ping 10.10.10.2

Scenario 4

Ping 10.10.10.1

To configure the example shown in Figure 9-12: Configure NTE-1. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 2 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 1 port set port 1 untagged-data-vs vs8 untagged-data-vid 24 interface create ip-interface ipvs8 ip 192.0.2.1/24 vlan 8 Configure NTE-2. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 3 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 4 vlan 24

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-53

interface create ip-interface ipvs8 ip 20.20.20.4/24 vlan 8 interface create ip-interface ip24 ip 10.10.10.3/24 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 ip-interface ip24 vlan 24 Figure 9-13 Use case D IPv6 configuration example

To configure the example shown in Figure 9-13: Configure NTE-1. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 2 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 1 port set port 1 untagged-data-vs vs8 untagged-data-vid 24 interface create ip-interface ipvs8 ip 2001::1/64 vlan 8 Configure NTE-2. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 3 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-54 IP management

virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 4 vlan 24 interface create ip-interface ipvs8 ip 2001::4/64 vlan 8 interface create ip-interface ip24 ip 1001::3/64 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 ip-interface ip24 vlan 24

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-55

Procedure 9-24 Configuring EVC ping for use case E Configure EVC ping for virtual switch with EVPL to IP interface with virtual switch member configuration. Step

Action

1

Create the VLAN:

Configure NTE-1 vlan create vlan 2

Add a port to the VLAN: vlan add vlan port <port>

3

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit: virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vlan

4

Add a reserved VLAN: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

5

Create an Ethernet virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet create vs vc

6

Add virtual switch member attributes: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>}

7

Create the ip-interface for the virtual switch: interface create ip-interface ip /<subnet-mask> vlan

Configure NTE-2 8

Create the VLAN: vlan create vlan

9

Add a port to the VLAN: vlan add vlan port <port>

10

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit: virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vlan

11

Add a reserved VLAN: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-56 IP management 12

Create an Ethernet virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet create vs vc

13

Add subscriber members to the virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>}

14

Create the IP interface for the virtual switch: interface create ip-interface ip /<subnet-mask> vlan

15

Create the IP interface: interface create ip-interface ip /<subnet-mask>

16

Add subscriber members to the virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>} The ip-interface is operational. —end—

Example Figure 9-14 and show a sample virtual switch with EVPL to IP interface with virtual switch member configuration in an IPv4 and IPv6 network.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-57 Figure 9-14 Use case E IPv4 configuration example (configured IP i/f) IP: 192.0.2.4 (configured IP i/f) IP: 192.0.2.1

(configured IP i/f) IP: 10.10.10.3

IP: 10.10.10.1 UNI

CPE-1 (hub)

NNI

NNI

NTE-1 P2

P1

P E 1

MPLS/ VPLS

P E 2

IP: 10.10.10.2

UNI

CPE-2 (spoke)

NTE-2 P3

P4

Service #1 Service #2

Case C Scenario 1

EVPL

EVPL

Ping 10.10.10.3 Ping 10.10.10.3

Scenario 2 Scenario 3

Ping 10.10.10.2

Scenario 4

Ping 10.10.10.1

To configure the example shown in Figure 9-14: Configure NTE-1. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 2 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 1 vlan 24 interface create ip-interface ipvs8 ip 192.0.2.1/24 vlan 8 Configure NTE-2. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 3 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 4 vlan 24

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-58 IP management

interface create ip-interface ipvs8 ip 20.20.20.4/24 vlan 8 interface create ip-interface ip24 ip 10.10.10.3/24 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 ip-interface ip24 vlan 24 Figure 9-15 Use case E IPv6 configuration example

To configure the example shown in Figure 9-15: Configure NTE-1. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 2 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 1 vlan 24 interface create ip-interface ipvs8 ip 2001::1/64 vlan 8 Configure NTE-2. vlan create vlan 8 vlan add vlan 8 port 3 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc8 vlan 8 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-59

virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs8 vc vc8 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 port 4 vlan 24 interface create ip-interface ipvs8 ip 2001::4/64 vlan 8 interface create ip-interface ip24 ip 1001::3/64 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs8 ip-interface ip24 vlan 24

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-60 IP management

Procedure 9-25 Displaying static ARP entries Display static ARP entries. Step

Action

1

Display static ARP entries: arp static show —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the arp static show command. > arp static show +----------------+------------------+--------------------+ | DestinationIp | DMAC | ifName (ifIndex) | +----------------+------------------+--------------------+ |1.1.1.2 |00:02:5a:01:b3:c6 |Ref_Test (5 )| +----------------+------------------+--------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

IP management 9-61

Procedure 9-26 Displaying the AIB table Display the Adjacency Information Base (AIB) table to view adjacencies for tunnels and AIS when the next hop is reachable. Step

Action

1

Display the AIB: ip aib show [summary]|[details] where summary

displays a summary of AIB information.

details

displays detailed AIB information.

Example The following example shows sample output for the ip aib show command. > ip aib show +---------------+-------+------------------+--------+ | NexthopIp |ifIndex| Dmac | ObjIdx | +---------------+-------+------------------+--------+ |1.1.1.2 |5 |00:02:5a:01:b3:c6 |4 | +---------------+-------+------------------+--------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

9-62 IP management

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-1

MEF L2 VPN configuration

10-

This chapter describes Layer 2 Virtual Private Networks and how to configure them: •

“Overview”



“Ethernet Service Types”



“Q-in-Q encapsulation”



“EPL and EVPL Provider Bridge configuration”



“EVPL CoS”



“EVPL Bundling”



“VLAN translation”



“Private forwarding groups”



“External Network-to-Network Interface Hairpin” Note: In order to configure MEF L2 VPNs, you need to install the Advanced Ethernet (AE) license key. License keys can be purchased by contacting Ciena customer support.

Overview Data moves through a Carrier Ethernet network by means of Point-to-Point and Multipoint-to-Multipoint Ethernet Virtual Connections (EVCs). The types of EVC points are: •

User Network Interface (UNI), which is the physical demarcation between the responsibility of a service provider and the subscriber. The customer-side processes of the UNI are called the UNI-C and the network-side processes are called the UNI-N.



External Network to Network Interface (ENNI), which is the physical demarcation between the responsibility of two service providers. There two types of services providers.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-2 MEF L2 VPN configuration

One type of service provider sells Ethernet services to end user buyers who are connected to the network by means of the NNI. The other type of service provider is the operator who sells Ethernet services to the service provider whose networks are connected by means of the ENNI. Each service provider is responsible for their respective side of the service demarcation up to the ENNI interconnection point. The network-side processes on both sides of the ENNI are called ENNI-N. Figure 10-1 shows an example of an EVC. Figure 10-1 EVC example EVC Service provider 1

UNI

ENNI

Service provider 2

UNI

CE

CE UNI-C

UNI-N

ENNI-N

ENNI-N

UNI-N

UNI-C

Ethernet Service Types Layer 2 (L2) Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) support the four Ethernet Service Types defined by the Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF) as: •

E-Line: point-to-point service among the same service provider



E-LAN: multiple point service



E-Tree: point-to-multipoint service



E-Access: point-to-point service among different service providers

E-Line Service Type E-Line Service Types include Virtual Private Lines (EVPL), Ethernet Private Lines (EPL), Ethernet Internet Access, and TDM Over Ethernet. EVPL replaces Frame Relay or ATM L2 VPN services. It delivers higher bandwidth, end-to-end services. EVPL enables multiple services (EVCs) to be delivered over a single physical connection (user network interface) to customer premises.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-3

Figure 10-2 shows an E-Line service type Point-to-Point EVC among the same service provider. Figure 10-2 E-Line Service type Point-to-Point EVC Point-to-Point EVC

UNI UNI

For EPL, the point-to-point EVC provides connectivity between two user network interfaces (UNIs) where all frames sent to the EVC from one UNI are received by the other UNI. EPL provides a port-based service with single service EVC across dedicated UNIs to provide site-to-site connectivity. EPL is typically delivered by Ethernet over SDH with one customer/service per user network interface (UNI) port.

E-LAN Service Type E-LAN Service Types include multipoint L2 VPNs, Transparent LAN Service, and Multicast networks. E-LAN Service Types are the foundation for IPTV and Multicast networks. EP-LANs and EVP-LANs use this service type. For EP-LANs, bridged Lan service is provided across a geographically dispersed network. Each UNI is dedicated to the EP-LAN service. For EVPLANs, service multiplexing is allowed at each UNI. Multiple LAN services for different customers are provided per each UNI port. An example of an E-LAN Service Type is Internet access and corporate VPN access using one UNI.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-4 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Figure 10-2 shows an E-LAN service type Multi-point-to-Multi-point EVC. Figure 10-3 E-LAN Service Type for Multi-point-to-Multi-point EVC Multi-point to Multi-point EVC

UNI

UNI

UNI

UNI

E-Tree Service Type E-Tree Service Types include rooted multi-point L2 VPNs, broadcast networks, and telemetry networks. The E-Tree Service Type includes EP-Tree and EVP-Tree. Both allow root-to-root and root-to-leaf communication, but not leaf-to-leaf communication. EP-Tree requires dedicated UNIs to the single EP-Tree service. The EVP-Tree lets each UNI support multiple, simultaneous services in a more complex configuration than EP-Tree. The E-Tree Service Type is used for broadcast applications. For example, the Root UNI can broadcast TV channels to all Leaf UNIs, and the Leaf UNIs can send channel-changing information from each subscriber’s box back to the Root UNI.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-5

Figure 10-4 shows an E-Tree service type Rooted Multi-point EVC. Figure 10-4 Rooted Multi-point EVC UNI

Rooted Multi-point EVC

UNI

UNI

E-Access Service Type E-Access Service Type includes wholesale access services, Access EPL, and Access EVPL. Access providers sell their services to retail. Service providers deliver an EVC-based service to their subscribers. Access EPL and Access EVPL use point-to-point Operator Virtual Connection (OVC) with one UNI endpoint and one ENNI endpoint. An OVC with a UNI and ENNI endpoint is used for Ethernet access services where an Ethernet access provider provides a UNI at the subscriber’s premises. In this case, the Ethernet service provider that does not have network facilities to reach the subscriber’s site. The site can only be reached through an Ethernet access provider with network facilities that reach the site. Figure 10-4 shows an E-Access service type Point-to-Point EVC among different service providers. Figure 10-5 E-Access Service Type for Point-to-Point EVC

UNI

Carrier Ethernet Service provider

ENNI

Carrier Ethernet Access Network

UNI

E-Access

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-6 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Q-in-Q encapsulation Support for the MEF service types is configured by means of EPLs and EVPLs that comply with 802.ad Provider Bridges standard (also called Q-in-Q encapsulation and double tagging). Encapsulating the inner 802.1Q Customer VLAN (C-VLAN) tag within the outer 802.1Q Service VLAN (SVLAN) tag enables the service provider to keep subscriber traffic separate, even if the same CVLAN ID is used by more than one subscriber group. The following configurations are supported: •

Per-port (PP) Q-in-Q: SAOS supports point-to-point Ethernet Private Line (EPL) with one EVC per UNI. Frames from port-based and port-vlanbased classified UNI ingress are forwarded to an NNI egress by adding a specified SVID, and are forwarded to a UNI egress by removing the SVID. The UNI port only accepts an untagged-data-vs configuration that matches the virtual switch of the Per Port (EPL) member. This can be used in conjunction with the ingress-vs-filter.



Per-port-per-VLAN (PPV) Q-in-Q: SAOS supports point-to-point Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL) with multiple EVCs per UNI and fixed policy priority bit re-marking on ingress. Frames from port-VLAN-based classified UNI ingress are forwarded to the NNI egress by adding a specified SVID.

EPL and EVPL Provider Bridge configuration EPL and EVPL Provider Bridge configuration is implemented by attaching a virtual circuit with its associated Provider VLAN, to a virtual switch, which defines the subscriber ports (PP) or subscriber ports and VLANs (PPV). From the subscriber’s perspective, the subscriber connection to the service provider network is a direct connection using a private LAN between geographicallyseparated sites. The general steps for configuring an EPL or EVPL are: 1 2 3 4 5 6

Create a service provider VLAN. Add the NNI port to the service provider VLAN. Add reserved VLANs for use when creating virtual switches. Create an Ethernet virtual circuit using the service provider VLAN. Create the virtual switch and associate it with the virtual circuit Add the UNI members to the Ethernet virtual switch.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-7 Figure 10-6 EPL and EVPL configuration overview EPL and EVPL configuration

Create a provider VLAN

Add the NNI port to the provider VLAN

Add a reserved VLAN

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit

Create an Ethernet virtual switch

EPL

Add UNI to the Ethernet virtual switch

EPL or EVPL?

EVPL

Add UNI + CVID to the Ethernet virtual switch

Provider VLAN In the fully configured EPL or EVPL, the provider VLAN is the Service VLAN (S-VLAN) outer 802.1D tag and has an NNI (egress) port associated with it. Note: By default, the outer Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) of frames egressing a member port is stamped with a value of 8100 by default. This setting can be changed to 88a8 or 9100 or back to the default of 8100.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-8 MEF L2 VPN configuration Figure 10-7 Provider VLAN overview using Q-in-Q

Provider VLAN NNI

UNI VS

VC NNI

UNI

Reserved VLAN A reserved VLAN is used internally to link a virtual switch with an internal switching domain, and acts to connect both subscriber and provider facing interfaces. A reserved VLAN must be created for each virtual switch before the virtual switch is configured. The reserved VLAN pool is part of the same 14094 range as the system VLAN pool. The system can automatically assign the reserved VLAN from this pool when the virtual switch is created or you can specify a reserved VLAN when you create the virtual switch. Subscriber/UNI traffic can also be switched without connecting to the provider/ transport network. Figure 10-8 Reserved VLAN

Reserved VLAN UNI

NNI VS

UNI

NNI

Virtual switch A virtual switch is a logical entity that can co-exist with other virtual switches within a physical device. Virtual switches allow the physical device to provide a variety of methods for classification, segregation, and flexibility in frame processing. Virtual switches segment the system into separate logical forwarding domains or flood domains to enable VLAN identifiers (VIDs) to be 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-9

reused across multiple virtual switches. For example, a VID of 101 instanced on two or more virtual switches with unique port connectivity to each virtual switch allows multiple customers to use VID 101 for their own network connectivity, yet be completely isolated from each other. A virtual switch provides the Layer 2 forwarding domain between its UNI members and the NNI. It provides the ability to bring together different networks, while maintaining their security and isolation. Virtual switches are the switching construct used for Q-in-Q (as described in this chapter), as well as, for PBB-TE, MPLS, and PWE (3932). Note: When a port is added to a virtual switch, that port is automatically removed from its external VLANs. Therefore, any VLAN add or VLAN remove involving that port is not included in the Configuration file. The number of virtual switches and members supported for Q-in-Q depends upon the platform capabilities as shown in Table 10-1. Table 10-1 Q-in-Q virtual switch capabilities Platform

Virtual switches

Virtual switch Virtual switch members per port members per switch

3916, 3930, 3931, 3932

256

1024

1024

3940, 5140

128

512

512

3960

512

2048

2048

5142, 5160

1024

4096

4096

5150

1024

3584

3584

Note 1: The number of virtual switches and virtual switch members per port and switch supported for Q-in-Q are reduced by the number of virtual switches and virtual switch members per port and switch configured for PBB-TE and MPLS. Note 2: Virtual circuits and virtual switches have a 1:1 relationship. A virtual circuit can only be associated with one virtual switch. A virtual switch can only be associated with one virtual circuit.

Virtual circuits A virtual circuit defines a secure logical connection between one or more customer endpoints. It is a service trunk, where transport services start and end. Virtual circuits use the S-VLAN (or Provider VLAN) to tag traffic from the UNI side (encapsulate) and strip the S-VLAN (or Provider VLAN) from traffic 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-10 MEF L2 VPN configuration

coming from the NNI side (decapsulate) over the service provider’s network to allow data to be easily switched without the need for in-depth individual packet analysis or routing decisions at each network device. They can be thought of as the provider VLAN. The number of virtual circuits supported for Q-in-Q depends upon the platform capabilities as shown in Table 10-2. Table 10-2 Q-in-Q virtual circuits supported per platform Platform

Virtual circuits

3916, 3930, 3931, 3932

256

3940, 5140

128

3960

512

5142, 5150, 5160

1024

Note: For 3940, 3960, 5140, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms, the number of virtual circuits supported for Q-in-Q are reduced by the number of VSs and virtual switch members per port and switch configured for Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE). SAOS allows Ethernet virtual circuits to be statically created. An Ethernetvirtual circuit uses an additional 802.1Q VLAN tag and includes the following: •

Service Etype (default 0x8100)



Service VLAN ID (value 0-4095)



Service VLAN Priority Code Point (PCP) (also, called SVLAN 802.1D priority) (value 0-7)

Figure 10-7 shows a Provider VLAN using Q-in-Q.

Frame flooding behavior Frames received by an Ethernet virtual switch that are determined to be unknown unicast (also known as a destination lookup failure (DLF), unknown multicast, or broadcast will be flooded to the following: •

all ports that are members of the virtual circuit's VLAN, if a virtual circuit is assigned to the virtual switch



all ports that are included as an EPL or EVPL member of the virtual switch, regardless if a customer VLAN tag exists, or if the C-VID of the frame matches the C-VID configured against the EVPL member

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-11

Q-in-Q Ethertype By default the outer tag TPID of frames egressing a member port is stamped with a value of 8100. This setting can be changed per VLAN to 88a8 or 9100 or back to the default of 8100. This setting supports compatibility with standard 802.1Q encapsulation methods like Extreme's vMAN that uses the 9100, and 802.1ad for Provider Bridging. Using the virtual-circuit ethernet set port command, the Ethertype value to use can be configured as described in Table 10-3. Table 10-3 Ethertype setting (per-port) Name

Description

8100

This indicates to use normal 802.1Q Ethertype for all frames egressing the port.

9100

This indicates to use the 0x9100 Ethertype on frames using the user configured policy described in Table 10-4.

88a8

This indicates to use the 802.1ad Ethertype on frames using the user configured policy described in Table 10-4.

The virtual-circuit ethernet set port command includes a setting to specify the policy or rules for applying that configured Ethertype on a per-port basis as described in Table 10-4. Table 10-4 Ethertype policy (per-port) Name

Description

all

When this policy is set, all frames going out the port are stamped with the configured Ethertype (see Table 10-3).

encap-only

When this policy is set, only encapsulated frames going out a port are stamped with the configured Ethertype (see Table 10-3). This affects both single and double tagged frames that have had a provider VLAN tag added to them.

vlan-tpid

When this policy is set, frames going out a port are stamped with the TPID value of the egress-tpid value assigned to the provider VLAN.

EVPL CoS Class of Service is configured by means of: •

“Virtual Switch CoS Policies”



“Virtual switch Member CoS Policy Override”

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-12 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Virtual Switch CoS Policies Each virtual switch has default fixed encapsulation CoS policy (encap-cospolicy) to mark the 802.1D priority value in the SVLAN tag that is pushed onto the customer frame on egress from the UNI with the configured encapsulation 802.1D priority value (encap-fixed-dot1dpri). The CoS policy for the CVLAN tag (subscriber-dot1dpri-policy) can only be set to “leave”, which does not modify the frame. Also, for decapsulation, VSs only support a “leave” CoS policy. When a virtual switch is created the default encap-fixed-dot1dpri value is 2 and the subscriber-dot1dpri-policy is leave.

Virtual switch Member CoS Policy Override By default, virtual switch members inherit the CoS policy from the virtual switch. You can configure the encap-cos-policy of the virtual switch member to one of three settings: •

fixed — The SVLAN 802.1D value is taken from the encap-fixed-dot1dpri parameter of the virtual switch member.



port-inherit — The SVLAN 802.1D value is based on the resolved Cos policy of the port, which can be one of the following: — fixed CoS (fixed-cos) — The SVLAN 802.1D value comes from the configured fixed resolved CoS (fixed-rcos) of the port. — .1D mapped (dot1d-tag1-cos) — Value is mapped from the CVLAN 802.1D value as shown in Table 10-5.

Table 10-5 Default .1D Mapped CoS Mapping Table Customer Frame 802.1D

SVLAN 802.1D

0

0

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

7

— DSCP mapped (l3-dscp-cos) - Value is mapped from the CVLAN DSCP value as shown in Table 10-6.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-13 Table 10-6 Default DSCP Mapping Table Customer Frame DSCP

SVLAN 802.1D

0-7

0

8-15

1

16-23

2

24-31

3

32-39

4

40-47

5

48-55

6

56-63

7

— vs-inherit — Indicates that the SVLAN 802.1D value is defined by the virtual switch encapsulation CoS policy configuration. This setting is the default.

EVPL Bundling SAOS supports EVPL bundling. EVPL bundling allows multiple customer VLAN IDs (C-VIDs) to be mapped to one or more virtual switches. It should be noted that EVPL bundling only functions where traffic is being encapsulated. As an example, Figure 10-9 shows multiple C-VIDS ingressing on port 28. VLANs 10-20 have been mapped to virtual switch 2, and VLANs 100-110 and 250 are mapped to Ethernet-VS 1. This allows multiple C-VIDs to be mapped to two separate virtual switches.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-14 MEF L2 VPN configuration Figure 10-9 Multiple C-VIDS to multiple virtual switches

Port 28 Virtual Switch 2

Virtual Switch 1

VID 10-20

VID 100-110, 250

Example > virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs1 port 28 vlan 100-110,250 > virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs2 port 28 vlan 10-20

Note: If the port vlan-ingress-filter parameter is set to on, only frames that match a configured VLAN tag are forwarded.

VLAN translation The 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms support configurable VLAN translation to classify Q-in-Q traffic from one L2 switching domain and remap it to another. To configure VLAN translation for Q-in-Q traffic, set the virtual switch L2 transform actions on the UNI ports and a translation VLAN tag for the virtual switch. L2 transform actions include:

Ingress push; egress pop (i-push,e-pop) Upon ingress, the device looks up the frame’s VID (which becomes the C-VID) and classifies to a virtual switch, then pushes the SVID tag onto the frame. At egress, the device looks up the frame’s SVID and pops the SVID tag. This is the default L2 transform action and is supported by all platforms running this system software.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-15

When a UNI port is configured with this L2 transform mode, the following rules apply to the associated virtual switch: •

EPL members can be added.



Single or multiple EVPL members can be added.



Multiple UNI port members can be added.



Can be specified as the virtual switch for untagged data and untagged control frames for the port.



L2 control frame tunneling can be enabled.



All virtual switch members must have a translate tag of zero.

Ingress push; egress pop and stamp (i-push,e-pop:stamp) Upon ingress, the device looks up the frame’s VID (which becomes the CVID) and classifies it to a virtual switch, and pushes the SVID tag onto the frame. At egress, the device looks up the frame’s SVID, pops the SVID tag, and stamps the VID with the ingress classifier CVID. When a UNI port is configured with this L2 transform mode, the following rules apply to the associated virtual switch: •

EPL members cannot be added.



Only one EVPL member can be added.



Cannot add multiple UNI port members.



Cannot be specified as the virtual switch for untagged data and untagged control frames for the port.



L2 control frame tunneling cannot be enabled.



All virtual switch members must have a translate tag of zero. Note: Only the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, 5160 support this L2 transform mode.

Ingress stamp; egress match, pop, and stamp (i-stamp:push,e-matchpop:stamp) There are two scenarios supported under this mode depending on translatetag configuration, and both scenarios can be configured under the same virtual switch at the same time. When the translate-tag is non-zero: •

upon UNI ingress, the device classifies a cVid and stamps , and then pushes an sTag (Q-in-Q).

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-16 MEF L2 VPN configuration



upon UNI egress, the device classifies <sVid + cVid> for exact match, and then pops the sTag and stamps the cVid back to the original cVid used for ingress-classification.

When the translate-tag is zero: •

upon UNI ingress, the device classifies a cVid and stamps it with a new sTag <sVid [+sPri]>.



upon UNI Egress, the device classifies an sVid for exact match, and then stamps it back to the original cVid used for ingress-classification.

At ingress, the device looks up the incoming frame's outer vid (cVid) and classifies it to a virtual switch. In addition, the device stamps the cVid with a new unique cVid value, and then pushes the sTag onto the frame if the translate-tag is not zero. At egress, if the translate-tag is not zero, the device performs a qualified lookup on the frame's <sVid + cVid>. On match, the device pops the sTag and stamps the cVid with the original cVid specified as the ingress classifier. If the translate-tag is zero, the classification is on sTag and stamped with the original cVid back. Due to the qualification of the <sVid + cVid> at egress and the relevant uniqueness of the translated cVid to a port, using this transform-mode constrains the configuration as follows: •

Virtual switch can contain only one UNI port specification.



Virtual switch UNI member must contain one or more cVid specifications. — Vid bundle is OK since it exists on a single port. — The translate-tag value must be unique among cVids of the bundle. — The translate-tag value may be used by one or more bundles on different virtual switches. — Only one cVid can be configured with translate-tag zero.



EPL is not allowed as a virtual switch member in this transform mode. Note: Only the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 support this L2 transform mode.

Under the following conditions, traffic can unexpectedly obtain the same Sand C-VID and as a result, merge together toward the NNI direction: •

Both zero translate-tag and non-zero translate-tag members are provisioned under the same virtual switch.



Double-tagged traffic classifies to the zero translate-tag member from the UNI side.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-17



A non-zero translate-tag member has the same value as the inner tag of the zero translate-tag traffic.

Ciena recommends that the network operator provision the non-zero translate-tag member under another virtual switch.

Private forwarding groups Layer 2 private forwarding groups (PFG) restrict forwarding of L2 traffic between groups of ports within a shared VLAN or virtual switch. Port-based PFGs alter the forwarding behavior of ports such that their forwarding domain is restricted to a subset of ports on the switch. Unlike L2 PFG which restricts the flow of traffic between ports on the same VLAN, port-based PFG is applied to all VLANs. PFGs resolve traffic loops for networks that do not use loop prevention techniques such as Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). PFGs are also used to restrict traffic forwarding between customer-facing ports within a particular forwarding domain. Figure 10-10 shows an example where the core network connects to the customer's access network by means of two metro aggregation devices. All downlink ports on the metro devices are connected to a 3930 switch. The 3930 switch is used to provide services to two customer networks by means of a 3902 switch and a 3911 switch. Figure 10-10 Multi UNI/NNI example: L2 Network topology

In this configuration, both customer ends are provisioned for core access, but at the same time communication is restricted between customer sites. This can be accomplished by defining forwarding rules for specific groups of interfaces within a forwarding domain. By separating NNIs and UNIs into two forwarding groups, or PFGs, a set of forwarding rules can be applied to each

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-18 MEF L2 VPN configuration

interface group. These forwarding rules can then be used to prevent traffic from being switched between customer-facing interfaces while having more than one customer provisioned under the same service instance. Figure 10-11 illustrates the internal configuration of the 3930 switch shown in Figure 10-10. Figure 10-11 L2: Internal configuration of 3930 switch

Interfaces on 39XX/51XX platforms are divided into two PFGs: group A and group B. Each PFG is a set of ports that obeys the same forwarding rules or forwarding policy. Certain group forwarding policies are configurable and can be set such that ports within the same group do not forward traffic to each other. Figure 10-12 shows an example where a port-based PFG facilitates a single switch having more than two sets of private forwarding groups. In this example, the 3930 switch provides services to four networks from two core networks. Networks UNI-1 and UNI-2 are connected to core network NNI-1. Networks UNI-3 and UNI-4 are connected to core network NNI-2.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-19 Figure 10-12 Multi-UNI/Multi-NNI example: Port-based network topology

As with L2-based PFG, communication between sites must be restricted. Communication between core networks may be restricted. By restricting which ports may egress traffic received on a given port, forwarding domains can be provided for each port. Figure 10-13 shows the internal configuration of the 3930 switch. In both Figure 10-12 and Figure 10-13 traffic may not cross the forwarding boundary noted by the dotted red line.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-20 MEF L2 VPN configuration Figure 10-13 Port-based: Internal configuration of 3930 switch

L2-based PFG Forwarding policy sets The PFG feature uses policy sets, which house the port-based forwarding groups and rules for VLANs and VLAN-based virtual switches. Configured services on a single platform can inherit one of two global policy sets: •

management policy set, which is a collection of forwarding policies to be used exclusively on a device's current management VLAN.



universal policy set, which is a collection of forwarding policies that all VLAN-based services can use, with the exception of the current management VLAN.

Each policy set contains two distinct private forwarding groups (PFGs), group A and group B. All interfaces on a device are divided into one of these two PFGs for both the management and universal policy sets. This means that a port can be a member of PFG A for the management policy set but be a member of PFG B for the universal policy set. PFG membership of a particular port is configured by means of the CLI and SNMP interfaces. There is a forwarding policy, or set of rules, for every defined PFG which is applied to all ports within that particular forwarding group. A forwarding policy takes on one of the following values: •

A: can only forward to port members of private forwarding group A



B: can only forward to port members of private forwarding group B



A,B: can forward to port members of both private forwarding group A and B

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-21

In the default configuration, all ports in PFG A can forward frames to all other ports on the switch, including ports within the same forwarding group. Ports in PFG B can only forward frames to ports in PFG A. This policy set is applied to a device's current management VLAN. When the management VLAN changes, the new forwarding domain inherits this policy set, while the previous VLAN adopts the universal policy set. When the management VLAN is changed, the administrative status of PFG on this forwarding domain becomes disabled, that is, no forwarding rules are applied. Note that the default management VLAN is VLAN 127. The universal policy set is applied to all VLAN-based services, that is, VLANs and VLAN-based virtual switches, excluding the management VLAN. This policy set is also configurable by means of the CLI and SNMP interfaces. Figure 10-14 shows the structure of the policy set. Figure 10-14 Policy set structure

With L2-based PFG, traffic flow is restricted by placing ports into forwarding groups and defining a set of rules between the groups. For example, PGA only forwards to PFG B, as shown in Figure 10-15.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-22 MEF L2 VPN configuration Figure 10-15 L2-based PFG filter

Port-based PFG egress profile Port-based PFG defines forwarding restrictions for all data traffic on a set of ports which share an egress forwarding policy. An egress forwarding policy defines which ports may egress traffic which has been received on a port to which this policy is applied.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-23 Figure 10-16 Port-based PFG structure

In the example in Figure 10-17, the egress profile allows traffic to be forwarded to ports B, D and F. The egress profile is assigned to port A. Each egress profile is unidirectional, such that each port must be assigned an egress profile if the data traffic it receives is to be restricted. Bidirectional port forwarding may be configured by creating an egress profile for a set of ports, and then assigning that egress profile to the same set of ports.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-24 MEF L2 VPN configuration Figure 10-17 Port-based PFG egress profile

A port-based PFG egress profile defines forwarding restrictions for all data traffic on a particular port. It may be applied to either Link Aggregation Groups (LAGs) or physical ports. The same filter can be used on multiple ports. Port-based PFG operates co-operatively with L2-based PFG. A port only forwards to another port if port-based and L2-based rules allow it. Traffic which is switched by the CPU/software is not affected by port-based PFG restrictions. This includes frames which are generated by or destined for the CPU, such as Connectivity Fault Management (CFM). CFM frames which are not switched by the CPU obey the port-based PFG rules. This includes RFC 2544 frames. If an RFC 2544 Port Under Test (PUT) is blocked by port forwarding rules, it does not reflect, analyze or generate test frames.

Port membership Physical ports on 39XX/51XX switches are divided into L2-based PFGs upon system boot. Each L2-based PFG policy contains its own set of forwarding groups. The L2 PFG membership of a port within a PFG policy is configurable at any time through both the CLI and SNMP interfaces. Port membership also extends to aggregated ports through LAGs.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-25

When a LAG is created, the interface defaults to PFG A. Any port that is added to a LAG inherits the forwarding group of that aggregation. Similarly, when a port is removed from the aggregation, the port's original L2 PFG membership (the forwarding group before entering into the LAG) is restored. Table 10-7 lists default values for PFG A and PFG B. Table 10-7 Platform PFG port membership default values Platform

PFG A

PFG B

3916

1-6

--

3930

1-8

9,10

3931

1-8

9,10

3932

1-10

--

3940

1-24

--

3960

1-10

11,12

5140

1-24

--

5142

1-24

--

5150

1.1-1.36

1.37-1.48, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2

5160

1-24

--

Port-based PFGs are defined similarly for UNI and NNI ports. There are no restrictions on the number or membership of egress profiles. As with L2-based PFG, port membership extends to aggregated ports through LAGs. Any port that is added to a LAG inherits the egress profile of that aggregation. When a port is removed from the aggregation, the port’s original egress profile membership is restored. A newly created LAG is not a member of or associated with any egress profile.

Upgrading and downgrading a device When a device is upgraded from a version of SAOS that does not support L2based PFG to one that does, most of the default L2-based PFG feature settings are inherited. The policy sets are disabled and the management VLAN is PFG disabled. Usually, when a device boots with default settings, PFG is enabled on the management VLAN. However, the default PFG portmemberships may conflict with a previously saved configuration. This can prevent the communication of management traffic between provisioned services. 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-26 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Upgrading a device from a version of SAOS that does not support port-based PFG to one that does will not have any port-based PFG restrictions. Downgrading a device from an L2-based or port-based PFG release to a release which does not support PFG requires the removal of all PFG commands from the device’s configuration file. This is required to eliminate errors when loading any previously saved configuration files.

External Network-to-Network Interface Hairpin External Network-to-Network Interface (ENNI) transforms and switches frames out of the same physical port they came in on. Hairpin switching occurs when a frame from an origin endpoint is returned in the direction it came from in order to get to its destination endpoint. This is possible when an Operator Virtual Connection (OVC) associates two or more OVC endpoints at the ENNI. It allows traffic to be forwarded among multiple service flows of one ENNI port or Link Aggregation Group (LAG). Improper use of Hairpin Switching can result in a data loop between two operator Metro Ethernet Networks (MENs) at a single ENNI. Note: ENNI Hairpin is supported on the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 5142, 5150 and 5160. ENNI Hairpin is not supported on the 3940, 3960 and 5140.

Sub-port interfaces Sub-port interfaces are required to support ENNI hairpin switching. The number of sub-port interfaces and sub-port-based virtual switches is impacted by the configuration of other features and services in the device. Sub-port interfaces provide the following capabilities: •

Create, delete and modify a sub-port interface



Attach or detach a sub-port interface to or from an Ethernet virtual switch



Support a sub-port interface based on a port and a single outer VLAN ID value: — Ingress frame classification for the sub-port interface is based on the ingress port and outer VLAN ID value of the received frame. — Frames egressing a tagged sub-port interface will have its outer VLAN ID value stamped to the VID configured for the sub-port interface. If the frame is untagged when received on the ingress sub-port, a single VLAN tag is pushed on the frame with the VID of the egress sub-port.



Support a sub-port interface based on port and untagged frames — Ingress frame classification for the sub-port interface is based on the ingress port and the received frame being untagged. A tagged subport only qualifies on untagged or priority tagged ingress traffic.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-27

— Frames egressing an untagged sub-port interface will have its most outer VLAN tag popped off the frame. If the frame was untagged when received on the ingress sub-port, the frame will remain untagged when egressing the egress sub-port. •

Receive and transmit statistics on a per sub-port interface based on frame and byte counts



Parent port co-existence with VLAN members which is beneficial for — Other non-hairpinning OVC endpoints on the ENNI interface — Remote management on the ENNI-N device and through the ENNI interface

Sub-port configuration restrictions

The following list outlines the sub-port configuration restrictions: •

A sub-port cannot be attached to an MPLS virtual switch whose mode is set to vpls or vpws.



A sub-port cannot co-exist on the same virtual switch with a VS member or a virtual circuit. This means that — A sub-port cannot be attached to a virtual switch that currently contains a VS member or a virtual circuit. — A VS member cannot be added to a virtual switch that has a sub-port attached to it. — A virtual circuit cannot be set on a virtual switch that has a sub-port attached to it.



A sub-port cannot co-exist on the same physical or aggregate port with a VS member. This means that — A sub-port cannot be created where the parent port is currently part of an existing VS member. — A VS member cannot be added where the port specified is a parent port of an existing sub-port.

Sub-port configuration options

When the parent port of the sub-port interface is specified, there are two configuration options on a sub-port interface to further perform classification and egress L2 transforms. These options are •

vtag-stack — received VLAN tagged frames with the outer VID matching the configured VID will be handled by the sub-port interface. Frames being transmitted by the sub-port interface will have its most outer VLAN tag stamped with the configured VID by the device before transmission. If the frame is untagged, a VLAN tag with the configured VID is pushed onto the frame by the device before transmission. The following figure shows tagged sub-port switching behaviour.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-28 MEF L2 VPN configuration Figure 10-18 Tagged sub-port switching behaviour



vlan-untagged-data — received untagged or priority tagged frames will be handled by the sub-port interface. Frames transmitted by the sub-port interface will have its most outer VLAN tag popped off by the device before transmission, if one exists. The following figure shows tagged sub-port switching behaviour.

Figure 10-19 Untagged sub-port switching behaviour

Virtual switch behavior

The configuration of an Ethernet virtual switch to attach sub-ports is not affected by ENNI Hairpin Switching. Frames will internally be L2 switch-based on the reserved VLAN. The reserved VLAN will never be seen on the frame outside the device unless the egress sub-port is configured with the same VID.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-29

For MAC learning, frames received by sub-ports may be learned. If they are learned, MAC learning entries are stored and referenced with the following information: •

Key: Virtual Switch, MAC Address



Destination: Sub-port

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-30 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Procedure 10-1 Creating an EPL provider bridge Create an EPL provider bridge. Step

Action

1

Create a provider VLAN (SVID). vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>]

2

Add the NNI port to the provider VLAN. vlan add vlan port

3

Add reserved VLANs for use when creating virtual switches. virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

4

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit using the provider VLAN. virtual-circuit ethernet create {vc } {vlan }

5

Create the virtual switch and associate it with the virtual circuit created in step 4. virtual-switch ethernet create vs vc encap-fixed-dot1dpri

6

Add UNI PORT members to the Ethernet virtual switches. virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>} —end—

Example Figure 10-20 shows an example of an EPL provider bridge.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-31 Figure 10-20 Ethernet Private Line

All customer VLANs (CVID)

UNI

VS

VC

101 (SVID)

NNI

CVID/101

The following example configures the EPL provider bridge. > > > > > >

vlan create vlan 101 vlan add vlan 101 port 10 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 1001 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc EVC101 vlan 101 virtual-switch ethernet create vs EVS100 vc EVC101 encap-fixed-dot1dpri 3 virtual-switch ethernet add vs EVS100 port 1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-32 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Procedure 10-2 Creating an EVPL provider bridge Create an EVPL provider bridge. Step

Action

1

Create a provider VLAN (SVID) vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>]

2

Add the NNI port to the VLAN. vlan add vlan port

3

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit using the provider VLAN. virtual-circuit ethernet create {vc } {vlan }

4

Add reserved VLANs for use when creating virtual switches. virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

5

Create Ethernet virtual switches using the Ethernet virtual circuit. virtual-switch ethernet create vs vc

6

Add UNI PORT+CVID members to the Ethernet virtual switches. virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>} —end—

Example Figure 10-21 shows an example of an EVPL provider bridge.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-33 Figure 10-21 EVPL Provider Bridging SVID (1000)

VS 1

CVID (100) UNI

CVID (200)

VC

1000/100 SVID (2000)

VS 2

VC

CVID (300)

NNI

SVID (3000) (svid) VC VS 3

2000/200 3000/300

The following example creates the configuration. Create a provider VLAN (SVID) and add the NNI port to the VLAN: > > > >

vlan vlan vlan vlan

create vlan 1000 create vlan 2000 create vlan 3000 add vlan 1000,2000,3000 port 8

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit using the provider VLAN. > virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc1 vlan 1000 > virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc2 vlan 2000 > virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc3 vlan 3000 Add reserved VLANs for use when creating virtual switches. > virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 4000,4001,4002 Create Ethernet virtual switches using the Ethernet virtual circuit. > virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs1 vc vc1 > virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs2 vc vc2 > virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs3 vc vc3 Add UNI PORT+CVID members to the Ethernet virtual switches. > virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs1 port 1 vlan 100 > virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs2 port 1 vlan 200 > virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs3 port 1 vlan 300

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-34 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Procedure 10-3 Configuring the fixed encapsulation priority value Configure the fixed encapsulation priority value. You can configure the fixed encapsulation priority value for •

a virtual switch upon creation



an existing virtual switch

Step

Action

To configure the fixed encapsulation priority value for a virtual switch upon creation 1

Configure the fixed encapsulation priority value for a virtual switch upon creation: virtual-switch ethernet create vs <String> encap-fixeddot1dpri

To configure the fixed encapsulation priority value for an existing virtual switch 2

Configure the fixed encapsulation priority value for an existing virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet set vs {decap-cos-policy } {decapfixed-dot1dpri } {description <String[128]>} {encap-cos-policy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-precinherit | phbg-inherit>} {encap-fixed-dot1dpri } {subscriber-dot1dpri-policy } {vc } [ip-iterface ] —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-35

Procedure 10-4 Setting the CoS policy when adding VS members Set the CoS policy when adding VS members. Step

Action

1

Set the CoS policy when adding VS members: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>}

2

Set the CoS policy for existing VS members: virtual-switch ethernet set vs {decap-cos-policy } {decapfixed-dot1dpri } {description <String[128]>} {encap-cos-policy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-precinherit | phbg-inherit>} {encap-fixed-dot1dpri } {subscriber-dot1dpri-policy } {vc } [ip-interface ] —end—

Example The following example sets the CoS policy when adding VS members. virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs150 port 5 vlan 151 encap-cos-policy fixed encap-fixed-dot1dpri 6 The following example sets the CoS policy for existing VS members. virtual-switch ethernet set port 5 vs vs150 encap-cospolicy vs-inherit

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-36 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Procedure 10-5 Handling ingress untagged frames When a UNI port is set to accept all frame types, untagged data frames and untagged control frames are allowed to ingress. If desired, you can configure the port to forward these frames to specific virtual switches with the untagged-ctrl-vs or untagged-data-vs attributes. Also, you can configure the port’s untagged-data-vid attribute to add (push) a CVID tag on untagged data frames on ingress. In addition to the CVID, the tag can include the port’s ingress fixed .1d priority. These frames are encapsulated with the CVID tag and a header that includes the Service VLAN ID (SVID). After processing, the frames are decapsulated, and the CVID tag is retained on egress. Note 1: The untagged-data-vs and untagged-ctrl-vs attributes do not apply to MPLS virtual switches. All untagged traffic is directed to the MPLS EPL virtual switch on that port. Note 2: On the 3940 and 5140 platforms, the untagged-data-vid attribute pushes the CVID on ingress but does not pop the CVID on egress. Step

Action

1

Create a provider VLAN (SVID) vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>]

2

Add reserved VLANs for use when creating virtual switches. virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

3

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit using the provider VLAN. virtual-circuit ethernet create {vc } {vlan }

4

Create the virtual switch and associate it with the virtual circuit: virtual-switch ethernet create vs vc

5

Add the UNI port to the virtual switch. virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>}

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-37 6

Set UNI port attributes: port set port acceptable-frame-type untagged-data-vs untagged-data-vid fixed-rcos

is the port list

acceptable-frameis the acceptable frame types mode type untagged-data-vs is the virtual switch for untagged data frames untagged-data-vid

is the VLAN ID for untagged data frames

fixed-rcos
is the Fixed Resolved CoS value

Note: On the 3940 and 5140 platforms, the untaggeddata-vid attribute pushes the VLAN ID on ingress but does not pop the VLAN ID on egress.

—end—

Example The following example sets the following UNI port attributes: •

accept all frame types



allow untagged data frames and untagged control frames to ingress



add (push) a CVID tag on untagged data frames on ingress and include the port’s ingress fixed .1d priority

> vlan create vlan 555 > virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 1001 > virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc555 vlan 555 > virtual-switch ethernet create vs vsX vc vc555 > virtual-switch ethernet add vs vsX port 1 > port set port 1 acceptable-frame-type all untagged-data-vs vsX untagged-data-vid 555 fixed-rcos 5

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-38 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Procedure 10-6 Setting the L2 transform action on a port Set the L2 transform action on a port. To enable transform actions other than the default on the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, and 5150 platforms, assign resources for the feature. Note: For more information regarding resource management, see “Hardware resource management” on page 5-1. Step

Action

1

Set the L2 transform action on a port: port set port vs-l2-transform

To assign resources for the feature 2

Set the pool count for classifier resources to 512. resource-manager pool set resource classifier feature vsenhanced-l2-transform count 512

3

Set the pool count for meter resources to 1024. resource-manager pool set resource meter feature vsenhanced-l2-transform count 1024

4

Set the pool count for counter resources to 512. resource-manager pool set resource counter feature vsenhanced-l2-transform count 512

5

Validate the configuration. resource-manager validate

6

Save the configuration. configuration save

7

Reboot the system to implement the changes. chassis reboot —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-39

Procedure 10-7 Creating an i-push, e-pop Q-in-Q VS configuration Create an i-push, e-pop Q-in-Q configuration. Step

Action

1

Set the virtual switch layer 2 transform action to support VLAN translation for virtual switches on the first port: port set port vs-l2-transform i-push,e-pop where

2

is the name of the first port

Set the virtual switch layer 2 transform action to support VLAN translation for virtual switches on the second port: port set port vs-l2-transform i-push,e-pop where

3

is the name of the second port

Create a VLAN: vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>]

4

Add ports to the VLAN created in step 3. vlan add vlan port

5

Reserve VLANs for use in creating Virtual Switch Instances: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

6

Create a static Ethernet virtual circuit for the specified VLAN object: virtual-circuit ethernet create {vc } {vlan }

7

Create a virtual switch instance and associate a virtual circuit: virtual-switch ethernet create vs [vc ] reserved-vlan

8

Add an attachment circuit: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>} —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-40 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Example The example illustrated in Figure 10-22 shows a Q-in-Q VS configuration where traffic is classified to CVID 555 and the SVID 100 is pushed on the frame at ingress. From UNI-1 to UNI-2, the SVID is popped on egress. From UNI to NNI, frames egress with SVID 100. Figure 10-22 VS L2 transform: i-push,e-pop for Q-in-Q CVID 555

UNI Port 1

VS

VC

Provider VLAN 100

UNI Port 2

NNI Port 10

CVID 555

SVID 100:CVID 555

The following example creates the configuration. > > > > > > > >

port set port 1 vs-l2-transform i-push,e-pop port set port 2 vs-l2-transform i-push,e-pop vlan create vlan 100 vlan add vlan 100 port 10 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc100 vlan 100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs100 vc vc100 reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs100 port 1 vlan 555

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-41

Procedure 10-8 Creating a VS configuration with UNI only with bundled CVIDs Create a VS configuration with UNI only with bundled CVIDs. Step

Action

1

Set the virtual switch layer 2 transform action to support VLAN translation for virtual switches on the first port: port set port vs-l2-transform i-push,e-pop where

2

is the name of the first port

Set the virtual switch layer 2 transform action to support VLAN translation for virtual switches on the second port: port set port vs-l2-transform i-push,e-pop where

3

is the name of the second port

Reserve VLANs for use in creating Virtual Switch Instances: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

4

Create a virtual switch instance: virtual-switch ethernet create vs reserved-vlan

5

Add attachment circuits for the first port: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>}

6

Add attachment circuits for the second port: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>} —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-42 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Example The example illustrated in Figure 10-22 shows a VS configuration where traffic is classified to CVID 555 and 600. The SVID 4000 is pushed on the frame at ingress and popped at egress. Figure 10-23 VS L2 transform: i-push,e-pop for UNI only with bundled CVIDs CVID 555 CVID 600

UNI Port 1

VS CVID 600

VLAN 4000 UNI Port 2

CVID 555

The following example creates the configuration. > > > > > > > >

port set port 1 vs-l2-transform i-push,e-pop port set port 2 vs-l2-transform i-push,e-pop virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs100 reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs100 port 1 vlan 555 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs100 port 1 vlan 600 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs100 port 2 vlan 555 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs100 port 2 vlan 600

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-43

Procedure 10-9 Creating an i-push, e-pop: stamp configuration Create an i-push, e-pop: stamp configuration. Step

Action

To configure Device A 1

Set the virtual switch layer 2 transform action to support VLAN translation for virtual switches: port set port vs-l2-transform i-push,epop:stamp

2

Create a VLAN: vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>]

3

Add ports to the VLAN created in step 2. vlan add vlan port

4

Create a static Ethernet virtual circuit for the specified VLAN object: virtual-circuit ethernet create {vc } {vlan }

5

Reserve VLANs for use in creating Virtual Switch Instances: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

6

Create a virtual switch instance and associate a virtual circuit: virtual-switch ethernet create vs [vc ] reserved-vlan

7

Add an attachment circuit: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>}

To configure Device B 8

Set the virtual switch layer 2 transform action to support VLAN translation for virtual switches: port set port vs-l2-transform i-push,epop:stamp

9

Create a VLAN: vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>]

10

Add ports to the VLAN created in step 9.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-44 MEF L2 VPN configuration vlan add vlan port 11

Create a static Ethernet virtual circuit for the specified VLAN object: virtual-circuit ethernet create {vc } {vlan }

12

Reserve VLANs for use in creating Virtual Switch Instances: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

13

Create a virtual switch instance and associate a virtual circuit: virtual-switch ethernet create vs [vc ] reserved-vlan

14

Add an attachment circuit: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>} —end—

Example In this example, ingress frames that classify to CVID 555 have the SVID 100 pushed onto them. On egress, any frames that classify to SVID 100 have the SVID popped off and the CVID 555 stamped. For 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, and 5150 platforms, this configuration requires the allocation of resources as described in “Setting the L2 transform action on a port”.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-45 Figure 10-24 VS L2 transform: i-push,e-pop:stamp for Q-in-Q Device A

CVID 555

CVID 555

UNI Port 1

VS

Provider

VC

VLAN 100 NNI Port 10

SVID 100:CVID 555

SVID 100:CVID 888

Device B

CVID 888

UNI Port 1

VS

VC

CVID 888

Provider VLAN 100 NNI Port 10

Configure Device A. port set port 1 vs-l2-transform i-push,e-pop:stamp vlan create vlan 100 vlan add vlan 100 port 10 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc1 vlan 100 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs100 vc vc1 reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs100 port 1 vlan 555

Configure Device B. port set port 1 vs-l2-transform i-push,e-pop:stamp vlan create vlan 100 vlan add vlan 100 port 10 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc1 vlan 100 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs100 vc vc1 reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs100 port 1 vlan 888 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-46 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Procedure 10-10 Creating an i-stamp:push,e-match-pop:stamp configuration Create an i-stamp:push,e-match-pop:stamp configuration. Step

Action

1

Sets the virtual switch layer 2 transform action to support VLAN translation for virtual switches. port set port vs-l2-transform istamp:push,e-match-pop:stamp

2

Create a VLAN: vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>]

3

Add ports to the VLAN created in step 2. vlan add vlan port

4

Create a static Ethernet virtual circuit for the specified VLAN object: virtual-circuit ethernet create {vc } {vlan }

5

Reserve VLANs for use in creating Virtual Switch Instances: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

6

Create a virtual switch instance and associate a virtual circuit: virtual-switch ethernet create vs [vc ] reserved-vlan

7

Add attachment circuits: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>} —end—

Example The following examples show •

“When translate-tag is non-zero”



“When translate-tag is zero”

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-47

When translate-tag is non-zero In this scenario, frames with CVID 555, 600, or 777 classify to the UNI port 1. Upon ingress, each frame is stamped with the new CVID 20, 30, or 40, respectively, then the SVID 100 is pushed onto it. On egress, frames with the SVID 100 plus the CVID 20, 30, or 40 have the SVID 100 popped off, and the original CVID (555, 600, or 777) is stamped. For 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, and 5150 platforms, this configuration requires the allocation of resources as described in “Setting the L2 transform action on a port”. Figure 10-25 VS L2 transform: i-push,e-pop for Q-in-Q CVID 555 CVID 600

UNI Port 1

VS

VC

Provider

NNI Port 10

VLAN 100

CVID 777

SVID 100:CVID 20

SVID 100:CVID 30

SVID 100:CVID 40

The following example creates the configuration. port set port 1 vs-l2-transform i-stamp:push,e-match-pop:stamp vlan create vlan 100 vlan add vlan 100 port 10 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vc100 vlan 100 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs100 vc vc100 reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs100 port UNI-1 vlan 555 translate-tag 20 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs100 port UNI-1 vlan 600 translate-tag 30 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs100 port UNI-1 vlan 700 translate-tag 40

When translate-tag is zero In this scenario, the SVID is 100. The Ethernet VC (using provider VLAN 100) is associated with the virtual switch. When that association occurs, the active VLAN changes from the initial "reserved VLAN" to the "provider VLAN”. The ports of the virtual switch belong to VLAN 100. On frame ingress, the device looks up CVID 555 on port UNI-1. On match, CVID 555 is stamped with translate-tag 20 and then pushed with sTag 100.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-48 MEF L2 VPN configuration

On frame egress, the device looks up SVID+(translate tag), that is, <100 + 20>. When the double-tag match is found, the device pops the sTag and stamps the remaining tag with the initial CVID 555. This process is repeated for each user CVID. For 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, and 5150 platforms, this configuration requires the allocation of resources as described in “Setting the L2 transform action on a port”. The following example creates the configuration. port set port UNI-1 vs-l2-transform i-stamp:push,e-match-pop:stamp vlan create vlan 100 vlan add vlan 100 port NNI-1 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc X vlan 100 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-switch ethernet create vs X vc X reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-switch ethernet add vs X port UNI-1 vlan 555 translate-tag virtual-switch ethernet add vs X port UNI-1 vlan 600 translate-tag virtual-switch ethernet add vs X port UNI-1 vlan 700 translate-tag virtual-switch ethernet add vs X port UNI-1 vlan 800 translate-tag

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

20 30 40 0

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-49

Procedure 10-11 Configuring L2 PFGs Configure L2 PFGs to restrict forwarding of L2 traffic between groups of ports within a shared VLAN or virtual switch. L2 PFG contains three levels of configuration: •

global administrative state, which by default is enabled



PFG policy set specifications



VLAN- and virtual switch-based configurations settings

The forwarding restrictions defined by L2 PFG become active, that is, operationally-enabled, when all three levels of configuration are enabled. By default, L2 PFG is •

enabled globally



disabled for all policy sets excluding the management policy



disabled on all VSs and VLANs, with the exception of the management VLAN which is enabled by default

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-50 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Table 10-8 lists supported domains by platform. Table 10-8 Supported domains by platform Platform

Domain

3916

management, universal

3930

management, universal

3931

management, universal

3932

management, universal

3940

management

3960

management, universal

5140

management

5142

management, universal

5150

management, universal

5160

management, universal

Step

Action

1

Disable PFG globally: private-forwarding-groups disable

2

Configure PFG port membership: private-forwarding-groups set port policy <'mgmt', 'univ'> fwd-group where port

is the port.

policy <'mgmt', 'univ'>

is the policy set.

fwd-group is the PFG.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-51 3

Configure the universal policy set: private-forwarding-groups set policy <'mgmt', 'univ'> [[policy-group-A ], [policy-group-B ]] where

4

policy <'mgmt', 'univ'>

is the policy set.

policy-group-A

specifies which interfaces PFG A can forward to.

policy-group-B

specifies which interfaces PFG B can forward to.

Configure required VLANs and virtual switches: vlan create vlan vlan add vlan port virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vlan virtual-switch add reserved-vlan virtual-switch ethernet create vs vc virtual-switch ethernet add vs port

5

Enable PFG: private-forwarding-groups enable vlan private-forwarding-groups enable vs private-forwarding-groups enable policy <'mgmt', 'univ'> private-forwarding-groups enable —end—

Example Figure 10-26 illustrates a simplified example of PFG use on a 3930 platform. Port 10 connects to a core network and ports 5 and 8 are connected to two 3902s. The 3902s represent two separate customer networks.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-52 MEF L2 VPN configuration Figure 10-26 Sample configuration

P10 P5

P8

The following example configures one service instance while provisioning two attachment customer networks. This configuration sets up a PFG such that the 3902s can access the core network but cannot communicate with each other. private-forwarding-groups private-forwarding-groups group B private-forwarding-groups group A private-forwarding-groups group A private-forwarding-groups B policy-group-B A vlan create vlan 100 vlan add vlan 100 port 10

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

disable set port 10 policy univ fwdset port 5 policy univ fwdset port 8 policy univ fwdset policy univ policy-group-A

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-53

Procedure 10-12 Configuring port-based PFGs Configure port-based PFGs to alter the forwarding behavior of ports on all VLANs. Port-based PFG contains four levels of configuration: •

global administrative state, which by default is enabled



global port-based administrative state



PFG egress profile configuration



port PFG configuration

Global administrative state determines whether PFG is enabled globally. Disabling PFG removes the forwarding restrictions of PFG provisioned ports. Global port-based administrative state determines whether port-based PFG is enabled globally. Disabling PFG globally removes the forwarding restrictions of PFG provisioned ports. Port-based PFG has its own administrative state. This is disabled if port-based PFG is disabled. PFG is enabled, port-based PFG may be enabled or disabled. PFG egress profile configuration settings control the parameters that may be applied to each port. These settings are applied to all ports which share that egress profile. Port PFG configuration settings assigns up to eight egress profiles for each port. That means one per flood traffic type combination. Egress profiles must contain optional forwarding or blocking based on the following data traffic types: •

unknown unicast



unknown multicast



broadcast



none of these

or any combination of these data traffic types. By default, traffic type is all, meaning that all traffic is forwarded to the given egress ports or LAGs. See “Configuring egress profile with traffic types” on page 10-57. Step

Action

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-54 MEF L2 VPN configuration 1

Create an egress profile for traffic egressing on ports 1, 2, 3 and 5 by one of the following two methods: private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding create egressprofile EPOL01 private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding add egressprofile EPOL01 port 1-3,5 or private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding create egressprofile EPOL01 port 1-3,5

2

Assign this policy to port 8: private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding add port 8 egress-profile EPOL01

3

Enable port-based PFG: private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding enable private-forwarding-groups enable

Example Figure 10-27 shows a partial configuration in which data traffic ingressing on port 8 may be forwarded only to ports 1, 2, 3 and 5. Figure 10-27 Port-based PFG sample partial configuration

The following example configures an egress profile for traffic egressing on ports 1,2, 3 and 5. The policy is set to port 8 and port-based PFG is enabled. private-forwarding-groups profile EPOL01 port 1-3,5 private-forwarding-groups egress-profile EPOL01 private-forwarding-groups private-forwarding-groups

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

port-forwarding create egressport-forwarding add port 8 enable port-forwarding enable

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-55

Figure 10-28 shows a configuration with 8 ports. All forwarding configuration is shown as unidirectional with bidirectional connections being achieved with unidirectional configuration in both directions. Figure 10-28 Unidirectional port-based PFG sample configuration

The following example creates egress profiles for traffic egressing on ports 1, 2, 3, 4, 7 and 8. The policies are assigned to the desired port, and port-based PFG is enabled. private-forwarding-groups profile EP_un01 port 5,6 private-forwarding-groups profile EP_un02 port 7,8 private-forwarding groups profile EP_nu01 port 1-3 private-forwarding-groups profile EP_nu02 port 4 private-forwarding groups egress-profile EP_un01 private-forwarding-groups egress-profile EP_un02 private-forwarding-groups egress-profile EP_nu-01 private-forwarding-groups egress-profile EP_un02 private-forwarding-groups private-forwarding-groups 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

port-forwarding create egressport-forwarding create egress port-forwarding create egressport-forwarding create egressport-forwarding add port 1-3 port-forwarding add port 4 port-forwarding add port 5,6 port-forwarding add port 7,8 port-forwarding enable enable Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-56 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Figure 10-29 shows how bidirectional port forwarding may be configured. Any port which is in more than one egress profile applied to a port must not have conflicting flood traffic types. That is, a port may not be in more than one egress profile which is assigned to any port if its flood traffic types are not the same. Figure 10-29 Bidirectional port-based PFG sample configuration

The following example creates egress profiles for traffic egressing on ports 1, 2, 5 and 6. The policies are assigned to the desired port, and port-based PFG is enabled. private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding profile EP_01 port 1,5 private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding profile EP_02 port 2,5 private-forwarding groups port-forwarding profile EP_03 port 2,6 private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding egress-profile EP_01 private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding egress-profile EP_02,EP_03 private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding egress-profile EP_01,EP_02 private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding egress profile EP_03 private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding private-forwarding-groups enable 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

create egresscreate egress create egressadd port 1 add port 2 add port 5 add port 6 enable

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-57

Procedure 10-13 Configuring egress profile with traffic types The traffic types previously described may be added to each egress profile singly or in combinations of unknown-unicast, unknown multicast and broadcast. The egress profile could have unknown-unicast and unknownmulticast traffic with blocked broadcast traffic. The switch hardware cannot selectively block known-unicast or known multicast traffic. These can only be blocked by removing the respective egress ports from the egress profile. There are eight combinations of allowed flood traffic types: •

none (no unknown-unicast, unknown-multicast or broadcast)



unknown-unicast



unknown-multicast



broadcast



unknown-unicast and unknown-multicast



unknown-unicast and broadcast



unknown-multicast and broadcast



unknown-unicast, unknown-multicast and broadcast

The default is unknown-unicast, unknown-multicast and broadcast. To allow a port to block broadcast traffic to one egress port, but allow it on another requires that the ports be permitted to have more than one egress profile assigned to them. Step

Action

1

Create an egress profile for traffic egressing on ports 5 and 6: private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding create egressprofile EP_un01 port 5 private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding create egressprofile EP_un02 port 5 flood-type unknown-ucast, unknownmcast private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding create egressprofile EP_un03 port 6 flood-type none

2

Assign these policies to the desired ports: private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding add port 1,2 egress-profile EP_un01,EP_un03 private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding add port 3 egress-profile EP_un01,EP_un03

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-58 MEF L2 VPN configuration 3

Enable port-based PFG: private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding enable private-forwarding-groups enable

Example Figure 10-30 shows a sample port-based PFG configuration with restrictions on flood traffic types for some ports. Figure 10-30 Port-based PFT sample configuration with flood traffic types

The following example creates egress profiles for traffic egressing on ports 5 and 6. The policies are assigned to the desired port, and port-based PFG is enabled. private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding create egressprofile EP_un01 port 5 private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding create egressprofile EP_un02 port 5 flood-type unknown-ucast,unknownmcast private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding create egressprofile EP_un03 port 6 flood-type none private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding add port 1,2 egress-profile EP_un01,EP_un03 private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding add port 3 egress-profile EP_un01,EP_un03 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-59

private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding enable private-forwarding-groups enable When two or more egress profiles are assigned to any port, each of the egress ports they contain must have a matching flood traffic type with the other egress profiles. This is shown in Figure 10-31 Port-based PFG sample configuration with flood traffic conflict

The following example creates egress profiles for traffic egressing on ports 5 and 6. An attempt is made to assign policies to the desired ports. These have conflicting allow-flood types to egress port 6. private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding create egressprofile EP_un01 port 5,6 flood-type unknown-ucast, unknown-mcast private-forwarding-groups port forwarding create egress profile EP_un02 port 6 flood-type bcast private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding add port 1 egress-profile EP_un01,EP_un02 private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding add port 2 egress-profile EP_un01

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-60 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Procedure 10-14 Disabling the PFG feature Disable the PFG feature to alter the forwarding restrictions associated with a particular PFG policy set. The PFG feature must be operationally-disabled on all VLANs and virtual switches that reference the policy. Step

Action

1

Disable the PFG feature on the VLANs that reference the PFG policy set: private-forwarding-groups disable vlan

2

Disable the PFG feature on the virtual switches that reference the PFG policy set: private-forwarding-groups disable vs

3

Disable the PFG policy set: private-forwarding-groups disable policy <'mgmt', 'univ'>

4

Disable PFG globally: private-forwarding-groups disable

5

Disable port-based PFG: private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding disable —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-61

Procedure 10-15 Displaying the configuration of EVPL VS members Display the configuration of EVPL VS members when troubleshooting. Step

Action

1

Display the configuration of each EVPL virtual-switch member: virtual-switch ethernet show vs where vs

is the virtual switch. —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the virtual switch with an identifier of vs150. > virtual-switch ethernet show vs vs150 +------------- ETHERNET VIRTUAL SWITCH INFO --------------+ | Parameter | Value | +----------------------+----------------------------------+ | Name | vs150 | | ID | 5 | | Active VLAN | (150) VLAN#150 | | Reserved VLAN | (2503) VLAN#150 | | CPT Status | Disabled | | CPT Method | l2pt | | Transparent Validate | off | | Mac Learning | Enabled | | VC | (1) vc150 | | Subscr Dot1D Policy | leave | | Decap CoS Policy | leave | | Decap Fixed Dot1DPri | 2 | | Encap CoS Policy | fixed | | Encap Fixed Dot1DPri | 2 | +---------------------------------------------------------+ | Virtual Switch Members | | Port | Subscriber VLAN | Encap Cos |Encap Fixed | | | | Policy | Dot1DPri | |----------+-----------------+---------------+------------| | 5 | 151 | fixed | 6 | | 5 | 152 | vs-inherit | 2 | +---------------------------------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-62 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Procedure 10-16 Displaying virtual switches Display virtual switches to learn which reserved VLAN is associated with a virtual switch. Note: The default name for a reserved VLAN cannot be changed. Reserved VLANs always appear in the format VLAN#XXX. Step

Action

1

Display the reserved VLAN associated with a virtual switch: virtual-switch show —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the virtual-switch show command. > virtual-switch show +------------ VIRTUAL SWITCH RESERVED VLANS -----------+ | VLAN | Virtual Switch [Attached] | +----------------------+-------------------------------+ | 4094 | (1) vs1 | +----------------------+-------------------------------+ +----------------- ETHERNET VIRTUAL SWITCH TABLE ------------------------+ | | VLAN | | | Subscriber | | | Name | Active | CPT | Virtual Circuit | Count | Description | +-----------+--------+-----+-----------------+------------+--------------+ | vs1 | 4094 | Dis | | 0 | | +-----------+--------+-----+-----------------+------------+--------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-63

Procedure 10-17 Displaying PFG information You can display •

the administrative state of the PFG feature



VLAN-specific PFG settings



virtual switch-specific PFG settings



configuration settings for the PFG policy set



PFG settings for port membership



port-based PFG settings



port-based PFG egress profiles



port-based PFG settings for a port

Step

Action

To display the administrative state of the PFG feature 1

Display the administrative state of the PFG feature: private-forwarding-groups show

To display VLAN-specific PFG settings 2

Display VLAN-specific PFG settings: private-forwarding-groups show vlan

To display virtual switch-specific PFG settings 3

Display virtual switch-specific PFG settings: private-forwarding-groups show vs

To display the configuration settings for the PFG policy set 4

Display the configuration settings for the PFG policy set: private-forwarding-groups show policy

To display the PFG settings for port membership 5

Display PFG settings for port membership: private-forwarding-groups show port

To display port-based PFG settings 6

Display port-based PFG settings: private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding show

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-64 MEF L2 VPN configuration To display port-based PFG egress profiles 7

Display port-based PFG egress profiles: private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding egress[profile <egressProfile>] where show [profile <egressProfile>]

is the PFG egress profile.

To display port-based PFG settings for a port 8

Display port-based settings for a port: private-forwarding-groups port-forwarding show port <port> where show <port>

is the port. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-65

Procedure 10-18 Configuring EPL and EVPL for E-Access service types This procedure shows how to configure the User Premises Equipment (UPE) and the Network Premises Equipment (NPE) to support E-Access service types. Step

Action

To configure the UPE as an EPL or EVPL 1

Configure the UNI and NNI ports maximum frame size. port set port max-frame-size

2

Create a provider VLAN (SVID). vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>]

3

Configure the provider VLAN TPID. vlan set vlan egress-tpid <8100|9100|88A8>

4

Add the NNI port to the provider VLAN. vlan add vlan port

5

Create a management VLAN. vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>]

6

Add the management port to the remote management VLAN. vlan add vlan port

7

Remove the ports from the default management VLANs. vlan remove vlan port

8

Change the remote interface to the new remote management VLAN. interface remote set vlan

9

Configure the PVID and VLAN for egress untagged traffic. port set port egress-untag-vlan

10

Configure the acceptable frame type for the UNI port. port set port acceptable-frame-type

11

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit using the provider VLAN. virtual-circuit ethernet create {vc } {vlan }

12

Add reserved VLANs for use when creating virtual switches. virtual-switch add reserved-vlan

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-66 MEF L2 VPN configuration 13

Create Ethernet virtual switches using the Ethernet virtual circuit. virtual-switch ethernet create vs vc

14

Add UNI PORT+CVID members to the Ethernet virtual switch. virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>} Note: When the vlan parameter is specified, the UPE is configured for an EVPL. When the vlan parameter is left out, the UPE is configured for an EPL.

15

Set the UNI and NNI port VLAN Ethertype value and policy. virtual-circuit ethernet set port vlanethertype <8100|9100|88A8> vlan-ethertype-policy

To configure the NPE 16

Configure the UNI and NNI ports maximum frame size. port set port max-frame-size

17

Create a provider VLAN (SVID). vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>]

18

Configure the provider VLAN TPID. vlan set vlan egress-tpid <8100|9100|88A8>

19

Add the UNI and NNI ports to the provider VLAN. vlan add vlan port

20

Create a management VLAN. vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>]

21

Add the management port to the remote management VLAN. vlan add vlan port

22

Remove the ports from the default management VLANs. vlan remove vlan port

23

Change the remote interface to the new remote management VLAN. interface remote set vlan

24

Configure the PVID and VLAN on the management port for egress untagged traffic. port set port egress-untag-vlan

25

Configure the acceptable frame type for the ENNI port. port set port acceptable-frame-type

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-67 —end—

Example Figure 10-32 shows an example of an E-Access EPL/EVPL where the ENNI receives double tagged traffic with the outer SVID tag of 200 and inner CVID tag of 100. Figure 10-32 E-Access EPL/EVPL

UNI I/F

ENNI I/F

Access Provider Back-to-Back

2

2

6

6

Service Provider

NPE

UPE

SVID 200:CVID 100

Configure the UPE port set port 2 max-frame-size 9216 port set port 6 max-frame-size 9216 vlan create vlan 200 name S-tag vlan set vlan 200 egress-tpid 88A8 vlan add vlan 200 port 2 vlan create vlan 128 vlan add vlan 128 port 1 vlan remove vlan 1 port 1 vlan remove vlan 1 port 2 vlan remove vlan 127 port 6 interface remote set vlan 128 port set port 1 pvid 128 egress-untag-vlan 128 port set port 6 acceptable-frame-type all virtual-circuit ethernet create vc E-Access vlan 200 virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 1700 virtual-switch ethernet create vs E-Access vc E-Access virtual-switch ethernet add vs E-Access port 6 vlan 100 virtual-circuit ethernet set port 2 vlan-ethertype 88A8 vlan-ethertype-policy vlan-tpid virtual-circuit ethernet set port 6 vlan-ethertype 88A8 vlan-ethertype-policy vlan-tpid

Configure the NPE: port set port 2 max-frame-size 9216 port set port 6 max-frame-size 9216 vlan create vlan 200 name S-tag vlan set vlan 200 egress-tpid 88A8 vlan add vlan 200 port 2 vlan add vlan 200 port 6 vlan create vlan 128 vlan add vlan 128 port 1 interface remote set vlan 128 port set port 1 pvid 128 egress-untag-vlan 128 port set port 6 acceptable-frame-type all 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-68 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Procedure 10-19 Configuring CFM for E-Access service types This procedure shows how to configure CFM over the User Premises Equipment (UPE) and the Network Premises Equipment (NPE) for E-Access service types created in Procedure 10-18. Refer to the Fault and Performance guide for full details about CFM. Step

Action

To configure the UPE 1

Enable CFM. cfm enable

2

Create a CFM service for the E-access virtual switch. cfm service create

3

Enable the CFM service. cfm service enable

4

Create an up MEP for the service for the UNI PORT+CVID. cfm mep create

5

Send DMMs to the remote MEP: cfm delay send

6

Set CFM service LMM interval: cfm service set

7

Send LMMs to a remote MEP: cfm frame-loss send

8

Display the MEP. cfm mep show

9

Display the remote MEP cfm remote-mep show

To configure the NPE 10

Enable CFM. cfm enable

11

Turn off 802.1ad strict mode. cfm set dot1ad-strict off

12

Create a CFM service for the E-access virtual switch. cfm service create

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-69 13

Enable the CFM service. cfm service enable

14

Create an up MEP for the service for the UNI PORT+CVID. cfm mep create

15

Set the MEP attributes to use the tag-vid for the CVID and turn on the tagmode. cfm mep set

16

Send DMMs to the remote MEP: cfm delay send

17

Set the CFM service LMM interval: cfm service set

18

Send LMMs to a remote MEP: cfm frame-loss send

19

Display the MEP. cfm mep show

20

Display the remote MEP cfm remote-mep show —end—

Example UPE CFM for EVPL cfm enable cfm service create vs E-Access name ENNI-test md md4 next-mepid 611 cfm service enable service ENNI-test cfm mep create service ENNI-test port 6 vlan 100 type up mepid 611 cfm delay send service EVPLOVC1 local-mepid 611 mepid 711 repeat 1 delaythreshold 700 jitter-threshold 10 cfm service set service EVPLOVC1 lmm-interval 1sec cfm frame-loss send service EVPLOVC1 local-mepid 611 mepid 711 repeat 1 cfm mep show cfm remote-mep show

NPE CFM for EVPL cfm enable cfm set dot1ad-strict off cfm service create vlan 200 name ENNI-test md md4 next-mepid 711 cfm service enable service ENNI-test cfm mep create service ENNI-test port 6 type up mepid 711 cfm mep set service ENNI-test local-mepid 711 tag-vid 100 cfm mep set service ENNI-test local-mepid 711 tag-mode on cfm delay send service EVPLOVC1 local-mepid 611 mepid 711 repeat 1 delaythreshold 700 jitter-threshold 10 cfm service set service EVPLOVC1 lmm-interval 1sec cfm frame-loss send service EVPLOVC1 local-mepid 611 mepid 711 repeat 1 cfm mep show cfm remote-mep show

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-70 MEF L2 VPN configuration

UPE CFM for EPL cfm enable cfm service create vs E-Access name ENNI-test md md4 next-mepid 611 cfm service enable service ENNI-test cfm mep create service ENNI-test port 6 type up mepid 611 cfm delay send service EVPLOVC1 local-mepid 611 mepid 711 repeat 1 delaythreshold 700 jitter-threshold 10 cfm service set service EVPLOVC1 lmm-interval 1sec cfm frame-loss send service EVPLOVC1 local-mepid 611 mepid 711 repeat 1 cfm mep show cfm remote-mep show

NPE CFM for EPL ccfm enable cfm set dot1ad-strict on cfm service create vlan 200 name ENNI-test md md4 next-mepid 711 cfm service enable service ENNI-test cfm mep create service ENNI-test port 6 type up mepid 711 cfm delay send service EVPLOVC1 local-mepid 611 mepid 711 repeat 1 delaythreshold 700 jitter-threshold 10 cfm service set service EVPLOVC1 lmm-interval 1sec cfm frame-loss send service EVPLOVC1 local-mepid 611 mepid 711 repeat 1 cfm mep show cfm remote-mep show

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-71

Procedure 10-20 Configuring HIM for E-Access service types This procedure shows how to configure hierarchical ingress metering (HIM) with traffic profiling on the UPE and NPE for E-Access service types created in Procedure 10-18. The configuration on the UNI and ENNI is the same for EVPL and EPL. Refer to the for full details about HIM. Step

Action

To configure the UPE UNI 1

Set the traffic profiling meter provisioning to EIR. traffic-profiling set meter-provisioning eir

2

Set the UNI port traffic profiling to advanced mode. traffic-profiling set port mode advanced

3

Create a standard profile associated with the UNI port. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port

4

Enable traffic profiling on the UNI port. traffic-profiling enable port

5

Enable traffic profiling globally: traffic-profiling enable

6

Display the traffic profiling throughput statistics: traffic-profiling standard- throughput port

To configure the NPE ENNI 7

Set the ENNI port traffic profiling to advanced hierarchical-vlan. traffic-profiling set port mode hierarchicalvlan

8

Create a standard profile parent and child profiles associated with the ENNI port and SVID. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port

9

Enable traffic profiling on the ENNI port. traffic-profiling enable port

10

Enable traffic profiling globally: traffic-profiling enable

11

Display the traffic profiling statistics: traffic-profiling standard- throughput port

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-72 MEF L2 VPN configuration 12

Display the traffic profiling throughput statistics for the child profile(s): traffic-profiling standard- throughput port —end—

Example This example shows configuration to limit the traffic rate to 50MB on the UNI and apply a 3 Rate HIM on the ENNI.

UPE metering on UNI traffic-profiling set meter-provisioning eir traffic-profiling set port 6 mode advanced traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 6 profile 1 name E-Access cir 50048 pir 50048 cbs 256 ebs 0 vs E-Access traffic-profiling enable port 6 traffic-profiling enable traffic-profiling standard- throughput port 6 traffic-profile E-access

NPE metering on ENNI traffic-profiling traffic-profiling 300224 pir 450048 dot1dpri traffic-profiling 100032 pir 150016 traffic-profiling 100032 pir 150016 traffic-profiling 100032 pir 150016 traffic-profiling traffic-profiling

set port 6 mode hierarchical-vlan standard-profile create port 6 profile 1 name flow1 cir cbs 16 ebs 16 statistics off vlan 200 child-mode standardstandard-profile create port 6 profile 2 name cos0 cir cbs 128 ebs 128 dot1dpri 0 parent flow1 standard-profile create port 6 profile 3 name cos3 cir cbs 128 ebs 128 dot1dpri 3 parent flow1 standard-profile create port 6 profile 4 name cos5 cir cbs 128 ebs 128 dot1dpri 5 parent flow1 enable port 6 enable

traffic-profiling standard- statistics traffic-profiling standard- throughput port 6 traffic-profile cos0

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-73

Procedure 10-21 Configuring L2 Control Frame Tunneling for E-Access service types This procedure shows how to configure L2 control frame tunneling for EAccess service types created in Procedure 10-18. The configuration is the same for EVPL and EPL and on the UPE only. Refer to the for full details about HIM. Step

Action

To configure the UPE UNI 1

Configure the virtual switch for untagged data and control traffic. port set port untagged-data-vs untagged-ctrl-vs

2

Configure the acceptable frame type for the UNI port to all. port set port acceptable-frame-type all

3

Enable L2 control frame tunneling for the virtual switch. virtual-switch l2-cft enable vs

4

Configure the protocols to tunnel for the virtual switch. virtual-switch l2-cft protocol add vs

Example This example shows configuration to forward LACP.

UPE L2 control frame tunneling port set port 6 untagged-data-vs E-Access untagged-ctrl-vs E-Access port set port 6 acceptable-frame-type all virtual-switch l2-cft enable vs E-Access virtual-switch l2-cft protocol add vs E-Access ctrl-protocol lacp disposition forward traffic-profiling standard- throughput port 6 traffic-profile E-access

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-74 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Procedure 10-22 Configuring RFC 2544 Benchmarking for E-Access This procedure shows how to configure RFC 2544 Benchmarking for EAccess service types as created in Procedure 10-18. Refer to the “System performance testing with RFC 2544 benchmarking” chapter in the Fault and Performance Management guide for full details about RFC 2544 Benchmarking. Step

Action

To configure the UPE 1

Set the port to test, role, and mode. benchmark set port <port> role generator where port <port>

2

is the port.

Create the benchmark generator profile. benchmark profile create name <String[15]> where name <String[15]>

3

is the user-defined name for new profile.

Set benchmark generator profile interval and duration attributes: benchmark configuration set name [interval <15Min | 1Hr | 6Hr | Completion>] [duration <15Min | 1Hr | 6Hr | 24Hr | Indefinite | Once>] where name

is the profile to configure.

interval <15Min | 1Hr | 6Hr | Completion>

is the interval time.

duration <15Min | is the duration time. 1Hr | 6Hr | 24Hr | Indefinite | Once>

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-75 4

Request benchmark generator profile traffic tests: benchmark traffic set name [throughput] [latency] [PDV] [frameLoss] [rfc2544] where

5

name

is the profile to configure.

throughput

is throughput test.

latency

is latency test.

PDV

is packet delay variation (PDV) test.

frameLoss

is frame loss measurement test.

rfc2544

is a suite of tests that includes throughput, latency, and frame loss.

Set benchmark generator profile payload attributes: benchmark payload set name [dstmac <MAC address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX>] [vlan-encap-type ] [vid ] [pcp ] [cfi ] [tpid ] [pdu-type <ethernet | ip | udp-echo>] custom-payload <String>][ip-src-addr ] [ip-dest-addr ] [ip-dscp ] where name

is the profile to configure.

is the destination MAC address. dstmac <MAC address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX :XX> vlan-encap-type

is the VLAN encapsulation type. The default is untagged.

vid pcp is the customer priority code point (PCP) value. cfi is the customer canonical format indicator (CFI) value. tpid

is the customer tag protocol identifier (TPID) value.

pdu-type <ethernet | ip | udp-echo>

is the test PDU type. The default is ethernet.

custom-payload <String>

is the custom payload to use with selected PDU type.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-76 MEF L2 VPN configuration where

6

ip-src-addr

is the IP source address.

ip-dest-addr

is the IP destination address.

ip-dscp

is the IP DSCP value.

Enable the benchmark profile: benchmark profile enable name where name

is the profile to enable.

7

Enable the generator:

8

benchmark generator enable Enable the global state:

9

benchmark enable Confirm the global and generator state and configuration: benchmark show

To configure the UPE 10

Set the port to test, role, and mode. benchmark set {port } [role ] [mode ]} where

11

port

is the test port.

role

indicates the role of the test port, which is one of generator or reflector. The default is reflector.

mode

indicates the mode of the test port, which is one of in-service, out-of-service, or vid-out-of-service. The default is inservice.

Set the reflector VID. benchmark reflector set vid vendor-type where vid vendor-type

is the generator vendor.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-77 12

Enable the reflector.

13

benchmark reflector enable Enable the global state.

14

benchmark enable Confirm the configuration settings and that the global and reflector states are enabled. benchmark show

To check connectivity and start the test 15

Check connectivity between the generator and UNI reflector: benchmark profile trigger name connectivity-test where

16

name

is the profile to test.

connectivity-test

triggers a connectivity test on the selected profile.

Start the test: benchmark profile start name [dstmac <MAC address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX>] [vid ] where name

is the profile to start.

is the destination MAC address. dstmac <MAC address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX :XX> vid —end—

Example This example shows configuration to forward LACP.

UPE RFC 2544 reflector for EVPL benchmark benchmark benchmark benchmark benchmark benchmark benchmark benchmark benchmark benchmark benchmark benchmark benchmark benchmark benchmark benchmark

set role generator port 6 mode vid-out-of-service generator enable profile create name 2544test profile configuration set name 2544test interval Completion profile configuration set name 2544test duration 15Min profile configuration set name 2544test bandwidth 500 profile configuration set name 2544test vid-validation off profile traffic set name 2544test throughput profile payload set name 2544test dst-mac 00:23:8a:34:10:10 profile payload set name 2544test vlan-encap-type dot1q profile payload set name 2544test vid 100 profile payload set name 2544test tpid 0x88A8 profile payload set name 2544test pdu-type udp-echo profile enable name 2544test set enable

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-78 MEF L2 VPN configuration

NPE RFC 2544 reflector for EVPL benchmark benchmark benchmark benchmark benchmark

set port 6 reflector set vid 200 reflector enable set mode out-of-service enable

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-79

Procedure 10-23 Configuring ENNI hairpin switching using sub-ports Sub-port interfaces support ENNI hairpin switching. This procedure describes how to configure a virtual switch for hairpin switching between sub-port interfaces. When you create sub-port interfaces, you can specify whether you want to turn on statistics. For more information on links between sub-ports and MEF OVCs, see “Q-inQ encapsulation” on page 10-6. To configure ENNI hairpin switching using a tagged sub-port on the INNI Step

Action

1

Create a virtual switch: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan virtual-switch ethernet create vs

2

Create a tagged INNI sub-port. sub-port create sub-port <sub-port-name> parent-port <port-name> vtag-stack statistics Note: Optionally, statistics can be enabled on a per-sub-port basis. If you do not specify an option, the default is off.

3

Attach the INNI tagged sub-port interface to the virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet attach sub-port <sub-port-name> vs

4

Create the sub-port interfaces for the tagged ENNI port: sub-port create sub-port <sub-port-name> parent-port <port-name> vtag-stack statistics

5

Attach the tagged ENNI sub-port interfaces to the virtual switch virtual-switch ethernet attach sub-port <sub-port-name> vs

6

View your configuration. sub-port show

To configure ENNI hairpin switching using an untagged sub-port on the INNI 7

Create a virtual switch: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan virtual-switch ethernet create vs

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-80 MEF L2 VPN configuration 8

Create an untagged INNI port. sub-port create sub-port <sub-port-name> parent-port <port-name> vlan-untagged-data statistics Note: Optionally, statistics can be enabled on a per-sub-port basis. If you do not specify an option, the default is off.

9

Attach the INNI untagged sub-port interface to the virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet attach sub-port <sub-port-name> vs

10

Create the sub-port interfaces for the tagged ENNI port: sub-port create sub-port <sub-port-name> parent-port <port-name> vtag-stack statistics

11

Attach the tagged ENNI sub-port interfaces to the virtual switch virtual-switch ethernet attach sub-port <sub-port-name> vs

12

View your configuration. sub-port show where

is a particular VLAN ID which has not already been configured on the device.



is a unique virtual-switch name to identify this virtual switch instance.

<sub-port-name> is a unique sub-port name to identify this sub-port instance. <port-name>

identifies a particular port configured on the device.



identifies whether statistics will be on or off for a particular sub-port. The default is off. —end—

Example The following example configures ENNI hairpin switching using a tagged INNI sub-port. virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs4000 sub-port create sub-port inni.100 parent-port 1 vtag-stack 100 statistics on virtual-switch ethernet attach sub-port inni.100 vs vs4000 sub-port create 2023 statistics sub-port create 1028 statistics

sub-port enni.2023 parent-port 2 vtag-stack on sub-port enni.1028 parent-port 2 vtag-stack on

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-81

virtual-switch ethernet attach sub-port enni.2023 vs vs4000 virtual-switch ethernet attach sub-port enni.1028 vs vs4000

The following example configures ENNI hairpin switching using an untagged INNI sub-port. virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 4000 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs4000 sub-port create sub-port inni.untagged parent-port 1 vlanuntagged-data statistics on virtual-switch ethernet attach sub-port inni.untagged vs vs4000 sub-port create 1028 statistics sub-port create 2023 statistics

sub-port enni.1028 parent-port 2 vtag-stack on sub-port enni.2023 parent-port 2 vtag-stack on

virtual-switch ethernet attach sub-port enni.2023 vs vs4000 virtual-switch ethernet attach sub-port enni.1028 vs vs4000

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-82 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Procedure 10-24 Displaying statistics for sub-port interfaces You can display the administrative and operational attributes for all sub-port interfaces on a device or for a specific list of sub-port interfaces. When the statistics option is specified, the statistics counts for all sub-port interfaces that have statistics currently enabled are displayed. To display statistics for sub-ports with statistics enabled and non-zero Step

Action

1

Display statistics for sub-port interfaces on the device. sub-port show statistics

To display statistics for sub-ports with statistics enabled and non-zero with a specified parent port 2

Display statistics for sub-port interfaces that have the port specified as its parent port. sub-port show parent-port <port-name> statistics where <port-name>

is the specified parent port you want to display statistics for.

To display statistics for sub-ports or a list of sub-ports 3

Display statistics for a specific sub-port or list of sub-ports. sub-port show sub-port <sub-port-name-list> statistics where <sub-port-name- is the particular sub-port or list of sub-ports that you want to list> display statistics for.

Example The following example shows sample output for the sub-port show parent-port statistics command. > sub-port show statistics +--------------------------- SUB-PORT STATISTICS SUMMARY --------------------+ | Sub-Port | Byte | Pkt | | | Tx | Rx | Tx | Rx | +--------------+----------------+----------------+----------------+----------+ | sp1.v101.p9 | 574563251000 | 0 | 574563253 | 0 | | sp2.x102.p9 | 0 | 574563260000 | 0 | 574563260| | sp3.v103.p10 | 574563271000 | 0 | 574563273 | 0 | +--------------+----------------+----------------+----------------+----------+

The following example shows sample output for the sub-port show parent-port <parent-port-name> statistics command.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

MEF L2 VPN configuration 10-83 > sub-port show parent-port 9 statistics +------------------------- SUB-PORT STATISTICS FOR PARENT 9------------------------+ | Sub-Port | Byte | Pkt | | | Tx | Rx | Tx | Rx | +--------------+----------------+----------------+----------------+----------------+ | sp1.v101.p9 | 574563251000 | 0 | 574563253 | 0 | | sp2.x102.p9 | 0 | 574563260000 | 0 | 574563260 | +--------------+----------------+----------------+----------------+----------------+

The following example shows sample out put for statistics display command on a single sub-port. sub-port show sub-port sp1.v101.p9,sp2.x102.p9 statistics +----------- SUB-PORT sp1.v101.p9 STATISICS -----------+ | Direction | Bytes | Packets | +--------------+-------------------+-------------------+ | Rx | 0 | 0 | | Tx | 4604013142000 | 4604013152 | +--------------+-------------------+-------------------+ +----------- SUB-PORT sp2.x102.p9 STATISICS -----------+ | Direction | Bytes | Packets | +--------------+-------------------+-------------------+ | Rx | 4604013198000 | 4604013201 | | Tx | 0 | 0 | +--------------+-------------------+-------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

10-84 MEF L2 VPN configuration

Procedure 10-25 Clearing statistics for sub-port interfaces You can clear statistic counts for all sub-port interfaces on a device or for a specific list of sub-port interfaces. Step

Action

1

Clear statistics counts for sub-port interfaces. sub-port clear sub-port <sub-port-object-list> statistics where <sub-port-object- is a list of sub-ports which have already been configured on list> the device.

Example The following example clears statistics counts for a single sub-port interface: sub-port clear sub-port sp1.v101.p9

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-1

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation

11-

This chapter details the implementation of Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE), formerly referred to as Provider Backbone Transport (PBT), in the core of a Ciena network. •

“VLAN Tagging”



“Connectivity Fault Management”



“Benefits” Note: PBB-TE CLI commands continue to use PBT rather than PBB-TE as the initial implementation was based on PBT.

A basic understanding of the IEEE 802.1Qay, IEEE 802.1Q, 802.1ad, and 802.1ah standards is assumed. In addition, it is highly recommended that CFM (IEEE 802.1ag) be used to monitor the PBB-TE service to warn if any faults occur in the service. Table 11-1 summarizes PBB-TE for 39XX/51XX switches. Native PBB-TE support is hardware-based. Table 11-1 PBB-TE support for 39XX/51XX switches Platform

Non-native PBB-TE

Native PBB-TE

Ports

3916

Not supported

Supported

All ports

3930

Not supported

Supported

All ports

3931

Not supported

Supported

All ports

3932

Not supported

Supported

All ports

3940

Supported

Not supported

Enhanced ports only

3960

Supported

Not supported

Enhanced ports only

5140

Supported

Not supported

Enhanced ports only

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-2 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation Table 11-1 PBB-TE support for 39XX/51XX switches Platform

Non-native PBB-TE

Native PBB-TE

Ports

5142

Not supported

Supported

All ports

5150

Supported (default)

Supported

All ports in native mode Enhanced ports in nonnative mode

5160

Not supported

Supported

All ports

VLAN Tagging The IEEE 802.1Q standard specifies a mechanism for adding tags to Ethernet frames. This tagging allows an Ethernet network to be divided into virtual networks or VLANs. Generally, individual customers in a provider’s network are identified by unique VLAN IDs. Additionally, each customer typically uses VLAN IDs in their own network to differentiate between service types (for example, data or VoIP) and possibly to distinguish between departments. This three-tier hierarchy allows separate domains for the service provider, customer and individual enterprise departments. Given the 12-bit size of the VLAN field in an Ethernet frame, the number of available VLAN IDs is limited to 4,096. In a large provider network, the number of customers could easily exceed 4,000, exhausting the available VLAN IDs very quickly. To help improve network scalability, two standards have been introduced to support this hierarchical approach, IEEE 802.1ad and IEEE 802.1ah.

Q-in-Q The IEEE 802.1ad (also known as Q-in-Q, stacked VLANs, or Provider Bridges), extends the original concept of VLAN tags by specifying a new provider-administered 802.1Q tag (Q-tag) that wraps or encapsulates the original customer packet in an additional header. This allows the service provider to administer their own tags to identify individual customer networks, while the first (original) Q-tag is unique within the customer’s own network. This then allows for overlap between the customer and provider VLAN IDs since the customer Q-tag is hidden while it is transported through the provider network. However, while this Q-in-Q approach supports a three-tiered hierarchy and frees up additional VLAN IDs, the service provider can still only create 4,094 customer VLANs. Scalability is still an issue as 4,000 tags is simply insufficient for large metropolitan networks. This shortcoming is addressed by the second standard, IEEE 802.1ah. 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 11-3

MAC Header Encapsulation The IEEE 802.1ah standard, also known as MAC header encapsulation (MAC-in-MAC) or Provider Backbone Bridging, encapsulates the customer MAC header with a MAC header for the service provider. A 24-bit service tag that identifies individual subscribers, is also used in the service provider MAC header. This enables a maximum of 16 million service instances to be supported, thus alleviating the scalability issue entirely. With IEEE 802.1ah, the overall network is treated as separate service provider and end customer domains. In the service provider domain, the network switches on the service provider MAC header and the customer MAC is not even visible. This introduces strict demarcation between the customer and service provider, enabling a truly hierarchical approach to the network. MACin-MAC greatly improves the scalability of Layer 2 networks. This approach also alleviates another limitation to traditional Ethernet; learning. Traditional Ethernet switch-based networks have two defining characteristics that limit their topological size, namely learning and loop avoidance. When a switch receives a packet destined for an end station it does not yet know about, it floods the packet down every link on which it is connected. This is referred to as Flood for Unknown. As the switch inspects every packet it receives, it remembers or learns the association of sending stations and ingress links. Each switch in the layer 2 domain learns the address and associated link for every other device in the network. While many metro and core devices may be able to support hundreds of thousands of addresses, requiring each device in a provider’s network to handle this number of addresses is cost prohibitive and impacts protection switching schemes. MAC-in-MAC encapsulation solves this Layer 2 scalability problem since there are now fewer MAC addresses to learn at the core. The IEEE 802.1ah MAC header, specifies that a backbone VLAN tag (B-tag), and an instance service VLAN tag (I-tag) be added to packets traversing the provider backbone bridge. This extended service VLAN tag is mapped from the Service VLAN ID tag and is not any longer than a normal VLAN tag. The additional B-tag is then added to ensure that the switches in the middle of the 802.1ah core do not need to know about the 802.1ah functions, thus ensuring backward compatibility. The backbone MAC header is then removed at the other end of the provider’s 802.1ah backbone bridge. A big advantage of 802.1ah is that it works in conjunction with the 802.1ad Provider Bridges VLAN stacking standard to allow both techniques to be used simultaneously.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-4 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation

PBB-TE Tunnels Note: When using PBB-TE, RSTP/MSTP should not be enabled as all PBB-TE ports need to be in the forwarding state. For example, if RSTP/ MSTP is enabled it could block one of the PBB-TE ports and thus remove the backup tunnel. PBB-TE has emerged to further address limitations related to scalability and reliability. PBB-TE may be deployed in place of PBB or may run in parallel with PBB. In both cases, PBB-TE eliminates the need for backbone core devices to perform learning and flooding. Instead, point-to-point tunnels to transport L2VPNs are provisioned. Rather than using RSTP/MSTP to prevent loops, the tunnels are used to traffic engineer the provider backbone network. A PBB-TE tunnel is unidirectional and is set up to ingress on a local node at one edge of the provider backbone and to terminate on a remote device at the other end of the backbone. This tunnel transports encapsulated subscriber frames from the local node to the remote node. A second tunnel is then configured in the opposite direction to ingress the remote node and terminate on the local node. This serves as the transport for the reverse traffic. A tunnel pair together make a bidirectional pipe referred to as a PBB-TE trunk. PBB-TE tunnels are set up to transport Ethernet Virtual Circuits (IEEE 802.1ad), with the subscriber frames encapsulated using 802.1ah MAC-inMAC encapsulation. Tunnels are then identified by the Backbone Destination Address (B-DA) and the Backbone Tag (B-Tag). In Figure 11-1, the highlighted fields are added to the frame to identify tunnels and to identify flood domains and interconnects. Figure 11-1 PBB-TE Frame Format Tunnel Identifier Tunnel Identifier

Since the tunnels are point-to-point, PBB-TE can also achieve recovery times approaching 50 ms. Providers can set up primary and protection PBB-TE paths and then leverage Carrier Ethernet OAM standard CFM (IEEE 802.1ag) to monitor the tunnels. This provides fault notifications in milliseconds and thus carrier-grade failover times can be achieved. 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 11-5

Figure 11-2 shows an example PBB-TE network with the core provider network in the center and three access networks attached to the core. In the core, primary tunnels are configured (solid lines) as well as backup tunnels (dotted lines) in order to provide resiliency and greater utilization of the backbone network. Again, in the core, there is no loop detection and no learning. Figure 11-2 Example of a PBB-TE Network

The system software supports configuration of a maximum of 32 PBB-TE bidirectional tunnels. However, one PBB-TE tunnel may be used to transport multiple subscriber services. In addition, one virtual circuit must be created for each service instance. A maximum of 127 virtual circuits are supported by one PBB-TE tunnel. PBB-TE tunnels may also be configured across link aggregation ports. The PBB-TE virtual circuit must be attached to a virtual switch before subscriber ports are attached. When detaching a PBB-TE virtual circuit from a virtual switch, subscriber ports must be detached first.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-6 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation

Note: In PBB-TE native mode, PBB-TE subscribers and Q-in-Q subscribers cannot be on the same port. Figure 11-3 depicts two Provider Bridged networks interconnected by a PBBTE network. Two customer Layer 2 Virtual Private networks are shown traversing primary and backup PBB-TE tunnels through the core network. Figure 11-3 A PBB-TE Network with Primary and Backup Tunnels

Traffic from Customer A originates at its Site 1. The Provider Bridge encapsulates the customer traffic by adding a Subscriber S-Tag containing the configured S-VID value of 100 reserved for Customer A within its domain. This traffic is then sent to the Provider Backbone Edge Bridge A (PBEB-A). PBEB-A has been configured to assign Customer A traffic (S-VID=100) to a 24-bit Instance Service Identifier (I-SID) value of 10,000. This I-SID value is associated with a primary and a backup PBB-TE tunnel. Each primary and backup tunnel is identified using the combination of a PBEB Destination MAC address and a Backbone-VID (B-VID). This is a significant difference between PBB-TE and PBB. In PBB, B-VIDs represent flood domains that interconnect multiple Provider Bridged networks. In PBB-TE, B-VIDs together with B-DAs identify which tunnel the frame will use. In our example, the PBEB-A encapsulates S-VID 100 traffic by adding the BDA value for PBEB-D, a B-SA value for PBEB-A, a B-VID value of 4001 (primary tunnel), and the I-SID value of 10,000. This MAC header encapsulated traffic is forwarded to Provider Backbone Core Bridge-C (PBCB-C). PBCB-C has been configured to not learn or flood traffic on B-VID 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 11-7

4001, which has been reserved for PBB-TE use. The fact that PBB-TE does not learn or flood is an important point. Each PBCB device must be provisioned with forwarding database entries in order to properly forward traffic within the tunnels. The PBCB-C forwarding table learns an entry for the combination of PBEB-D, B-VID 4001 and the traffic is forwarded on the particular port in the direction of PBEB-D. PBEB-D receives the traffic and removes the MAC header encapsulation. Since the S-VID values are only locally significant to the Provider Bridged network, a provider has the flexibility to translate the S-VID value. In our example, PBEB-D has been configured to associate I-SID 10,000 with S-VID 110. In this illustration, traffic from the tunnel is de-encapsulated and the S-VID is remapped to the value of 110. The traffic is forwarded to the provider bridge attached to Customer A’s Site 2. The S-Tag encapsulation is removed by the PB device and the original customer frame from Site 1 is delivered to Site 2. Note: It should also be noted that the PBB-TE service tag is 22 Bytes in length and this needs to be taken into account when calculating available bandwidth. For example, when sending a 64-Byte packet at 100% of line rate through a PBB-TE tunnel, each 64-Byte frame is actually 86 Bytes long (64 + 22).

Connectivity Fault Management PBB-TE virtual switches and tunnels are monitored through the use of IEEE 802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) Continuity Check Messages (CCM). When CFM services are configured for PBB-TE virtual switches, CCM control frames are sent and received within the PBB-TE tunnels and monitor faults based on the associated PBB-TE virtual circuit events. For CFM services that monitor PBB-TE tunnels, CCM control frames are sent and received regularly along the PBB-TE tunnels. If the primary tunnel should experience a fault, the tunnel endpoints automatically begin using the backup tunnel. The forwarding database entries are pre-configured along the backup path to minimize the failover and restoration times. Only one backup tunnel can be created.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-8 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation Figure 11-4 PBB-TE with CFM

ck Ba

up

Tu n

ne l

MEP A Ingress PBB-TE Edge Bridge

MEP B Primary Tunnel

MEP C

MEP D

Egress PBB-TE Edge Bridge

Note: Inner tag priority is used for scheduling frames when service levels and mappings are applied to ports associated with PBB-TE tunnels. To ensure proper QoS treatment of transiting CCM frames, which have a single B-VID tag, an outer tag is pushed onto the frame. The addition of this outer tag enables the inner tag priority to be detected correctly so that these CCM frames are scheduled properly. Upon egress, the outer tag is popped. It should be noted that once a failover occurs (switching the path from the primary to the backup tunnel), the default behavior is for the provisioned primary tunnel to become the backup tunnel unless tunnel reversion is configured using the pbt set tunnel-reversion command. The tunnel-reversion command will automatically revert traffic back to the provisioned primary tunnel once it is up and the reversion hold timer is completed (pbt set reversion-hold-time). Example > pbt set tunnel-reversion off > pbt set reversion-hold-time 3000

Manual reversion allows the network operator to control when or if the reversion will take place (such as late at night or on a weekend) so that the impact to the service is minimum. Manual reversion also prevents flapping between the two tunnels if the primary is not entirely stable. Automatic tunnel reversion is useful if the backup tunnel is inferior to the primary tunnel. Thus, failback occurs automatically. Note: When configuring PBB-TE reversion, tunnel reversion must be enabled on all remote bridges and the reversion hold time must be set to the same value. If reversion settings are not symmetrical, it can cause issues with indicating the primary/backup tunnel and can cause delays in reversions.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 11-9

Ciena supports the draft IEEE 802.1ag CFM including MAC ping, MAC traceroute, and CCM. Using these powerful CFM tools, both service connectivity and PBB-TE tunnel resiliency is enhanced. In addition, CCM thresholds can be configured to fine-tune protection switching.

PBB-TE Dual Homing The system software also supports the dual homing of primary and backup tunnels. This enables PBB-TE tunnels to terminate on entirely separate devices. This offers device redundancy and path diversity for upstream connections. In Figure 11-5, device A is dual homed to device B and device C. This offers link resiliency, such that if device B fails, traffic is then diverted to the backup tunnel terminating at device C. Figure 11-5 PBB-TE Dual Homing B n Tu ry a im Pr

Ingress PBB-TE Edge Bridge

ne

l

C

Backup Tunnel

A

Dual homing is configured by specifying a unique MAC address and bridge name when using the pbt remote-bridge create bridge-name command. This second remote bridge is then specified when creating the backup tunnel.

Tunnel Pairing and Synchronization Although PBB-TE tunnels are set up as trunks, and both an encapsulation and a decapsulation tunnel are required for traffic transport, the tunnel states are not automatically linked together. This makes it possible for the encap and decap tunnels to have different operational states. For example, if the encap tunnel was down due to misconfiguration, the decap tunnel could still be up and running. This would allow incoming traffic to be decapsulated, thus providing only unidirectional traffic on the circuit. This creates a problem with devices on the terminating end of the tunnels. They would accept all frames regardless of their B-VID value.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-10 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation

To avoid this behavior, encap and decap tunnels should be tied together using the tunnel pair create command. By pairing encap and decap tunnels, traffic on an interface is dropped unless the B-VID is specifically configured. In addition, it synchronizes the operational state of the two tunnels. When one tunnel goes down, encap or decap, CCMs are sent over the interface to ensure that the device on the other end takes both tunnels down. The tunnel state will remain down until the MEPs on the other devices have verified connectivity. In Figure 11-6, the encap tunnel on device B goes down. Device B then sends a CCM error code to device A. Device A then takes down both the primary encap and decap tunnels and a failover occurs to the backup tunnel. Figure 11-6 Tunnel Pairing Example Tunnel Pair

Encap Tunnel

B

Decap Tunnel

Tu ary m i Pr

nn

el

C

Backup Tunnel

A

To ensure synchronization between primary and backup tunnels, you can enable tunnel synchronization. When tunnel synchronization is turned on for the primary tunnel, a deactivation of either the primary or backup tunnel causes CCMs to be transmitted to the inactive tunnel. This feature enables interoperability with devices running the same system software. By default, tunnel synchronization is disabled.

Benefits The main benefits of PBB-TE include: •

Removing the 4,000 tag limitation, enabling 16 million distinct services to be configured.



No learning or flooding in the core of the network for a reduction in complexity and cost.



Customer MAC address and other information is tunneled through the provider’s network, enhancing security and scalability.



Using specifically engineered paths or tunnels allows the provider to target maximum utilization of the core network devices.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 11-11



The customer and Provider control domains are separated, allowing layer 2 control frames to be transported through the provider’s network.



802.1ag CFM can be used to monitor tunnels and provide carrier-grade failover detection.

This chapter provides the following procedures for PBB-TE: •

“Verifying that a port can participate in PBB-TE” on page 11-12



“Switching from non-native to native PBB-TE support” on page 11-13



“Enabling tunnel synchronization” on page 11-14



“Disabling tunnel synchronization” on page 11-15



“Configuring PBB-TE” on page 11-16



“Releasing reserved BVIDs” on page 11-33



“Displaying PBB-TE information” on page 11-34

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-12 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation

Procedure 11-1 Verifying that a port can participate in PBB-TE Verify that a port can participate in PBB-TE before using the port in a PBB-TE configuration. Ports that can participate in PBB-TE have enhanced capabilities. You can display the capabilities of •

a selected port



all ports



ports on a blade Note: All ports on the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms are supported by native PBB-TE.

Step

Action

To display the capabilities of a selected port 1

Display the capabilities of a selected port: port show port <port> capabilities where port <port>

is the port that you want to verify for PBB-TE participation.

capabilities

displays the capabilities of the port.

To display the capabilities of all ports 2

Display the capabilities of all ports: port show capabilities

To display the capabilities of all ports on a blade 3

Display the capabilities of all ports on a blade: blade show capabilities —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 11-13

Procedure 11-2 Switching from non-native to native PBB-TE support The 5150 platform can operate in non-native mode or native mode for PBBTE support. Native mode is hardware-based. By default, the 5150 platform operates in non-native mode. In non-native mode, the 5150 supports PBB-TE on enhanced ports only. In native mode, the 5150 platform supports PBB-TE on all ports.

CAUTION No automated conversion of management configuration between non-native mode and native mode on 5150 platform

If you are currently using management over PBB-TE and you plan to switch from non-native mode to native mode on a 5150 platform, contact Ciena support personnel to obtain details on how this conversion is best accomplished.

Step

Action

1

Switch from non-native to native PBB-TE support: pbt set mode native

2

Save the configuration: configuration save

3

Reboot the device: chassis reboot now —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-14 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation

Procedure 11-3 Enabling tunnel synchronization You can enable tunnel synchronization •

when creating a tunnel



for an existing tunnel

Step

Action

To enable tunnel synchronization when creating a tunnel 1

Enable tunnel synchronization when creating a tunnel: tunnel encap create static-pbt <static-pbt> tunnel-sync on where <static-pbt>

is the name of the tunnel.

To enable tunnel synchronization for an existing tunnel: 2

Enable tunnel synchronization for an existing tunnel: tunnel encap set static-pbt <static-pbt> tunnel-sync on where <static-pbt>

is the name of the tunnel. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 11-15

Procedure 11-4 Disabling tunnel synchronization You can disable tunnel synchronization •

when creating a tunnel



for an existing tunnel

Step

Action

To disable tunnel synchronization when creating a tunnel 1

Disable tunnel synchronization when creating a tunnel: tunnel encap create static-pbt <static-pbt> tunnel-sync off where <static-pbt>

is the name of the tunnel.

To disable tunnel synchronization for an existing tunnel: 2

Disable tunnel synchronization for an existing tunnel: tunnel encap set static-pbt <static-pbt> tunnel-sync off where <static-pbt>

is the name of the tunnel. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-16 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation

Procedure 11-5 Configuring PBB-TE Configuring PBB-TE comprises the following: •

Prepare the device for PBB-TE



Configure PBB-TE parameters



Configure PBB-TE tunnels



Optionally configure PBB-TE back-up tunnels



Configure the virtual circuit



Configure the virtual switch



Configure in-band management (non-native PBB-TE)



Configure in-band management (native PBB-TE platform



Configure CFM on a PBB-TE virtual switch



Configure CFM on a PBB-TE tunnel



Optionally configure QoS on a PBB-TE tunnel Note: It is recommended that you manually set the B-SA PBB-TE bridge MAC address. If you do not set the B-SA PBB-TE bridge MAC address, the system software will send the chassis base MAC address as the B-SA. In the event of a hardware failure, the chassis base MAC would change, requiring configuration changes on other devices configured to use this device as a remote bridge. This setting needs to be unique from the B-SA for all devices.

Note that configuration of the backup tunnel is optional, but recommended. The tunnel name must also be the same as the primary tunnel. Configuring a virtual circuit for PBB-TE involves setting the ingress I-SID for service identification, the egress I-SID, the destination node, and the PBB-TE tunnels to be used. Note: The system can automatically assign a reserved VLAN to a PBBTE virtual switch upon creation or you can optionally specify a reserved VLAN. This reserved VLAN becomes the S-VID in the S-Tag used upon encapsulation. You can configure the VC to retain this S-Tag upon encapsulation by setting the VC retain-stag attribute to yes. When this attribute is set to yes, then the decapsulated frame must have the S-Tag that matches the reserved VLAN of the VS and the egress ISID of the VC; otherwise, it will be dropped.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 11-17

The number of VCs supported for PBB-TE depends upon the platform capabilities as shown in Table 11-2. Table 11-2 PBB-TE virtual circuits supported per platform Platform

VCs

3916,3930,3931, 3932

256

3940, 5140

128

3960, 5142, 5150, 5160

512

Note: The number of VCs supported for PBB-TE is reduced by the number of VCs configured for Q-in-Q. When configuring a virtual circuit, you can choose to either replace the CVID or push an SVID on the existing CVID. As such, the replace-ctag and retainstag options are mutually exclusive. Replacing the CVID is not supported for in band management traffic. As such, the replace-ctag and mgmt-vc options are mutually exclusive. Configuring a virtual switch for PBB-TE involves creating reserved VLANs, designating the PBB-TE VC to be used with the virtual switch, and adding subscriber ports/VLANs. Optionally, Encap CoS policies may also be set for CoS mapping between the customer frames and the encapsulation PBB-TE tunnel header. The number of VSs and members supported for PBB-TE depends upon the platform capabilities as shown in Table 11-3. Table 11-3 PBB-TE virtual switch capabilities Platform

VSs

VS members per port

VS members per switch

3916, 3930, 3931, 3932

256

512

512

3940, 5140

128

512

512

3960

512

2048

2048

5142, 5150, 5160

512

3584

3584

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-18 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation

Note: For 3940, 3960, 5140, and 5150 platforms, the number of VSs and VS members per port and switch supported for PBB-TE are reduced by the number of VSs and VS members per port and switch configured for Qin-Q. Management VLAN traffic can be tunneled through a PBB-TE tunnel in nonnative mode by creating a management VC. The management VC creation implicitly creates a management VS that can be displayed using show commands but there are not any operations that can be performed on the management VS. The management VC (mgmt-vc) will automatically take the place of the remote management interface vlan. Only one management VC can be created, and ports must be explicitly added to and deleted from the management VLAN in order to be encapsulated in a PBB-TE tunnel. When using native mode, management traffic can be tunneled through a PBBTE tunnel by using a management VS. Such a management VS is manually configured and explicitly associated with the remote interface by the user. Configuring CFM for the PBB-TE virtual switch requires enabling CFM globally, creating a CFM service using the PBB-TE virtual switch, and then enabling the service. CCMs and other CFM frames are transmitted out the PBB-TE virtual circuit as PBB-TE data frames with full PBB-TE service encapsulation and are forward to the virtual switch member ports after the PBB-TE service header is removed. Configuring CFM for the PBB-TE tunnels requires enabling CFM globally, creating a CFM service using the PBB-TE tunnel, and then enabling the service. Configuring QoS for PBB-TE involves setting any traffic metering required at the ingress (UNI) and setting the CoS marking policy. Only advanced mode is supported on platforms with native PBB-TE, that is, 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 5142, 5150, and 5160. Step

Action

To prepare the device for PBB-TE 1

View software licence information: software license show

2

Ensure that MSTP or RSTP is disabled either globally or on the individual encap and decap tunnel port: mstp disable mstp show

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 11-19 or rstp disable rstp show To configure PBB-TE parameters 3

Configure the PBB-TE bridge MAC that will be used as the B-SA in the frames. pbt set bridge-mac <MAC address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX> reversion-hold-time <MILLISECONDS> service-tag-ethertype transit-tunnel-ethertype-remark tunnel-reversion tunnel-tag-ethertype pbt set stag-tpid <8100|9100|88A8> mode where bridge-mac <MAC address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX: XX>

is the MAC address for the device used for PBT.

reversion-hold-time is reversion hold time in milliseconds. <MILLISECONDS> service-tagethertype

is the ether-type for the I-tag. In native mode, the default value of 0x88e7is used: it is not configurable.

transit-tunnelethertype-remark

is the remark B-tag ether-type for frames in transit.

tunnel-reversion

sets the reversion behavior from backup to primary.

Note: to avoid potential traffic loss, do not use Ethertype values of 0x8100, 0x88a8, or the configured CFM Ethertype (default 0x8902). In addition, switches are hard-coded to recognize 0x88e7 as a valid service tag. PBB-TE frames with the 0x88e7 service tag are received and processed in addition to the configured service tag. In order to transmit PBB-TE frames with the I-TAG of 0x88e7, set the service tag to 0x88e7.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-20 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation where tunnel-tagethertype

is the ether-type for the B-tag. The default value is 0x88a8. The etype values are restricted to 0x8100, 0x9100 and 0x88a8. Note: In order for PBB-TE frames to be transmitted through a legacy VLAN switch, the PBB-TE tunnel tag Ethertype must be set to 0x8100 (33024 decimal). This is not supported in native PBB-TE (3916,3930,3931, and 5150), and therefore transit switches must be configured to mark packets as 88a8 such as: vlan set vlan 100 egress-tpid 88a8 virtual-circuit ethernet set port 7,10 vlanethertype-policy vlan-tpid

pbt set stag-tpid is the stag-tpid etype. <8100|9100|88A8> This attribute is not configurable in non-native mode. mode 4

is the PBB-TE mode.

Reserve Bridge VLAN IDs (B-VIDs). Each incoming tunnel requires a unique B-VID. pbt reserve bvid where bvid

5

is the VLAN list. Note: The maximum number of B-VIDs that can be reserved is equal to the maximum number of PBB-TE tunnels, which is 32.

Configure remote bridge names for use in tunnels and virtual circuits. For operator convenience, tunnel endpoints can be identified with names by associating a MAC address with name. The subsequent Tunnel and VC configurations refer to the nodes by these names. pbt remote-bridge create bridge-name bridge-mac <MAC address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX> where bridge-name

is the bridge name.

is the MAC address for the node. bridge-mac <MAC address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX :XX>

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 11-21 To configure PBB-TE tunnels 6

Configure the encapsulation tunnel: tunnel encap create static-pbt <static-pbt> {b-vid } {dest-bridge-name } encap-cos-policy encap-fixed-pcp {port } tunnel-sync where static-pbt <static- is the primary tunnel name. pbt> b-vid dest-bridgename

is the destination bridge.

encap-cos-policy is the encapsulation CoS policy. encap-fixed-pcp is the encapsulation fixed PCP.

7

port

is the outgoing port for the tunnel.

tunnel-sync

is the state of tunnel synchronization.

Configure the decapsulation tunnel: tunnel decap create static-pbt <static-pbt> {b-vid } {port } {src-bridge-name } where static-pbt <static- is the tunnel name. pbt> b-vid port

is the incoming port for the tunnel.

src-bridge-name

is the source bridge.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-22 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 8

Pair the primary encapsulation and decapsulation tunnels: tunnel pair create tnl-pair {encap-pbt ] [encap-backup-pbt ] {decap-pbt } where tnl-pair is the tunnel pair name. encap-pbt

is the primary encapsulation tunnel. Note: The BVID must be the same for paired encapsulation and decapsulation tunnels.

encap-backupis the backup encapsulation tunnel. pbt decap-pbt

is the decapsulation tunnel.

To configure the PBB-TE backup tunnels 9

Configure the backup encapsulation tunnel: tunnel encap create static-backup-pbt <static-backup-pbt> {b-vid } {dest-bridge-name } encap-cos-policy encap-fixed-pcp {port } where static-backup-pbt is the backup tunnel name. <static-backuppbt> b-vid dest-bridgename

is the destination bridge.

encap-cos-policy is the encapsulation CoS policy. encap-fixed-pcp is the encapsulation fixed PCP. port

is the outgoing port for the tunnel.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 11-23 10

Configure the backup decapsulation tunnel: tunnel decap create static-pbt <static-pbt> {b-vid } port src-bridge-name } where static-pbt <static- is the tunnel name. pbt> b-vid

11

port

is the incoming port for the tunnel.

src-bridge-name

is the source bridge.

Pair the backup encapsulation and decapsulation tunnels: tunnel pair create tnl-pair encap-backup-pbt decap-pbt where tnl-pair is the tunnel pair name. encap-backupis the backup encapsulation tunnel. pbt and decapsulation tunnels. decap-pbt

12

is the decapsulation tunnel.

Display the tunnel configuration information to verify the configuration: tunnel encap show

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-24 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation To configure the virtual circuit 13

Configure the virtual circuit: virtual-circuit pbt create static-vc <static-vc> {egressisid } {ingress-isid } {mgmt-vc <no|yes>} {replace-ctag } {ctag <1-4095>} {tunnel } {retain-stag <no|yes>} {s-tag } where static-vc <static-vc>

is the PBB-TE virtual circuit name.

egress-isid

is the egress I-SID. Note: Egress I-SID and ingress I-SID values must be the same when using native PBB-TE, that is, 3916, 3930, 3931, and 5150 platforms.

ingress-isid

is the ingress I-SID.

replace-ctag

indicates whether the CVID is replaced. The default value is no. If you set the value to yes without specifying a valid c-tag value, the configuration will be rejected. Note: When the device is in non-native mode, this attribute is hidden.

ctag <1-4095>

is the value that the CVID is replaced with. The default value is 0. Note: When the device is in non-native mode, this attribute is hidden.

mgmt-vc <no | yes>

sets the virtual circuit to be a management virtual circuit.

tunnel

is the encapsulation PBB-TE tunnel name.

retain-stag <no | yes>

indicates whether to retain Q-in-Q tag over PBB-TE encapsulation/decapsulation. If the virtual switch is to be used for in-band management in native PBB-TE mode, set this attribute to no.

s-tag If the retain-stag attribute is set to yes, native PBB-TE mode requires that an s-tag value be specified explicitly.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 11-25 To configure the virtual switch 14

Reserve VLANs for the virtual switch: virtual-switch add reserved-vlan where reserved-vlan

is the VLAN list.

Note: The system can automatically assign the reserved VLAN from this pool when the virtual switch is created or you can optionally specify a reserved VLAN when you create the virtual switch by setting the reserved-vlan attribute. 15

Create the virtual switch naming it and associating it with the PBB-TE virtual circuit: virtual-switch ethernet create vs reserved-vlan vc where

16

vs

is the virtual switch name.

reserved-vlan

is the reserved VLAN.

vc

is the Ethernet virtual circuit.

Add the subscriber port and VLAN to the virtual switch: virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixeddot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>}

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-26 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation To configure in-band management (non-native PBB-TE) 17

Create a management virtual circuit: virtual-circuit pbt create static-vc <static-vc> {egressisid } {ingress-isid } mgmt-vc <no | yes> tunnel retain-stag <no | yes> {s-tag } where static-vc <static-vc>

is the PBB-TE virtual circuit name.

egress-isid

is the egress I-SID. Note: Egress I-SID and ingress I-SID values must be the same when using native PBB-TE, that is, 3916, 3930, 3931, and 5150 platforms.

ingress-isid

is the ingress I-SID.

mgmt-vc <no | yes>

sets the virtual circuit to be a management virtual circuit.

tunnel

is the encapsulation PBB-TE tunnel name.

retain-stag <no | yes>

indicates whether to retain Q-in-Q tag over PBB-TE encapsulation/decapsulation.

s-tag Note: Note: IPv6 in-band management is supported over native PBB-TE. To configure in-band management (native PBB-TE platform) 18

Set the tag-vid for the VS created in step 15 to enable it to handle management traffic: virtual-switch cpu-if set vs tag-vid where vs

is the virtual switch name.

tag-vid

is the inner tag for PBB-TE management frames. The default customer management VLAN is 127.

Note: IPv6 in-band management is not supported over non-native PBB-TE.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 11-27 19

Set interface attributes: interface remote set vs where vs

is the management virtual switch.

To configure CFM on a PBB-TE virtual switch 20

Enable CFM globally. cfm enable

21

Create the CFM service for the PBB-TE virtual switch. cfm service create static-pbt <static-pbt> name <String[45]> where

22

static-pbt <static-pbt>

is the PBT tunnel service.

name <String[45]>

is the CFM service name.

Enable the CFM PBB-TE service. cfm service enable service <service> where service <service> is the service name.

To configure CFM on a PBB-TE tunnel 23

Enable CFM globally. cfm enable

24

Create the CFM service for the PBB-TE tunnel. cfm service create static-pbt <static-pbt> name <String[45]> {next-mepid ] where static-pbt <static-pbt>

is the PBT tunnel service.

name <String[45]>

is the CFM service name.

next-mepid

initialize next-mepid

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-28 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 25

If desired, the CCM interval can be configured, but the interval must be the same on both sides of the tunnel endpoints. The default is 1 second. Note: Setting the CCM Interval to 4 milliseconds is not recommended for a production environment, although it can be used for testing. cfm service set service <service> ccm-interval <0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | off | 3.33ms | 10ms | 100ms | 1sec | 10sec | 1min | 10min> where service <service> is the service name. ccm-interval <0 | is the CCM transmission interval index or time. 1|2|3|4|5|6| 7 | off | 3.33ms | 10ms | 100ms | 1sec | 10sec | 1min | 10min>

26

Enable the CFM PBB-TE service. cfm service enable service <service> where service <service> is the service name.

27

Verify that the MEP IDs at both ends of the tunnel are different: cfm mep show cfm remote-mep show

28

If the MEPS IDs are the same, change one of the MEP IDs: cfm mep set service <service> port mepid where service <service> is the service name. port

is the port.

mepid

is the MEP ID.

To configure QoS on a PBB-TE tunnel 29

Set the port into advanced mode: traffic-profiling set port <port> mode advanced where port <port>

is the port.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 11-29 30

Set up ingress metering: traffic-profiling standard-profile create port <port> profile cir pir where port <port>

is the port number.

profile

is the traffic profile number.

cir

is the committed information rate in Kbps of this traffic meter, rounded to fit hardware.

pir

is the peak information rate in Kbps of this traffic meter, rounded to fit hardware

traffic-profiling set port <port> mode <none | advanced | standard-dot1dpri | standard-ip-prec | standard-dscp | standard-vlan | standard-vlan-dot1dpri | standard-vlanip-prec | standard-vlan-dscp | hierarchical-port | hierarchical-vlan> where port <port>

is the port.

is the remarking mode. mode <none | advanced | standarddot1dpri | standard-ip-prec | standard-dscp | standard-vlan | standard-vlandot1dpri | standard-vlan-ipprec | standardvlan-dscp | hierarchical-port | hierarchicalvlan>

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-30 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 31

Set CoS marking: tunnel encap set static-pbt <static-pbt> encap-cos-policy encap-fixed-pcp where static-pbt <static-pbt>

is the backup tunnel name.

encap-cos-policy is the encapsulation CoS policy. encap-fixed-pcp is the encapsulation fixed PCP policy. virtual-switch ethernet set vs {decap-cos-policy } {decapfixed-dot1dpri } {description <String[128]>} {encap-cos-policy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-precinherit | phbg-inherit>} {encap-fixed-dot1dpri } {subscriber-dot1dpri-policy } {vc } [ip-interface ] where vs

is the virtual switch name

encap-cos-policy is the encapsulation CoS policy. <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-precinherit | phbginherit> is the encapsulation fixed dot1dpri. encap-fixeddot1dpri —end—

Example The following configuration example displays the steps to configure a primary and a backup PBB-TE tunnel over the devices shown in Figure 11-7. It also employs CFM to monitor the connection. It assumes that PBB-TE mode is enabled and that a valid PBB-TE license key is installed. Figure 11-7 PBB-TE Configuration Example

The following example configures device 1 SJC. SJC> SJC> SJC> SJC> SJC> port

rstp disable -OR- SJC> mstp disable pbt set bridge-mac 00:02:a1:30:7c:80 pbt reserve bvid 2000,3000 pbt remote-bridge create bridge-name SFO bridge-mac 00:02:a1:30:7c:c0 tunnel encap create static-pbt to_SFO b-vid 2000 dest-bridge-name SFO 23 tunnel-sync on

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 11-31 SJC> tunnel decap create static-pbt frm_SFO b-vid 2000 src-bridge-name SFO port 23 SJC> tunnel pair create tnl-pair SJC encap-pbt to_SFO decap-pbt frm_SFO SJC> tunnel encap create static-backup-pbt to_SFO b-vid 3000 dest-bridge-name SFO port 24 SJC> tunnel decap create static-pbt bkp_SFO b-vid 3000 src-bridge-name SFO port 24 SJC> tunnel pair create tnl-pair SJC-Backup encap-backup-pbt to_SFO decap-pbt bkp_sfo SJC> virtual-circuit pbt create static-vc pbt dest-bridge-name SFO egress-isid 1 ingress-isid 2 tunnel to_SFO SJC> virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 1000 SJC> virtual-switch ethernet create vs pbt vc pbt SJC> virtual-switch ethernet add vs pbt port 1 vlan 10 SJC> cfm service create static-pbt to_SFO name PBT level 7 next-mepid 100 SJC> cfm service set service PBT alarm-time 0 SJC> cfm service enable service PBT SJC> cfm service create static-backup-pbt to_SFO name PBT_BKP level 7 nextmepid 101 SJC> cfm service enable service PBT_BKP

The following example configures device 2 SFO. SFO> rstp disable -OR- SFO> mstp disable SFO> pbt set bridge-mac 00:02:a1:30:7c:c0 SFO> pbt reserve bvid 2000,3000 SFO> pbt remote-bridge create bridge-name SJC bridge-mac 00:02:a1:30:7c:80 SFO> tunnel encap create static-pbt to_SJC b-vid 2000 dest-bridge-name SJC port 23 tunnel-sync on SFO> tunnel decap create static-pbt to_SJC b-vid 2000 src-bridge-name SJC port 23 SFO> tunnel pair create tnl-pair SFO encap-pbt to_SJC decap-pbt to_SJC SFO> tunnel encap create static-backup-pbt to_SJC b-vid 3000 dest-bridge-name SJC port 24 SFO> tunnel decap create static-pbt to_SJC b-vid 3000 src-bridge-name SJC port 24 SFO> tunnel pair create tnl-pair SFO-Backup encap-backup-pbt to_SJC decap-pbt to_SJC SFO> virtual-circuit pbt create static-vc pbt dest-bridge-name SJC egress-isid 2 ingress 1 tunnel to_SJC SFO> virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 1000 SFO> virtual-switch ethernet create vs pbt vc pbt SFO> virtual-switch ethernet add vs pbt port 1 vlan 10 SFO> cfm service create static-pbt to_SJC name PBT level 7 next-mepid 200 SFO> cfm service set service PBT alarm-time 0 SFO> cfm service enable service PBT SFO> cfm service create static-backup-pbt to_SJC name PBT_BKP level 7 nextmepid 201 SFO> cfm service enable service PBT_BKP

The following example configures device 3 MTV. MTV> MTV> MTV> MTV> MTV>

rstp disable -OR- MTV> mstp disable vlan create vlan 2000,3000 vlan add vlan 2000,3000 port 21,23 cfm mip create vlan 2000 port 21 level 6 cfm mip create vlan 2000 port 23 level 6

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-32 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation MTV> cfm mip create vlan 3000 port 21 level 6 MTV> cfm mip create vlan 3000 port 23 level 6

The following example configures device 4 Suny: Suny> Suny> Suny> Suny> Suny> Suny> Suny>

rstp disable -OR- Suny> mstp disable vlan create vlan 2000,3000 vlan add vlan 2000,3000 port 22,26 cfm mip create vlan 2000 port 22 level cfm mip create vlan 2000 port 24 level cfm mip create vlan 3000 port 22 level cfm mip create vlan 3000 port 24 level

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

6 6 6 6

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation 11-33

Procedure 11-6 Releasing reserved BVIDs Release reserved BVIDs If you removed the PBB-TE configuration and want to reuse the BVID for a VLAN ID. Step

Action

1

Release reserved BVIDs: pbt release bvid where bvid

is the VLAN or VLANs to be released. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

11-34 Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) implementation

Procedure 11-7 Displaying PBB-TE information Display PBB-TE information to view the PBB-TE global configuration. Step

Action

1

Display PBB-TE global configuration information: pbt show —end—

Example The following example shows sample configuration for the pbt show command. +--------------------- PBT Attributes -----------------------+ | PBT Bridge MAC | 00:03:18:cf:ea:80 | | PBT Service E-type | 0x88c8 | | PBT Tunnel E-type | 0x88a8 | | PBT S-tag Tpid | 0x8100 | | PBT Transit Tunnel E-type Remark | On | | PBT Tunnel Reversion | Off | | PBT Reversion Hold Time | 3000 milli secs | | PBT Admin Mode | Non-native | | PBT Oper Mode | Non-native | +----------------------------------+-------------------------+ +--------------- PBT Reserved B-VIDs ------------------+ | B-VID | In Use | +----------------------------+-------------------------+ | No entries found | +----------------------------+-------------------------+ +--------------- PBT Remote Bridges -------------------+ | Bridge Name | Index | Bridge MAC | In use | +-----------------+-------+-------------------+--------+ | No entries found | +-----------------+-------+-------------------+--------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-1

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

12-

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) supports circuit (voice), cell-switched (business) and packet switching in a single packet switched network to save capital and operational expenditures. MPLS speeds up traditional IP forwarding with a simplified header and lookup process. MPLS can be used to build seamless and consistent Layer 2 (L2) Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) between two or more remote sites traversing many different physical networks with enhanced performance and topology discovery to ensure the most efficient routes. Note: SAOS 6.11 does not provide an automatic configuration convert mechanism for MPLS. Any MPLS configuration from releases prior to SAOS 6.11 will be lost upon upgrade to SAOS 6.11 and will need to be reconfigured. This chapter contains the following sections: •

“Overview” on page 12-3



“MPLS label operations” on page 12-4



“MPLS label format” on page 12-5



“MPLS-Traffic Engineering” on page 12-6



“MPLS-Transport Profile” on page 12-6



“Interfaces” on page 12-6



“Tunnels” on page 12-7



“MPLS L2 VPN services” on page 12-13



“Virtual circuits” on page 12-19



“Routing protocols” on page 12-23



“Signaling protocols” on page 12-25



“Fault Management” on page 12-28



“Complementary protocols” on page 12-29

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-2 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration



“Benefits” on page 12-29



“Vendor interoperability” on page 12-29



“Platform requirements and capabilities” on page 12-30

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-3



“Remote Management for MPLS” on page 12-33



“Task flow” on page 12-34

Overview A base MPLS network (or cloud) is defined by a region of two MPLS-enabled switches or routers called Label Edge Routers (LERs), one for ingress and one for egress. A set of Label Switch Routers (LSRs) reside within the cloud between the LERs. The connection from the ingress LER to the intermediate LSR(s) to the egress LERs is called the Label Switched Path (LSP). Figure 12-1 shows a sample MPLS network. Figure 12-1 MPLS network LSR LSR LER

LSR

LSR LSP

Ethernet Network

LER

Ethernet Network

MPLS Cloud

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-4 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Table 12-1 summarizes general MPLS terms. Table 12-1 General MPLS terms Term

Definition

LSP

Labeled Switched Path. The specific path through a network that a datagram follows based on its MPLS labels.

LSR

Label Switch Router. A device that switches the labels used to route packets. When an LSR receives a packet, it uses the label included in the packet header as an index to determine the next hop on the Label Switched Path (LSP) and a corresponding label for the packet from a look-up table. The old label is then removed from the header and replaced with the new label before the packet is routed forward.

LER

Label Edge Router. This device is on the edge of the MPLS cloud and is responsible for initiating or terminating the LSPs. LERs can be referred to as edge LSRs.

MPLS label operations An IP packet enters an MPLS network through the ingress LER. The ingress LER performs a routing lookup to determine the MPLS label, which corresponds to a destination as stored in the forwarding information base (FIB). This label also identifies the Forwarding Equivalence Class (FEC) so that the packet is included in a set of packets with the same forwarding destination and Class of Service (CoS). MPLS label operations are push, swap, and pop. The ingress LER inserts (pushes) this MPLS label (or stack of labels) between the L2 and Layer 3 (L3) headers of the IP packet and changes the EtherType value to indicate that the packet is labeled. Figure 12-2 shows the insertion of the MPLS label. Figure 12-2 MPLS label L2 Frame Header

L3 IP Header

Payload

MPLS Label

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-5

The LER initiates the LSP and forwards the packet over the LSP to the adjacent LSR. Each LSR swaps the label to the next hop label (or stack of labels) of the next LSR (or egress LER) and forwards the packet. When the IP packet reaches the egress LER, the egress LER performs a routing lookup to determine the egress destination, removes (pops) the MPLS label(s) and delivers the IP packet.

Implicit NULL label In the case of Penultimate Hop Pop (PHOP), the penultimate hop LSR pops the top label before forwarding the packet to the egress LSR. The egress LSR signals that the label should be popped at the penultimate hop when it provides an implicit NULL (0x03) label to the preceding hop, for a given tunnel that is terminated by the egress LSR.

Explicit NULL label The explicit NULL label has label value zero. The implicit forwarding assumptions are the same as for the implicit NULL label in that the egress LSR submits label value zero to its predecessor. The egress LSR signals that at the penultimate hop the label should be swapped with value zero but maintain the 'traffic class (tc) bits' intact so that proper queuing can be applied to the received packet. The label stack depth is maintained but the top label value of zero is only used for QoS purposes.

Router alert label The router alert label has label value 1. The router alert label is pushed above the pseudowire label and below the tunnel label in the MPLS label stack. When the egress PE router receives the pseudowire packet, the router alert label is exposed and the packet is delivered to the control plane.

MPLS label format An MPLS label is a 32-bit field with the bit values as listed in Table 12-2. Table 12-2 MPLS label format Bit name

Label (20 bits)

TC (3 bits)

S (1 bit)

TTL (3 bits)

Bit number

0-19

20-22

23

24-31

Description

20-bit label with bits

3-bit IP precedence CoS

1-bit value indicates whether the label is the last label (single label or bottom of a label stack)

8-bit TTL of IP header prevents infinite loop of the packet

Note: The values between 0 and 15 are reserved.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-6 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Multiple labels (stack) are used for the following applications: •

MPLS VPN uses 2 labels. One for the egress router (top label) and VPN (second label).



MPLS Traffic Engineering uses 2 or more labels. The top is the endpoint of the TE tunnel and the remaining show the destination.

In some cases, a combination of 3 or more labels are used for both. Multiple labels are inserted as shown in Figure 12-3. Figure 12-3 MPLS stacked label L2 Frame Header Top

Middle

Bottom

L3 IP Header

Payload

MPLS-Traffic Engineering MPLS-Traffic Engineering (MPLS-TE) features provide: •

better usage of network links and resources



bandwidth and QoS guarantees



resiliency with fast reroute and recovery

In MPLS-TE implementations, LSPs are point-to-point and unidirectional. Each LSP requires a separate LSP in the opposite direction for bidirectional path connectivity.

MPLS-Transport Profile MPLS-Transport Profile (MPLS-TP) builds upon MPLS-TE functionality for implementation in a transport network. It provides the same MPLS-TE features along with: •

connection verification



fault monitoring



in-band control and management

In MPLS-TP implementations, LSPs are typically bidirectional whereby forward and reverse LSPs are treated as a single entity at the terminating LERs.

Interfaces MPLS implementation requires an L3 IP interface for handling MPLS control protocol traffic. This IP interface is associated with an L2 flood domain. On 39XX/51XX platforms this L2 flood domain is a VLAN.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-7

The L2 flood domain is associated with the underlying one or more L2 interfaces. On 39XX/51XX platforms, this logical port interface maps directly to a physical port or to a link aggregation group.

Tunnels Tunnels can be created dynamically or statically. For co-routed tunnels, the forward and reverse paths are on the same LSP. For associated bi-directional tunnels, the forward and reverse paths are on different LSPs. Table 12-3 lists the supported tunnels for TE and TP. Table 12-3 Supported tunnels for TE and TP

Dynamic

TE

TP

• Unidirectional

• Unidirectional

• Associated bi-directional • Associated bi-directional Static

• Unidirectional

• Unidirectional

• Associated bi-directional • Associated bi-directional • Co-routed

In an associated bidirectional tunnel, each end node is configured with an LSP to the other end. In addition, both end nodes are configured with the association of the forward and reserve LSP. The association configuration of two counter-directed LSPs at each end node makes the LSP an associated bidirectional tunnel. In a co-routed bidirectional tunnel, the initiating end node is configured with co-routed bidirectional LSP. The terminating end node creates a reverse LSP dynamically upon receiving the signal. In the case of static co-routed bidirectional tunnels, both end nodes are configured with LSPs in each direction. Note 1: The term 'ingress' is used interchangeably with the term ‘initiator’ for bidirectional tunnels to identify the initiator node. ‘ingress' is preserved as keyword in the SAOS CLI for backward compatibility. Note 2: Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is prohibited for MPLS-TP tunnels.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-8 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Dynamic and static tunnels share common attributes as listed in Table 12-4. Table 12-4 Common tunnel attributes Attribute

Description

Logical ID

Creation index.

Time To Live (TTL) Policy

When set to fixed, the value of the TTL in the tunnel label is set according to the fixed TTL (fixed-ttl) value. The default (and only supported) policy is fixed.

Fixed TTL

Applicable when the TTL policy is set to fixed. The default is 255.

Destination IP address

Sets the destination IP address for the tunnel.

Backup tunnel

Ingress tunnel to protect the primary tunnel.

Tunnel reversion

Indicates whether or not to switch from the backup to the primary tunnel after the fault on the primary is cleared.

Reversion hold time

Sets the amount of time in seconds to wait before switching from the backup to the primary tunnel after the fault on the primary is cleared (tunnel reversion). Default is 300 seconds. Applicable when tunnel reversion is turned on.

Setup priority

Setup priority is compared with the hold priority of existing LSP to determine if preemption of those links should be allowed. The setup of new tunnels requires this contention system when resources for new services have been exceeded. The default setup priority is 7, which is the lowest priority.

Hold priority

Setup priority is compared with the hold priority of existing LSP to determine if preemption of those links should be allowed. The setup of new tunnels requires this contention system when resources for new services have been exceeded. Default hold priority is 0.

Bandwidth profile

Associates the tunnel with a bandwidth profile that defines bandwidth and burst size signaling information to be carried in RSVP-TE path messages for interoperability with other vendor core routers. You can create up to 64 bandwidth profiles with the following attributes: • Bandwidth. Required attribute specifying the rate in kilobits per second (kbps). • Burst. Optional attribute specifying the burst size in kilobytes. Default is 128 kilobytes.

CoS profile

Tunnel COS profile name.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-9 Attribute

Description

BFD monitor

BFD based fault monitoring

BFD profile

BFD profile to be used for this session.

Count

Number of tunnels.

Dynamic tunnels have additional attributes as listed in Table 12-5. Table 12-5 Dynamic additional tunnel attributes Attribute

Description

Record route

For fastest reroute protection, the record route needs to be on. The default is on. Fast ReRoute protection type attribute: protectiontype

Path

Explicit RSVP-TE path.

CSPF route

Dynamic CSPF computed route.

Protection type

Protection type.

FRR profile

Tunnel FRR profile name.

Explicit tunnel path

Tunnel explicit path name.

Static tunnels have additional attributes as listed in Table 12-6. Table 12-6 Static tunnel additional attributes Attribute

Description

Next hop IP address

IP address of the next hop device.

Data interface

Tunnel data plane IP Interface.

Label

Tunnel label selected from the configured static label range.

Source IP address

tunnel source IP address

Previous hop IP address

Tunnel previous hop IP address used for AIS monitoring

In label

Tunnel in label. The configured static label range determines the valid range for static in labels.

Out label

Tunnel out label.

Forward out label

Forward encap tp-tunnel outgoing label.

Reverse in label

Reverse decap tp-tunnel incoming label.

Forward tunnel

Forward tunnel.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-10 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration Attribute

Description

Reverse static tunnel

Static reverse tunnel.

Reverse dyntun name

Dynamic reverse tunnel name.

Reverse dyntun source IP address Dynamic reverse tunnel source IP address. AIS monitor

AIS based fault monitoring

AIS profile

AIS profile to be used for this session

This chapter provides the following procedures for configuring dynamic and static tunnels: •

“Configuring dynamic ingress TE tunnels” on page 12-60



“Configuring dynamic ingress uni-directional TP tunnels” on page 12-61



“Configuring static TE tunnels” on page 12-67



“Configuring co-routed TP tunnels” on page 12-69



“Configuring static bi-directional ingress-associated TE tunnels” on page 12-73



“Switching over to the backup GMPLS TP tunnel” on page 12-78



“Displaying MPLS TE-tunnel information” on page 12-81

Next-hop diversity It is recommended that a backup tunnel takes a diverse path from the primary tunnel it is protecting so that failure on the intersecting node or link does not cause the primary and backup tunnel to fail simultaneously. When the network topology prevents this, there is no backup tunnel or a backup tunnel that may share portions of a network topology. The second option provides protection if the network nodes/links that fail are not shared between the primary and backup. When configuring the ingress unidirectional and ingress and egress co-routed bidirectional static tunnels, users can select next (ingress) or previous (egress) hop be not accessible through the same link as the primary LSP. This is expressed by “recovery-(p/n)hop-disjoint <none | link>” when configuring primary LSP. The default is link which forces you to provide a link diverse path. Option “none” lets you fate share the link between primary and backup. Note: Next-hop diversity is only available for static primary/backup tunnels. When configuring primary and backup dynamic tunnels, you must provide diverse explicit paths.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-11

Tunnel FEC for static LSP When configuring static LSP, you are encouraged to enter the following additional parameters, as stated in RFC 6426: •

Destination tunnel ID



Source Tunnel ID



LSP ID

These parameters are optional, however if you enter one, you have to enter all parameters. These parameters are necessary to verify the connection for LSP-BFD and LSP ping/traceroute interoperability. Identical information must be configured at the other end. The dynamic tunnels exchange this information in signaling which is why it is only needed for static tunnel configuration.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-12 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Tunnel profiles Tunnel profiles can be: •

“CoS profiles”



“Fast ReRoute profiles”

CoS profiles Table 12-7 lists attributes for CoS profiles. Table 12-7 CoS profile attributes Attribute

Description

CoS profile

Tunnel COS profile name.

Frame COS map

Selects frame-cos-map.

Frame COS policy

Frame cos policy.

Fixed TC

Encapsulation fixed Traffic Class (TC) value.

Resolved COS map

Selects resolved-cos-map.

Resolved COS policy

Resolved cos policy.

Resolved COS fixed

Fixed resolved CoS value.

This chapter provides the following procedure for configuring CoS profiles: •

“Configuring CoS profiles for MPLS tunnels” on page 12-74

Fast ReRoute profiles Fast ReRoute (FRR) provides a quick failover to bypass the LSP at an intermediate LSR when a local fault is detected. The head-end router signals implementation of FRR at Point-of-Local-Repair (PLR) LSRs. Table 12-7 lists attributes for FRR profiles. Table 12-8 FRR profile attributes Attribute

Description

FRR profile

Tunnel FRR profile name.

Logical ID

Profile index.

Setup priority

FRR tunnel setup priority.

Hold priority

FRR tunnel hold priority.

Hop limit

FRR tunnel hop-limit.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-13 Table 12-8 FRR profile attributes Attribute

Description

Bandwidth

Bandwidth (Kbps/s).

Bandwidth protection

Bandwidth protection of FRR tunnel.

Node protection

Node protection of FRR tunnel.

Protection method

Bandwidth protection of FRR tunnel.

Colour group include any

Tunnel colour-group-include-any.

Colour group include all

Tunnel colour-group-include-any.

Colour group exclude any

Tunnel colour-group-include-any.

This chapter provides the following procedure for configuring CoS profiles: •

“Configuring a dynamic ingress TE tunnel with FRR” on page 12-76

MPLS L2 VPN services MPLS LSPs provide the network infrastructure for service delivery applications such as MPLS L2 VPNs. Ciena's implementation of MPLS is based on RFC 4447 for L2VPN label exchange. Ciena uses LDP for label exchange rather than Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). Additional information on label exchange can be found in “Signaling protocols” on page 12-25. This implementation supports the simultaneous deployment of MPLS-based L2 VPN services, including: •

Virtual Private Wire Services (VPWS).



Virtual Private Local Area Network Services (VPLS).



Hierarchical VPLS (H-VPLS).

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-14 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Table 12-9 provides definitions of terms used to describe MPLS L2 VPNs. Table 12-9 MPLS L2 VPN terms Term

Definition

Provider Edge (PE) Router Router responsible for encapsulating client data to be carried across the MPLS tunnels. This router is an LER that delivers point-to-point or multipoint L2 connectivity service to the service provider's clients. Provider Router

LSR that operates on the MPLS tunnel label.

Attachment Circuit (AC)

Represents the client L2 circuit on the UNI port of the PE.

Pseudowire (PW)

Virtual circuit that encapsulates the client payload and adds the PW header.

Multi-tenant Unit Switch (MTU-s)

A device that support L2 switching functionality and does all the normal bridging functions of learning and replication on all of its ports, including the spoke virtual circuit port. Only a single PW is required per VPLS instance, reducing the signaling overhead between the MTU-s and the PE.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-15

VPWS VPWS provides point-to-point connectivity between two remote Local Area Networks (LANs). With this type of connectivity, MPLS provides the equivalent of an E-LINE service (EPL or EVPL). Traffic is carried from a single attachment circuit to exactly one PW, and MAC addresses are not learned for the Ethernet attachment circuit. Figure 12-4 provides an example of a VPWS with a one-to-one connection between CE1 and PE1. Figure 12-4 VPWS connectivity

One AC

Client Network

Protected Tunnel

One PW

CE-2 PE-1 PW

PE-2 PW

Client CE-1 Network

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-16 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

VPLS VPLS provides point-to-multipoint inter-LAN connectivity. With VPLS, PEs are connected to each other with a full mesh of virtual circuits for each VPLS instance as shown in Figure 12-5. Figure 12-5 VPLS full mesh

Each PE provides one or more connections to the customer edge (CE) devices by means of an attachment circuit to the PE MAC/VLAN bridge function. PEs are connected to each other using virtual circuits. The bridge function of the PE attaches to an emulated LAN, which is defined by a virtual switch. The emulated LAN comprised of “VPLS Forwarders” which connect to virtual circuits. This set of VPLS Forwarders connected by virtual circuits represents a VPLS instance. The bridge function learns MAC addresses, associates them with virtual circuits, and ages them out in a standard manner. When a broadcast/ multicast/unknown frame arrives at the bridge function, the frame is forwarded over all the virtual circuits attached to the VPLS forwarder. When a frame arrives on a virtual circuit, the bridge function performs normal Source Address (SA) MAC learning to associate the MAC address with the virtual circuit. In this way, the PE emulates the behavior of a normal LAN. The CE devices appear to be connected to a LAN even though the underlying infrastructure is an MPLS network.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-17

H-VPLS The deployment of large-scale VPLS networks where each PE is connected to all other PEs using a full mesh of virtual circuits does not allow complete scalability. As a result, a Hierarchical VPLS (H-VPLS) model is used to allow spoke connections to the VPLS core. As shown in Figure 12-6, a device provides the functionality to interface with the VPLS core by functioning as an MTU-s, which is connected as a spoke in the VPLS core using a virtual circuit. Figure 12-6 H-VPLS with MTU-s spoke

In this H-VPLS model, there is only one logical connection, that is, virtual circuit, from an MTU-s to the PE for a given VPLS instance. Each VPLS instance supported by an MTU-s has a virtual switch defined as a virtual L2 switch. The MTU-s must map incoming frames on its bridge module into VPLS instances. This can be based on one of three methods: •

physical ports



LAN tag of the ingress frame



virtual circuit MPLS label of the ingress frame

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-18 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

VPLS membership and MAC learning The virtual switch provides a mapping between customer-facing ACs and network-facing virtual circuits. A virtual switch can be dual-homed such that there are multiple virtual circuits connecting the VPLS instance to the VPLS hub. MAC addresses to be included in forwarding for the VPLS instance are learned in one of two ways: •

unqualified learning



qualified learning

MAC addresses that have been dynamically or statically learned are also removed or unlearned explicitly through the MAC withdraw mechanisms. Unqualified Learning

In unqualified learning, all traffic from a specific bridge port is assigned to a single VPLS instance, that is, per-port attachment circuit, and shares a single broadcast domain. MAC addresses need to be unique and non-overlapping among customer VLANs or else they cannot be differentiated within the VPLS instance. An example of this is port-based VPLS service for a given customer. In this case, all traffic that comes in on a physical port, which can include multiple customer VLANs, is mapped to a single VPLS instance. Qualified Learning

In qualified learning, each customer VLAN is assigned to its own VPLS instance, which means that each customer VLAN has its own broadcast domain and MAC address space. Unlike unqualified learning, MAC addresses among customer VLANs can overlap with each other. They are handled correctly since each customer VLAN has its own Forwarding Information Base (FIB). When a VPLS instance is defined per-port per-VLAN, the customer VLAN must be the same on each bridge port that is joining the virtual switch. An example of qualified learning is per-port per-VLAN VPLS service. MAC Withdraw

MAC withdraw is a signal typically sent from a node that wants remote peers to flush all learned MAC addresses in a given VPLS instance. The receiving node unlearns either MAC addresses present in the signal or all MAC addresses if they are absent in the signal. SAOS only supports wildcard MAC withdraw (no MAC address in the signal). The send and receive processing of the MAC address withdraw signal capability is, by default, turned on. It cannot be turned off. The MAC withdraw signal is sent only when the standby pseudowire becomes operational. It is not used for any other pseudowires that are not part of protection group.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-19

Virtual circuits A virtual circuit is a bidirectional connection between endpoints which can multiplex/de-multiplex traffic over tunnels. Multiple virtual circuits between two endpoints can use the same tunnels. For virtual circuits associated with an MTU-s, a secondary virtual circuit can be configured to support dual-homed protection.

Comparing raw and tagged PW type for virtual circuits The term attachment circuit is used to describe the customer-facing port of an Ethernet L2VPN service. The two types of ACs available are: •

EPL attachment circuit, which is a port added to an L2VPN service



EVPL attachment circuit, which is a single VLAN added to an L2VPN service

An EPL attachment circuit indicates that the outer VLAN tag of the frame, if present, is not service delimiting and therefore is not meaningful to the PE. An EPL attachment circuit always assumes the outer tag of the frame is a C-Tag. An EVPL attachment circuit indicates that the outer VLAN tag of the frame is service delimiting and should be used to identify the traffic. An EVPL attachment circuit always assumes the outer tag of the frame is an S-Tag. MPLS forwarding behavior depends on the type of attachment circuit/virtual circuit combination configured. There are four possible combinations: •

EPL attachment circuit with raw virtual circuit



EVPL attachment circuit with raw virtual circuit



EPL attachment circuit with tagged virtual circuit



EVPL attachment circuit with tagged virtual circuit

A raw PW type virtual circuit never carries a service delimiting tag. There are only 2 possible options for this type: ignore the tag or pop it. In the case of an EPL attachment circuit the tag is assumed to be a customer tag and it is ignored. In the case of an EVPL attachment circuit the tag is assumed to be a service provider tag and it is popped. A tagged PW virtual circuit always carries a service delimiting tag. There are two possible options for this type: stamp or push. In the case of an EPL attachment circuit the outer tag is assumed to be a C-Tag and an additional tag is pushed on the frame. In the case of an EVPL attachment circuit the outer tag is assumed to be a service provider tag and it is stamped.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-20 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Figure 12-7 illustrates the process for determining the PW type. Figure 12-7 Ingress Operation Decision Tree

Is the Outer VLAN Service Delimiting ? YE

NO

S

TAGGED Stamp outer VLAN with VC configured VLAN

RAW Pop outer VLAN

TAGGED Push VC configured VLAN

NO

YE S

EPL Should the service carry a Service Delimiting VLAN ?

NO

YE S

EVPL Should the service carry a Service Delimiting VLAN ?

RAW No operation is performed.

Note: If identical settings are configured on either end of the MPLS tunnel the original frame is preserved through the service. The operation as the customer frame egresses the service is contrary to the ingress operation. However, the outer tag can also be permanently altered by changing the attachment circuit/virtual switch combination on the egress side. When configuring primary virtual circuits, follow these configuration rules: •

All virtual circuit names must be unique.



A virtual circuit cannot be deleted unless it is detached from the virtual switch.



Dynamic virtual circuits: For a given peer node, the Pseudowire ID of the virtual circuits must be unique.



Static virtual circuits: Ingress label is unique across virtual circuits and tunnels.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-21

Primary dynamic and static MPLS virtual circuits support the attributes listed in Table 12-10. Table 12-10 Primary virtual circuit attributes Attribute

Description

Name

Unique 31 character name.

PW-ID

PseudoWire identifier. Ranging from 1-4294967295. This identifier must be the same at both ends of the PW.

Peer

Peer IP address.

Ingress label

Ingress label for the virtual circuit. Only applies to static virtual circuits.

Egress label

Egress label for the virtual circuit. Only applies to static virtual circuits.

Tunnel

Name of the tunnel.

PW type

Pseudowire type. For static virtual circuits, the types are raw or tagged. Default is raw. For dynamic virtual circuits, the types are ethraw, eth-tagged, or tdm.

PW mode

Pseudowire mode: • Mesh. A virtual circuit between two PEs. • Spoke. A virtual circuit emanating towards the MTU-s.

MTU

Maximum transmission unit 1500-9128. Default is 1500. This parameter is exchanged during dynamic establishment of a PW and must match in order for the PW to become operational between two PEs. Note: Mismatch of the MTU is one of the most common reasons for PW to fail to become operational.

Status TLV

On or off. Applies to virtual circuits and static virtual circuits. The static virtual circuit carries status TLV in the OAM channel.

Service Delimiter VID

Supports per VLAN TPID stamping for the specified VLAN ID (14094). Used with the Service Delimiter TPID.

Service Delimiter TPID

Selects the TPID value to stamp on egress frames for the VLAN ID specified with the Service Delimiter VID: • 8100 - 802.1Q Ethertype • 9100 - Q-in-Q Ethertype • 88a8 - Provider Bridge Ethertype

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-22 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

For dual-homed protection of an MTU-s primary dynamic virtual circuit, the secondary virtual circuit is defined by setting the peer IP address, tunnel, primary PW-ID, and secondary PW-ID. All other attributes are inherited from the primary. By default, the primary virtual circuit is the active virtual circuit. If the primary fails, the secondary virtual circuit becomes the active virtual circuit. The active virtual circuit (whether it is the primary or secondary) remains active unless it fails or it can be manually switched over. This chapter provides the following virtual circuit procedures: •

“Configuring dynamic virtual circuits” on page 12-91



“Configuring static virtual circuits” on page 12-94



“Displaying virtual circuits” on page 12-98

Virtual circuit connectivity verification profile configuration Virtual circuit connectivity verification (VCCV) provides a control channel that is associated with a pseudowire, and corresponding operations and management functions, such as connectivity verification, to be used over that control channel. VCCV applies to all supported access circuit and transport types currently defined for pseudowires. A PW OAM channel is used by VCCV ping/traceroute and static pseudowire (PW) status and MAC withdraw signaling. PW OAM uses four CC channel types, listed according to preference: •

0x04 - GAL/GACH channel



0x01 - Control word



0x02 - Router alert



0x03 - TTL exhaust

Only one channel can be used during the life of PW. For VCCV profile configuration, the user provides the supported channels in the profile and associates this profile for the PW. Error checks are performed during the association with static PW. These include ensuring that none or more than one channel type are selected, and conflicting channel types where PW status signal is enabled but the channel type is other than 4. Note: In Release 6.11, CC-type 0x03 for VCCV ping is used when PW is mapped over unidirectional tunnel and CC-type 0x04 is used when PW is mapped over a bidirectional tunnel. In order to interoperate with a node in Release 6.11, do not configure an explicit VCCV profile for the PW. This will enable the use of a default profile for the PW and select the right channel based on the underlying tunnel type.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-23

PW status and MAC withdraw over static PW is supported for CC-type 4 for Release 6.12. This chapter provides the following VCCV profile configuration procedure: •

“Configuring virtual circuit connectivity verification profiles” on page 12-101

Routing protocols MPLS network topology and routing information is monitored and maintained by the following routing protocols: •

Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)



Open Systems Interconnect (OSI) Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) Intra-domain Routing Protocol

These routing protocols discover neighbors in the MPLS network and maintain the optimum route to them.

OSPF OSPF is used to create an IP routing table for building dynamic MPLS tunnels. One of several Interior Gateway Protocols (IGPs) designed to support routing in an IP network within a single autonomous system (AS), OSPF is a link-state protocol that uses configurable metrics to associate a cost with a link. These metrics allow network administrators to manage their network based on the speed, reliability, and delay of the network. The OSPF protocol is a link-state routing protocol, which means that the routers exchange topology information with their nearest neighbors. The topology information, in the form of a link-state advertisement (LSA), is flooded throughout the AS, so that every router within the system has a complete representation of the topology. Devices build a Link State Database (LSDB) based on this information. Each Area Border Router (ABR) has one LSDB for each area to which it is connected. This information is then used to calculate the shortest end-to-end paths through the system. This is accomplished by means of Djikstra's Shortest Path First (SPF) algorithm. The SPF tree, also known as the best path tree, is then submitted to the routing table as OSPF routes. When a network topology change occurs, a recalculation of the shortest path tree is performed. The network will converge when all routers have recalculated their routing tables as a result of a change in the topology. OSPF neighbors are any two routers that have an interface to the same network. When an OSPF device first joins a network, it uses the Hello Protocol to discover its neighbors. Neighbors may form adjacencies for the purpose of exchanging routing information. Not all neighbor pairs can become adjacent. Adjacencies are formed by synchronizing the neighbors' topology databases 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-24 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

through the database exchange process. Two devices are said to be fully adjacent when they have synchronized their databases. Routing information is exchanged between the adjacent routers only, thereby conserving bandwidth. Also, an authentication mechanism prevents unauthorized neighbors from establishing adjacencies. The multi-level hierarchy (two-level for OSPF) called “area routing” allows the information about the topology within a defined area of the AS to be hidden from routers outside this area, enabling an additional level of routing protection and a reduction in routing protocol traffic. The authentication of all protocol exchanges prevents unauthorized routers from joining the AS. The system software supports two OSPF areas.

IS-IS Similar to OSPF, IS-IS is a link-state routing protocol in the group of IGPs and calculates the shortest end-to-end paths through the system with Djikstra's Shortest Path First (SPF) algorithm. As defined in RFC1195, IS-IS supports routing within IP only, OSI only, and dual (IP with OSI) domains and supports two router levels, Level 1 and Level 2. With IS-IS, a routing domain can be partitioned into multiple Level 1 router areas with a Level 2 interconnection router. Level 1 routers within the same area exchange information, but for destinations outside of the area, Level 1 routers forward to the nearest Level 2 or dual, that is, Level 1 and Level 2 router. On a broadcast, multi-access network, an intermediate system is elected as a designated router. An intermediate system supports one designated router on a broadcast link for Level 1 and one for Level 2. The designated router on a broadcast link represents a virtual node, called a Pseudo Node. The Pseudo Node creates and updates link state packets to report link state information to all systems on the broadcast sub-network. Also, it floods link state packets on the network and periodically sends Complete Sequence Numbers Packets (CSNPs) to synchronize link state databases at each intermediate system on the network. All intermediate systems, including the designated router, form adjacencies with the Pseudo Node using IS-IS Hello Packets (IIH). To acknowledge receipt or to request link state information, intermediate systems send Partial Sequence Number Packets (PSNP). Intermediate systems are identified by a unique Network Entity Title (NET) which maps to the NSEP router. NET comprises: •

Area identifier, which is a variable dotted hexadecimal value from two bytes to 13 bytes with the first byte value containing the Address Format Identifier (AFI)



System identifier, which is a six-byte hexadecimal value derived from the loopback IP address

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-25

The link state packet includes the NET and can optionally include a Dynamic Hostname TLV that contains the symbolic name of the router, such as a Fully Qualified Domain Name, which sends the link state packets. The system software supports Level 1 routing capability for IPv4 protocol and 1 area with 3 area identifiers per node. IS-IS can be used to replace OSPF functionality or it can be implemented simultaneously with OSPF. Configuring a routing protocol is required in dynamic MPLS deployments and optional for static MPLS deployments. Routing protocols are IS-IS and OSPF. Note: You can configure both IS-IS and OSPF. However, to simplify implementation, Ciena recommends using IS-IS or OSPF. A loopback interface is required in order for higher level protocols, such as RSVP-TE and LDP, to use the route information that OSPF or IS-IS provides. This chapter provides the following routing protocol procedures: •

“Configuring OSPF routing protocol”



“Configuring IS-IS routing protocol”

Signaling protocols Dynamic MPLS networks are created and monitored with the signaling of Resource Reservation Protocol - Traffic Engineering (RSVP-TE) for tunnels, and Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) for virtual circuits. Tunnels and virtual circuits use label exchange following Martini encapsulation without Control Word as defined in RFC4447. Martini encapsulation consists of adding an Ethernet transport header to the beginning of an incoming packet that includes the following: •

Destination MAC address (DA) of the PE is contained in the Ethernet transport header when directly connected to a device.



Source MAC address of the Multi-tenant Unit (MTU) or PE and the provider VLAN.



MPLS Ethernet-type and both the tunnel and virtual circuit MPLS labels.

RSVP-TE RSVP-TE is a protocol used to establish label switched paths (LSPs) in dynamic MPLS networks. These LSPs allow the traffic trunks, which are a set of flows aggregated by their service class on one or a set of LSPs, to be carried through the network. One LSP can carry several traffic trunks. The traffic that flows along an LSP is defined at the ingress node. When labels are associated with traffic flows, routers can identify the appropriate reservation state for a packet. These defined paths can be treated as tunnels, and are described as LSP tunnels.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-26 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration Tunnel creation

To create an LSP tunnel, the first MPLS device on the path creates an RSVPTE path message. A label binding for this path is requested and indicates which network layer protocol is to be carried over the path. When the sending device finds a path that either meets the tunnel’s QoS requirements, satisfies the policies criteria, or can maximize the use of the network resources, an explicit route is specified. This explicit route can be dynamically changed if the device finds a better route. This event is recorded and the sender device is notified. The session created, or LSP, carries the load to the destination device along the path. When the destination is reached, a received message is sent back to the sending device, following the path in reverse order, which establishes an accurate and effective LSP. LSP tunnels support various policies to optimize network performance. For example, policies can be established to reroute traffic when there is a node failure, or when a path is overloaded with packets. RSVP-TE tunnels can be established along a Traffic Engineered path identified using Constrained Shortest Path First (CSPF), which is an algorithm used to resolve Quality of Service routing queries. Alternately, tunnels can be established by following a user-configured explicit path to the destination device. A Tunnel is defined as a unidirectional (MPLS-TE) or bidirectional, that is, MPLS-TP, LSP path between two devices. Failover

MPLS tunnels can be protected by configuring backup tunnels at the headend LER. The backup tunnel provides protection end-to-end for the primary tunnel by means of a set of LSR hops that are primary-path-negated. This ensures that failure on primary path does not translate to simultaneous failure on the backup path. Authentication

RSVP-TE supports authentication at the IP interface level and at the IP address level and optionally to use MD5 authentication.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-27

In order for IP address level authentication to work, the parent IP interface authentication must also be configured. Also, authentication configuration between two devices affects the status of MPLS tunnels created by RSVP-TE as shown in Table 12-11. Table 12-11 Authentication Configuration and Tunnel Status IP address level Interface level configured on configured on both both

Message-digest value on both

Yes

No

Same

Yes

No

Different

Yes

Yes

Same at IP address level. Different at interface level.

Yes

Yes

Different at IP address level. Same at interface level.

Yes

One only

Same at IP address level. Default on interface level.

No

Yes

Same.

No

Yes

Different.

No

One only

Different. Default on IP address and interface levels on non configured device.

Paths

Configure RSVP-TE paths to implement RSVP-TE with Explicit Route Object for tunnel redundancy or for the following use cases: •

explicit strict route hops can be specified to navigate tunnels through specific hops for cost and congestion avoidance purposes



explicit route hops could be sparse or network operator can configure every single hop from source to destination. This would be close to configuring static LSP but dynamic case and done only at the head end



explicit loose route hops can be specified when the network operator prefers certain locations for tunnel to pass through but may not be sure if TE attributes would be available



when tunnel needs to pass through multiple OSPF areas, Area Border Routers should be specified as the explicit route hops

RSVP-TE configuration procedure is: •

“Configuring RSVP-TE”

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-28 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

LDP The principal role of LDP is to establish and maintain virtual circuits based upon the agreement of the meaning of the label used to forward traffic. Targeted LDP sessions are used. Because LDP is a peer-to-peer protocol based on the establishment and maintenance of TCP sessions, the following natural benefits exist: •

LDP messages are reliably delivered by the underlying TCP, and state information associated with explicitly-routed LSPs does not require periodic refresh.



LDP messages are flow-controlled, that is throttled, through TCP.

The categories of LDP messages are: •

Discovery messages announce and maintain the LSR presence in the network.



Session messages create, maintain and terminate sessions between two LDP peers that use LDP to exchange label mapping information.



Advertisement messages create, change and delete label mapping for FEC, which is a set of packets with similar or identical characteristics.



Notification messages provide advisory information and signal error information.

This chapter provides the following LDP procedure: •

“Configuring LDP”

Fault Management MPLS supports the following mechanisms for fault management: •

“Connectivity Fault Management over MPLS”



“Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD)”



“Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and Link Down Indication (LDI)” Note: For additional details, refer to 39XX/51XX 6.11 Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Fault and Performance Management (0093220-009.

Connectivity Fault Management over MPLS MPLS virtual switches are monitored through the use of IEEE 802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) Continuity Check Messages (CCM). Note: If a CFM service is configured on a virtual switch, the virtual switch cannot be deleted unless the CFM service is deleted or changed to use a different virtual switch.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-29

Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) MPLS-BFD implements a single-session BFD over an associated bidirectional LSP, constructed from a pair of unidirectional LSPs, one in each direction. The two LSPs operate virtually as one single entity for the purpose of protection and switching.

Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and Link Down Indication (LDI) Alarm Indication Signal with Link Down Indication (AIS/LDI) are in-band Operational, Administration and Maintenance (OAM) messages sent to indicate service-interrupting faults on MPLS Label Switch Paths (LSPs).

Complementary protocols Complementary protocols are: •

LSP ping



LSP traceroute

LSP ping LSP ping provides the ability to verify connectivity and detect faults of RSVP-TE tunnels through the exchange of standard Echo Request and Echo Reply messages.

LSP traceroute LSP traceroute provides the ability to verify the path and isolate faults of RSVP-TE tunnels through the exchange of standard Echo Request (with increment TTL) and Echo Reply (with downstream mapping from transit nodes). This chapter provides the following complementary protocol procedures: •

“Running ping for RSVP-TE tunnels”



“Running ping for MPLS tunnels”



“Running a traceroute”

Benefits With MPLS and related protocols, service providers can provide customers with the perspective of a direct connection to a private line or LAN between their sites with enhanced performance, topology discovery to ensure the most efficient routes, and interoperability with popular MPLS switching platforms.

Vendor interoperability This MPLS implementation supports configurable label ranges for both static and dynamic MPLS, and provides interoperability with other vendor devices.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-30 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Platform requirements and capabilities Table 12-12 shows the platform requirements for MPLS. Table 12-12 Requirements Platform

Requirements

3916

Requires 6.9.0 or later. Supported on all ports.

3930

Requires 6.9.0 or later. Supported on all ports.

3931

Requires 6.9.0 or later. Supported on all ports.

3932

Requires 6.11 or later. Supported on all ports.

3960

Requires 6.9.0 or later. Supported on all ports.

5142

Requires 6.11 or later. Supported on all ports.

5150

Requires 6.9.0 or later. Supported on all ports.

5160

Requires 6.11 or later. Supported on all ports.

Table 12-13, Table 12-14 and Table 12-15 show the platform capabilities. Table 12-13 MPLS capabilities Platform

Ingress Tunnels Egress Tunnels Transit Tunnels

3916

500, (400 maximum recommended per port)

500, (400 maximum recommended per port)

1000, (400 250 maximum recommend ed per port)

3930

500, (400 maximum recommended per port)

500, (400 maximum recommended per port)

1000, (400 250 maximum recommend ed per port)

3931

500, (400 maximum recommended per port)

500, (400 maximum recommended per port)

1000, (400 250 maximum recommend ed per port)

3932

500

500

1000

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Bidirectional LSP Protection Groups

Tunnel Protection Switching for 1 Tunnel

Tunnel Protection Switching for N Tunnels

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-31 Tunnel Protection Switching for 1 Tunnel

Tunnel Protection Switching for N Tunnels

1000, (400 250 maximum recommend ed per port)

<=50 ms

<=200 ms, N=50

1000

<=50 ms

<=200 ms, N=50

Platform

Ingress Tunnels Egress Tunnels Transit Tunnels

Bidirectional LSP Protection Groups

3960

500, (400 maximum recommended per port)

500, (400 maximum recommended per port)

1000, (400 250 maximum recommend ed per port)

5142

500

500

1000

5150

500, (400 maximum recommended per port)

500, (400 maximum recommended per port)

5160

500

500

250

250

Table 12-14 MPLS capabilities - continued Platform

PWs per VPLS

VPLS

VPWS

Virtual LDP Circuits Peers (Pseudowires)

VPWS AC (EVPL) VS

3916

1000

500

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

3930

1000

500

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

3931

1000

500

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

3932

1000

3960

1000

500

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

5142

4000

2000

1000

4000

1000

4000

4000

5150

2000

1000

2000

2000

1000

2000

2000

5160

4000

2000

4000

4000

1000

4000

4000

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-32 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration Table 12-15 MPLS capabilities - continued Platform

Dual home PW Dual home PW IGP (ISIS protection (10 Routes Protection (2 PWs) PWs)

IGP (OSPF) Routes

3916

4000

3930

4000

3931

4000

4000

3960

4000

4000

5142

4000

4000

IP Interface s

4000

3932

5150

<=1 sec

<=5 sec

4000

5160

<=1 sec

<=5 sec

4000

128 4000

128

Note: The 39XX/51XX system software does not block users from configuring more tunnels than the maximum recommended per port. If tunnels are configured beyond the recommended numbers, the system might become unstable. Table 12-16 shows the platform capabilities for related protocols. Table 12-16 Related protocol capabilities Platform

IP Interfaces OSFP areas OSPF routes IS-IS areas IS-IS routes RSVP-TE Paths

3916

64

2

1000

3

400

256 with 16 hops per path

3930

64

2

1000

3

400

256 with 16 hops per path

3931

64

2

1000

3

400

256 with 16 hops per path

3932

64

2

1000

3

400

256 with 16 hops per path

3960

256

2

1000

3

400

256 with 16 hops per path

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-33 Platform

IP Interfaces OSFP areas OSPF routes IS-IS areas IS-IS routes RSVP-TE Paths

5142

256

2

1000

3

400

256 with 16 hops per path

5150

256

2

1000

3

400

256 with 16 hops per path

5160

256

2

1000

3

400

256 with 16 hops per path

Remote Management for MPLS You can access an IPv4 Remote Management Interface over an MPLS VPLS mode virtual switch as an alternative to the management VLAN. Before configuring management over MPLS, you must first allocate resources to the transport-oam feature on 3916/30/31 platforms. For more information, see “Allocating resources for an MPLS management virtual switch (3916, 3930 and 3931 platforms)” on page 12-104. Figure 12-8 shows a sample topology with a remote management over an MPLS VPLS virtual switch. Figure 12-8 Remote Management Interface over an MPLS VPLS virtual switch Remote Mgt I /F IP: 192.168.1.2 L3-Int VPLS VS VS

L3-Int VPLS VS VS MPLS VC

MPLS Tunnel

MPLS-TE/TP Network

MPLS Tunnel

Management Network 192.168.1.x

MPLS VC

Telnet, SNMP, ESM, etc.

In order to carry remote interface traffic over an MPLS tunnel, the remoteinterface is associated with a virtual switch. One or more MPLS virtual circuits can belong to the management virtual switch, which allows the management traffic to travel over the MPLS tunnel(s). This capability is supported on the following platforms: •

3916



3930



3931



3932

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-34 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration



5142



5150



5160

In order to carry remote interface traffic over an MPLS tunnel, the remoteinterface can be associated with a virtual switch. This implies that management access to the switch can now be gained from any of the members of this virtual switch, including attachment circuit members. Thus, if customer attachment circuits exist on the virtual switch that is associated with the remote interface, the customers may be able to obtain management access to the node. In order to prevent this, it is recommended that the service provider create an MPLS virtual switch specifically for use for management, and only add a port where the VLAN-based management traffic arrives to the MPLS virtual switch as an EVPL attachment circuit on a boundary node where the network transitions from VLAN-based management to in-band MPLSbased management.

Task flow This section provides an overview of the tasks for configuring MPLS static and dynamic configurations. The general steps for configuring MPLS are as follows: 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

Install the MPLS software license. See “Installing the MPLS license on 39XX/51XX” on page 12-40. Configure the IP interfaces. See “Configuring IP interfaces on 39XX/51XX” on page 12-42. Disable RSTP and MSTP. See “Disabling RSTP and MSTP” on page 12-43. Configure the routing protocol(s). a. Configure the OSPF routing protocol. See “Configuring OSPF routing protocol” on page 12-44 b. Configure IS-IS routing protocol. “Configuring IS-IS routing protocol” on page 12-47 Determine whether to use static or dynamic configuration. If dynamic, configure the RSVP-TE protocol. See “Configuring RSVP-TE” on page 12-52. Configure label ranges. See “Configuring label ranges” on page 12-56. Determine whether the switch is an LSR or LER based upon the location of the switch in the network and whether to use MPLS-TE or MPLS-TP tunnels.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-35

9

Configure tunnels. See: •

“Configuring dynamic ingress TE tunnels” on page 12-60.



“Configuring dynamic ingress uni-directional TP tunnels” on page 12-61



“Configuring static TE tunnels” on page 12-67



“Configuring co-routed TP tunnels” on page 12-69



“Configuring static bi-directional ingress-associated TE tunnels” on page 12-73



“Configuring CoS profiles for MPLS tunnels” on page 12-74



“Configuring a dynamic ingress TE tunnel with FRR” on page 12-76



“Switching over to the backup GMPLS TP tunnel” on page 12-78



“Displaying MPLS TE-tunnel information” on page 12-81

10 Configure LDP. See “Configuring LDP” on page 12-89. 11 For LER, configure the virtual circuit(s) and switch(es). See: •

“Configuring dynamic virtual circuits” on page 12-91



“Configuring static virtual circuits” on page 12-94



“Displaying virtual circuits” on page 12-98

12 Configure remote management for MPLS, if desired. See: •

“Allocating resources for an MPLS management virtual switch (3916, 3930 and 3931 platforms)” on page 12-104



“Creating an MPLS management virtual switch” on page 12-105



“Displaying remote interface configuration” on page 12-107



“Changing the management virtual switch” on page 12-108

Figure 12-9 provides an overview of MPLS configuration.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-36 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration Figure 12-9 MPLS configuration overview MPLS configuration

Installing the MPLS software license

Configuring IP interfaces

Disabling RSTP and MSTP

Configuring routing protocols

Static

Static or Dynamic?

Static configuration

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Dynamic

Dynamic configuration

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-37

Figure 12-10 provides an overview of static MPLS configuration. Figure 12-10 MPLS static configuration overview Static configuration

Configuring label ranges

LSR or LER?

LER

LSR

Ingress or Egress?

Ingress Configuring ingress tunnels

Egress

Configuring transit tunnels

Configuring egress tunnels

Configuring virtual circuits

Configuring LDP Protocol

Configuring MPLS remote management

End

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-38 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Figure 12-11 provides an overview of dynamic MPLS configuration. Figure 12-11 MPLS dynamic configuration overview Dynamic configuration

Configuring RSVP-TE protocol

Configuring RSVP-TE paths

Configuring label ranges

LSR or LER?

LER

LSR

Ingress or Egress?

Ingress Configuring ingress tunnels

Egress

Configuring transit tunnels Configuring egress tunnels

Configuring LDP Protocol

LSR or LER?

LER Configuring virtual circuits

LSR Configuring MPLS remote management

End

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-39

Figure 12-12 shows the workflow for configuring MPLS remote management interface. Figure 12-12 Remote management interface configuration overview

Yes

5150 w/ default resources

No

Allocating resources for an MPLS remote management interface

Creating an MPLS management virtual switch

Displaying remote interface configuration

Changing the management virtual switch

Deleting an MPLS management virtual switch

End

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-40 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-1 Installing the MPLS license on 39XX/51XX You can install a premium feature license key directly by identifying the license key and module number. When the module number is left unspecified, the value defaults to 1. Step

Action

1

Install a premium feature license key: software license install [file <String>] [server ][license-key <String>] [module ] default-tftp-server default-ftp-server default-server default-sftp-server [sftp-server ] [tftp-server ] [ftp-server ] [login-id <String[32]>] [password <Password String>] [secret <String[256]>] where file <String>

is the license filename and path.

server

is the TFTP server.

license-key <String>

is the license key string.

module is the module number. default-tftpserver

uses the default TFTP server.

default-ftp-server uses the default FTP server. default-server

uses the default xFTP server.

default-sftpserver

uses the default SFTP server.

sftp-server

is the SFTP server.

tftp-server

is the TFTP server.

ftp-server

is the FTP server.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-41 where login-id <String[32]>

is the FTP/SFTP username.

password <Password String>

enters the password in clear text.

secret <String[256]>

sets the password using a pre-encrypted string. —end—

Example The following example installs a license key with implied module 1: software license install license-key W123XYZ123XYZY The following example installs a license key with module 2: software license install license-key W123XYZ123XYZY module 2

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-42 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-2 Configuring IP interfaces on 39XX/51XX For each MPLS deployment scenario, an IP interface and loopback interface must be configured for the L2 routing domain to handle MPLS control protocol traffic. Step

Action

1

Create the L2 flood domain for the desired VLAN and attach the underlying L2 interfaces. a. Create the VLAN and associate it with specific port(s). vlan create vlan vlan add vlan port <port-list> port set port <port> pvid Note: A different VLAN should be used for each IP Interface and physical port combination participating in the VPLS to prevents the creation of flood domains across Layer 3 segments. b. If operating in a ring topology, remove VLAN 1,127 from each of the physical ports. vlan remove vlan 1,127 port <port-list>

2

Create the IP interface to be used for routing/signaling. interface create ip-interface ip vlan [mtu <1500-9216>] [ip-forwarding ]

3

Create the IP loopback interface (optional). interface create loopback ip Note: The loopback address is typically used as the router identifier for routing protocols, LDP identifier, and MPLS tunnel peer address. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-43

Procedure 12-3 Disabling RSTP and MSTP RSTP and MSTP do not interoperate with MPLS, so ensure these protocols are disabled. Step

Action

1

Disable RSTP:

To disable RSTP rstp disable To disable MSTP 2

Disable MSTP: mstp disable —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-44 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-4 Configuring OSPF routing protocol Configure OSPF. The default OSPF area is area 0 (IP address 0.0.0.0 with the default type of normal) is automatically created when you first attach an interface to area 0.0.0.0. Once created it cannot be deleted. You can optionally configure an additional non-backbone area enabling the system to perform the functions of an Area Border Router (ABR). With type normal, the continuous backbone area called area 0.0.0.0 is directly connected to every other area and is used for inter-area routing. Step

Action

To configure OSPF 1

Create an OSPF instance: ospf instance create ospf-instance where ospf-instance is the OSPF instance name.

2

Modify attributes for the OSPF instance (optional): ospf instance set ospf-instance where ospf-instance is the OSPF instance name. {rfc-1583compatible }

turns RFC 1583 compatibility on or off. Default is off to maintain multiple intra AS routes. When AS boundary routers belong to different OSPF areas, and advertise the same external destination, turn on RFC 1583 compatibility.

{router-id }

is the OSPF router ID. Default is the loopback address.

{spf-delayinterval <MILLISECOND S: 04294967295>}

is the SPF delay interval in milliseconds. Default is 5000.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-45 3

Create an OSPF area (optional): ospf area create area-ip ospf-instance type <normal|nssa|stub> where area-ip

is the IP address of the new non-backbone area.

ospf-instance is the OSPF instance. type 4

is the type of area.

Attach the OSPF instance to an IP interface and OSPF area: ospf interface attach ip-interface {area } {ospf-instance } where ip-interface

is the IP interface name.

area

is the OSPF area.

ospf-instance is the OSPF instance name. 5

Modify OSPF attributes for an IP interface (optional): ospf interface set ip-interface delayinterval <SECONDS: 1-2147483647> hello-interval <SECONDS: 1-49999> poll-interval <SECONDS: 1-2147483647> priority <0-255> retransmit-delay <SECONDS: 1-3000> transmit-delay <MILLISECONDS: 1-429496799> cost-metric authentication-type <none | text | md5> password <Password String> [password-secret <String[62]>] where ip-interface

is the IP interface name.

delay-interval <SECONDS: 12147483647>

is the delay interval of the interface in seconds.Default is 40 seconds.

hello-interval <SECONDS: 149999>

is the hello interval of the interface in seconds. Default is 10 seconds.

poll-interval <SECONDS: 12147483647>

is the poll interval for the interface in seconds. Default is 120 seconds.

priority <0-255>

is the priority used for the interface. Default is 1.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-46 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration where retransmit-delay <SECONDS: 13000>

is the retransmit delay interval for the interface in seconds. Default is 5 seconds.

transmit-delay is the transmit delay interval for the interface in milliseconds. <MILLISECOND Default is 100 milliseconds. S: 1-429496799> cost-metric

is the cost the interface. Default is 30.

authenticationis the authentication type. Default is none. Optionally, you type <none | md5 can set the authentication type to use text or MD5 | text> authentication. password <Password String>

is the authentication password of 1 to 8 characters. Default is blank. Required when the authentication type is set to text.

[password-secret is the encoded password. Default is blank. Required when <String[62]>] the authentication type is set to md5. To display the configuration 6

Display the OSPF instance configuration (optional): ospf instance show ospf-instance where ospf-instance is the OSPF instance name.

7

Display the OSPF area (optional): ospf area show ospf-instance [area-ip <area-ip>] where ospf-instance is the OSPF instance name. area-ip <area-ip> is the area IP address. statistics

8

displays statistics.

Display OSPF IP interface information (optional): ospf interface show ip-interface where ip-interface

is the IP interface name.

statistics

shows OSPF interface statistics. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-47

Procedure 12-5 Configuring IS-IS routing protocol Configure IS-IS. Step

Action

To configure IS-IS 1

Create an IS-IS instance: isis instance create isis-instance [level ]

area

where isis-instance

is the isis instance name.

logical-id ]

is the creation index used in configuration.

area is the area identifier, which has a variable length in Hex (AFI.xxxx.xxxx.....). level 2

is the routing level.

Set the maximum lifetime and refresh interval to control link state packet generation (optional): isis lsp set isis-instance [max-lifetime ] [refresh-interval ] where isis-instance

is the isis instance name.

max-lifetime is the maximum lifetime of an LSP. Default value is 1200 refresh-interval

is the LSP refresh interval. Default value is 900 seconds.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-48 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 3

Configure SPF calculation settings to control when updates to the link state database occur (optional): isis spf-calculations set isis-instance [max-delay <MILLISECONDS>] [threshold-restart-limit ] [threshold-update-restart ] [threshold-update-start ] where isis-instance

is the isis instance name.

max-delay is the maximum delay (msecs) to start a computation, <MILLISECONDS> which determines how long to wait after a database update before updating SPF routing calculations. Default is 5000 milliseconds. When set to 0, the routing calculation occurs immediately following the database update. threshold-restartis the maximum number of restarts before an in-progress limit threshold-updaterestart

is the minimum number of changes before the restart of a in-progress computation before interrupting any running SPF routing calculation. Default is -1 meaning that the no interruptions will occur to SPF routing calculations. When set to 0, a database update will cause any running SPF routing calculation to be restarted.

threshold-update- is the minimum number of changes before the start of start SPF routing calculation is determined by the configured calculation delay. When set to 0, any database update will cause an SPF routing calculation to occur. 4

Configure IS-IS area authentication to authenticate sequence number packets (SNPs), including, link state packets, CSNPs, and PSNPs (optional): isis area-authentication set isis-instance set isisinstance [authentication-type {md5 | text | none}] [password <Password String>][secret <String[62]>] [send-only {yes | no} | snp-authenticate {yes | no}] where isis-instance

is the isis instance name.

authenticationis the type of authentication. Default is none. Optionally, you type {md5 | text | can set the authentication type to use text or MD5 none} authentication. password <Password String>

is the password. Default is blank. Required when the authentication type is set to text.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-49 where

5

[secret <String[62]>]

is the encoded password.

send-only {yes | no}

determines whether authentication occurs only upon sending packets. Default is no.

snp-authenticate {yes | no}

is the CSNP,PSNP PDU validation.

Configure IS-IS interface authentication at the router level (optional): isis interface-authentication set ip-interface [authentication-type {md5 | text | none}] [password <Password String>] [secret <String[62]>] [sendonly {yes | no}] level where ip-interface

is the IP interface name.

authenticationis the type of authentication. Default is none. Optionally, you type {md5 | text | can set the authentication type to use text or MD5 none} authentication.

6

password <Password String>

is the password. Default is blank. Required when the authentication type is set to text.

[secret <String[62]>]

is the encoded password.

send-only {yes | no}

determines whether authentication occurs only upon sending packets. Default is no.

level

is the routing level.

Associate an IP interface with an IS-IS instance: isis interface attach ip-interface isisinstance [level ] where ip-interface

is the IP interface name.

isis-instance

is the isis instance name.

level

is the routing level.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-50 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 7

Modify the IS-IS padded hello for an IP interface (optional): isis interface set ip-interface paddedhello where

8

ip-interface

is the IP interface name.

lpadded-hello

determines whether or not to pad hello packets up to the MTU size of the associated IP interface. Default is to use the “padded hello.”

Modify IS-IS interface level attributes for an IP interface: isis interface-level set [level ] [priority ] [hello-timer <secs>] [hello-multiplier ] [wide-metric ] [lsp-interval <msecs>] [csnp-interval <secs>] > where [level ]

is the routing level.

[priority ]

is the designated router priority. Default is 64. Priority 0 means the interface does not become the designated router.

[hello-timer <secs>]

is the Minimum time between successive Hello packets. Default is 10 seconds.

[hello-multiplier ]

is the hold time for transmitted hello packets. Default is 3.

[wide-metric ]

is the cost of the link. Default is 128.

[lsp-interval <msecs>]

is the Minimum time between successive link state packets at the level on the circuit. Default is 50 milliseconds.

[csnp-interval <secs>]

is the minimum time in seconds between successive

CSNPs. Default is 10 seconds.

To display the configuration 9

Display IS-IS instance protocol information: isis instance show isis-instance {attached-interfaces | database | hostname | is-neighbors {summary | details} | neighbors {summary | details} | statistics} where isis-instance

is the isis instance name.

attachedinterfaces

is the ISIS instance with its attachments.

database

is the protocol database details.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-51 where

10

hostname

is the known hostnames of IS neighbors.

is-neighbors {summary | details}

is IS neighbors.

neighbors {summary | details}

is the IP address of neighbors.

statistics

is protocol statistics.

Display IS-IS interface authentication: isis interface-authentication show [ip-interface ] where ip-interface

is the IP interface. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-52 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-6 Configuring RSVP-TE RSVP-TE sets up LSPs in dynamic deployments. By default RSVP-TE is disabled. The minimum RSVP-TE configuration is to enable RSVP-TE is globally and for the IP interface. RSVP-TE will signal over an IP interface when it is enabled. Figure 12-13 shows the workflow for configuring RSVP-TE. Figure 12-13 MPLS RSVP-TE configuration overview Configuring RSVP-TE retry attributes (optional)

Configuring RSVP-TE for TE only

Configuring RSVP-TE attributes for IP interfaces (optional)

Configuring RSVP-TE address authentication (optional)

Configuring RSVP-TE paths (optional)

End

Step

Action

1

Configure RSVP-TE retry attributes if variation from the default is desired (optional). a. Disable RSVP-TE. rsvp-te disable

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-53 b. Set the retry attributes: rsvp-te set retry-interval retryinfinite where retry-interval

is the retry time interval in seconds. RSVP-TE attempts to restore tunnels ten times at the retry interval before it gives up. The default setting is 3 seconds.

retry-infinite infinite attribute is turned on, when RSVP tunnels go down because of any reason other than admin = down, RSVP tries to restore the tunnel infinite times. Default is “on”. c. Confirm RSVP-TE retry settings configuration (optional): rsvp-te show [statistics] 2

Enable RSVP-TE globally. rsvp-te enable

3

Enable RSVP-TE for the specific IP interface: rsvp-te enable [ip-interface ] where ip-interface

4

is the IP interface.

Configure RSVP-TE IP interface attributes if variation from the default is desired (optional). a. Set the RSVP-TE attributes for IP interfaces (optional): rsvp-te set ip-interface [advertised-label ] [hello-interval ] [hello-tolerance ] [authentication-type <md5>] [message-digest-secret <String[64]>] rs[password <password>] where ip-interface

is the IP interface.

[advertised-label ]

is the advertised label to support an Implicit Null Label or a non-reserved label (default).

[hello-interval ]

is the RSVP-TE hello message interval ranging from 0-30 seconds. Default is 0, which is disabled.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-54 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration where [hello-tolerance ]

is the RSVP-TE hello tolerance defines number of hello intervals which may pass without receiving a successful Hello message from a partner before the Hello session times out. The range is 0-10, and the default is 3.

[authenticationtype <md5>]

is the authentication type to enable MD5 authentication. Default is none.

{password <Password String>}

is an 8-40 character password string called the authentication message digest. Default is blank. Required when the authentication type is set to MD5.

message-digestsecret <String[64]>}

is the encoded authentication message digest password.

b. Confirm the RSVP-TE attributes for IP interfaces (optional): rsvp-te interface show 5

Configure RSVP-TE IP address authentication (optional).

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-55

Step

Action a. Add an IP address: rsvp-te authentication set peer [authentication-type md5] [password <password>] where peer

is the IP address of the peer.

authenticationtype <md5>

sets the authentication type to use MD5 authentication. Default is blank.

password <password>

is an 8-30 character password. Required when the authentication type is set to MD5. Default is blank.

b. Confirm the IP address entry: rsvp-te authentication show 6

Configure RSVP-TE paths (optional). a. Create an RSVP-TE path: rsvp-te path create rsvp-path b. Set the hops for an RSVP-TE path: rsvp-te path set rsvp-path index ip [hop-type <strict | loose>] c. Confirm configuration of all or specific paths: rsvp-te path show [rsvp-path ]

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-56 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-7 Configuring label ranges MPLS label ranges can be modified at any time. However, the chassis must be rebooted in order for the new range to become operational. Also, label ranges between static and dynamic cannot overlap.

CAUTION Tunnels and VCs Could be Removed from Configuration

If there are any tunnels or virtual circuits configured to use labels outside of the new range, they are removed from the configuration upon reboot. Static ingress labels can only be from the specified MPLS range. The configured static label range determines the valid range for static in labels. Static egress labels can be any valid label between 16-1044479. There are no restrictions on static out labels. The static pseudowire label range is reserved for MPLS static pseudowires. The dynamic label range should be same on both ends of a tunnel or virtual circuit. The dynamic label range is shared by virtual circuits and tunnels. You can configure •

static label ranges. The default minimum label value is 16; the default maximum label value is 4095.



static pseudowire label ranges. The default minimum label value is 4096; the default maximum label value is 8191.



dynamic label ranges. The default minimum label value is 8192; the default maximum label value is 1044479.

Step

Action

To configure static label ranges 1

Configure static tunnel label ranges: mpls static-tunnel-label-range set min-label <16-1044479> max-label <16-1044479>

To configure static pseudowire label ranges 2

Set the static pseudowire label range: mpls static-vc-label-range set [min-label ] [max-label ]

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-57 To configure dynamic label ranges 3

Configure dynamic label ranges: mpls dynamic-label-range set min-label <18-1044479> maxlabel <18-1044479> —end—

Example The following example sets the static tunnel label range with a minimum label value of 30 and a maximum label value of 1023. mpls static-tunnel-label-range set min-label 30 max-label 1023

The following example sets the static pseudowire label range with a minimum label value of 30 and a maximum label value of 1023. mpls static-vc-label-range set min-label 30 max-label 1023

The following example sets the dynamic label range with a minimum label value of 2048 and a maximum label value of 131071. mpls dynamic-label-range set min-label 2048 max-label 131071

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-58 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-8 Displaying label ranges You can display •

static label ranges for tunnels



static label ranges for MPLS pseudowires



dynamic label ranges

Step

Action

To display static label ranges for tunnels 1

Display static label ranges: mpls static-tunnel-label-range show

To display static label ranges for MPLS pseudowires 2

Display static label ranges for MPLS pseudowires: mpls static-vc-label-range show

To display dynamic label ranges 3

Display dynamic label ranges: mpls dynamic-label-range show —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the mpls static-tunnel-labelrange show command. mpls static-tunnel-label-range show +--------------- MPLS/GMPLS Static Label Range ----------------+ | MPLS Admin Min Static-Total Label | 16 | | MPLS Admin Max Static-Total Label | 8191 | | MPLS Admin Min Static-Tunnel Label | 16 | | MPLS Admin Max Static-Tunnel Label | 4095 | +------------------------------------+-------------------------+ | MPLS Oper Min Static-Total Label | 16 | | MPLS Oper Max Static-Total Label | 8191 | | MPLS Oper Min Static-Tunnel Label | 16 | | MPLS Oper Max Static-Tunnel Label | 4095 | +------------------------------------+-------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-59

The following example shows sample output for the mpls static-vc-label-range show command. mpls static-vc-label-range show +--------------- MPLS/GMPLS Static Label Range ----------------+ | MPLS Admin Min Static-Total Label | 16 | | MPLS Admin Max Static-Total Label | 8191 | | MPLS Admin Min Static-VC Label | 4096 | | MPLS Admin Max Static-VC Label | 8191 | +------------------------------------+-------------------------+ | MPLS Oper Min Static-Total Label | 16 | | MPLS Oper Max Static-Total Label | 8191 | | MPLS Oper Min Static-VC Label | 4096 | | MPLS Oper Max Static-VC Label | 8191 | +------------------------------------+-------------------------+

The following example shows sample output for the mpls dynamic-label-range show command. mpls dynamic-label-range show +----------- MPLS/GMPLS Dynamic Label Range --------------+ | MPLS Admin Min Dynamic Label | 8192 | | MPLS Admin Max Dynamic Label | 1044479 | | MPLS Oper Min Dynamic Label | 8192 | | MPLS Oper Max Dynamic Label | 1044479 | +-------------------------------+-------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-60 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-9 Configuring dynamic ingress TE tunnels For LERs, an ingress tunnel must be created. In order to manage bandwidth, an tunnel bandwidth profile can be created first and then associated with the tunnel. Step

Action

1

Create a tunnel bandwidth profile (optional): mpls tunnel-bandwidth-profile create bandwidth-profile <profile-name> bandwidth [burst ]

2

Confirm the tunnel bandwidth profile configuration (optional): mpls tunnel-bandwidth-profile show

3

Create a dynamic ingress TE tunnel: mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress dest-ip [setup-priority <0-7>] [hold-priority <0-7>] [bandwidth-profile <MPLS Tunnel Bandwidth Profile>] [record-route ] {protection-type } [frr-signaling ] [frr-profile <MPLS Tunnel FRR Profile>] [explicit-tunnel-path <MPLS Rsvp Path>] [cosprofile <MPLS Tunnel COS Profile>] {ttl-policy } [fixed-ttl ] [backup-tunnel <MPLS ingress primary tunnel>] [reversion-hold-time ] [tunnel-reversion ]

4

Enable the dynamic ingress TE tunnel: mpls tunnel enable rsvp-ingress —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-61

Procedure 12-10 Configuring dynamic ingress uni-directional TP tunnels Configure dynamic ingress uni-directional TP tunnels. Step

Action

1

Create a dynamic ingress uni-directional GMPLS TP-Tunnel: gmpls tp-tunnel create rsvp-ingress-unidir dest-ip [setup-priority ] [hold-priority ] [bandwidth-profile <MPLS Tunnel Bandwidth Profile>] [record-route ] [cos-profile <MPLS Tunnel COS Profile>] {ttl-policy } [fixed-ttl ] [reversion-hold-time ] [tunnel-reversion ]

2

Confirm the configuration of the dynamic uni-directional TP tunnel: gmpls tp-tunnel show rsvp-transit-unidir <MplsTransitDynamicTpUniDirTunl> —end—

Example Dynamic unidirectional ingress TP tunnel gmpls tp-tunnel create rsvp-ingress-unidir TP_UD_R1ToR3 dest-ip 1.1.1.1 gmpls tp-tunnel show rsvp-ingress-unidir TPUD_R1TOR3 +----------------GMPLS INGRESS TP-TUNNEL DETAILS-------------+ | Parameter | Value | +---------------------------+--------------------------------+ |Tunnel Name |TPUD_R1TOR3 | |Tunnel Index |8 | |Tunnel Type |Dynamic | |Direction |Unidir | |Nodal Role |Ingress | |Destination IP Address |1.1.1.1 | |Source IP Address |10.10.10.10 | |Next-Hop IP Address |5.1.1.1 | |Admin State |Enabled | |Oper State |Enabled | |Forward Out-Label |11004 | |LSP ID |1 | |Explicit Path Index |0 | |Explicit Path Name | | |Setup Priority |7 | |Hold Priority |0 | |Record Route |On | |CSPF Route Selection |On | |Bandwidth-Profile Name | | |Forward Tunnel Group Index |32776 | 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-62 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration |Forward Protection Role |Primary | |Forward Protection State |Active | |Forward Backup Tunnel Name |None Present | |Forward Tunnel Reversion |On | |Forward Reversion Hold-Time|30 | |Forward CoS Profile Name |DefaultTunlCoSProfile | |Forward CoS Profile Index |1 | |TTL Policy |fixed | |Fixed TTL |255 | +---------------------------+--------------------------------+

Example Dynamic uni-directional ingress TP tunnel with backup protection gmpls tp-tunnel create rsvp-ingress-unidir rsvp-itnl-1.1.1.1 dest-ip 1.1.1.1 explicit-tunnel-path path-prim-1.1.1.1 gmpls tp-tunnel create rsvp-ingress-unidir rsvp-itnl-tp-bkp dest-ip 1.1.1.1 explicit-tunnel-path path-protect-1.1.1.1 backup-tunnel rsvp-itnl-1.1.1.1 gmpls tunnel show Flags : P A L E

-> -> -> ->

Primary Active Lone Member Tunnel uses

B -> Backup S -> Standby R -> Recovery Group Member Explicit Path

+-------+--------+----------GMPLS INGRESS TP-TUNNEL TABLE---------+-------+-----+-----+-------+ |Type |Tunnel | Tunnel Name |Destination IP |Out |Admin|Oper | Flags | | |Index | | |Label |State|State| | +-------+--------+--------------------------------+---------------+-------+-----+-----+-+-+-+-+ |Dynamic|13 |rsvp-itnl-1.1.1.1 |1.1.1.1 |8202 |ENA |ENA |P|R|A|E| |Dynamic|14 |rsvp-itnl-tp-bkp |1.1.1.1 |8193 |ENA |ENA |B|R|S|E| +-------+--------+--------------------------------+---------------+-------+-----+-----+-+-+-+-+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-63

Procedure 12-11 Configuring static transit uni-directional TP tunnels Configure static transit uni-directional TP tunnels. Step

Action

1

Create a static transit uni-directional TP Tunnel: gmpls tp-tunnel create static-transit-unidir <statictransit-unidir> {dest-ip } {src-ip } {next-hop-ip } {forward-out-label } {forward-in-label } [cos-profile <MPLS Tunnel COS Profile>] {ttlpolicy } [fixed-ttl ] [prev-hop-ip ] [ais-monitor <enable | disable>] [ais-profile ]

2

Confirm the configuration. gmpls tp-tunnel show static-transit-unidir <statictransit-unidir> —end—

Example gmpls tp-tunnel create static-transit-unidir asoc-frm-10.10.10.10-to-1.1.1.1 dest-ip 1.1.1.1 src-ip 10.10.10.10 next-hop-ip 42.1.1.15 forward-in-label 1003 forward-out-label 1001 gmpls tp-tunnel create static-transit-unidir asoc-frm-1.1.1.1-to-10.10.10.10 dest-ip 10.10.10.10 src-ip 1.1.1.1 next-hop-ip 11.11.11.100 forward-in-label 1000 forward-out-label 1002

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-64 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-12 Configuring static uni-directional ingress TP tunnels Configure static ingress uni-directional TP tunnels. Step

Action

1

Create a static ingress uni-directional TP Tunnel: gmpls tp-tunnel create static-ingress-unidir <staticingress-unidir> dest-ip logical-id [src-tunnel-id ] [forward-lsp-id ] desttunnel-id ] next-hop-ip forward-outlabel <#16..1044479> [cos-profile <MplsTunlCosProfile> [ttl-policy ] [recovery-nhop-disjoint <none|link>] fixed-ttl <#1..255> reversion-hold-time <#0..3600> tunnel-reversion backup-tunnel <MplsIngressPrimaryTpUniDirTunl>

2

Confirm the configuration. gmpls tp-tunnel show static-ingress-unidir <MplsIngressStaticTpUniDirTunl> —end—

Example Static uni-directional ingress TP tunnel gmpls tp-tunnel create static-ingress-unidir st-ing-u-A dest-ip 1.1.1.1 nexthop-ip 11.11.11.50 forward-out-label 1003 gmpls tp-tunnel show static-ingress-unidir st-ing-u-A +----------------GMPLS INGRESS TP-TUNNEL DETAILS-------------+ | Parameter | Value | +---------------------------+--------------------------------+ |Tunnel Name |st-ing-u-A | |Tunnel Index |4 | |Tunnel Type |Static | |Direction |Unidir | |Nodal Role |Ingress | |Destination IP Address |1.1.1.1 | |Source IP Address |10.10.10.10 | |Next-Hop IP Address |11.11.11.50 | |Admin State |Enabled | |Oper State |Enabled | |Forward Out-Label |1003 | |Forward Tunnel Group Index |32772 | |Forward Protection Role |Primary | |Forward Protection State |Active | |Forward Backup Tunnel Name |None Present | |Forward Tunnel Reversion |On | |Forward Reversion Hold-Time|30 | |Forward CoS Profile Name |DefaultTunlCoSProfile | |Forward CoS Profile Index |1 |

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-65 |TTL Policy |fixed | |Fixed TTL |255 | +---------------------------+--------------------------------+

Example Static uni-directional ingress TP tunnel with backup protection gmpls tp-tunnel create static-ingress-unidir sta-ing-u-tp-P dest-ip 1.1.1.1 next-hop-ip 5.1.1.1 forward-out-label 2003 gmpls tp-tunnel create static-ingress-unidir sta-ing-u-tp-B dest-ip 1.1.1.1 next-hop-ip 4.1.1.1 forward-out-label 2040 backup-tunnel sta-ing-u-tp-P gmpls tp-tunnel show Flags : P A L E

-> -> -> ->

Primary Active Lone Member Tunnel uses

B -> Backup S -> Standby R -> Recovery Group Member Explicit Path

+-------+--------+----------GMPLS INGRESS TP-TUNNEL TABLE---------+-------+-----+-----+-------+ |Type |Tunnel | Tunnel Name |Destination IP |Out |Admin|Oper | Flags | | |Index | | |Label |State|State| | +-------+--------+--------------------------------+---------------+-------+-----+-----+-+-+-+-+ |Static |11 |sta-ing-u-tp-P | 1.1.1.1 |2003 |ENA |ENA |P|R|A| | |Static |12 |sta-ing-u-tp-B | 1.1.1.1 |2040 |ENA |ENA |B|R|S| | +-------+--------+--------------------------------+---------------+-------+-----+-----+-+-+-+-+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-66 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-13 Configuring static uni-directional egress TP tunnels Configure static uni-directional egress TP tunnels. Step

Action

1

Create a static egress uni-directional TP Tunnel: gmpls tp-tunnel create static-egress-unidir <tp-tunnelname> src-ip forward-in-label <#16..1044479> prev-hop-ip logical-d [src-tunnel-id ] [forward-lsp-id ][dest-tunnel-id ] [recovery-phop-disjoint <none|link>]

2

Confirm the configuration. gmpls tp-tunnel show static-egress-unidir <MplsEgressStaticTpUniDirTunl> —end—

Example gmpls tp-tunnel create static-egress-unidir st-egr-u-A src-ip 1.1.1.1 forward-in-label 1002 prev-hop-ip 192.168.1.2 logic-id 10 src-tunnel-id 10 forward-lsp-id 1 dest-tunnel-id 10 gmpls tp-tunnel create static-egress-unidir st-egr-u-B src-ip 2.2.2.2 forward-in-label 1050 prev-hop-ip 192.168.2.2 logic-id 11 src-tunnel-id 11 forward-lsp-id 1 dest-tunnel-id 11

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-67

Procedure 12-14 Configuring static TE tunnels A static TE deployment requires tunnel creation. The type of tunnel depends on the role of the MPLS switch. For ingress and egress LERs, create both an ingress and egress tunnel. For an LSR, create a transit tunnel. Note: The value for in-label must be in the configured static MPLS virtual circuit label range. Step

Action

To configure a static ingress tunnel 1

Create a static ingress tunnel: mpls tunnel create static-ingress <static-ingress> [dest-ip ] [next-hop-ip ] {outlabel } [cos-profile <MPLS Tunnel COS Profile>] {ttl-policy } [fixed-ttl ] [recovery-nhop-disjoint <none | link>][backuptunnel <MPLS ingress primary tunnel>] [reversion-holdtime <SECONDS: 0-3600>] [tunnel-reversion ]

To configure a static egress tunnel 2

Create a static egress tunnel: mpls tunnel create static-egress <static-egress> [src-ip ] {in-label }

To configure a static transit tunnel 3

Create a static transit tunnel: mpls tunnel create static-transit <static-transit> {dest-ip } {src-ip } {next-hop-ip } {in-label } {out-label } {out-explicit-null-label} {out-nolabel} [cos-profile <MPLS Tunnel COS Profile>] {ttlpolicy } [fixed-ttl ] [prev-hop-ip ] [ais-monitor <enable | disable>] [ais-profile ] —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-68 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Example MPLS-TE static ingress tunnel mpls tunnel create static-ingress st-1.1.1.1-A dest-ip 1.1.1.1 next-hop-ip 11.11.11.50 out-label 300

Example MPLS-TE static egress tunnel mpls tunnel create static-egress st-frm-1.1.1.1 src-ip 1.1.1.1 in-label 400

Example MPLS-TE static transit tunnel mpls tunnel create src-ip 10.10.10.10 mpls tunnel create 10.10.10.10 src-ip

static-transit frm-10.10.10.10-to-1.1.1.1 dest-ip 1.1.1.1 next-hop-ip 42.1.1.15 in-label 300 out-label 301 static-transit frm-1.1.1.1-to-10.10.10.10 dest-ip 1.1.1.1 next-hop-ip 11.11.11.100 in-label 401 out-label 400

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-69

Procedure 12-15 Configuring co-routed TP tunnels Co-routed TP tunnels can be: •

static ingress



static egress



static transit

Table 12-17 lists the default values for static ingress and egress co-routed TP tunnels. Table 12-17 Default values for static co-routed TP tunnels Attribute

Default value

ttl-policy

fixed

fixed-ttl

255

reversion-hold-time

30

tunnel-reversion

on

bfd-monitor

disable

bfd-profile

LSP_BFD_DEF_PROF

ais-monitor

disable

ais-profile

AIS_DEF_PROF

Note: The value for forward-in-label of the egress tunnel must be in the configured static MPLS tunnel label range. Step

Action

To configure a static ingress co-routed TP tunnel 1

Create a static ingress co-routed TP-Tunnel: gmpls tp-tunnel create static-ingress-corout <staticingress-corout> {dest-ip } {next-hop-ip } {forward-out-label } {reverse-in-label [cos-profile <MPLS Tunnel COS Profile>] {ttl-policy } [fixed-ttl ] [recovery-nhop-disjoint <none|link>]logical-id [src-tunnel-id ][forward-lsp-id ][dest-tunnel-id

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-70 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration ] [backup-tunnel <MPLS ingress primary tp corout tunnel>] [reversion-hold-time ] [tunnelreversion ] [bfd-monitor <enable | disable>] [bfd-profile <MPLS BFD Profile List>] [ais-monitor <enable | disable>] [ais-profile ] 2

Confirm static ingress co-routed TP-Tunnel creation: gmpls tp-tunnel show static-ingress-corout <staticingress-corout>

To configure a static egress co-routed TP tunnel 3

Create a static egress co-routed TP-Tunnel: gmpls tp-tunnel create static-egress-corout <staticegress-corout> src-ip prev-hop-ip forward-in-label reverseout-label [cos-profile <MPLS Tunnel COS Profile>] [ttl-policy ] [fixed-ttl ] [reversion-hold-time ] [tunnelreversion ] [recovery-phop-disjoint <none|link>]logical-id [src-tunnel-id ][forward-lsp-id ][dest-tunnel-id ][backup-tunnel <MPLS static egress primary tptunnel>] [bfd-monitor <enable | disable>] [bfd-profile <MPLS BFD Profile List>][ais-monitor <enable | disable>] [ais-profile ]

4

Confirm static egress co-routed TP-Tunnel creation: gmpls tp-tunnel show static-egress-corout <static-egresscorout>

To configure a static transit co-routed TP tunnel 5

Create a static transit co-routed TP-Tunnel: gmpls tp-tunnel create static-transit-corout <staticegress-corout> dest-ip src-ip next-hop-ip prev-hop-ip forward-in-label forward-out-label reverse-in-label reverse-out-label [cosprofile <MPLS Tunnel COS Profile>] [ttl-policy ] [fixed-ttl ] [ais-monitor <enable | disable>] [ais-profile ]

6

Confirm static transit co-routed TP-Tunnel creation: gmpls tp-tunnel show static-transit-corout <statictransit-corout> —end—

Example GMPLS Static Co-routed ingress TP-Tunnel Creation

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-71 gmpls tp-tunnel create static-ingress-corout icor-to-1.1.1.1 dest-ip 1.1.1.1 next-hop-ip 5.1.1.1 forward-out-label 2003 reverse-in-label 2002

GMPLS Static Co-routed ingress TP-Tunnel Display gmpls tp-tunnel show static-ingress-corout icor-to-1.1.1.1 +----------------GMPLS INGRESS TP-TUNNEL DETAILS-------------+ | Parameter | Value | +---------------------------+--------------------------------+ |Tunnel Name |icor-to-1.1.1.1 | |Tunnel Index |6 | |Tunnel Type |Static | |Direction |Bidir | |Nodal Role |Ingress | |Destination IP Address |1.1.1.1 | |Source IP Address |10.10.10.10 | |Next-Hop IP Address |5.1.1.1 | |Admin State |Enabled | |Oper State |Enabled | |Forward Out-Label |2003 | |Reverse In-Label |2002 | |Forward Tunnel Group Index |32774 | |Forward Protection Role |Primary | |Forward Protection State |Active | |Forward Backup Tunnel Name |None Present | |Forward Tunnel Reversion |On | |Forward Reversion Hold-Time|30 | |Forward CoS Profile Name |DefaultTunlCoSProfile | |Forward CoS Profile Index |1 | |TTL Policy |fixed | |Fixed TTL |255 | |BFD Monitoring |Disabled | |BFD Profile ID |2 | |BFD Profile Name |Active-LSP | |BFD Session ID |3 | |BFD Session Name |LBFS_10_06_icor-to-1.1.1.1_E | |BFD Session Error Code |0 | |AIS Monitoring |Disabled | +---------------------------+--------------------------------+

Static Co-routed Egress TP-Tunnel Creation gmpls tp-tunnel create static-egress-corout ecor-frm-2.2.2.2 src-ip 2.2.2.2 prev-hop-ip 5.1.1.1 forward-in-label 2040 reverse-out-label 2041

Static Co-routed Egress TP-Tunnel Detailed Display gmpls tp-tunnel show static-egress-corout egr-cor-10.10.10.10 +------------GMPLS STATIC EGRESS TP-TUNNEL DETAILS-----------+ | Parameter | Value | +---------------------------+--------------------------------+ |Tunnel Name |egr-cor-10.10.10.10 | |Tunnel Index |2 | |Tunnel Type |Static | |Direction |Bidir | |Nodal Role |Egress | |Destination IP Address |1.1.1.1 | 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-72 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration |Source IP Address |10.10.10.10 | |Prev-Hop IP Address |10.11.12.2 | |Admin State |Enabled | |Oper State |Enabled | |Forward In-Label |2001 | |Reverse Out-Label |2000 | |Reverse Tunnel Group Index |32774 | |Reverse Protection Role |Primary | |Reverse Protection State |Active | |Reverse Backup Tunnel Name |None Present | |Reverse Tunnel Reversion |On | |Reverse Tunl Reversion Time|30 | |Reverse CoS-Profile Name |DefaultTunlCoSProfile | |Reverse CoS-Profile Index |1 | |Reverse TTL Policy |fixed | |Reverse Fixed TTL |255 | |BFD Monitoring |Disabled | |BFD Profile ID |2 | |BFD Profile Name |Active-LSP | |BFD Session ID |2 | |BFD Session Name |LBFS_12_02_egr-cor-10.10.10_E | |BFD Session Error Code |0 | |AIS Monitoring |Disabled | +---------------------------+--------------------------------+

Static Co-routed transit TP-Tunnel Creation gmpls tp-tunnel create static-transit-corout co-10.10.10.10-to-1.1.1.1 destip 1.1.1.1 src-ip 10.10.10.10 next-hop-ip 10.11.12.1 prev-hop-ip 5.1.1.10 forward-out-label 2001 forward-in-label 2003 reverse-out-label 2002 reversein-label 2000

Static Co-routed transit TP-Tunnel Detailed Display gmpls tp-tunnel show static-transit-corout co-10.10.10.10-to-1.1.1.1 +--------------GMPLS TRANSIT TP-TUNNEL DETAILS---------------+ | Parameter | Value | +---------------------------+--------------------------------+ |Tunnel Name |co-10.10.10.10-to-1.1.1.1 | |Tunnel Index |1 | |Tunnel Type |Static | |Direction |Bidir | |Nodal Role |Transit | |Destination IP Address |1.1.1.1 | |Source IP Address |10.10.10.10 | |Next-Hop IP Address |10.11.12.1 | |Prev-Hop IP Address |5.1.1.10 | |Forward In-Label |2003 | |Forward Out-Label |2001 | |Reverse In-Label |2000 | |Reverse Out-Label |2002 | |Admin State |Enabled | |Oper State |Enabled | |Forward CoS Profile Name |DefaultTunlCoSProfile | |Forward CoS Profile Index |1 | |TTL Policy |decrement | |Fixed TTL |255 | |AIS Monitoring State |Disabled | +---------------------------+--------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-73

Procedure 12-16 Configuring static bi-directional ingress-associated TE tunnels Configure both ends of static bi-directional ingress-associated TE tunnels. Step

Action

1

Create a bi-directional ingress associated TE-Tunnel: mpls tunnel create bidir-ingress-assoc {forward-tunnel <MPLS ingress tunnel>} {reversestatic-tunnel <MPLS egress tunnel>} {reverse-dyntun-name <String>} [reverse-dyntun-srcip ] [bfdmonitor <enable | disable>] [bfd-profile <MPLS BFD Profile List>] [ais-monitor <enable | disable>] [aisprofile ]

2

Enable a bi-directional ingress associated TE-Tunnel: mpls tunnel enable bidir-ingress-assoc —end—

Example TE-Associated tunnel creation of st-ing-associ-AP with a forward-tunnel (ingress) of st-1.1.1.1-A and the reverse-static-tunnel of st-frm-1.1.1.1 (egress) shown in the examples for “Configuring static TE tunnels” on page 12-67. mpls tunnel create bidir-ingress-assoc st-ing-assoc-AP forward-tunnel st1.1.1.1-A reverse-static-tunnel st-frm-1.1.1.1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-74 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-17 Configuring CoS profiles for MPLS tunnels Configure CoS profiles for MPLS tunnels. Step

Action

1

Create an MPLS tunnel CoS profile: mpls tunnel-cos-profile create cos-profile [frame-cos-map ] [frame-cos-policy <mapped | fixed>] [fixed-tc ] [resolved-cosmap ] [resolved-cos-policy <mapped | fixed>]

2

Confirm the configuration of the specific profile. mpls tunnel-cos-profile show cos-profile

3

Display a summary of CoS profiles. (option mpls tunnel-cos-profile show cos-profile —end—

Example mpls tunnel-cos-profile create cos-profile TE_TUN_COS_PROF frame-cos-policy fixed fixed-tc 4 resolved-cos-policy fixed resolved-cos-fixed 6 mpls tunnel-cos-profile show cos-profile TE_TUN_COS_PROF +------------MPLS Tunnel-CoS-Profile Details-----------------+ | Parameter | Value | +---------------------------+--------------------------------+ |CoS Profile Name |TE_TUN_COS_PROF | |CoS Profile Index |2 | |Frame CoS Policy |fixed | |Frame CoS Map Name |DefaultRcosFcos | |Frame CoS Map ID |1 | |Fixed TC |4 | |Resolved CoS Policy |fixed | |Resolved CoS Map Name |DefaultFcosRcos | |Resolved CoS Map ID |1 | |Resolved CoS Fixed |6 | |Use Count |0 | +---------------------------+--------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-75

Procedure 12-18 Configuring CoS profiles for MPLS tunnels Display a summary of CoS profiles for MPLS tunnels. Step

Action

1

Display a summary of CoS profiles. (option mpls tunnel-cos-profile show cos-profile —end—

Example mpls tunnel-cos-profile show +-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +----

MPLS Tunnel-COS-Profile Table

----+

+--------------------------------+------+-----------+--------+-------+----------+----------+---------+------+ | CoS-Mapping Profile Name

|Index |FCoSPolicy|FCoSMapID|FixedTc|RCoSPolicy|RCoSMapID |RCoSFixed|UseCnt|

+--------------------------------+------+-----------+--------+-------+----------+----------+---------+------+ |DefaultTunlCoSProfile

|1

|mapped

|1

|0

|mapped

|1

|0

|8

|

|TE_TUN_COS_PROF

|2

|fixed

|1

|4

|fixed

|1

|6

|0

|

+--------------------------------+------+-----------+--------+-------+----------+----------+---------+------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-76 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-19 Configuring a dynamic ingress TE tunnel with FRR Configure a dynamic ingress tunnel with FRR to provide quick failover to a bypass LSP at an intermediate LSR when a local fault is detected. The headend router signals FRR preferences to Point-of-Local-Repair (PLR) LSRs. Note: FRR is configurable for MPLS-TE LSPs only. Step

Action

1

Create a tunnel Fast Reroute (FRR) profile: mpls tunnel-frr-profile create frr-profile [setup-priority < NUMBER: 0-7>] [hold-priority ] [hop-limit ] [bandwidth ] [bw-protection ] [nodeprotection ] [protection-method <detour |facility >] [ color-group-include-any ] [color-group-include-all ] [ color-groupexclude-any ]

2

Confirm the FRR profile: mpls tunnel-frr-profile show mpls tunnel-frr-profile show frr-profile

3

Configure the tunnel at the head-end LER with FRR settings: mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress dest-ip [setup-priority <0-7>] [hold-priority <0-7>] [bandwidth-profile <MPLS Tunnel Bandwidth Profile>] record-route on {protection-type } [frrsignaling ] [frr-profile <MPLS Tunnel FRR Profile>] [explicit-tunnel-path <MPLS Rsvp Path>] [cosprofile <MPLS Tunnel COS Profile>] {ttl-policy } [fixed-ttl ] [backup-tunnel <MPLS ingress primary tunnel>] [reversion-hold-time ] [tunnel-reversion ]

4

Configure facility-based detours at each LSR (the candidate PLRs). —end—

Example MPLS-TE FRR Signaling Profile Create mpls tunnel-frr-profile create frr-profile TETUN_FRR_PROFILE node-protection yes setup-priority 5 hold-priority 5 hop-limit 14 protection-method facility bw-protection yes bandwidth 5000 colour-group-include-any 13 colour-groupexclude-any 23

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-77

MPLS-TE FRR Signaling Profile Display mpls tunnel-frr-profile show +-------------MPLS Tunnel Fast-Reroute Profile Table-------+--------+ | Profile Name | Protection | Protection | UseCnt | | | BW | Node | Method | | +--------------------------------+-----+------+------------+--------+ |DefaultFrrProfile |NO |NO |facility |0 | |TETUN_FRR_PROFILE |YES |YES |facility |0 | +--------------------------------+-----+------+------------+--------+ mpls tunnel-frr-profile show frr-profile TETUN_FRR_PROFILE +-------------MPLS Tunnel Fast-Reroute Profile Details---------------+ |Profile Name |TETUN_FRR_PROFILE | |Profile index |2 | |Profile use count |0 | |Setup Priority |5 | |Hold Priority |5 | |Hop Limit |14 | |Bandwidth |5000 | |Bandwidth Protection |YES | |Node Protection |YES | |Protection Method |Facility | |Color Group Include Any |13 | |Color Group Include All |0 | |Color Group Exclude Any |23 | +--------------------------------------------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-78 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-20 Switching over to the backup GMPLS TP tunnel You can switch over a: •

GMPLS TP tunnel



static ingress bi-directional co-routed TP tunnel



static egress bi-directional co-routed TP tunnel

You can only switch over the active tunnel. Note: If tunnel reversion is on, the system switches from the backup to the primary tunnel once the fault on the primary tunnel is cleared and after waiting the amount of time specified as the reversion hold time (the default is 30 seconds). Do not switch over the backup GMPLS TP tunnel while the reversion hold timer is counting down. Step

Action

To switch over a GMPLS TP tunnel 1

Switch a GMPLS TP-Tunnel to the backup tunnel: gmpls tp-tunnel switchover rsvp-ingress-unidir

To switch over a static ingress bi-directional co-routed TP tunnel 2

Switch a static ingress bi-directional co-routed TP-Tunnel to the backup tunnel: gmpls tp-tunnel switchover static-ingress-corout <staticingress-corout>

To switch over a static egress bi-directional co-routed TP tunnel 3

Switch a static egress bi-directional co-routed TP-Tunnel to the recovery tunnel: gmpls tp-tunnel switchover static-egress-corout <staticegress-corout> —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-79

Procedure 12-21 Switching over to the backup TE tunnel You can switch over: •

an MPLS TE-Tunnel



a static ingress TE-Tunnel



a static bi-directional ingress associated TE-Tunnel

Step

Action

To switch over an TE tunnel 1

Switch an active MPLS TE-Tunnel to the backup MPLS TE-Tunnel: mpls tunnel switchover rsvp-ingress

To switch over a static ingress TE tunnel 2

Switch an active static ingress tunnel to the backup static ingress tunnel: mpls tunnel switchover rsvp-ingress

To switch over a static bi-directional ingress associated TE Tunnel 3

Switch a static bi-directional ingress associated TE-Tunnel to the backup bidirectional associated TE-Tunnel: mpls tunnel switchover bidir-ingress-assoc —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-80 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-22 Switching over to protection pseudowire You can manually switch over to the dynamic protection virtual circuit. Step

Action

1

Switch over to the dynamic protection virtual circuit: mpls l2-vpn protection switchover dynamic-vc —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-81

Procedure 12-23 Displaying MPLS TE-tunnel information Display tunnel information to confirm configuration. You can display a list of tunnels, including: •

type



index



name



destination IP address



label



administrative state



operational state

Optionally, you can display details about a specific tunnel. Also, you can filter to display a list of tunnels by: •

tunnel configuration (static or dynamic)



type (ingress or egress)



state (up or down)



specific static egress tunnel

Step

Action

To display all or a specific tunnel 1

Display all or a specific tunnel: mpls tunnel show matching-lsp <matching-lsp> {persist <static|dynamic>} {type } [state ] [source ] [destination ] [next-hop ] [out-ip-intf ] [in-label ] [out-

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-82 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration label ] [recovery <protected|unprotected>] [role <primary|backup|locallyrepaired| active-backup>]} where matching-lsp <matching-lsp>

is the tunnel to be displayed.

persist <static | dynamic>

filters by persistence.

type

filters by tunnel type.

state filters by operational state. source

filters by source IP address.

destination

filters by destination IP address.

next-hop

filters by next hop IP address.

out-ip-intf

filters by outgoing IP interface.

in-label

filters by inbound label

out-label

filters by outbound label.

recovery <protected | unprotected>

filters by LSP recovery type.

filters by LSP protection role. role <primary | backup | locallyrepaired | activebackup> To display static ingress TE-tunnels 2

Display static ingress TE-tunnels: mpls tunnel show static-ingress <static-ingress>

To display dynamic ingress TE-tunnels 3

Display dynamic ingress TE-tunnels: mpls tunnel show rsvp-ingress

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-83 To display static egress TE-tunnels 4

Display static egress TE-tunnels: mpls tunnel show static-egress <static-egress> src-ip

To display static transit TE-tunnels 5

Display static transit TE-tunnels: mpls tunnel show static-transit <static-transit>

To display FRR bypass TE-LSPs 6

Display FRR bypass TE-LSPs: mpls tunnel show frr-bypass-lsp

To display bi-directional ingress associated tunnels 7

Display all bi-directional ingress associated TE-Tunnel(s) or only the attribute matched bi-directional associated TE tunnels: mpls tunnel show matching-assoc <matching-assoc> [state ] [destination ] [next-hop ] [out-ip-intf ] [out-label ] [in-label ] [recovery <protected|unprotected>] [role <primary|backup|locally-repaired|active-backup>]} where matching-assoc <matchingassoc>

is the tunnel to be displayed.

state filters by operational state. destination

filters by destination IP address.

next-hop

filters by next hop IP address.

out-ip-intf

filters by outgoing IP interface.

out-label

filters by out-bound label.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-84 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration where in-label

filters by in-bound label.

recovery <protected | unprotected>

filters by recovery type.

filters by protection role. role <primary | backup | locallyrepaired | activebackup> To display bi-directional ingress associated tunnels 8

Display all bi-directional ingress associated TE-Tunnels: mpls tunnel show bidir-ingress-assoc

To display static tunnel label range information 9

Display static tunnel label range information: mpls static-tunnel-label-range show

To display static label range information for MPLS pseudowires 10

Display static label range information for MPLS pseudowires: mpls static-vc-label-range show

To display the tunnel FRR profile for a specified FRR profile 11

Display the tunnel FRR profile for a specified FRR profile: mpls tunnel-frr-profile show frr-profile

To display the tunnel CoS profile 12

Display the selected tunnel CoS profile: mpls tunnel-cos-profile show cos-profile —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-85

Procedure 12-24 Displaying GMPLS TP tunnel information Display tunnel information to confirm configuration. You can display: •

GMPLS TP tunnels



tunnels filtered by attribute



static ingress TP co-routed tunnels



static ingress TP uni-directional tunnels



dynamic ingress TP uni-directional tunnels



static egress TP co-routed tunnels



static egress TP uni-directional tunnels



static transit TP co-routed tunnels



static transit TP uni-directional tunnels



bi-directional associated TP tunnels



bi-directional ingress TP tunnels

Step

Action

To display GMPLS TP tunnels 1

Display GMPLS TP tunnels: gmpls tp-tunnel show

To display tunnels filtered by attribute 2

Display tunnels filtered by attribute: gmpls tp-tunnel show matching-lsp <matching-lsp> {persist <static|dynamic>} {type } [pathtype ] [state ] [source ] [destination ] [nexthop ] [prev-hop ] [fwd-out-ipintf <signal-interface-object>] [rev-out-ip-intf ] [fwd-out-ip-intf ] [fwd-in-label ] [fwdout-label ] [rev-in-label
39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-86 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 16-1044479>] [rev-out-label ] [recovery <protected|unprotected>] [role <primary|backup|locally-repaired|active-backup>] where matching-lsp <matching-lsp>

is the tunnel to be displayed.

persist <static | dynamic

filters by persistence.

type ]

filters by tunnel type.

path-type ]

filters by tunnel path type.

state filters by operational state. source

filters by source IP address.

destination

filters by destination IP address.

next-hop

filters by next hop IP address.

prev-hop-

filters by previous hop IP address.

fwd-out-ip-intf ]

filters by forward outgoing IP interface.

rev-out-ip-intf

filters by reverse outgoing IP interface.

fwd-in-label

filters by forward in-bound label.

fwd-out-label

filters by forward out-bound label.

rev-in-label ]

filters by reverse in-bound label.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-87 where rev-out-label

filters by reverse out-bound label.

recovery <protected | unprotected>

filters by failure recovery type.

filters by protection role. role <primary | backup | locallyrepaired | activebackup> To display static ingress TP co-routed tunnels 3

Display static ingress TP co-routed tunnels: gmpls tp-tunnel show static-ingress-corout <staticingress-corout>

To display static ingress TP uni-directional tunnels 4

Display static ingress TP uni-directional tunnels: gmpls tp-tunnel show static-ingress-unidir <staticingress-unidir>

To display dynamic ingress TP uni-directional tunnels 5

Display show dynamic ingress TP uni-directional tunnels: gmpls tp-tunnel show rsvp-ingress-unidir

To display static egress TP co-routed tunnels 6

Display static egress TP co-routed tunnels: gmpls tp-tunnel show static-egress-corout <static-egresscorout>

To display static egress TP uni-directional tunnels 7

Display static egress TP uni-directional tunnels: gmpls tp-tunnel show static-egress-unidir <static-egressunidir>

To display static transit TP co-routed tunnels 8

Display static transit TP co-routed tunnels: gmpls tp-tunnel show static-transit-corout <statictransit-corout>

To display static transit TP uni-directional tunnels 9

Display static transit TP uni-directional tunnels: gmpls tp-tunnel show static-transit-unidir <statictransit-unidir>

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-88 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration To display bi-directional associated TP tunnels 10

Display bi-directional associated TP tunnels: gmpls tp-tunnel show matching-assoc <matching-assoc> [state ] [destination ] [next-hop ] [out-ip-intf ] [out-label ] [in-label ] [recovery <protected | unprotected>] [role <primary | backup | locally-repaired | activebackup>]

To display bi-directional ingress TP tunnels 11

Display bi-directional ingress TP tunnels: gmpls tp-tunnel show static-ingress-assoc <staticingress-assoc> —end—

Example GMPLS Static Uni-dir All TP-Tunnel Filtered Display gmpls tp-tunnel show matching-lsp persist static path-type unidirectional Flags : P A L E

-> -> -> ->

Primary Active Lone Member Tunnel uses

B -> Backup S -> Standby R -> Recovery Group Member Explicit Path

+-------+---------+--------+----GMPLS INGRESS TP-TUNNEL TABLE-+---------------+---------+--------+-----+-----+-------+ |Type |Direction|Tunnel | Tunnel Name |Destination IP |Forward |Reverse |Admin|Oper | Flags | | | |Index | | |Out Label|In Label|State|State| | +-------+---------+--------+----------------------------------+---------------+---------+--------+-----+-----+-+-+-+-+ |Static |Unidir |4 |st-ing-u-A |1.1.1.1 |1003 ||ENA |ENA |P|L|A| | |Static |Unidir |5 |st-ing-u-B |2.2.2.2 |1051 ||ENA |ENA |P|L|A| | +-------+---------+--------+----------------------------------+---------------+---------+--------+-----+-----+-+-+-+-+ +-------+---------+--------+-GMPLS STATIC EGRESS TP-TUNNEL TABLE--------------+--------+---------+-----+-----+-+-+-+ |Type |Direction|Tunnel | Tunnel Name |Source IP |F orward |Reverse |Admin|Oper |Flags| | | |Index | | |In Label|Out Label|State|State| | +-------+---------+--------+----------------------------------+---------------+--------+---------+-----+-----+-+-+-+ |Static |Unidir |1 |st-egr-u-A |1.1.1.1 |1002 ||ENA |ENA |-|-|-| |Static |Unidir |2 |st-egr-u-B |2.2.2.2 |1050 ||ENA |ENA |-|-|-| +-------+---------+--------+----------------------------------+---------------+--------+---------+-----+-----+-+-+-+ No Transit TP-Tunnel entries found

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-89

Procedure 12-25 Configuring LDP LDP is required for dynamic MPLS deployments for signaling virtual circuits. Sessions are established using UDP port 646 to a peer IP address that can be directly connected or several hops away. By default, LDP is globally disabled. For dynamic deployments, it must be globally enabled. LDP supports authentication to prevent unwanted connections. You can •

enable LDP globally



modify global LDP attributes



display global status



add an IP entry and password



display IP entries with an encoded password

Step

Action

1

Enable LDP globally: ldp enable

2

Modify global LDP attributes (optional): ldp set {[hello-hold-time ], [keepalive-hold-time ]}

3

Display global status (optional). ldp show

4

Add an IP entry and password (optional): ldp authentication set {peer } {authentication-type <md5>} {password <PasswordString[31]>} {secret <SecretString[62]>}

5

Display IP entries with an encoded password (optional): ldp authentication show

6

Display LDP configuration: ldp show [adjacency] [sessions] [timers] —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-90 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Example The following example shows a global configuration with IP entry and password. ldp enable ldp show +------------------- LDP GLOBAL CONFIG ---------------+ | Parameter | Value | +---------------------------+-------------------------+ | LDP Admin State | Enabled | | LDP Oper State | Enabled | +---------------------------+-------------------------+ ldp authentication set peer 1.2.3.4 password myPassword ldp authentication show +------------ LDP Authentication Configuration Summary -------------------+ | Router Id | Encoded Password | +----------------+--------------------------------------------------------+ |1.2.3.4 |ffe5109e033a3716e94f | +----------------+--------------------------------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-91

Procedure 12-26 Configuring dynamic virtual circuits You can •

create a dynamic virtual circuit



create a dynamic protection virtual circuit

Step

Action

To create a dynamic virtual circuit 1

Create a dynamic virtual circuit: mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc {pw-id } {peer } {te-tunnel <MPLS ingress primary tunnel>} {tp-tunnel-ingr-corout <MPLS ingress primary tp corout tunnel>} {tp-tunnel-egrscorout-static <MPLS static egress primary tp-tunnel>} {tp-tunnel-egrs-corout-dynamic <String>} {te-tunnelassoc <MPLS assoc te-tunnel>} {tp-tunnel-assoc <MPLS assoc tp-tunnel>} [pw-type <eth-raw|eth-tagged|tdm>] [mtu <1500-9128>] [status-tlv ] [service-delimitervid ] [service-delimiter-tpid <8100|9100|88A8>] [pw-mode <mesh | spoke>] [pw-cosprofile <MPLS Pseudowire COS Profile>] [pw-vccv-profile <MPLS Pseudowire VCCV Profile>] where dynamic-vc

is the name of the dynamic virtual circuit.

pw-id peer

is the destination IP address.

te-tunnel <MPLS is the ingress transport primary TE tunnel. ingress primary tunnel> is the ingress transport co-routed primary TP tunnel. tp-tunnel-ingrcorout <MPLS ingress primary tp corout tunnel> tp-tunnel-egrscorout-static <MPLS static egress primary tp-tunnel>

is the static egress transport co-routed primary TP tunnel.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-92 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration where tp-tunnel-egrscorout-dynamic <String>

is the name of the dynamic egress transport co-routed primary TP tunnel.

te-tunnel-assoc is the ingress transport associated primary TE tunnel. <MPLS assoc tetunnel> tp-tunnel-assoc is the ingress transport associated primary TP tunnel. <MPLS assoc tptunnel> pw-type <ethraw|eth-tagged| tdm>

is the pseudowire type.

mtu

is the MTU in bytes.

status-tlv

determines whether status TLV is on or off.

service-delimiter- is the service delimiter VID. vid service-delimiter- is the service delimiter VLAN TPID. tpid <8100|9100| 88A8> [pw-mode <mesh is the pseudowire mode. | spoke>] is the pseudowire COS profile name. pw-cos-profile <MPLS Pseudowire CoS Profile> [pw-vccv-profile <MPLS Pseudowire VCCV Profile>] 2

is the pseudowire VCCV profile name.

Enable the virtual circuit: mpls l2-vpn enable vc where vc

is the virtual circuit to enable.

To create a dynamic protection virtual circuit 3

Create a dynamic protection virtual circuit: mpls l2-vpn protection create dynamic-vc {secondary-pw-id } {primary-vcname } {peer } {te-tunnel <MPLS ingress primary tunnel>|tp-

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-93 tunnel-ingr-corout <MPLS ingress primary tp corout tunnel>|tp-tunnel-egrs-corout-static <MPLS static egress primary tp-tunne>|tp-tunnel-egrs-corout-dynamic <String>} {te-tunnel-assoc <MPLS assoc te-tunnel>|tptunnel-assoc <MPLS assoc tp-tunnel>} —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-94 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-27 Configuring static virtual circuits Configure static virtual circuits. Note: The status interval value should consider how many PWs are expected to be configured. For a large number of PWs, the refresh interval must be set to a higher value. This reduces the frequency of a large number of PW status message exchanges. Step

Action

1

Create a static virtual circuit: mpls l2-vpn create static-vc <static-vc> {secondary-pw-id peer } {te-tunnel | tp-tunnel-ingrcorout | tptunnel-egrs-corout-static <Static-Egress-PrimaryCorouted-TP-Tunnel> | tp-tunnel-egrs-corout-dynamic | te-tunnel-assoc | tp-tunnel-assoc } {peer } in-label out-label [tunnel ] [pw-type <eth-raw | eth-tagged | tdm>] [tdmprofile <xml-tdm-profile>][pw-cword ][status-tlv ] [refresh-status-interval <0..65535>] [pw-mode <mesh | spoke>] [mtu ] [servicedelimiter-vid ] [service-delimiter-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>] [pw-cos-profile <xml-mpls-pw-cosprofile>] [pw-vccv-profile <MPLS Pseudowire VCCV Profile>] where static-vc <static-vc>

Static virtual circuit name

{pw-id }

Set VPN ID

{peer }

Set Destination IP address

{te-tunnel Tunnel. tp-tunnel-ingr-corout

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Selects ingress transport co-routed primary TP-Tunnel.

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-95 where tp-tunnel-egrs-corout-static Selects static egress transport co-routed <Static-Egress-Primaryprimary TP-Tunnel. Corouted-TP-Tunnel> tp-tunnel-egrs-coroutselects dynamic egress transport codynamic routed primary TP-Tunnel name. te-tunnel-assoc

selects ingress transport associated primary TE-Tunnel.

tp-tunnel-assoc

selects ingress transport associated primary TP-Tunnel.

{ingress-label }

set MPLS decap label.

{egress-label }

set MPLS encap label.

{tunnel <MPLS ingress primary tunnel>}

transport tunnel

[pw-type <eth-raw | ethtagged| tdm>]

pseudowire type

[tdm-profile <xml-tdmprofile>]

Sets TDM FSD-0038-001 SAOS 6.x S/W MPLS Control Plane CLI FS - Ciena Confidential and Proprietary 71 profile to be used to setup a static TDM pseudowire.

status-tlv

determines if status TLV is on or off.

status-interval <0..65535>

refreshes the current status of the pseudowire to ensure that each end has the other’s correct pseudowire status. 0 indicates no status refresh. The default is 600 seconds.

[pw-mode <mesh | spoke>] pseudowire mode [mtu ]

sets MTU (bytes).

[service-delimiter-vid ]

service delimiter VID.

[service-delimiter-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>]

service delimiter VLAN TPID.

[pw-cos-profile <MPLS Pseudowire CoS Profile>

is the pseudowire VCCV profile name.

[pw-vccv-profile <MPLS is the pseudowire VCCV profile name. Pseudowire VCCV Profile>]

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-96 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 2

Enable the virtual circuit: mpls l2-vpn enable [vc ] where vc

3

is the virtual circuit to enable.

Create a static protection virtual circuit: mpls l2-vpn protection create static-vc <static-vc> {secondary pw-id } {primary-vc-name } {peer } {in-label } {out-label } {te-tunnel <MPLS ingress primary tunnel>|tptunnel-ingr-corout <MPLS ingress primary tp corout tunnel>|tp-tunnel-egrs-corout-static <MPLS static egress primary tp-tunnel>|tp-tunnel-egrs-corout-dynamic <String>|te-tunnel-assoc <MPLS assoc te-tunnel>|tptunnel-assoc <MPLS assoc tp-tunnel>}[refresh-statusinterval ] where static-vc <static-vc>

static virtual circuit name.

{secondarypw-id }

sets the VPN ID.

{peer }

sets the Destination IP address.

{in-label }

sets MPLS decapsulationlabel.

{out-label ]

sets MPLS encapsulation label.

{te-tunnel <MPLS ingress primary tunnel>}

selects the ingress transport primary TETunnel.

{tp-tunnel-ingr-corout } {tp-tunnel-egrs-corout-static selects the static egress transport co<MPLS static egress routed primary TP-Tunnel. primary tp-tunnel>} {tp-tunnel-egrs-coroutdynamic <String>}

the dynamic egress transport co-routed TP-Tunnel name.

{te-tunnel-assoc <MPLS assoc te-tunnel>}

selects the ingress transport associated primary TE-Tunnel.

tp-tunnel-assoc <MPLS assoc tp-tunnel>}

selects the ingress transport associated primary TP-Tunnel.

refresh-status-interval

sets the refresh timer interval.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-97 —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-98 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-28 Displaying virtual circuits You can display: •

all virtual circuits



virtual circuits by attribute



detailed output of a selected virtual circuit



pseudowires by customer name



virtual circuit next hops



virtual circuit information based on tunnel group

Step

Action

To display all virtual circuits 1

Display all Ethernet virtual circuits: mpls l2-vpn show

To display virtual circuits by attribute 2

Display Ethernet virtual circuits by attribute: mpls l2-vpn show matching-vc <matching-vc> {persist <static|dynamic>} [state ] {pw-id } [source ] [destination ] [nexthop ] [in-label ] [outlabel ] [recovery <protected|unprotected>] [role <primary|backup|standalone>] [te-tunnel <MPLS ingress primary tunnel>] [tp-tunnel-ingr-corout <MPLS ingress primary tp corout tunnel>] [tp-tunnel-egrs-corout-static <MPLS static egress primary tp-tunnel>] [tp-tunnel-egrscorout-dynamic <String>] [te-tunnel-assoc <MPLS assoc tetunnel>] [tp-tunnel-assoc <MPLS assoc tp-tunnel>] [pwtype <eth-raw | eth-tagged | tdm>] [pw-mode <mesh| spoke>] [service-delimiter-vid ] [servicedelimiter-tpid <8100|9100|88A8>] [status-tlv ] [pw-cos-profile <MPLS Pseudowire COS Profile>] [tdmprofile ] where matching-vc <matching-vc>

displays all matching VCs.

persist <static | dynamic>

filters by persistence.

state filters by operational state. 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-99 where pw-id

filters by VPN identifier.

source

filters by source IP address of the virtual circuit.

destination

filters by destination IP address of the virtual circuit.

next-hop

filters by next hop IP address of the virtual circuit.

in-label

filters by inbound label value of the virtual circuit.

out-label

filters by outbound label value of the virtual circuit.

recovery <protected | unprotected>

filters by recovery type of the virtual circuit.

role <primary | backup | standalone>]

filters by current role of the virtual circuit.

te-tunnel <MPLS displays ingress transport primary TE-Tunnels. ingress primary tunnel> displays ingress transport co-routed primary TP-Tunnels. tp-tunnel-ingrcorout <MPLS ingress primary tp corout tunnel> tp-tunnel-egrscorout-static <MPLS static egress primary tp-tunnel>

displays static egress transport corouted primary TPTunnels.

tp-tunnel-egrscorout-dynamic <String>]

displays dynamic egress transport co-routed primary TPTunnels.

[te-tunnel-assoc displays ingress transport associated primary TE-Tunnels. <MPLS assoc tetunne> tp-tunnel-assoc displays ingress transport associated primary TP-Tunnels. <MPLS assoc tptunnel> pw-type <eth-raw filters by pseudowire type. | eth-tagged | tdm>

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-100 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration where pw-mode <mesh| filters by pseudowire mode. spoke> service-delimiter- filters by service delimiter VLAN ID. vid service-delimiter- filters by service delimiter VLAN TPID. tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8> status-tlv

filters by status TLV settings.

filters by pseudowire COS profile. pw-cos-profile <MPLS Pseudowire COS Profile> tdm-profile To display detailed output of a selected virtual circuit 3

Display detailed output of a selected virtual circuit: mpls l2-vpn show vc

To display pseudowires by customer name 4

Display pseudowires by customer name: mpls l2-vpn show customer <customer>

To display virtual circuit next hops 5

Display virtual circuit next hops: mpls l2-vpn show vc-nexthops

To display virtual circuit information based on tunnel group 6

Display virtual circuit information based on tunnel group: mpls l2-vpn show vc-vifs —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-101

Procedure 12-29 Configuring virtual circuit connectivity verification profiles You can select the CC type value of 3 (TTL-exhaust) and/or 4 (GAL/GACH or out-of-band-OAM channel). Both, one or none can be selected. If a VCCV profile is not associated with a PW, a default VCCV profile with CCtype 3 and CC-type 4 enabled, is associated. Validity checks are performed at the time of a VCCV profile association with a static PW. The association is rejected if •

No CC-type is enabled



More than one CC-type is enabled



Conflicting CC-type is enabled. For example, PW status signaling is enabled, but the VCCV profile has CC-type 3 enabled.

Step

Action

To create a VCCV profile 1

Create a VCCV profile: mpls l2-vpn pw-vccv-profile create vccv-profile {logical-id } [cc-ttl-exp ] [ccciena-oob ] where vccv-profile

is the Pseudowire VCCV profile name.

(logical-id

is the profile index

[cc-ttl-exp ]

sets the TTL-expiry VCCV control channel (CC Type-3) operation.

[cc-ciena-oob ]

sets the Ciena proprietary out-of-band VCCV control channel (CC Type 4 operation. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-102 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-30 Displaying a VCCV profile You can display a VCCV profile. Step

Action

1

Display a VCCV profile: mpls l2-vpn pw-vccv-profile show —end—

Example The following example shows the output for the mpls l2-vpn pw-vccv-profile show command: mpls l2-vpn pw-vccv-profile show

+----------------------------------------------------------------+ +---L2-VPN Pseudowire-VCCV-Profile Table ----+ +--------------------------------+------+-------+---------+------+ | VCCV Profile Name |Index |CC |CC | USE | | | |TTL Exp|CIENA OOB| COUNT| +--------------------------------+------+-------+---------+------+ |DefaultPwVccvProfile |1 |Yes |Yes |0 | |Profile-CC-3 |2 |Yes |No |0 | |Profile-CC-4 |3 |No |Yes |1 | |Profile-CC-3-4 |4 |Yes |Yes |0 | |Profile-CC-none |5 |No |No |0 | +--------------------------------+------+-------+---------+------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-103

Procedure 12-31 Deleting a VCCV profile You can delete a VCCV profile. Step

Action

1

Display a VCCV profile: mpls l2-vpn pw-vccv-profile delete where vccv-profile

is the Pseudowire VCCV profile name you wish to delete. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-104 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-32 Allocating resources for an MPLS management virtual switch (3916, 3930 and 3931 platforms) On the 3916, 3930 and 3931 platforms, support for an MPLS management virtual switch requires adjustment of the default resource allocation: •

If an attempt is made to use the “interface remote set vs ” command before these resources have been allocated on the 3916/30/31 platforms, an error message is displayed and the command is refused.



If an attempt is made to remove or reduce the resources allocated to the transport-oam feature set while the remote interface is associated with a virtual switch, the command is refused.

Step

Action

1

Allocate resources to the transport-oam feature set: resource-manager pool set feature transport-oam resource classifier count 256 resource-manager pool set feature transport-oam resource counter count 256

2

Deallocate resources from another feature (do one of the following two options): •

Reduce resources from the traffic-profiling feature:

resource-manager pool set feature traffic-profiling resource classifier count 768 resource-manager pool set feature traffic-profiling resource counter count 768 •

Eliminate resources from either the broadcast-containment or vcstatistics feature:

resource-manager pool set feature resource classifier count 0 resource-manager pool set feature resource counter count 0 where feature 3

either “broadcast-containment” or “vc-statistics

Save the configuration and reboot: config save reboot now —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-105

Procedure 12-33 Creating an MPLS management virtual switch Create an MPLS management virtual switch by creating an MPLS virtual switch and associating it with the remote interface. Note 1: In order to carry remote interface traffic over an MPLS tunnel, the remote-interface is associated with a virtual switch. Management access to the switch can then be gained from any of the members of this virtual switch, including attachment circuit members. Thus, if ACs exist on the virtual switch that is associated with the Remote Interface, customers could obtain management access to the node. In order to prevent this, create an MPLS virtual switch specifically for use for in-band management, and DO NOT attach customer ACs to that virtual switch. Note 2: For 3916, 3930 and 3931 platforms ensure that resource allocations have been adjusted. See “Allocating resources for an MPLS management virtual switch (3916, 3930 and 3931 platforms)” on page 12-104. Note 3: Associating an MPLS virtual switch with the remote interface does not change the basic properties of that virtual switch. Support for features such as Traffic Profiling, L2-CFT, COS Mapping is unchanged. Step

Action

1

Create the virtual switch. virtual-switch ethernet create vs mode vpls where vs

2

is the name of the MPLS virtual switch

Attach the virtual switch to the MPLS virtual circuit: virtual-switch ethernet attach vs mpls_vc where

3

vs

is the name of the MPLS virtual switch

vc

is the name of the MPLS virtual circuit

Optionally, on 39XX/51XX platforms, add the virtual switch to port and vlan: virtual-switch ethernet add vs port vlan where vs

is the name of the MPLS virtual switch

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-106 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 4

Associate the virtual switch with the remote interface: interface remote set vs where vs

is the name of the MPLS virtual switch —end—

If the CLI session in use is connected to the remote interface, the user loses access by means of that current session as the remote interface is reconfigured. The user must initiate a new session over the newly-configured virtual switch. At the node where VLAN-based management transitions to inband MPLSbased management, the VLAN-based management traffic must be added to the MPLS virtual switch as an EVPL attachment circuit, where the VLAN used is the management VLAN.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-107

Procedure 12-34 Displaying remote interface configuration Display the remote interface configuration to identify the Management Domain used for connectivity, which is either a VLAN or a virtual switch. Step

Action

1

Display information about the remote interface: interface remote show —end—

Example In the example output below, the remote interface connectivity is provided by an MPLS management virtual switch named “MyMngmt1” +----------------------------------- INTERFACE STATE ------------------------------+ | Parameter | Value | Source | State | +------------------------+----------------------------------+----------+-----------+ | Name | remote | | | | Index | 15 | | | | Admin State | Enabled | | | | Oper State | Enabled | | | | MAC Address | 00:02:5a:01:c5:4f | | | | Management Domain | VS MyMngmt1 | | | | Priority | 7 | | | | MTU | 1500 | | | +------------------------+----------------------------------+----------+-----------+ | IPv4 Oper addr/mask | 192.168.50.1/24 | Manual | PREFERRED | | IPv4 Broadcast Address | 192.168.50.255 | Manual | PREFERRED | +------------------------+----------------------------------+----------+-----------+ | IPv6 Oper addr/mask | fe80::202:5aff:fe01:c54f/64 | Internal | PREFERRED | +------------------------+----------------------------------+----------+-----------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-108 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-35 Changing the management virtual switch You can create several MPLS or PBB-TE native mode virtual switches, although only one virtual switch can be associated with the remote interface at any point in time. PBB-TE supports creation of a management virtual circuit to provide remote management over PBB-TE tunnels. Remote interface management access over PBB-TE is mutually exclusive with remote interface management access over MPLS. You cannot configure a PBB-TE management virtual circuit if an MPLS virtual switch is currently set on the remote interface, and vice-versa. You can: •

change the remote management interface to PBB-TE from an MPLS virtual switch



change the remote management interface to PBB-TE from a PBB-TE virtual switch



replace the management virtual switch with a management VLAN



replace the management VLAN with a management virtual switch

Step

Action

To change the remote management interface to PBB-TE from an MPLS virtual switch 1

Move the remote management interface to a VLAN: interface remote set vlan

2

Create the management PBB-TE virtual circuit as described in “Configuring PBB-TE” on page 11-16.

To change the remote management interface to PBB-TE from a PBB-TE virtual switch 3

Delete the PBB-TE management virtual circuit used for remote management: virtual-circuit pbt delete static-vc where vc

is the name of the PBB-TE virtual circuit

4

Create a new MPLS or PBB-TE virtual switch.

5

Associate the new MPLS or PBB-TE virtual switch with the remote interface: interface remote set vs Remote interface connectivity is moved to the new virtual switch, and it becomes the management virtual switch.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-109 To replace the management virtual switch with a management VLAN 6

Replace the management virtual switch with a management VLAN: interface remote set vlan The old management virtual switch continues to exist and its membership is not changed, but it no longer provides connectivity to the remote interface.

To replace the management VLAN with a management virtual switch 7

Replace the management virtual switch with a management VLAN: interface remote set vs The old management virtual switch continues to exist and its membership is not changed, but it no longer provides connectivity to the remote interface. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-110 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-36 Running ping for RSVP-TE tunnels Run ping to test RSVP-TE tunnels. Step

Action

1

Ping an RSVP-TE tunnel: mpls encap-tunnel ping rsvp-lsp [count ] [packet-size ] [timeout ] [ttl ] —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for a ping operation. > mpls encap-tunnel ping rsvp-lsp DynamicLSPA count 100 packet-size 1464 !!!!!!!!! --------------- Statistics --------------100 packets transmitted, 9 packets received round-trip (ms) min/avg/max = 10/20/89

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-111

Procedure 12-37 Running traceroute for RSVP-TE tunnels Run traceroute to test RSVP-TE tunnels. Step

Action

1

Run a traceroute: mpls encap-tunnel traceroute rsvp-lsp <MplsDynamicEncapTunnel> [timeout ] [ttl ] —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for a traceroute operation. > mpls encap-tunnel encap traceroute rsvp-lsp DynamicLSPA 0 10.10.50.2 MRU 1500 Label: 28871 ! 1 10.10.20.20 5 ms

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-112 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-38 Running ping for MPLS tunnels Run ping to test MPLS tunnels. You can ping: •

ingress MPLS-TE unidirectional tunnels



ingress MPLS-TP bi-directional tunnels



ingress MPLS-TP unidirectional tunnels



egress MPLS-TP bi-directional tunnels



MPLS-TE bi-directional associated tunnels



MPLS-TP bi-directional associated tunnels

Table 12-18 lists attributes for mpls ping commands. Table 12-18 Attributes for mpls ping commands Attribute

Description

count ]

is the number of packets to send. The default value is 5.

packet-size ]

is the packet size. Default values are: • for a dynamic-tunnel: 96 • for a static-tunnel: 118

timeout ttl

is the time-to-live. The default value is 255.

reply-mode is the reply mode. The default value is LSP. encap

Step

Action

To ping an ingress MPLS-TE tunnel 1

Ping an ingress MPLS-TE tunnel: mpls ping tunnel [count ] [packet-size ] [timeout ] [ttl ]

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-113 To ping an ingress MPLS-TP bi-directional tunnel 2

Ping an ingress MPLS-TP bi-directional tunnel: mpls ping tp-tunnel-ingress-corout <tp-tunnel-ingresscorout> [count ] [packet-size ] [timeout ] [ttl ] [reply-mode ] [encap ]

To ping an ingress MPLS-TP unidirectional tunnel 3

Ping an ingress MPLS-TP unidirectional tunnel: mpls ping tp-tunnel-ingress-unidir <tp-tunnel-ingressunidir> [count ] [packet-size ] [timeout ] [ttl ]

To ping an egress MPLS-TP bi-directional tunnel 4

Ping an egress MPLS-TP bi-directional tunnel: mpls ping tp-tunnel-egress-corout <tp-tunnel-egresscorout> [count ] [packet-size ] [timeout ] [ttl ] [reply-mode ] [encap ]

To ping an MPLS-TE bi-directional associated tunnel 5

Ping an MPLS-TE bi-directional associated tunnel: mpls ping assoc-lsp [count ] [packet-size ] [timeout ] [ttl ] [reply-mode ]

To ping an MPLS-TP bi-directional associated tunnel 6

Ping an MPLS-TP bi-directional associated tunnel: mpls ping assoc-tp-lsp [count ] [packet-size ] [timeout ] [ttl ] [reply-mode ] Note: FEC validation is supported for ping and traceroute over static mpls-tp tunnels. FEC parameters, src-tunnel-id, lsp-id and dest-tunnel-d can be configured when a static mpls-tp tunnelis created. See “Configuring static TE tunnels” on page 12-67. With the exception of dest-tunnel-id, these parameters are validated by the receiving node of a ping packet. Dest-tunnelid is not validated in order that ping can be backward compatible with the previous release. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-114 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-39 Running ping for virtual circuits Run ping to test virtual circuits. Step

Action

1

Ping an MPLS virtual circuit: mpls ping vc [count ] [packet-size ] [timeout ] [fec128-len <14|16>] [reply-mode ] where vc

is the MPLS pseudowire name.

count

is the number of packets to send. The default value is 5.

packet-size Is the packet size in bytes. The default value is 114. timeout is the timeout value in milliseconds. The default value is fec-128-len <14| 16>

is the number of bytes to use for FEC 128 length. The default value is 14.

reply-mode • For TE tunnels, no-op. • For TP tunnels, the default value is LSP.

Note: The reply-mode setting and vc cc-type setting must agree for vc ping to proceed. The vc cc-type is specified in the pw-vccv-profile and associated to a vc when the vc is created. If the negotiated cc-type is ccttl-exp, the reply-mode must be set to ipv4; if the reply-mode is cc-cienaoob, the reply mode must be lsp. Also, cc-type must also be the same between the 2 vc peers. If they are not configured with the same cc-type, vc ping will not proceed.

—end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-115

Procedure 12-40 Running a traceroute Run traceroute to test MPLS tunnels. You can run a traceroute on: •

ingress MPLS-TE tunnels



ingress MPLS-TP bidirectional tunnels



ingress MPLS-TP unidirectional tunnels



egress MPLS-TP bidirectional tunnels



MPLS-TE bi-directional associated tunnels



MPLS-TP bi-directional associated tunnels

Table 12-19 lists attributes for mpls traceroute commands. Table 12-19 Attributes for mpls traceroute commands Attribute

Description

Default value

timeout ]

is the timeout value.

1000

ttl

is the time to live.

Valid values are in the range of 500 to 10000 milliseconds. 30

Valid values are numbers in the range of 1 to 30. encap

Step

is the encapsulation type.

IP/UDP

Action

To run a traceroute on an ingress MPLS-TE tunnel 1

Run a traceroute on an ingress MPLS-TE tunnel: mpls traceroute tunnel [timeout ] [ttl ]

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-116 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration To run a traceroute on an ingress MPLS-TP bidirectional tunnel 2

Run a traceroute on an ingress MPLS-TP bidirectional tunnel: mpls traceroute tp-tunnel-ingress-corout <tp-tunnelingress-corout> [timeout ] [ttl ] encap ]

To run a traceroute on an ingress MPLS-TP unidirectional tunnel 3

Run a traceroute on an ingress MPLS-TP unidirectional tunnel: mpls traceroute tp-tunnel-ingress-unidir <tp-tunnelingress-unidir> [timeout ] [ttl ]

To run a traceroute on an egress MPLS-TP bidirectional tunnel 4

Run a traceroute on an egress MPLS-TP bidirectional tunnel: mpls traceroute tp-tunnel-egress-corout <tp-tunnelegress-corout> [timeout ] [ttl ] [encap ]

To run a traceroute on an MPLS-TE bi-directional associated tunnel 5

Run a traceroute on an MPLS-TE bi-directional associated tunnel: mpls traceroute assoc-lsp [timeout ] [ttl ]

To run a traceroute on an MPLS-TP bi-directional associated tunnel 6

Run a traceroute on an MPLS-TP bi-directional associated tunnel: mpls traceroute assoc-tp-lsp [timeout ] [ttl ] —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-117

Procedure 12-41 Configuring a 39XX/51XX LSR Configure a 39XX/51XX LSR to establish a dynamic base MPLS configuration on a 39XX/51XX switch. The base configuration allows the switch to function as an LSR and builds the foundation for LER functionality. This procedure sets up the L3 interfaces, IGP, and signaling protocols used by MPLS. Figure 12-14 shows the sample physical topology. Figure 12-14 Sample physical topology

if1 01 :10 .10 1.1 2.0

P1/1

P2/1

P9

4.0 2.2 .10 :10 02 if1

v101

R2 5410 lb: 2.2.2.2 mgt: 10.26.54.90

P2.1 P2.2

R5 3960 lb: 5.5.5.5 mgt: 10.26.62.119

R4 5150 lb: 4.4.4.4 mgt: 10.26.62.13

P9

R3 3960 lb: 3.3.3.3 mgt: 10.26.62.120

P3.1

v103

P3.2

6.0 1.4 .20 :10 02 if2

4.0 1.1 .10 :10 04 if1

v104

if1 03 :10 .10 3.3 4.0

R1 5410 lb: 1.1.1.1 mgt: 10.26.54.80

P2/1

v201

v102

if2 01 :10 .20 1.4 5.0

P1/1

v202

P9

P10

Step

Action

1

Create a VLAN for each L3 interface / physical port pair.

R6 3960 lb: 6.6.6.6 mgt: 10.26.62.118

vlan create vlan 2

Add the L3 Interface VLAN to the associated physical port. vlan add vlan port <port_#>

3

If the switch is part of a ring topology, remove VLAN 1,127 from each of the physical ports. vlan remove vlan 1,127 port <port_#>

4

Disable RSTP. rstp disable

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-118 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 5

Create the L3 and loopback interfaces. interface create loopback ip interface create ip-interface ip subnet <subnet> vlan ip-forwarding

6

Create an IGP instance. isis instance create isis-instance level L1 area <area_#>

7

Attach each L3 interface to the IGP instance. isis interface attach ip-interface isis-instance level L1

8

Enable RSVP globally and on each of the interfaces previously created. rsvp-te enable rsvp-te enable ip-interface

9

Enable LDP globally. ldp enable —end—

Example The following sample configuration file segment shows the base LSR configuration for the 3960 named R3 in the network topology diagram shown in Figure 12-14 on page 12-117. !----------------------------------------------------! General Device Config !----------------------------------------------------system set host-name R3 ! VLANs 1,127 have been removed from all ports in the base configuration. This eliminates the possibility of L2 loops which allows RSTP to be disabled globally. rstp disable interface create loopback lb ip 3.3.3.3 isis instance create isis-instance region1 level L1 area 46.0001 !----------------------------------------------------! Interface if104 !----------------------------------------------------!A different VLAN is used for each L3 Interface / physical port combination to prevent a flood domain from forming. vlan create vlan 104 vlan add vlan 104 port 9 vlan remove vlan 1,127 port 9 !The L3 interface named if104 is associated with VLAN 104 to coincide with port 9 above. IP Forwarding is also enabled to allow routing between L3 interfaces. interface create ip-interface if104 ip 10.104.13.3 subnet 255.255.255.0 vlan 104 ip-forwarding on !Each L3 interface is attached to the IGP instance to signal that it should be included in routing updates and to enable IGP signaling for that link. 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-119 isis interface attach ip-interface if104 isis-instance region1 level L1 !RSVP provides the signaling and label exchange mechanism that will be used to generate the LSP. It must be enabled both globally and on each interface. rsvp-te enable ip-interface loopback rsvp-te enable rsvp-te enable ip-interface if104 !LDP provides the signaling and label exchange mechanism that will be used to generate the Pseudowire. LDP is enabled globally. ldp enable !----------------------------------------------------! Interface if103 !----------------------------------------------------vlan create vlan 103 vlan add vlan 103 port 10 vlan remove vlan 1,127 port 10 interface create ip-interface if103 ip 10.103.34.3 subnet 255.255.255.0 vlan 103 ip-forwarding on isis interface attach ip-interface if103 isis-instance region1 level L1 rsvp-te enable ip-interface if103

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-120 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-42 Configuring a 39XX/51XX VPWS VPWS provides point-to-point connectivity between two remote Local Area Networks (LANs). In this example protection switching is performed through tunnel redundancy. Note: This procedure assumes that the device has already been configured with base LSR functionality as illustrated in “Configuring a 39XX/51XX LSR” on page 12-117. Figure 12-15 shows the VPWS topology. Figure 12-15 VPWS Topology

Primary Path

R2 5150 lb: 2.2.2.2 mgt: 0.26.107.242

R4 3960 lb: 4.4.4.4 mgt:10.26.107.244

R1 3930 lb: 1.1.1.1 mgt:10.26.107.241

R3 5150 lb: 3.3.3.3 mgt:10.26.107.243

Step

Backup Path

Action

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-121 1

Create a virtual switch. virtual-switch ethernet create vs mode where

2

vs

is the virtual switch name.

mode

is the capability of the virtual-switch.

Attach the UNI port(s) to the virtual switch. virtual-switch ethernet add vs port [vlan ] [service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>] where

3

vs

is the virtual switch name.

port

is the subscriber port list.

vlan

is the subscriber VLAN ID.

service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>

is the service VLAN TPID value.

Create a primary and backup path. rsvp-te path create rsvp-path where rsvp-path

is the RSVP path to create.

rsvp-te path set rsvp-path index ip hop-type <strict|loose> where rsvp-path

is the RSVP path to create.

index

is the position of the node in the rsvp path list.

ip

is the IP address.

hop-type <strict|loose>

is the hop type.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-122 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 4

Create a primary and backup tunnel and apply the previously created path. mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress dest-ip explicit-tunnel-path <MPLS Rsvp Path> [backup-tunnel <MPLS ingress primary tunnel>] where

5

rsvp-ingress

is the RSVP tunnel name.

dest-ip

is the tunnel destination IP address.

path <MPLS Rsvp Path>

is the RSVP path name.

[backup-tunnel <MPLS ingress primary tunnel>]

is the list of primary tunnels.

Create a virtual circuit. mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc pw-id peer tunnel <MPLS ingress primary tunnel> pw-type <eth-raw|eth-tagged> pw-mode <mesh|spoke> where dynamic-vc

is the dynamic virtual switch name.

pw-id

6

peer

is the destination IP address.

tunnel <MPLS ingress primary tunnel>

is the transport tunnel.

pw-type <ethraw|eth-tagged>

is the pseudowire type.

pw-mode <mesh|spoke>

is the pseudowire mode.

Attach the virtual circuit to the virtual switch. virtual-switch ethernet attach mpls-vc <mpls-vc> vs where mpls-vc <mpls-vc>

is the list of MPLS VCs.

vs

is the virtual switch name. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-123

Example The following sample configuration file segment shows the VPWS configuration for the 3930 named R1 in the network topology diagram shown in Figure 12-15 on page 12-120. !--------------------------------- vpws-r1.r4-----------------------------! ! ----The primary path is created towards R2. This is also known as an Explicit Route Object and is used to override the behavior of the IGP. rsvp-te path create rsvp-path vpws-r1.r4.pri rsvp-te path set rsvp-path vpws-r1.r4.pri index 5 ip 10.101.12.2 hop-type loose ! ----Backup Path rsvp-te path create rsvp-path vpws-r1.r4.bak rsvp-te path set rsvp-path vpws-r1.r4.bak index 5 ip 10.104.13.3 hop-type loose

mpls tunnel tunnel-path mpls tunnel tunnel-path

! ----The primary tunnel is created as a dynamic RSVP tunnel. The destination IP address is targeted at the loopback interface to ensure it is always up. create rsvp-ingress tun-vpws-r1.r4.pri dest-ip 4.4.4.4 explicitvpws-r1.r4.pri record-route on ! ----The backup tunnel is associated with the primary tunnel and is only forwarding if the primary tunnel fails. create rsvp-ingress tun-vpws-r1.r4.bak dest-ip 4.4.4.4 explicitvpws-r1.r4.bak backup tun-vpws-r1.r4.pri

! ---- Virtual Circuit, Virtual Switch, and Attachment Circuit mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc vpws-r1.r4 pw-id 100 peer 4.4.4.4 tunnel tunvpws-r1.r4.pri pw-mode mesh pw-type eth-raw ! ---- The Virtual Switch is configured in VPWS mode to prevent more than 1 attachment circuit from being added. This adheres to the strict definition of VPWS only having a single attachment circuit. virtual-switch ethernet create vs vpws-r1.r4 mode vpws virtual-switch ethernet attach mpls-vc vpws-r1.r4 vs vpws-r1.r4 virtual-switch ethernet add vs vpws-r1.r4 port 10 vlan 100

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-124 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-43 Configuring a 39XX/51XX VPLS VPLS provides point-to-multipoint inter-LAN connectivity. With VPLS, PEs are connected to each other with a full mesh of virtual circuits for each VPLS instance. Each PE connects to an MTU-s on the UNI side through an MPLS network, or it connects to a CE device through an untagged interface or 802.1Q interface. Note: In Release 6.9, the system handles the outer VLAN which could be C-VLAN, S-VLAN or B-VLAN and not the combination of multiple VLANs as in Q-in-Q or MAC-in-MAC. This is true for a UNI port on a PE also. Each mesh virtual circuit connects to a remote PE that is a member of the same VPLS instance which provides emulated LAN service for the broadcast domain of the virtual switch. When configuring the mesh virtual circuit, include the virtual circuit identifier. For VPLS configuration, all the mesh virtual circuits that are associated with the same virtual switch may or may not have the same value. Note 1: In order to be interoperable with other vendors, configure the same virtual circuit identifier for the mesh virtual circuits that are added to the same virtual circuit. Note 2: This procedure assumes that the device has already been configured with base LSR functionality as illustrated in “Configuring a 39XX/51XX LSR” on page 12-117.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-125

Figure 12-16 on page 12-125 shows the VPLS topology. Figure 12-16 VPLS topology R2 5150 lb: 2.2.2.2

R5 5150 lb: 5.5.5.5

Full Mesh

R3 5150 lb: 3.3.3.3

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

R6 3960 lb: 6.6.6.6

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-126 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Step

Action

1

Create a virtual switch. virtual-switch ethernet create vs mode

2

Add the UNI port(s) to the virtual switch. virtual-switch ethernet add vs port [vlan ] [service-vlan-tpid <tpid>]

3

Create an explicit path for each PE in the VPLS mesh. rsvp-te path create rsvp-path rsvp-te path set rsvp-path index <#> ip hoptype

4

Create an MPLS tunnel for each PE in the MPLS mesh. mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress dest-ip explicit-tunnel-path record-route

5

Create a virtual circuit (Pseudowire) for each PE in the MPLS mesh. mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc pw-id <#> peer tunnel pw-mode <spoke|mesh> pw-type <eth-raw|ethtagged>

6

Attach each virtual circuit created in Step 5 to the virtual switch created in Step 1. virtual-switch ethernet attach mpls-vc vs —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-127

Example The following sample configuration file segment shows the VPLS configuration for the 5150 named R3 shown in Figure 12-15 on page 12-120. !----------------------vpls-100 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vpls-100 mode vpls virtual-switch ethernet add vs vpls-100 port 8 vlan 100 !----------------------------Peer: 2.2.2.2 ! ----The path is associated with the tunnel. The purpose of the path is to allow configuration or strict routing for the LSP. rsvp-te path create rsvp-path R3_R2.path rsvp-te path set rsvp-path R3_R2.path index 5 ip 10.103.34.4 hop-type loose ! ----Record route information is used to calculate Fast Re-route paths and therefore should always be enabled if FRR protection is desired. mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress R3_R2 dest-ip 2.2.2.2 explicit-tunnel-path R3_R2.path record-route on ! ---- The pw-mode MESH is what allows the ELAN behavior associated with a VPLS. The pw-type ETH-RAW along with the attachment circuit type defines the treatment of the outer VLAN of the ingress frame. mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc vpls-100.R2 pw-id 100 peer 2.2.2.2 tunnel R3_R2 pw-mode mesh pw-type eth-raw virtual-switch ethernet attach mpls-vc vpls-100.R2 vs vpls-100 !---------------------------Peer: 5.5.5.5 ! ----Path to peer rsvp-te path create rsvp-path R3_R5.path rsvp-te path set rsvp-path R3_R5.path index 5 ip 10.103.34.4 hop-type loose ! ----MPLS Tunnel mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress R3_R5 dest-ip 5.5.5.5 explicit-tunnel-path R3_R5.path record-route on ! ---- Virtual Circuit mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc vpls-100.R5 pw-id 100 peer 5.5.5.5 tunnel R3_R5 pw-mode mesh pw-type eth-raw virtual-switch ethernet attach mpls-vc vpls-100.R5 vs vpls-100 !---------------------------Peer: 6.6.6.6 ! ----Path to peer rsvp-te path create rsvp-path R3_R6.path rsvp-te path set rsvp-path R3_R6.path index 5 ip 10.103.34.4 hop-type loose ! ----MPLS Tunnel mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress R3_R6 dest-ip 6.6.6.6 explicit-tunnel-path R3_R6.path record-route on ! ---- Virtual Circuit mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc vpls-100.R6 pw-id 100 peer 6.6.6.6 tunnel R3_R6 pw-mode mesh pw-type eth-raw virtual-switch ethernet attach mpls-vc vpls-100.R6 vs vpls-100 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-128 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-44 Configuring a 39XX/51XX H-VPLS A Hierarchical VPLS (H-VPLS) model is used to allow spoke connections to the VPLS core. A device provides the functionality to interface with the VPLS core by functioning as an MTU-s, which is connected as a spoke in the VPLS core using a virtual circuit. An MTU-s connects to an PE on the NNI side through an MPLS network and to a CE on the UNI side through an untagged interface or an 802.1Q interface. Note: The system handles the outer VLAN which could be C-VLAN, SVLAN or B-VLAN and not the combination of multiple VLANs as in Q-in-Q or MAC-in-MAC. This is true for a UNI port on a PE also. Although MTU-s is an external device to a PE, it is viewed as an adjunct device to the PE and used to address scalability. Note: This procedure assumes that the device has already been configured with base LSR functionality as illustrated in “Configuring a 39XX/51XX LSR” on page 12-117.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-129

Figure 12-17 illustrates the H-VPLS topology which includes virtual circuit redundancy for protection switching. Figure 12-17 H-VPLS topology

Primary Path

R2 5150 lb: 2.2.2.2

VPLS Config From Previous VPLS Example

R5 5150 lb: 5.5.5.5

R1 3930 lb: 1.1.1.1

Backup Path

R3 5150 lb: 3.3.3.3

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

R6 3960 lb: 6.6.6.6

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-130 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Step

Action

1

Create a virtual switch. virtual-switch ethernet create vs mode

2

Attach the UNI port(s) to the virtual switch. virtual-switch ethernet add vs port [vlan ]

3

Create an explicit path for each endpoint. rsvp-te path create rsvp-path rsvp-te path set rsvp-path index <#> ip hoptype

4

Create an MPLS tunnel for each endpoint. mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress dest-ip explicit-tunnel-path record-route

5

Create a primary and protection virtual circuit (Pseudowire). mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc pw-id peer tunnel

6

Attach the each virtual circuit to the virtual switch created in Step 1. virtual-switch ethernet attach vs mpls-vc —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-131

Example The following sample configuration file segment shows the H-VPLS configuration for the 3930 named R1 shown in Figure 12-17 on page 12-129. H-VPLS Configuration Example on R1 !----------------hvpls-200 !----Since VPLS is a multipoint service the virtual switch mode should be set to VPLS which will allow multiple attachment circuits. VPWS mode only allows a single attachment circuit. virtual-switch ethernet create vs hvpls-200 mode vpls virtual-switch ethernet add vs hvpls-200 port 8 vlan 200 !----------------Primary Virtual Circuit: hvpls-200P ! ---- Primary Path rsvp-te path create rsvp-path R1_R2.path rsvp-te path set rsvp-path R1_R2.path index 5 ip 10.101.12.2 hop-type loose !-----Primary Tunnel mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress R1_R2 dest-ip 2.2.2.2 explicit-tunnel-path R1_R2.path record-route on ! ---- Virtual Circuit, Virtual Switch, and Attachment Circuit mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc hvpls-200P pw-id 200 peer 2.2.2.2 tunnel R1_R2 pw-mode spoke pw-type eth-raw virtual-switch ethernet attach mpls-vc hvpls-200P vs hvpls-200 ! ---- Backup Path rsvp-te path create rsvp-path R1_R3.path rsvp-te path set rsvp-path R1_R3.path index 5 ip 10.104.13.3 hop-type loose !-------Backup Tunnel mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress R1_R3 dest-ip 3.3.3.3 explicit-tunnel-path R1_R3.path record-route on ! ---- Virtual Circuit, Virtual Switch, and Attachment Circuit mpls l2-vpn protection create dynamic-vc hvpls-200B primary-vc-name hvpls200P secondary-pw-id 200 peer 3.3.3.3 tunnel R1_R3 virtual-switch ethernet attach mpls-vc hvpls-200B vs hvpls-200

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-132 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-45 H-VPLS configuration example mixed platform This example provides a mix of 39XX/51XX and 5410 devices with a VPLS core and spoke virtual circuits as shown in Figure 12-18. Figure 12-18 H-VPLS topology mixed platform

4/4 IXIA 4/3 1.8

1 3

3930

5150 1.1

9 9

1

4

2

6 5

1.7

3916

3931

5

1 5 8

3960

7

11 6/4 5410 6/3 1/2 IXIA

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-133

H-VPLS Configuration Example on 5410 The following sample configuration file segment shows the H-VPLS configuration for the 5410 in Figure 12-18 on page 12-132. rstp disable mstp disable aggregation disable system shell set global-inactivity-timer off port disable port 6/1-6/4 port enable port 6/4 port enable port 6/3 virtual-switch create vs test-vs cpu-interface sub-interface create cpu-subinterface rg cpu-interface sub-interface show sub-port create sub-port sp6/4_1 parent-port 6/4 classifier-precedence 1 egress-l2-transform push-8100.305.1 sub-port add sub-port sp6/4_1 class-element 1 vtag-stack 305 sub-port create sub-port sp6/3_1 parent-port 6/3 classifier-precedence 1 egress-l2-transform push-8100.10.1 sub-port add sub-port sp6/3_1 class-element 1 vtag-stack 10 virtual-switch interface attach sub-port sp6/4_1 vs test-vs virtual-switch interface attach cpu-subinterface rg vs test-vs interface create loopback test-loop ip 3.100.1.1 interface create ip-interface test-ip ip 4.100.160. 100 subnet 255.255.255.0 vs test-vs rsvp-te enable ip-interface test-loop rsvp-te enable ip-interface test-ip rsvp-te enable ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf

instance create ospf-instance ospfInst1 instance enable ospf-instance ospfInst1 instance set ospf-instance ospfInst1 router-id 3.100.1.1 interface attach ip-interface test-ip ospf-instance ospfInst1 interface enable ip-interface test-ip interface attach ip-interface test-loop ospf-instance ospfInst1 interface enable ip-interface test-loop

mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress dyn-100_160 dest-ip 3.160.1.1 mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc dynvc-100_160 peer 3.160.1.1 tunnel dyn-100_160 pw-id 109 ldp enable virtual-switch create vs vpls virtual-switch interface attach sub-port sp6/3_1 vs vpls virtual-switch interface attach mpls-vc dynvc-100_160 vs vpls

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-134 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

H-VPLS Configuration Example on 3916 The following sample configuration file segment shows the H-VPLS configuration for the 3916 in Figure 12-18 on page 12-132. rstp disable mstp disable aggregation disable system shell set global-inactivity-timer off port port port port port

disable port 1-6 enable port 4 enable port 2 enable port 5 enable port 6

vlan create vlan 301 vlan create vlan 302 vlan create vlan 304 vlan add vlan 301 port 2 vlan add vlan 302 port 4 vlan add vlan 304 port 5 interface create interface create forwarding on interface create forwarding on interface create forwarding on

loopback loopback-B ip 3.116.1.1 ip-interface intf-116_150 ip 4.116.150.116/24 vlan 302 ipip-interface intf-116_131 ip 4.116.131.116/24 vlan 301 ipip-interface intf-116_160 ip 4.116.160.116/24 vlan 304 ip-

ospf instance create ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-B ospf instance set ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-B router-id 3.116.1.1 ospf instance enable ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-B ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf

interface interface interface interface interface interface interface interface

rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te

attach enable attach enable attach enable attach enable

ip-interface ip-interface ip-interface ip-interface ip-interface ip-interface ip-interface ip-interface

loopback-B ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-B loopback-B intf-116_150 ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-B intf-116_150 intf-116_131 ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-B intf-116_131 intf-116_160 ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-B intf-116_160

set ip-interface loopback-B advertised-label non-reserved set ip-interface intf-116_150 advertised-label implicit-null set ip-interface intf-116_131 advertised-label non-reserved set ip-interface intf-116_160 advertised-label non-reserved enable ip-interface loopback-B enable ip-interface intf-116_150 enable ip-interface intf-116_131 enable ip-interface intf-116_160 enable

mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress rsvp-itnl-116_131 dest-ip 3.131.1.1 mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress rsvp-itnl-116_160 dest-ip 3.160.1.1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-135 mpls tunnel create static-ingress stat-itnl-116_150 dest-ip 3.150.1.1 nexthop-ip 4.116.150.150 label 105 mpls tunnel create static-egress stat-etnl-116_150 label 106 ldp enable mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc dyn-116_131 pw-id 105 peer 3.131.1.1 tunnel rsvp-itnl-116_131 pw-mode mesh mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc dyn-116_160 pw-id 102 peer 3.160.1.1 tunnel rsvp-itnl-116_160 pw-mode mesh mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc dyn-116_150 pw-id 103 peer 3.150.1.1 tunnel stat-itnl-116_150 pw-mode spoke virtual-switch virtual-switch virtual-switch virtual-switch

ethernet ethernet ethernet ethernet

create attach attach attach

vs vs-A mpls-vc mpls-vc mpls-vc

mode vpls dyn-116_131 vs vs-A dyn-116_160 vs vs-A dyn-116_150 vs vs-A

H-VPLS Configuration Example on 3930 The following sample configuration file segment shows the H-VPLS configuration for the 3930 in Figure 12-18 on page 12-132. rstp disable mstp disable aggregation disable system shell set global-inactivity-timer off port disable port 1-10 port enable port 1 port enable port 9 vlan create vlan 300 vlan create vlan 10 vlan add vlan 300 port 9 vlan add vlan 10 port 1 interface create loopback loopback-A ip 3.130.1.1 interface create ip-interface intf-130_131 ip 4.130.131.130/24 vlan 300 ipforwarding on ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf

instance create ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-A instance set ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-A router-id 3.130.1.1 instance enable ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-A interface attach ip-interface loopback-A ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-A interface enable ip-interface loopback-A interface attach ip-interface intf-130_131 ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-A interface enable ip-interface intf-130_131

rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te

set ip-interface loopback-A advertised-label non-reserved set ip-interface intf-130_131 advertised-label implicit-null enable ip-interface loopback-A enable ip-interface intf-130_131 enable

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-136 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress rsvp-itnl-130_131 dest-ip 3.131.1.1 ldp enable mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc dyn-130_131 pw-id 100 peer 3.131.1.1 tunnel rsvp-itnl-130_131 pw-mode spoke virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs-A mode vpws virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs-A port 1 vlan 10 virtual-switch ethernet attach mpls-vc dyn-130_131 vs vs-A

H-VPLS Configuration Example on 3931 The following sample configuration file segment shows the H-VPLS configuration for the 3931 in Figure 12-18 on page 12-132. rstp disable mstp disable aggregation disable system shell set global-inactivity-timer off port port port port port port

disable port 1-10 enable port 9 enable port 5 enable port 1 enable port 6 set port 5 mirror-port on

vlan create vlan 300 vlan create vlan 301 vlan create vlan 303 vlan add vlan 300 port 9 vlan add vlan 301 port 6 vlan add vlan 303 port 1 interface create interface create forwarding on interface create forwarding on interface create forwarding on ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf

loopback loopback-C ip 3.131.1.1 ip-interface intf-131_130 ip 4.130131.131/24 vlan 300 ipip-interface intf-131_116 ip 4.116131.131/24 vlan 301 ipip-interface intf-131_160 ip 4.131160.131/24 vlan 303 ip-

instance create ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-C instance set ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-C router-id 3.131.1.1 instance enable ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-C interface attach ip-interface loopback-C ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-C interface enable ip-interface loopback-C interface attach ip-interface intf-131_130 ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-C interface enable ip-interface intf-131_130 interface attach ip-interface intf-131_116 ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-C interface enable ip-interface intf-131_116 interface attach ip-interface intf-131_160 ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-C interface enable ip-interface intf-131_160

rsvp-te set ip-interface loopback-C advertised-label non-reserved rsvp-te set ip-interface intf-131_130 advertised-label non-reserved rsvp-te set ip-interface intf-131_116 advertised-label non-reserved 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-137 rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te

set ip-interface intf-131_160 advertised-label non-reserved enable ip-interface loopback-C enable ip-interface intf-131_130 enable ip-interface intf-131_116 enable ip-interface intf-131_160 enable

mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress rsvp-itnl-131_130 dest-ip 3.130.1.1 mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress rsvp-itnl-131_116 dest-ip 3.116.1.1 mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress rsvp-itnl-131_160 dest-ip 3.160.1.1 ldp enable mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc dyn-131_130 pw-id 100 peer 3.130.1.1 tunnel rsvp-itnl-131_130 pw-mode spoke mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc dyn-131_116 pw-id 105 peer 3.116.1.1 tunnel rsvp-itnl-131_116 pw-mode mesh mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc dyn-131_160 pw-id 106 peer 3.160.1.1 tunnel rsvp-itnl-131_160 pw-mode mesh virtual-switch virtual-switch virtual-switch virtual-switch virtual-switch virtual-switch

ethernet ethernet ethernet ethernet ethernet ethernet

create attach attach attach add vs attach

vs vs-A mode vpls mpls-vc dyn-131_130 mpls-vc dyn-131_116 mpls-vc dyn-131_160 vs-A port 5 vlan 15 mpls-vc dyn-130_131

vs vs-A vs vs-A vs vs-A vs vs-A

H-VPLS Configuration Example on 3960 The following sample configuration file segment shows the H-VPLS configuration for the 3960 in Figure 12-18 on page 12-132. rstp disable mstp disable aggregation disable system shell set global-inactivity-timer off port port port port

disable port 1-12 enable port 8 enable port 7 enable port 11

vlan create vlan 303 vlan create vlan 304 vlan create vlan 305 vlan add vlan 303 port 8 vlan add vlan 304 port 7 vlan add vlan 305 port 11 interface create interface create forwarding on interface create forwarding on interface create forwarding on

loopback loopback-E ip 3.160.1.1 ip-interface intf-160_131 ip 4.131.160.160/24 vlan 303 ipip-interface intf-160_116 ip 4.116.160.160/24 vlan 304 ipip-interface intf-160_100 ip 4.100.160.160/24 vlan 305 ip-

ospf instance create ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-E 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-138 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf

instance set ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-E router-id 3.160.1.1 instance enable ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-E interface attach ip-interface loopback-E ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-E interface enable ip-interface loopback-E interface attach ip-interface intf-160_131 ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-E interface enable ip-interface intf-160_131 interface attach ip-interface intf-160_116 ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-E interface enable ip-interface intf-160_116 interface attach ip-interface intf-160_100 ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-E interface enable ip-interface intf-160_100

rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te

set ip-interface loopback-E advertised-label non-reserved set ip-interface intf-160_131 advertised-label non-reserved set ip-interface intf-160_116 advertised-label non-reserved set ip-interface intf-160_100 advertised-label implicit-null enable ip-interface loopback-E enable ip-interface intf-160_131 enable ip-interface intf-160_116 enable ip-interface intf-160_100 enable

mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress rsvp-itnl-160_131 dest-ip 3.131.1.1 mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress rsvp-itnl-160_116 dest-ip 3.116.1.1 mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress rsvp-itnl-160_100 dest-ip 3.100.1.1 ldp enable mpls peer mpls peer mpls peer

l2-vpn create dynamic-vc dyn-160_131 pw-id 3.131.1.1 tunnel rsvp-itnl-160_131 pw-mode l2-vpn create dynamic-vc dyn-160_116 pw-id 3.116.1.1 tunnel rsvp-itnl-160_116 pw-mode l2-vpn create dynamic-vc dyn-160_100 pw-id 3.100.1.1 tunnel rsvp-itnl-160_100 pw-mode

virtual-switch virtual-switch virtual-switch virtual-switch

ethernet ethernet ethernet ethernet

create attach attach attach

vs vs-A mpls-vc mpls-vc mpls-vc

106 mesh 102 mesh 109 spoke

mode vpls dyn-160_131 vs vs-A dyn-160_116 vs vs-A dyn-160_100 vs vs-A

H-VPLS Configuration Example on 5150 The following sample configuration file segment shows the H-VPLS configuration for the 5150 in Figure 12-18 on page 12-132. rstp disable mstp disable aggregation disable system shell set global-inactivity-timer off port port port port port

disable port 1.1-1.48 disable port 2.1-2.2 disable port 3.1-3.2 enable port 1.8 enable port 1.1

vlan create vlan 302 vlan create vlan 10 vlan add vlan 302 port 1.1 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-139 vlan add vlan 10 port 1.8 interface create loopback loopback-D ip 3.150.1.1 interface create ip-interface intf-150_116 ip 4.116.150.150/24 vlan 302 ipforwarding on ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf

instance create ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-D instance set ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-D router-id 3.150.1.1 instance enable ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-D interface attach ip-interface loopback-D ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-D interface enable ip-interface loopback-D interface attach ip-interface intf-150_116 ospf-instance OSPF-Inst-D interface enable ip-interface intf-150_116

rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te

set ip-interface loopback-D advertised-label non-reserved set ip-interface intf-150_116 advertised-label non-reserved enable ip-interface loopback-D enable ip-interface intf-150_116 enable

mpls tunnel create static-ingress stat-itnl-150_116 dest-ip 3.116.1.1 nexthop-ip 4.116.150.116 label 106 mpls tunnel create static-egress stat-etnl-150_116 label 105 ldp enable mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc dyn-150_116 pw-id 103 peer 3.116.1.1 tunnel stat-itnl-150_116 pw-mode spoke virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs-A mode vpws virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs-A port 1.8 vlan 10 virtual-switch ethernet attach mpls-vc dyn-150_116 vs vs-A

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-140 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-46 VPLS with CFM configuration example 3916 and 3960 This example shows a VPLS between two 3916 switches and a 3960 as shown in Figure 12-19 with dynamic virtual circuits. The CFM service is configured over the data virtual switch and virtual circuit endpoints have down MEPs. Figure 12-19 VPLS with CFM topology

1

3916-60

2

2

6

3960-14

3916-80

3

4

VPLS Configuration Example on 3916-80 This example shows the VPLS configuration of3916-80 shown in Figure 12-19. system set host-name CN3916-80 rstp disable mstp disable aggregation disable system shell set global-inactivity-timer off port disable port 1,5,6 port enable port 2,3,4 vlan create vlan 200 vlan create vlan 301 vlan create vlan 302 vlan add vlan 200 port 3 vlan add vlan 301 port 2 vlan add vlan 302 port 4 interface create loopback LBK ip 2.2.2.2 interface create ip-interface IFACE-4.1.1.2 ip 4.1.1.2/24 vlan 301 ipforwarding on 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-141 interface create ip-interface IFACE-6.1.1.1 ip 6.1.1.1/24 vlan 302 ipforwarding on ospf instance create ospf-instance OSPF-INST ospf instance set ospf-instance OSPF-INST router-id 2.2.2.2 ospf instance enable ospf-instance OSPF-INST ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf

interface interface interface interface interface interface

rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te

attach enable attach enable attach enable

ip-interface ip-interface ip-interface ip-interface ip-interface ip-interface

LBK ospf-instance OSPF-INST LBK IFACE-4.1.1.2 ospf-instance OSPF-INST IFACE-4.1.1.2 IFACE-6.1.1.1 ospf-instance OSPF-INST IFACE-6.1.1.1

enable set ip-interface LBK advertised-label non-reserved set ip-interface IFACE-4.1.1.2 advertised-label non-reserved set ip-interface IFACE-6.1.1.1 advertised-label non-reserved enable ip-interface LBK enable ip-interface IFACE-4.1.1.2 enable ip-interface IFACE-6.1.1.1

mpls dynamic-label-range set min-label 200 max-label 299 mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress rsvp-itnl-4.1.1 dest-ip 1.1.1.1 mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress rsvp-itnl-6.1.1 dest-ip 3.3.3.3 ldp enable mpls l2-vpn create itnl-4.1.1 pw-mode mpls l2-vpn create itnl-6.1.1 pw-mode virtual-switch virtual-switch virtual-switch virtual-switch

dynamic-vc dyn-4.1.1 pw-id 105 peer 1.1.1.1 tunnel rsvpmesh dynamic-vc dyn-6.1.1 pw-id 102 peer 3.3.3.3 tunnel rsvpmesh

ethernet ethernet ethernet ethernet

create add vs attach attach

vs vs-A mode vpls vs-A port 3 vlan 200 mpls-vc dyn-4.1.1 vs vs-A mpls-vc dyn-6.1.1 vs vs-A

VPLS Configuration Example on 3916-60 This example shows the VPLS configuration of 3916-60 shown in Figure 12-19 on page 12-140. system set host-name CN3916-60 rstp disable mstp disable aggregation disable system shell set global-inactivity-timer off port disable port 3,4,5 port enable port 1,2,6 vlan create vlan 100 vlan create vlan 301 vlan create vlan 303 vlan add vlan 301 port 2 vlan add vlan 303 port 6

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-142 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration interface create loopback LBK ip 1.1.1.1 interface create ip-interface IFACE-4.1.1.1 ip 4.1.1.1/24 vlan 301 ipforwarding on interface create ip-interface IFACE-5.1.1.2 ip 5.1.1.2/24 vlan 303 ipforwarding on ospf instance create ospf-instance OSPF-INST ospf instance set ospf-instance OSPF-INST router-id 1.1.1.1 ospf instance enable ospf-instance OSPF-INST ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf

interface interface interface interface interface interface

attach enable attach enable attach enable

ip-interface ip-interface ip-interface ip-interface ip-interface ip-interface

LBK ospf-instance OSPF-INST LBK IFACE-4.1.1.1 ospf-instance OSPF-INST IFACE-4.1.1.1 IFACE-5.1.1.2 ospf-instance OSPF-INST IFACE-5.1.1.2

rsvp-te set ip-interface LBK advertised-label non-reserved rsvp-te set ip-interface IFACE-4.1.1.1 advertised-label non-reserved rsvp-te set ip-interface IFACE-5.1.1.2 advertised-label non-reserved rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te

enable enable ip-interface LBK enable ip-interface IFACE-4.1.1.1 enable ip-interface IFACE-5.1.1.2

mpls dynamic-label-range set min-label 400 max-label 499 mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress rsvp-itnl-4.1.1 dest-ip 2.2.2.2 mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress rsvp-itnl-5.1.1 dest-ip 3.3.3.3 ldp enable mpls l2-vpn create itnl-4.1.1 pw-mode mpls l2-vpn create itnl-5.1.1 pw-mode

dynamic-vc dyn-4.1.1 pw-id 105 peer 2.2.2.2 tunnel rsvpmesh dynamic-vc dyn-5.1.1 pw-id 106 peer 3.3.3.3 tunnel rsvpmesh

virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs-A mode vpls virtual-switch ethernet attach mpls-vc dyn-4.1.1 vs vs-A virtual-switch ethernet attach mpls-vc dyn-5.1.1 vs vs-A virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs-A port 1 vlan 100

VPLS Configuration Example on 3916-14 This example shows the VPLS configuration of 3916-14 shown in Figure 12-19 on page 12-140. system set host-name CN3960-14 rstp disable mstp disable aggregation disable system shell set global-inactivity-timer off port disable port 1,2,3,5,7,8,9,10,11,12 port enable port 4,6 vlan create vlan 302 vlan create vlan 303 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-143

vlan add vlan 303 port 6 vlan add vlan 302 port 4 interface create loopback LBK ip 3.3.3.3 interface create ip-interface IFACE-5.1.1.1 ip 5.1.1.1/24 vlan 303 ipforwarding on interface create ip-interface IFACE-6.1.1.2 ip 6.1.1.2/24 vlan 302 ipforwarding on ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf

instance create ospf-instance OSPF-INST instance set ospf-instance OSPF-INST router-id 3.3.3.3 instance enable ospf-instance OSPF-INST interface attach ip-interface LBK ospf-instance OSPF-INST interface enable ip-interface LBK interface attach ip-interface IFACE-5.1.1.1 ospf-instance OSPF-INST interface enable ip-interface IFACE-5.1.1.1 interface attach ip-interface IFACE-6.1.1.2 ospf-instance OSPF-INST interface enable ip-interface IFACE-6.1.1.2

rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te

set ip-interface LBK advertised-label non-reserved set ip-interface IFACE-5.1.1.1 advertised-label non-reserved set ip-interface IFACE-6.1.1.2 advertised-label non-reserved enable ip-interface LBK enable ip-interface IFACE-5.1.1.1 enable ip-interface IFACE-6.1.1.2 enable

mpls dynamic-label-range set min-label 100 max-label 199 mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress rsvp-itnl-5.1.1 dest-ip 1.1.1.1 mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress rsvp-itnl-6.1.1 dest-ip 2.2.2.2 ldp enable mpls l2-vpn create itnl-5.1.1 pw-mode mpls l2-vpn create itnl-6.1.1 pw-mode

dynamic-vc dyn-5.1.1 pw-id 106 peer 1.1.1.1 tunnel rsvpmesh dynamic-vc dyn-6.1.1 pw-id 102 peer 2.2.2.2 tunnel rsvpmesh

virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs-A mode vpls virtual-switch ethernet attach mpls-vc dyn-5.1.1 vs vs-A virtual-switch ethernet attach mpls-vc dyn-6.1.1 vs vs-A

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-144 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

Procedure 12-47 G.8032 and VPLS interoperability example This example shows VPLS interoperability with G.8032 as shown in Figure 12-20. Figure 12-20 G.8032 and VPLS topology

3916-80

5410

3916-100

VPLS

G.8032

3960-10

3916-60

For the scenario where all of the following are true: –

virtual circuit is tagged



attachment circuit on the right hand is port classification only (no service delimited tag)



The tagged traffic is actually coming in over the attachment circuit, traffic that egresses the ring ports on the interconnect device are double-tagged.

The inner tag is the subscriber tag and the outer tag is the service delimiter VID pushed on by the virtual circuit. This is considered a mis-configuration and an acceptable result. When only the second is true, VLAN 801 and VLAN 802 traffic will actually go out over the east and west (sub) ports that are in VS2, even though there is a VR on that device that is actually blocking one of those ports. That's considered an accept able result and is also considered a misconfiguration.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-145

G.8032 and VPLS Configuration Example on 5410 This example shows the VPLS configuration of the 5410 shown in Figure 12-20 on page 12-144. virtual-switch virtual-switch virtual-switch virtual-switch

create create create create

vs vs vs vs

test-vs-prim vpls raps_vs raps-vs-900

system set host-name CN5410-3 interface create loopback test-loop ip 10.10.10.10 interface create ip-interface test-ip-prim ip 1.1.1.1 subnet 255.255.255.0 vs test-vs-prim cpu-interface sub-interface create cpu-subinterface test-cpu-prim sub-port create sub-port sp6.3 parent-port 6/3 classifier-precedence 1 egressl2-transform push-8100.301.1 sub-port add sub-port sp6.3 class-element 1 vtag-stack 301 sub-port create sub-port sp6.6-800 parent-port 6/6 classifier-precedence 100 sub-port add sub-port sp6.6-800 class-element 1 vtag-stack 801 sub-port add sub-port sp6.6-800 class-element 2 vtag-stack 802 sub-port create sub-port sp6.4-800 parent-port 6/4 classifier-precedence 100 sub-port add sub-port sp6.4-800 class-element 1 vtag-stack 801 sub-port add sub-port sp6.4-800 class-element 2 vtag-stack 802 sub-port create sub-port sp6.6-900 parent-port 6/6 classifier-precedence 200 sub-port add sub-port sp6.6-900 class-element 1 vtag-stack 901 sub-port add sub-port sp6.6-900 class-element 2 vtag-stack 902 sub-port create sub-port sp6.4-900 parent-port 6/4 classifier-precedence 200 sub-port add sub-port sp6.4-900 class-element 1 vtag-stack 901 sub-port add sub-port sp6.4-900 class-element 2 vtag-stack 902 rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te

enable ip-interface test-loop enable ip-interface test-ip-prim path create rsvp-path path-prim logical-id 1 path set rsvp-path path-prim index 1 ip 1.1.1.2 enable

mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress itnl-prim path path-prim dest-ip 30.30.30.30 logical-id 1 ldp enable mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc test-dynVc pw-id 201 peer 30.30.30.30 tunnel itnl-prim pw-type eth-tagged ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf

instance create ospf-instance interface attach ip-interface interface enable ip-interface interface attach ip-interface interface enable ip-interface

virtual-switch virtual-switch prim virtual-switch virtual-switch

ospfInst1 test-loop ospf-instance ospfInst1 test-loop test-ip-prim ospf-instance ospfInst1 test-ip-prim

interface attach sub-port sp6.3 vs test-vs-prim interface attach cpu-subinterface test-cpu-prim vs test-vsinterface attach sub-port sp6.6-800 vs raps_vs interface attach sub-port sp6.4-800 vs raps_vs

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-146 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration virtual-switch interface attach mpls-vc test-dynVc vs raps_vs rstp disable aggregation disable ring-protection logical-ring 6/6 east-port 6/4 WTR 1 ring-protection virtual-ring raps-vid 800 ring-protection virtual-ring ring-protection virtual-ring ring-protection virtual-ring raps-vid 900 ring-protection virtual-ring

create logical-ring-name LR1 ring-id 1 west-port create virtual-ring-name VR1 logical-ring LR1 set ring VR1 east-port-rpl owner add ring VR1 vs raps_vs create virtual-ring-name VR2 logical-ring LR1 add ring VR2 vs raps-vs-900

dhcp client enable system shell set global-more off

G.8032 and VPLS Configuration Example on 3916 This example shows the VPLS configuration of 3916-100 shown in Figure 12-20 on page 12-144. vlan create vlan 301 system set host-name CN3916-100 interface create loopback LBK ip 30.30.30.30 interface create ip-interface LSR-IFACE-1 ip 1.1.1.2/24 vlan 301 ip-forwarding on vlan add vlan 301 port 3 virtual-switch ethernet create vs vs1 mode vpls virtual-switch ethernet add vs vs1 port 6 vlan 1 ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf ospf

instance create ospf-instance OSPF-Inst instance disable ospf-instance OSPF-Inst instance set ospf-instance OSPF-Inst router-id 30.30.30.30 instance enable ospf-instance OSPF-Inst interface attach ip-interface LBK ospf-instance OSPF-Inst interface set ip-interface LBK priority 1 interface enable ip-interface LBK interface attach ip-interface LSR-IFACE-1 ospf-instance OSPF-Inst interface set ip-interface LSR-IFACE-1 priority 1 interface enable ip-interface LSR-IFACE-1

rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te rsvp-te

enable ip-interface LBK enable ip-interface LSR-IFACE-1 path create rsvp-path path1 logical-id 1 path set rsvp-path path1 index 1 ip 1.1.1.1

rsvp-te enable mpls tunnel create rsvp-ingress RSVP-ITNL-2 explicit-tunnel-path path1 destip 10.10.10.10 logical-id 1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-147 ldp enable mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc PWDYN-1 pw-id 201 peer 10.10.10.10 tunnel RSVPITNL-2 pw-type eth-tagged virtual-switch ethernet attach mpls-vc PWDYN-1 vs vs1 rstp disable mstp disable aggregation disable system shell set global-more off system shell set global-inactivity-timer off

G.8032 and VPLS Configuration Example on 3916 This example shows the VPLS configuration of 3916-80 shown in Figure 12-20 on page 12-144. vlan create vlan 801-802,901-902 system set host-name CN3916-80 port disable port 2 port disable port 5 port disable port 6 vlan vlan vlan vlan vlan vlan

add vlan 801-802,901-902 port 1 remove vlan 1 port 1 add vlan 801-802 port 3 remove vlan 1 port 3 add vlan 801-802,901-902 port 4 remove vlan 1 port 4

virtual-switch ethernet create vs vsA mode vpws virtual-switch ethernet create vs vsB mode vpls virtual-switch ethernet create vs vsC ring-protection logical-ring 4 east-port 1 WTR 1 ring-protection virtual-ring raps-vid 800 ring-protection virtual-ring ring-protection virtual-ring raps-vid 900 ring-protection virtual-ring

create logical-ring-name LR1 ring-id 1 west-port create virtual-ring-name VR1 logical-ring LR1 add ring VR1 vid 801-802 create virtual-ring-name VR2 logical-ring LR1 add ring VR2 vid 901-902

system shell set global-inactivity-timer off

G.8032 and VPLS Configuration Example on 3916 This example shows the VPLS configuration of 3916-60 shown in Figure 12-20 on page 12-144. vlan create vlan 801-802,901-902 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-148 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration

system set host-name CN3916-60 port disable port 3 port disable port 4 port disable port 5 vlan vlan vlan vlan vlan vlan

add vlan 801-802 port 1 remove vlan 1 port 1 add vlan 801-802,901-902 port 2 remove vlan 1 port 2 add vlan 801-802,901-902 port 6 remove vlan 1 port 6

ring-protection logical-ring 2 east-port 6 WTR 1 ring-protection virtual-ring raps-vid 800 ring-protection virtual-ring ring-protection virtual-ring raps-vid 900 ring-protection virtual-ring

create logical-ring-name LR1 ring-id 1 west-port create virtual-ring-name VR1 logical-ring LR1 add ring VR1 vid 801-802 create virtual-ring-name VR2 logical-ring LR1 add ring VR2 vid 901-902

system shell set global-inactivity-timer off

G.8032 and VPLS Configuration Example on 3916 This example shows the VPLS configuration of 3916-14 shown in Figure 12-20 on page 12-144. vlan create vlan 801-802,901-902 system set host-name CN3916-14 vlan vlan vlan vlan vlan vlan

add vlan 801-802,901-902 port 1 remove vlan 1 port 1 add vlan 801-802 port 3 remove vlan 1 port 3 add vlan 801-802,901-902 port 4 remove vlan 1 port 4

ring-protection logical-ring 4 east-port 1 WTR 1 ring-protection virtual-ring raps-vid 800 ring-protection virtual-ring ring-protection virtual-ring raps-vid 900 ring-protection virtual-ring

create logical-ring-name LR1 ring-id 1 west-port create virtual-ring-name VR1 logical-ring LR1 add ring VR1 vid 801-802 create virtual-ring-name VR2 logical-ring LR1 add ring VR2 vid 901-902 —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration 12-149

Procedure 12-48 MPLS-TP configuration example This example shows a general MPLS-TP configuration between DUTA, which has a loopback address of 1.1.1.1, and DUTB, which has a loopback address of 2.2.2.2. All IP interfaces are enabled for RSVP-TE and RSVP-TE and LDP are globally enabled. Note 1: The 5410 does not support GMPLS configuration. Note 2: This procedure assumes that the device has already been configured with base LSR functionality as illustrated in “Configuring a 39XX/51XX LSR” on page 12-117.

DUTA configuration This example shows the configuration on DUTA. gmpls tp-tunnel create rsvp-ingress-unidir DUTA-DUTB-1 dest-ip 2.2.2.2 gmpls tp-tunnel create static-ingress-assoc DUTA-DUTB-ASSOC-1 forward-tunnel DUTA-DUTB-1 reverse-dyntun-name DUTB-DUTA-1 mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc DUTA-DUTB-VC-1 peer 2.2.2.2 pw-id 12 tp-tunnelassoc DUTA-DUTB-ASSOC-1 mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc DUTA-DUTB-VC-2 peer 2.2.2.2 pw-id 1212 tptunnel-assoc DUTA-DUTB-ASSOC-1 virtual-switch Ethernet create vs VPLS1 mode vpls virtual-switch Ethernet create vs VPWS1 mode vpws virtual-switch Ethernet attach mpls-vc DUTA-DUTB-VC-1 vs VPLS1 virtual-switch Ethernet attach mpls-vc DUTA-DUTB-VC-2 vs VPWS1 virtual-switch Ethernet add vs VPLS1 port 1 vlan 1001 virtual-switch Ethernet add vs VPWS1 port 1 vlan 1002

DUTB configuration This example shows the configuration on DUTB. gmpls tp-tunnel create rsvp-ingress-unidir DUTB-DUTA-1 dest-ip 1.1.1.1 gmpls tp-tunnel create static-ingress-assoc DUTB-DUTA-ASSOC-1 forward-tunnel DUTB-DUTA-1 reverse-dyntun-name DUTA-DUTB-1 mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc DUTB-DUTA-VC-1 peer 1.1.1.1 pw-id 12 tp-tunnelassoc DUTB-DUTA-ASSOC-1 mpls l2-vpn create dynamic-vc DUTB-DUTA-VC-2 peer 1.1.1.1 pw-id 1212 tptunnel-assoc DUTB-DUTA-ASSOC-1 virtual-switch Ethernet create vs VPLS1 mode vpls virtual-switch Ethernet create vs VPWS1 mode vpws

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

12-150 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) configuration virtual-switch Ethernet attach mpls-vc DUTB-DUTA-VC-1 vs VPLS1 virtual-switch Ethernet attach mpls-vc DUTB-DUTA-VC-1 vs VPWS1 virtual-switch Ethernet add vs VPLS1 port 1 vlan 1001 virtual-switch Ethernet add vs VPWS1 port 1 vlan 1002

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

13-1

L2 control frame tunneling configuration

13-

This chapter explains how to configure the treatment of Layer 2 (L2) control frames with L2 control frame tunneling. With L2 control frame tunneling, you can change the handling of untagged L2 control frames to be processed and forwarded as if they were data frames instead of being discarded or locally processed. Also, you can change the handling of transparent L2 control frames to be transformed to L2PT frame format. Note: To configure L2 control frame tunneling, you need to install the Advanced Ethernet license key. To obtain the Advanced Ethernet license key, contact Ciena Sales.

Overview In conformance with IEEE standards, the default configuration does not propagate untagged L2 control frames through the network. If the default disposition is “discard”, the frames are dropped without further processing. If the disposition is “peer”, the frames are forwarded to the software process that handles the specific protocol. Table 13-1 shows the frame format for the three forms for each protocol along with the default disposition for each. Table 13-1 Control frame formats and disposition Control frame name (with CLI attribute)

Form

Default DA MAC disposition address

Type/Length encapsulation

LLC or EtherType

Peer

01-80-C200-00-00

N/A

DSAP/ N/A SSAP=0x4 2 Ctrl=0x03

Tagged

Same as data frame

01-80-C200-00-00

N/A

DSAP/ N/A SSAP=0x4 2 Ctrl=0x03

L2PT

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCD-CD-D0

N/A

DSAP/ N/A SSAP=0x4 2 Ctrl=0x03

Rapid Spanning Untagged Tree Protocol (rstp)

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Subtype

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

13-2 L2 control frame tunneling configuration Table 13-1 Control frame formats and disposition Control frame name (with CLI attribute)

Form

Default DA MAC disposition address

Type/Length encapsulation

LLC or EtherType

Subtype

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (lacp)

Untagged

Peer

01-80-C200-00-02

N/A

88-09

01

Tagged

Same as data frame

01-80-C200-00-02

N/A

88-09

01

L2PT

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCD-CD-D0

N/A

88-09

01

Peer

01-80-C200-00-02

N/A

88-09

02

Tagged

Same as data frame

01-80-C200-00-02

N/A

88-09

02

L2PT

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCD-CD-D0

N/A

88-09

02

Discard

01-80-C200-00-02

N/A

88-09

03

Same as data frame

01-80-C200-00-02

N/A

88-09

03

L2PT

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCD-CD-D0

N/A

88-09

03

Untagged

Discard

01-80-C200-00-03

N/A

88-8E

N/A

Tagged

Same as data frame

01-80-C200-00-03

N/A

88-8E

N/A

L2PT

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCD-CD-D0

N/A

88-8E

N/A

Peer

01-80-C200-00-0E

N/A

88-CC

N/A

Tagged

Same as data frame

01-80-C200-00-0E

N/A

88-CC

N/A

L2PT

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCD-CD-D0

N/A

88-CC

N/A

LACP Marker (lacp- Untagged marker)

802.3ah Operation, Untagged Administration, and Maintenance (oam) Tagged

IEEE Std. 802.1X/ EAPOL(802.1x)

LLDP 802.1ab(lldp) Untagged

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

L2 control frame tunneling configuration 13-3 Table 13-1 Control frame formats and disposition Control frame name (with CLI attribute)

Form

Default DA MAC disposition address

Type/Length encapsulation

LLC or EtherType

Subtype

Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) Block (garp-block)

Untagged

Discard

01-80-C200-00-2X

N/A

N/A

N/A

Tagged

Same as data frame

01-80-C200-00-2X

N/A

N/A

N/A

L2PT

Not supported

Not Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Untagged

Discard

01-80-C200-00-20

N/A

00-01

N/A

Tagged

Same as data frame

01-80-C200-00-20

N/A

00-01

N/A

L2PT

Not supported

Not Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Untagged

Discard

01-80-C200-00-21

N/A

00-01

N/A

Tagged

Same as data frame

01-80-C200-00-21

N/A

00-01

N/A

L2PT

Not supported

Not Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Untagged

Discard

01-00-0CCC-CC-CC

SNAP

01-04

N/A

Tagged

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCC-CC-CC

SNAP

01-04

N/A

L2PT

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCD-CD-D0

SNAP

01-04

N/A

Discard

01-00-0CCC-CC-CC

SNAP

01-11

N/A

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCC-CC-CC

SNAP

01-11

N/A

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCD-CD-D0

SNAP

01-11

N/A

GARP Mulicast Registration Protocol (gmrp)

GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (gvrp)

Cisco-Port Aggregation Protocol (ciscopagp)

Cisco-Unidirectional Untagged Link Detection (cisco-udld) Tagged L2PT

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

13-4 L2 control frame tunneling configuration Table 13-1 Control frame formats and disposition Control frame name (with CLI attribute)

Form

Default DA MAC disposition address

Type/Length encapsulation

LLC or EtherType

Subtype

Discard

01-00-0CCC-CC-CC

SNAP

20-00

N/A

Tagged

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCC-CC-CC

SNAP

20-00

N/A

L2PT

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCD-CD-D0

SNAP

20-00

N/A

Untagged

Discard

01-00-0CCC-CC-CC

SNAP

20-04

N/A

Tagged

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCC-CC-CC

SNAP

20-04

N/A

L2PT

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCD-CD-D0

SNAP

20-04

N/A

Untagged

Discard

01-00-0CCC-CC-CC

SNAP

20-03

N/A

Tagged

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCC-CC-CC

SNAP

20-03

N/A

L2PT

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCD-CD-D0

SNAP

20-03

N/A

Untagged

Discard

01-00-0CCC-CC-CD

SNAP

01-0B

N/A

Tagged

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCC-CC-CD

SNAP

01-0B

N/A

L2PT

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCD-CD-D0

SNAP

01-0B

N/A

Discard

01-00-0CCD-CD-CE

SNAP

01-0C

N/A

Tagged

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCD-CD-CE

SNAP

01-0C

N/A

L2PT

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCD-CD-D0

SNAP

01-0C

N/A

Cisco Discovery Untagged Protocol (cisco-cdp)

Cisco-Dynamic Trunking Protocol (cisco-dtp)

Cisco-VLAN Trunking Protocol (cisco-vtp)

Cisco-Per VLAN Spanning Tree (cisco-pvst)

Cisco-VLAN Bridge Untagged (vlan-bridge)

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

L2 control frame tunneling configuration 13-5 Table 13-1 Control frame formats and disposition Control frame name (with CLI attribute)

Form

Default DA MAC disposition address

Type/Length encapsulation

LLC or EtherType

Subtype

Cisco STP Fast Uplink (cisco-stpuplink-fast)

Untagged

Discard

01-00-0CCD-CD-CD

SNAP

20-0A

N/A

Tagged

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCD-CD-CD

SNAP

20-0A

N/A

L2PT

Same as data frame

01-00-0CCD-CD-D0

SNAP

20-0A

N/A

Untagged

Discard

01-80-C200-00-0X

N/A

N/A

N/A

Tagged

Same as data frame

01-80-C200-00-0X

N/A

N/A

N/A

L2PT

Not supported

Not Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Untagged

Discard

01-80-C200-00-1X

N/A

N/A

N/A

Tagged

Same as data frame

01-80-C200-00-1X

N/A

N/A

N/A

L2PT

Not supported

Not Supported

N/A

N/A

N/A

Bridge Block (bridge-block)

All Bridges Block (all-bridges-block)

Tunnel method The tunnel method controls the classification and processing of untagged L2 control frames. You can set the tunnel method for a virtual switch to one of two modes, transparent or L2PT. The default mode is L2PT. Note: The maximum number of L2 control frame tunnels in a device is equal to the number of physical ports available, that is, UNI plus NNI. Transparent Mode

When the tunnel method is in transparent mode, the switching chip hardware handles dispositions without sending frames to the CPU for processing, and is referred to as "fast path" operation. With "fast path" operation, untagged L2 control frame dispositions are maintained when the control frame ingresses a customer-facing interface with the untagged-ctrl-vs specified. Protocol dispositions are not maintained when the equivalent tagged L2 control frame

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

13-6 L2 control frame tunneling configuration

ingresses a network-facing interface(s). In transparent mode, the L2 control frame is encapsulated accordingly, and the IEEE or Cisco MAC DA is left intact. Transparent mode is only supported on MPLS EPL virtual switches. MPLS virtual switches do not support the L2PT mode. L2PT Mode

When the virtual switch is configured for L2PT mode, L2 control frames are classified and either dropped or forwarded, according to each protocol's disposition and the untagged-ctrl-vs designation at each customer-facing interface. In L2PT mode the L2 control frame is fully decoded based on the proper IEEE or Cisco MAC DA and any relevant Op-Codes in the frame. If there is a specific protocol match on a protocol that supports L2PT stamping, the frame is eligible for conversion to and from L2PT and proper IEEE or Cisco MAC DA. Certain protocols do not support L2PT transformation, since their classification data does not contain enough information to uniquely identify the protocol once the protocol-specific MAC DA has been replaced. Such protocols do not have an L2PT form. In general, when the virtual switch is in L2PT mode, the switching chip hardware sends L2 control frames to the CPU for "slow-path" processing. The frame agent will egress that frame out the customer-facing interfaces as a "proper" IEEE or Cisco L2 control frame, and egress the frame out networkfacing interfaces as the same L2PT frame. L2 control frames that ingress a network-facing interface are processed as follows: •

If the L2 control frame is in the L2PT-equivalent form and is fully decodable, it is converted back to the proper IEEE or Cisco MAC DA. — Egressing Customer-Facing Interface(s): The proper IEEE or Cisco MAC DA form of the frame will egress out all customer-facing interfaces of the virtual switch. — Egressing Network-Facing Interface(s): The L2PT form of the frame will egress out all network-facing interfaces, except for the interface on which the frame ingressed.



If the L2 control frame has an L2PT MAC DA, but is not decodable, that frame will be switched out all customer-facing and network-facing interfaces with no conversion of MAC DA.



If the L2 control frame is already in the proper IEEE or Cisco MAC DA form, that frame will be switched out all customer-facing and networkfacing interfaces with no conversion of MAC DA to L2PT. This means that

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

L2 control frame tunneling configuration 13-7

if an IEEE L2 control frame enters a network-facing interface, that same frame will egress interfaces regardless of the L2PT mode enabled on the virtual switch. L2 control frames that ingress a customer-facing Interface are processed as follows: •

If the L2 control frame is in the L2PT-equivalent form, it will be treated as a data frame and switched out all customer-facing and network-facing interfaces with no conversion of MAC DA.



If the L2 control frame is in the proper IEEE or Cisco MAC DA untagged form, that frame will subject to the disposition set for the protocol at the virtual switch L2 control frame tunneling instance. This untagged L2 control frame has classified to the customer facing port based upon the untagged-ctrl-vs attribute of that port. — Egressing Customer-Facing Interface(s): The proper IEEE or Cisco MAC DA form of the frame will egress out all customer-facing interfaces of the virtual switch. From customer-to-customer, the L2PT form will not propagate. — Egressing Network-Facing Interface(s): The L2PT form of the frame will egress out all network-facing interfaces, except for the interface on which the frame ingressed.



If the L2 control frame has an IEEE or Cisco MAC DA, but is not decodable, that frame will be switched out all customer-facing and network-facing interfaces with no conversion of MAC DA.

Configuration L2 control frame tunneling directs untagged L2 control frames into a forwarding domain of a virtual switch. Every virtual switch is associated with an L2 control frame tunneling configuration container. The container storing the configuration information is called an L2 control frame tunneling instance, which includes: •

Administrative Status - whether or not L2 control frame tunneling is enabled or disabled for the virtual switch.



Fixed .1D priority - sets the .1D priority value applied to untagged L2 control frames to provide the baseline for Class of Service (CoS) treatment of the frame as it switches through the device. The priority value ranges from 0-7, where 7 has the highest priority and 0 has the lowest priority.



Protocol Disposition List - sets a user-defined list of protocols to be processed by L2 control frame tunneling along with a disposition action of forward or discard.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

13-8 L2 control frame tunneling configuration

For the related procedure, see “Configuring L2 control frame tunneling” on page 13-19.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

L2 control frame tunneling configuration 13-9

Procedure 13-1 Adding and removing untagged L2 control frame classification In order for untagged L2 control frames to be directed from a port to a forwarding domain, you need to add the untagged L2 control frame traffic classification (untagged-ctrl-vs) to the port and the port must have some membership in the designated virtual switch (virtual-switch ethernet add vs port vlan ). When the untagged-ctrl-vs attribute has been designated, then the L2 control frame tunneling instance of the specified virtual switch will be used to handle the untagged L2 control frames that ingress the logical-port. When the untagged-ctrl-vs attribute is removed, an untagged L2 control frame is processed at the port according the default disposition for its protocol. Step

Action

To add L2 control frame classification 1

Add L2 control frame traffic classification for a port: port set port untagged-ctrl-vs

To remove L2 control frame traffic classification 2

Remove L2 control frame traffic classification for a port: port unset port untagged-ctrl-vs —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

13-10 L2 control frame tunneling configuration

Procedure 13-2 Enabling and disabling L2 control frame tunneling You can enable an L2 control frame tunnel on each port of each device simultaneously. Note: The maximum number of L2 control frame tunnels in a device is equal to the number of physical ports available, that is, UNI plus NNI. When you disable L2 control frame tunneling for a specified virtual switch, any configured L2PT transforms will not occur, and untagged L2 control frames will be handled according to their default disposition. Step

Action

To enable L2 control frame tunneling 1

Enable L2 control frame tunneling: virtual-switch l2-cft enable vs where vs is the virtual switch that you want to enable L2 control frame tunneling on

To (optionally) set the destination MAC address 2

Disable L2 control frame tunneling: virtual-switch l2-cft l2pt-mac set

To disable L2 control frame tunneling 3

Disable L2 control frame tunneling: virtual-switch l2-cft disable vs where vs is the virtual switch that you want to disable L2 control frame tunneling on —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

L2 control frame tunneling configuration 13-11

Procedure 13-3 Adding and removing control protocols When adding a control protocol, you can optionally specify the disposition. If you do not specify the disposition, the default disposition for the control protocol is used. When you remove a control protocol from a L2 control frame tunneling instance, untagged L2 control frames will be processed according to the default disposition for the control protocol. Step

Action

To add a control protocol 1

Add a control protocol to an L2 control frame tunneling instance: virtual-switch l2-cft protocol add vs {ctrl-protocol <802.1x|all-bridges-block|bridgeblock|cisco-cdp|cisco-dtp|cisco-pagp|cisco-pvst|ciscostp-uplink-fast|cisco-udld|cisco-vtp|garpblock|gmrp|gvrp|lacp|lacp-markerlldp|oam|rstp|vlanbridge>} [disposition ] where vs

is the virtual switch.

ctrl-protocol

is the control protocol.

disposition

Valid values are: • discard, which discards the frame without further processing • forward, which directs the frame to the forwarding domain associated with the L2 control frame tunneling instance. Frames with this disposition are subject to all ingress and egress transformations configured on the interface. In addition, these frames are flooded to all logical interfaces attached to the virtual switch associated with the L2 control frame tunneling instance.

To remove a control protocol 2

Remove a control protocol from an L2 control frame tunneling instance: virtual-switch l2-cft protocol remove vs {ctrl-protocol <802.1x|all-bridgesblock|bridge-block|cisco-cdp|cisco-dtp|cisco-pagp|cisco-

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

13-12 L2 control frame tunneling configuration pvst|cisco-stp-uplink-fast|cisco-udld|cisco-vtp|garpblock|gmrp|gvrp|lacp|lacp-marker|lldp|oam|rstp|vlanbridge>} —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

L2 control frame tunneling configuration 13-13

Procedure 13-4 Setting the disposition of control protocols After you add a control protocol to an L2 control frame tunneling instance, you can modify its disposition. Step

Action

1

Set the disposition of a control protocol in an L2 control frame tunneling instance: virtual-switch l2-cft protocol set vs {ctrl-protocol <802.1x|all-bridges-block|bridgeblock|cisco-cdp|cisco-dtp|cisco-pagp|cisco-pvst|ciscostp-uplink-fast|cisco-udld|cisco-vtp|garpblock|gmrp|gvrp|lacp|lacp-marker|lldp|oam|rstp|vlanbridge>} {disposition } —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

13-14 L2 control frame tunneling configuration

Procedure 13-5 Setting L2 control frame tunneling attributes When an untagged frame is forwarded (encapsulated) by the L2 control frame tunneling instance, it is given a Fixed .1D priority value. The default Fixed .1D priority value is 6. You can modify it to a value between 0 and 7. The tunnel method controls the classification and processing of untagged L2 control frames. You can set the tunnel method for a virtual switch to one of two modes, transparent or L2PT. The default mode is L2PT. Step

Action

1

Set L2 control frame tunneling attributes: virtual-switch l2-cft set vs priority tunnel-method where vs

is the virtual switch name.

priority

is the .1D priority for encapsulated frames.

tunnel-method tunnel encapsulation method. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

L2 control frame tunneling configuration 13-15

Procedure 13-6 Displaying enabled L2 control frame tunneling instances You can display a summary of all currently enabled L2 control frame tunneling instances or details about a single L2 control frame tunneling instance specified by virtual switch. Note: L2 control frame tunneling is also called control protocol tunneling (CPT). The virtual switch ethernet show vs command shows the status and tunnel method for L2 control frame tunneling as CPT Status and CPT Method. Step

Action

1

To display a summary of enabled L2 control frame tunneling instances: virtual-switch l2-cft show

2

To display details about a specific enabled L2 control frame tunneling instance: virtual-switch l2-cft show [vs ] —end—

Examples The following example shows sample output for a summary of enabled L2 control frame tunneling instances. > virtual-switch l2-cft show +------------------------- L2 Ctrl Protocol Tunneling --------------------+ | Virtual Switch | Admin State | Tunnel Method | Priority | +------------------+-------------+-----------------------------+----------+ | cft_0 | Disabled | l2pt | 6 | | cft_1 | Disabled | l2pt | 6 | | cft_2 | Disabled | l2pt | 6 | | cft-vs | Disabled | l2pt | 6 | +------------------+-------------+-----------------------------+----------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

13-16 L2 control frame tunneling configuration

The following example shows sample output for details about a specific enabled L2 control frame tunneling instance. > virtual-switch l2-cft show vs cft-vs +--------- L2 Ctrl Protocol Tunneling - cft-vs -+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+--------------------------------+ | Admin State | Enabled | | Tunnel Method | l2pt | | Priority | 6 | +-----------------------+--------------------------------+ | Protocol Name | Disposition | +-----------------------+--------------------------------+ | rstp | forward | | lacp | forward | +-----------------------+--------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

L2 control frame tunneling configuration 13-17

Procedure 13-7 Displaying the L2 control frame classification for a port Display the status of L2 control frame classification for a specific port. Step

Action

1

Display the status of L2 control frame classification: port show port where

is the port to display the status of L2 control frame classification for.

The status of L2 control frame classification appears in the Untagged Ctrl VS field. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

13-18 L2 control frame tunneling configuration

Procedure 13-8 Displaying L2 control frame tunneling configuration in the configuration file L2 control frame tunneling related configuration is saved to the configuration file in various sections, including: •

VIRTUAL-CIRCUIT CONFIG:



VIRTUAL-SWITCH CONFIG:



L2 CFT PROTOCOL CONFIG:

Step

Action

1

Display configuration information: configuration show —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the configuration show command. > configuration show ... !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! ! VIRTUAL-CIRCUIT CONFIG: virtual circuits ! virtual-circuit ethernet create vc cft-vc0 vlan 100 ! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! ! VIRTUAL-SWITCH CONFIG: ! virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 1000 ! virtual-switch ethernet create vs cft-vs vc cft-vc0 ! virtual-switch ethernet add vs cft-vs port 9 ! port set port 9 untagged-ctrl-vs cft-vs ! ! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! ! L2 CFT CONFIG: ! virtual-switch l2-cft enable vs cft-vs ! virtual-switch l2-cft protocol add vs cft-vs ctrl-protocol rstp disposition forward virtual-switch l2-cft protocol add vs cft-vs ctrl-protocol lacp disposition forward ! 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

L2 control frame tunneling configuration 13-19

Procedure 13-9 Configuring L2 control frame tunneling In general, L2 control frame tunneling includes the following steps: •

Add a disposition of forward or discard for each protocol to be handled by L2 control frame tunneling to the L2 control frame tunneling Instance associated with the virtual switch to be used as an L2 control frame forwarding-domain.



Enable the L2 control frame tunneling Instance.



Specify the untagged-ctrl-vs for each customer-facing virtual switch interface member. Those interface members will handle untagged L2 control frames.



Enable L2PT mode at the virtual switch if L2PT transforms are to occur for tunneled L2 control frames.



Configure the L2 control frame fixed .1D priority value - this is the frame PCP that will go onto the frame when encapsulated. Note: For L2 control frame tunneling over MPLS you do not need to specify the untagged-ctrl-vs for each customer-facing virtual switch interface member.

Step

Action

1

Create the VLAN. vlan create vlan [name <String[31]>] where vlan is the VLAN identifier. [name <String[31]>]

is the name of the VLAN. If no name is specified, a default name is assigned with the form of “VLAN#. For example if the VLAN ID is 1000 the VLAN name will be “VLAN1000”. Note: VLAN names cannot begin with an integer. For example, 3PUD is not valid, but PUD3 is allowed.

2

Add the ingress and egress ports to the VLAN. vlan add vlan port where vlan is the VLAN created in step 1. port

is the list of ingress and egress ports.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

13-20 L2 control frame tunneling configuration 3

To confirm the creation of the VLAN, enter the following command: vlan show

4

Confirm that the ports are members of the VLAN. vlan show vlan where

5

is the VLAN created in step 1.

Create a virtual circuit and assign it to the VLAN. virtual-circuit ethernet create vc cft-vc vlan where

6

is the VLAN created in step 1.

To confirm the creation of the virtual circuit, enter the following command: virtual-circuit show

7

To confirm that the VLAN is associated with the virtual circuit, enter the following command: virtual-circuit show vc cft-vc

8

Add a reserved VLAN. virtual-switch add reserved-vlan where

is the reserved VLANs used to create virtual switch Instances. Note: This command is platform-dependent.

9

Create the virtual switch. virtual-switch ethernet create vs vc where vs vc virtual switch.

10

Add the ingress port to the virtual switch. virtual-switch ethernet add vs {port <port>} {vlan } {ip-interface } {encap-cospolicy <dot1dpri-inherit | fixed | ip-prec-inherit | phbg-inherit | port-inherit | vs-inherit>} {encap-fixed-

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

L2 control frame tunneling configuration 13-21 dot1dpri } [statistics ] [translate-tag ] {service-vlan-tpid <8100 | 9100 | 88A8>} where

11

vs

is the virtual switch created in step 9.

port

is the port name

Enable L2 control frame tunneling for the virtual switch. virtual-switch l2-cft enable vs where vs

12

Add the control protocols to the protocol disposition list with the desired disposition for the L2 control frame tunneling instance. virtual-switch l2-cft protocol add vs {ctrl-protocol <802.1x|allbridgesblock|bridge-block|cisco-cdp|ciscodtp|ciscopagp|cisco-pvst|cisco-stpuplink- fast|cisco-udld|ciscovtp|garpblock|gmrp|gvrp|lacp|lacpmarker| lldp|oam|rstp|vlan-bridge>} [disposition ] where vs

is the virtual switch created in step 9.

is the control protocol to add. {ctrl-protocol <802.1x|allbridgesblock| bridge-block|ciscocdp|ciscodtp| ciscopagp|ciscopvst|ciscostpuplinkfast|ciscoudld|ciscovtp|garpblock| gmrp|gvrp|lacp|lac pmarker| lldp|oam|rstp|vlanbridge>} [disposition is the disposition. If left unspecified, the disposition is set to ] the default disposition for the specified control protocol.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

13-22 L2 control frame tunneling configuration 13

Add the L2 control frame classification to the port for ingress traffic. port set port untagged-ctrl-vs where

14

port

is the port created in step 10.

untagged-ctrl-vs

is the virtual switch created in step 9.

To confirm the L2 control frame tunnel configuration of the virtual switch, enter the following command: virtual-switch l2-cft show vs where untagged-ctrl-vs

is the virtual switch created in step 9.

—end—

Example The following example shows how you can configure virtual switches and ports to classify untagged L2 control frames and then transform them into the L2PT form. The ingress port classification allows untagged L2 control frames and frames with VLAN tag 100. The L2 control frame tunneling instance is enabled for the virtual switch. Also, RSTP and LACP are added to the protocol disposition list with the disposition of forwarding. Create the VLAN 100. vlan create vlan 100 Add the ingress and egress ports to VLAN 100. vlan add vlan 100 port 6 Confirm the creation of VLAN 100. vlan show Confirm the ports are members of VLAN 100. vlan show vlan 100 Create a virtual circuit and assign it to VLAN 100.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

L2 control frame tunneling configuration 13-23

virtual-circuit ethernet create vc cft-vc vlan 100 Confirm the creation of the virtual circuit. virtual-circuit show +------ ETHERNET VIRTUAL CIRCUIT TABLE -----+ | Name | VLAN | +-----------------+-------------------------+ | cft-vc | 100 | +-----------------+-------------------------+

Confirm that VLAN 100 is associated with the virtual circuit. virtual-circuit show vc cft-vc +------------ ETHERNET VIRTUAL CIRCUIT INFO ----------+ | Parameter | Value | +----------------------+------------------------------+ | Name | cft-vc | | ID | 1 | | Provider VLAN | (100) VLAN#100 | | Psuedo-Wire Type | untagged | | VS Using | | +-----------------------------------------------------+

Add reserved VLAN 1000. virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 1000 Create the virtual switch. virtual-switch ethernet create vs cft-vs vc cft-vc Add the ingress port to the virtual switch. virtual-switch ethernet add vs cft-vs port 1 Enable L2 control frame tunneling for the virtual switch. virtual-switch l2-cft enable vs cft-vs Add the control protocols to the protocol disposition list with the desired disposition for the L2 control frame tunneling instance. virtual-switch l2-cft protocol add vs cft-vs ctrlprotocol rstp disposition forward

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

13-24 L2 control frame tunneling configuration

virtual-switch l2-cft protocol add vs cft-vs ctrlprotocol lacp disposition forward Add the L2 control frame classification to the port for ingress traffic. port set port 1 untagged-ctrl-vs cft-vs Confirm the L2 control frame tunnel configuration of the virtual switch. virtual-switch l2-cft show vs cft-vs +--------- L2 Ctrl Protocol Tunneling - cft-vs -+ | Parameter | Value | +-----------------------+-----------------------------+ | Admin State | Enabled | | Tunnel Method | l2pt | | Priority | 6 | +-----------------------+-----------------------------+ | Protocol Name | Disposition | +-----------------------+-----------------------------+ | rstp | forward | | lacp | forward | +-----------------------+-----------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

L2 control frame tunneling configuration 13-25

Procedure 13-10 Configuring L2 control frame tunneling mode for MEF CE 2.0 compliance Configure L2 control frame tunneling mode for MEF Carrier Ethernet (CE) 2.0 compliance. Table 13-2 describes the behavior changes that occur when a device configured for CE 2.0 mode is configured for CE 1.0 mode. Table 13-2 CE 2.0 mode to CE 1.0 mode behavior changes CE 2.0 Mode Case

CE 1.0 mode

CE2-Bridge-block

0B,0F,0C,0D

Bridge block including 0B,0F,0C,0D

1

forward

forward

forward

forward

2

discard

discard

discard

discard

3

forward

discard

forward

forward

4

discard

forward

discard

discard

Note: If L2 control frame tunneling is set to CE 2.0 mode and the device is downgraded to a release that does not support CE 2.0 mode, L2 control frame tunneling reverts to a CE 1.0 configuration with the behavior changes noted in Table 13-2. Step

Action

1

Set the L2 control frame tunneling mode: virtual-switch l2-cft set mode <mef-ce1|mef-ce2> where mode <mefce1|mef-ce2>

is the mode. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

13-26 L2 control frame tunneling configuration

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-1

Quality of Service configuration

14-

This chapter details Quality of Service (QoS) features of the system software, including: •

“Class of Services (CoS) policies and mapping”



“Traffic profiling”



“Traffic profiling with hierarchical ingress metering”



“Congestion management”



“Egress scheduling”



“Egress shaping”

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-2 Quality of Service configuration

Class of Services (CoS) policies and mapping The system software associates an internal resolved CoS (R-CoS) value and resolved Color (R-COLOR) with every ingress frame that classifies to a port. The R-CoS and R-COLOR values provide the baseline for CoS treatment of a frame as it switches through the device. The R-CoS value ranges from 0-7, where 7 has the highest priority and 0 has the lowest priority. R-COLOR values are green and yellow. The initial R-CoS and R-Color values depend upon the configuration of the of the port, including virtual switch memberships. As of release 6.9.1, traffic profiles support the ability to remark the meter's colored output from yellow to green, green to yellow, or leave as-is on a per traffic profile basis. In addition, the RCOS value can be remarked based on a frame’s meter color output. See “Traffic profiling” on page 4 for more details. The resolved CoS Policy configured on a port is ignored when it is involved in one or more virtual switch (subscriber) memberships. With that configuration, the R-CoS and R-Color is determined by the encap CoS policy (and priority) that is configured at the virtual switch. However, when the encap CoS policy configured on a Virtual Switch Member is port-inherit, the resolved Cos Policy of the port is applied. Note: If an EVPL member is set to use the port-inherit policy is set to l3dscp, then all of the L3 frames in the other EVPLs follow the L3 mapping table, even if set to vs-inherit or fixed. If the frames are not L3 and are tagged, then the L2 portion of the mapping table is in effect. If the frames are not L3 and are untagged without an IP header, then the R-CoS and RColor are set according to the port’s fixed setting. For untagged frames, the R-CoS and R-Color are set according to the port’s fixed setting. The Egress Frame CoS Policy is configured per port and defines when to use the Egress Frame CoS Map to remark an egress L2 frame's PCP and DEI fields based on the internal R-CoS and R-Color values. Figure 14-1 shows which policy and portion of the map is in effect depending on the port’s configuration.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-3 Figure 14-1 Resolved CoS Policy and Mapping

Yes

Yes

VS Encap CoS Policy?

EPL Present?

No

Other EVPL member CoS policy?

UNI Virtual Switch (VS)?

No (VLAN only or NNI)

No

1 or more EVPLs in port-inherit?

L3 DSCP F-CoS>R-CoS CoS

Yes

Port Resolved CoS Policy?

L3 DSCP F-CoS>R-CoS Color

l3-dscp

Outer .1d F-CoS>R-CoS Color

dot1d-pri

not L3, use L2 Outer.1d F-CoS>R-CoS CoS not tagged, use port

fixed

Port Fixed CoS

Port Fixed Color

VS Encap Fixed CoS Outer.1d

Outer .1d Derived Color

Outer.1d F-CoS>R-CoS CoS

Outer .1d Derived Color

fixed-rcos/ fixed-rcolor

vs-inherit

port-inherit

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-4 Quality of Service configuration

Traffic profiling Traffic profiling classifies traffic based on different classification rules and meters the traffic flow to configured EIR/PIR and CIR values defined in kbps. Depending upon how the traffic flow compares to these rates, the R-COLOR of each frame is set to a specific value upon ingress. Traffic ingressing at a rate: •

Up to CIR will be marked Green and allowed through.



Above CIR and less than PIR will be marked Yellow and allowed through.



Above PIR will be marked Red and dropped. Note: On a 100 Mbps port the CIR cannot be set to the full amount of physical bandwidth of the port (100 Mbps). This is because 1 Mb of bandwidth is reserved for the ingress and egress of BPDUs and other high priority traffic. To commit all of the physical bandwidth to a CIR could create a serious condition in which the device does not receive critical frames. To avoid this issue, the CIR should only be configured to a maximum of 99 Mbps.

Determining classification attributes In order for traffic to classify to a traffic profile, you need to configure classifiers for the selected mode by setting the port’s standard profile. Even though classifiers are not mandatory upon creation, the traffic profile will not work without configuring appropriate classifiers. Classifiers include: •

dot1dpri - Classifies to the traffic profile based on 802.1D priority value ranging 0-7. Up to 8 classifiers are supported per port.



ip-prec - Classifies to the traffic profile based on IP precedence value ranging 0-7. Up to 8 classifiers are supported per port.



dscp - Classifies to the traffic profile based on DSCP. Up to 64 classifiers are supported per port.



dscp-remark-policy - leave ingressing SVLAN 802.1p bit value as-is or mark with a fixed value.



vlan - Classifies to the traffic profile based on VLAN ID. One VLAN classifier is supported per port per profile.



vs - Classifies the traffic profile based on the Ethernet VS ID. Note that traffic profiles cannot classify to an MPLS VS.



untagged - Classifies to the traffic profile if the traffic has no VLAN tag. Any other classifiers will be ignored, however, they will consume resources, if configured. To conserve resources when using the untagged classifier, clear any other classifiers from the traffic profile. One untagged classifier is supported per port per profile.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-5

Note 1: Untagged traffic classifies first by the selected “mode.” Unless a profile is configured to specifically classify untagged traffic, untagged traffic with an IP header can classify to an IP precedence or DSCP based traffic profile, Note 2: Traffic profiles with the untagged classifier cannot be assigned to ARP or non-conforming per port entries. VLAN classifiers can be combined with 802.1D, IP precedence, or DSCP, depending upon the allocation of hardware resources. The maximum number of classifiers (including ARP and non-conforming) that are configurable per mode and per port (without any adjustment to resource management) are listed in Table 14-1.* Table 14-1 Configurable classifiers Classifier

Per mode

Per port (3940, 5140)

Per port Per port (3960, (3916, 3930, 3931, 5142, 5150, 5160) 3932)

dot1dpri

8

8

8

8

ip-prec (ipp)

8

8

8

8

dscp

64

64

64

64

vlan or vs*

1

64

1024

4096

vlan or vs/dot1dpri* 8

128

1024

4096

vlan or vs/ip-prec*

8

128

1024

4096

vlan or vs/dscp*

64

128

1024

4096

untagged

1

1

1

1

Note 1: The actual number of configurable classifiers will be less due to reserved profiles (ARP/non-conforming) per port. Each port automatically consumes 2 classifiers, 1 for ARP and 1 for non-conforming standard profiles. Note 2: When setting multiple classifiers in one set command an overlap condition can occur, depending on the order in which the classifiers are added. To set both a CoS (dot1d, DSCP, IP) classifier with a VLAN classifier, set the CoS classifier first and then the VLAN classifier. For more information a boo ut traffic profiling error codes, refer to “Traffic profiling error codes”.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-6 Quality of Service configuration

Note 3: *The VS maximum is up to the configurable limits of the system. The device will reach the VS limit before the classification limit is reached. For example, on a 3960 512 virtual switches can be configured even though 4096 classifiers can be configured.

Determining Metering Attributes As of release 6.9.1, the meter provisioning mode can be set to either EIR or PIR, and PIR will begin to be deprecated. The mode that is chosen dictates how provisioning is accepted, displayed, and saved. If EIR is specified, PIR provisioning is disallowed. Metering is also defined at the port’s standard profile by the following attributes: •

cir - Committed information rate in kbits ranging from 0 up to the administrative port speed. (Mandatory, if PIR is not specified).



eir - Excess information rate in kbits ranging from 0 up to the administrative port speed. (PIR = CIR+EIR when EIR is specified)



pir - Peak information rate in kbits ranging from 0 up to the administrative port speed. (Mandatory, if CIR is not specified). Note 1: On 3940 and 5140 switches, the configured CIR and PIR always normalize to a rate equal to or greater than the configured value in 64 kbps increments in order to be processed by the hardware. Also, the PIR will normalize to be equal to or greater than the configured CIR. On 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 switches, the configured CIR and PIR always normalize to a rate in varying increments depending upon the sum of the configured rates of the CBS and EBS and the configured rate of the PIR. Note 2: SAOS 6.x devices do not support throughput beyond actual port speed. However, 6.x devices will allow the user to configure a CIR value beyond the corresponding port speed. A warning message is displayed. If the sum of the CBS and EBS is: — 0 or less than 16 M, the CIR and PIR increment in steps of 64 kbps — 16 M and less than 32 M, the CIR and PIR increment by 128 kbps — 32 M and less than 64 M, the CIR and PIR increment by 256 kbps — 64 M and less than 128 M, the CIR and PIR increment by 512kbps — 128 M and less than 512 M, the CIR and PIR increment by 1024 kbps If the PIR is: — 0 or less than 16.78 Gbps, the CIR and PIR increment in steps of 64 kbps — 16.78 Gbps and less than 33.55 Gbps, CIR and PIR increment by 128 kbps

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-7

— 33.55 Gbps and less than 40 Gbps, CIR and PIR increment by 256 kbps •

cbs - Committed Burst Size (CBS) in kilobytes (kbytes). On 3940 and 5140 switches, the value entered for the CBS is adjusted by rounding up to the nearest power of 2 from 4 (22) up to 16384 (214) in Kbytes. On 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 switches, the CBS entered value, ranging from 0-262144 Kbytes, is adjusted by rounding up depending upon the sum of the CBS and EBS and the configured rate of the PIR using the same criteria as previously described for the CIR and PIR.



ebs - Excess burst size (EBS) in kbytes. On 3940 and 5140 switches, the EBS entered is adjusted to fit the Peak Burst Sized (PBS), as defined in hardware based upon the CBS value, minus the CBS value. The PBS is rounded by rounding up to the nearest power of 2 from 4 (22) up to 16384 (214) in Kbytes, and the EBS is rounded to fit these increments when added to the CBS. For example, entering CBS of 4 Kbytes, and EBS of 8 Kbytes would equal a PBS of 12 Kbytes. Since the nearest power of 2 increment to 12 is 16, the EBS is rounded up to 12 Kbytes. On 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 switches, the EBS entered value, ranging from 0-262144 Kbytes, is the configured rate of the PIR using the same criteria as previously described for the CIR and PIR. Note: If CIR is equal to PIR, and CBS and EBS values are not specified, the system applies the default burst to both CBS and EBS upon a reboot. This does not apply to HIM profiles.

For the related procedures, see “Configuring per-port standard traffic profiling” on page 14-53 and “Configuring per-port and per-VLAN standard traffic profiling” on page 14-54.

Traffic profiling with hierarchical ingress metering On the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms, traffic profiling supports HIM (hierarchical ingress metering). With hierarchical ingress metering, frames classify to a parent traffic profile for metering, and are fed to a child traffic profile for additional metering. Hierarchical ingress metering is supported by setting the per-port traffic profiling mode to one of the following types: •

Hierarchical port (hierarchical-port) - for port based classification at the parent traffic profile. Note: Untagged traffic is treated as non-conforming traffic and passes through the “default” profile at the child level, unless a child profile is configured to classify untagged traffic,

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-8 Quality of Service configuration



Hierarchical VLAN (hierarchical-vlan) - for unique VLANs or a “default” classification for the parent traffic profile. Only one “default” profile may exist per parent or child. No other classification in the default profile.



Advanced - supports both hierarchical and non-hierarchical traffic. See Advanced classification mode. Note 1: Untagged traffic is treated as non-conforming traffic and passes through the “default” profile at the parent level, unless a child profile or a separate profile at the parent level (above the default) is configured to classify untagged traffic.

Advanced classification mode In the advanced traffic profile classification mode, both hierarchical and nonhierarchical traffic profiles can coexist. In addition to being able to configure HIM and standard-profiles on the same port, the system can classify on a VS name (or VS+VLAN, VS+COS and/or VS+VLAN+COS), as shown in Figure 14-2. Advanced mode is the only mode that supports this type of EVC based classification. When configuring EVC-based traffic-profiling, the following dependencies must be considered: •

If the traffic-profile is classifying on a VS, the port that the profile is created on must be a member (EPL or EVPL) of the Virtual Switch that is being used as a classifier. Otherwise an error is generated when trying to create this traffic-profile.



If the traffic-profile is classifying on VS+VLAN, the port that the profile is created on must be a member of the VS. If it is added as an EVPL, the VLAN used in the traffic-profile must match the VLAN of the VS member.



VS members cannot be removed if the port that they are on still has trafficprofiles classifying on the VS. All traffic-profiles on the port must be deleted before removing the port as a member of the VS.



A VS cannot be deleted if it still has traffic-profiles using it as a classifier. The traffic-profiles must be deleted first and then the VS can be deleted.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-9 Figure 14-2 EVC advanced mode classification

IBP per EVC

IBP per CoS per EVC

HIBP per CoS per EVC

IBP per EVC

EVC ID1

EVC2

CE- VLAN CoS 0,1,2,3

IBP per CoS

CE- VLAN CoS 4,5

IBP per CoS

CE- VLAN CoS 6,7

IBP per CoS

CoS 0,1,2,3

IBP per CoS

CoS 4,5

IBP per CoS

EVC ID3

Shared BW

When advanced mode is configured, the parent ports must have unique virtual switches across all parent profiles. There can be no overlap in parent classification. Also, child level classification cannot overlap any other classifier in use, that is, the profiles cannot overlap with other parent/child or other nonhierarchical profiles. A T2 untagged profile is the only exception as it could overlap other DSCP/IPP child classifiers under a given parent. If a profile is created without a parent in advanced mode, it is assumed to be a standard profile without hierarchical metering, and it cannot be added to a parent later. It must be deleted and re-created with the parent associated at the time of creation. In addition, a child profile can only be removed from a parent by deleting the child profile. Note: In advanced mode if the parent is using a VLAN classifier, only h-vlan child modes are allowed, and vlan-cos generates an error. Likewise, if the parent classification is a VS, then any child mode other than vlan-cos generates an error. For the related procedures, see “Configuring hierarchical VLAN traffic profiles” on page 14-56, “Configuring hierarchical port traffic profiles” on page 14-61, “Configuring VS classification for standard traffic profiles” on page 14-63, and “Configuring VS classification for HIM traffic profiles” on page 14-64. With standard traffic profiling, a single port cannot support duplicate classification, such as the same VLAN or untagged. Hierarchical ingress metering provides the ability to classify based on multiple classifications and values to the same VLAN at different metering rates for the same port.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-10 Quality of Service configuration

When changing to or from a hierarchical mode, all traffic profile must be removed from the port. Also, the arp-standard-profile and nonconformstandard-profile per port attributes do not apply to ports in a hierarchical traffic profiling mode. Before changing the parent’s child mode, be sure to remove any child profiles. Note: The classifier-mode attribute does not affect the “default” profile at the child level for hierarchical port mode. Also, it does not affect the “default” profile at the parent level for hierarchical VLAN mode.

Congestion management Congestion management processing determines whether a frame should be enqueued or dropped. Congestion management is configured per queue based on a congestion avoidance profile associated with each CoS queue. This profile contains the drop parameters for traffic. Drop parameters are defined by the following general attributes: •

Drop Threshold - defines the percentage of the queue capacity that is reached before packets are eligible to be dropped.



Drop Probability - define the percentage of packets that are dropped once the threshold is exceeded.

By dropping packets before the queue fills up, congestion management controls the average buffer queue size. As packets are dropped, the packet source automatically decreases its transmission rate until all the packets reach their destination, indicating that the congestion is cleared. TCP is an example of a protocol that dynamically adapts to congestion-induced frame loss. Depending upon the hardware platform, the system software supports Simple Random Early Detection (sRED) profiles or simple Weighted Random Early Discard (sWRED) profiles for congestion avoidance that are enabled by default. You can configure custom congestion avoidance profiles for your platform and configure the egress port queues to use them.

Creating and modifying sRED profiles The 3940 and 5140 platforms support sRED profiles. By default there is one congestion avoidance profile (Default-SRED) in the system that all queues reference, and each port supports two default sRED curves per queue, one for yellow traffic and one for green traffic. Each sRED curve supports a lower drop threshold and drop probability. The upper threshold is not configurable, and supports 128 packets per port. When the number of packets are below the lower threshold, no packets are dropped. When they exceed the lower threshold, and are below the upper threshold, they are dropped according to the drop probability value. When the 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-11

number of packets reaches the upper threshold, all packets are dropped (100 percent drop probability) until the number of packets is below the upper threshold. For yellow packets, the default drop threshold is 50 percent. For green packets, the default drop threshold is 75 percent. This means that the queue capacity can be filled with 75 percent green packets, and 50 percent yellow packets before the packets are eligible to be dropped. Additionally, both sRED curves assign a drop probability percentage for green (0.09765625 percent or 1/1024) and yellow (6.25 percent or 1/16) packets per CoS queue that is applied via a congestion avoidance profile.You can create up to 7 custom congestion avoidance profiles and modify their configuration. Lower drop threshold values for green or yellow traffic range from 1-100 percent. Drop probability values for green or yellow traffic include: •

100pct - 100 percent



6.25pct - 6.25 percent or 1/16.



3.125pct - 3.125 percent or 1/32.



1.5625pct - 1.5625 percent or 1/64.



0.78125pct - 0.78125 percent or 1/128.



0.390625pct - 0.390625 percent or 1/256.



0.1953125pct - 0.1953125 percent or 1/512.



0.09765625pct - 0.09765625 percent or 1/1024.

If you create a custom sRED profile without specifying the thresholds or drop probability values, the profile will be the same as the Default-SRED profile.

Creating and modifying sWRED profiles on the 3960 The 3960 platform supports simple Weighted Random Early Discard (sWRED) profiles to handle three types of traffic: •

TCP green traffic



TCP yellow traffic (has been metered to yellow from traffic profiling)



Non-TCP traffic

For each traffic type, an sWRED profile supports an sWRED curve with a configurable start threshold (1-100 percent), upper threshold (1-100 percent), and a maximum drop probability. Maximum drop probability values include: •

100pct - 100 percent



75pct - 75 percent



50pct - 50 percent



25pct - 25 percent

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-12 Quality of Service configuration



10pct - 10 percent



9pct - 9 percent



8pct - 8 percent



7pct - 7 percent



6pct - 6 percent



5pct - 5 percent



4pct - 4 percent



3pct - 3 percent



2pct - 2 percent



1pct - 1 percent



0pct - 0 percent

When the number of packets are below the start threshold, no packets are dropped. When they exceed the start threshold, and are below the upper threshold, they are dropped according to the maximum drop probability value. When the number of packets reaches the upper threshold, all packets are dropped according to the maximum drop probability until the number of packets is below the upper threshold. The default sWRED profile (Default-S-WRED) on the 3960 is configured as follows: •

TCP green start threshold - 75 percent



TCP green maximum upper threshold - 100 percent



TCP green maximum drop probability - 0 percent



TCP yellow start threshold - 50 percent



TCP yellow maximum upper threshold - 100 percent



TCP yellow maximum drop probability - 100 percent



Non-TCP start threshold - 50 percent



Non-TCP maximum upper threshold - 100 percent



Non-TCP maximum drop probability - 100 percent

If you create a custom sWRED profile without specifying the thresholds or drop probability values, the profile will be the same as the Default-S-WRED profile.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-13

Creating and modifying sWRED profiles on the 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 5142, 5150, and 5160 The 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms support sWRED profiles to handle two types of traffic: •

Green traffic



Yellow traffic (has been metered to yellow from traffic profiling)

For each traffic type, an sWRED profile supports an sWRED curve with a configurable lower threshold (1-100 percent), upper threshold (1-100 percent), and a maximum drop probability. Maximum drop probability values include: •

100pct - 100 percent



75pct - 75 percent



50pct - 50 percent



25pct - 25 percent



10pct - 10 percent



9pct - 9 percent



8pct - 8 percent



7pct - 7 percent



6pct - 6 percent



5pct - 5 percent



4pct - 4 percent



3pct - 3 percent



2pct - 2 percent



1pctv1 percent



0pct - 0 percent

When the number of packets are below the lower threshold, no packets are dropped. When they exceed the lower threshold, and are below the upper threshold, they are dropped according to the maximum drop probability value. When the number of packets reaches the upper threshold, all packets are dropped according to the maximum drop probability until the number of packets is below the upper threshold. The default sWRED profile (Default-S-WRED) is configured as follows: •

Green lower threshold - 75 percent



Green upper threshold - 100 percent



Green maximum drop probability - 0 percent

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-14 Quality of Service configuration



Yellow lower threshold - 50 percent



Yellow upper threshold - 100 percent



Yellow maximum drop probability - 100 percent

If you create a custom WRED profile without specifying the thresholds or drop probability values, the profile will be the same as the Default-S-WRED profile.

Egress scheduling Scheduling determines the order in which the physical queues are processed. By default, the system software follows the strict priority scheduling. CoS queue 7 has the highest priority while CoS queue 0 has the lowest priority. When contention (or congestion) for bandwidth occurs in the system, the higher priority CoS queues will be serviced before the lower priority CoS queues. With the default scheduler algorithm (strict), the 802.1p priority (VLAN priority in the frame) is used to map to an internal priority (resolved CoS) which is then mapped to a physical CoS queue. The result is that frames with a higher priority will transmit before those with a lower priority. Strict priority queuing reduces resources for low priority packets, but ensures lowlatency servicing of high-priority packets. In addition to strict priority, three other scheduling methods can be configured along with a scheduler weight. The scheduler weight determines the priority of the queue in relation to the other queues in the egress port queue group. When configured for any of these scheduler modes, if the scheduling weight of a queue in the egress port queue group is set to 0, the scheduler will treat that queue as if it is in strict priority mode. •

Weighted Round Robin (WRR) - queues in the queuing group are scheduled in a weighted fashion according to the per-queue schedulerweight.



Round-Robin (RR) - queues in the queuing group are scheduled as if all queues in the queuing group have equal weighting.



Weighted Deficit Round Robin (WDRR) - queues in the queuing group are scheduled in a weighted fashion according to the per-queue schedulerweight and frame size. When using this scheduler algorithm, you can configure the scheduler granularity (wdrr-scheduler-granularity) to adjust pool sizes in which the weights are applied. This setting is especially useful when using port speeds lower than 10Mbps. Small pool sizes have less latency, and more jitter. Larger sizes have more latency, and less jitter. The value entered will be rounded to the nearest largest size of 50, 100, 200, 400, 800, or 1600 Kbytes. The default value is 1600 Kbytes.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-15

Note: When egress scheduling is set to either WRR or WDRR on 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932 or 3960 devices, the CIR and CBS settings are ignored. Do not configure CIR and CBS for WRR and WDRR scheduling modes. Instead, configure the weight values to distribute the traffic associated with each queue. The default scheduler weights per queue are as follows: •

Queue 0: 20



Queue 1: 30



Queue 2: 40



Queue 3: 50



Queue 4: 60



Queue 5: 70



Queue 6: 80



Queue 7: 0

Egress shaping A shaper-rate and burst size can be configured on the egress port queue group that limits the amount of egress bandwidth (in Kbps) a port uses(0 to 40 Gbps) and controls the amount of traffic (in Kbytes) that can burst (0 to 256 Mbytes). The configured shaper-rate normalizes to a rate in varying increments depending upon the sum of the configured burst size. In order to guarantee CIR, the individually-set CIR on queues must not be oversubscribed for the egress port that the frames are egressing. That is, the sum of all CIRs for the physical queues and the virtual queues in a queue group on a port should not exceed the administrative (and operational) speed of the port. When the shaper rate of the egress port queue group is set, it sets a single Information Rate (IR) regardless of the CIR and EIR of the individual queues. To guarantee CIR, the sum of the CIRs on each queue cannot exceed the IR of the egress port queue group. When a queue or an attribute of the egress queue group of an aggregated port is modified, that value is updated at each queue or physical port of the aggregation, with the exception of the shaper rate bandwidth, which differs depending upon the platform: •

3940, 5140 - The shaper rate bandwidth is divided equally among the number of distributing ports. This means that the shaper rate can be used to control the total bandwidth that the ports share, otherwise the ports would each have an amount of bandwidth that would add up to a cumulative amount of bandwidth for the aggregation member ports. The default shaper rate is the same as the administrative port speed.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-16 Quality of Service configuration



3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, 5160 - The shaper rate bandwidth for the link aggregation defaults to a bandwidth equal to the maximum number of 10 Gig ports allowed in a link aggregation, regardless if the link aggregation consists of 1 Gig or 10 Gig ports.

For example, on a 3960 device, the maximum number of 10 Gig ports allowed in a link aggregation is 2; therefore, the default Egress Shaper-Rate Bandwidth for the link aggregation is 20 Gbps. For a 5150 device, the maximum number of 10 Gig ports allowed in a link aggregation is 4; therefore, the default Egress Shaper-Rate Bandwidth for the link aggregation is 40 Gbps. When you set the burst size, the value is rounded to the nearest larger 4Kbyte block. The burst size is not divided among ports in an aggregation group. The default burst size is 10240 Kbytes.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-17

Procedure 14-1 Configuring Class of Services (CoS) policies on a port You can configure CoS policies for each port. Note: The egress frame CoS policy setting is not available on 3940 and 5140 devices. The resolved CoS Policy options are: •

Outer .1D mapped (dot1d-tag1-cos) -The Priority Code Point (PCP)/Layer 2 (L2) CoS 802.1D priority value from the outer-tag is mapped to R-CoS and R-Color values derived from the Resolved CoS Mapping table. When this policy is applied, CoS mapping is in trusted mode. This is the default for all ports.



Fixed CoS (fixed-cos), Fixed R-CoS (fixed-rcos) and Fixed R-COLOR (fixed-rcolor) - CoS values in the frame are ignored and fixed R-CoS is applied to the frame from the Fixed Resolved CoS and Fixed Resolved Color value for the port. When this policy is applied, CoS mapping is in untrusted mode. The default Fixed Resolved CoS value is 0 and the default Fixed Resolved Color is green.



Layer 3 DSCP CoS (l3-dscp-cos) - The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) CoS value from the Layer 3 Type Of Service (TOS) byte is mapped to an R-CoS and R-Color value from the Resolved CoS Mapping table. When this policy is applied, CoS mapping is in trusted mode.

The egress frame CoS policy options are to ignore or to re-mark the L2 frame's PCP and DEI fields based on the internal R-CoS and R-Color values (rcos-to-l2-outer-pcp-map).

Step

Action

To set the CoS policies and mapping 1

Set the resolved CoS policy: port set port [resolved-cos-policy <dot1dtag1-cos|fixed-cos|l3-dscp-cos>] [fixed-rcos ] [egress-frame-cospolicy ] —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-18 Quality of Service configuration

Example The following example sets a resolved CoS policy. port set port 1 resolved-cos-policy dot1d-tag1-cos

The following example sets the policy to a fixed resolved CoS and fixed resolved color. port set port 1 resolved-cos-policy fixed-cos fixed-rcos 0 fixed-rcolor yellow

The following example sets an egress-frame-cos-policy. port set port 1 egress-frame-cos-policy rcos-to-l2-outer-pcp-map

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-19

Procedure 14-2 Displaying the CoS policy and mapping on a port The Resolved CoS Policy, Egress Frame CoS Policy, Fixed Resolved Color, and Fixed Resolved CoS settings can be displayed for a specific port. Step

Action

1

Display the settings: port show port where port is the port that you want to display settings for. —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for the port show port command. port show port 1 +-------------------------------- PORT 1 INFO ----------------------------+ | Field | Admin | Oper | +-------------------------+------------------------+----------------------+ | Type | GigEthernet | ... | Fixed Resolved CoS | 0 | 0 | | Fixed Resolved Color | green | green | ... | Egress Frame Cos Policy | ignore | ignore | ... | Resolved CoS Policy | dot1d-tag1-cos | dot1d-tag1-cos | ... +-------------------------+------------------------+----------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-20 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-3 Creating a resolved CoS map Table 14-2 shows the default resolved CoS map (DefaultFcosRcos). Table 14-2 Default resolved CoS map Frame PCP/L2 CoS 802.1D

DEI/CFI

Frame L3 DSCP CoS

R-CoS

R-COLOR

0

0

0-7

0

Green

0

1

0-7

0

Green

1

0

8-15

1

Green

1

1

8-15

1

Green

2

0

16-23

2

Green

2

1

16-23

2

Green

3

0

24-31

3

Green

3

1

24-31

3

Green

4

0

32-39

4

Green

4

1

32-39

4

Green

5

0

40-47

5

Green

5

1

40-47

5

Green

6

0

48-55

6

Green

6

1

48-55

6

Green

7

0

56-63

7

Green

7

1

56-63

7

Green

Untagged

Untagged

Untagged

Ingress port fixed PCP/L2 CoS 802.1D value

Ingress port fixed R-COLOR

In addition to the default resolved CoS map, you can configure customized maps and assign them to ports.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-21

You can configure 1 custom resolved CoS map per port, including the following types of mapping: •

L2 CoS - maps the customer PCP/L2 CoS 802.1D and DEI/CFI priority to R-CoS and R-COLOR.



L3 CoS - maps the customer L3 CoS DSCP to R-CoS and R-COLOR.

Step

Action

1

Create a custom resolved CoS map: traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map create {cos-map } where cos-map

is the identifier for the custom resolved CoS map.

—end—

Example The following example creates a custom resolved CoS map with an identifier of custom-1. traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map create cos-map custom-1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-22 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-4 Modifying a resolved CoS map You can modify the attributes for the default and all custom resolved CoS maps. Step

Action

1

Modify a custom resolved CoS map: traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map set {cosmap <String[15]>} [dot1dpri-cos <0-7>] [dot1dpri-dei ] [l3-cos-dscp ] [mpls-tc <String>] {r-cos } [r-color ] where cos-map <String[15]>

is the identifier for the custom resolved CoS map.

[mpls-tc <String>]

overloads the equivalent dot1dpri value with dot1dei=0 entry. The mpls-tc values apply only to MPLS enabled devices. —end—

Example The following example modifies the attributes of the resolved CoS map custom-1. traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map set cos-map custom-1 dot1dpricos 1,2,3,4 r-cos 1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-23

Procedure 14-5 Setting the resolved CoS map for a port By default, ports are set to use the default Resolved CoS Map. You can modify the port to use a custom resolved CoS map or to reset to the default. In addition, you can configure the port to remark the frame’s SVLAN Layer 2 CoS value with the mapped R-CoS and R-COLOR values mapped from the Customer DSCP or 802.1D priority. Note: Remarking the frame’s Layer 3 DSCP CoS value with a mapped DSCP value is implemented with traffic profile configuration. Step

Action

1

Set the resolved CoS map for a port: port set port resolved-cos-map resolved-cos-remark-l2 where

is the port that you want to set a resolved CoS map for.



is the identifier for the resolved CoS map. —end—

Example The following example sets the resolved CoS map for a port. port set port 1 resolved-cos-map custom-1 resolved-cos-remark-l2 true

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-24 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-6 Deleting a custom R-CoS map You can delete custom resolved CoS maps, but not the default. Note: A custom R-CoS queue map cannot be deleted if it is assigned to a port. Step

Action

1

Set the port using the custom R-CoS map to the default R-CoS map: port set port ingress-to-egress-qmap DefaultRCOS traffic-services queuing queue-map delete rcos-map custom-map-1

2

Delete a resolved CoS map: traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map delete cosmap where cos-map

is the resolved CoS map to delete.

—end—

Example The following example deletes the custom resolved CoS map name custom-1. port set port 9 ingress-to-egress-qmap Default-RCOS traffic-services queuing queue-map delete rcos-map custom-map-1 traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map delete cos-map custom-1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-25

Procedure 14-7 Displaying resolved CoS maps You can •

display a summary of resolved CoS maps



display details for resolved CoS maps

Step

Action

To display a summary of resolved CoS maps 1

Display a summary of resolved CoS maps: traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map show [cosmap ] where cos-map

is the FCOS->RCOS name.

To display details for resolved CoS maps 2

Display details for resolved CoS maps: traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map show [cosmap ] detail where cos-map

is the FCOS->RCOS name. —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for displaying resolved CoS maps. traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map show cos-map custom-1 +-------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Ingress COS->RCOS Map Summary - custom-1 | +-------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Ingress COS || RCOS | RCOLOR | | L2 COS | DEI/CFI || L3 DSCP || | | +--------------+---------++------------------------------++------+--------+ | | || || | | | 0 | 0 || || 0 | green | | 0 | 1 || || | green | | | || 0-7 || | green | +--------------+---------++------------------------------++------+--------+ | | || || | | | 1-4 | 0 || || 1 | green |

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-26 Quality of Service configuration | 1 | 1 || || | green | | | || 8-15 || | green | +--------------+---------++------------------------------++------+--------+ | | || || | | | 2 | 1 || || 2 | green | | | || 16-23 || | green | ... +--------------+---------++------------------------------++------+--------+ | | || || | | | 7 | 0 || || 7 | green | | 7 | 1 || || | green | | | || 56-63 || | green | +--------------+---------++------------------------------++------+--------+

The following example shows sample output for details of a resolved CoS map. traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map show cos-map custom-1 detail +--------------------------------------+ | RESOLVED COS MAP DETAIL INFO | +--------------------------------------+ | Name | custom-1 | | logical-id | 2 | +-------------------+++----------------+ | L2 Cos | DEI/CFI ||| RCOS | RCOLOR | +-------------------+++-------+--------+ | 0 | 0 ||| 0 | green | | 0 | 1 ||| 0 | green | | 1 | 0 ||| 1 | green | | 1 | 1 ||| 1 | green | ... | 6 | 0 ||| 6 | green | | 6 | 1 ||| 6 | green | | 7 | 0 ||| 7 | green | | 7 | 1 ||| 7 | green | +-------------------+++-------+--------+ | L3 DSCP ||| RCOS | RCOLOR | +-------------------+++-------+--------+ | 0 ||| 0 | green | | 1 ||| 0 | green | | 2 ||| 0 | green | | 3 ||| 0 | green | ... | 63 ||| 7 | green | +-------------------+++-------+--------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-27

Procedure 14-8 Creating a frame CoS map With frame CoS mapping, the R-CoS and R-Color associated with a frame is mapped to specific CoS values in the frame based upon the default Frame CoS mapping table (DefaultRcosFcos) as shown in Table 14-3. Table 14-3 Default Frame CoS mapping table R-CoS

R-COLOR

Frame L2 PCP (0-7)

Frame L2 DEI

0

Green

0

0

0

Yellow

0

0

1

Green

1

0

1

Yellow

1

0

2

Green

2

0

2

Yellow

2

0

3

Green

3

0

3

Yellow

3

0

4

Green

4

0

4

Yellow

4

0

5

Green

5

0

5

Yellow

5

0

6

Green

6

0

6

Yellow

6

0

7

Green

7

0

7

Yellow

7

0

In addition to the default frame CoS map, you can configure customized maps and assign them to ports. You can configure up to 3 custom frame CoS maps to use the frame’s R-CoS and R-Color to map the customer PCP/L2 CoS 802.1D and Discard Eligibility Indicator (DEI) priority values upon egress.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-28 Quality of Service configuration

Note: Remarking the frame’s Layer 3 DSCP CoS value with a mapped DSCP value is implemented with traffic profile configuration. Step

Action

1

Create a custom frame CoS map: traffic-services cos-mapping frame-cos-map create {cosmap <String[15]>} where cos-map <String[15]>

is the identifier for the custom frame CoS map. —end—

Example The following example creates a custom frame CoS map. traffic-services cos-mapping frame-cos-map create cos-map custom-1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-29

Procedure 14-9 Modifying a frame CoS map You can modify the attributes for the default and all custom frame CoS maps. Step

Action

1

Modify a custom frame CoS map: traffic-services cos-mapping frame-cos-map set cos-map {r-cos } {r-color } [dot1dpri-cos ] {dot1dpri-dei } {mpls-tc } where cos-map

is the FCOS->RCOS name.

r-cos

is the RCOS value to use.

r-color

is the resolved color.

dot1dpri-cos is the egress frame COS (pcp) value. dot1dpri-dei

is the egress frame color.

mpls-tc overloads the equivalent dot1dpri value with dot1dei=0 entry. The mpls-tc values apply only to MPLS enabled devices. —end—

Example The following example modifies a custom frame CoS map. traffic-services cos-mapping frame-cos-map set cos-map fcustom-1 r-cos 1 r-color yellow dot1dpri-cos 1 dot1dpri-dei 1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-30 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-10 Deleting a frame CoS map You can delete custom frame CoS maps, except for the default. Step

Action

1

Delete a frame CoS map: traffic-services cos-mapping frame-cos-map delete cos-map where cos-map

is the FCOS->RCOS name. —end—

Example The following example deletes a frame CoS map. traffic-services cos-mapping frame-cos-map delete cos-map custom-1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-31

Procedure 14-11 Setting the frame CoS map for a port By default, ports are set to ignore frame CoS mapping. You can modify the port to use a custom frame CoS map or the default. In addition, you can configure the port to remark the frame’s SVLAN Layer 2 CoS and R-Color value with the mapped R-CoS value mapped from the Customer DSCP or 802.1D priority. Note: Remarking the frame’s Layer 3 DSCP CoS value with a mapped DSCP value is implemented with traffic profile configuration. When egress Frame CoS mapping is enabled, the ingress setting resolved-cos-remarkl2 is overridden and will no longer preserve the incoming frame CoS. Step

Action

1

Set the Frame CoS map for a port: port set port frame-cos-map egress-frame-cos-policy resolved-cos-remark-l2 —end—

Example The following example sets the frame CoS map for a port. port set port 1 frame-cos-map custom-1 egress-frame-cos-policy rcos-to-l2outer-pcp-map resolved-cos-remark-l2 true

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-32 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-12 Displaying frame CoS maps Display frame CoS maps. Step

Action

1

Display all frame CoS maps or a specific map: traffic-services cos-mapping frame-cos-map show [framecos-map ] where frame-cos-map is the specific frame CoS map to be displayed. —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for a frame CoS map. traffic-services cos-mapping frame-cos-map show +---------------------------------------+ | RESOLVED COS MAP TO FRAME COS INFO | +---------------------------------------+ | Name | DefaultRcosFcos | | logical-id | 1 | +-------+---------+++---------+---------+ | RCOS | RCOLOR ||| L2-COS | L2-DEI | +-------+---------+++---------+---------+ | 0 | green ||| 0 | 0 | | 0 | yellow ||| 0 | 0 | | 1 | green ||| 1 | 0 | | 1 | yellow ||| 1 | 0 | | 2 | green ||| 2 | 0 | | 2 | yellow ||| 2 | 0 | | 3 | green ||| 3 | 0 | | 3 | yellow ||| 3 | 0 | | 4 | green ||| 4 | 0 | | 4 | yellow ||| 4 | 0 | | 5 | green ||| 5 | 0 | | 5 | yellow ||| 5 | 0 | | 6 | green ||| 6 | 0 | | 6 | yellow ||| 6 | 0 | | 7 | green ||| 7 | 0 | | 7 | yellow ||| 7 | 0 | +-------+---------+++---------+---------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-33

Procedure 14-13 Configuring ingress R-CoS to egress queue mapping Each physical port supports 8 CoS queues. Depending upon the policies applied to the port, the R-CoS and R-COLOR values may change during processing. The final internal R-CoS value is used to map the frame to one of the 8 physical port CoS queues as shown in Table 14-4 Table 14-4 Default internal R-CoS mapping R-CoS

Physical Port CoS Queue

0

0

1

0

2

1

3

2

4

3

5

4

6

5

7

6

Reserved for outbound CPU frames

7

In addition to the default queue mapping, you can create up to 7 custom Queue Map Profiles map R-CoS to CoS queue. The mapping-mode of custom queue map profiles is always R-CoS mapped. To configure a port to use a custom queue map profile, set the ingress-to-egress-qmap attribute. R-CoS values (0 - 7) can be mapped to CoS Queues (0 - 7), or any combination thereof (for example, all 7 R-CoS values mapped to the same CoS queue). To create and modify a custom R-CoS to CoS queue table and assign it to an egress port: traffic-services queuing queue-map create rcos-map custom-map-1 traffic-services queuing queue-map set rcos-map custom-map-1 rcos 0 queue 3 port set port 9 ingress-to-egress-qmap custom-map-1 To set the R-CoS map to the default for a port:

Note: You cannot unset a port's ingress-to-egress-qmap profile, as this is a required parameter. To remove a custom R-CoS profile from a port you must replace it with another R-CoS profile (for example, the Default-RCOS profile). port set port 9 ingress-to-egress-qmap Default-RCOS 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-34 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-14 Displaying an R-CoS map Display an R-Cos map. Step

Action

1

To display an R-CoS map: traffic-services queuing queue-map show [rcos-map ] where rcos-map

is the R-CoS map to be displayed. —end—

Example The following example shows output for the default R-CoS map. traffic-services queuing queue-map show Default-RCOS +---------------------------RCOS TO QUEUE MAPPING ------------------------+ | | +-------------------------------+-----------------------------------------+ | Name | Default-RCOS | | Id | 1 | | Type | RCOS To Queue Mapping | +-------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | RCOS: | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | | | +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+ | | Queue: | 0 | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | | +---------+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+-------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-35

Procedure 14-15 Applying R-CoS policies and mapping in a VLAN With the example in this section, frames with VID 100 and specific PCP/L2 CoS 802.1D and DEI/CFI values are assigned an internal R-CoS as shown in Table 14-5. Table 14-5 Custom map Frame PCP/ L2 CoS 802.1D

Frame DEI/ CFI

R-CoS

R-COLOR

0

0,1

1

Green

1

0,1

0

Yellow

2

0,1

1

Green

3

0,1

1

Green

4

0,1

2

Green

5

0,1

3

Green

6

0,1

4

Green

7

0,1

0

Yellow

Untagged frames will be assigned an R-CoS according to the port’s fixed R-CoS configuration. For example, a frame with VID 100 and PCP/L2 CoS.1D value of 0 is mapped to R-CoS 1.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-36 Quality of Service configuration Figure 14-3

UNI

.1D 0 DEI/CFI 0 VID 100

VLAN 100

R-CoS to CoS Queue

NNI or UNI

R-CoS 1 R-COLOR Green 100

Step

Action

1

Create the R-CoS map and set the mapping for PCP/L2 CoS.1D to R-CoS values.

traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map create cos-map MyL2Map traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map set cos-map MyL2Map dot1dpricos 0,2,3 dot1dpri-dei 0,1 r-cos 1 r-color green traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map set cos-map MyL2Map dot1dpricos 1,7 dot1dpri-dei 0,1 r-cos 0 r-color yellow traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map set cos-map MyL2Map dot1dpricos 4 dot1dpri-dei 0,1 r-cos 2 r-color green traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map set cos-map MyL2Map dot1dpricos 5 dot1dpri-dei 0,1 r-cos 3 r-color green traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map set cos-map MyL2Map dot1dpricos 6 dot1dpri-dei 0,1 r-cos 4 r-color green 2

Configure the ingress port’s resolved CoS Policy and Map.

port set port 2 resolved-cos-policy dot1d-tag1-cos resolved-cos-map MyL2Map 3

Create the provider VLANs and add the NNI port.

vlan create vlan 100,1000-1001 vlan add vlan 1000-1001 port 6 —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-37

Procedure 14-16 Applying R-CoS policies and mapping in a virtual switch With the example in this section, frames with CVID 100 and specific DSCP values are assigned an internal R-CoS as shown in Table 14-6, because the virtual switch member inherits the custom R-CoS map of the port. Untagged frames will be assigned an R-CoS according to the port’s fixed R-CoS configuration. Table 14-6 Custom map Frame DSCP

R-CoS

R-COLOR

6

1

Green

5

2

Green

4

3

Green

3

4

Green

2

5

Green

1

6

Green

0, 8

7

Yellow

As an example, a frame with CVID 100 and DSCP value of 0 is mapped to RCoS 7 and R-COLOR Yellow. Figure 14-4 Frame with CVID 100 and DSCP value of 0 mapped to R-CoS 7 and R-COLOR Yellow

SVID (1000) UNI

DSCP 0 CVID (100)

TEST1

VC

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

R-CoS to CoS Queue

NNI

R-CoS 7 R-COLOR Yellow 1000/100

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-38 Quality of Service configuration

Step

Action

1

Create the R-CoS map: traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map create cosmap

2

Set the mapping for DSCP to R-CoS values: traffic-services cos-mapping resolved-cos-map set cos-map [l3-cos-dscp ] [dot1dpri-cos <dot1d values and ranges] [dot1dpri-dei ] [mpls-tc <mpls-tc values and ranges>]{rcos } [r-color ] where cos-map

is the FCOS to RCOS name.

is the ingress DSCP value to map. l3-cos-dscp dot1dpri-cos <dot1d values and ranges

is the ingress.1D value to map.

dot1dpri-dei is the ingress frame color cfi/dei value. mpls-tc <mpls-tc values and ranges>

is the mpls tc/exp value to map.

r-cos r-color 3

is the resolved color.

Configure the resolved CoS Policy and map of the ingress port: port set port <port> resolved-cos-policy {<dot1d-tag1cos|fixed-cos|l3-dscp-cos>} {resolved-cos-map }

4

Create the provider VLANs: vlan create vlan

5

Add the NNI port: vlan add vlan port <port>

6

Create the virtual circuits. virtual-circuit ethernet create vc {vlan } [statistics ]

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-39 7

Reserve VLANs for the virtual switches. virtual-switch add reserved-vlan virtual-switch ethernet create vs vc

8

Add the members with the encap policy to inherit from the port settings. virtual-switch ethernet add vs port encap-cos-policy port-inherit

9

Set the untagged data virtual switch for the member port. port set port <port> untagged-data-vs —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-40 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-17 Enabling traffic profiling By default, traffic profiling status is disabled globally and per port. In order to configure traffic profiling, EIR/PIR, and CIR values must be provisioned. Step

Action

1

Enable traffic profiling: traffic-profiling enable [] where port

is the port that you want to enable traffic profiling on. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-41

Procedure 14-18 Setting the traffic profiling provisioning mode Set the provisioning mode. You can set the provisioning mode to •

EIR



PIR

Step

Action

To set the provisioning mode to EIR 1

Set the provisioning mode to EIR: traffic-profiling set meter-provisioning eir

To set the provisioning mode to PIR 2

Set the provisioning mode to PIR: traffic-profiling set meter-provisioning pir —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-42 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-19 Displaying traffic profiling information You can display: •

Status global and port



Per port attributes



Classification mode for all ports



Meter pool assignments for all ports on 3940 and 5140 platforms

Step

Action

To display traffic profiling status 1

Display traffic profiling status: traffic-profiling show

2

Display per port attributes: traffic-profiling show port where port is the port that you want to display attributes for.

3

Display the classification mode for all ports: traffic-profiling show classifier-mode

4

Display meter pool assignments for all ports: traffic-profiling show meter-pool —end—

Example The following example shows the traffic-profiling status. traffic-profiling show +------------ TRAFFIC PROFILING GLOBAL TABLE ---------------+ | Profiling Status | Disabled | | meter-provisioning | eir | +-----------------------------------------------------------+ +---------------- PORT TRAFFIC PROFILE TABLE ----------------+ | Port | Status | Mode | | | Admin | Oper | | +-----------+----------+----------+--------------------------+ | 1 | Disabled | Disabled | standard-dot1dpri | | 2 | Disabled | Disabled | standard-dot1dpri | | 3 | Disabled | Disabled | standard-dot1dpri | | 4 | Disabled | Disabled | standard-dot1dpri | | 5 | Disabled | Disabled | standard-dot1dpri | | 6 | Disabled | Disabled | standard-dot1dpri | 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-43 | 7 | Disabled | Disabled | standard-dot1dpri | | 8 | Disabled | Disabled | standard-dot1dpri | | 9 | Disabled | Disabled | standard-dot1dpri | | 10 | Disabled | Disabled | standard-dot1dpri | | 11 | Disabled | Disabled | standard-dot1dpri | | 12 | Disabled | Disabled | standard-dot1dpri | +-----------+----------+----------+--------------------------+

The following example shows the traffic profiling per port attributes. traffic-profiling show port 1 +---------------- TRAFFIC PROFILING TABLE -------------------+ | Port | 1 | | Profiling Admin State | Disabled | | Profiling Oper State | Disabled | | Profiling Mode | standard-dot1dpri | | Meter Pool | TP-POOL3 | | Non-Conform Standard Profile | drop | | ARP Standard Profile | bypass | | Classification Mode | narrow | +------------------------------------------------------------+

The following example displays the classification mode for all ports. traffic-profiling show classifier-mode +------ TRAFFIC-PROFILING PORT CLASSIFIER MODE -----+ | Port | Port Class Mode | +----------------+----------------------------------+ | 1 | wide | | 2 | narrow | ... +----------------+----------------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-44 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-20 Setting traffic profiling port attributes Traffic profiling can be configured per port and per EVC with the following attributes: •

arp-standard-profile - Sets whether non-conforming ARP frames are associated with an existing standard profile or bypass traffic profiling. ARP frames are treated specially because they are required for IP networks to function. Dropping ARP frames would result in breaking an IP network.The default setting is bypass. ARP bypass is only applicable when the profiling mode is set to either standard-dscp or standard-ip-prec.



meter-pool - A meter pool provides the meter resources for traffic profiles on 3940 and 5140 platforms. For 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms, the meter-pool attribute does not apply. These platforms use the global meter pool. The number of supported meters per meter pool is 64. A single traffic profile consumes 1 meter in the meter pool, and 2 hardware meter resources. You can change the meter pool for a given port as long as there are enough resources in the newly assigned meter pool. A given port can only be assigned to one meter pool. Default metering pool assignments are shown in Table 14-7. Note: The number of traffic profiles that can be supported on 3940 and 5140 platforms is less than the number of meters per pool. The actual number of traffic profiles per metering pool depends upon the number of ports in the meter pool and the number of classifiers configured per profile. For additional information regarding traffic profiling resources, see “Hardware resource management” on page 5-1.

Table 14-7 Metering pools default port assignment per platform Platform

Meter pool

Ports

3940, 5140

TP-POOL1

1, 2, 3

TP-POOL2

4, 5, 6

TP-POOL3

7, 8, 9

TP-POOL4

10, 11, 12

TP-POOL5

13, 14, 15

TP-POOL6

16, 17, 18

TP-POOL7

19, 20, 21

TP-POOL8

22, 23, 24

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-45



classifier-mode - The classifier mode determines whether frames that are to be dropped at ingress are applicable to the meter rates of all traffic profiles configured against the port. When the mode is set to "narrow," traffic profile classification is restricted to only match frames that will not be dropped at ingress. When the mode is set to "wide", traffic profile classification is not restricted and may include traffic that is to be dropped at ingress. The default classifier-mode is narrow.



mode - The mode sets the inspection point for classification:





none - Removes the default classifiers for the port freeing them to be used by other ports in the same meter pool to use those resources. Before setting the mode to “none,” remove any traffic profiles created for the port. Traffic profiles cannot be created for a port that is in the “none” mode. Applicable for 3940 and 5140 platforms. The 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 platforms consume classifiers from the global meter pool.



advanced - Supports EVC based classification, and supports standard and hierarchical metering simultaneously. Not applicable for 3940 and 5140 platforms. Note that non-conforming and ARP profiles are not applicable to a port in advanced mode. Ports in advanced mode behave like ports in hierarchical-vlan mode.



standard-dot1dpri - Finds a matching traffic profile using 802.1D priority. This mode is the default.



standard-ip-prec - Finds a matching profiling using the upper 3 bits of the TOS byte that make up the IP precedence.



standard-dscp - Finds a matching profiling using the DSCP value.



standard-vlan - Finds a matching profiling based upon the VLAN ID.



standard-vlan-dot1dpri - Finds a matching profiling based upon the VLAN ID and outer.1D priority value in the frame.



standard-vlan-ip-prec - Finds a matching profiling based upon the VLAN ID and ip-precedence value in the frame.



standard-vlan-dscp - Finds a matching profiling based upon the VLAN ID and the DSCP value in the frame.

nonconform-standard-profile - Sets whether non-conforming frames (that are not ARP) are associated with a standard profile or dropped. Nonconforming frames are those ingressing frames that do not match one of the configured per-port traffic profiles. Note that nonconform-standardprofile does not include untagged frames. For example, non-conforming 802.1D priority frames are those frames that do not have a matching 802.1D priority configured in one of the traffic profiles. The same applies to DSCP (no matching 6 bit code point), and IP-Precedence (no matching

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-46 Quality of Service configuration

3 bit IP Precedence value). Note that certain frames, such as ARPs and non-IP frames, will always be non-conforming because these frames do not contain the DSCP field. The default setting is drop. Note: The classifier-mode attribute does not apply to the nonconformstandard-profile. Step

Action

1

Set the per port attributes: traffic-profiling set port {[arp-standardprofile ], [meter-pool ], [classifier-mode ], [mode <none|advanced|standarddot1dpri|standard-ip-prec|standard-dscp|standardvlan|standard-vlan-dot1dpri|standard-vlan-ipp|standardvlan-dscp|hierarchical-port|hierarchical-vlan], [nonconform-standard-profile >]} —end—

Example The following example sets per-port attributes. traffic-profiling set port 1 arp-standard-profile bypass meter-pool TP-POOL1 mode standard-vlan nonconform-standard-profile drop

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-47

Procedure 14-21 Configuring a traffic profiling standard profile You can perform the following operations on a standard profile: •

create



modify



remove classification attributes



delete

If a port’s ARP and non-conforming standard profiles are set to the standard profile to be deleted, set them to the default settings. Traffic profile remarking policies take precedence over the RCOS->FCOS map settings configured on the egress port. Step

Action

To create a standard profile 1

Create a standard profile: traffic-profiling standard-profile create {port <port>} [profile ] [dot1dpri ] [ip-prec ] [dscp ] [dscp-remark-policy ] [fixed-dscp ] {[cir ], [eir ],[pir ], [cbs ], [ebs ]} [name <String[15]>] [vlan ][vs ] [statistics ] [untagged] [parent ] [child-mode <standard-dot1dpri | standard-ip-prec | standard-dscp | standard-vlan | vlan-cos>] [defaultprofile <true|false>] drop <true | false> [ingress-coloraware ] [remark-color-policy ] [remark-rcos-policy ] [yellow-remark-rcos ]. where {port <port>}

is the port number.

[profile ]

is the traffic profile number.

[dot1dpri ]

is the 802.1D priority value of matching frames.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-48 Quality of Service configuration where [ip-prec ]

is the IP Precedence value of matching frames.

[dscp ]

is the Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value of matching frames.

[dscp-remarkpolicy ]

is the DSCP Remark Policy.

[fixed-dscp ]

is the value to use when remarking an IPv4 frame for a traffic profile with a dscp-remark-policy of fixed.

• leave: leave as is • fixed: IPv4 frames that classify to the traffic profile have the DSCP value marked with a fixed value,

{[cir ] is the committed information rate in Kbps of this traffic meter, rounded to fit hardware. [eir ] is the excess information rate in Kbps of this traffic meter, rounded to fit hardware. [pir ] is the peak information rate in Kbps of this traffic meter, rounded to fit hardware. [cbs <#>],

is the meter committed burst size in Kbytes, rounded to nearest size supported in hardware.

[ebs <#>]}

is the excess burst size in Kbytes, rounded to nearest size supported in hardware.

[name <String[15]>]

is the traffic profile name.

[vlan ]

is the VLAN ID to monitor.

[vs ]

classifies the profile based on the Ethernet VS ID. Note that traffic profiles cannot classify to an MPLS VS.

[statistics ]

Enable or disable collection of statistics for the traffic profile

[untagged]

Untagged frame classifier

[child-mode <standarddot1dpri| standard-ip-prec| standard-dscp| standardvlan|vlan-cos>]

is the remarking mode for child profiles. Applicable to parent profiles for platforms operating in hierarchical-port or hierarchical-vlan mode. Not applicable for 3940 and 5140.

If you do not specify a name, one is automatically created for the traffic profile number, that is, STD#1 through STD#32.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-49 where [default-profile <true|false>]

indicates whether the profile is to be a default profile for metering traffic that does not classify to the parent or child profiles. Applicable to hierarchical profiles. Not applicable for 3940 and 5140.

[drop <true|false>]

indicates whether the profile automatically drops all traffic that classifies to this profile. Note: The very first frame counted in the statistics on a profile with the drop attribute set may be counted as “forwarded” when it is actually dropped as it takes one frame to move the hardware out of the previous profile.

[ingress-coloraware ]

indicates whether the meter is color aware or color blind.

is the meter output color remarking policy. Policies [remark-colorare: policy ] remark-color-policy was changed to yellow-togreen or green-to-yellow and needs to be changed back to the default. • yellow-to-green: changes the color of frames that were classified by the port as yellow to green. • green-to-yellow: changes the color of frames that were classified by the port as green to yellow. Note: This attribute cannot be set on hierarchical parent profiles.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-50 Quality of Service configuration where [remark-rcospolicy
is the meter output color-based rcos remarking policy. Policies are: • leave: leaves the R-CoS policy without change. This command is useful if the remark-rcos-policy was changed to remark-green or remark-yellow and it needs to be changed back to the default. • remark-green: assigns a new R-CoS value to any packets that are classified as green. The new RCoS value is assigned using green-remark-rcos . • remark-yellow: assigns a new R-CoS value to any packets that are classified as yellow. The new RCoS value is assigned using yellow-remark-rcos . • remark-both: assigns a new R-CoS value to any packets that are classified as green and to any packets that are classified as yellow. The new RCoS value for green packets is assigned using green-remark-rcos . The new rcos value for yellow packets is assigned using yellow-remark-rcos . Note: This attribute cannot be set on hierarchical parent profiles.

[green-remarkis the RCOS value for green remarking. rcos ] [yellow-remarkis the RCOS value for yellow remarking. rcos ]

CAUTION Traffic Disruption Risk

Use caution when enabling the drop attribute when only one profile is present on the port. When a profile matches remote management traffic, it can cause the device to become unreachable. TRAFFIC

To modify a standard profile 2

Modify attributes for a standard profile: traffic-profiling standard-profile set {port } {profile } {[dot1dpri ], [ip-prec ], [dscp ], [dscp-remark-policy ], [fixed-dscp <063>], [cir ], [pir ], [cbs <#>], [ebs

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-51 <#>], [name ], [vlan ], [vs ], [statistics ] [untagged] [drop <true|false>] [parent ] [child-mode <standard-dot1dpri|standard-ip-prec|standard-dscp|..>] [default-profile <true|false>] [ingress-color-aware ] [remark-color-policy ] [remark-rcos-policy ] [yellow-remark-rcos <#>]} To remove classification attributes for a standard profile 3

Remove classification attributes for a standard profile: traffic-profiling standard-profile unset {port } {profile } [dot1dpri ] [ip-prec ] [dscp ] [vlan] [untagged]

To delete a standard profile 4

Delete a standard profile: traffic-profiling standard-profile delete {port } {profile } —end—

Example The following example uses EIR mode. traffic-profiling set meter-provisioning eir traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 name TP1 cir 256 eir 512 dot1dpri 1

The following example uses PIR mode. traffic-profiling set meter-provisioning pir traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 name TP1 cir 256 pir 768 dot1dpri 1

The following example sets the child mode as part of the parent profile. traffic-profile standard create port AGGiTest name P1 cir 50048 child-mode vlan-cos vs VS1

The following example remarks the metered output of a traffic profile. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 profile 1 remark-colorpolicy yellow-to-green

The following example remarks the R-CoS per traffic-profile. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 2 profile 2 remark-rcos-policy remark-green

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-52 Quality of Service configuration

The following example specifies that a traffic profile is color blind. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 profile 1 ingress-coloraware off

The following example sets the .1D priority of matching frames to 1 for traffic profile 1 on port 1. traffic-profiling standard-profile set port 1 profile 1 dot1dpri 1

The following example unsets the standard traffic profile attributes. traffic-profiling standard-profile unset port 1 profile 1 dot1dpri 1

In this example, assume a stream of frames enter the ingress port with a P-bit value of 3. If no remark-rcos-policy is used, all the frames will have R-CoS value of 3, so all the frames will be stored in the same egress queue and at egress port they all will leave with P-bit of 3. To direct the Green frames and Yellow frames to different egress queues you can use the remark-rcos-policy to assign different R-CoS values to Yellow frames. But if the default R-CoS to F-CoS mapping is used, the Yellow frames in the egress port will be assigned the new P-bit values and will leave the port with the new P-bit value. The following example assigns all Yellow frames in a port r-cos a value of 1: traffic-profiling standard-profile set port <port number> profile <profile name> remark-rcos-policy remark-yellow yellow-remark-rcos 1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-53

Procedure 14-22 Configuring per-port standard traffic profiling The configuration example in this section shows how to configure per-port traffic profiling to meter ingress traffic based upon 802.1D priority. Step

Action

1

Enable traffic profiling globally. traffic-profiling enable

2

Enable traffic profiling on port 1. traffic-profiling enable port 1

3

Confirm the global configuration (optional). traffic-profiling show

4

Set traffic profiling mode on port 1 to standard-dot1dpri (default) and a narrow classifier-mode. traffic-profiling set port 1 mode standard-dot1dpri classifier-mode narrow

5

Confirm the per port configuration for port 1. traffic-profiling show port 1

6

Create Traffic profile 1 on port 1 with CIR 3,000Kbps and PIR 3,200Kbps, dot1dpri 0,1,2. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 profile 1 cir 3000 pir 3200 dot1dpri 0,1,2

7

Create Traffic profile 2 on port 1 with CIR 3,000Kbps and PIR 3,200Kbps, dot1dpri 3,4,5. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 profile 2 cir 3000 pir 3200 dot1dpri 3,4,5

8

Create Traffic profile 3 on port 1 with CIR 2,000Kbps and PIR 2,432Kbps, dot1dpri 6,7. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 profile 3 cir 2000 pir 2432 dot1dpri 6,7

9

Create Traffic profile 4 on port 1 with CIR 128Kbps and PIR 256Kbps for untagged traffic. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 profile 4 untagged cir 128 pir 256 untagged

10

Display the traffic profiles associated with port 1 (Optional). traffic-profiling standard-profile show port 1 —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-54 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-23 Configuring per-port and per-VLAN standard traffic profiling The configuration example in this section shows how to configure per-port and per-VLAN traffic profiling to meter ingress traffic based upon VLAN tag. Port 1 is the UNI port and port 9 is the NNI port. Step

Action

1

Enable traffic profiling globally. traffic-profiling enable

2

Enable traffic profiling on UNI port 1. traffic-profiling enable port 1

3

Confirm the global configuration (optional). traffic-profiling show

4

Set traffic profiling mode on port 1 to standard-vlan and a narrow classifiermode. traffic-profiling set port 1 mode standard-vlan classifier-mode narrow

5

Confirm the per port configuration for port 1. traffic-profiling show port 1

6

Create VLAN 1001, 1002, 1003. vlan create vlan 1001-1003 ...This may take a while depending upon the VLAN range...

7

Add port 1 and 9 to VLAN1001, 1002, 1003. vlan add vlan 1001-1003 port 1,9 ...This may take a while depending upon the VLAN range...

8

Confirm the VLAN configuration (optional). vlan show

9

Create Traffic profile 1 on port 1 with CIR 100 kbps and PIR 1024 Kbps, and classifier VLAN 1001. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 profile 1 cir 100 pir 1024 vlan 1001

10

Create Traffic profile 2 on port 1 with CIR 100 kbps and PIR 1024 Kbps, and classifier VLAN 1002. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 profile 2 cir 100 pir 1024 vlan 1002

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-55 11

Create Traffic profile 3 on port 1 with CIR 100 kbps and PIR 1024 Kbps, and classifier VLAN 1003. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 profile 3 cir 100 pir 1024 vlan 1003

12

Create Traffic profile 4 on port 1 with CIR 128Kbps and PIR 256Kbps for untagged traffic. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 profile 4 untagged cir 128 pir 256 untagged

13

Display the traffic profiles associated with port 1 (Optional). traffic-profiling standard-profile show port 1 —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-56 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-24 Configuring hierarchical VLAN traffic profiles In the configuration example for this section, three parent profiles are configured for three VLANs (2000, 2100, 4000) with different child modes and profiles for 802.1D, DSCP, and IPP classification. Step

Action

1

Set the port mode to hierarchical VLAN mode. traffic-profiling set port 6 mode hierarchical-vlan

2

Create the parent profile to classify traffic with VLAN 2000 with a narrow classifier-mode and specify the child mode to classify based on 802.1D priority. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 6 name parent1 child-mode standard-dot1dpri cir 50000 cbs 8 vlan 2000 classifier-mode narrow

3

Create the child profile to classify traffic with 802.1D priority values 0 and 1. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 6 name child1 parent parent1 dot1dpri 0,1 cir 30000 pir 50000 cbs 4 ebs 2

4

Create the child profile to classify traffic with 802.1D priority values 2. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 6 name child2 parent parent1 dot1dpri 2 cir 10000 pir 50000 cbs 4 ebs 2

5

Create a child default under vlan 2000. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 6 defaultprofile true cir 64 pir 45000 cbs 4 ebs 4 name vlan2000child parent parent1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-57 Figure 14-5 Hierarchical VLAN with 802.1D priority 802.1D 0,1

Parent1 Profile Child Mode 802.1D VLAN 2000

802.1D 2

Default

6

Create the parent profile to classify traffic with VLAN 4000 with a narrow classifier-mode and specify the child mode to classify based on DSCP priority. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 6 name parent2 child-mode standard-dscp cir 50000 cbs 8 vlan 4000

7

Create the child profile to classify traffic with DSCP value 8. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 6 name child1dscp parent parent2 dscp 8 cir 20000 pir 50000 cbs 4 ebs 32

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-58 Quality of Service configuration 8

Create the child profile to classify traffic with DSCP value 16. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 6 name child2dscp parent parent2 dscp 16 cir 15000 pir 50000 cbs 4 ebs 16

9

Create the child profile to classify traffic with DSCP value 8. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 6 name child3dscp parent parent2 dscp 32 cir 14000 pir 50000 cbs 4 ebs 16

10

Create the child profile to classify and drop untagged traffic. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 name child4untagged parent parent2 drop true untagged

Figure 14-6 Hierarchical VLAN with DSCP priority DSCP 8

Parent2 Profile Child Mode DSCP VLAN 4000

DSCP 16

DSCP 32

Untagged

11

Create the parent profile to classify traffic with VLAN 2100 with a narrow classifier-mode and specify the child mode to classify based on IP precedence. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 6 name parentIpp child-mode standard-ip-prec cir 50000 cbs 8 vlan 2100

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-59 12

Create the child profile to classify traffic with IP precedence value 6. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 6 name child1ipp parent parentIpp ip-prec 6 cir 20000 pir 50000 cbs 4 ebs 16

13

Create the child profile to classify traffic with IP precedence value 5. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 6 name child2ipp parent parentIpp ip-prec 5 cir 10000 pir 50000 cbs 4 ebs 16

14

Create the child profile to classify traffic with IP precedence value 4. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 6 name child3ipp parent parentIpp ip-prec 4 cir 19000 pir 50000 cbs 4 ebs 16

15

Create the child profile to classify and drop untagged traffic. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 name child4ipp-untagged parent parentIpp drop true untagged Note: Alternately, an profile can be created at the same level as the parent to classify untagged traffic.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-60 Quality of Service configuration Figure 14-7 Hierarchical VLAN with IP precedence IP-Prec 6

Parent3 Profile Child Mode IP Precedence VLAN 2100

IP-Prec 5

IP-Prec 4

Untagged

16

Create a default profile at the parent level for handling traffic that does not classify to the parent and child profiles. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 6 defaultprofile true cir 15000 pir 45000 cbs 8 ebs 8 name T1default —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-61

Procedure 14-25 Configuring hierarchical port traffic profiles In the configuration example for this section, one parent profile with the 802.1D child mode and three child profiles for classification of specific 802.1D values. Step

Action

1

Set the port mode to hierarchical port mode. traffic-profiling set port 5 mode hierarchical-port

2

Create the parent profile with a narrow classifier-mode and the child mode to classify based on 802.1D priority. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 5 name portdot1D child-mode standard-dot1dpri cir 50000 cbs 8

3

Create the child profile to classify traffic with 802.1D priority values 6. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 5 name childdot1D1 parent portdot1D dot1dpri 6 cir 30000 pir 40000 cbs 4 ebs 2

4

Create the child profile to classify traffic with 802.1D priority values 3. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 5 name childdot1D2 parent portdot1D dot1dpri 3 cir 10000 pir 25000 cbs 4 ebs 8

5

Create the child profile to classify traffic with 802.1D priority values 4. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 5 name childdot1D3 parent portdot1D dot1dpri 4 cir 9800 pir 9800 cbs 4 ebs 16

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-62 Quality of Service configuration Figure 14-8 Hierarchical port with 802.1D priority 802.1D 6

portdot1D Parent Profile Child Mode 802.1D

802.1D 3

802.1D 4

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-63

Procedure 14-26 Configuring VS classification for standard traffic profiles In the configuration example for this section, profile 1 classifies on all traffic from port 1 that belongs to VS1 regardless of VLAN or COS. Traffic-profiles 2-4 only classify on traffic ingressing VS2 that have VLAN 2002 and the respective CoS values provisioned for each profile. Step

Action

1

Create the virtual switches and add them to the respective VLANs. virtual-switch add reserved-vlan 4091-4093 virtual-switch ethernet create vs VS1 virtual-switch Ethernet add vs VS1 port 1 vlan 1001 virtual-switch Ethernet add vs VS1 port 1 vlan 1002 virtual-switch ethernet create vs VS2 virtual-switch Ethernet add vs VS2 port 1 vlan 2001 virtual-switch Ethernet add vs VS2 port 1 vlan 2002 virtual-switch ethernet create vs VS3 virtual-switch Ethernet add vs VS3 port 1 vlan 3001 virtual-switch Ethernet add vs VS3 port 1 vlan 3002

2

Enable traffic profiling and set the mode to advanced. traffic-profiling enable traffic-profiling enable port 1 traffic-profiling set port 1 mode advanced

3

Create traffic profile 1 and assign it to VS1, specifying CIR and PIR values. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 profile 1 cir 1024 pir 2048 vs VS1

4

Create traffic profiles 2-4 and assign them to VS2, specifying CIR, PIR, VLAN, and 802.1D values. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 profile 2 cir 4096 pir 8192 vs VS2 vlan 2002 dot1dpri 0,1,2,3 traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 profile 3 cir 512 pir 1024 vs VS2 vlan 2002 dot1dpri 4,5 traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 profile 4 cir 2048 pir 2048 vs VS2 vlan 2002 dot1dpri 6,7

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-64 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-27 Configuring VS classification for HIM traffic profiles In the configuration example for this section, regardless of the VLAN, any traffic ingressing VS3 with the specified CoS values is classified/metered. Step

Action

1

Create the virtual switch configuration as described in Procedure 14-26.

2

Enable traffic profiling and set the mode to advanced. traffic-profiling enable traffic-profiling enable port 1 traffic-profiling set port 1 mode advanced

3

Create parent traffic profile Parent1 and assign it to VS3 with child-mode VLAN-CoS, specifying CIR and PIR values. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 name Parent1 child-mode vlan-cos cir 50048 vs VS3

4

Create child traffic profiles Child1 and Child2 and assign them to profile Parent1, specifying CIR, PIR, and DSCP values. traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 name Child1 parent Parent1 cir 1024 pir 2048 dscp 0,1,2,3 traffic-profiling standard-profile create port 1 name Child2 parent Parent1 cir 1024 pir 2048 dscp 4,5 —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-65

Procedure 14-28 Displaying standard traffic profiles You can display •

all standard traffic profiles



standard traffic profiles associated with a specified port

Step

Action

To display all standard traffic profiles 1

Display all standard traffic profiles: traffic-profiling standard-profile show

To display standard traffic profiles associated with a specified port 2

Display standard traffic profiles associated with a specified port: traffic-profiling standard-profile show [port ]> where port is the port that you want to display associated standard traffic profiles for. —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for displaying all standard traffic profiles. traffic-profiling standard-profile show +-------------------------------------+- STANDARD PROFILE TABLE------------------------------+ | Port | Profile | |Parent| BW (Kbps) | Max Burst KB | CLASSIFIERS | | | ID| Name |Role|#Child| CIR | PIR | CBS | EBS | | +-------+---+---------------+----+------+-------+-------+--------+--------+------------------+ | 1 |1 |STD#1 | N | 0 |128 |128 | 16 | 16 | .1D| 1 | | | IPP| 1 | +-------+---+---------------+----+------+-------+-------+--------+--------+------------------+ | 2 |1 |STD#1 | N | 0 |0 |256 | 0 | 16 | | +-------+---+---------------+----+------+-------+-------+--------+--------+------- ----------+ | 2 |2 |untagged | N | 0 | 128 |256 | 16 | 16 | UT | +-------+---+---------------+----+------+-------+-------+--------+--------+------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-66 Quality of Service configuration

The following example shows sample output for displaying standard profiles associated with port 1. traffic-profiling standard-profile show port 1 +-------------------------------------+- STANDARD PROFILE TABLE------------------------------+ | Port | Profile | |Parent| BW (Kbps) | Max Burst KB | CLASSIFIERS | | | ID| Name |Role|#Child| CIR | PIR | CBS | EBS | | +-------+---+---------------+----+------+-------+-------+--------+--------+------------------+ | 1 |1 |STD#1 | N | 0 |128 |128 | 16 | 16 | .1D| 1 | | | IPP| 1 | +-------+---+---------------+----+------+-------+-------+--------+--------+------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-67

Procedure 14-29 Clearing statistics for all standard profiles Statistics count the number of accepted and dropped bytes and packets for each standard profile. Note 1: Egress and traffic profile byte statistics show “payload” bytes regardless of the frame bandwidth calculation setting described in the “Configuring frame bandwidth calculation” procedure. Note 2: The 3940 and 5140 platforms only support statistics for dropped bytes and accepted bytes. Step

Action

1

Clear statistics for all standard profiles: traffic-profiling standard-profile clear statistics —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-68 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-30 Displaying statistics for all standard profiles Display statistics for all standard profiles. Step

Action

1

Display statistics for all standard profiles: traffic-profiling standard-profile show statistics —end—

Example The following example shows sample output for displaying statistics for all standard profiles. traffic-profiling standard-profile show statistics +--------------------------------- STANDARD PROFILE TABLE ---------------------------------+ | Port | Profile | Statistics | | | ID | Name | Type Bytes packets | +-------+----+--------------------+--------------------------------------------------------+ |1 |1 |p1 | **** Child Profile List **** | +-------+----+--------------------+---------------------------------+----------------------+ |1 |2 | child1 | Accepted 0 | 0 | | | | | Dropped 0 | 0 | +-------+----+--------------------+---------------------------------+----------------------+ | | | | **** Child Profiles Sum **** | +-------+----+--------------------+---------------------------------+----------------------+ |1 |1 |p1 | Accepted 0 | 0 | | | | | Dropped 0 | 0 | +-------+----+--------------------+---------------------------------+----------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-69

Procedure 14-31 Displaying throughput statistics for a traffic profile Display throughput statistics for a traffic profile to monitor the throughput traffic profile from the CLI. Throughput statistics are used for troubleshooting. Step

Action

1

Display throughput statistics for a traffic profile: traffic profiling standard-profile show throughput port traffic-profile where port is the port that the traffic profile resides on traffic-profile

is the traffic profile that you want to monitor

—end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-70 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-32 Setting the per-port hierarchical traffic-profiling mode Set the per-port hierarchical traffic-profiling mode. Step

Action

1

Set the per-port hierarchical traffic-profiling mode: traffic-profiling set port mode <none|advanced|standard-dot1dpri|standard-ipprec|standard-dscp|standard-vlan|standard-vlandot1dpri|standard-vlan-ip-prec|standard-vlandscp|hierarchical-port|hierarchical-vlan> —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-71

Procedure 14-33 Setting the child mode Set the child mode (child-mode) attribute to determine the classification of child traffic profiles: •

standard-dot1dpri - Finds a matching traffic profile using 802.1D priority. This mode is the default.



standard-ip-prec - Finds a matching profiling using the upper 3 bits of the TOS byte that make up the IP precedence.



standard-dscp - Finds a matching profiling using the DSCP value.



standard-vlan - Finds a matching profiling based upon the VLAN ID.



vlan-cos - Finds a matching profiling based upon the VLAN CoS. This child mode is paired with a parent level EVC(VS) classification and it allows for child profiles to have a VLAN, a VLAN + CoS, or CoS only, as long as the child profiles don’t overlap classification. Note: If the parent profile is using a VS classifier, vlan-cos is the only acceptable child mode, and the traffic profiling mode for the parent port must be set to advanced.

Step

Action

1

Set the child mode: traffic-profiling standard-profile set {port } {profile } child-mode <standard-dot1dpri|standard-ip-prec|standarddscp|standard-vlan|vlan-cos> —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-72 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-34 Creating an sRED profile Create an sRED profile. Step

Action

1

Create an sRED profile: traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile create profile <String[15]> [green-threshold ] [green-drop-probability <100pct|6.25pct|3.125pct|1.5625pct|0.78125pct|0.390625pc t|0.1953125pct|0.09765625pct>] [yellow-threshold ] [yellow-drop-probability <100pct|6.25pct|3.125pct|1.5625pct|0.78125pct|0.390625pc t|0.1953125pct|0.09765625pct>]] —end—

Example The following example creates an sRED profile. traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile create profile greenyellow-1 green-threshold 100 yellow-threshold 1 yellow-drop-probability 100pct

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-73

Procedure 14-35 Modifying an sRED profile Modify an sRED profile. Step

Action

1

Modify an sRED profile: traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile set profile {[greenthreshold ], [green-drop-probability <100pct|6.25pct|3.125pct|1.5625pct|0.78125pct|0.390625pc t|0.1953125pct|0.09765625pct>], [yellow-threshold ], [yellow-drop-probability <100pct|6.25pct|3.125pct|1.5625pct|0.78125pct|0.390625pc t|0.1953125pct|0.09765625pct>]} —end—

Example The following example modifies an sRED profile. traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile set profile greenyellow-1 green-threshold 90 green-drop-probability 0.1953125pct yellowthreshold 25

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-74 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-36 Creating an sWRED profile Create an sWRED profile. Step

Action

1

Create an sWRED profile: traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile create profile <String[15]> [tcp-green-threshold ] [tcp-green-upperthreshold ] [tcp-green-max-drop-probability <100pct|75pct|50pct|25pct|10pct|9pct|8pct|7pct|6pct|5pct |4pct|3pct|2pct|1pct|0pct>] [tcp-yellow-threshold ] [tcp-yellow-upper-threshold ] [tcp-yellow-max-drop-probability <100pct|75pct|50pct|25pct|10pct|9pct|8pct|7pct|6pct|5pct |4pct|3pct|2pct|1pct|0pct>] [non-tcp-threshold ] [non-tcp-upper-threshold ] [non-tcp-max-drop-probability <100pct|75pct|50pct|25pct|10pct|9pct|8pct|7pct|6pct|5pct |4pct|3pct|2pct|1pct|0pct>] —end—

Example The following example creates an sWRED profile. traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile create profile greenyellow-1 tcp-green-upper-threshold 100 tcp-yellow-upper-threshold 1 tcpyellow-max-drop-probability 100pct

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-75

Procedure 14-37 Modifying an sWRED profile Modify an sWRED profile. Step

Action

1

Modify an sWRED profile: traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile set profile [tcp-greenthreshold ] [tcp-green-upper-threshold ] [tcp-green-max-drop-probability <100pct|75pct|50pct|25pct|10pct|9pct|8pct|7pct|6pct|5pct |4pct|3pct|2pct|1pct|0pct>] [tcp-yellow-threshold ] [tcp-yellow-upper-threshold ] [tcp-yellow-max-drop-probability <100pct|75pct|50pct|25pct|10pct|9pct|8pct|7pct| 6pct|5pct|4pct|3pct|2pct|1pct|0pct>] [non-tcp-threshold ] [non-tcp-upper-threshold ][non-tcp-max-drop-probability <100pct|75pct|50pct |25pct|10pct|9pct|8pct|7pct|6pct|5pct|4pct|3pct|2pct|1pc t|0pct>] —end—

Example The following example modifies an sWRED profile. traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile set profile greenyellow-1 non-tcp-upper-threshold 1 non-tcp-max-drop-probability 100pct

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-76 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-38 Creating an sWRED profile Create an sWRED profile. Step

Action

1

Create an sWRED profile: traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile create profile <String[15]> [green-lower-threshold ] [green-upperthreshold ] [green-max-drop-probability <100pct|75pct|50pct|25pct|10pct|9pct|8pct|7pct|6pct |5pct|4pct|3pct|2pct|1pct|0pct>] [yellow-lower-threshold ] [yellow-upper-threshold ] [yellow-max-drop-probability <100pct|75pct|50pct |25pct|10pct|9pct|8pct|7pct|6pct|5pct|4pct|3pct|2pct|1pc t|0pct>] —end—

Example The following example creates an sWRED profile. traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile create profile greenyellow-1 green-upper-threshold 100 yellow-upper-threshold 1 yellow-max-dropprobability 100pct

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-77

Procedure 14-39 Modifying an sWRED profile Modify an sWRED profile. Step

Action

1

Modify an sWRED profile: traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile set profile [green-lowerthreshold ] [green-upper-threshold ] [green-max-drop-probability <100pct|75pct|50pct|25pct| 10pct|9pct|8pct|7pct|6pct|5pct|4pct|3pct|2pct|1pct|0pct> ] [yellow-lower-threshold ] [yellow-upperthreshold ] [yellow-max-drop-probability <100pct|75pct|50pct|25pct|10pct|9pct|8pct|7pct|6pct|5pct |4pct|3pct| 2pct|1pct|0pct>] —end—

Example The following example modifies an sWRED profile. traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile set profile greenyellow-1 yellow-upper-threshold 50 yellow-max-drop-probability 100pct

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-78 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-40 Displaying custom congestion avoidance profiles You can •

display all congestion avoidance profiles



display specific congestion avoidance profiles, including name, ID, type, thresholds, and drop probability

Step

Action

To display all congestion avoidance profiles 1

Display all congestion avoidance profiles: traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile show

To display a specific congestion avoidance profiles 2

Display a specific congestion avoidance profile: traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile show profile where profile identifies the specific congestion avoidance profile. —end—

Examples The following example shows the default sRED congestion avoidance profile. traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile show profile Default-SRED +------------------ CONGESTION AVOIDANCE PROFILE DATA --------------------+ | | +------------------------------+------------------------------------------+ | Name | Default-SRED | | Id | 1 | | Type | SRED | +-------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Green || Yellow | | Threshold | Drop Probability || Threshold | Drop Probability | +-----------+----------------------++-----------+-------------------------+ | 75 % |0.09765625pct.(1/1024 || 50 % | 6.25pct.......(1/16) | +-----------+----------------------++-----------+-------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-79

The following example shows the default sWRED congestion avoidance profile on the 3960. traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile show profile Default-SWRED +-------------------------------- CONGESTION AVOIDANCE PROFILE DATA ---------------------------------+ | | +--------------------------------+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Name | Default-S-WRED | | Id | 1 | | Type | WRED-Simple | +----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Tcp-Green || Tcp-Yellow || Non-Tcp | | Lower | Upper | Drop || Lower | Upper | Drop || Lower | Upper | Drop | | Threshold | Threshold | Prob || Threshold | Threshold | Prob || Threshold | Threshold | Prob | +-----------+-----------+--------++-----------+--------------------++-----------+-----------+--------+ | 75 | 100 | 0pct || 50 | 100 | 100pct || 75 | 100 | 0pct | +-----------+-----------+--------++-----------+--------------------++-----------+-----------+--------+

The following example shows the default sWRED congestion avoidance profile on the 5150. traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile show profile Default-SWRED traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile show +--------------- CONGESTION AVOIDANCE PROFILE DATA ----------------+ | | +--------------------------------+---------------------------------+ | Name | Default-S-WRED | | Id | 1 | | Type | WRED-Simple | +------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Green || Yellow | | Lower | Upper | Drop || Lower | Upper | Drop | | Threshold | Threshold | Prob || Threshold | Threshold | Prob | +-----------+-----------+--------++-----------+--------------------+ | 75 % | 100 % | 0pct || 50 % | 100 % | 100pct | | | +--------------------------------+---------------------------------+ | Name | custom-default | | Id | 2 | | Type | WRED-Simple | +------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Green || Yellow | | Lower | Upper | Drop || Lower | Upper | Drop | | Threshold | Threshold | Prob || Threshold | Threshold | Prob | +-----------+-----------+--------++-----------+--------------------+ | 75 % | 100 % | 0pct || 50 % | 100 % | 100pct | +-----------+-----------+--------++-----------+--------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-80 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-41 Updating the congestion avoidance profile for an egress port queue The default congestion avoidance profile for egress port queues is to use Default-SRED or Default-S-WRED, depending upon the platform. After creating custom congestion avoidance profiles, you can set the egress port queues to use them. The queue is identified by queue number and egress port queue group (PortQueueGroup), which is the egress port name. Step

Action

1

Update the congestion avoidance profile for an egress port queue: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group set queue port congestionavoidance-profile —end—

Example The following example updates the congestion avoidance profile for an egress port queue. traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group set queue 2 port 1 congestion-avoidance-profile green-yellow-1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-81

Procedure 14-42 Clearing the congestion avoidance profile to the default for an egress port queue Clear the congestion avoidance profile to the default for an egress port queue. Step

Action

1

Clear the congestion avoidance profile to the default for an egress port queue: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group unset queue port congestionavoidance-profile —end—

Example The following example clears the congestion avoidance profile to the default. traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group unset queue 2 port 1 congestion-avoidance-profile

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-82 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-43 Displaying the congestion avoidance profile for an egress port queue Display the congestion avoidance profile for an egress port queue. Step

Action

1

To display the congestion avoidance profile for an egress port queue: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group show queue port —end—

Example Example of sRED: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group show queue 0 port 1 +-------------------------------- QUEUE DATA -----------------------------+ | | +-------------------------------+-----------------------------------------+ | Queue Id | 0 | | Queue Group Name [Port] | 1 | | Congestion Avoidance Profile | Default-SRED | +-------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Scheduler | Size | CIR | CBS | EIR | EBS | | Pri Idx | Weight | (Pckts) | (Kbps) | (Kbytes) | (Kbps) | (Kbytes) | +---------+---------+---------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 10000 | 20 | 100 | 0 | 0 |1000000 | 256 | +---------+----------+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+

Example of sWRED on the 3960: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group show queue 0 port 1 +-------------------------------- QUEUE DATA -----------------------------+ | | +-------------------------------+-----------------------------------------+ | Queue Id | 0 | | Queue Group Name [Port] | 1 | | Congestion Avoidance Profile | Default-S-WRED | +-------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Scheduler | Size | CIR | CBS | EIR | EBS | | Pri Idx | Weight | (Pckts) | (Kbps) | (Kbytes) | (Kbps) | (Kbytes) | +---------+---------+---------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 10000 | 20 | 100 | 0 | 0 |1000000 | 256 | +---------+----------+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-83

Example of sWRED on the 5150: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group show queue 0 port 1.1 +-------------------------------- QUEUE DATA -----------------------------+ | | +-------------------------------+-----------------------------------------+ | Queue Id | 0 | | Queue Group Name [Port] | 1.1 | | Congestion Avoidance Profile | Default-S-WRED | +-------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Scheduler | Size | CIR | CBS | EIR | EBS | | Pri Idx | Weight | (Pckts) | (Kbps) | (Kbytes) | (Kbps) | (Kbytes) | +---------+---------+---------+----------+----------+----------+----------+ | 10000 | 20 | 100 | 0 | 0 |1000000 | 256 | +---------+----------+--------+----------+----------+----------+----------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-84 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-44 Deleting a custom congestion avoidance profile Delete custom congestion avoidance profiles that are not in use. Step

Action

1

Delete a congestion avoidance profile: traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile delete profile where profile identifies the congestion avoidance profile to be deleted. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-85

Procedure 14-45 Renaming custom congestion avoidance profile You can change the name of a custom congestion avoidance profile. Step

Action

1

Rename a congestion avoidance profile: traffic-services queuing congestion-avoidance-profile rename profile name <String[15]> where profile identifies the congestion avoidance profile to be renamed. name <String[15]> is the new name for the congestion avoidance profile. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-86 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-46 Changing the algorithm of an egress port scheduler Change the algorithm of an egress port scheduler. Note: The wdrr-scheduler-granularity setting can be set with scheduler algorithms other than WDRR, but does not go into effect until the scheduler algorithm is changed to WDRR. The default setting is 1600 Kb. Step

Action

1

Change an egress port's scheduler algorithm and granularity for the egress port queue group: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group set port {[scheduler-algorithm <strict|roundrobin|weighted-deficit-round-robin|weighted-roundrobin>], [wdrr-scheduler-granularity ]} —end—

Example The following example changes an egress port's scheduler algorithm and granularity for the egress port queue group. traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group set port 9 scheduleralgorithm weighted-round-robin

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-87

Procedure 14-47 Changing the weight of the scheduler for a queue Change the weight of the scheduler for a queue. Note: The default weight for CoS Queue 7 is 0, which is serviced in a strict-priority fashion being the highest priority over all other CoS queues in the Egress Queue group. Queue 7 is typically reserved for CPUSourced traffic and should not be changed. Step

Action

1

Change a queue's scheduler weight for use with the port’s scheduler algorithm: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group set queue port schedulerweight —end—

Example The following example changes a queue’s scheduler weight. traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group set queue 0 port 9 schedulerweight 100

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-88 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-48 Displaying queue weight and scheduler algorithms Display queue weight and scheduler algorithms. Step

Action

1

Display queue weight and scheduler algorithms for all or a specific egress port: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group show [port ] where port —end—

Example The following example displays queue weight and scheduler algorithms. traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group show port 9 +---------------------------- QUEUE GROUP DATA ---------------------------+ | | +--------------------------------+----------------------------------------+ | Name [Port] | 9 | | Id | 9 | | Queue Count | 8 | | Scheduling Algorithm | weighted-round-robin | | Shaper Bandwidth (Kbps) | 1000000 | | Shaper Burst Size (Kb) | 10240 | +-------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | Scheduler | Size | CIR | CBS | EIR | EBS | | Q | Pri Idx | Weight | (Pckts) | (Kbps) | (Kbytes) | (Kbps) | (Kbytes)| +---+---------+--------+---------+---------+----------+---------+---------+ | 0 | 10000 | 100 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 1000000 | 256 | | 1 | 20000 | 30 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 1000000 | 256 | | 2 | 30000 | 40 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 1000000 | 256 | | 3 | 40000 | 50 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 1000000 | 256 | | 4 | 50000 | 60 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 1000000 | 256 | | 5 | 60000 | 70 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 1000000 | 256 | | 6 | 70000 | 80 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 1000000 | 256 | | 7 | 80000 | 0 | 100 | 102 | 256 | 1000000 | 256 | +---+---------+--------+---------+---------+----------+---------+---------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-89

Procedure 14-49 Configuring egress port and queue shaping You can set •

egress port shaper-rate bandwidth



egress port shaper-rate burst-size



egress shaping parameter for each queue

Table 14-8 lists the steps that the shaper rate increments in based on the burst size. Table 14-8 Burst size to shaper-rate increment Burst size

Shaper rate increments in steps of

0 or less than 16 M

64 kbps Note: 3940 and 5140 switches do not exceed 16 M, and always use this increment.

16 M and less than 32 M

128 kbps

32 M and less than 64 M

256 kbps

64 M and less than 128 M

512 kbps

128 M and less than 512 M

1024 kbps

Table 14-9 lists the steps that the CIR and PIR increments in based on the shaper rate. Table 14-9 Shaper rate to CIR and PIR increment Shaper rate

CIR and PIR increments in steps of

0 or less than 16.78 Gbps

64 kbps Note: 3940 and 5140 switches do not exceed 16 M, and always use this increment.

16.78 Gbps and less than 33.55 Gbps

128 kbps

33.55 Gbps and less than 40 Gbps

256 kbps

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-90 Quality of Service configuration

Table 14-10 lists the parameters for individual shaping of queues. Table 14-10 Parameters for individual shaping of queues Parameter

Description

CIR in Kbps

The rate of traffic that can egress from a queue and be considered guaranteed traffic. The default CIR for queues 0-6 is 0, queue 7 is 1024. The CIR value ranges from 0 to 40 Gbps (40000000 Kbps).

CBS in Kbytes

The amount of CIR traffic that can burst from a queue (the CIR bucket size). The default CBS for queues 0-6 is 0, queue 7 is 256. The CBS value ranges from 0 to 256 Mbytes.

EIR in Kbps

The rate of traffic that can egress from a queue above CIR and is considered non-guaranteed traffic. The default EIR is the same as the administrative port speed. The EIR value ranges from 0 to 40 Gbps.

EBS in Kbytes

The amount of EIR traffic that can egress from a queue (the EIR bucket size). The default EBS is 256. The EBS value ranges from 0 to 256 Mbytes.

Note 1: In order for the EBS bucket to be drained, an EIR value must be set. Note 2: For 3940 and 5140 switches the sum of the CBS and EBS can be less than or equal to 16 Mbytes. For 3916, 3930, 3931, 3932, 3960, 5142, 5150, and 5160 switches, the sum of the CBS and EBS can be less than or equal to 256 Mbytes. Note 3: Shaper-rates applied at the port level affect all 8 queues in the egress queue group. Step

Action

To set the egress port shaper-rate bandwidth 1

Set the egress port shaper-rate bandwidth: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group set port shaper-rate

To set the egress port shaper-rate burst-size 2

Set the egress port shaper-rate burst-size: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group set port burst-size

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-91 To set the egress shaping parameters for each queue 3

Set the egress shaping parameters for each queue: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group set queue port cir cbs eir ebs —end—

Example The following example sets the egress port shaper-rate bandwidth. traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group set port 3 shaper-rate 1200

The following example sets the egress port shaper-rate burst-size. traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group set port 3 burst-size 1024

The following example sets the egress shaping parameter per queue. traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group set queue 0 port 9 cir 5000 cbs 5000 eir 4000 ebs 3000

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-92 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-50 Displaying egress port queue configuration You can display egress port queue configuration for •

all ports



a queue group on a port



a port Note: Egress and traffic profile byte statistics show “payload” bytes regardless of the frame bandwidth calculation setting described in the “Configuring frame bandwidth calculation” procedure.

Step

Action

To display egress port queue configuration for all ports 1

Display egress port queue configuration for all ports: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group show where queue

is the queue in the queue group

port is the port on which the queue group is instantiated. To display egress port queue configuration for a queue group on a port 2

Display egress port queue configuration for a queue group on a port: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group show queue port

To display egress port queue configuration for a port 3

Display egress port queue configuration for a port: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group show port —end—

Example aggregation create aggregation agg1 traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group show port agg1 +---------------------------- QUEUE GROUP DATA ---------------------------+ | | +--------------------------------+----------------------------------------+ | Name [Port] | agg1 | | Id | 2049 | | Queue Count | 8 |

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-93 | Scheduling Algorithm | strict | | Shaper Bandwidth (Kbps) | 20000000 | | Shaper Burst Size (Kb) | 10240 | +-------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | Scheduler | Size CIR | CBS | EIR | EBS | | Q | Pri Idx | Weight | (Pckts) | (Kbps) | (Kbytes) | (Kbps) | (Kbytes)| +---+---------+--------+-------------------+----------+---------+---------+ | 0 | 10000 | 20 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 20000000| 256 | | 1 | 20000 | 30 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 20000000| 256 | | 2 | 30000 | 40 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 20000000| 256 | | 3 | 40000 | 50 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 20000000| 256 | | 4 | 50000 | 60 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 20000000| 256 | | 5 | 60000 | 70 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 20000000| 256 | | 6 | 70000 | 80 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 20000000| 256 | | 7 | 80000 | 0 | 100 | 1024 | 256 | 20000000| 256 | |---+---------+--------+---------+---------+----------+---------+---------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-94 Quality of Service configuration

Procedure 14-51 Displaying egress port queue statistics Statistics count the bytes and packets dropped and transmitted by the egress port queues. You can display egress port queue configuration for •

all ports



a queue group on a port



a port Note: Egress and traffic profile byte statistics show “payload” bytes regardless of the frame bandwidth calculation setting described in the “Configuring frame bandwidth calculation” procedure.

Step

Action

To display egress port queue statistics for all ports 1

Display egress port queue configuration for all ports: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group show statistics where queue

is the queue in the queue group

port is the port on which the queue group is instantiated. To display egress port queue statistics for a queue group on a port 2

Display egress port queue configuration for a queue group on a port: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group show queue port statistics

To display egress port queue statistics for a port 3

Display egress port queue configuration for a port: traffic-services queuing egress-port-queue-group show port statistics —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Quality of Service configuration 14-95

Procedure 14-52 Configuring frame bandwidth calculation The system supports 20 bytes of IFG that can be considered when calculating bandwidth for broadcast containment filters and for traffic profiling according to CIR and PIR settings in a traffic profile for ingress metering and egress shaping. Step

Action

1

To set the bandwidth calculation mode: flow bw-calculation-mode set mode <payload | transport>

2

To NOT use IFG in bandwidth calculations: flow bw-calculation set mode payload

3

To use IFG in bandwidth calculations: flow bw-calculation set mode transport

Note that when the system is in payload calculation mode, the 20-byte IFG is not considered in the bandwidth equations. However, the physical port must still operate according to Ethernet standards and take into account the IFG when transmitting packets. Therefore, the operator could possibly configure a CIR sum at a port that would exceed the physical bandwidth of the port due to the required IFG on the wire. The software does not attempt to adjust bandwidth or issue user-events when in payload mode. The software assumes bandwidth to be configured and consumed according to transport mode. Bandwidth rates are calculated differently for Layer 1 and Layer 2 packets as shown in the following: •

R1 - Layer 1 rate



R2 - Layer 2 rate



F - Packet frame size

Rate calculation formulas are: •

R1 = R2/(F+20) * F



R2 = R1/F * (F+20)

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

14-96 Quality of Service configuration

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-1

Multicast services configuration

15-

Multicast services deliver data frames to multiple destinations by means of frame replications. Frame replications take place in a switch that is directly connected to a multicast server or indirectly connected to a multicast server through a router or switch. In multicast services, frame replication can be to selected members of the flood domain, decided either statically through channel stream or dynamically using Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) snooping. This allows network devices to discern multicast traffic and act on it according to the local content rules and processes for the platform. Note: To configure Multicast Services, you need to install the Advanced Ethernet license key. To obtain the Advanced Ethernet license key, contact Ciena Sales. Multicast services in the network comprise the following components: •

one or more multicast servers



one or more hosts



routers that replicate the multicast packets at L3 and send to multiple interfaces



switches at L2 that forward multicast frames to multiple interfaces towards the hosts, that is, the multicast termination points

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-2 Multicast services configuration

Figure 15-1 shows multicast services in the network. Figure 15-1 Multicast services in the network

Multicast Server

Multicast Router

Multicast Service Termination Points (IP TV, Set-top box)

Routers determine the multicast streams to send to a network interface by means of IGMP. IGMP is used by IP hosts and multicast routers to establish and maintain membership in multicast groups.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-3

Table 15-1 lists IGMP messages. Table 15-1 IGMP messages Message

Description

Report/Join

Indicates that a host wants to receive a specific multicast stream.

Leave

Indicates that a host wants to leave a specific multicast stream.

Query

Indicates that an IGMP querier is determining which hosts are on the interface. An IGMP querier is typically the router.

IGMP limits the multicast streams injected into LANs, but the traffic is flooded to all LAN segments in the L2 forwarding domain. L2 switches that have IGMP snooping enabled can establish multicast groups and limit the multicast streams to be forwarded to only the LAN interfaces that have hosts with members of the multicast group. The switch establishes the multicast group filters and statically or dynamically sets up the multicast filters for the groups.

IGMP snooping The switch maintains a list of multicast groups and a list of member interfaces for each group. Interfaces are added and removed from the multicast group based on IGMP join and leave messages received from a port. The switch periodically updates the multicast group membership list. Interfaces are removed from the multicast group if a join message is not received from the interface after a timeout period. If a multicast packet is received and the destination address is found in the list of multicast groups, then this packet only egresses the Interfaces that are members of the group. All other multicast packets flood to all Interfaces. The switch identifies one Interface as the router port. The selection of the router Interface is determined by general queries snooped by the switch. IGMP join and leave messages are filtered by the switch. The switch forwards the first join message and the last leave message.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-4 Multicast services configuration

Enhanced features Table 15-2 lists the enhanced features of multicast services that are supported by 39XX/51XX switches. Table 15-2 Enhanced features for multicast services Enhanced feature

Description

Proxy reporting

The switch replies directly to the router in response to an IGMP query message. When a query is received, the switch sends IGMP membership reports (for multicast groups that have at least one downstream host) to the router based on the list of active multicast groups. The reports are sent to the router at a constant rate, which reduces the bursting that would otherwise occur. This feature is always on when IGMP snooping is enabled.

Proxy query

The switch sends the query message to one interface at a time. The delay between interfaces can be configured by the network operator. The delay balances the load on the CPU which reduces the channel-change latency. The router has no knowledge of the delay because the switch implements proxy reporting. This feature is always on when IGMP snooping is enabled.

Query engine

The network operator configures the switch to generate IGMP query packets at regular intervals just like a router. Multicast servers can connect directly to the multicast network without going through routers.

Inquisitive leave

This feature supports network configurations that can have multiple IGMP hosts on a single interface. Two or more hosts are "tuned" into a single multicast group at the same time on the same interface. If the switch responds immediately to an IGMP leave message for this group, service to the other host or hosts tuned into the group is interrupted. The switch sends one group-specific query to the interface with max-response set to lastmember-query-interval, and a timer is created with the same timeout value. As soon as an IGMP membership report is received on the port for the specific group, the timer is canceled. The interface is removed from the group if the timer expires. This feature can be enabled on any IGMP snooping-enabled L2 forwarding domain.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-5 Table 15-2 Enhanced features for multicast services Enhanced feature

Description

Channel stream

A channel stream is a collection of user-defined multicast groups. The switch always subscribes to these groups, even if there are no hosts joining these groups. This feature can be used to reduce the latency experienced by the end user by forwarding some multicast streams far down into the network before they are requested by any IGMP host.

Unknown multicast filtering (UMF)

This feature is used to filter multicast packets with unknown destination addresses. The destination address is considered unknown if it cannot be found in the list of active multicast groups. UMF can be enabled on any multicast-enabled VLAN. The system tracks the setting for each L2 forwarding domain and passes this information down to the forward engine.

IGMP forking

IGMP forking is the process of forwarding, that is, forking, the individual raw join and leave messages that ingress the UNI port to the associated subscriber or data service, that is, VLAN, egressing the NNI ports. These raw subscriber-associated IGMPv3 and IGMPv2 PDUs provide opportunities for northbound systems to perform additional statistics tracking and QoS treatments. IGMP snooping must be enabled for forking to work. See “Configuring IGMP forking with VLAN translation” on page 15-18.

Multicast operations Multicast operations comprise: •

“Multicast forwarding domains” on page 15-5



“Multicast interface” on page 15-6



“Multicast traffic filters” on page 15-6



“Multicast servers and routers” on page 15-7



“Server topology” on page 15-7



“IGMP query engine” on page 15-8



“Router IP address range” on page 15-9



“Channel stream” on page 15-9

Multicast forwarding domains 39XX/51XX switches use VLANs as the L2 forwarding domain. The characteristics of the VLAN are combined with the multicast group IP address to create unique entries in forwarding tables.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-6 Multicast services configuration

Multicast interface SAOS uses ports as the multicast interface. When the network operator enables multicast-services on a forwarding domain, all interfaces in the forwarding domain are treated equally, that is: •

multicast streams can ingress any interface and egress on any other interfaces



all multicast groups in the channel stream egress all interfaces



any interface can become the router interface

The network operator can configure two sets of interfaces: •

server interface



channel stream interface

Multicast traffic filters Multicast features, for example, channel stream and IGMP snooping, are methods for creating and deleting multicast traffic filters. Table 15-3 is an example of a multicast traffic filter table. In this example, the L2 forwarding domain has a total of eight interfaces which are numbered 1 to 8. There are two VLANs on the switch: VLAN-1 and VLAN-2. Interfaces can belong to more than one VLAN. Also note that each entry in the table is uniquely identified by a key which comprises the VLAN and multicast destination IP address. Note: Multicast addresses are specified as Layer 3 IP addresses. Table 15-3 Example of a multicast traffic filter table Interface VLAN (key)

Destination Egress address (key) interface list

Notes

1

1

225.0.2.1

1,2,3,4

This is the typical multicast group entry.

2

2

225.0.2.1

5,7

This entry has the same destination address as entry 1 but has a different VID and egress interface list. This filter only affects the traffic on VID 2.

3

1

225.0.2.2

6

This entry is a multicast group with a single egress interface.

4

1

225.0.2.3

none

This entry is a multicast group with no member interfaces. This group could be in the linger state.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-7 Table 15-3 Example of a multicast traffic filter table Interface VLAN (key)

Destination Egress address (key) interface list

Notes

5

1

225.0.2.1

1,2,3,4,6,8

This entry is a channel stream group. Interface 5 is excluded from channel stream.

6

1

225.0.2.2

1,2,3,4,6,8

This entry is another channel stream group. All channel-stream groups have the same egress interface list.

8

1

Range: 225.0.2.0 to 225.0.2.255

none

This entry is the UMF filter. The destination address is the complete range of multicast addresses. This entry is the last entry in the table. It is the default entry when no other match is found in the table.

Multicast servers and routers A multicast server is considered to be any network device that forwards multicast packets in the network. A multicast router is a special type of multicast server. Routers are generally L3 (or better) devices running IGMP and generating IGMP query messages. Any number of multicast servers can be used on a forwarding domain at the same time, but only one device can act as the IGMP query engine at any given time.

Server topology Table 15-4 lists multicast delivery models for multicast services delivered over L2 networks. Table 15-4 Multicast delivery models for multicast services delivered over L2 networks Multicast delivery mode Description One-to-many

One server sends multicast streams to many hosts on the network. Membership reports are sent to a single server interface. Example: IPTV. This is a centralized delivery model.

Many-to-many

Many servers send multicast streams to many hosts. Membership reports are sent to all server interfaces in the network. Example: Video conference. This is a distributed delivery model.

Many-to-one

Many servers send multicast stream to one host. Membership reports are sent to all server interfaces in the network. Example: surveillance. This is a special case of many-to-many.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-8 Multicast services configuration

In the centralized server topology, all multicast services are delivered from one L2 device to the rest of the network. Any number of multicast servers can be used, but all multicast streams must flow downstream from one central point and all membership reports flow upstream to this central point. In the distributed server topology any number of multicast servers on the network can interface with any device on the network. Table 15-5 describes IGMP behavior for sever topologies. Table 15-5 IGMP behavior for server topology IGMP function

Centralized

Distributed

Receive General Query

Reply to the router.

Reply to the router.

Send membership reports for all Only send membership reports for channel stream groups. active multicast groups. Send Report (join/leave)

Send to the router interface only. Send to all server and router interfaces.

IGMP query engine In a traditional multicast environment, all requests and queries are processed through a multicast router. Typically, these routers are overburdened with processing requirements and thus cannot respond as quickly as needed in a converged service network. To eliminate the need for a separate IGMP router and speed up multicast response times, the network operator can configure service delivery switches to use a built-in IGMP query engine. When the query engine is disabled, the switch does not send any query message until the router port is learned. Once the router port is learned, the switch continues to send query messages until a timeout occurs while waiting for another query from the router. The router port is learned by snooping IGMP query messages sent by the router. The switch saves the source IP address and source MAC address of the router and uses this address whenever the switch needs to send a query message to the network. When the query engine is enabled, the switch uses the IP source address configured by the user whenever it needs to send a query message to the network. The switch starts sending general queries as soon as query-engine and igmp-snooping are both enabled and they continue until the configuration is changed. In this mode, the switch does not respond to a query received from another device on the network unless that device has a lower IP address.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-9

If you enable query-engine on two or more devices on the same network, both devices send queries to the network but only one device, that is, the one with the lower IP address, receives replies. Note: When the server topology is set to centralized, only one switch on the network can act as the master querier and all multicast servers must interface directly with the master querier.

Router IP address range 39XX/51XX switches support a network that has two or more active multicast servers operating at the same time on the same forwarding domain. The network operator defines a separate range of multicast addresses for each server. The network operator can define a single range of multicast addresses for the router. If the network operator defines this address range, the switch does not send a membership report to the router for any multicast group that does not fall inside this address range. If the network operator does not define this address range, the switch forwards all membership reports to the router regardless of the group address. When two or more routers are used on the same network, that is, the servertopology attribute is set to distributed, the router address range must remain undefined so that all join messages are forwarded to all routers.

Channel stream Any network running IGMP is bound to experience a certain amount of latency between the IGMP join message and the arrival of the multicast group itself. Channel stream reduces this latency and reduces the processing load on the router. Channel stream defines a set of multicast groups that are flooded to all interfaces in the forwarding domain, which brings multicast services far down into the network, that is, closer to the subscriber, before any host joins the groups. Latency is reduced because the IGMP join message does not need to propagate all the way to the router. If channel stream is configured such that multicast groups flow all the way to the switch, then the switch is the only device that must process the join message in order to forward the multicast group to the subscriber. The channel stream must be configured before any multicast groups flow. When multicast services are enabled for a particular forwarding domain, a new channel stream is created for that forwarding domain. Multicast groups can be added or removed from this channel stream at any time. As multicast groups are added to the channel stream, they immediately begin to flow to all interfaces in the forwarding domain.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-10 Multicast services configuration

The network operator can define a list of channel-stream interfaces. By default, all interfaces in the forwarding domain belong to the channel stream interface list. The network operator can remove any interface from this list. Channel stream should be used with UMF. If a multicast stream arrives at the switch before the multicast group is added to channel stream, the switch floods or drops the stream depending on the setting for UMF. After the group is added to channel stream, the group floods to all channel stream interfaces regardless of the UMF setting. Therefore, UMF should be set to drop on the channel stream device and all downstream devices. Channel stream can be used with or without IGMP snooping. In most cases, snooping should be enabled when channel stream is used, but it is not required to do so. If multicast services originate from a router, then IGMP snooping must be enabled in order for the switch to send IGMP membership reports to the router. However, channel stream could be used in conjunction with UMF as a way to selectively forward a subset of the multicast groups from a multicast server to the rest of the network without IGMP snooping. If a multicast group is added to channel stream and the source of the multicast stream is the router, then the switch becomes a member of the multicast group, and it behaves just like any other group member. The switch immediately sends an IGMP join message to the router for this new multicast group, and it responds to IGMP queries as long as the multicast group is a member of channel stream. The switch forwards the multicast group to all channel stream interfaces. Therefore, any IGMP membership reports received by the switch from downstream devices are dropped. The switch does not disrupt service to downstream devices when a multicast group is added or removed from channel stream. If a multicast group is already active on the switch when the group is added to channel stream, the switch adds more interfaces to the multicast group. Similarly, when a multicast group is removed from channel stream, the switch continues to flow the multicast group to all interfaces that subscribe to the group. The switch does not keep track of group membership while the group is part of channel stream. When the group is removed from channel stream, the switch sends a groupspecific query to all interfaces in the network in order to determine the group membership. If no hosts respond to the query within the timeout, the group goes into the linger state. It is not necessary to define the source interface for channel stream. It is also not necessary for all groups in the channel stream to have the same source interface. Some streams could ingress from a router while others ingress directly from a video server. The switch sends join messages to the router for

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-11

all multicast groups in the channel stream whose group address falls in the range reserved for the router, that is, the switch sends IGMP join messages to the router as if the switch was an IGMP host.

Statistics The switch keeps IGMP statistics. Table 15-6 lists the statistics collected for each forwarding domain. Table 15-6 Statistics collected for each forwarding domain Statistic

Description

Membership Reports

Number of reports transmitted out to the router.

Leave Reports

Number of leave messages received, with and without errors.

Queries Received

Number of query messages received, with and without errors.

Query Discard

Number of query messages discarded: query packet received on non-server interface; query packet received before the reply to the last query is finished.

Router Timeouts

Number of times the router times out without sending a query.

Query Reply Timeouts

Number of timeouts that occurred while sending membership reports to the router (error).

Router Discards

Number of invalid IGMP frames from the router that have been discarded, for example, join message.

Host Discards

Number of join and leave messages from hosts that have been discarded, including: • snooping disabled • invalid multicast group address • ingress interface was the router interface (centralized mode only) • group is not active (leave packet only) • ingress interface does not belong to the forwarding domain • state of the ingress interface is not forwarding

Checksum Errors

Number of IP packet checksum errors.

L2/L3 Mismatch

Number of mismatches of L2/L3 mismatch. L2 destination address is not equal to the group query and the IGMP group address is equal to 0.0.0.0.

Unknown Packet Type

Number of IGMP packets received that are of type unknown.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-12 Multicast services configuration Table 15-6 Statistics collected for each forwarding domain Statistic

Description

Exceeded Resources

Number of times a join message is received but the system cannot allocate a new group due to resource limitation.

Query Discarded

Number of queries discarded because rapid recovery mode is off.

Protocol Version Discards

The PDU version did not match the configured settings.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-13

Multicast-services attributes Table 15-7 lists multicast-services attributes. Table 15-7 Multicast-services attributes Attribute

Default value

Description

active-linger-timeout 30 <SECONDS: 0300>

Specifies how long the group should stay in the active state after all members leave the group.

compatibility-mode

v2

Specifies the protocol compatibility mode.

default-router-port

0

Specifies the default router port to use if the actual router port is not known.

Note: This attribute is ignored in distributed mode.

Note: This attribute is not used in distributed mode. fork

off

Indicates whether to fork IGMP frames.

last-member-query- 10 interval

Specifies the maximum response time inserted into G-S queries sent in response to leave messages. Also the amount of time between G-S queries.

leave-mode

fast

Specifies how to handle leave messages.

linger-timeout <SECONDS: 10300>

125

Specifies the linger timer, which starts when a leave message is sent to the router. The multicast filter is deleted when the timer expires.

min-response-time

50

Specifies the value that the switch will use if the maxresponse-time in the query packet from the router falls below this value.

server-topology

centralized

Specifies whether the server topology is centralized or distributed.

priority

7

Specifies the priority tag inserted into all IGMP messages.

query-delay

10

Specifies how long to wait after sending a query before sending the next. The delay should be greater than the query-response-interval.

query-engine

off

Specifies whether the query engine is on or off.

Note: This attribute is Ignored when inquisitive-leave is disabled.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-14 Multicast services configuration Table 15-7 Multicast-services attributes Attribute

Default value

Description

query-interval <SECONDS: 10999999>

125

Specifies how often to send the general query.

query-ip-sourceaddr

0.0.0.0

Specifies the source address used for all general queries sent on an L2 forwarding domain. Note: This attribute is ignored when query-engine is disabled.

query-responseinterval

50

Specifies the amount of time to wait for a reply to the general query. This value goes directly into the query packet. This interval should be shorter than query-delay.

rapid-recoverymode

off

Specifies whether rapid recovery mode is on or off.

robustness

1

Specifies the number of query replies (IGMP Join) or Leaves to send for each multicast group.

router-addressrange

undefined, that is, 0.0.0.0

Specifies the range of IP addresses reserved for the router. This setting should remain undefined when the servertopology is set to distributed. Valid range is 224.0.0.3 239.255.255.255.

router-query-interval 125 <SECONDS: 10999999>

Used for selecting the IGMP querier when two or more routers exist on the same network.

This chapter provides the following procedures for configuring multicast services: •

“Configuring a VLAN as a multicast L2 forwarding domain” on page 15-15



“Configuring channel streams” on page 15-16



“Configuring IGMP forking with VLAN translation” on page 15-18



“Configuring a multicast router topology” on page 15-20



“Configuring a multicast server topology” on page 15-23



“Configuring multicast servers with redundant routers” on page 15-27



“Configuring redundant query engines” on page 15-32



“Clearing multicast service statistics” on page 15-36



“Displaying multicast services information” on page 15-37

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-15

Procedure 15-1 Configuring a VLAN as a multicast L2 forwarding domain Configure a VLAN to act as a multicast L2 forwarding domain for multicast services. Step

Action

1

Enable multicast services: multicast-services enable

2

Enable multicast services on the switch: multicast-services igmp-snooping enable

3

Set attributes for the VLAN acting as a multicast L2 forwarding domain: multicast-services igmp-snooping set vlan {activelinger-timeout <SECONDS: 0-300>} {compatibility-mode } {default-router-port } {fork } {last-member-query-interval } {leave-mode } {linger-timeout <SECONDS: 10-300>} {min-response-time } {server-topology } {priority } {query-delay } {query-engine } {query-interval <SECONDS: 10-999999>} {query-ip-source-addr } {query-response-interval } {rapidrecovery-mode } {robustness } {router-address-range } {router-query-interval <SECONDS: 10-999999>}

To add server ports to the multicast L2 forwarding domain 4

Add server ports to the multicast L2 forwarding domain: multicast-services server-port add vlan [port ] —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-16 Multicast services configuration

Procedure 15-2 Configuring channel streams Configure a channel stream to define a set of multicast groups that are flooded to all interfaces in the forwarding domain. When multicast services are enabled for a particular forwarding domain, a new and empty channel stream is created for that forwarding domain. Multicast groups can be added or removed from this channel stream at any time. As multicast groups are added to the channel stream, they immediately begin to flow to all interfaces in the forwarding domain. Configured channel streams are saved in the system configuration. You can: •

add a multicast group to a channel stream



remove a multicast group fro a channel stream



exclude a port from a channel stream



include a port in a channel stream

Step

Action

To add a multicast group to a channel stream 1

Add a multicast group to a channel stream: multicast-services channel-stream add vlan {groupaddress } where vlan

is the VLAN to add the multicast group for.

group-address

is the IP multicast address or addresses for the multicast group.

To remove a multicast group from a channel stream 2

Remove a multicast group from a channel stream: multicast-services channel-stream remove vlan {group-address } where vlan

is the VLAN to remove the channel stream group from.

group-address

is the IP multicast address or addresses for the channel stream group.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-17 To exclude a port from a channel stream 3

Exclude a port from a channel stream: multicast-services channel-stream exclude vlan {port } where vlan

is the VLAN.

port

is the port or ports to exclude.

To include a port in a channel stream 4

Include a port in a channel stream: multicast-services channel-stream include vlan {port } where vlan

is the VLAN.

port

is the port or ports to include. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-18 Multicast services configuration

Procedure 15-3 Configuring IGMP forking with VLAN translation To configure IGMP forking with VLAN translation, IGMP snooping must be enabled. Step

Action

1

Enable IGMP snooping: multicast-services igmp-snooping enable

2

Create a multicast VLAN: vlan create vlan {vlan }

3

Add a host port: vlan add vlan {vlan }{port }

4

Add a router port: vlan add vlan {vlan } {port }

5

Create a multicast service: multicast-services create vlan {vlan }

6

Turn IGMP forking on: multicast-services igmp-snooping set vlan {vlan } fork on

7

Create the upstream data vlan: vlan create vlan {vlan }

8

Add the upstream data VLAN to the host and router port: vlan add vlan {vlan } {port } vlan add vlan {vlan } {port }

9

Configure VLAN translation to the host port: vlan translate add {port } [vid ] vlan {vlan } —end—

Example The following example shows IGMP forking with VLAN translation. This example assumes that your multicast service is on vlan 100 and the upstream data vlan is 101. vlan create vlan 100 vlan add vlan 100 port 1 vlan add vlan 100 port 3 multicast-services create vlan 100 multicast-services igmp-snooping set vlan 100 fork on 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-19

vlan vlan vlan vlan

create vlan 101 add vlan 101 port 1 add vlan 101 port 3 translate add port 1 vid 100 vlan 101

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-20 Multicast services configuration

Procedure 15-4 Configuring a multicast router topology Configure devices in a network where a multicast server is delivering services over the network by means of a multicast router, where the router is also the querier and controls the delivery of multicast streams. In this example, multicast services are delivered on VLAN 300. Figure 15-2 Multicast services with a multicast router Multicast Server

Router

Set Top Box Device 1

Device 4

Device 2

Device 3

Set Top Box

Set Top Box

The default value for the query-ip-source-address is 0.0.0.0. This value is used as the source address for all query messages as well as for proxy-reply messages sent to the router. The default value works in most cases. However, 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-21

if this address must be changed because of a router on the network, make sure to use the correct address for the router interface you are using, otherwise, the router may discard all proxy-reply messages from the device. Step

Action

1

Create a multicast entry for the VLAN on all devices, which enables multicast services for the specified VLAN: multicast-services create vlan

2

Set attributes for igmp-snooping. Note that query timers must be set to the same values as on the multicast router: multicast-services igmp-snooping set vlan {activelinger-timeout <SECONDS: 0-300>} {compatibility-mode } {default-router-port } {fork } {last-member-query-interval } {leave-mode } {linger-timeout <SECONDS: 10-300>} {min-response-time } {server-topology } {priority } {query-delay } {query-engine } {query-interval <SECONDS: 10-999999>} {query-ip-source-addr } {query-response-interval } {rapidrecovery-mode } {robustness } {router-address-range } {router-query-interval <SECONDS: 10-999999>}

3

Enable IGMP snooping: multicast-services igmp-snooping enable

4

To enable UMF on the specified VLAN for the devices that have subscriber equipment connected to them (in our example, device 2 and 3), enter the following command: multicast-services umf drop In this scenario, UMF blocks multicast streams originating from subscriber equipment or other locations in the network. It also ensures the subscriber devices receive only the multicast streams they have joined.

5

To verify the IGMP settings, enter the following command: multicast-services show configuration —end—

Example The following example configures device 2 as seen in Figure 15-2. multicast-services create vlan 300 multicast-services igmp-snooping set vlan 300 active-lingertimeout 30 compatibility-mode v2 default-router-port 0 fork off last-member-query-interval 10 leave-mode fast linger-timeout 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-22 Multicast services configuration 125 min-response-time 50 server-topology centralized priority 7 query-delay 10 query-engine off query-interval 125 query-ipsource-addr 0.0.0.0 query-response-interval 100 rapid-recoverymode off robustness 1 router-address-range 0.0.0.0 routerquery-interval 125 multicast-services igmp-snooping enable multicast-services umf drop vlan 300 multicast-services show configuration vlan 300 +-----------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Multicast-Services: Global Enable | | IGMP-Snooping: Global Enable | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | MULTICAST CONFIGURATION VLAN 300 VLAN#300 | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | Multicast Services Admin State | enable | | UMF | drop | | WKM Forwarding | Disabled | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | IGMP CONFIGURATION (general) | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | IGMP Snooping Admin State | enable | | IGMP Forking | off | | IGMP Server Topology | centralized | | IGMP Query Engine | off | | IGMP Leave Mode | fast | | IGMP Compatibility Mode | v2 | | L2 Packet Priority | 7 | | Robustness | 2 | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | IGMP CONFIGURATION (proxy query) | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | Proxy Query Interval (s) | 125 | | Proxy Query Response Interval (ds) | 100 | | Proxy Query Delay (ds) | 10 | | Proxy Query Source Address | 0.0.0.0 | | Last Member Query Interval (ds) | 10 | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | IGMP CONFIGURATION (router) | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | Router Query Interval (s) | 250 | | Linger Timeout (s) | 120 | | Active Linger Timeout (s) | 30 | | Minimum Query Response Interval (ds) | 50 | | Group Address Range (start) | 0.0.0.0 | | Group Address Range (end) | 0.0.0.0 | | Default Router Port | 0 | | Rapid Query Mode | Off | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-23

Procedure 15-5 Configuring a multicast server topology Configure devices in a network that does not employ a multicast router. The multicast server floods a set of multicast streams on the network. The device connected to the multicast server is configured to contain the multicast streams and to act as the querier (Query Engine enabled) for downstream devices. For this example, multicast services are delivered on VLAN 300. In the topology represented in Figure 15-3, UMF is required on device 1 to contain the streams being flooded by the multicast server. On all other devices, UMF is optional.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-24 Multicast services configuration Figure 15-3 Delivering multicast services using the query engine Multicast Server

Set Top Box Device 1

Device 4

Device 2

Device 3

Set Top Box

Set Top Box

Step

Action

1

Create a multicast entry for the VLAN on all devices: multicast-services create vlan This enables multicast services for the specified VLAN.

2

Configure the query engine on the same device: multicast-services igmp-snooping set vlan {activelinger-timeout <SECONDS: 0-300>} {compatibility-mode } {default-router-port } {fork } {last-member-query-interval } {leave-mode } {linger-timeout <SECONDS: 10-300>} {min-response-time
39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-25 50..600>} {server-topology } {priority } {query-delay } query-engine on {query-interval <SECONDS: 10999999>} query-ip-source-addr 10.10.10.10 {queryresponse-interval } {rapidrecovery-mode } {robustness } {router-address-range } {router-query-interval <SECONDS: 10-999999>} 3

Enable IGMP snooping: multicast-services igmp-snooping enable

4

To enable UMF on the specified VLAN for the devices that have subscriber equipment connected to them (in our example, device 2 and 3), enter the following command: multicast-services umf drop vlan

5

To verify the IGMP settings, enter the following command: multicast-services show configuration —end—

Example The following example configures device 1 as shown in Figure 15-3. multicast-services create vlan 300 multicast-services igmp-snooping set vlan 300 active-lingertimeout 30 compatibility-mode v2 default-router-port 0 fork off last-member-query-interval 10 leave-mode fast linger-timeout 125 min-response-time 50 server-topology centralized priority 7 query-delay 10 query-engine on query-interval 125 query-ipsource-addr 10.10.10.10 query-response-interval 100 rapidrecovery-mode off robustness 1 router-address-range 0.0.0.0 router-query-interval 125

multicast-services igmp-snooping enable multicast-services umf drop vlan 300 multicast-services show configuration vlan 300 +-----------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Multicast-Services: Global Enable | | IGMP-Snooping: Global Enable | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | MULTICAST CONFIGURATION VLAN 300 VLAN#300 | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | Multicast Services Admin State | enable | | UMF | drop | | WKM Forwarding | Disabled | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | IGMP CONFIGURATION (general) | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | IGMP Snooping Admin State | enable | 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-26 Multicast services configuration | IGMP Forking | off | | IGMP Server Topology | centralized | | IGMP Query Engine | on | | IGMP Leave Mode | fast | | IGMP Compatibility Mode | v2 | | L2 Packet Priority | 7 | | Robustness | 2 | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | IGMP CONFIGURATION (proxy query) | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | Proxy Query Interval (s) | 125 | | Proxy Query Response Interval (ds) | 100 | | Proxy Query Delay (ds) | 10 | | Proxy Query Source Address | 10.10.10.10 | | Last Member Query Interval (ds) | 10 | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | IGMP CONFIGURATION (router) | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | Router Query Interval (s) | 250 | | Linger Timeout (s) | 120 | | Active Linger Timeout (s) | 30 | | Minimum Query Response Interval (ds) | 50 | | Group Address Range (start) | 0.0.0.0 | | Group Address Range (end) | 0.0.0.0 | | Default Router Port | 0 | | Rapid Query Mode | Off | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-27

Procedure 15-6 Configuring multicast servers with redundant routers Configure devices in a network that has two or more redundant multicast servers. Both multicast servers are connected to the network by means of a multicast router. In this scenario, only one router, with its associated multicast server, is active at a time. The second router and server are in a standby mode. The active server is determined by identifying the router that has the lowest IP address. This router handles general queries and authorizes the delivery of various streams through the network. Figure 15-4 shows a sample network topology for delivering multicast services using redundant multicast routers.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-28 Multicast services configuration Figure 15-4 Delivering multicast services using redundant multicast routers Multicast Router 1 Server 1

Multicast Server 2

Set Top Box

Router 2 Device 1

Device 2

Device 4 Device 3

Set Top Box

Set Top Box

In response to a topology change, for example, if the link that has the router port for the device goes down, the device will advertise a router address of 0.0.0.0 to indicate that it has lost the router. For example, assuming that router 1 has a lower IP address than Router 2, if the link between device 1 and Router 1 goes down, devices 1, 2, 3 and 4 will send out general queries advertising a router address of 0.0.0.0. Device 4 will become the interface for multicast services and all joins/leaves will then be sent to it. However, when Router 1 is restored, it will again become the primary router and Router 2 will again go into standby mode.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-29

This allows the network to continue delivery of multicast services while ensuring the least delay in service possible. This also allows order to be maintained between the two multicast routers, so that there is no competition or confusion. In this example, multicast services are assumed to be delivered on VLAN 300. For the network represented in Figure 15-4, UMF is required on device 1 and device 2. On all other devices, it is optional. The default value for the query-ip-source-address is 0.0.0.0. This value is used as the source address for all query messages as well as for proxy-reply messages sent to the router. The default value should work in most cases. However, if this address must be changed because of a router on the network, make sure to use the correct address for the router interface you are using, otherwise, the router may discard all proxy-reply messages from the device. Step

Action

1

Create a multicast entry for the VLAN on all devices: multicast-services create vlan This enables multicast services for the specified VLAN.

2

Enable UMF on device 1 and device 4. (Optional) Enable UMF on the specified VLAN for the devices that have subscriber equipment connected to them (in our example, device 2 and 3). multicast-services umf drop

3

Set attributes for igmp-snooping. Note that query timers must be set to the same values as on the multicast router: multicast-services igmp-snooping set vlan {activelinger-timeout <SECONDS: 0-300>} {compatibility-mode } {default-router-port } {fork } {last-member-query-interval } {leave-mode } {linger-timeout <SECONDS: 10-300>} {min-response-time } {server-topology } {priority } {query-delay } {query-engine } {query-interval <SECONDS: 10-999999>} {query-ip-source-addr } {query-response-interval } {rapidrecovery-mode } {robustness } {router-address-range } {router-query-interval <SECONDS: 10-999999>}

4

Enable IGMP snooping on all four devices. multicast-services igmp-snooping enable

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-30 Multicast services configuration 5

(Optional) Verify the IGMP settings. multicast-services show configuration —end—

Example The following example configures device 1 as shown in Figure 15-4. Note that device 1 and device 4 have the same configuration. multicast-services create vlan 300 multicast-services umf drop vlan 300 multicast-services igmp-snooping set vlan 300 active-lingertimeout 30 compatibility-mode v2 default-router-port 0 fork off last-member-query-interval 10 leave-mode fast linger-timeout 125 min-response-time 50 server-topology centralized priority 7 query-delay 10 query-engine off query-interval 125 query-ipsource-addr 0.0.0.0 query-response-interval 100 rapid-recoverymode off robustness 1 router-address-range 0.0.0.0 routerquery-interval 125

multicast-services igmp-snooping enable multicast-services show configuration vlan 300 +-----------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Multicast-Services: Global Enable | | IGMP-Snooping: Global Enable | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | MULTICAST CONFIGURATION VLAN 300 VLAN#300 | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | Multicast Services Admin State | enable | | UMF | drop | | WKM Forwarding | Disabled | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | IGMP CONFIGURATION (general) | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | IGMP Snooping Admin State | enable | | IGMP Forking | off | | IGMP Server Topology | centralized | | IGMP Query Engine | off | | IGMP Leave Mode | fast | | IGMP Compatibility Mode | v2 | | L2 Packet Priority | 7 | | Robustness | 2 | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | IGMP CONFIGURATION (proxy query) | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | Proxy Query Interval (s) | 125 | | Proxy Query Response Interval (ds) | 100 | | Proxy Query Delay (ds) | 10 | | Proxy Query Source Address | 0.0.0.0 | | Last Member Query Interval (ds) | 10 | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | IGMP CONFIGURATION (router) | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-31 | Router Query Interval (s) | 250 | | Linger Timeout (s) | 120 | | Active Linger Timeout (s) | 30 | | Minimum Query Response Interval (ds) | 50 | | Group Address Range (start) | 0.0.0.0 | | Group Address Range (end) | 0.0.0.0 | | Default Router Port | 0 | | Rapid Query Mode | Off | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-32 Multicast services configuration

Procedure 15-7 Configuring redundant query engines This example demonstrates how to configure devices in a network that has redundant links between the multicast server and the rest of the network. Figure 15-5 IGMP Snooping Multicast Server

Set Top Box

Device 3 Device 1

Device 2

Set Top Box

Set Top Box

In this scenario, the query engine must be enabled on device 1 and device 3, but only one query engine is active at a time. The second query engine is in standby mode. The active query engine is determined by identifying the engine with the lowest source IP address. This query engine then handles general queries and authorizes the delivery of various streams through the network. In response to a topology change, for example, if the link that has the router port for a device goes down, the device advertises a router address of 0.0.0.0 to indicate that it has lost the router.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-33

For example, assuming that device 1 has a lower source IP address than device 3, if the link between device 1 and the multicast server goes down, devices 1, 2, and 3 send out general queries advertising a router address of 0.0.0.0. Device 3 then becomes the interface for multicast services and all join and leave messages are sent to it. However, when the link between device 1 and the multicast server is restored, device 1 becomes the primary query engine, and device 3 returns to standby mode. This allows the network to continue delivery of multicast services while ensuring the least delay in service possible. This also allows order to be maintained between the two query engines, so that there is no competition or confusion. For the network represented in Figure 15-5, multicast services are assumed to be delivered on VLAN 300. UMF is required on device 1 and device 3. On all other devices, it is optional. The network is using RSTP. Step

Action

1

Create a multicast entry for the VLANs: multicast-services create vlan This enables multicast services for the specified VLAN.

2

Configure the query engine on devices 1 and 3: multicast-services igmp-snooping set vlan {activelinger-timeout <SECONDS: 0-300>} {compatibility-mode } {default-router-port } {fork } {last-member-query-interval } {leave-mode } {linger-timeout <SECONDS: 10-300>} {min-response-time } {server-topology } {priority } {query-delay } {query-engine } {query-interval <SECONDS: 10-999999>} {query-ip-source-addr } {query-response-interval } {rapidrecovery-mode } {robustness } {router-address-range } {router-query-interval <SECONDS: 10-999999>} When using this command, the source IP address must come before the Query Engine is enabled, in order to function properly. In addition, the router port must be set to 0 (unlearned). Make sure that the source IP address for the two devices is different and that the device that should become the primary query engine has a lower IP address.

3

Enable IGMP snooping on devices 1, 2, and 3: multicast-services igmp-snooping enable

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-34 Multicast services configuration 4

Enable UMF on devices that have subscriber equipment connected to them: multicast-services umf drop

5

(Optional) Verify the IGMP settings. multicast-services show configuration —end—

Example The following example configures device 1 as shown in Figure 15-3. Note that with the exception of the query engine source IP address, the configuration for device 1 and device 3 is the same. multicast-services create vlan 300 multicast-services igmp-snooping set vlan 300 active-lingertimeout 30 compatibility-mode v2 default-router-port 0 fork off last-member-query-interval 10 leave-mode fast linger-timeout 125 min-response-time 50 server-topology centralized priority 7 query-delay 10 query-engine on query-interval 125 query-ipsource-addr 10.10.10.10 query-response-interval 100 rapidrecovery-mode off robustness 1 router-address-range 0.0.0.0 router-query-interval 125

multicast-services igmp-snooping enable multicast-services umf drop vlan 300 multicast-services show configuration vlan 300 +-----------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Multicast-Services: Global Enable | | IGMP-Snooping: Global Enable | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | MULTICAST CONFIGURATION VLAN 300 VLAN#300 | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | Multicast Services Admin State | enable | | UMF | drop | | WKM Forwarding | Disabled | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | IGMP CONFIGURATION (general) | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | IGMP Snooping Admin State | enable | | IGMP Forking | off | | IGMP Server Topology | centralized | | IGMP Query Engine | on | | IGMP Leave Mode | fast | | IGMP Compatibility Mode | v2 | | L2 Packet Priority | 7 | | Robustness | 2 | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | IGMP CONFIGURATION (proxy query) | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | Proxy Query Interval (s) | 125 | | Proxy Query Response Interval (ds) | 100 | | Proxy Query Delay (ds) | 10 | 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-35 | Proxy Query Source Address | 10.10.10.10 | | Last Member Query Interval (ds) | 10 | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | IGMP CONFIGURATION (router) | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+ | Router Query Interval (s) | 250 | | Linger Timeout (s) | 120 | | Active Linger Timeout (s) | 30 | | Minimum Query Response Interval (ds) | 50 | | Group Address Range (start) | 0.0.0.0 | | Group Address Range (end) | 0.0.0.0 | | Default Router Port | 0 | | Rapid Query Mode | Off | +-------------------------------------------------+---------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-36 Multicast services configuration

Procedure 15-8 Clearing multicast service statistics You can clear: •

multicast services statistics



multicast services statistics by VLAN

Step

Action

To clear multicast services statistics 1

Clear multicast services statistics multicast-services clear {statistics}

To clear multicast services statistics by VLAN 2

Clear multicast services statistics by VLAN multicast-services clear vlan {statistics} —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Multicast services configuration 15-37

Procedure 15-9 Displaying multicast services information Display multicast services information to verify the configuration. You can display: •

a brief summary of multicast configuration and status



all configuration settings



all configuration and status



group status



active multicast groups



all configuration settings

Step

Action

To display a brief summary of multicast configuration and status 1

Display a brief summary of multicast configuration and status: multicast-services show brief

To display all configuration settings 2

Display all configuration settings: multicast-services show configuration {vlan }

To display all configuration and status 3

Display all configuration and status: multicast-services show everything {vlan }

To display group status 4

Display group status: multicast-services show group-status {vlan }{group-address }

To display all active multicast groups 5

Display all active multicast groups: multicast-services show groups {vlan } {port }

To display all configuration settings 6

Display all configuration settings: multicast-services show status {vlan } —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

15-38 Multicast services configuration

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-1

PWE services configuration

16-

Pseudowire Emulation (PWE) services convert standard Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) streams into Ethernet packets using pseudowire technology. PWE services are provided by the 3932 platform. There are three aspects to PWE services: •

TDM services



encapsulation



transport Note: Some encapsulations cannot be used with some transport options in the SAOS software. For example, MEF8 encapsulation cannot be used with MPLS transport.

PWE services work with SAOS software to provide the following TDM services: •

Structure-Agnostic TDM over Packet (SAToP)



Circuit Emulation Services over Packet Switched Networks (CESoP)

SAToP TDM pseudowire takes the raw TDM bit-stream from T1 or E1, disregards any TDM structure imposed on it, prepends the pseudowire header and dispatches the resulting packet stream over the Ethernet or MPLS PSN. At the remote end, the pseudowire header information is used to identify the egress attachment circuit. The TDM payload from the pseudowire is played out over the egress attachment circuit using the clock information as defined when the pseudowire is configured. With CESoP, structured TDM signals are encapsulated in a pseudowire and sent across the PSN. Advantages of CESoP are: •

PSN bandwidth savings



DS0 level grooming



better resiliency to packet loss in the PSN



more flexible distribution

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-2 PWE services configuration

The encapsulation types that are supported are: •

MEF8: The encapsulation header is identified by an ethertype of 88D8. There are 3 components to this header: — Emulated Circuit Identifier (ECID) - this identifies the emulated circuit being carried. — Control Word - provides sequencing and signaling of defects such as AIS. — Optional RTP Header - timing and sequencing maybe provided via Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP). This is not supported in SAOS software



Dry Martini: The encapsulation header is an MPLS header with an optional control word. The MPLS bottom label is the PWE label. There is no tunnel label.



MPLS: The encapsulation header is an MPLS header. The MPLS bottom label is the PWE label. There is also a tunnel label identifying the MPLS tunnel.

The supported transport for the PWE services are: •

802.1Q: The Ethernet header contains one VLAN: the service VLAN (SVLAN). The S-VLAN and the destination MAC address identify the Ethernet PSN.



QinQ: The Ethernet header contains two VLANS: the customer VLAN (CVLAN) and the S-VLAN. The S-VLAN and the destination MAC address identify the Ethernet PSN.



MPLS: The MPLS header is also used for the transport where the tunnel label is stacked on top of the PWE label. The tunnel label is used to identify the MPLS PSN.

Figure 16-1 shows the encapsulation and transport types.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-3 Figure 16-1 Encapsulation and transport types

When configuring TDM services, note the following: •

The PWE hardware supports either T1 ports or E1 ports but not both at the same time. By default, the PWE hardware is in T1 mode.



The PWE hardware supports 16 TDM T1 or E1 physical ports. Each port can be channelized (NxDS0) and bundled where a bundle is treated as a single pseudowire.



The number of pseudowire services that the PWE hardware supports is up to 16 for SAToP and 24 for CESoP whether the configuration is T1 or E1.

The procedures in this chapter are inter-related and are intended to be used as building blocks that can be combined to offer various PWE services over PSN. The procedures are: •

“Configuring PWE services” on page 16-6



“Configuring TDM ports” on page 16-7



“Configuring TDM profiles” on page 16-11



“Configuring attachment circuits” on page 16-13



“Configuring virtual circuits” on page 16-17



“Configuring MPLS” on page 16-25



“Configuring Layer 2 virtual circuits” on page 16-26



“Configuring virtual switch cross-connections” on page 16-27

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-4 PWE services configuration

Figure 16-2 shows the flow of the procedures for end-to-end configuration. Figure 16-2 PWE services configuration PWE services configuration

Configure attachment circuits

Configure tdm-mef8 virtual circuit

Configure tdm-dry-martini virtual circuit

Configure Ethernet virtual circuit

Configure Ethernet virtual circuit

Configure tdm-mpls virtual circuit

Configure MPLS transport (tunnel, mpls l2vpn)

Configure virtual switch cross-connect

End

You can display information about configured PWE services. Procedures to display information are: •

“Displaying TDM port information” on page 16-28



“Displaying attachment circuit information” on page 16-30



“Displaying virtual circuit information” on page 16-31



“Displaying virtual switch information” on page 16-32

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-5

Additionally, this chapter provides end-to-end procedures for configuring Mobile Wireless Backhaul (MWB) in Metro Ethernet or MPLS networks: •

“Configuring SAToP services over 802.1Q Metro Ethernet” on page 16-34



“Configuring SAToP services over QinQ Metro Ethernet” on page 16-37



“Configuring SAToP pseudowire over MPLS network” on page 16-40

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-6 PWE services configuration

Procedure 16-1 Configuring PWE services Configure PWE services to enable TDM ports and set the mode that PWE services operates in. By default, TDM ports are disabled. Prior to changing the mode in which the TDM port operates, all TDM virtual circuits and associated cross connects as well as TDM profiles, attachment circuits, and associated performance monitoring instances must be deleted. Note: It takes a few seconds to re-initialize the chip set to operate in the new TDM mode. During that re-initialization, TDM related configuration changes and some TDM show commands are denied. Step

Action

1

Set the mode that the TDM port operates in: port tdm set mode <e1|t1>

2

Enable TDM ports: port tdm enable port —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-7

Procedure 16-2 Configuring TDM ports Configure TDM ports with T1 TDM port parameters if you configured PWE functionality to run in T1 mode. Configure TDM ports with E1 port parameters if you configured the PWE functionality to run in E1 mode. Step

Action

To configure T1 TDM port parameters 1

Configure T1 TDM port parameters: port tdm t1 set port <port> [framing ] [line-code ] [line-build-out <133|266|399|533|655>][clock-mode ] [master-clock-src-port ] [master-clock-src-tdm-vc ] [loopback-mode disabled|local|remote>]} where port

is the TDM port list.

is the framing. framing • super-frame or extended-super-frame: either one SAToP attachment circuit can be created over the port or multiple CESoP attachment circuits, each using different group of timeslots. The default value is unframed. line-code

is the encoding used for the TDM signal on the targeted port. • b8zs: bipolar 8-zero substitution • ami: alternate mark inversion The default value is b8zs.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-8 PWE services configuration where line-build-out <133|266|399| 533|655>

is the number of feet of cable separating the 3932 platform from the remote end of the T1 port. Each value represents the end of a range. • 133: 1 to 133 ft. • 266: 134 to 266 ft. • 399: 267 to 399 ft. • 533: 400 to 533 ft. • 655: 401 to 655 ft. The default value is 133.

[clock-mode ]

is the timing for the TDM port signal. • internal: indicates that the TDM port is using the 3932 clock as defined by the system timing configuration. • recovered: indicates that the TDM port is recovering the clock from the RX signal of the given master-clock-src-port. If master-clock-src-port is not specified, the clock is recovered from the RX signal of the targeted TDM port. • adaptive: indicates that the TDM port is using the TDM virtual circuit specified by master-clock-src-tdm-vc. A maximum of 8 different TDM virtual circuits can be used as reference clock. When using TDM-VC as the master source, the clock mode for the TDM port can be configured only once the TDM virtual circuit has been created. The default value is internal.

master-clock-src- is the TDM port used as the master clock source when the port master-clock-src- is the TDM VC used as the master clock source when the tdm-vc Note: Only TDM VCs associated with TDM ports 1-8 can be used as master-clock-source-tdm-vc. loopback-mode disabled|local| remote>

is the loopback on the targeted ports. When loopback is enabled, the operational state of the port is "maintenance". • disabled: no loopback • local: loopback is towards system, that is, transmit to T1 is received by the system • remote: loopback is towards user, that is, receive by T1 is transmitted back to user The default value is disabled.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-9 To configure E1 TDM port parameters 2

Configure E1 TDM ports: port tdm e1 set port <port> [clock-mode ] [master-clock-src-port ] [master-clock-src-tdm-vc ] [framing ] [line-code ] [loopback-mode ] where port <port>

is the TDM port list.

clock-mode

is the timing for the TDM port signal. • internal: indicates that the TDM port is using the 3932 clock • recovered: indicates that the TDM port is recovering the clock from the RX signal of the given master-clock-src-port. If master-clock-src-port is not specified, the clock is recovered from the RX signal of the port. • adaptive: indicates that the TDM port is using the TDM virtual circuit specified by master-clock-src-tdm-vc. A maximum of 8 different TDM virtual circuits can be used as reference clock. When using TDM-VC as the master source, the clock mode for the TDM port can be configured only once the TDM virtual circuit has been created. The default value is internal.

master-clock-src- is the TDM port used as the master clock source when the port master-clock-src- is the TDM VC used as the master clock source when the tdm-vc Note: Only TDM VCs associated with TDM ports 1-8 can be used as master-clock-source-tdm-vc.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-10 PWE services configuration where framing is the framing. • basic: 32 channels/timeslots X8 bits per channel. Timeslot 0 is used for synchronization, alarm transport, and internal carrier use. • crc-multiframe: consists of 16 basic frames. The default value is unframed. Framing must be set to basic or crc-multiframe in order to be able to configure CESoP services over the TDM port. line-code

is the encoding used for the TDM signal on the targeted port. • hdb3: high density bipolar 3 • ami: alternate mark inversion The default value is hdb3.

loopback-mode

is the loopback on the targeted ports. When loopback is enabled, the operational state of the port is "maintenance". • disabled: no loopback • local: loopback is towards system, that is, transmit to E1 is received by the system • remote: loopback is towards user, that is, receive by E1 is transmitted back to user The default value is disabled. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-11

Procedure 16-3 Configuring TDM profiles Configure a TDM profile to contain the TDM parameters that are used by the TDM virtual circuit and the MPLS Layer 2 Virtual Private Network (L2VPN) pseudowire. A TDM profile can be used by one or more TDM virtual circuits and MPLS L2VPN pseudowires. Note that once a profile has been associated with a virtual circuit or MPLS L2VPN pseudowire, the parameters in the profile cannot be changed without first disassociating the profile from all the virtual circuits or MPLS L2VPNs that it is associated with. Alternately, you can create another profile with different parameters and associate it with the required virtual circuits and MPLS L2VPN pseudowires. Note: A TDM profile cannot be deleted without first disassociating it from a TDM virtual circuit or an MPLS L2VPN.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-12 PWE services configuration

Step

Action

1

Configure the TDM profile: virtual-circuit tdm create tdm-profile pwType {satop|cesop} payload-size where tdm-profile pwType {satop|cesop}

is the pseudowire type, which is one of SAToP or CESoP.

payload-size

is the payload size. If the pwType is satop, payload-size is • for T1, multiples of 24 to a maximum of 192 • for E1, multiples of 32 to a maximum of 256 If the pwType is cesop, payload-size depends on the number of channels used by the attachment circuit that will be referenced along with the TDM profile when the TDM VC is created. The rules for payload-size where pwType is cesop are: • Settable range is 1 to 192 for T1 and 1 to 256 for E1. • Must be a multiple of the number of channels configured on the attachment circuit that is used. For example, 10 channels should use payload size of 10, 20, 30, and so on. • Payload-size maximum must not exceed 64 times the number of channels. For example, payload-size for two channels cannot be greater than 128. • Payload-size divided by the number-of-channels times 125 microseconds must not exceed configured PDV value of TDM-VC, otherwise an error is returned by TDM-VC configuration. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-13

Procedure 16-4 Configuring attachment circuits Configure an attachment circuit to represent the client UNI port as a single logical entity. For E1, channel 0 is always reserved. In PCM30, you must create a separate CESoP pseudowire for the channel 16 signalling channel only, and then bundle the other channels in other CESoP pseudowires. You can •

create a SAToP attachment circuit



create a CESoP attachment circuit



add channels to a CESoP attachment-circuit



remove channels from a CESoP attachment-circuit



set attributes for a CESoP attachment-circuit



unset attributes for a CESoP attachment-circuit Note: An attachment circuit cannot be deleted if it is associated with a TDM virtual circuit.

Step

Action

To create an SAToP attachment circuit 1

Create an SAToP attachment circuit that uses the specified TDM port instance: attachment-circuit satop create ac port where ac

is the attachment circuit.

port

is the TDM port.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-14 PWE services configuration To create a CESoP attachment circuit 2

Create a CESoP attachment circuit on the specified TDM port instance using the selected list of channels: attachment-circuit cesop create ac port channel [master-clock-src ]] where ac

is the attachment circuit.

port

is the TDM port.

channel

is the channel set. If the TDM mode is set to T1, the channel set can be any unused channel in the range of 1 to 24. If the TDM mode is set to E1, the channel set can be any unused channel in the range of 1 to 31. In E1 mode, channel 0 is reserved for signaling and cannot be used in a CESoP attachment circuit.

[master-clock-src Note: indicates whether this circuit is the master clock ] source in adaptive clock mode. The default value is off. Only CESoP ACs associated with TDM port 1 to 8 can be designated master clock source. Note: There can only be one CESoP attachment circuit for each TDM port designated as master clock source. Only the TDM VC that is associated with a CESoP attachment circuit that has its master clock source flag set to on can be used as a master clock source TDM VC. To add channels to a CESoP attachment-circuit 3

Add channels to a CESoP attachment circuit: attachment-circuit cesop add ac channel where ac

is the attachment circuit.

channel

is the channel set. In T1 mode, the channel set can be any un-used channel in the range of 1 to 24. In E1 mode, the channel set can be any un-used channel in the range of 1 to 31‘. Channel 0 is reserved for signaling.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-15 To remove channels from a CESoP attachment-circuit 4

Remove channels from a CESoP attachment circuit: attachment-circuit cesop remove ac channel where ac

is the attachment circuit.

channel

is the channel set.

To set CESoP attachment-circuit attributes 5

Set the attributes of the CESoP attachment circuit: attachment-circuit cesop set ac [master-clocksrc ] where ac

is the attachment circuit.

[master-clock-src indicates whether this circuit is the master clock source in ] adaptive clock mode. The default value is off. If changing from on to off, it can only be done if the associated TDM VC is not currently used as a master clock source for one of the TDM ports that have its clock mode set to adaptive. If setting from off to on, it's allowed only if there is no other AC on the targeted port with its master-clock-src flag set to on. Only CESoP ACs associated with TDM port 1 to 8 can be designated master clock source. Note: There can only be one CESoP attachment circuit for each TDM port designated as master clock source. Only the TDM VC that is associated with a CESoP attachment circuit that has its master clock source flag set to on can be used as a master clock source TDM VC.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-16 PWE services configuration To unset CESoP attachment-circuit attributes 6

Unset the attributes of the CESoP attachment circuit: attachment-circuit cesop unset ac [masterclock-src] where ac

is the attachment circuit.

[master-clocksrc]

sets the master clock source adaptive clock mode to the default value of off. Note: There can only be one CESoP attachment circuit for each TDM port designated as master clock source. Only the TDM VC that is associated with a CESoP attachment circuit that has its master clock source flag set to on can be used as a master clock source TDM VC. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-17

Procedure 16-5 Configuring virtual circuits Configure a virtual circuit to represent the pseudowire-specific and PSNspecific processing that the PWE functionality performs. The virtual circuit is used for proxy PSN-specific processing. Configuring a virtual circuit requires: •

a corresponding attachment circuit



a TDM profile Note: To change the attachment circuit associated with a virtual circuit, delete and re-add the TDM virtual circuit with the new attachment circuit association.

You can create and modify parameters for TDM virtual circuits of type: •

MEF8



Dry Martini



MPLS Note 1: The name of a TDM virtual circuit must be unique across all TDM virtual circuits. Note 2: A TDM virtual circuit cannot be deleted if it is associated with a virtual-switch cross-connect or associated with a performance monitoring instance.

Step

Action

To create a TDM virtual circuit of type MEF8 1

Create a TDM virtual circuit of type MEF8: virtual-circuit tdm-mef8 create vc {ac } [c-vid ] [c-pcp ] {peer-mac <MAC address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX>} [pdv ] {in-ecn } {out-ecn } tdm-profile where vc

is the virtual circuit name.

{ac }

is the attachment circuit.

[c-vid ]

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-18 PWE services configuration where [c-pcp is the P-bits (priority) value. The default value is 7. ] {peer-mac <MAC is the 6-byte unicast MAC address of the remote end of the PWE service. address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX :XX>} [pdv ]

is the Packet Delay Variation (PDV) in microseconds. The range is 1000 to 32000, that is, 1to 32 milliseconds. The pdv parameter determines the size of the jitter buffer used to store incoming TDM service packets. The value of the pdv parameter must be greater than Payload-size divided by the number of channels times 125 microseconds for the CESoP TDM service. For SAToP services, the default value is 3000 microseconds. For CESoP services, the default value is calculated based on the number of channels used according to the following equation: ((payload-size modulo num-channels) + n) so that this sum * 125 >= 1000.

{in-ecn }

is the incoming or local Ethernet Connection Identifier (ECID). On packets received from the PSN, the EC-ID of the ingress packet is used to find the local TDM service this packet belongs to. The value is in the range of 1 to 65535. It must be unique amongst all tdm-mef8 (in-ecn).

{out-ecn }

is the outgoing or remote EC-ID that is inserted on the TDM packet sent out to the PSN, that is, the EC-ID of the remote peer. Set the out-ecn parameter to the in-ecn value at the remote peer. Note that there are no local checks to verify that the values correspond.

{tdm-profile }

is the TDM profile

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-19 To modify parameters for a TDM virtual circuit of type MEF8 2

Modify parameters for a TDM virtual circuit of type MEF8: virtual-circuit tdm-mef8 set vc [ac ] [c-vid ] [c-pcp ] [peermac <mac>][pdv <1000-32000>] [in-ecn <1-65535>] [out-ecn <1-65535>] [tdm-profile ] where vc

is the virtual circuit.

[ac ]

is the attachment circuit.

[c-vid ] [c-pcp is the P-bits (priority) value. The default value is 7. ] [peer-mac <MAC is the 6-byte unicast MAC address of the remote end of the PWE service. address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX :XX>] [pdv ]

is the Packet Delay Variation (PDV) in microseconds. The range is 1000 to 32000, that is, 1 to 32 milliseconds. The pdv parameter determines the size of the jitter buffer used to store incoming TDM service packets. The value of the pdv parameter must be greater than Payload-size divided by the number of channels times 125 microseconds for the CESoP TDM service. For SAToP services, the default value is 3000 microseconds. For CESoP services, the default value is calculated based on the number of channels used according to the following equation: ((payload-size modulo num-channels) + n) so that this sum * 125 >= 1000.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-20 PWE services configuration where [in-ecn ]

is the incoming or local Ethernet Connection Identifier (ECID). On packets received from the PSN, the EC-ID of the ingress packet is used to find the local TDM service this packet belongs to. The value is in the range of 1 to 65535. It must be unique amongst all tdm-mef8 (in-ecn).

[out-ecn ]

is the outgoing or remote EC-ID that is inserted on the TDM packet sent out to the PSN, that is, the EC-ID of the remote peer. Set the out-ecn parameter to the in-ecn value at the remote peer. Note that there are no local checks to verify that the values correspond.

[tdm-profile ]

is the TDM profile

To create a TDM virtual circuit of type Dry Martini 3

Create a TDM virtual circuit of type Dry Martini: virtual-circuit tdm-dry-martini create vc {ac } [c-vid ] [cpcp ] {peer-mac <MAC address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX>} [pdv ] {in-label } {out-label } {tdm-profile } where vc

is the virtual circuit name.

{ac }

is the attachment circuit.

[c-vid ] [c-pcp is the P-bits (priority) value. The default value is 7. ] {peer-mac <MAC is the 6-byte unicast MAC address of the remote end of the PWE service. address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX :XX>}

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-21 where [pdv ]

is the Packet Delay Variation (PDV) in microseconds. The range is 1000 to 32000, that is, 1 to 32 milliseconds. The pdv parameter determines the size of the jitter buffer used to store incoming TDM service packets. The value of the pdv parameter must be greater than Payload-size divided by the number of channels times 125 microseconds for the CESoP TDM service. For SAToP services, the default value is 3000 microseconds. For CESoP services, the default value is calculated based on the number of channels used according to the following equation: ((payload-size modulo num-channels) + n) so that this sum * 125 >= 1000.

{in-label }

is the incoming or local, that is pseudowire, label. On packet receive from the PSN, the pseudowire label from the packet is used to find local TDM service. It must be unique amongst all tdm-dry-martini (in-label) values. The label must be in the configured static MPLS VC label range.

{out-label }

is the outgoing or remote label that is inserted on the TDM packet sent out to the PSN, that is, the pseudowire label of the remote peer. Set the value of the out-label parameter to the value of the in-label at the remote peer. The label must be in the configured static MPLS virtual circuit label range and available, that is, not already used by static MPLS virtual circuit or another TDM Dry Martini pseudowire. Note that there are no local checks to verify that the values correspond.

{tdm-profile }

is the TDM profile.

To modify the parameters of a TDM virtual circuit of type Dry Martini 4

Modify the parameters of a TDM virtual circuit of type Dry Martini: Note: This operation is only permitted if the TDM virtual circuit is not crossconnected. virtual-circuit tdm-dry-martini set vc [ac ] [c-vid ] [cpcp ] [peer-mac <MAC address:

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-22 PWE services configuration XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX>] [pdv ] [in-label ] [out-label ] [tdm-profile ] where vc

is the virtual circuit.

[ac ]

is the attachment circuit.

[c-vid ] [c-pcp is the P-bits (priority) value. The default value is 7. ] [peer-mac <MAC is the 6-byte unicast MAC address of the Pseudowire at the remote end of the PWE service. address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX :XX>] [pdv ]

is the Packet Delay Variation (PDV) in microseconds. The range is 1000 to 32000, that is, 1 to 32 milliseconds. The pdv parameter determines the size of the jitter buffer used to store incoming TDM service packets. The value of the pdv parameter must be greater than Payload-size divided by the number of channels times 125 microseconds for the CESoP TDM service. For SAToP services, the default value is 3000 microseconds. For CESoP services, the default value is calculated based on the number of channels used according to the following equation: ((payload-size modulo num-channels) + n) so that this sum * 125 >= 1000.

{in-label }

is the incoming or local, that is pseudowire, label. On packet receive from the PSN, the pseudowire label from the packet is used to find local TDM service. It must be unique amongst all tdm-dry-martini (in-label) values. The label must be in the configured static MPLS VC label range.

{out-label }

is the outgoing or remote label that is inserted on the TDM packet sent out to the PSN, that is, the pseudowire label of the remote peer. Set the value of the out-label parameter to the value of the in-label at the remote peer. The label must be in the configured static MPLS virtual circuit label range and available, that is, not already used by static MPLS virtual circuit or another TDM Dry Martini pseudowire. Note that there are no local checks to verify that the values correspond.

[tdm-profile ]

is the TDM profile.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-23 To create a TDM virtual circuit of type MPLS 5

Create a TDM virtual circuit of type MPLS: Note: The peer mac address, in-label, and out-label are set in the MPLS L2VPN virtual circuit configuration. virtual-circuit tdm-mpls create vc ac [pdv <3000-32000> tdm-profile where vc

is the virtual circuit.

ac

is the attachment circuit.

pdv <300032000>

is the Packet Delay Variation (PDV) in microseconds. The range is 1000 to 32000, that is, 1 to 32 milliseconds. The pdv parameter determines the size of the jitter buffer used to store incoming TDM service packets. The value of the pdv parameter must be greater than Payload-size divided by the number of channels times 125 microseconds for the CESoP TDM service. For SAToP services, the default value is 3000 microseconds. For CESoP services, the default value is calculated based on the number of channels used according to the following equation: ((payload-size modulo num-channels) + n) so that this sum * 125 >= 1000.

tdm-profile

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-24 PWE services configuration To modify the parameters of a TDM virtual circuit of type MPLS 6

Modify the parameters of a TDM virtual circuit of type MPLS: Note: This operation is only permitted if the TDM virtual circuit is not crossconnected. virtual-circuit tdm-mpls set vc [ac ] [pdv <3000-32000>][tdm-profile ] where vc

is the virtual circuit.

ac

is the attachment circuit.

pdv <300032000>

is the Packet Delay Variation (PDV) in microseconds. The range is 1000 to 32000, that is, 1 to 32 milliseconds. The pdv parameter determines the size of the jitter buffer used to store incoming TDM service packets. The value of the pdv parameter must be greater than Payload-size divided by the number of channels times 125 microseconds for the CESoP TDM service. For SAToP services, the default value is 3000 microseconds. For CESoP services, the default value is calculated based on the number of channels used according to the following equation: ((payload-size modulo num-channels) + n) so that this sum * 125 >= 1000.

tdm-profile —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-25

Procedure 16-6 Configuring MPLS To configure MPLS, configure the following: •

IP interfaces



IGP



tunnels



pseudowires

For procedures, refer to “Configuring static virtual circuits” on page 12-94.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-26 PWE services configuration

Procedure 16-7 Configuring Layer 2 virtual circuits Configure Layer 2 virtual circuits. Step

Action

1

Create a VLAN: vlan create vlan

2

Add ports to the VLAN: vlan add vlan port

3

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit: virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vlan —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-27

Procedure 16-8 Configuring virtual switch cross-connections Configure a virtual switch cross-connection to associate a UNI virtual circuit with an NNI virtual circuit. The UNI virtual circuits are mapped to attachment circuits and NNI virtual circuits are mapped to Layer 2 or Layer 3 tunnels. Associating the two virtual circuits creates a point-to-point path between attachment circuits and virtual circuits into the PSN tunnel. Step

Action

1

Create a cross-connection between a TDM virtual circuit and an MPLS virtual circuit: virtual-switch cross-connect create xc <xconnect-name> tdm-vc { { mpls-vc <mpls-vc-name> } | { eth-vc <eth-vc-name> } } where

2

xc <xconnectname>

is the name of the cross-connection.

tdm-vc

is the UNI virtual circuit and is customer-facing.

mpls-vc

is an NNI virtual circuit and is PSN-facing.

eth-vc <eth-vcname>

is an NNI Ethernet virtual circuit and is PSN-facing. This parameter is used with MEF8 and Dry-Martini to specify the transport, that is, dot1q or QinQ.

Enable or disable the specified cross-connection: Note: The cross-connection is enabled by default. virtual-switch cross-connect {enable|disable} xc <xconnect-name> where xc <xconnectname>

is the name of the cross-connection created in step 1. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-28 PWE services configuration

Procedure 16-9 Displaying TDM port information You can display •

global performance monitoring statistics for TDM ports, which are the total counts since the last system restart or last TDM mode change



TDM mode, status and configuration a specified port



details on configuration and current active alarms for a specified port Note: There is no command to clear the values displayed by the command port tdm show port <port> statistics.

For more information about viewing and clearing TDM statistics, refer to “Performance monitoring,” in 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Fault and Performance Management (009-3220-009). Ciena recommends using performance monitoring to view TDM port statistics. Step

Action

To display global performance monitoring statistics for TDM ports 1

Display global performance monitoring statistics for TDM ports: port tdm show port <port> statistics

To display the TDM mode, status and configuration of a specified port 2

Display the TDM mode, status and configuration for the specified port: port tdm show

To display details on configuration and current active alarms for a specified port 3

Display details on configuration and current active alarms for the specified port: port tdm show port <port> —end—

Example The port tdm show command provides global configuration and status as well as TDM configuration and status for all TDM ports. Note: After a system reboot, the global state of TDM is in “Initializing” for up to 3 minutes. The following shows the output of the port tdm show command: port tdm show +-------------------------------------------+ | TDM Global Configuration and Status | +------------------+------------------------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-29 | Parameter | Value | +------------------+------------------------+ | Mode | t1 | | State | ready | +------------------+------------------------+

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | TDM Ports Configuration and Status | +-----+--------------------+--------+---------+----------+-----------+--------+----------+--------+ | Port| Framing | Line | Line | Loopback | Clock | Master | Admin | Oper | | | | BldOut | Coding | Mode | Mode | Clock | State | State | +-----+--------------------+--------+---------+----------+-----------+--------+----------+--------+ |tdm01|super-frame | 133 | ami | disabled | internal | | enabled | up | … |tdm16|extended-super-frame| 133 | b8zs | disabled | internal | | disabled | down | +-----+--------------------+--------+---------+----------+-----------+--------+----------+--------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-30 PWE services configuration

Procedure 16-10 Displaying attachment circuit information Display attachment circuit information. Step

Action

1

Display attachment circuit information for all or specified attachment circuits: attachment-circuit {satop|cesop} show [ac ] —end—

Example The following shows an example of the attachment-circuit show command: attachment-circuit show +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Attachment Circuits | +--------------------+----------+--------+-------------------------+------------------+ | Name | Type | Port | Channels assigned | TDM VC | +--------------------+----------+--------+-------------------------+------------------+ | AC1-VL824 | satop | tdm05 | | mefAC5-VL824 | | AC4-VL827 | satop | tdm08 | | mefAC8-VL827 | | AC9a-VL828 | cesop | tdm09 | 1-23 | mefAC9a-VL828 | | AC9b-VL829 | cesop | tdm09 | 24 | mefAC9b-VL829 | | *cesop01ts1-4 | cesop | tdm01 | 1-4 | | +--------------------+----------+--------+-------------------------+------------------+

NOTE: * left of a CESoP attachment circuit name indicates it is designated as master clock source

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-31

Procedure 16-11 Displaying virtual circuit information You can display •

all virtual circuits of type MEF 8 or a specific virtual circuit of type MEF8



all virtual circuits of type Dry Martini or a specific virtual circuit of type Dry Martini



all virtual circuits of type MPLS or a specific virtual circuit of type MPLS

You can also display statistics for TDM virtual circuits by creating performance monitoring instances. For more information, refer to “Performance monitoring,” in 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Fault and Performance Management (009-3220-009). Step

Action

To display all virtual circuits of type MEF8 or a specific virtual circuit of type MEF8 1

Display all virtual circuits of type MEF 8 or a specific virtual circuit of type MEF8: virtual-circuit tdm-mef8 show [vc ]

To display all virtual circuits of type Dry Martini or a specific virtual circuit of type Dry Martini 2

Display all virtual circuits of type Dry Martini or a specific virtual circuit of type Dry Martini: virtual-circuit tdm-dry-martini show [vc ]

To display all virtual circuits of type MPLS or a specific virtual circuit of type MPLS 3

Display all virtual circuits of type MPLS or a specific virtual circuit of type MPLS: virtual-circuit tdm-mpls show [vc ] —end—

Example The following shows an example of the virtual-circuit tdm-mef8 show command: virtual-circuit tdm-mef8 show +--------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Tdm MEF8 Virtual Circuits | +-----------------+-------------------+-----------------+--------+---------+ | Name | AttachmentCircuit | Cross-connect | In Ecn | Out Ecn | +-----------------+-------------------+-----------------+--------+---------+ | AC1-VL900 | AC1-VL900 | XC-Cir1VL900 | 11001 | 12001 | … | mefAC16-VL913 | AC16-VL913 | XC-Cir16VL913 | 11024 | 12024 | +-----------------+-------------------+-----------------+--------+---------+ 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-32 PWE services configuration

Procedure 16-12 Displaying virtual switch information You can display •

all virtual switch information



all configured cross-connections or a specific cross-connection

Step

Action

To display all virtual switch information 1

Display all virtual switch information: virtual-switch show

To display details about a specific virtual switch 2

Display details about a specific virtual switch: virtual-switch show vs {statistics} where statistics

displays subscriber port statistics. —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-33

Procedure 16-13 Displaying virtual switch cross-connection information You can display configuration and status for: •

all configured cross-connections



a specific cross-connection

Step

Action

To display all configured cross-connections 1

Display all configured cross-connections: virtual-switch cross-connect show

To display a specific cross-connection 2

Display all configured cross-connections or a specific cross-connection: virtual-switch cross-connect show xc <xc> —end—

Example The following shows an example of the virtual-switch cross-connect show command: virtual-switch cross-connect show +------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | Cross-Connects | +-----------------+-----------------+--------+-----------------+---------+-----------+ | Name | UNI VC Name | Type | NNI VC Name | Type | OperState | +-----------------+-----------------+--------+-----------------+---------+-----------+ | XC-Cir5VL824 | mefAC5-VL824 | TDM | VCE-5-VL824 | Ethernet| up | | XC-Cir6VL825 | mefAC6-VL825 | TDM | VCE-6-VL825 | Ethernet| up | | XC-Cir7VL826 | mefAC7-VL826 | TDM | VCE-7-VL826 | Ethernet| up | | XC-Cir8VL827 | mefAC8-VL827 | TDM | VCE-8-VL827 | Ethernet| up | | XC-Cir9aVL828 | mefAC9a-VL828 | TDM | VCE-9a-VL828 | Ethernet| up | | XC-Cir9bVL829 | mefAC9b-VL829 | TDM | VCE-9b-VL829 | Ethernet| up | +-----------------+-----------------+--------+-----------------+---------+-----------+

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-34 PWE services configuration

Procedure 16-14 Configuring SAToP services over 802.1Q Metro Ethernet Configure SAToP services over 802.1q Metro Ethernet when you want to dispatch TDM bit-streams from a T1 connection over Metro Ethernet using MEF8 encapsulation or Dry-Martini encapsulation. Figure 16-3 shows a Cell Site Gateway (CSG) router connected to an Aggregator Site Gateway (ASG) router through Metro Ethernet. Figure 16-3 CSG router connected to ASG router through Metro Ethernet

Step

Action

1

Set T1 attributes for the port: port tdm t1 set port <port> framing unframed [line-code ] clock-mode [master-clock-src-port ] [master-clocksrc-tdm-vc ] where port <port>

is the port list.

framing unframed sets the framing type to unframed. line-code

is the line coding type.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-35 where clock-mode

is the clock mode.

master-clock-src- is the TDM port used as the master clock source when the port master-clock-src- is the TDM virtual circuit used as the master clock source tdm-vc Note: The TDM virtual circuit must be created before the clock mode can be set on the port. 2

Create a SAToP attachment circuit using the specified TDM port instance: attachment-circuit satop create ac port <port>

3

Set the TDM profile: virtual-circuit tdm create tdm-profile pwType satop {payload-size }

4

Create the virtual circuit by performing one of the following sub-steps. a. Create a Dry Martini virtual circuit: virtual-circuit tdm-dry-martini create vc ac [c-vid ] [c-pcp ] {peer-mac <MAC address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX>} [pdv ] {inlabel } {out-label } {tdm-profile } b. Create a MEF8 virtual circuit: virtual-circuit tdm-mef8 create vc {ac } [c-vid ] [c-pcp ] {peer-mac <MAC address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX>} [pdv ] {in-ecn } {out-ecn } tdmprofile

5

Create a VLAN: vlan create vlan

6

Add ports to the VLAN: vlan add vlan port

7

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit: virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vlan

8

Create a cross-connection: virtual-switch cross-connect create xc <xc> tdm-vc eth-vc —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-36 PWE services configuration

Example The following example configures SAToP over 802.1Q Metro Ethernet. The Ethernet MAC header with CVLAN 100 serves as the PSN Layer 2 tunnel through the service provider's Ethernet network. By default, the MAC address is assigned to PWE and the C-VLAN type used is 0x8100. port tdm t1 set port tdm01-tdm16 framing unframed linecode ami line-build-out 133 attachment-circuit satop create ac satopAc1 port tdm01 virtual-circuit tdm create tdm-profile satop-profile1 pwType satop payload-size 192 virtual-circuit tdm-dry-martini create vc satop-vc1 ac satopAc1 peer-mac 00:00:01:01:01:01 in-label 4097 outlabel 4097 pdv 3000 tdm-profile satop-profile1 vlan create vlan 100 vlan add vlan 100 port 3 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc ethernet-vc1 vlan 100 virtual-switch cross-connect create xc tdmVs tdm-vc satop-vc1 eth-vc ethernet-vc1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-37

Procedure 16-15 Configuring SAToP services over QinQ Metro Ethernet Configure SAToP services for a QinQ-based Metro Ethernet network. Figure 16-4 shows a CSG router connected to an ASG router through Metro Ethernet - QinQ. Figure 16-4 CSG router connected to ASG router through Metro Ethernet QinQ

Step

Action

1

Set T1 attributes for the port: port tdm t1 set port framing unframed linecoding ] clock-mode recovered clock-mode master-clock-src-port ] line-build-out <133|266|399|533|655>]

2

Create a SAToP attachment circuit using the specified TDM port instance: attachment-circuit satop create ac port <port>

3

Create a TDM virtual circuit by performing one of the following substeps. a. Create a Dry Martini virtual circuit: virtual-circuit tdm-dry-martini create vc ac [c-vid ] [c-pcp ] {peer-mac <MAC address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX>} [pdv ] {inlabel } {out-label } {tdm-profile }

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-38 PWE services configuration b. Create a MEF8 virtual circuit: virtual-circuit tdm-mef8 create vc {ac } [c-vid ] [c-pcp ] {peer-mac <MAC address: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX>} [pdv ] {in-ecn } {out-ecn } tdmprofile 4

Create a VLAN: vlan create vlan

5

Add ports to the VLAN: vlan add vlan port

6

Create an Ethernet virtual circuit: virtual-circuit ethernet create vc vlan

7

Set port-based Ethernet virtual circuit attributes: virtual-circuit ethernet set port vlanethertype <8100|9100|88A8> vlan-ethertype-policy

8

Create a cross-connection: virtual-switch cross-connect create xc <xc> tdm-vc eth-vc —end—

Example The following example configures SAToP services over QinQ-based Metro Ethernet. The Ethernet MAC header with SVLAN 300 and CVLAN 100 serves as the PSN Layer 2 tunnel through the service provider's Ethernet network. By default, the MAC address is assigned to PWE and C-VLAN type used is 0x8100. port tdm t1 set port tdm02 clock-mode recovered port tdm t1 set port tdm01 framing unframed line-code ami clock-mode recovered master-clock-src-port tdm02 linebuild-out 133 attachment-circuit satop create ac satopAc1 port tdm01 virtual-circuit tdm create tdm-profile satop-profile1 pwType satop payload-size 192 virtual-circuit tdm-mef8 create vc satopVc1 ac satopAc1 c-vid 100 peer-mac 00:00:01:01:01:01 in-ecn 100 out-ecn 200 pdv 3000 tdm-profile satop-profile1 vlan create vlan 300 39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-39

vlan add vlan 300 port 3 virtual-circuit ethernet create vc ethernet-vc1 vlan 300 virtual-switch cross-connect create xc mefVs tdm-vc satopVc1 eth-vc ethernet-vc1

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-40 PWE services configuration

Procedure 16-16 Configuring SAToP pseudowire over MPLS network Configure SAToP pseudowire over an MPLS network. Figure 16-5 shows a CSG router connected to an ASG router through an MPLS network. Figure 16-5 CSG router connected to ASG router through MPLS network

Step

Action

1

Set T1 attributes for the port: port tdm t1 set port framing unframed linecoding ] clock-mode recovered master-clock-srcport ] line-build-out <133|266|399|533|655>]

2

Create a SAToP attachment circuit using the specified TDM port instance: attachment-circuit satop create ac port <port>

3

Create a TDM profile: virtual-circuit tdm create tdm-profile {pwType <satop | cesop>} {payload-size }

4

Create a TDM virtual circuit: virtual-circuit tdm-mpls create vc ac pdv tdm-profile

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

PWE services configuration 16-41 5

Create static ingress TE-Tunnel: mpls tunnel create static-ingress <static-ingress> destip next-hop-ip label

6

Create static decapsulation TE-Tunnel: mpls tunnel create static-egress <static-egress> label src-ip

7

Create static MPLS virtual circuit: mpls l2-vpn create static-vc <static-vc> pw-id peer in-label out-label te-tunnel <MPLS ingress primary tunnel> pwType tdm tdm-profile where static-vc <staticvc>

is the static virtual circuit name.

pw-id peer

is the destination IP address.

in-label

is the MPLS decapsulation label.

out-label

is the MPLS encapsulation label.

te-tunnel <MPLS is the ingress transport primary TE tunnel. ingress primary tunnel> pwType tdm

sets the pseudowire type to TDM.

tdm-profile 8

Create cross-connection: virtual-switch cross-connect create xc <xc> tdm-vc mpls-vc <MPLS TDM Virtual Circuit Name> —end—

Example By default the MAC address is assigned to PWE and the C-VLAN type is 0x8100. port tdm t1 set port tdm02 clock-mode recovered

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

16-42 PWE services configuration

port tdm t1 set port tdm01 framing unframed line-code ami clock-mode recovered master-clock-src-port tdm02 linebuild-out 133 attachment-circuit satop create ac satopAc1 port tdm01 virtual-circuit tdm create tdm-profile satop-profile1 pwType satop payload-size 192 virtual-circuit tdm-mpls create vc satop-vc1 ac satopAc1 pdv 3000 tdm-profile satop-profile1 interface create loopback loop ip 20.20.20.20 mpls tunnel create static-ingress ingr-tnl dest-ip 2.2.2.2 next-hop-ip 10.2.2.2 out-label 500 mpls tunnel create static-egress egr-tnl in-label 600 srcip 1.1.1.1 mpls l2-vpn create static-vc mpls-vc peer 2.2.2.2 tetunnel ingr-tnl in-label 4097 out-label 4098 pw-id 1 pwtype tdm tdm-profile satop-profile1 virtual-switch cross-connect create xc mplsTdmVs tdm-vc satop-vc1 mpls-vc mpls-vc —end—

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

17-1

Error codes

17-

This chapter lists error codes.

Traffic profiling error codes Table 17-1 describes the overlap error codes that can occur in advanced mode when provisioning multiple traffic profiles on the same port. For example, if VLANA is provisioned with the VLAN attribute value A, it will overlap with a traffic profile on the same port that has the same attribute value for A. The following is an example of configuring an overlap condition, and the resulting error message: > traffic-profiling > traffic-profiling pir 1024 cbs 32 ebs > traffic-profiling pir 2048 cbs 32 ebs

set port 1 mode advanced standard-profile create port 1 profile 1 name t1 cir 1024 0 dot1dpri 1 standard-profile create port 1 profile 2 name t2 cir 1024 0 dot1dpri 1

ERROR: Creating standard-profile 2 overlaps profile 1 on port 1 -- classifier overlaps existing profile overlap_code #28 Table 17-1 Traffic profiling error codes Overlap code

Classifier combination

Cause of overlap

1

Untagged

Profile with either IP or dscp classifier

2

VlanA

Profile with VS + Vlan classifiers and the Vlan A is a member of the VS. Profile with VS +Vlan + any COS (IP, dscp, dot1d) classifiers and the Vlan A is a member of the VS.

3

VlanA

Profile with VS classifier and VlanA is a member of the VS. Profile with VS + any COS (IP,dscp,dot1d) classifiers and VlanA is a member of the VS.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

17-2 Error codes Table 17-1 Traffic profiling error codes 4

VlanA

Profile with VlanA classifier. Profile with VlanA + any COS (IP, dscp, dot1d) classifiers.

5

VlanA

Profile with any COS (IP, dscp, dot1d) classifier.

6

VlanA + dot1dB

Profile with VS + dot1dB classifiers and VlanA is a member of the VS and dot1d value matches.

7

VlanA + dot1dB

Profile with VS+VlanA+dot1dB classifiers and VlanA is a member of the VS and the dot1d value matches.

8

VlanA + dot1dB

Profile with VS classifier and VlanA is a member of the VS. Profile with VS + IP or dscp classifiers and VlanA is a member of the VS. Profile with VS + Vlan classifiers and VlanA is a member of the VS. Profile with VS + Vlan +IP or dscp classifiers and VlanA is a member of the VS.

9

VlanA + dot1dB

Profile with VlanA +dot1dB classifiers and dot1d value matches.

10

VlanA + dot1dB

Profile with VlanA classifier. Profile with VlanA + IP or dscp classifiers.

11

VlanA + dot1dB

Profile with IP or dscp classifiers.

12

VlanA + dot1dB

Profile with dot1dB classifier and dot1d value matches.

13

VlanA + IPB

Profile with VS + IPB classifiers and VlanA is a member of the VS and IP value matches.

14

VlanA + IPB

Profile with VS+VlanA+IPB classifiers and VlanA is a member of the VS and the IP value matches.

15

VlanA + IPB

Profile with VS classifier and VlanA is a member of the VS. Profile with VS + dot1d or dscp classifiers and VlanA is a member of the VS. Profile with VS + Vlan classifiers and VlanA is a member of the VS. Profile with VS + Vlan +dot1d or dscp classifiers and VlanA is a member of the VS.

16

VlanA + IPB

Profile with VlanA +IPB classifiers and IP value matches.

17

VlanA + IPB

Profile with VlanA classifier. Profile with VlanA + dot1d or dscp classifiers.

18

VlanA + IPB

Profile with dot1d or dscp classifiers.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Error codes 17-3 Table 17-1 Traffic profiling error codes 19

VlanA + IPB

Profile with IPB classifier and IP value matches.

20

VlanA + dscpB

Profile with VS + dscpB classifiers and VlanA is a member of the VS and dscp value matches.

21

VlanA + dscpB

Profile with VS+VlanA+dscpB classifiers and VlanA is a member of the VS and the dscp value matches.

22

VlanA + dscpB

Profile with VS classifier and VlanA is a member of the VS. Profile with VS + IP or dot1d classifiers and VlanA is a member of the VS. Profile with VS + Vlan classifiers and VlanA is a member of the VS. Profile with VS + Vlan +IP or dot1d classifiers and VlanA is a member of the VS.

23

VlanA + dscpB

Profile with VlanA +dscpB classifiers and dscp value matches.

24

VlanA + dscpB

Profile with VlanA classifier. Profile with VlanA + IP or dot1d classifiers.

25

VlanA + dscpB

Profile with IP or dot1d classifiers.

26

VlanA + dscpB

Profile with dscpB classifier and dscp value matches.

27

dot1dA

Profile with VS classifier. Profile with VS + IP or dscp classifiers. Profile with VS + Vlan classifiers. Profile with VS + Vlan + IP or dscp classifiers. Profile with Vlan classifier. Profile with Vlan + IP or dscp classifiers. Profile with IP or dscp classifier.

28

dot1dA

Profile with VS + dot1dA classifiers. Profile with VS + Vlan +dot1dA classifiers. Profile with Vlan +dot1dA classifiers. Profile with dot1dA classifier. Where the dot1d value matches.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

17-4 Error codes Table 17-1 Traffic profiling error codes 29

IPA

Profile with VS classifier. Profile with VS + dot1d or dscp classifiers. Profile with VS + Vlan classifiers. Profile with VS + Vlan + dot1d or dscp classifiers. Profile with Vlan classifier. Profile with Vlan + dot1d or dscp classifiers. Profile with dot1d or dscp classifier.

30

IPA

Profile with VS + IPA classifiers. Profile with VS + Vlan +IPA classifiers. Profile with Vlan +IPA classifiers. Profile with IPA classifier. Where the IP value matches.

31

dscpA

Profile with VS classifier. Profile with VS + IP or dot1d classifiers. Profile with VS + Vlan classifiers. Profile with VS + Vlan + IP or dot1d classifiers. Profile with Vlan classifier. Profile with Vlan + IP or dot1d classifiers. Profile with IP or dot1d classifier.

32

dscpA

Profile with VS + dscpA classifiers. Profile with VS + Vlan +dscpA classifiers. Profile with Vlan +dscpA classifiers. Profile with dscpA classifier. Where the dscp value matches.

33

VSA

Profile with VSA classifier. Profile with VSA + any COS(dot1d,IP,dscp) classifiers. Profile with VSA +Vlan classifiers. Profile with VSA + Vlan + any COS(dot1d,IP,dscp) classifiers.

34

VSA

Profile with Vlan classifier and Vlan is a member of VSA. Profile with Vlan + any COS(dot1d, IP, dscp) classifiers and Vlan is a member of VSA.

35

VSA

Profile with any COS(dot1d,IP,dscp) classifier.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Error codes 17-5 Table 17-1 Traffic profiling error codes 36

VSA + dot1dB

Profile with VSA + dot1dB classifiers and dot1d value matches. Profile with VSA +Vlan + dot1dB classifiers and dot1d value matches.

37

VSA + dot1dB

Profile with VSA classifier. Profile with VSA +IP or dscp classifiers. Profile with VSA +Vlan classifiers. Profile with VSA + Vlan + IP or dscp classifiers.

38

VSA + dot1dB

Profile with Vlan +dot1dB classifiers and Vlan is a member of VSA.

39

VSA + dot1dB

Profile with Vlan and Vlan is a member of VSA. Profile with Vlan + IP or dscp classifiers and Vlan is a member of VSA.

40

VSA + dot1dB

Profile with dot1dB classifier.

41

VSA + dot1dB

Profile with IP or dscp classifier.

42

VSA + IPB

Profile with VSA + IPB classifiers and IP value matches. Profile with VSA +Vlan + IPB classifiers and IP value matches.

43

VSA + IPB

Profile with VSA classifier. Profile with VSA +dot1d or dscp classifiers. Profile with VSA +Vlan classifiers. Profile with VSA + Vlan + dot1d or dscp classifiers.

44

VSA + IPB

Profile with Vlan +IPB classifiers and Vlan is a member of VSA.

45

VSA + IPB

Profile with Vlan and Vlan is a member of VSA. Profile with Vlan + dot1d or dscp classifiers and Vlan is a member of VSA.

46

VSA + IPB

Profile with IPB classifier.

47

VSA + IPB

Profile with dot1d or dscp classifier.

48

VSA + dscpB

Profile with VSA + dscpB classifiers and dscp value matches. Profile with VSA +Vlan + dscpB classifiers and dscp value matches.

49

VSA + dscpB

Profile with VSA classifier. Profile with VSA +IP or dot1d classifiers. Profile with VSA +Vlan classifiers. Profile with VSA + Vlan + IP or dot1d classifiers.

50

VSA + dscpB

Profile with Vlan +dscpB classifiers and Vlan is a member of VSA.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

17-6 Error codes Table 17-1 Traffic profiling error codes 51

VSA + dscpB

Profile with Vlan and Vlan is a member of VSA. Profile with Vlan + IP or dot1d classifiers and Vlan is a member of VSA.

52

VSA + dscpB

Profile with dscpB classifier.

53

VSA + dscpB

Profile with IP or dot1d classifier.

54

VSA + VlanB

Profile with VSA classifier. Profile with VSA + any COS(dot1d, IP, dscp) classifiers.

55

VSA + VlanB

Profile with VSA + VlanB classifiers. Profile with VSA + VlanB +any COS(dot1d,IP,dscp) classifiers.

56

VSA + VlanB

Profile with VlanB classifier and VlanB is a member of VSA. Profile with VlanB + any COS (dot1d,IP,dscp) classifiers and VlanB is a member of VSA.

57

VSA + VlanB

Profile with any COS(dot1d, IP, dscp).

58

VSA + VlanB + dot1dC

Profile with VSA + dot1dC classifiers and dot1d value matches.

59

VSA + VlanB + dot1dC

Profile with VSA classifier. Profile with VSA +IP or dscp classifiers.

60

VSA + VlanB + dot1dC

Profile with VSA + VlanB + dot1dC classifiers and dot1d value matches.

61

VSA + VlanB + dot1dC

Profile with VSA + VlanB classifiers. Profile with VSA + VlanB + IP or dscp classifiers.

62

VSA + VlanB + dot1dC

Profile with VlanB +dot1dC classifiers and VlanB is a member of VSA and dot1d value matches.

63

VSA + VlanB + dot1dC

Profile with VlanB classifier and VlanB is a member of VSA. Profile with VlanB + IP or dscp classifiers and VlanB is a member of VSA.

64

VSA + VlanB + dot1dC

Profile with IP or dscp classifier.

65

VSA + VlanB + dot1dC

Profile with dot1dC and dot1d value matches.

66

VSA + VlanB + IPC

Profile with VSA +IPC classifiers and IP value matches.

67

VSA + VlanB + IPC

Profile with VSA classifier. Profile with VSA +dot1d or dscp classifiers.

68

VSA + VlanB + IPC

Profile with VSA + VlanB + IPC classifiers and IP value matches.

69

VSA + VlanB + IPC

Profile with VSA + VlanB classifiers. Profile with VSA + VlanB + dot1d or dscp classifiers.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

Error codes 17-7 Table 17-1 Traffic profiling error codes 70

VSA + VlanB + IPC

Profile with VlanB +IPC classifiers and VlanB is a member of VSA and IP value matches.

71

VSA + VlanB + IPC

Profile with VlanB classifier and VlanB is a member of VSA. Profile with VlanB + dot1d or dscp classifiers and VlanB is a member of VSA.

72

VSA + VlanB + IPC

Profile with dot1d or dscp classifier.

73

VSA + VlanB + IPC

Profile with IPC and IP value matches.

74

VSA + VlanB + dscpC

Profile with VSA + dscpC classifiers and dscp value matches.

75

VSA + VlanB + dscpC

Profile with VSA classifier. Profile with VSA +IP or dot1d classifiers.

76

VSA + VlanB + dscpC

Profile with VSA + VlanB + dscpC classifiers and dscp value matches.

77

VSA + VlanB + dscpC

Profile with VSA + VlanB classifiers. Profile with VSA + VlanB + IP or dot1d classifiers.

78

VSA + VlanB + dscpC

Profile with VlanB +dscpC classifiers and VlanB is a member of VSA and dscp value matches.

79

VSA + VlanB + dscpC

Profile with VlanB classifier and VlanB is a member of VSA. Profile with VlanB + IP or dot1d classifiers and VlanB is a member of VSA.

80

VSA + VlanB + dscpC

Profile with IP or dot1d classifier.

81

VSA + VlanB + dscpC

Profile with dscpC and dscp value matches.

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

17-8 Error codes

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches SAOS 6.12 Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation

Configuration 009-3240-008 Standard Revision A May 2014

39XX/51XX Service Delivery and Aggregation Switches Configuration Copyright© 2012-2014 Ciena® Corporation. All rights reserved. SAOS 6.12 Publication: 009-3240-008 Document status: Standard Revision A Document release date: May 2014 CONTACT CIENA For additional information, office locations, and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena web site at www.ciena.com

More Documents from "Reno Tk"